From cd65f8ee7a9592faf1c474b29dc1e8664485aef2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 19:05:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 001/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index ed0bd33bbb..81ebb91db1 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵν GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is a metonym. Alternate translation: “I confronted him in person” or “I challenged his actions in person” or “I opposed him in front of everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face Paul is describing seeing **Cephas** in person by association with his face, which Paul would see when he was near him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])Here, **face** is a metonym. Alternate translation: “I confronted him in person” or “I challenged his actions in person” or “I opposed him in front of everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision Here, **those from the circumcision** represents Jews who had become Christians, but who demanded that those who believe in Christ live according to Jewish customs like circumcision. GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” or “avoided” From 24c14fbea7694d9bfcefedd36ce7028081897527 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 19:16:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 002/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 81ebb91db1..a9c0388144 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** h GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face Paul is describing seeing **Cephas** in person by association with his face, which Paul would see when he was near him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])Here, **face** is a metonym. Alternate translation: “I confronted him in person” or “I challenged his actions in person” or “I opposed him in front of everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision Here, **those from the circumcision** represents Jews who had become Christians, but who demanded that those who believe in Christ live according to Jewish customs like circumcision. GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” or “avoided” From f55903059051c4f30374e5572d392520562d39d0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 19:22:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 003/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a9c0388144..447318a326 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -178,6 +178,7 @@ GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵν GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face Paul is describing seeing **Cephas** in person by association with his face, which Paul would see when he was near him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])Here, **face** is a metonym. Alternate translation: “I confronted him in person” or “I challenged his actions in person” or “I opposed him in front of everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 6e0c840c2401107e50c73948447ebc9747cf4075 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 19:37:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 004/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 447318a326..ae9c2d7541 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** h GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face Paul is describing seeing **Cephas** in person by association with his face, which Paul would see when he was near him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])Here, **face** is a metonym. Alternate translation: “I confronted him in person” or “I challenged his actions in person” or “I opposed him in front of everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision Here, **those from the circumcision** represents Jews who had become Christians, but who demanded that those who believe in Christ live according to Jewish customs like circumcision. From b4d5e0f02226bea11ac95435d83498dcb8262d13 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 19:55:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 005/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index ae9c2d7541..d1d1b67223 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -178,8 +178,9 @@ GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵν GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** is in contrast to what was expected, that Peter’s actions would align with the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Instead, . Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision Here, **those from the circumcision** represents Jews who had become Christians, but who demanded that those who believe in Christ live according to Jewish customs like circumcision. From afa11329c8fed6fb4cd7b6d3c37f4c59907c1d4c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 20:01:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 006/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d1d1b67223..f194b1dcd0 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵν GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** is in contrast to what was expected, that Peter’s actions would align with the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Instead, . Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md) and therefore what follows the word **But** is in contrast to what was expected, that Peter’s actions would align with the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 16141645e74077e9c15f5182b12646c18c46e433 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 20:04:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 007/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f194b1dcd0..298ef69c55 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵν GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md) and therefore what follows the word **But** is in contrast to what was expected, that Peter’s actions would align with the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). What follows the word **But** is in contrast to what was expected, that Peter’s actions would align with the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From a8941c756e5c702ef6e8c0377bc468fd6afd4e45 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 20:06:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 008/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 298ef69c55..61a9aa6135 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵν GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). What follows the word **But** is in contrast to what was expected, that Peter’s actions would align with the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From e842085115e9adc8d8e42804d37dfcea254d042c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 14:43:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 009/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 1af20f2596..4daf13c95f 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1137,8 +1137,7 @@ MAT 16 10 b11x translate-numbers τῶν τετρακισχιλίων 1 of the 4 MAT 16 11 mb2z figs-rquestion πῶς οὐ νοεῖτε, ὅτι οὐ περὶ ἄρτων εἶπον ὑμῖν? 1 How do you not understand that I did not speak to you about bread? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should have understood that I was not really speaking about bread.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 16 11 i7x6 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων 1 the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees Here, **yeast** represents evil ideas and wrong teaching. Translate as “yeast” and do not explain the meaning in your translation. In 16:12 the disciples will understand the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 12 f73l συνῆκαν 1 they understood Here, **they** refer to the disciples. -MAT 16 13 e5cm 0 Connecting Statement: Here the scene shifts to a later time. Jesus asks his disciples if they understand who he is. -MAT 16 13 pye3 δὲ 1 Now **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line or to introduce a new person. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 16 13 e5cm writing-newevent δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 16 13 e1jh figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 16 16 n5wi guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the Son of the living God **Son** is an important title for Jesus that shows his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 16 16 r1h7 τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 of the living God Here, **living** contrasts the God of Israel to all the false gods and idols that people worshiped. Only the God of Israel is alive and has power to act. From e69b6071172c48f2535fe6afc658ecf68425b54b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 16:25:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 010/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 61a9aa6135..52b2d94978 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -182,6 +182,7 @@ GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** int GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision Here, **those from the circumcision** represents Jews who had become Christians, but who demanded that those who believe in Christ live according to Jewish customs like circumcision. GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” or “avoided” From 6b420f92293a0d5360c1111a3c38e49b1c76f965 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 16:34:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 012/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 52b2d94978..3b77a34c1d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision Here, **those from the circumcision** represents Jews who had become Christians, but who demanded that those who believe in Christ live according to Jewish customs like circumcision. +GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” or “avoided” GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From c832bb3884b195d03711291a1ac2c1b6d09f6f2f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 16:35:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 013/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 3b77a34c1d..c2930b8985 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ GAL 2 7 vlpz figs-activepassive πεπίστευμαι 1 If your language does GAL 2 7 m5e5 figs-metonymy ἀκροβυστίας, καθὼς Πέτρος τῆς περιτομῆς 1 Paul is describing non-Jewish people by association with something they would not have had done to them, circumcision, and he is describing Jewish people by association with something they would have had done to them, circumcision. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 8 tmva ὁ γὰρ ἐνεργήσας Πέτρῳ εἰς ἀποστολὴν τῆς περιτομῆς, ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 This entire verse is a parenthetical statement. In this verse Paul gives the reason why the leaders of the church in Jerusalem determined that Paul was authorized and commissioned by God to bring the gospel to non-Jews. Use a natural form in your language for introducing and/or expressing a parenthetical statement. GAL 2 8 yh9s figs-explicit ὁ 1 Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 8 e5wv τῆς περιτομῆς 1 See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). +GAL 2 8 e5wv figs-metonymy τῆς περιτομῆς 1 See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 8 n1b6 figs-ellipsis ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “also worked in me for apostleship to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 9 qfp1 figs-abstractnouns γνόντες τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι 1 The abstract noun *grace** refers to God graciously giving Paul the task of proclaiming the gospel to non-Jews. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “graciously” or “kindly” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having understood the task that God had graciously given to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 9 dt40 figs-activepassive τὴν δοθεῖσάν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 14981f363ce67399e04b68935e7e0000cec0dc38 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 16:42:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 014/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c2930b8985..11dc6b9100 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 12 fy79 τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). +GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” or “avoided” GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 5d3fd866a0ec778ef721ee5a00915643eac0efe2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 18:08:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 015/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 11dc6b9100..5af7340c0c 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -182,9 +182,10 @@ GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** int GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 12 yeeb γὰρ 1 GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision The reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was afraid that these men who required circumcision would judge that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” or “avoided” GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 051ff87104a955311bbc71372e7efa9518a04dc6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 18:09:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 016/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5af7340c0c..e0d7ff610c 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ GAL 2 12 yeeb γὰρ 1 GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” or “avoided” +GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” From 0e61981283c28a5a7c29183d1a55d0ffda8c3876 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 18:12:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 017/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index e0d7ff610c..4df08934db 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -184,9 +184,9 @@ GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 yeeb γὰρ 1 GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” +GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” From 515a0d69065e74e31be51182eee65d1893bb2ddc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 18:23:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 018/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 4df08934db..41cea3610a 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -184,6 +184,7 @@ GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 yeeb γὰρ 1 GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From a767d91e9448e5f06c0bf9164ed9f8efb9d99ccc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 18:58:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 019/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 41cea3610a..5f0f019432 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -188,6 +188,7 @@ GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” From 5050d348fd02350480890bbf0e4d823a3160d6b5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 19:13:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 020/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5f0f019432..41bd17ddba 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” From 28d1d7b86e425a5ba1bf10cd1555bf4a47277bcc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 19:36:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 021/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 41bd17ddba..2b946b8091 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -188,6 +188,7 @@ GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 5dd3e182cb58703700a2ae0f5b144aee3832b1b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 19:37:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 022/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2b946b8091..3d6dd6e6ff 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate transl GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” From 71be538e2c3cc386d80e33ddbe526958a47fc323 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 19:51:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 023/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 3d6dd6e6ff..2722c1bea2 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -189,6 +189,7 @@ GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate transl GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 51be10e0db6832e7b9e36caff0671d063db1f7e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 20:00:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 024/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2722c1bea2..c97b4e1eec 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -190,6 +190,7 @@ GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομ GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 02e7b6694a4fb02c25d679b9f37ac19cd3c56a20 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 20:05:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 025/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c97b4e1eec..53bda05ba8 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -188,6 +188,7 @@ GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 13 urwh figs-explicit οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 1b11a122c1abf12b6ceaac4b9c452f902f9ea200 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 20:05:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 026/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 53bda05ba8..6bff19f817 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -GAL 2 13 urwh figs-explicit οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 13 urwh figs-explicit οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 0b0944d8d0037399c24a2c3b87d51557aa5abc11 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 20:56:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 027/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6bff19f817..851b18cf1a 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρί GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” -GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? This rhetorical question is a rebuke and can be translated as a statement. The word **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “you are wrong to force the Gentiles to live like Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From eaea527490058dba4149c025995da829e12dd2da Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 20:59:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 028/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 851b18cf1a..6f1d58264d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so th GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living like people who believe the true gospel” or “they were not obeying the true gospel” +GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living correctly” GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From a261bb20358b32bbcde554ea9d2416e8f682b46b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 21:08:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 029/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6f1d58264d..b2652f6b44 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so th GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 sg53 οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Alternate translation: “they were not living correctly” +GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 178a1a108ee6a82ca31d111ba58036a45b01c22f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2022 21:29:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 030/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b2652f6b44..b38e23f5fd 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -194,6 +194,7 @@ GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρί GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From cf948e8d30dd33b0d57b485894ed46aa849e07c6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 10:54:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 031/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 22 +++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 4daf13c95f..58073521f0 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1138,19 +1138,19 @@ MAT 16 11 mb2z figs-rquestion πῶς οὐ νοεῖτε, ὅτι οὐ περ MAT 16 11 i7x6 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων 1 the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees Here, **yeast** represents evil ideas and wrong teaching. Translate as “yeast” and do not explain the meaning in your translation. In 16:12 the disciples will understand the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 12 f73l συνῆκαν 1 they understood Here, **they** refer to the disciples. MAT 16 13 e5cm writing-newevent δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 16 13 e1jh figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 16 13 e1jh figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 16 16 n5wi guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the Son of the living God **Son** is an important title for Jesus that shows his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 16 16 r1h7 τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 of the living God Here, **living** contrasts the God of Israel to all the false gods and idols that people worshiped. Only the God of Israel is alive and has power to act. -MAT 16 17 le6a translate-names Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ 1 Simon Bar Jonah Alternate translation: “Simon son of Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 16 17 dfw5 figs-synecdoche σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 flesh and blood did not reveal this Here, **flesh and blood** refers to a human being. Alternate translation: “a human did not reveal this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 16 17 wix3 οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 did not reveal this Here, **this** refers to Peter’s statement that Jesus is the Christ and the Son of the Living God. -MAT 16 17 v5lw figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 but my Father who is in the heavens You can make the understood information explicit. Alternate translation: “but it was my Father in the heavens who revealed this to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 16 16 r1h7 figs-explicit τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 of the living God Here, Peter uses the phrase **living God** to speaking about God as if he is alive. This is to contrast God as the only true God with the other gods who are not real, and thus dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the only true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 16 17 yh0s grammar-connect-logic-result μακάριος εἶ, Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ, ὅτι σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since flesh and blood did not reveal this to you, but my Father who is in heaven, you are blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MAT 16 17 le6a translate-names Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ 1 Simon Bar Jonah The word **Bar** here is another way of saying "son of". If it would be helpful in your language, could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “son of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 16 17 g8s5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MAT 16 17 dfw5 figs-synecdoche σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 flesh and blood did not reveal this Jesus is using **flesh and blood** to represent a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 16 17 wix3 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 did not reveal this The pronoun **this** refers to Peter's pronouncement in the previous phrase about Jesus being the Christ, the Son of the living God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “did not reveal to you that I am the Christ, the Son of the living God” or “did not give you the knowledge to say this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 16 17 v5lw figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 but my Father who is in the heavens Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but my Father in the heavens revealed it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 16 17 gi3l guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 16 18 z897 κἀγὼ δέ σοι λέγω 1 And I also say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MAT 16 18 th3d figs-explicit σὺ εἶ Πέτρος 1 you are Peter The name **Peter** means “rock.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 16 18 x43d figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 upon this rock I will build my church Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. The phrase **this rock** could represent: (1) Peter. (2) the truth that Peter had just said in [16:16](../16/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 18 vu9u figs-metonymy πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 the gates of Hades will not prevail against it Here, **Hades** represents death, and its **gates** represent its power. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 18 l6o0 figs-metaphor πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 the gates of Hades will not prevail against it Here, **Hades** is spoken of as if it were a city surrounded by walls with gates that keep dead people in and other people out. This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying the powers of death will not overcome his church. (2) Jesus is saying his church will break down the power of death the way an army breaks into a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 18 z897 translate-names ὅτι σὺ εἶ Πέτρος, καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 And I also say to you Here, Jesus uses the imagery of **Peter** as a **rock**. The name **Peter** comes from the word **rock**. It might be helpful to state this explicitly in your language to make this imagery and wordplay clear to your readers. See how this is demonstrated in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 16 18 x43d figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 upon this rock I will build my church Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. The phrase **this rock** could represent: (1) Peter himself. Alternate translation: “upon you, this rock” or (2) the truth that Peter had just said in [16:16](../16/16.md). Alternate translation: “upon what you have said, which is like a foundation of rock” If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 18 vu9u figs-metonymy πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 the gates of Hades will not prevail against it Jesus is using the term **Hades** to mean death. He is using the term **gate** to mean the power which death holds over people. Once a gate is shut, people can no longer leave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the imprisoning power of death will not overpower it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 16 19 ysk8 figs-you δώσω σοι 1 I will give to you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 16 19 pp5d figs-metaphor τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the keys of the kingdom of the heavens Keys are objects that are used to lock or unlock doors. Here they represent authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 19 kc3k figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens This refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in the book of Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 20204c072b5c5a6c6a89b59f0929a5aff0469fdd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 13:53:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 032/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b38e23f5fd..e597eca158 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -196,6 +196,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” +GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 4dbf68f31469277ccebd25af42b9a89f4c0faf32 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 13:54:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 033/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index e597eca158..c528964eca 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” -GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From b423ababef4319ed40732a2f1f639d6358b0e164 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 14:12:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 034/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c528964eca..28debfc52e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -193,9 +193,10 @@ GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so th GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Peter, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” +GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From a6f0c8aeb7f945caac383194e153cd3edf280fe5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 14:12:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 035/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 28debfc52e..29383f3845 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so th GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Peter, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Peter, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From c9f09a63352c3d38fefe2ae0b40d412ad5571c66 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 14:38:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 036/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 29383f3845..982d870d27 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -193,11 +193,12 @@ GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so th GAL 2 13 iau6 figs-explicit συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Peter, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We**, he is not including the Galatian believers, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From f5e7642d033775708cb329c98fe864b456655fec Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 15:23:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 037/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 982d870d27..754aa0d880 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -199,6 +199,7 @@ GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγε GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We**, he is not including the Galatian believers, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From f78696ef101969c7ec1ed18220624a089e280972 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 19:24:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 038/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 754aa0d880..9d9c0e645c 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -196,6 +196,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We**, he is not including the Galatian believers, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 26bf801ca90ee21eba6b737600a5f61787ffd431 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 19:32:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 039/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 9d9c0e645c..58f13f7f6d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. This quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) is a direct quote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We**, he is not including the Galatian believers, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 675dcd68eea2f0eb58c91e68c7baee3d39e85bcc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 20 Oct 2022 20:57:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 040/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 58f13f7f6d..b980be5a99 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -195,10 +195,11 @@ GAL 2 13 v4cj figs-activepassive καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη α GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. This quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) is a direct quote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We**, he is not including the Galatian believers, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” From b3bc4295ea1fb8dd5e2d35b9037fbaddb9e4a4bf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 21 Oct 2022 11:51:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 041/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 57 ++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 1 file changed, 26 insertions(+), 31 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 58073521f0..c38139e00d 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά 1 Seven, and a few small fish The discipl MAT 15 36 a9s4 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 was giving them Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples were giving them to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men Alternate translation: “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). +MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Yeast\n\nJesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nJesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Background information\n\nMatthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). MAT 16 1 t7p5 πειράζοντες 1 testing him Here, **testing** is used in a negative sense. Alternate translation: “challenging him” or “wanting to trap him” MAT 16 4 jl3e figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation Jesus is speaking to his present **generation**. Alternate translation: “You are an evil and adulterous generation” See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 16 4 fhx6 figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God. See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). Alternate translation: “An unfaithful generation” or “A godless generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1152,40 +1152,35 @@ MAT 16 18 z897 translate-names ὅτι σὺ εἶ Πέτρος, καὶ ἐπ MAT 16 18 x43d figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 upon this rock I will build my church Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. The phrase **this rock** could represent: (1) Peter himself. Alternate translation: “upon you, this rock” or (2) the truth that Peter had just said in [16:16](../16/16.md). Alternate translation: “upon what you have said, which is like a foundation of rock” If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 18 vu9u figs-metonymy πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 the gates of Hades will not prevail against it Jesus is using the term **Hades** to mean death. He is using the term **gate** to mean the power which death holds over people. Once a gate is shut, people can no longer leave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the imprisoning power of death will not overpower it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 16 19 ysk8 figs-you δώσω σοι 1 I will give to you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 16 19 pp5d figs-metaphor τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the keys of the kingdom of the heavens Keys are objects that are used to lock or unlock doors. Here they represent authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 19 kc3k figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens This refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in the book of Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 19 ef9c figs-metaphor ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται δεδεμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς; καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται λελυμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Here, **bound** is a metaphor meaning to forbid something, and **loosed** is a metaphor meaning to allow something. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 19 dy4p figs-metonymy ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται δεδεμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς; καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται λελυμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Here, **in the heavens** is a metonym that represents God himself. Alternate translation: “God in heaven will approve whatever you forbid or allow on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 21 wl33 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus tells his disciples for the first time that he will die soon. -MAT 16 21 es1l figs-idiom γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day Here, **to be raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 16 21 r5hj figs-activepassive γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. The elders and chief priests would accuse Jesus so that others would kill him. Alternate translation: “scribes. People will then kill him, and on the third day God will make him become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 16 19 pp5d figs-metaphor τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν καὶ 1 the keys of the kingdom of the heavens Here, Jesus is using the term **keys** to refer to someone having authority in God's kingdom. There is some debate about how much authority Peter is given here. (1) Some interpret the second half of the verse describing the authority that Peter is given. Alternate translation: “the keys of the kingdom, so that” (2) Some say that Peter is given authority to decide who can and can not live with God forever. Alternate translation: “authority to decide who can come to live with me forever, and”. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 19 k09j translate-unknown τὰς κλεῖδας 1 Here, **keys** are things used to open a door or gate so that people are able to enter or exit a place. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 16 19 kc3k figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md) +MAT 16 19 ef9c figs-metaphor ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται δεδεμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς; καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται λελυμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Here, **bound** is a metaphor meaning to forbid something, and **loosed** is a metaphor meaning to allow something. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whatever you forbid to happen on the earth, it will be forbidden in heaven. And whatever you allow on the earth, it will be allowed in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 19 dy4p figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς…ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 2 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Jesus is using the phrase **in the heavens** to mean God himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by God … by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 16 21 wl33 figs-litany εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπελθεῖν, καὶ πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καὶ ἀρχιερέων, καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι\n 1 Connecting Statement: Is this a litany? +MAT 16 21 yile grammar-connect-time-sequential εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπελθεῖν, καὶ πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καὶ ἀρχιερέων, καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 Here, Jesus predicts that **to go to Jerusalem**, **to suffer much from the elders and chief priests and scribes**, **to be killed**, **to be raised on the third day** will happen one after another. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem. Then, to suffer much from the elders and the chief priests and the scribes. Then to be killed and to be raised afterwards on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MAT 16 21 es1l figs-idiom γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day Here, **to be raised** is an idiom that means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 21 r5hj figs-activepassive γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will raise me on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 16 21 jjx5 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day The word **third** is the ordinal form of “three.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MAT 16 22 jie2 writing-background καὶ προσλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ὁ Πέτρος 1 And having taken him aside, Peter Jesus tells them for the first time that he will die soon in verse [21](../16/21.md). He will tell them the same thing many times after this first time. It is after this first time that **Peter** takes Jesus **aside**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MAT 16 22 q31h προσλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ὁ Πέτρος 1 having taken him aside, Peter Alternate translation: “Peter spoke to Jesus when no one else could hear them and” -MAT 16 22 guz8 figs-idiom ἵλεώς σοι 1 Merciful to you This is an idiom that means “May God be merciful to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 16 23 f28i figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ! σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ 1 Get behind me, Satan! You are a stumbling block to me Jesus means that Peter is acting like **Satan** because Peter is trying to prevent Jesus from accomplishing what God sent him to do. Alternate translation: “Get behind me, because you are acting like Satan! You are a stumbling block to me” or “Get behind me, Satan! I call you Satan because you are a stumbling block to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 23 ax7x ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου 1 Get behind me Alternate translation: “Get away from me” -MAT 16 24 ck1a figs-metaphor ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν 1 to come after me To **come after** Jesus here represents being one of his disciples. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “be one of my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 24 pg9h ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν 1 let him deny himself Alternate translation: “he must not give in to his own desires” or “he must forsake his own desires” -MAT 16 24 h7ug figs-metaphor ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 take up his cross, and follow me To **take up** a **cross** represents being willing to suffer and die. Alternate translation: “obey me even to the point of suffering and dying” or “he must obey me even to the point of suffering and dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 24 v6n7 figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 take up his cross, and follow me The **cross** represents suffering and death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 24 x13v figs-metaphor καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 and follow me To **follow** Jesus here represents obeying him. Alternate translation: “and obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 25 y9kc figs-metaphor ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 will lose it This does not mean the person must necessarily die. It is a metaphor that means the person who considers his own life as being more important than obeying Jesus will not attain spiritual life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 25 ie7t ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ 1 for my sake Alternate translation: “because he trusts me” or “on my account” or “because of me” -MAT 16 25 xz98 figs-metaphor εὑρήσει αὐτήν 1 will find it This metaphor means the person will experience spiritual life with God. Alternate translation: “will find true life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 26 eqe8 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ὠφεληθήσεται ἄνθρωπος, ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ζημιωθῇ? 1 For what will it profit a man if he would have gained the whole world but would have forfeited his life? Jesus uses a question to teach his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It does not profit a man to gain the whole world if he forfeits his life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 16 26 q7x1 figs-hyperbole ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ 1 if he would have gained the whole world The words **the whole world** are an exaggeration for great riches. Alternate translation: “if he would gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MAT 16 26 b34q τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ζημιωθῇ 1 but would have forfeited his life Alternate translation: “but he would lose his life” -MAT 16 26 eck5 figs-rquestion ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 Or what will a man give in exchange for his life? Jesus uses a question to teach his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There is nothing that a person can give to regain his life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 16 22 guz8 figs-idiom ἵλεώς σοι 1 Merciful to you Here, **Merciful to you** is an idiom that means "May God be merciful to you". If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “May God be merciful to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 23 f28i figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ! σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ 1 Get behind me, Satan! You are a stumbling block to me Here, Jesus calls Peter **Satan**. This is because he is behaving as Satan behaved by trying to get Jesus not to obey God. He also calls him a **stumbling block**, which is a rock which someone might trip over. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are acting like Satan! Get out of my sight! You are like a stumbling block to me, trying to get me to disobey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 24 t0zn figs-genericnoun εἴ τις θέλει 1 The word **anyone** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 16 24 ck1a figs-metaphor ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν 1 to come after me Here, **to come after me** is an idiom that means to be Jesus' disciple. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 24 pg9h figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 let him deny himself The cross here represents suffering and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he must be willing to suffer and die for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 16 25 tp9k figs-genericnoun ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ 1 By using the word whoever, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 16 25 y9kc figs-euphemism ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 will lose it Here, lose it is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will forfeit his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MAT 16 25 xz98 figs-metaphor εὑρήσει αὐτήν 1 will find it Here, **find it** means to obtain life with God forever. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will live with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 26 eqe8 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ὠφεληθήσεται ἄνθρωπος, ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ζημιωθῇ? 1 For what will it profit a man if he would have gained the whole world but would have forfeited his life? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 16 26 g0xo figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Jesus is using the phrase a man here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 16 26 q7x1 figs-hyperbole ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ 1 if he would have gained the whole world The phrase the whole world is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches and fame. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MAT 16 26 eck5 figs-rquestion ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 Or what will a man give in exchange for his life? Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n MAT 16 27 iyu1 figs-123person μέλλει…ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…αὐτοῦ…ἀποδώσει 1 the Son of Man is about … his … he will repay Here Jesus refers to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of man, am about … my … I will repay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 16 27 ie16 μέλλει…ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 is about to come in the glory of his Father Alternate translation: “will come, having the same glory as his Father,” -MAT 16 27 k4q4 figs-123person μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων αὐτοῦ 1 with his angels If you translate the first part of the sentence with Jesus speaking in the first person, you can translate this as “and my Father’s angels will be with me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 16 27 vk5y guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 of his Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and the Son of Man, Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 16 27 i7rs κατὰ τὴν πρᾶξιν αὐτοῦ 1 according to his actions Alternate translation: “according to what each person has done” -MAT 16 28 ytr3 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 16 28 k2d1 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 to you Here, **you** is plural and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 may certainly not have tasted death Here, **tasted** means to experience. Alternate translation: “will not have experienced death” or “will still be alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 16 28 b2pb figs-metonymy ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 until they may see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom Here, **his kingdom** represents him being King. Alternate translation: “until they see the Son of Man coming as King” or “until they see the evidence that the Son of Man is King” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 may certainly not have tasted death The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n\n +MAT 16 28 p1d4 figs-abstractnouns θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun death by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 16 28 b2pb figs-metonymy ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 until they may see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom Jesus is using the term **coming in his kingdom** to mean when Jesus will come to rule over his people forever. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “until they see the Son of Man coming to rule over his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 16 28 etk2 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus’ body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]]) MAT 17 1 u6dw 0 General Information: This begins the account of Jesus’ transfiguration. MAT 17 1 nva7 τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Peter, James, and John his brother Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and James’s brother John” From 54b854a2ee3c77acf3527c16dc48985ab4687f68 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 10:19:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 042/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 27 +++++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index c38139e00d..8e5b05b885 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1120,27 +1120,26 @@ MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4, MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Yeast\n\nJesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nJesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Background information\n\nMatthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). MAT 16 1 t7p5 πειράζοντες 1 testing him Here, **testing** is used in a negative sense. Alternate translation: “challenging him” or “wanting to trap him” -MAT 16 4 jl3e figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation Jesus is speaking to his present **generation**. Alternate translation: “You are an evil and adulterous generation” See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 16 4 fhx6 figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God. See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). Alternate translation: “An unfaithful generation” or “A godless generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 4 d9eq figs-activepassive σημεῖον…οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 2 a sign will not be given to it Jesus would not give them **a sign** because, though he had already performed many miracles, they refused to believe him. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). Alternate translation: “I will not give it a sign” or “God will not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 16 4 jl3e figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 16 4 fhx6 figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God. See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 4 d9eq figs-activepassive σημεῖον…οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 2 a sign will not be given to it Jesus would not give them **a sign** because, though he had already performed many miracles, they refused to believe him. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will not give it a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 16 4 dep2 εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ 1 except the sign of Jonah See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). Alternate translation: “except the same sign God gave to Jonah the prophet” -MAT 16 5 ii6j 0 Connecting Statement: Here the scene shifts to a later time. Jesus uses an opportunity to warn his disciples about the Pharisees and Sadducees. -MAT 16 5 si9k figs-ellipsis τὸ πέραν 1 the other side You can make clear the understood information. Alternate translation: “the other side of the lake” or “the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 16 6 hfz2 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων 1 the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees Here, **yeast** is a metaphor that refers to evil ideas and wrong teaching. Translate as **yeast** here and do not explain its meaning in your translation. This meaning will be made clear in 16:12. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 7 huw7 διελογίζοντο ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 were reasoning among themselves Alternate translation: “were discussing this with each other” or “were thinking about this” -MAT 16 8 mg8s ὀλιγόπιστοι 1 You of little faith Jesus addresses his disciples this way because their concern about not bringing bread shows they have **little faith** in Jesus to provide for them. See how you translated this in [6:30](../06/30.md). Alternate translation: “You who have such little faith” -MAT 16 8 zz4i figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ὀλιγόπιστοι, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? 1 why do you reason among yourselves that it is because you do not have bread? Jesus uses this question to rebuke his disciples for not understanding what he just said. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you think it was because you forgot to bring bread that I talked about the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 16 9 h5bg figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ μνημονεύετε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους τῶν πεντακισχιλίων, καὶ πόσους κοφίνους ἐλάβετε? 1 Do you not yet perceive nor remember the five loaves of the 5,000, and how many baskets you gathered up? Jesus uses a question to rebuke the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you remember the five loaves of the 5,000, and how many baskets you gathered up!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 16 5 ii6j writing-newevent 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **and** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 16 5 si9k figs-ellipsis τὸ πέραν 1 the other side Matthew is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 16 6 hfz2 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων 1 the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees Here, **yeast** is a metaphor that refers to evil ideas and wrong teaching. Translate it as **yeast** here and do not explain its meaning in your translation. This meaning will be made clear in [16:12](../16/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 8 mg8s ὀλιγόπιστοι 1 You of little faith 2See how you translated this in [6:30](../06/30.md). +MAT 16 8 zz4i figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ὀλιγόπιστοι, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? 1 why do you reason among yourselves that it is because you do not have bread? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you think it was because you forgot to bring bread that I talked about the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 16 9 h5bg figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ μνημονεύετε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους τῶν πεντακισχιλίων, καὶ πόσους κοφίνους ἐλάβετε? 1 Do you not yet perceive nor remember the five loaves of the 5,000, and how many baskets you gathered up? Jesus uses a question to rebuke his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you remember the five loaves of the 5,000, and how many baskets you gathered up!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 16 9 ux51 translate-numbers τῶν πεντακισχιλίων 1 of the 5,000 Alternate translation: “of the five thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 16 10 ejm5 figs-rquestion οὐδὲ τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους τῶν τετρακισχιλίων, καὶ πόσας σπυρίδας ἐλάβετε? 1 Or the seven loaves of the 4,000, and how many baskets you took up? Jesus uses a question to rebuke his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you also remember the seven loaves of the 4,000, and how many baskets you took up!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 16 10 b11x translate-numbers τῶν τετρακισχιλίων 1 of the 4,000 Alternate translation: “of the four thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 16 11 mb2z figs-rquestion πῶς οὐ νοεῖτε, ὅτι οὐ περὶ ἄρτων εἶπον ὑμῖν? 1 How do you not understand that I did not speak to you about bread? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should have understood that I was not really speaking about bread.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 16 11 i7x6 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων 1 the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees Here, **yeast** represents evil ideas and wrong teaching. Translate as “yeast” and do not explain the meaning in your translation. In 16:12 the disciples will understand the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 12 f73l συνῆκαν 1 they understood Here, **they** refer to the disciples. +MAT 16 11 i7x6 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων 1 the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees Here, **yeast** represents evil ideas and wrong teaching. Translate as “yeast” here and do not explain the meaning in your translation. In the next verse, Jesus will tell the disciples the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 12 f73l writing-pronouns συνῆκαν 1 they understood The pronoun **they** refers to the disciples. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 16 13 e5cm writing-newevent δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 16 13 e1jh figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 16 16 n5wi guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the Son of the living God **Son** is an important title for Jesus that shows his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 16 16 r1h7 figs-explicit τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 of the living God Here, Peter uses the phrase **living God** to speaking about God as if he is alive. This is to contrast God as the only true God with the other gods who are not real, and thus dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the only true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 16 16 n5wi guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the Son of the living God ddddddd**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 16 16 r1h7 figs-explicit τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 of the living God Here, Peter uses the phrase **living God** to speaking about God as if he is alive. This is to contrast God as the only true God with the other gods who are not real. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the only true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 16 17 yh0s grammar-connect-logic-result μακάριος εἶ, Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ, ὅτι σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since flesh and blood did not reveal this to you, but my Father who is in heaven, you are blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 16 17 le6a translate-names Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ 1 Simon Bar Jonah The word **Bar** here is another way of saying "son of". If it would be helpful in your language, could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “son of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 16 17 g8s5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) From f2e1eb46261219093c292c5104e9d9a6f598cba2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 11:01:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 043/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 23 +++++++++++------------ 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 8e5b05b885..98226be8b9 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1146,21 +1146,20 @@ MAT 16 17 g8s5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐ MAT 16 17 dfw5 figs-synecdoche σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 flesh and blood did not reveal this Jesus is using **flesh and blood** to represent a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 16 17 wix3 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 did not reveal this The pronoun **this** refers to Peter's pronouncement in the previous phrase about Jesus being the Christ, the Son of the living God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “did not reveal to you that I am the Christ, the Son of the living God” or “did not give you the knowledge to say this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 16 17 v5lw figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 but my Father who is in the heavens Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but my Father in the heavens revealed it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 16 17 gi3l guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 16 18 z897 translate-names ὅτι σὺ εἶ Πέτρος, καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 And I also say to you Here, Jesus uses the imagery of **Peter** as a **rock**. The name **Peter** comes from the word **rock**. It might be helpful to state this explicitly in your language to make this imagery and wordplay clear to your readers. See how this is demonstrated in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 16 18 x43d figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 upon this rock I will build my church Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. The phrase **this rock** could represent: (1) Peter himself. Alternate translation: “upon you, this rock” or (2) the truth that Peter had just said in [16:16](../16/16.md). Alternate translation: “upon what you have said, which is like a foundation of rock” If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 18 vu9u figs-metonymy πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 the gates of Hades will not prevail against it Jesus is using the term **Hades** to mean death. He is using the term **gate** to mean the power which death holds over people. Once a gate is shut, people can no longer leave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the imprisoning power of death will not overpower it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 16 17 gi3l guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 16 18 z897 translate-names ὅτι σὺ εἶ Πέτρος, καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 And I also say to you Here, Jesus uses the imagery of **Peter** as a **rock**. The name **Peter** means **rock**. It might be helpful to state this explicitly in your language to make this imagery and wordplay clear to your readers. See how this is demonstrated in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 16 18 x43d figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 upon this rock I will build my church Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. The phrase **this rock** could represent: (1) Peter himself. Alternate translation: “upon this rock, which is you” or (2) the truth that Peter had just said in [16:16](../16/16.md). Alternate translation: “upon what you have said, which is like a foundation of rock” If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 18 vu9u figs-metonymy πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 the gates of Hades will not prevail against it Jesus is using the term **Hades** to mean death. He is using the term **gate** to mean the power which death has over people. Once a gate is shut, people can no longer leave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the imprisoning power of death will not overpower it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 16 19 ysk8 figs-you δώσω σοι 1 I will give to you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 16 19 pp5d figs-metaphor τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν καὶ 1 the keys of the kingdom of the heavens Here, Jesus is using the term **keys** to refer to someone having authority in God's kingdom. There is some debate about how much authority Peter is given here. (1) Some interpret the second half of the verse describing the authority that Peter is given. Alternate translation: “the keys of the kingdom, so that” (2) Some say that Peter is given authority to decide who can and can not live with God forever. Alternate translation: “authority to decide who can come to live with me forever, and”. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 19 k09j translate-unknown τὰς κλεῖδας 1 Here, **keys** are things used to open a door or gate so that people are able to enter or exit a place. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 16 19 kc3k figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md) +MAT 16 19 pp5d figs-metaphor τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν καὶ 1 the keys of the kingdom of the heavens Here, Jesus is using the term **keys** to refer to someone having authority in God's kingdom. There is some debate about how much authority Peter is given here. (1) Some interpret the second half of the verse describing the authority that Peter is given. Alternate translation: “the keys of the kingdom, so that” (2) Some say that Peter is given authority to decide who can and can not live with God forever. Alternate translation: “authority to decide who can come to live with me forever, and”. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 19 k09j translate-unknown τὰς κλεῖδας 1 Here, **keys** are things used to open a door or gate so that people are able to enter or exit a place. They can also be used to make it so that a door cannot be opened and the people inside cannot get out. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 16 19 kc3k figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). MAT 16 19 ef9c figs-metaphor ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται δεδεμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς; καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται λελυμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Here, **bound** is a metaphor meaning to forbid something, and **loosed** is a metaphor meaning to allow something. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whatever you forbid to happen on the earth, it will be forbidden in heaven. And whatever you allow on the earth, it will be allowed in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 16 19 dy4p figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς…ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 2 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Jesus is using the phrase **in the heavens** to mean God himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by God … by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 21 wl33 figs-litany εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπελθεῖν, καὶ πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καὶ ἀρχιερέων, καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι\n 1 Connecting Statement: Is this a litany? -MAT 16 21 yile grammar-connect-time-sequential εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπελθεῖν, καὶ πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καὶ ἀρχιερέων, καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 Here, Jesus predicts that **to go to Jerusalem**, **to suffer much from the elders and chief priests and scribes**, **to be killed**, **to be raised on the third day** will happen one after another. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem. Then, to suffer much from the elders and the chief priests and the scribes. Then to be killed and to be raised afterwards on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -MAT 16 21 es1l figs-idiom γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day Here, **to be raised** is an idiom that means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 19 dy4p figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς…ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 2 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Jesus is using the phrase **in the heavens** to mean God himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by God who is in the heavens … by God who is in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 16 21 yile grammar-connect-time-sequential εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπελθεῖν, καὶ πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καὶ ἀρχιερέων, καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 Here, Jesus predicts that **to go to Jerusalem**, **to suffer much from the elders and chief priests and scribes**, **to be killed**, **to be raised on the third day** will happen one after another. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem. Then, to suffer much from the elders and the chief priests and the scribes. Then to be killed and afterwards to be raised on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MAT 16 21 es1l figs-idiom ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day Here, **to be raised** is an idiom that means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God will bring back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 21 r5hj figs-activepassive γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will raise me on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 16 21 jjx5 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day The word **third** is the ordinal form of “three.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MAT 16 21 jjx5 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) MAT 16 22 guz8 figs-idiom ἵλεώς σοι 1 Merciful to you Here, **Merciful to you** is an idiom that means "May God be merciful to you". If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “May God be merciful to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 23 f28i figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ! σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ 1 Get behind me, Satan! You are a stumbling block to me Here, Jesus calls Peter **Satan**. This is because he is behaving as Satan behaved by trying to get Jesus not to obey God. He also calls him a **stumbling block**, which is a rock which someone might trip over. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are acting like Satan! Get out of my sight! You are like a stumbling block to me, trying to get me to disobey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 24 t0zn figs-genericnoun εἴ τις θέλει 1 The word **anyone** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) From 22f4b07dd58948d6c49e2e340649407a8fc23e9d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 14:21:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 044/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b980be5a99..d9194c6fe0 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We**, he is not including the Galatian believers, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 84c5cd5ac7aef7ed1b16520cd19a1363ad38d1e4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 14:30:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 045/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d9194c6fe0..ba946be5b2 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 4532c20af5fab226f28859d4377bc55b1a5cbeec Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 14:56:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 046/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index ba946be5b2..f8d8ddf27d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑ GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” -GAL 2 15 tz45 οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The term **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews. Alternate translation: “We are not Gentiles, those people who do not know God” or “We are not people who do not follow the law” +GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have the Law of Moses and did adhere to it. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners** since the rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews as modeled by the UST or state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From f46db54657c16709da3543fd9d4ff76a792787f7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 14:57:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 047/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f8d8ddf27d..8e5a1f661c 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑ GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” -GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have the Law of Moses and did adhere to it. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners** since the rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews as modeled by the UST or state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have the Law of Moses and did adhere to it. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners** since the rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From 929c27cebf57813ad486427757b6b064ebb6a8a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 15:47:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 048/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 8e5a1f661c..5ea01b7775 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑ GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” -GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have the Law of Moses and did adhere to it. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners** since the rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From badea8af99ada69dc61b7e3f21e7d1232e9fc15f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:02:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 049/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5ea01b7775..1e7bc8a85e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -203,6 +203,7 @@ GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From 5808954b8e4c8e07fe2f2a0ec8f26bb0e7cc9a2a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:06:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 050/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 1e7bc8a85e..5a839e2c3b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -205,6 +205,8 @@ GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. From 5b562cb104553cfd6a406ef0a4ccdbc090d1d6ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:07:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 051/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5a839e2c3b..31ef1c370b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From f77d5bbef17184f6f00cd17e5e1a1ce336159777 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:16:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 052/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 31ef1c370b..ca04df7147 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -207,6 +207,7 @@ GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **Bu GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. From facf3791ecdc18ecc0a6fa4e76a6b2114f67b7b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:16:47 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 053/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index ca04df7147..e344c21e89 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) From bec80406b0bc0d142f78444be15d41b63d35cd03 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:26:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 054/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index e344c21e89..85a7ca631b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -204,9 +204,9 @@ GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusi GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -GAL 2 16 j6l1 figs-exclusive εἰδότες 1 we The word **knowing** could refer to: (1) Paul and others, but not the Galatians (exclusive), who were primarily Gentiles (2) Paul and includes the Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου 3 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “REVISIT”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From d7825ee7312dc52f3f23ac3159909d23ca87d8d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:27:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 055/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 85a7ca631b..3cae61a47c 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου 3 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “REVISIT”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “REVISIT”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From e6cdec46b6a90e355f45876f1ab9801d86d08de5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:35:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 056/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 3cae61a47c..857ffd952b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου…ἔργων νόμου If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “REVISIT”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “doing”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From 0419d81ff9fe0684c262b25188e174ce572e4027 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:50:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 057/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 857ffd952b..659ee3c59c 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -207,6 +207,7 @@ GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **Bu GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “doing”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. From 72455c94deae02885be5afe2ea5996357c115267 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:52:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 058/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 659ee3c59c..44b5bf16f6 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “doing”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 653d036819dfcaeaf9286db32bba8f91c2b7ef5f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:54:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 059/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 44b5bf16f6..b5064473c2 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche οὐ…σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 9face629535eca97899ad1115ec01b1696948238 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 16:57:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 060/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b5064473c2..24c6af5182 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 3102f1e6b9451c3146175fdf06fd093559d78e61 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:08:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 061/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 24c6af5182..aee08d8189 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -207,8 +207,11 @@ GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **Bu GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 f it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 +GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. From ba7377461e6422ccd16b9e9e920989282a406572 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:17:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 062/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index aee08d8189..b94ee8eff8 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 17 vnp6 ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of what Christ has done. +GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of believing in what Christ has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and if it would help your readers consider stating explicitly here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. From 505d19d3c0a9c75000658ed8488457eb6d0c9a3d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:19:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 063/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b94ee8eff8..b83629050c 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ and justified by means of believing in what Christ has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and if it would help your readers consider stating explicitly here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. From 586defd25d5b53f1a3eb9dd0022fe3212c923dad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:20:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 064/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b83629050c..9df019ee4d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -214,6 +214,7 @@ GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. From bc0085533f814cee2da56d3ffafc522f42bf589a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:49:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 065/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 9df019ee4d..2c2eb516b3 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -213,6 +213,8 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. +GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. From cca44a2e62e454e2a5d0160b452faa499cd191a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:52:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 066/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2c2eb516b3..12244490e3 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -217,6 +217,8 @@ GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new info GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive 1 When Paul says **we**, he is not including , so **** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. From 1939fac17e4a778f80796362a961633f3c7c8617 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:53:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 067/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 12244490e3..02d0e204a0 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new info GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive 1 When Paul says **we**, he is not including , so **** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is not including , so **** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 63d17c13607286e51abb1fad7d651bb49ca7ee1d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:54:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 068/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 02d0e204a0..3b0a4ea0ec 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive here because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 f it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From ddcb71768d42b45fa4562898e8b99fce41736df3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:54:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 069/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 3b0a4ea0ec..7ccac22393 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new info GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is not including , so **** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 0e3fbd5b4f582f5a525adb8dd466e930956427ff Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:55:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 070/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 7ccac22393..6fb9053752 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 f it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 346831390457ff5fc181fe647cb94bc3d327c52b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:56:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 071/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6fb9053752..ed529afa5e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibil GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. From bb1156fa97acb0c6c16fbe19d3af532927a39649 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:05:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 072/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index ed529afa5e..3fb7684b12 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -220,6 +220,7 @@ GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. +GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From bbc38b949efdd89a6c0bca75ef948ed6eeb2fc74 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:09:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 073/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 3fb7684b12..c42414f345 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “no, never!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” From 72b3c20c38fefc3cc17c7380bdacbf2af7f966bd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:11:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 074/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c42414f345..d351050bf5 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new info GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we our** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 2c176cf37d216c41d391143536bcf695c0456975 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:17:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 076/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d351050bf5..436425f4a6 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -218,7 +218,8 @@ GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibil GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we our** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” From 5b7830eb2b527141083ed2ff5dc20a53a5a165fb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:43:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 077/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 436425f4a6..21fb24ca61 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -225,6 +225,7 @@ GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκ GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” GAL 2 19 r55d figs-rquestion ἐγὼ...νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” GAL 2 19 xg5q figs-rquestion Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. From 3a3181881043957cf67496ea05fb77d272eecce4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:48:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 078/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 21fb24ca61..733419e81e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -225,6 +225,7 @@ GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκ GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 18 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” GAL 2 19 r55d figs-rquestion ἐγὼ...νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” From 40e58ace4170ff70716aa0e3723c9dc9d521dca9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:53:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 079/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 733419e81e..4a768f805b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -221,11 +221,12 @@ GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we our** he GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. +GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. +GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 2 18 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” GAL 2 19 r55d figs-rquestion ἐγὼ...νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” From 521b2b312ee57dae870d37a012d379c24251c689 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2022 18:54:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 080/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 4a768f805b..01224790a8 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If y GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. -GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” From 03629a375c7f9ad49f599195b862f73709a82c4d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 10:01:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 081/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 98226be8b9..11f1813fa4 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1160,25 +1160,25 @@ MAT 16 21 yile grammar-connect-time-sequential εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀ MAT 16 21 es1l figs-idiom ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day Here, **to be raised** is an idiom that means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God will bring back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 21 r5hj figs-activepassive γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will raise me on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 16 21 jjx5 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MAT 16 22 guz8 figs-idiom ἵλεώς σοι 1 Merciful to you Here, **Merciful to you** is an idiom that means "May God be merciful to you". If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “May God be merciful to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 22 guz8 figs-idiom ἵλεώς σοι 1 Merciful to you **Merciful to you** is an idiom that means "May God be merciful to you". If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “May God be merciful to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 23 f28i figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ! σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ 1 Get behind me, Satan! You are a stumbling block to me Here, Jesus calls Peter **Satan**. This is because he is behaving as Satan behaved by trying to get Jesus not to obey God. He also calls him a **stumbling block**, which is a rock which someone might trip over. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are acting like Satan! Get out of my sight! You are like a stumbling block to me, trying to get me to disobey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 24 t0zn figs-genericnoun εἴ τις θέλει 1 The word **anyone** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MAT 16 24 ck1a figs-metaphor ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν 1 to come after me Here, **to come after me** is an idiom that means to be Jesus' disciple. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 16 24 pg9h figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 let him deny himself The cross here represents suffering and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he must be willing to suffer and die for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 25 tp9k figs-genericnoun ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ 1 By using the word whoever, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MAT 16 25 y9kc figs-euphemism ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 will lose it Here, lose it is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will forfeit his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MAT 16 24 ck1a figs-idiom ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν 1 to come after me Here, **to come after me** is an idiom that means to be Jesus' disciple. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 24 pg9h figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 let him deny himself The **cross** here represents suffering and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he must be willing to suffer and die for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 16 25 tp9k figs-genericnoun ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ 1 By using the word **whoever**, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 16 25 y9kc figs-euphemism ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 will lose it Here, **lose** it is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will forfeit his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 16 25 xz98 figs-metaphor εὑρήσει αὐτήν 1 will find it Here, **find it** means to obtain life with God forever. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will live with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 26 eqe8 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ὠφεληθήσεται ἄνθρωπος, ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ζημιωθῇ? 1 For what will it profit a man if he would have gained the whole world but would have forfeited his life? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 16 26 g0xo figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Jesus is using the phrase a man here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -MAT 16 26 q7x1 figs-hyperbole ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ 1 if he would have gained the whole world The phrase the whole world is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches and fame. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MAT 16 26 eck5 figs-rquestion ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 Or what will a man give in exchange for his life? Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n +MAT 16 26 q7x1 figs-hyperbole ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ 1 if he would have gained the whole world The phrase the whole world is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches and fame. Alternate translation: “if he gains everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MAT 16 26 eck5 figs-rquestion ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 Or what will a man give in exchange for his life? Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n MAT 16 27 iyu1 figs-123person μέλλει…ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…αὐτοῦ…ἀποδώσει 1 the Son of Man is about … his … he will repay Here Jesus refers to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of man, am about … my … I will repay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 16 27 vk5y guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 of his Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and the Son of Man, Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 16 28 k2d1 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 to you Here, **you** is plural and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 may certainly not have tasted death The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n\n +MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 may certainly not have tasted death The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n MAT 16 28 p1d4 figs-abstractnouns θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun death by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 16 28 b2pb figs-metonymy ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 until they may see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom Jesus is using the term **coming in his kingdom** to mean when Jesus will come to rule over his people forever. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “until they see the Son of Man coming to rule over his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 28 etk2 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 16 28 etk2 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus’ body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]]) MAT 17 1 u6dw 0 General Information: This begins the account of Jesus’ transfiguration. MAT 17 1 nva7 τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Peter, James, and John his brother Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and James’s brother John” From 290e7b06f3a3f86d645efeb40d6df081478bfb8a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 14:00:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 082/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 01224790a8..2523751b79 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκ GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” -GAL 2 19 r55d figs-rquestion ἐγὼ...νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” +GAL 2 19 r55d figs-rquestion ἐγὼ...διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” GAL 2 19 xg5q figs-rquestion Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From bb28fee6ebec0afff63e0e710c05ca8a2e03848e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 14:01:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 083/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2523751b79..dfebceadfc 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκ GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” -GAL 2 19 r55d figs-rquestion ἐγὼ...διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” +GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ...διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” GAL 2 19 xg5q figs-rquestion Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From d0e2381487c2cd51360ac951cf6279ac450c8096 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 14:02:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 085/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index dfebceadfc..524a9d5c9d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκ GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” -GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ...διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” +GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ...διὰ νόμου νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” GAL 2 19 xg5q figs-rquestion Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 112a95ae74ee021bca9465621a91de910e95a7e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 14:06:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 086/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 524a9d5c9d..2aa193a4ab 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -230,6 +230,7 @@ GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πά GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ...διὰ νόμου νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” +GAL 2 19 yl7y grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he **through the law, died to the law**. The purpose being **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) GAL 2 19 xg5q figs-rquestion Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 0284b565b3c29998eb69e5f828338a339c7f75f6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 14:18:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 087/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2aa193a4ab..7f460a0001 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -229,8 +229,9 @@ GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκ GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” -GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ...διὰ νόμου νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I...died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” +GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ…νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I … died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” GAL 2 19 yl7y grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he **through the law, died to the law**. The purpose being **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +GAL 2 19 l3r9 figs-explicit Θεῷ ζήσω 1 The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “live for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 19 xg5q figs-rquestion Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 63d651a7ad2d66a81a6e991de64b95a6e0884804 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 14:24:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 088/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 7f460a0001..790825f0ec 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -226,13 +226,14 @@ GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκ GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **For if I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ…νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I … died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” GAL 2 19 yl7y grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he **through the law, died to the law**. The purpose being **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) GAL 2 19 l3r9 figs-explicit Θεῷ ζήσω 1 The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “live for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 19 xg5q figs-rquestion Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. +GAL 2 19 xg5q Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean: (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. +GAL 2 19 fh2i figs-activepassive συνεσταύρωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “FILL IN” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) From 5d0bca3cbb43815e2e42a6906b0ce1da8b18dc3e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 14:25:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 089/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 790825f0ec..7fda18efd5 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” -GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. +GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 The phrase **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From d7f1c8330eb138ca5521b6a64aae89b841f7cf97 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 16:12:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 090/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 7fda18efd5..1064a795c7 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -228,12 +228,17 @@ GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 The phr GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 19 wdaa grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Desilva 47 Here, the word **For** indicates that what follows is FILL IN. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” GAL 2 19 r55d ἐγὼ…νόμῳ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase, **I … died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law” GAL 2 19 yl7y grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he **through the law, died to the law**. The purpose being **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) GAL 2 19 l3r9 figs-explicit Θεῷ ζήσω 1 The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “live for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 19 xg5q Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean: (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. GAL 2 19 fh2i figs-activepassive συνεσταύρωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “FILL IN” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer live** +GAL 2 20 msd4 1 +GAL 2 20 y2qf 1 +GAL 2 20 rtmc 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) From 4ab62c261b4b9b4138f6e53d92452a4581dd3425 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 16:36:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 091/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 1064a795c7..10f6e9f308 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -236,9 +236,10 @@ GAL 2 19 l3r9 figs-explicit Θεῷ ζήσω 1 The phrase **live to God** means GAL 2 19 xg5q Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean: (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law. GAL 2 19 fh2i figs-activepassive συνεσταύρωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “FILL IN” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer live** -GAL 2 20 msd4 1 -GAL 2 20 y2qf 1 -GAL 2 20 rtmc 1 +GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** +GAL 2 20 y2qf ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ἐν σαρκί 1 +GAL 2 20 a4j0 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) From b962137fc6a687104381cadda731477574701d53 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 16:42:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 092/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 10f6e9f308..9dd7fc0171 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ GAL 2 19 fh2i figs-activepassive συνεσταύρωμαι 1 If your language GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer live** GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** GAL 2 20 y2qf ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ἐν σαρκί 1 +GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ δὲ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh** to refers to his entire body. The phrase **I now live in the flesh** means “I now live in the body” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 20 a4j0 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From a66b88fa553776ea8a6a942d3ee3cf2412f752d9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 16:46:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 093/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 9dd7fc0171..a58a59b885 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ GAL 2 19 fh2i figs-activepassive συνεσταύρωμαι 1 If your language GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer live** GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** GAL 2 20 y2qf ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ δὲ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh** to refers to his entire body. The phrase **I now live in the flesh** means “I now live in the body” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh** to refers to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 20 a4j0 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 3c5d42bba257cf7876e73dbc0f28dc76c24f9e8b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 16:49:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 094/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a58a59b885..cf64867b14 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ GAL 2 19 fh2i figs-activepassive συνεσταύρωμαι 1 If your language GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer live** GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** GAL 2 20 y2qf ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh** to refers to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 20 a4j0 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From fd88308de78aa46567162033f3df824eed0929bc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:19:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 095/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index cf64867b14..4c4166d967 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ GAL 2 19 xg5q Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 The phrase **I have GAL 2 19 fh2i figs-activepassive συνεσταύρωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “FILL IN” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer live** GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** -GAL 2 20 y2qf ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +GAL 2 20 y2qf figs-ellipsis ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 20 a4j0 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) From aba7deb6b2cbfd69a6421865c8ac791e656d3957 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:21:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 096/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 4c4166d967..30dfdfceb3 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -239,7 +239,8 @@ GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer l GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** GAL 2 20 y2qf figs-ellipsis ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 20 a4j0 1 +GAL 2 20 a4j0 ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 +GAL 2 20 m55w 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) From 47c8fc5347158e209416d14ac3df355f5320a8a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:22:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 097/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 30dfdfceb3..20a99cff55 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer l GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** GAL 2 20 y2qf figs-ellipsis ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 20 a4j0 ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 +GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 20 m55w 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 894fd92333519e2e62d928ae08b3252f1a461df7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:24:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 098/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 20a99cff55..f14a392118 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer l GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** GAL 2 20 y2qf figs-ellipsis ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrases “through faith in Jesus Christ” and “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 20 m55w 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 9bddbb896522548d1b10f032e70b220a80b6740c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:25:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 099/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f14a392118..f7cd8a6d90 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ GAL 2 20 o3jk ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I no longer l GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me** GAL 2 20 y2qf figs-ellipsis ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrases “through faith in Jesus Christ” and “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he FILL. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrases “through faith in Jesus Christ” and “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 20 m55w 1 GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 6fabfaceaea99f89835022e531b040390dba1060 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:29:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 100/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f7cd8a6d90..beb17d1a0d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -240,8 +240,9 @@ GAL 2 20 msd4 ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός 1 Here, the phrase **Chr GAL 2 20 y2qf figs-ellipsis ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he FILL. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrases “through faith in Jesus Christ” and “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 20 m55w 1 -GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +GAL 2 20 g5b8 1 GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. From 22657bab6a385e3cb0b5a024703b918b23721d33 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:34:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 101/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index beb17d1a0d..1c95499b69 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -241,7 +241,8 @@ GAL 2 20 y2qf figs-ellipsis ὃ…νῦν ζῶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of t GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he FILL. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrases “through faith in Jesus Christ” and “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -GAL 2 20 m55w 1 +GAL 2 20 m55w figs-explicit τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με 1 The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 20 by5a 1 GAL 2 20 g5b8 1 GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) From a30e6a90f55a2a3bbdf5d7f78bc66e6d7ac83a75 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 17:37:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 102/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 1c95499b69..01d33db5cd 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -242,8 +242,8 @@ GAL 2 20 rtmc figs-synecdoche ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, Paul GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he FILL. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrases “through faith in Jesus Christ” and “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 20 m55w figs-explicit τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με 1 The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 20 by5a 1 -GAL 2 20 g5b8 1 +GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 21 g5b8 1 GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. From 59d2068ad302c7e6cbafe81245dfe094c68444f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 19:46:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 103/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 01d33db5cd..d237082f3e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -243,8 +243,9 @@ GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τ GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 20 m55w figs-explicit τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με 1 The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 21 g5b8 1 GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 21 ogus 1 GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die” From 197072c568230723e8d44dfaa49b79aa43400af3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 21:49:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 104/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d237082f3e..28454d6ab2 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -243,10 +243,11 @@ GAL 2 20 a4j0 figs-explicit ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τ GAL 2 20 bb2x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) GAL 2 20 m55w figs-explicit τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με 1 The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states a negative to emphasize the positive. Paul is defending a charge others made against him. He does not reject God’s grace when he rejects following the law. This phrase can be translated positively. Alternate translation: “I confirm the value of” or “I do not reject God’s kindness” or “I do not ignore God’s kindness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 21 ogus 1 +GAL 2 21 ogus 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +GAL 2 21 m74u 1 GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die” GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 9bd353cdc2504d019d1daebad28178b22a9c4b15 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 21:50:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 105/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 28454d6ab2..74298adf1e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ GAL 2 20 m55w figs-explicit τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με 1 The phrase * GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 21 ogus 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 21 ogus figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 m74u 1 GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. From ffd8e1ee70e1539c3c1d13d67c447a55287028ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 25 Oct 2022 22:27:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 106/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 74298adf1e..cc7cf56314 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 ogus figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -GAL 2 21 m74u 1 +GAL 2 21 m74u διὰ νόμου 1 Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of {the} law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of {the} law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die” GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 8ba3cdb8f1eea3b5d3145c6d42139295b9468f2c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 12:08:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 107/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 27 +++++++++++---------------- 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 11f1813fa4..e5621e6dd8 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1180,23 +1180,18 @@ MAT 16 28 p1d4 figs-abstractnouns θανάτου 1 If your language does not us MAT 16 28 b2pb figs-metonymy ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 until they may see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom Jesus is using the term **coming in his kingdom** to mean when Jesus will come to rule over his people forever. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “until they see the Son of Man coming to rule over his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 16 28 etk2 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus’ body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]]) -MAT 17 1 u6dw 0 General Information: This begins the account of Jesus’ transfiguration. -MAT 17 1 nva7 τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Peter, James, and John his brother Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and James’s brother John” -MAT 17 2 xx8e μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 he was transfigured before them When they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been. -MAT 17 2 kq4l figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη 1 he was transfigured If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his appearance had changed” or “he appeared very different” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 17 2 uxg3 ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 before them Alternate translation: “in front of them” or “so they could clearly him” -MAT 17 2 i1mp figs-simile ἔλαμψεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος, τὰ δὲ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς 1 his face shone like the sun, and his garments became brilliant as the light These are similes that emphasize how bright Jesus’ appearance became. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 17 2 te1s τὰ…ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ 1 his garments Alternate translation: “what he was wearing” -MAT 17 3 axr5 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. -MAT 17 3 n63y αὐτοῖς 1 to them Here, **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. -MAT 17 3 sde3 μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 with him Alternate translation: “with Jesus” -MAT 17 4 r41c ἀποκριθεὶς…ὁ Πέτρος εἶπεν 1 answering, Peter said Peter is not responding to a question. Alternate translation: “Peter said” -MAT 17 4 d231 figs-exclusive καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι 1 it is good for us to be here It is not clear whether **us** refers only to Peter, James, and John, or if it refers to everyone there, including Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. If you can translate so that both options are possible, do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -MAT 17 5 cek4 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts the reader to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. -MAT 17 5 an8j ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτούς 1 overshadowed them Alternate translation: “came over them” -MAT 17 5 kc8t figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης 1 there was a voice from the cloud Here, **voice** refers to God speaking. Alternate translation: “God spoke to them from the cloud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 17 1 u6dw grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ μεθ’ ἡμέρας ἓξ 1 General Information: The phrase translated **And six days later** indicates that this event happened after the previous event that the story described. Alternate translation: “And six days after these things happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MAT 17 2 kq4l figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη 1 he was transfigured If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he transfigured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 17 2 uxg3 figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 before them Here, **before them** is an idiom that means in front of them. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 17 2 i1mp figs-simile ἔλαμψεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος, τὰ δὲ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς 1 his face shone like the sun, and his garments became brilliant as the light The phrases **his face shone like the sun** and **his garments became brilliant as the light** are similes describing Jesus' appearance when it changed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “his face shone very brightly, and his garments were very bright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 17 4 r41c figs-exclusive Κύριε, καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι 1 answering, Peter said Here, the pronoun us could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case us would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MAT 17 4 d231 translate-unknown σκηνάς 1 it is good for us to be here Here, **shelters** are temporary places where people live. These are not full houses. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 17 5 an8j ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτούς 1 overshadowed them Here, **overshadowed** could mean: (1) That the light from the cloud made them invisible to people not on the mountain. Alternate translation: “shined brightly around them” (2) The cloud descended so that they themselves were inside the cloud. Alternate translation: “enveloped them” +MAT 17 5 kc8t figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης 1 there was a voice from the cloud Matthew is using the term **voice** to mean God himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the cloud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 17 6 wd76 καὶ ἀκούσαντες, οἱ μαθηταὶ 1 And having heard that, the disciples Alternate translation: “And when the disciples heard God speak, they” -MAT 17 6 a87e figs-idiom ἔπεσαν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτῶν 1 fell on their face This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “fell forward, with their faces to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 17 6 a87e figs-idiom ἔπεσαν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτῶν 1 fell on their face Here, **fell on their face** is an idiom that means that the 3 disciples fell down with their faces to the ground. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fell down with their faces to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 17 7 iw4l figs-quotations ἁψάμενος αὐτῶν εἶπεν, ἐγέρθητε καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσθε\n 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “and having touched them, told them to get up and to not be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])\n +MAT 17 8 i9gt grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδένα εἶδον εἰ μὴ αὐτὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον 1 If it would in appear your language that Matthew was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only saw Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 17 9 jz51 καὶ καταβαινόντων αὐτῶν 1 As they were coming down Alternate translation: “And as Jesus and the disciples were coming down” MAT 17 9 y9rq figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 17 10 nwt5 figs-explicit τί οὖν οἱ γραμματεῖς λέγουσιν ὅτι Ἠλείαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν πρῶτον? 1 The disciples are referring to the belief that **Elijah** will come back to life and return to the people of Israel before the Messiah comes. Alternate translation: “Why then do the scribes say that it is necessary for Elijah to come first?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From f3ea8af777a41f8747f71ae8d5f09c1791f429fd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 13:21:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 108/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index cc7cf56314..5348a9c793 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -174,13 +174,13 @@ GAL 2 9 bl9v grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introd GAL 2 9 uuss figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The words he is leaving out are probably “go” or “proclaim the good news.” If it would help your readers, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we would go to the Gentiles, and they would go the circumcision” or “we would proclaim the good news to the Gentiles, and they would proclaim the good news to the circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 9 j031 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 9 n8en figs-metonymy τὴν περιτομήν 1 See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵνα μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, the word **only** introduces an exception clause that qualifies Paul’s statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md) where Paul said that the leaders in Jerusalem “added nothing” to his message (meaning they did not require him to do or teach anything else). Use an appropriate form in your language so that it does not appear that Paul is making a statement here that contradicts his statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +GAL 2 10 fpj8 grammar-connect-exceptions μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵνα μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, the word **only** introduces an exception clause that qualifies Paul’s statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md), where Paul said that the leaders in Jerusalem “added nothing” to his message (meaning they did not require him to do or teach anything else). Use an appropriate form in your language so that it does not appear that Paul is making a statement here that contradicts his statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 2 10 v265 figs-exclusive μνημονεύωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 10 bbdk figs-explicit τῶν πτωχῶν…μνημονεύωμεν 1 Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 10 yfu3 figs-nominaladj πτωχῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly (face to face). If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 yeeb γὰρ 1 GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) From aa44d3d09d2b7ca81fead16106c1abb5e8c664f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 13:28:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 109/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5348a9c793..d7c4bd2d38 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language doe GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 f it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 +GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. From a48cf9e912b0314e4ed44b3bd353aaef67d9c80e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 13:28:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 110/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d7c4bd2d38..f1a1c13504 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language doe GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 f it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n +GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. From 8281cb639d8d9de63cae10c5ffecbca8d5c6779f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:04:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 111/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f1a1c13504..285a6df202 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** int GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 12 yeeb γὰρ 1 +GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and gives the reason for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language, to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” From e9ddb944be73eb1a9ed71b328f6e939a1e3ba039 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:30:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 112/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 285a6df202..74648a64e2 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -182,6 +182,7 @@ GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** int GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 11 qvig translate-versebridge ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 This verse gives the result of Peter’s hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and gives the reason for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language, to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) From 140b169c5b95df457878c80ac8cf64f8a2165725 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:31:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 113/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 74648a64e2..f6f6bf03f7 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather tha GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 11 qvig translate-versebridge ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 This verse gives the result of Peter’s hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) -GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and gives the reason for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language, to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note for [2:11](../02/11.md) on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” From c9b8b5bcff23e962815b9aaa88841cadabab08bd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:37:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 114/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f6f6bf03f7..2d4a324c52 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** int GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 11 qvig translate-versebridge ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 This verse gives the result of Peter’s hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) +GAL 2 11 qvig translate-versebridge ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 This verse gives the result of Cephas’ hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note for [2:11](../02/11.md) on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) From 7abc0235c7a5230eca77d0ff56ff05b16ec5cb2c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:40:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 115/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2d4a324c52..7ee7db14be 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase GAL 2 11 qvig translate-versebridge ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 This verse gives the result of Cephas’ hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note for [2:11](../02/11.md) on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 11dfdb46cf501ffeee3830b361cc09866f0ec309 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:56:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 116/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 7ee7db14be..6ab184f1b3 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. This quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) is a direct quote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) is a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:14](../02/14.md) is a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) From c94f5b4c1f8124385c887f491945736f9d02658a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:57:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 117/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6ab184f1b3..3c3c6f243d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) is a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:14](../02/14.md) is a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:14](../02/14.md) is a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) From 96ba44a5e7b4a5a592cde20de56b53315e160ad8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 14:58:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 118/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 3c3c6f243d..bb5acb2e05 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that what Paul is citing from here to the end of [2:14](../02/14.md) is a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:14](../02/14.md) are a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) From 8e6e58037df2591f5badb7a866786d8d4842fe5d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 15:28:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 119/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index bb5acb2e05..dc42665153 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ GAL 2 13 vmkj figs-abstractnouns αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει 1 If yo GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:14](../02/14.md) are a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of this verse are a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) From 0c6456ca96885770bee6a20068e0a16573577481 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 15:36:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 120/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index dc42665153..a324f481b3 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -198,9 +198,9 @@ GAL 2 14 k16c grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, Paul uses the w GAL 2 14 sg53 figs-metonymy οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν 1 not following the truth of the gospel Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 14 va3a figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 14 s978 figs-quotations εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of this verse are a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help him understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +GAL 2 14 z4fp figs-rquestion εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν 1 how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews? Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help Cephas understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ…ἀναγκάζεις 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 9612437f5798ace9d60b61e89eaca6202c11559f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 15:39:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 121/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a324f481b3..5c5d569273 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ GAL 2 14 qlzt grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑ GAL 2 14 ish9 figs-yousingular σὺ…ἀναγκάζεις 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) GAL 2 15 vjsh figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 15 tzxo ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” -GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and are in need of God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 15 tz45 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί 1 not Gentile sinners The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and need God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 02f727c6945c1969df59096c4c9f772bc86054f6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 15:55:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 122/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5c5d569273..eed4177104 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -247,8 +247,11 @@ GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase ** GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 ogus figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for something definite. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 21 imxg 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +GAL 2 21 ffnx figs-hypo 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing GAL 2 21 m74u διὰ νόμου 1 Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of {the} law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of {the} law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). +GAL 2 21 ji48 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “Since ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die” GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 2c3cbec225d2c9b00611c6b151ab58194b30f0a9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 15:55:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 123/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index eed4177104..f0e618650b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase ** GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 ogus figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for something definite. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 21 yl3c grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for something definite. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 21 imxg 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) GAL 2 21 ffnx figs-hypo 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing GAL 2 21 m74u διὰ νόμου 1 Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of {the} law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of {the} law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). From 7dbf373989bfc725a8ab38cd0ef12f7d037620ce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 15:57:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 124/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f0e618650b..92ae310719 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 ogus figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 yl3c grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for something definite. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -GAL 2 21 imxg 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +GAL 2 21 imxg grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Use a natural way in your language for expressing conditional “if … then” constructions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) GAL 2 21 ffnx figs-hypo 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing GAL 2 21 m74u διὰ νόμου 1 Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of {the} law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of {the} law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). GAL 2 21 ji48 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “Since ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) From 0541560a8a435dc99169caad72cd935926103513 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 15:59:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 125/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 92ae310719..eee1aa61c6 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -247,11 +247,10 @@ GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase ** GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 ogus figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 21 yl3c grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for something definite. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 21 yl3c grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 21 imxg grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Use a natural way in your language for expressing conditional “if … then” constructions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -GAL 2 21 ffnx figs-hypo 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing -GAL 2 21 m74u διὰ νόμου 1 Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of {the} law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of {the} law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). -GAL 2 21 ji48 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “Since ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 21 m74u διὰ νόμου 1 Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of the law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). +GAL 2 21 ji48 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “Since ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die” GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 503f0e5f7c17ab936d0750c0096cd0140a324b82 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 16:05:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 126/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index eee1aa61c6..6cce524385 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -247,10 +247,9 @@ GAL 2 20 by5a figs-explicit παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν 1 The phrase ** GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) GAL 2 21 g5b8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 21 ogus figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη 1 Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 21 yl3c grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. If your language does state things as a hypothetical possibility that the speaker is trying to prove false then use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 imxg grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Use a natural way in your language for expressing conditional “if … then” constructions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) GAL 2 21 m74u διὰ νόμου 1 Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of the law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). -GAL 2 21 ji48 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually not true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. Alternate translation: “Since ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”. GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die” GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 9d7bf0fcb66c03c81fa032b3a991fec02820df63 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 16:48:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 127/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6cce524385..feb4a5e20b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ GAL 2 11 rdi8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** int GAL 2 11 yuav figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 11 c9h4 figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην 1 I opposed him to his face The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) GAL 2 11 cr74 figs-explicit κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 11 qvig translate-versebridge ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 This verse gives the result of Cephas’ hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) +GAL 2 11 qvig translate-versebridge ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν 1 This verse gives the result of Cephas’ hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to adapt or not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with (or with something similar to) the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note for [2:11](../02/11.md) on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ GAL 2 16 vduo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **Bu GAL 2 16 y3tl figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) GAL 2 16 xhx3 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 16 purc figs-abstractnouns ἔργων νόμου -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 f it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but rather only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n From c64c8679611ff567a57d02ed6dc8eddf61e202d3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:08:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 128/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index feb4a5e20b..9fa544d494 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 If it would appear in GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n -GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 1 +GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 3 GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) From 32c5efa53ce8ce312632e95961c76601b6cdf9dd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:22:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 129/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 9fa544d494..d9efe0517b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 If it would appear in GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n -GAL 2 16 gp4w ὅτι 3 +GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “For by works of the law no flesh will be justified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) From bc8888c18866b186d8716621780adf7807f6740b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:23:46 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 130/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d9efe0517b..7e3433df2e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 If it would appear in GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n -GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “For by works of the law no flesh will be justified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) From 3c6830771e03c00a09172303a6ba7ab24af7f15d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:27:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 131/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 7e3433df2e..79174df900 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -213,7 +213,8 @@ GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not us GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to the whole person. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to people. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 16 ctbj 1 no flesh GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 8b2de871349c0a8ee66d5680f30e86bec12b3a2a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:37:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 132/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 79174df900..af0a5b6cfb 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to people. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 16 ctbj 1 no flesh +GAL 2 16 ctbj οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to human beings in general and the phrases “no man” and “any flesh” refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure you use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 14459262c82f3191665513b4c793b17e65fde553 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:38:08 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 133/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index af0a5b6cfb..ebb86ce962 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to people. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 16 ctbj οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to human beings in general and the phrases “no man” and “any flesh” refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure you use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to human beings in general and the phrases “no man” and “any flesh” refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure you use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From bc74abdbd68e91878f60b971be06ddbc2ff28fcb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:39:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 134/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index ebb86ce962..42fb6b31a6 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to people. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to human beings in general and the phrases “no man” and “any flesh” refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure you use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 6e3f9eb71d2116b3e1aabda61a267770d02c89ca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 17:40:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 135/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 42fb6b31a6..872a1527a7 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to people. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 9bf0a0f0c16485009b03e531942b81f3e807221e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 18:55:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 136/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 872a1527a7..b5e4e7046a 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to people. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases to translate the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 19881653958581c31815773d4ea62d5de94c271d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 18:58:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 137/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b5e4e7046a..aa11dca969 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -212,8 +212,8 @@ GAL 2 16 ncnt grammar-connect-exceptions ἐὰν μὴ 1 If it would appear in GAL 2 16 iivr figs-abstractnouns πίστεως -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 16 q4iw figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν 1 When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n\n -GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason for their **faith in Jesus Christ**. They believed **in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to people. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason why Cephas and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**. They **believed in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to human beings. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) From 90008e63c055479a8537848285e7f8bcbc60720c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 20:23:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 138/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index aa11dca969..a7cc3e309f 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** intro GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason why Cephas and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**. They **believed in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to human beings. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing case for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. +GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From b95aca2e457c56a8e8bc42274d31c8a78e25145c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 20:25:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 139/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a7cc3e309f..105f3fc0f7 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ GAL 2 16 nzcb grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** intro GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason why Cephas and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**. They **believed in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to human beings. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -GAL 2 17 gf9q δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. +GAL 2 17 gf9q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From c291f2816aa5323c7ed740ea5764c7bd7707ea80 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 21:43:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 140/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 105f3fc0f7..9874099e58 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ GAL 2 16 gp4w grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to human beings. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -GAL 2 17 gtu7 εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +GAL 2 17 gtu7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we our** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 27583c91680e7cdee04bdff7a3405696e7f963a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 21:44:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 141/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 9874099e58..956640f1f9 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ GAL 2 9 k66v οἱ δοκοῦντες…εἶναι 1 See how you translated GAL 2 9 he6q figs-metaphor οἱ δοκοῦντες στῦλοι εἶναι 1 built up the church Here, **pillars** refers to James, Cephas and John, who were leaders of the believers in Jerusalem. In that culture important leaders of a group were sometimes referred to as **pillars** because of the support that they provided the group. If your readers would not understand what **pillars** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 9 e5rm translate-symaction δεξιὰς ἔδωκαν…κοινωνίας 1 gave…the right hand of fellowship Here, **gave the right hand** is an action that indicates agreement. Shaking hands indicated that they agreed with each other and were pledging to work together as ministry partners towards the same goal. Essentially, they would be in fellowship and shaking each others right hand indicated this. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) GAL 2 9 yxvz figs-abstractnouns κοινωνίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fellowship**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 9 bl9v grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **James and Cephas and John … gave {the} right hand of fellowship to Barnabas** and Paul. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +GAL 2 9 bl9v grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **James and Cephas and John … gave the right hand of fellowship to Barnabas** and Paul. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) GAL 2 9 uuss figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The words he is leaving out are probably “go” or “proclaim the good news.” If it would help your readers, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we would go to the Gentiles, and they would go the circumcision” or “we would proclaim the good news to the Gentiles, and they would proclaim the good news to the circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 9 j031 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 9 n8en figs-metonymy τὴν περιτομήν 1 See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 3f3a75a6632605dfc581abd150be89e8b7dd17ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 21:50:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 142/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 956640f1f9..08b4e0b8b9 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -218,8 +218,8 @@ GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no GAL 2 17 gf9q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) GAL 2 17 gtu7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we our** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. From 31b204b5f449229f6f3374e19d80a7c9989bfdd7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2022 21:51:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 143/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 08b4e0b8b9..d1b9a36dec 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no GAL 2 17 gf9q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) GAL 2 17 gtu7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” or “for God to justify us because of our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 742a0a08407a82e9747f63b391857164d925865c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 14:45:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 144/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d1b9a36dec..87d53ef42b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** int GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” -GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “being afraid that these men who required circumcision would think that he was doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 13 urwh figs-explicit οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to h GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) GAL 2 17 gtu7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **to be justified in Christ** means justified because we are united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **justified in Christ** means justified because of being united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” or “for God to justify us because of our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) From 9e16bab245c49722087cb12928297d3d91c4d3f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:11:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 145/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index fb76374c6f..67a23a35a7 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1287,13 +1287,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 3 la48 figs-explicit πάντες τὸ αὐτὸ πνευματικὸν βρῶμα ἔφαγον 1 in the cloud In this verse, Paul refers to how God provided the Israelites with **spiritual food** while they were traveling through the desert. This food was called “manna.” For the story, see [Exodus 16](../exo/16/01.md). While Paul does not explicitly state this, it is clear that he is comparing the “manna” to the bread in the Lord’s Supper, just as he compared passing through the Red Sea with baptism in the last two verses. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 3 d4zh translate-unknown πνευματικὸν 1 in the cloud Here, **spiritual** could indicate: (1) that Paul is indicating that the **food** should be compared with the bread in the Lord’s Supper, which is also “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “divine” (2) that the **food** came from God in a supernatural way. Alternate translation: “supernatural” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 4 xut2 figs-explicit πάντες τὸ αὐτὸ πνευματικὸν ἔπιον πόμα; ἔπινον γὰρ ἐκ πνευματικῆς ἀκολουθούσης πέτρας 1 drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock Here Paul refers to two stories that tell how the Israelites drank water that came out of a rock. For these stories, see [Exodus 17:1–7](../exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](../num/20/02.md). In both of these stories, the Israelites are thirsty in the desert, and God commands Moses to act (either by speaking or by striking the rock with a staff) so that water comes out of the rock for the Israelites to drink. If your readers are not familiar with these stories, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 10 4 wina translate-unknown πνευματικὸν 1 drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock Here, **spiritual** could indicate: (1) that Paul is indicating that the **drink** should be compared with the wine in the Lord’s Supper, which is also “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “divine” (2) that the **drink** came from God in a supernatural way. Alternate translation: “supernatural” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 4 wina translate-unknown πνευματικὸν 1 drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock Here, **spiritual** could indicate: (1) that Paul is indicating that the **drink** should be compared with the wine in the Lord’s Supper, which is also **spiritual**. Alternate translation: “divine” (2) that the **drink** came from God in a supernatural way. Alternate translation: “supernatural” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 4 op27 translate-unknown πνευματικῆς 1 drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock Here, **spiritual** could indicate: (1) that Paul is already hinting that the **rock** should be interpreted as more than a rock, as **Christ** (as he does at the end of the verse). Alternate translation: “a divine” (2) that God used the **rock** in a supernatural way. Alternate translation: “a supernatural” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 10 4 hcae figs-explicit ἀκολουθούσης πέτρας 1 drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock Some early Jewish scholars used the two stories about the water coming from the rock to argue that it was the same rock in both stories. This means that the rock was **following** the Israelites as they journeyed through the desert. Paul seems to refer to this interpretation here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **following them** by including including a footnote explaining why Paul speaks in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 4 hcae figs-explicit ἀκολουθούσης πέτρας 1 drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock Some early Jewish scholars used the two stories about the water coming from the rock to argue that it was the same rock in both stories. This means that the rock was **following** the Israelites as they journeyed through the desert. Paul seems to refer to this interpretation here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **following {them}** by including including a footnote explaining why Paul speaks in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 4 whj4 figs-metaphor ἡ…πέτρα ἦν ὁ Χριστός 1 that rock was Christ Here Paul identifies the **rock** as **Christ**. By speaking in this way, he means that the rock was the source of water and life for the Israelites, just as **Christ** is the source of life for all those who believe in him. Paul also probably means that **Christ** was the one who made the water come from the **rock**. If possible, preserve Paul’s metaphor here. If you must express the idea in another, you could state a comparison between how the **rock** provided for the Israelites and how **Christ** provides for all his people, including the Israelites. Alternate translation: “they received water from that rock like we receive life from Christ” or “Christ provided for them through the rock, and he provides for us now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 5 lh93 οὐκ…ηὐδόκησεν 1 not well pleased Alternate translation: “was displeased” 1CO 10 5 tnu4 figs-activepassive οὐκ ἐν τοῖς πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεός 1 most of them If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange this clause so that **them** is the subject and **God** is the object. Alternate translation: “most of them were not pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 5 w673 figs-activepassive κατεστρώθησαν 1 their corpses were scattered about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **scattered** rather than focusing on the person doing the “scattering.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God scattered them about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 5 w673 figs-activepassive κατεστρώθησαν 1 their corpses were scattered about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **scattered about** rather than focusing on the person doing the “scattering.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God scattered them about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 5 jxua figs-euphemism κατεστρώθησαν…ἐν 1 their corpses were scattered about Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “scattering about.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant while still expressing the idea that they died in many different places. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **they were scattered about** with a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 5 b96g figs-explicit κατεστρώθησαν…ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 in the wilderness Here Paul speaks in general of how the Israelites left Egypt to go to the land that God had promised to give them. To get to that land, they traveled through **the wilderness**. However, the Israelites often disobeyed or grumbled against God, and so he **was not well pleased with most of them**. He punished them by letting most of them die **in the wilderness** and only allowing their children to enter the land that he had promised. See [Numbers 14:20–35](../num/14/20.md) for God’s announcement of judgment. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 6 dzkm writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 in the wilderness Here, **these {things}** refers to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these {things}** to more clearly express what it refers to. Alternate translation: “what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From baa6eb1d2b03875196bfba818edd13e397d03bc5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:23:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 146/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 67a23a35a7..fe12c3319d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1297,7 +1297,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 5 jxua figs-euphemism κατεστρώθησαν…ἐν 1 their corpses were scattered about Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “scattering about.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant while still expressing the idea that they died in many different places. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **they were scattered about** with a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 5 b96g figs-explicit κατεστρώθησαν…ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 in the wilderness Here Paul speaks in general of how the Israelites left Egypt to go to the land that God had promised to give them. To get to that land, they traveled through **the wilderness**. However, the Israelites often disobeyed or grumbled against God, and so he **was not well pleased with most of them**. He punished them by letting most of them die **in the wilderness** and only allowing their children to enter the land that he had promised. See [Numbers 14:20–35](../num/14/20.md) for God’s announcement of judgment. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 6 dzkm writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 in the wilderness Here, **these {things}** refers to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these {things}** to more clearly express what it refers to. Alternate translation: “what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 6 nr6j figs-idiom ἐγενήθησαν 1 in the wilderness Here Paul states that things that happened to the Israelites **became examples**. This means that what happened can be interpreted as **examples** or occurred as **examples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **became** to more clearly state that **these {things}** should be understood as **examples**. Alternate translation: “can be understood as” or “happened as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 6 nr6j figs-idiom τύποι…ἐγενήθησαν 1 in the wilderness Here Paul states that things that happened to the Israelites **became examples**. This means that what happened can be interpreted as **examples** or occurred as **examples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **became** to more clearly state that **these {things}** should be understood as **examples**. Alternate translation: “can be understood as” or “happened as examples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 6 afxo μὴ εἶναι ἡμᾶς ἐπιθυμητὰς 1 in the wilderness Alternate translation: “we would not desire” 1CO 10 6 eisd figs-ellipsis ἐπεθύμησαν 1 to play Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “desired evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 7 lven writing-quotations ὥσπερ γέγραπται 1 to play In Paul’s culture, **even as it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Exodus 32:6](../exo/32/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “for it can be read in Exodus” or “For in the book of Exodus we read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1315,10 +1315,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 9 z4xf figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπείρασαν, καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 21:5–6](../num/21/05.md). In this story, many Israelites “spoke against” or challenged their leaders and God himself. In response, God sent **snakes** that bit the Israelites, and many of the people died. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 9 rhyb grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by snakes Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “putting” **the Lord to the test**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you can use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **destroyed** rather than focusing on who or what does the “destroying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the snakes**. Alternate translation: “God used snakes to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 10 tdsy figs-explicit τινὲς αὐτῶν ἐγόγγυσαν, καὶ ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 16:41–50](../num/16/41.md) and perhaps also a story found in [Numbers 14:1–38](../num/14/01.md). In both of these stories, Israelites “grumble” or complain about how their leaders and God himself are leading them. In response, God sends a plague or kills Israelites who **grumbled**. If your readers are not familiar with these stories, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Num 16:41–50 +1CO 10 10 tdsy figs-explicit τινὲς αὐτῶν ἐγόγγυσαν, καὶ ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 16:41–50](../num/16/41.md) and perhaps also a story found in [Numbers 14:1–38](../num/14/01.md). In both of these stories, Israelites **grumbled** or complained about how their leaders and God himself are leading them. In response, God sends a plague or kills Israelites who **grumbled**. If your readers are not familiar with these stories, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Num 16:41–50 1CO 10 10 cz1e grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “grumbling.” If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you can use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **destroyed** rather than focusing on who or what does the “destroying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the destroyer**. Alternate translation: “God used the destroyer to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **destroyer** refers to an angelic messenger whom God sends to “destroy.” Sometimes, this angel is called “the Angel of Death.” The stories that Paul refers to do not explicitly mention **the destroyer**, but Paul understands **the destroyer** to be the one who acts out God’s judgment by bringing a plague and killing Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the destroyer** with a word or phrase that refers to a spiritual being that “destroys.” However, this spiritual being must be one whom God could send. Alternate translation: “the angel of death” or “a destroying angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **the destroyer** refers to an angelic messenger whom God sends to “destroy.” Sometimes, this angel is called “the Angel of Death.” The stories that Paul refers to do not explicitly mention **the destroyer**, but Paul understands **the destroyer** to be the one who acts out God’s judgment by bringing a plague and killing Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the destroyer** with a word or phrase that refers to a spiritual being that “destroys.” However, this spiritual being must be one whom God could send. Alternate translation: “the angel of death” or “a destroying angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them Here, **these {things}** refers back to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:7–10](../10/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these {things}** to clarify what the phrase refers to. Alternate translation: “the events that I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 11 bxef translate-unknown τυπικῶς 1 these things happened to them Just as in [10:6](../10/06.md), **examples** here refers to how the stories about the Israelites function as **examples** or “illustrations” for the believers who hear or read those stories. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **examples** with a comparable word or phrase and compare with how you translated “examples” in [10:6](../10/06.md). Alternate translation: “as patterns” or “as models” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 11 xlwp grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 these things happened to them Here, **but** introduces a further development. It does not contrast with the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **but**with a word or phrase that introduces a further development. Alternate translation: “and” or “and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From 3c50e667283c21aa3e19b8bdd913f92a07b4a194 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:26:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 147/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index fe12c3319d..dbac5b5ab5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1327,7 +1327,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples Here Paul speaks as if **the end of the ages** could **come** on somebody. By speaking as if **the end of the ages** were something that could **come**, Paul expresses the idea that he and the Corinthians are living during **the end of the ages**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who live during the end of the ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 the end of the ages Here, **the end of the ages** refers to the last period in the history of the world. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. If your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “to whom the end of the world is coming soon” or “on whom the end times have come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 12 df2p figs-metaphor ἑστάναι…μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Here someone who **stands** is someone who is strong and faithful when following Jesus. People who **fall** are those who fail to faithfully follow Jesus and whom God punishes, just like he punished the Israelites. “Standing” and “falling” physically represent the spiritual state of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **stands** and **fall** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has firm footing … he might not slip” or “he acts faithfully … he might not fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative3p βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) From 38fa9b72dc02572da86ab31a8f23fe15ef5f0208 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:31:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 148/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 48 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 24 insertions(+), 24 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index dbac5b5ab5..f54bb84903 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 1 31 paga figs-infostructure καθὼς γέγραπται, ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 If it would be unnatural in your language to put **just as it is written** before the quotation, you could put **just as it is written** at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “‘Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord,’ just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 1 31 ebvw writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Jeremiah the prophet (see [Jeremiah 9:24](../jer/09/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Jeremiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 1 31 pfa7 figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Jeremiah has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 1 31 fym9 figs-imperative ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could: (1) translate this one as a conditional sentence, adding “if.” Alternate translation: “If people want to boast, they should boast in the Lord” (2) translate this one using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who boasts should boast in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 1 31 fym9 figs-imperative3p ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could: (1) translate this one as a conditional sentence, adding “if.” Alternate translation: “If people want to boast, they should boast in the Lord” (2) translate this one using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who boasts should boast in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 1 31 mo0q figs-idiom ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 When Paul says that someone can **boast in {the} Lord**, he does not mean that they are inside **{the} Lord**. Rather, he means that they are boasting about **{the} Lord** and what he has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **boast in the Lord** with a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is boasting about someone else. Alternate translation: “Let … boast with reference to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)\n * Paul’s attitude among the Corinthians (2:1–5)\n * The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:6–16)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Wisdom and foolishness\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])\n\n### Power and weakness\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])\n\n### The Spirit\n\nPaul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in [2:12](../02/12.md) refers to a “spirit” that is not God’s Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in [2:11](../02/11.md) refers to the nonphysical part of a person. It does not refer to God’s Spirit or to something that God’s Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” ([2:13](../02/13.md); [2:15](../02/15.md)) and the adverb form “spiritually” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Both of these forms also refer to God’s Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by God’s Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of God’s Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” ([2:14](../02/14.md)), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by God’s Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n### The Mystery\n\nPaul speaks of a “mystery” in [2:1](../02/01.md); [2:7](../02/07.md). This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to God’s plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The deep things of God\n\nIn [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The rulers of this age\n\nIn [2:6](../02/06.md); [2:8](../02/08.md), Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christ’s first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus ([2:8](../02/08.md)). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]])\n\n### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”\n\nJust as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.\n\n### First-person singular and plural\n\nPaul uses the first-person singular in [2:1–5](../02/01.md) because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first-person plural in [2:6–16](../02/06.md) because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In [2:6–16](../02/06.md), the first-person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first-person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 2 1 pxmq grammar-connect-words-phrases κἀγὼ 1 Here, **And I** introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul preaches the gospel in weak and foolish ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “In the same way, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 10 nw8f figs-infostructure ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα 1 The phrase **as a wise master builder** could describe: (1) the way in which Paul **laid a foundation**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “I laid a foundation as a wise master builder” (2) the specific **grace** that God gave to Paul. Alternate translation: “to be a wise master builder, I laid a foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 3 10 mpxl translate-unknown σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων 1 Here, **master builder** refers to the person who is in charge of an entire construction project, including designing it and making sure that the building is constructed according to the design. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **master builder** with a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “a wise architect” or “a wise construction manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 3 10 mqb8 writing-pronouns ἄλλος…ἐποικοδομεῖ 1 Here, **another** refers to anyone who **is building {on}** the foundation, including Apollos. However, Paul does not mean to identify one specific person who **is building**. If your readers would not infer that **another** refers to any builder, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who does a specific task. Alternate translation: “other people are building on it” or “someone else is building on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 3 10 pwi7 figs-imperative ἕκαστος…βλεπέτω 1 another is building on it Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 3 10 pwi7 figs-imperative3p ἕκαστος…βλεπέτω 1 another is building on it Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 3 10 px9c writing-pronouns ἕκαστος 1 each man Here, **each one** refers to any person who **builds** on the **foundation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **each one** with a word or phrase that identifies any person who falls into a certain category. Alternate translation: “every person who builds on it” or “each builder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 3 10 krd6 figs-gendernotations ἐποικοδομεῖ 2 Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she builds on it” or “each one builds on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 3 11 m4j2 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **for** introduces the reason why the people who build on the foundation should “be careful how” they build “on it” ([3:10](../03/10.md)). They need to “be careful” because what they build must match the only **foundation** that exists, which is **Jesus Christ**. If **for** would not indicate this connection in your language, you could express the idea with a word that gives a reason or basis for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 17 pc0d figs-exmetaphor εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός; ὁ γὰρ ναὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς. 1 Here Paul finishes the metaphor about the temple that he began in [3:16](../03/16.md). He notes that, because God’s temple is **holy**, God will **destroy** anyone who **destroys** the temple. He then again repeats that the Corinthians **are** the temple. By speaking in this way, Paul wishes to remind everyone among the Corinthian believers that “destroying” the unity of the believers is like “destroying” the **temple**, and God will act in response to this like he would if someone “destroyed” his **temple**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone desecrates God’s sacred shrine, God will punish that person. For the sacred shrine is holy, and you are God’s sacred shrine” or “If anyone divides the place of God’s presence, God will punish that person. For wherever God’s presence can be found is holy, and you are the place where God’s presence can be found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 1CO 3 17 pv8w grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός 1 Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might destroy God’s temple, or that person might not. He then specifies the consequence if someone does destroy God’s temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “God will destroy anyone who destroys the temple of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 3 17 vcuv writing-pronouns οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς 1 Here, **which** could refer to: (1) **the temple of God**. Alternate translation: “which temple you are” (2) **holy**. Alternate translation: “and you too are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 3 18 glg8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω…μωρὸς γενέσθω 1 Let no one deceive himself In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 3 18 glg8 figs-imperative3p μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω…μωρὸς γενέσθω 1 Let no one deceive himself In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 3 18 s57s figs-gendernotations μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω; εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός. 1 Here, the words translated **himself**, **he**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **himself**, **he**, and **him**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “Let no one deceive himself or herself. If anyone among you thinks he or she is wise in this age, let him or her become a ‘fool,’ that he or she may become wise” or “Let no people deceive themselves. If any people among you think they are wise in this age, let them become ‘fools,’ that they may become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 3 18 p3wi grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω 1 in this age Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might think that **he is wise**, or that person might not think this. He then specifies the consequence if someone does think that **he is wise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Let whoever among you thinks he is wise in this age become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 3 18 p53y ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 Alternate translation: “according to the standards of this age” @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 20 ot38 figs-abstractnouns τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reasonings**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reason” or “plan.” Alternate translation: “the things that the wise reason” or “the things that the wise plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 3 20 tlk9 figs-nominaladj τῶν σοφῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of wise people” or “of those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 3 20 kz2u εἰσὶν μάταιοι 1 futile Alternate translation: “they will come to nothing” or “they are worthless” -1CO 3 21 molu figs-imperative μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “no one should boast in men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 3 21 molu figs-imperative3p μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “no one should boast in men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 3 21 xyti figs-idiom μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 The phrase **boast in men** means that a person is boasting “about” humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **boast in** with a word or phrase that clarifies that the “boasting” has **men** as its content. Alternate translation: “let no one boast about men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 3 21 k9i3 figs-explicit ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 The next verse makes it clear that here Paul specifically has leaders in mind. He wishes to tell the Corinthians that they should not boast about having a specific leader that they follow. If this meaning of **in men** would not be understood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that it refers to following leaders. Alternate translation: “in men that they follow” or “in men whose group they are part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 3 21 ogfq figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in people” or “in men or women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 23 dc6v figs-possession Χριστὸς…Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that **Christ** belongs to who **God** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “Christ is part of who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
* God alone is judge (4:1–5)
* Present weakness (4:6–15)
3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)
* Paul’s planned visit (4:16–21)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Judgment

In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), Paul refers to three different judgments. The first judgment is what humans think of each other, including what they think of Paul. The second is Paul’s own judgment of himself. The third is God’s judgment, which occurs when the Lord returns. Paul argues that the first two judgments are not important and carry no weight. Rather, the only judgment that matters is God’s judgment. Therefore, Paul argues that no one should issue a final verdict about anything until God has performed his judgment ([4:5](../04/05.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/discernment]])

### Pride

Paul mentions the Corinthians’ pride many times in this chapter. He speaks specifically of being “puffed up” ([4:6](../04/06.md); [4:18–19](../04/18.md)), and boasting ([4:7](../04/07.md)). In contrast, Paul describes himself and the other apostles as humble and weak ([4:9–13](../04/09.md)). By making this contrast, Paul wants the Corinthians to rethink their opinions about themselves. If the apostles, the leaders of the church, are weak and humble, they need to think again about whether they really are as great as they think they are.

### Word and power

In [4:19–20](../04/19.md), Paul contrasts “word” with “power.” This is a common comparison in his culture that contrasts talk and deeds. Anyone can say they are capable of doing something, but only those with “power” can actually do what they claim. Paul introduces this contrast because he is coming to see if those who claim greatness (“word”) can do what they claim (“power”). He argues that “power” is what matters more than “word” because God’s kingdom is a matter of “power,” not “word.” It is about action, not just talk. If your language has a standard comparison between “talk” and “deeds,” you could use it in these verses.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Paul as father

In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), Paul identifies the Corinthians as his children, which makes him their father. He became their father when he preached the gospel to them. Thus, he is their spiritual father, the one who helped bring them into the Christian life. In the metaphor, Paul does not specify who the mother is, and he does not intend his audience to make an inference as to who it might be. In [4:17](../04/17.md), Paul continues this metaphor by claiming Timothy as his spiritual child. If possible, use words in your language that do not always require biological relationships. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/father]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]])

### The spectacle

In [4:9](../04/09.md), Paul speaks of the “spectacle” that he and the other apostles participate in. The “spectacle” could be a victory parade in which Paul and the other apostles are prisoners who will be killed, or it could be a gladiatorial performance in an arena in which Paul and the other apostles are destined to die. See the notes on the verse for translation options. Whichever “spectacle” Paul refers to, he is presenting himself and the other apostles as people who are going to be humiliated and killed in public. With this metaphor he continues the theme of Christ working in power through his and others’ weakness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Irony

In [4:8](../04/08.md), Paul says that the Corinthians are satisfied, rich, and reigning. In the second half of the verse, however, he says that he “wishes” that they were actually reigning. The first part of the verse, then, presents how the Corinthians think about themselves. Paul speaks from their perspective in order to show them that their views are foolish and impossible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Rhetorical questions

In [4:7](../04/07.md) and [4:21](../04/21.md), Paul uses several questions. All the questions in these two verses are not seeking answers that provide information or further knowledge. Rather, all the questions are meant to make the Corinthians think about what they are thinking and doing. For translation options, see the notes on these two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “Not beyond what is written”

In [4:6](../04/06.md), Paul quotes a phrase: “Not beyond what is written.” This is not a quote from Scripture, and Paul does not say where the phrase comes from. However, the way he quotes it shows that both he and the Corinthians were familiar with this saying. Most likely, the phrase is a well-known proverb or wise saying that Paul uses to strengthen his argument. For the meaning of the phrase and translation options, see the notes on that verse.

### Paul’s coming

In [4:18–21](../04/18.md), Paul speaks many times about how he will “come” to them. He intends to visit them again, and he speaks in these verses about what his visit might be like. Use words in your language that refer to someone temporarily visiting someone else. 1CO 4 1 nkda figs-explicitinfo οὕτως ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος ὡς 1 If the form **In this manner let a man regard us: as** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “Let a man regard us as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -1CO 4 1 k1v5 figs-imperative ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “a man should regard us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 4 1 k1v5 figs-imperative3p ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “a man should regard us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 4 1 xt4u figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “man or woman” or “human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 4 1 fk8c figs-genericnoun ἄνθρωπος 1 Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “everybody” or “any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 4 1 px42 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **us** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -774,10 +774,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 2 c3uq grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 But because Here, **But** introduces the qualifications Paul wishes to give for the statement in the previous verse: “{It is} good for a man not to touch a woman.” Paul wishes to give qualifications about whether that statement is from the Corinthians or is Paul’s own statement. Use a word or phrase in your culture that introduces qualifications to a claim. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 7 2 fys4 figs-abstractnouns διὰ…τὰς πορνείας 1 But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “because people are immoral” or “because of immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 7 2 ktqd figs-metonymy διὰ…τὰς πορνείας 1 Here, **because of immorality** refers to how people desire to commit **immorality** and do commit **immorality**. Paul does not refer to **immorality** in the abstract. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **immorality** with a word or phrase that refers to “temptation” or “behavior.” Alternate translation: “because of the temptation of immorality” or “because people act immorally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 7 2 r822 figs-imperative ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἐχέτω, καὶ ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα ἐχέτω 1 Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “each man should have his own wife, and each woman should have her own husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 2 r822 figs-imperative3p ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἐχέτω, καὶ ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα ἐχέτω 1 Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “each man should have his own wife, and each woman should have her own husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 2 j4wc figs-idiom ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἐχέτω, καὶ ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα ἐχέτω 1 The phrases **have {his} own wife** and **have {her} own husband** refer primarily to the ongoing state of being married, which includes continuing to have sex. However, the idiom primarily emphasizes remaining in a state of marriage with one’s current spouse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **have {his} own wife** and **have {her} own husband** with a comparable idiom or refer directly to staying married. Alternate translation: “let each man continue in marriage with his own wife, and let each woman continue in marriage with her own husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 7 3 he0c figs-genericnoun τῇ γυναικὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ…ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί 1 Here Paul refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each husband … to his wife … each wife … to her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 7 3 xv9s figs-imperative ὁ ἀνὴρ…ἀποδιδότω 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “A husband should give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 3 xv9s figs-imperative3p ὁ ἀνὴρ…ἀποδιδότω 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “A husband should give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 3 mj8l figs-euphemism τῇ γυναικὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἀποδιδότω 1 sexual rights Here Paul uses **duty** to refer to married couples having sex. He uses this word to be polite and also because he wishes to emphasize that having sex is an obligation for married couples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **duty** with a comparable euphemism or refer directly to how married couples “should” have sex. Alternate translation: “Let the husband fulfill his sexual obligations to the wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 7 3 vhv1 figs-ellipsis ὁμοίως…καὶ ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί 1 likewise the wife to her husband Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “likewise let the wife also give to the husband the duty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 7 4 px2s figs-genericnoun ἡ γυνὴ…ὁ ἀνήρ…ὁ ἀνὴρ…ἡ γυνή 1 Just as in [7:3](../07/03.md), Paul here refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each wife … her husband does … each husband … his wife does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -810,7 +810,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 8 r27x figs-explicit μείνωσιν ὡς κἀγώ 1 it is good Just as in [7:7](../07/07.md), Paul again assumes that his readers know that he is unmarried. When Paul says that it is good for **the unmarried** and **the widows** to **remain as I also am**, he is referring to how he is unmarried. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **remain as I also am** by including the fact that Paul is not married. Alternate translation: “remain without a spouse, as I also am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 7 9 o4j5 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ…οὐκ ἐνκρατεύονται, γαμησάτωσαν 1 Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that people might **have self-control** or they might not. Here he gives instructions for if they **do not have self-control**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whoever does not have self-control should marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 7 9 bxa2 figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἐνκρατεύονται 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **self-control**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “self-controlled” or a verbal phrase such as “control themselves.” Alternate translation: “they are not self-controlled” or “they do not control themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 7 9 jy8g figs-imperative γαμησάτωσαν 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “let” or “should,” as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “let them marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 9 jy8g figs-imperative3p γαμησάτωσαν 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “let” or “should,” as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “let them marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 9 ty79 figs-metaphor πυροῦσθαι 1 to burn with desire Here, **to burn** is a way to refer to sexual desire. Paul uses **burn** because he represents the desire as hard to fight and as something that consumes a person like fire consumes a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or by including a reference to sexual desire. Alternate translation: “to burn with desire” or “to lust after someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 7 10 gxni figs-nominaladj τοῖς…γεγαμηκόσιν 1 Paul is using the adjective **married** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **married** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “to those who are married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 7 10 zwgk grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐκ ἐγὼ, ἀλλὰ ὁ Κύριος 1 Here Paul clarifies that he is not the authority behind this command. It is **the Lord** who is the authority here. Paul specifically has in mind what **the Lord** said about marriage and divorce while he was on earth (see [Mark 10:5–12](../mrk/10/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **not I, but the Lord** either by identifying that it is not Paul “alone” who gives the command, or by clarifying that Paul is referring to what **the Lord** said. Alternate translation: “not I alone, but the Lord also” or “and here I refer to what the Lord said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -822,17 +822,17 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 11 pqr9 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν δὲ καὶ χωρισθῇ, μενέτω 1 Here Paul uses **even if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a wife **might be separated**, or she might not. He then specifies the result if **she** is **separated**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let whichever wife might be separated remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 7 11 phpw figs-activepassive χωρισθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the “wife” who is **separated**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “separating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the “wife” does it herself. Alternate translation: “she separates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 7 11 lj79 figs-ellipsis χωρισθῇ 1 Here Paul omits some words that might be needed in your language to make a complete thought. Paul omits them because he already used them in [7:10](../07/10.md) and he assumes his audience will infer them from there. If you need to include these words, you could insert the words “from her husband.” Alternate translation: “she might be separated from her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 7 11 tvo2 figs-imperative μενέτω ἄγαμος ἢ τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω 1 Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “she must remain unmarried, or she must be reconciled to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 11 tvo2 figs-imperative3p μενέτω ἄγαμος ἢ τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω 1 Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “she must remain unmarried, or she must be reconciled to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 11 lxf7 figs-activepassive τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω 1 be reconciled to her husband If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the “wife,” who is **reconciled**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “reconciling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the “wife” does it herself. Alternate translation: “let her reconcile with the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 7 11 k7ju ἄνδρα γυναῖκα μὴ ἀφιέναι 1 Alternate translation: “a husband should not divorce a wife” 1CO 7 12 k9yd τοῖς…λοιποῖς 1 agrees Here, **the rest** could refer to: (1) people in situations other than those already named, particularly those who are married to an unbelieving spouse. Alternate translation: “to the rest of those who are married” (2) everything else Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “about other situations” 1CO 7 12 xn88 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐγώ, οὐχ ὁ Κύριος 1 Here, **I, not the Lord** is the opposite of what Paul said in [7:10](../07/10.md). Paul wishes to clarify that he is the authority behind this command. Of course, **the Lord** made him an apostle and gave him authority, but he wants the Corinthians to know that he is speaking out of that authority here, and he is not referring to what **the Lord** said while he was on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **I, not the Lord** either by identifying that it is Paul alone who gives the command, or by clarifying that **the Lord** did not say anything about this topic. Alternate translation: “I alone” or “on my own authority, since the Lord did not speak about this topic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 7 12 rrfp grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ τις ἀδελφὸς γυναῖκα ἔχει ἄπιστον, καὶ αὕτη συνευδοκεῖ οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτοῦ, μὴ ἀφιέτω 1 Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a **brother** might have **an unbelieving wife**, and she might agree **to live with him**, or this situation might not happen. He then specifies the result if this situation does happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let any brother who has an unbelieving wife who agrees to live with him not divorce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 7 12 ae1u figs-idiom οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **to live with him** refers to staying married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to live with him** with a comparable idiom that refers to staying married. Alternate translation: “to stay with him” or “to remain married to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 7 12 jej3 figs-imperative μὴ ἀφιέτω αὐτήν 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “he must not divorce her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 12 jej3 figs-imperative3p μὴ ἀφιέτω αὐτήν 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “he must not divorce her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 13 gtxx grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical γυνὴ εἴ τις ἔχει ἄνδρα ἄπιστον, καὶ οὗτος συνευδοκεῖ οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτῆς, μὴ ἀφιέτω 1 Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a **woman** might have **an unbelieving husband**, and he might agree **to live with her**, or this situation might not happen. He then specifies the result if this situation does happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let any woman who has an unbelieving husband who agrees to live with her not divorce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 7 13 q39l figs-idiom οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτῆς 1 Here, **to live with her** refers to staying married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to live with her** with a comparable idiom that refers to staying married. Alternate translation: “to stay with her” or “to remain married to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 7 13 fsbq figs-imperative μὴ ἀφιέτω τὸν ἄνδρα 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “she must not divorce the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 13 fsbq figs-imperative3p μὴ ἀφιέτω τὸν ἄνδρα 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “she must not divorce the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 14 hv30 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces the reason or basis for Paul’s commands in [7:12–13](../07/12.md). When one spouse is not a believer, Paul wants them to stay together, and the reason is that the unbelieving spouse is **sanctified**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces the basis for a command. Alternate translation: “You should do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 7 14 k0qs figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί…ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ 1 Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wife** and **husband** with a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “any unbelieving husband … through his wife … any unbelieving wife … through her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 7 14 l84p figs-activepassive ἡγίασται…ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί; καὶ ἡγίασται ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ 1 For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wife If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God sanctifies the unbelieving husband through the wife, and God sanctifies the unbelieving wife through the brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 15 qjmw figs-idiom εἰ…ὁ ἄπιστος χωρίζεται, χωριζέσθω 1 Here, **departs** refers to ending the marriage, that is, leaving the spouse. The phrase **let him go** refers to allowing the spouse to break the marriage or leave. If these words would not refer to breaking a marriage or getting divorced in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “if the unbeliever wants a divorce, let him divorce you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 7 15 t5tf figs-gendernotations ὁ ἄπιστος…χωριζέσθω 1 Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer back to **the unbeliever**, which could refer to either a man or a woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the unbeliever … let him or her go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 7 15 uefj figs-genericnoun ὁ ἄπιστος…ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ 1 Here Paul is speaking of unbelievers, brothers, and sisters in general and not of just one **unbeliever**, **brother**, or **sister**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these words with a comparable way to refer generically to unbelievers, brothers, and sisters. Alternate translation: “one of the unbelievers … the brother or the sister involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 7 15 h9qc figs-imperative χωριζέσθω 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “allow him to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 15 h9qc figs-imperative3p χωριζέσθω 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “allow him to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 15 jef4 figs-metaphor οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ 1 In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows Here, **bound** could refer to: (1) the marriage with an unbelieving spouse. Paul is saying that the **brother or the sister** does not need to try to preserve the marriage. They are not **bound** to the unbeliever but can accept the divorce. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is not bound to the unbeliever” (2) the rules that Paul laid out for staying with a spouse in [7:10–13](../07/10.md). Paul is saying that **the brother or the sister** does not have to follow those rules about staying with a spouse, and perhaps he is even saying that they can marry someone else. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is not bound to remain unmarried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 7 15 v76o figs-explicit ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ 1 In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows Here Paul uses **brother** and **sister** to identify the people involved as believers of both genders. The people he refers to are **brother** and **sister** of the Corinthian believers, not of the **unbeliever**. Rather, **the brother or the sister** is married to the **unbeliever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the brother or the sister** with a word or phrase that refers to believing husbands and wives. Alternate translation: “the believing husband or wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 7 15 q6k2 figs-activepassive οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **not bound** rather than focusing on what does the “binding.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “the marriage” does not bind the **brother** or **sister**. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 17 l5lu figs-infostructure ἑκάστῳ ὡς ἐμέρισεν ὁ Κύριος, ἕκαστον ὡς κέκληκεν ὁ Θεός, οὕτως περιπατείτω 1 each one If your language would state the command to **walk** before explaining how to **walk**, you could rearrange these clauses so that they read more naturally. Alternate translation: “let each one walk as the Lord has assigned to each one, as God has called each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 7 17 ya76 figs-ellipsis ὡς ἐμέρισεν ὁ Κύριος 1 each one Here Paul omits some words that might be needed in your language to make a complete sentence. If necessary, you could include what it is that **the Lord has assigned** by using a word such as “task” or “position.” Alternate translation: “as the Lord has assigned a position” or “as the Lord has assigned a task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 7 17 hl43 figs-metaphor περιπατείτω 1 each one Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were “walking.” If **let him walk** would not be understood as a description of a person’s way of life in your language, you could express the idea plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “let him live his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 7 17 c7b9 figs-imperative περιπατείτω 1 each one Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 17 c7b9 figs-imperative3p περιπατείτω 1 each one Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 17 o6v2 figs-gendernotations περιπατείτω 1 each one Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 7 17 iid2 καὶ οὕτως ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις πάσαις διατάσσομαι 1 I direct in this way in all the churches Alternate translation: “This is what I require from all the churches” 1CO 7 18 zo3j figs-gendernotations μὴ ἐπισπάσθω…μὴ περιτεμνέσθω 1 Was anyone called when he was circumcised? Here Paul is speaking of male circumcision only. Therefore, the masculine words in this verse should be retained in translation if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 18 gpav figs-activepassive τις ἐκλήθη…κέκληταί τις 1 Was anyone called when he was circumcised? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “Did God call anyone … Did God call anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 7 18 xt7p figs-activepassive περιτετμημένος 1 Was anyone called when he was circumcised? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **circumcised** rather than focusing on the person doing the “circumcising.” If you must state who does the action, you can use an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “someone having circumcised them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 7 18 tkn4 translate-unknown μὴ ἐπισπάσθω 1 Was anyone called when he was circumcised? To **be uncircumcised** refers to a physical procedure by which one could make one’s penis appear to have a foreskin, even though one had been circumcised. If your language has a word for this procedure, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you can use a phrase that identifies this procedure. Alternate translation: “Let him not hide his circumcision” or “Let him not undo his circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 7 18 cejz figs-imperative μὴ ἐπισπάσθω…μὴ περιτεμνέσθω 1 Was anyone called when he was circumcised? In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “He must not be uncircumcised … he must not be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 18 cejz figs-imperative3p μὴ ἐπισπάσθω…μὴ περιτεμνέσθω 1 Was anyone called when he was circumcised? In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “He must not be uncircumcised … he must not be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 18 uwuw figs-activepassive μὴ ἐπισπάσθω…μὴ περιτεμνέσθω 1 Was anyone called when he was circumcised? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **uncircumcised** or **circumcised** rather than the person doing the “uncircumcising” or “circumcising.” If you must state who does the action, you can use an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “Let someone not uncircumcise him … Let someone not circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 7 18 fqv6 figs-rquestion ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ κέκληταί τις? μὴ περιτεμνέσθω 1 Was anyone called in uncircumcision? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to identify people who fit into the situation he describes. If someone answered “yes” to this question, then the following command applies to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question with a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If anyone was called in uncircumcision, let him not be circumcised.” or “Some of you were called in uncircumcision. If that is you, do not be circumcised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 7 18 a8g3 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 Was anyone called in uncircumcision? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **uncircumcision**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “uncircumcised.” Alternate translation: “while uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -884,12 +884,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 20 ssaq ἐν τῇ κλήσει ᾗ ἐκλήθη 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “in the calling which God gave to him” or “in his own calling from God” 1CO 7 20 yy8l figs-gendernotations ἐκλήθη…μενέτω 1 General Information: Here, the words translated **he** and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **him**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she was called, let him or her remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 7 20 hsz1 figs-activepassive ἐκλήθη 1 in the calling … he should remain If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 7 20 s3mh figs-imperative μενέτω 1 in the calling … he should remain Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 20 s3mh figs-imperative3p μενέτω 1 in the calling … he should remain Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 20 hrqk figs-metaphor ἐν ταύτῃ μενέτω 1 in the calling … he should remain Here, **remain in** refers to faithfully serving God in a specific situation. In other words, Paul does not want them to try to change their social and economic situation. Instead, they should serve God in the situation in which God **called** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **remain in** plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “let him live his life in that” or “let him be content in that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 7 21 ag5a figs-yousingular ἐκλήθης…σοι…δύνασαι 1 Were you … called you? Do not be … you can become Here Paul addresses each individual person within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 1CO 7 21 nli9 figs-rquestion δοῦλος ἐκλήθης? μή σοι μελέτω 1 Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to identify people who fit into the situation he describes. If someone answered “yes” to this question, then the command that follows applies to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question with a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If you were called as a slave, let it not be a concern to you.” or “Some of you were called as slaves. If that is you, let it not be a concern to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 7 21 emau figs-activepassive ἐκλήθης 1 Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **you**, who are **called**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “Did God call you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 7 21 l8qt figs-imperative μή σοι μελέτω 1 Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should,” or you could rephrase the imperative. Alternate translation: “Do not be concerned about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 21 l8qt figs-imperative3p μή σοι μελέτω 1 Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should,” or you could rephrase the imperative. Alternate translation: “Do not be concerned about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 21 y02l grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ καὶ δύνασαι ἐλεύθερος γενέσθαι, μᾶλλον χρῆσαι 1 Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might be **able to become free**, or that person might not. He then specifies the result for if someone is **able to become free**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “indeed whoever is able to become free should take advantage of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 7 21 h7e1 χρῆσαι 1 Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned Alternate translation: “use the opportunity that you have” 1CO 7 22 mgt6 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 the Lord’s freeman Here, **For** provides support for the claim that Paul made at the beginning of the previous verse that those who are slaves should not be concerned by that ([7:21](../07/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **For** supports explicit. Alternate translation: “Do not be concerned about being a slave because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 24 yrp9 ἐν ᾧ ἐκλήθη 1 Brothers Alternate translation: “in that which God gave to him” or “in what he received from God” 1CO 7 24 qu1l figs-gendernotations ἐκλήθη, ἀδελφοί…μενέτω 1 Brothers Although **Brothers**, **he**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Brothers**, **he**, and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters … he or she was called, let him or her remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 7 24 c83e figs-activepassive ἐκλήθη 1 was called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 7 24 ghrk figs-imperative μενέτω 1 was called Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 24 ghrk figs-imperative3p μενέτω 1 was called Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 24 wix0 figs-metaphor ἐν τούτῳ μενέτω παρὰ Θεῷ 1 was called Here, **remain with God in that** refers to faithfully serving God in a specific situation. In other words, Paul does not want them to try to change their social and economic situations. Instead, they should serve God in the situations in which God called them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **remain with God in that** plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “let him live his life with God in that” or “let him be content serving God in that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 7 25 ag3x grammar-connect-words-phrases περὶ δὲ 1 Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the Lord Just as in [7:1](../07/01.md), **Now concerning** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to address. Likely, the topics that he introduces in this way are what the Corinthians wrote to him about. Translate **Now concerning** here as you did in [7:1](../07/01.md). Alternate translation: “Next, about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 7 25 f71a translate-unknown ἐπιταγὴν Κυρίου οὐκ ἔχω 1 Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the Lord Here Paul wishes to clarify that he is speaking out of the authority that he has as an apostle. He is not referring to anything that the Lord said while he was on earth, unlike what Paul did in [7:10](../07/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **I do not have a command of {the} Lord** with the language of “authority” or “quotation.” Alternate translation: “I do not quote from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -993,8 +993,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 36 m0hq writing-pronouns ὑπέρακμος καὶ οὕτως ὀφείλει γίνεσθαι…ποιείτω 1 his virgin Here, **it** could refer to: (1) what Paul is about to say, which is **he should do what he wants**. Alternate translation: “is beyond the age of marriage—then this is how it must be: he should do” (2) the necessity of getting married. Alternate translation: “is beyond the age of marriage and it seems necessary to marry—he should do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 7 36 wfea writing-pronouns ὃ θέλει ποιείτω 1 his virgin Here, **he** could refer to: (1) the fiancé, who wants to get married. Alternate translation: “the fiancé should do what he wants” (2) the father, who wants his daughter to get married. Alternate translation: “the father should do what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 7 36 pyh7 figs-explicit ὃ θέλει ποιείτω 1 let them marry Here, **what he wants** could refer to: (1) how the fiancé wants to get married and have sex. Alternate translation: “he should get married as he wants to” (2) how the father wants his daughter to get married. Alternate translation: “he should give her in marriage as he wants to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 7 36 ugk2 figs-imperative ποιείτω 1 let them marry Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “let.” Alternate translation: “let him do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1CO 7 36 j6lc figs-imperative γαμείτωσαν 1 let them marry Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “can.” Alternate translation: “they can marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 7 36 ugk2 figs-imperative3p ποιείτω 1 let them marry Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “let.” Alternate translation: “let him do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) +1CO 7 36 j6lc figs-imperative3p γαμείτωσαν 1 let them marry Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “can.” Alternate translation: “they can marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 36 wdj5 writing-pronouns γαμείτωσαν 1 let them marry Here, **them** identifies the man and the woman who are getting married. This fits with both the fiancé interpretation and the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “let the man and the woman marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 7 37 ta66 0 But if he is standing firm in his heart Much like the previous verse ([7:36](../07/36.md)), this verse has two primary interpretations: (1) the fiancé interpretation, which suggests that the verse is about a man who is engaged to marry a woman. In this case, Paul is saying that the man who decides not to marry his fiancée does **well**. (2) the father interpretation, which suggests that the verse is about a father who has a daughter. In this case, Paul is saying that the father who decides to keep his daughter from marrying does **well**. In the notes that follow, I will identify any choices that specifically match with these two major options. Follow the interpretation that you chose in the last verse. 1CO 7 37 nm99 figs-metaphor ὃς…ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος 1 But if he is standing firm in his heart Here Paul speaks as if a person’s **heart** were a place in which he or she could “stand firm.” By speaking in this way, Paul means that the person will not change what they have decided in his or her **heart**. It is as if they are standing **firm** in a specific location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “the one who settles on a decision” or “the one who firmly decides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” 1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “are beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All things are lawful**. Alternate translation: “are beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς…ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative3p μηδεὶς…ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **his**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or for **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself, but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 24 pn70 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but let each person seek the good of the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1461,12 +1461,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 5 e1pz figs-activepassive τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if her head were shaved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “as someone shaving her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 6 wamj grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **a woman** might **cover her head**, or she might not. He specifies the result for if the **woman does not cover her head**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 11 6 lac8 figs-explicit οὐ κατακαλύπτεται…κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **not** “covering” the **head** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “does not wear a cloth on her head … let her wear a cloth on her head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “loosens her hair … let her bind up her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 11 6 ahln figs-imperative καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “her hair also needs to be cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 11 6 ahln figs-imperative3p καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “her hair also needs to be cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 11 6 i9ou figs-activepassive καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair**, which is **cut off**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “let a person cut her hair off also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 6 s4r5 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 2 If it is disgraceful for a woman Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 11 6 lqlu figs-doublet τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here, **to have her hair cut off** refers to how **hair** is trimmed or cut much shorter. The phrase **to be shaved** refers to how **hair** can be cut so short that it is no longer visible. If your language has separate words for these two actions, you could use them here. If your language has only one word for cutting **hair** short, you could use just one word here. Alternate translation: “to have her hair cut short” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 11 6 pflq figs-activepassive τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair** that is **cut off** or **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting” or “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “to have someone cut her hair off or to shave her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 11 6 od1s figs-imperative κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “she needs to cover her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 11 6 od1s figs-imperative3p κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “she needs to cover her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 11 7 endt grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 should not have his head covered Here, **For** introduces further reasons why what Paul has argued about “covering heads” is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **For** untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces further reasons. Alternate translation: “Here are more reasons why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 7 cycr οὐκ ὀφείλει 1 should not have his head covered This could indicate that the **man**: (1) should not **cover his head**. Alternate translation: “must not” (2) is not required to **cover his head**, but he can do what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “is under no obligation” 1CO 11 7 aa4r figs-explicit κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν 1 should not have his head covered Here, **to cover his head** refers to using a piece of clothing that would be worn on the top and back of the head. The phrase does not refer to hair or to some piece of clothing that obscures the face. Paul does not clarify, however, what kind of clothing this might be. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to clothing. Alternate translation: “have a covering on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 27 d7ad figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “what is in the cup” or “the wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 27 z6en figs-explicit ἀναξίως 1 eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord Here, **in an unworthy manner** identifies behavior that is **unworthy** or “improper” for those who are participating in the Lord’s Supper. Paul has identified examples of this kind of behavior in [11:18–22](../11/18.md). This phrase does not refer to people who are **unworthy**. Rather it refers to behavior that is **unworthy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in an unworthy manner** with a phrase that identifies inappropriate or improper behavior in a specific context. Alternate translation: “while acting inappropriately” or “without respecting the Lord and fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 27 d51p figs-idiom ἔνοχος…τοῦ σώματος καὶ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord Here, **guilty of** could introduce: (1) what the person is **guilty of** doing. Here, that could be “profaning” or “dishonoring” the **body and the blood of the Lord**, or it could be participating in killing **the Lord**, which his **body** and **blood** signifies. Alternate translation: “guilty of dishonoring the body and the blood of the Lord” or “guilty of spilling the Lord’s blood and piercing his body” (2) whom the person has wronged. Here, that would be **the Lord** himself, particularly as he offered his **body** and **blood**. Alternate translation: “guilty of sinning against the Lord in his body and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 11 28 mwzr figs-imperative δοκιμαζέτω δὲ ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν, καὶ οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω. 1 examine In this verse, Paul uses three third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “But a man must examine himself, and in this way he should eat from the bread, and he should drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 11 28 mwzr figs-imperative3p δοκιμαζέτω δὲ ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν, καὶ οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω. 1 examine In this verse, Paul uses three third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “But a man must examine himself, and in this way he should eat from the bread, and he should drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 11 28 nhx7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν…ἐσθιέτω…πινέτω 1 examine Here, **man**, **himself**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these wordsby using word that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “a person … himself or herself … let him or her eat … let him or her drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 11 28 ih78 figs-infostructure οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω 1 examine Here, **in this way** introduces both **let him eat** and **let him drink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine **let him drink** and the earlier command, or you could repeat **in this way**. Alternate translation: “in this way let him eat from the bread and drink from the cup” or “in this way let him eat from the bread, and in this way let him drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 11 28 hzac figs-idiom ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω 1 examine Here, to **eat from** something means to **eat** some of that thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **eat from** with a word or phrase that refers to eating part of something. Alternate translation: “let him eat eat his portion of the bread” or “let him eat some of the loaf of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1603,7 +1603,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 33 nky5 figs-explicit ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε 1 wait for one another Here you should follow the interpretation of “each one takes his own supper first” that you chose in [11:21](../11/21.md). To **wait for one another** could be a command to: (1) avoid receiving food before others. This could prohibit people from receiving food that was specially prepared for them ahead of time in proportion to their social status. Or, it could prohibit the people who were served first from eating more than their fair share and using up all the food before others were served. Alternate translation: “eat the same food as everyone else” or “wait to eat until everyone has been served” (2) show hospitality to other believers by not devouring one’s own food and instead sharing with others. Alternate translation: “show hospitality to one another” or “share with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 34 zowl grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ 1 let him eat at home Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might be **hungry**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for **if anyone is hungry**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 11 34 aw3r figs-explicit εἴ τις πεινᾷ 1 let him eat at home Here, being **hungry** indicates one of the reasons why the Corinthians are acting improperly during the Lord’s Supper. They could be **hungry** enough that they are not waiting for everyone to receive food, or they could be **hungry** for specific kinds of food that were prepared specially for them and not for others. Make sure your translation matches how you translated [11:21](../11/21.md) and [33](../11/33.md). Alternate translation: “If anyone is so hungry that they cannot wait” or “If anyone desires specially prepared food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 11 34 v2uh figs-imperative ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “he must eat at home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 11 34 v2uh figs-imperative3p ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “he must eat at home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 11 34 jjqd figs-gendernotations ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 11 34 x1l8 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς κρίμα 1 not be for judgment Here, **for judgment** indicates what will happen if the Corinthians do not obey Paul’s instruction to **eat at home**. It does not indicate why the Corinthians are “coming together.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for judgment** with a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “with judgment as the result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 11 34 ti9q figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίμα 1 not be for judgment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “judge.” Paul implies that “God” is the one who is doing the “judging.” Alternate translation: “with the result that God judges you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 6aea0ebf4563942ec3e2b26fc65222d6bc54bc3c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:33:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 149/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 32 ++++++++++++++++---------------- 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f54bb84903..e674b51671 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1897,7 +1897,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 12 f6vn figs-idiom ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Here, **seek that you would abound** refers to desiring to have more of something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this construction with a comparable phrase that indicates a desire to have or do more. Alternate translation: “desire to overflow with them” or “endeavor to gain more of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 12 di2n figs-possession πρὸς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Here Paul uses the possession form to speak about **building up** that affects the **church**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by translating **building up** as a verb with **church** as its object. Alternate translation: “so that you could build up the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 14 12 j1h7 figs-metaphor τὴν οἰκοδομὴν 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md), [5](../14/05.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 14 13 dsve figs-imperative ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ, προσευχέσθω 1 interpret Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the one speaking in tongues must pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 13 dsve figs-imperative ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ, προσευχέσθω 1 interpret Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the one speaking in tongues must pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 13 j87g figs-genericnoun ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ 1 interpret Paul is speaking of people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 13 yjos figs-ellipsis διερμηνεύῃ 1 interpret Here Paul omits what the person is going to **interpret** since he already stated it in the previous clause (**a tongue**). If you need to specify what the person will **interpret**, you could include a reference to the **tongue** here. Alternate translation: “he might interpret it” or “he might interpret what he said in the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 14 13 a378 figs-gendernotations διερμηνεύῃ 1 interpret Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she might interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1976,34 +1976,34 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 26 m04v figs-parallelism ψαλμὸν ἔχει, διδαχὴν ἔχει, ἀποκάλυψιν ἔχει, γλῶσσαν ἔχει, ἑρμηνίαν ἔχει 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here Paul repeats **has** in order to emphasize any believer might “have” any of these things **when you come together**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul repeats **has** with another form that indicates that any person might have any of these things. Alternate translation: “has a psalm or a teaching or a revelation or a tongue or an interpretation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 14 26 qsx0 figs-abstractnouns ψαλμὸν ἔχει, διδαχὴν ἔχει, ἀποκάλυψιν ἔχει, γλῶσσαν ἔχει, ἑρμηνίαν ἔχει 1 What is tp be then, brothers? If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **revelation** or **interpretation**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “reveal” and “interpret.” If you do, you may need to translate all the items in the list with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “sings a psalm, instructs, explains something that was secret, speaks in a tongue, or interprets a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 26 dy8d figs-explicit ἑρμηνίαν 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, just as in [12:10](../12/10.md), **interpretation** refers specifically to interpreting **a tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the **interpretation** is about is an **interpretation** of a **tongue**. Alternate translation: “an interpretation of a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 26 xzz2 figs-imperative πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω 1 interpretation Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All things must happen for building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 26 xzz2 figs-imperative3p πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω 1 interpretation Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All things must happen for building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 26 fnba figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:12](../14/12.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 26 jvgw figs-explicit πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Here the Corinthians would have understood Paul to mean that the **building up** applies to other believers. If your readers would not infer this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “for building up believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 27 u8ew grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε 1 and each one in turn Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 27 gqdr figs-ellipsis κατὰ 1 and each one in turn Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. English needs these words, so the ULT has supplied them in brackets. If your language also needs these words, you could use these or similar ones. Alternate translation: “this should be done by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 14 27 qhl3 figs-explicit κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς 1 and each one in turn Paul does not explicitly state in what situation only **two or at most three** believers should speak **in a tongue**. The Corinthians would have understood him to be speaking about each time the believers gathered to worship God (see the expression “in the church” in [14:28](../14/28.md)). Paul does not mean that only **two or most three** people can ever speak in tongues. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what situation Paul is speaking about more explicitly. Alternate translation: “it should be by two or at most three every time you gather together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 27 wc1z figs-idiom ἀνὰ μέρος 1 and each one in turn Here, **in turn** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in turn** with a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “successively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 14 27 njmu figs-imperative εἷς διερμηνευέτω 1 and each one in turn Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “one should interpret” or “let one interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 27 njmu figs-imperative3p εἷς διερμηνευέτω 1 and each one in turn Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “one should interpret” or “let one interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 27 vvge figs-extrainfo εἷς 1 and each one in turn Here Paul does not indicate whether **one** is one of the people who is speaking **in a tongue** or if it is someone else. It is likely that Paul thinks that both options are acceptable. If possible, you should translate **one** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking **in a tongue** or to someone else. Alternate translation: “somebody” or “one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 27 ari2 figs-explicit διερμηνευέτω 1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:26](../14/26.md), **interpret** refers specifically to interpreting a **tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the person should **interpret** the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “must interpret the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 28 rlag grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 must interpret Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 28 bkc6 figs-explicit διερμηνευτής 1 must interpret Here, much like in [14:26–27](../14/26.md), **interpreter** refers specifically to someone who can interpret a tongue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the **interpreter** is the person who “interprets” the tongue. Alternate translation: “an interpreter for the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 28 znt9 figs-extrainfo μὴ ᾖ διερμηνευτής 1 must interpret Just as in [14:27](../14/27.md), the **interpreter** could be someone who speaks in tongues or some other person. If possible, you should translate **an interpreter** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking in a tongue or to someone else. Alternate translation: “no one can interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 28 u0ia figs-gendernotations σιγάτω…ἑαυτῷ…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** and **himself** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 14 28 c2wj figs-imperative σιγάτω…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be silent … he needs to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 28 c2wj figs-imperative3p σιγάτω…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be silent … he needs to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 28 nzye figs-explicit σιγάτω…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Here, **let him be silent** and **let him speak** refer specifically to speaking in “tongues.” They do not refer in general to any speaking **in church**. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “let him not speak the tongue … let him speak the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 28 pqky figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:19](../14/19.md), **in the church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meets to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in the church** by clarifying that **the church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 28 fl59 figs-idiom ἑαυτῷ…καὶ τῷ Θεῷ 1 must interpret Here, **to himself and to God** could refer to: (1) how the person should keep the “tongue” between **himself** and **God**. In other words, the only people who experience the “tongue” are the person speaking it and God. This would mean that the person speaking the “tongue” says words in their head or very quietly. Alternate translation: “in his mind to God” or “quietly to God” (2) how the person should speak the “tongue” after the meeting is over and “he” is by **himself**. In this way, only the person who speaks the “tongue” and **God** hear it. Alternate translation: “to God when he is by himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 29 x2fd grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here, **But** introduces similar instructions about a new topic (prophecy). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a related topic. Alternate translation: “In the same way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 14 29 a9iz figs-explicit προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak Paul does not explicitly state in what situation **two or three prophets** should **speak**. He does not mean that only **two or three** prophets can ever speak. He could be speaking about: (1) each time the believers gathered to worship God. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak every time you gather together” (2) the periods between when **the others evaluate**. In this case, **two or three prophets** can speak before the evaluation happens. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak consecutively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 29 kw3u figs-explicit δύο ἢ τρεῖς 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here, **two or three** does not restrict the number of prophets to only those two numbers. Rather, Paul uses **two or three** to give a general idea of how many **prophets** should **speak** when believers gather for worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **two or three** by including a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is giving examples or rough estimates. Alternate translation: “roughly two or three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 29 u33q figs-imperative προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν, καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “two or three prophets must speak, and the others must evaluate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 29 u33q figs-imperative3p προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν, καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “two or three prophets must speak, and the others must evaluate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 29 qdb8 writing-pronouns οἱ ἄλλοι 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here, **the others** could refer to: (1) all the believers who are not prophesying. Alternate translation: “the rest of the believers” (2) all the prophets who are not prophesying. Alternate translation: “the other prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 14 29 dsmv figs-explicit οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here Paul does not state what **the others** are supposed to **evaluate**. He implies that it is what the **prophets speak**. If your readers would not make this inference, you could refer to what the **prophets speak** explicitly. Alternate translation: “let the others evaluate what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 30 zd6m grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν 1 if a revelation is given to another Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **something** might be **revealed to another**, or it might not. He specifies the result for **something is revealed to another**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “when” or “suppose.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 14 30 sl1q figs-activepassive ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ καθημένῳ 1 if a revelation is given to another If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to keep the focus on the “revelation” and the person who receives it. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “another who is sitting there receives a revelation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 30 lcmf figs-explicit ἄλλῳ…καθημένῳ 1 if a revelation is given to another Here, **sitting** implies that the person is participating in the worship when the believers gather together. It further implies that the person is not the one speaking since the speaker would stand in Paul’s culture. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could state them explicitly. Alternate translation: “to another who is sitting and listening” or “to another worshiper who is listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 30 e2m4 figs-imperative ὁ πρῶτος σιγάτω 1 if a revelation is given to another Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the first must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 30 e2m4 figs-imperative3p ὁ πρῶτος σιγάτω 1 if a revelation is given to another Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the first must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 30 i3m1 writing-pronouns ὁ πρῶτος 1 if a revelation is given to another Here, **the first** refers back to one of the “two or three prophets” in [14:29](../14/29.md). It identifies the person who is speaking while **another** is **sitting there**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the first** with a word or phrase that identifies the person who is speaking while **something is revealed to another**. Alternate translation: “the one currently prophesying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 14 31 oytt grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 prophesy one by one Here, **For** introduces the reason why Paul wants “the first” speaker to “be silent” when another receives a revelation (see [14:30](../14/30.md)): if they do what he asks, **all are able to prophesy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word that introduces a reason for a command. Alternate translation: “Do that because, in this way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 14 31 gtsp figs-explicit πάντες 1 prophesy one by one Here Paul does not state who **all** are. He implies that **all** refers to everyone who receives a revelation from God (see [14:30](../14/30.md)). He does not have in mind every single believer who gathers together. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “all who receive a revelation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2020,15 +2020,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 33 m76o figs-metaphor ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις 1 God is not a God of confusion Here, **in all the churches** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **churches** as if they were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gatherings of believers who meet to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in all the churches** by clarifying that **the churches** refers to gatherings of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in all the gatherings of believers” or “in all the worship services” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 34 gjv2 figs-explicit αἱ γυναῖκες 1 let be silent Here, **women** could refer to: (1) married **women** (and possibly **women** with close male relatives). In support of this view is the reference to “{their} own husbands” in [14:35](../14/35.md). Alternate translation: “wives” (2) **women** in general. Alternate translation: “women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 34 ssjr figs-explicit αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν…λαλεῖν 1 let be silent Here, **be silent** and **speak** could refer to: (1) speaking or not speaking in specific situations related to “examining” prophecies (see [14:29](../14/29.md)). These specific situations would be when the woman’s husband or close male relative is the one who has prophesied. Alternate translation: “let the women be silent when their husbands are prophesying … to speak when their husbands are prophesying” (2) speaking or not speaking in disruptive ways, particularly asking questions improperly, talking loudly, or speaking out of turn. Paul is using **be silent** as he did in [14:28](../14/28.md), [30](../14/30.md): it does not prohibit any kind of talking but refers to “keeping quiet” when speaking would be disruptive. Alternate translation: “let the women avoid disruptive talk … to disrupt worship by speaking” (3) any official speaking, including prophecy, discerning prophecies, and tongues. Alternate translation: “remain silent … ever to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 34 h6ip figs-imperative αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the women must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 34 h6ip figs-imperative3p αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the women must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 34 d18m figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις 1 let be silent Here, **in the churches** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **churches** as if they were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gatherings of believers who meet to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in the churches** by clarifying that **the churches** refers to gatherings of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gatherings of believers” or “in the worship services” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 34 i3t3 figs-idiom οὐ…ἐπιτρέπεται αὐταῖς 1 let be silent Here, **it is not permitted** is a way to indicate that a custom or a practice is strongly forbidden. It does not state who forbids the custom or practice but rather indicates that this is generally accepted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **it is not permitted** with a comparable word or phrase that refers to a general prohibition. Alternate translation: “they are not allowed” or “they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 14 34 rwgg figs-imperative ὑποτασσέσθωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “let them be in submission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 34 rwgg figs-imperative3p ὑποτασσέσθωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “let them be in submission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 34 edeg figs-explicit ὑποτασσέσθωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul does not state to whom or what the **women** are **to be in submission**. If possible, you also should not express what they are **to be in submission** to. If you must consider the object of **submission**, Paul could imply that the **submission** is to: (1) husbands (or other close male relatives). Alternate translation: “to be in submission to their husbands” (2) to the order God has given the church. Alternate translation: “to act in line with the order of the church” (3) to the church as a whole, particularly the leaders. Alternate translation: “to be in submission to other believers” or “to be in submission to the leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 34 nszq figs-extrainfo καθὼς καὶ ὁ νόμος λέγει 1 let be silent Here Paul does not specify what he means by **law**. It could refer to [Genesis 3:16](../gen/03/16.md). However, it may just be a more general reference to the first five books of the Old Testament (the “Pentateuch”) or to the entire Old Testament (as Paul uses **law** in [14:21](../14/21.md)). If possible, do not clarify what meaning of **law** Paul had in mind, since he does not identify exactly what he means by **law**. Alternate translation: “just as you can find it in God’s commandments” or “just as it is written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 35 orcw grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 let be silent Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might **desire to learn anything**, or they may not. He specifies the result for **if they desire to learn anything**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “suppose.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 14 35 tzao figs-explicit τι μαθεῖν θέλουσιν 1 let be silent Here Paul does not state what the “women” or “wives” might **desire to learn** about. He could imply that they want **to learn** more and **ask** questions about: (1) what their husbands have said **in church**. Alternate translation: “they desire to learn anything about what their husbands have said” (2) what anyone has said **in church**. Alternate translation: “they desire to learn about what someone said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 35 hx7r figs-imperative ἐπερωτάτωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “they must ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 35 hx7r figs-imperative3p ἐπερωτάτωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “they must ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 35 a1dt figs-extrainfo αἰσχρὸν…ἐστιν 1 let be silent Here Paul does not express for whom this behavior is **disgraceful**. He almost certainly means that it brings “disgrace” on the woman and probably her family too. It may also bring “disgrace” on the whole group of believers. If possible, use an expression that is general enough to capture any or all of these ideas. Alternate translation: “it is shameful” or “it brings shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 35 fqot figs-explicit γυναικὶ 1 let be silent Here, just as in [14:34](../14/34.md), **woman** could refer to: (1) any married **woman** (and possibly any **woman** with close male relatives). In support of this view is the reference to **{their} own husbands** in this verse. Alternate translation: “for a wife” (2) any **woman** in general. Alternate translation: “for any woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 35 sj8l figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 let be silent Here, **in church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gathering of believers who meet to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in church** by clarifying that **church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “in the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2040,14 +2040,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 36 hdu2 figs-possession ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here Paul uses the possessive to describe a **word** that is: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 14 37 lrzp grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τις δοκεῖ προφήτης εἶναι ἢ πνευματικός 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul speaks as **If** some of the Corinthians might think that they are “prophets” or **spiritual**, but he knows that some of them do think in this way. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “Whoever thinks himself to be a prophet or spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 37 h265 figs-gendernotations δοκεῖ…ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Although **himself** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **himself** and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “thinks himself or herself … let him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 14 37 ab6u figs-imperative ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to acknowledge” or “he should acknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 37 ab6u figs-imperative3p ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to acknowledge” or “he should acknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 37 b81a figs-pastforfuture γράφω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses the present tense to refer to this letter, 1 Corinthians. If your language would not use the present tense to refer to a letter that one is currently writing, you could use the tense that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 14 37 z0hu figs-possession Κυρίου…ἐντολή 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses the possessive form to the describe the **command** as: (1) a **command** that he gives with the authority of **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord authorizes” or “a command that has the Lord’s authority” (2) a **command** that **the Lord** gave or currently gives. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 14 37 rc1r figs-abstractnouns Κυρίου…ἐντολή 1 he should acknowledge If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “what the Lord commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 38 ilzx grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…τις ἀγνοεῖ 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul speaks as **If** some of the Corinthians might be **ignorant**, but he expects that some of them truly might be. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “whoever is ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 38 m1lx ἀγνοεῖ, ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here, **ignorant** could refer to: (1) the opposite of “acknowledge” in the last verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)), that is, not accepting the authority of something or someone. Alternate translation: “does not acknowledge this, let him not be acknowledged” (2) not knowing that something is true. Alternate translation: “does not know this, let him continue not to know” 1CO 14 38 b8fk figs-explicit ἀγνοεῖ 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul does not state what the person **is ignorant** about. However, the previous verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)) implies that the person **is ignorant** about how what Paul has written is a command of the Lord. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “is ignorant that I am writing a command from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 38 fde9 figs-imperative ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must be ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 38 fde9 figs-imperative3p ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must be ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 38 nxo7 figs-explicit ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul does not state who is letting **him be ignorant**. He could mean: (1) that the Corinthians should **let him be ignorant**. Alternate translation: “you should let him be ignorant” (2) that God lets **him be ignorant**. Alternate translation: “God will let him be ignorant” or “God will consider him ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 38 u9qi figs-gendernotations ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 38 cwbs translate-textvariants ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge In Paul’s language, **let him be ignorant** and “he is considered ignorant” look and sound very similar. While some early and important manuscripts have “he is considered ignorant” here, many early and important manuscripts have **let him be ignorant**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “he is considered ignorant,” it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -2055,7 +2055,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 39 oe0c figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the term to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 39 jvr7 τὸ λαλεῖν…γλώσσαις 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Alternate translation: “speaking in tongues” 1CO 14 40 d7ia figs-activepassive πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to avoid stating who is “doing” **all {things}**, which makes the imperative more general. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do the action. Alternate translation: “you should do all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 40 mrnf figs-imperative πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “all things must be done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 40 mrnf figs-imperative3p πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “all things must be done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 40 y5wb translate-unknown εὐσχημόνως 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here, **properly** refers to behavior that is appropriate for the situation. See how you translated the similar word “appropriate” in [7:35](../07/35.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **properly** with a word or phrase that refers to appropriate or decent behavior. Alternate translation: “correctly” or “decently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 40 yh07 translate-unknown κατὰ τάξιν 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here, **in order** refers to how things, people, and actions are in proper place and sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in order** with a word or phrase that indicates such proper and organized things, people, and actions. Alternate translation: “in an organized way” or “in a correctly arranged way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

9. On the Resurrection of the Dead (15:1–58)
* The Gospel and Resurrection (15:1–11)
* Proof of Christ’s Resurrection (15:12–34)
* The Resurrection Body (15:35–58)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [15:54b](../15/54.md) (from [Isaiah 25:8](../isa/25/08.md)) and [15:55](../15/55.md) (from [Hosea 13:14](../hos/13/14.md)).

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Denying the resurrection

In [15:12](../15/12.md), Paul notes that some of the Corinthians are denying the resurrection of the dead. There are at least three possible reasons why they might do this: (1) they hold to a philosophy or theology that denies afterlife altogether; (2) they believe that some form of resurrection has already happened; and (3) they think that the body is not valuable or cannot resurrect. It is likely that a combination of these three reasons may account for why some Corinthians were denying that the dead resurrect. However, Paul himself only argues for the resurrection, and he does not explain what the Corinthians believe. So, you do not need to choose a specific view about why some of the Corinthians were denying the resurrection.

### The resurrection of the body

Throughout this chapter, Paul emphasizes that the resurrection of Christ and believers is in the body. He clarifies that this is a glorious, transformed body, but it is still a body. Make sure that you express Paul’s references to “resurrection” or “being raised” in such a way that they imply that bodies are given life again. Paul does not clarify in this chapter what happens to nonbelievers, since he focuses on believers. At the same time, he uses very general language to refer to “the resurrection of the dead.” If possible, preserve this general language without making any explicit claims about what happens to nonbelievers after they die. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])

### Adam and Christ

In [15:45–49](../15/45.md), Paul uses the “first man” Adam (the first human that God created) and the “last man” Jesus (the first human to rise from the dead) to speak about the current body and the resurrection body. Paul’s point is that everyone who is alive now on earth has a body like Adam’s, while those who rise from the dead will have a body like Jesus’ body. In this way, Jesus is a “Second Adam” because he is the first human to have the new kind of body. Make sure that your readers know who “Adam” is and that these verses compare and contrast Adam and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/adam]])

### “Natural” and “spiritual” bodies

In [15:44](../15/44.md), Paul introduces the terms “natural” and “spiritual” to describe two different kinds of bodies. He also refers to the “natural” body as “perishable” and “mortal,” and he refers to the “spiritual” body as “imperishable” or “incorruptible” and “immortal.” The contrast between these two kinds of bodies is not about how material or fleshly they are. Rather, the contrast is about whether they can die or not and whether they can live in the world when God has renewed it or not. Use words that make contrasts between different kinds of bodies, not words that make contrasts between bodies and other things, such as spirits. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Falling asleep

In [15:6](../15/06.md), [18](../15/18.md), [20–21](../15/20.md), Paul refers to people “falling asleep.” In his culture, this was a polite way to refer to dying. It is also possible that Paul uses this euphemism because people who “fall asleep” eventually “wake up,” just like those who die will eventually resurrect. However, “falling asleep” is a common euphemism for dying, so Paul may not mean anything more than that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate “falling asleep” by using a comparable euphemism or expressing the idea plainly. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])

### Parallelisms

In this chapter, and particularly in [15:39–44](../15/39.md), [53–55](../15/53.md), Paul uses parallel structures to make his point powerfully. Often, these parallel structures repeat every word except for one or two. The words that are different either add further ideas or make distinctions between ideas. If repetition is powerful in your language, preserve these parallelisms. If it would be helpful in your language, you could omit some words. In some cases, multiple parallel clauses can be expressed as one clause. In other cases, multiple parallel clauses can be expressed in shortened form using lists. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])

### Rhetorical questions

In [15:12](../15/12.md), [29–30](../15/29.md), [32](../15/32.md), [55](../15/55.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Hypothetical arguments

In [15:13–19](../15/13.md), Paul shows the Corinthians what would be true if the dead were not raised. He does not believe that this is true, but he assumes that it is true for the sake of his argument. These verses thus build from the hypothesis that the dead are not raised and go on to show that many other things which the Corinthians believe and do are worthless if the hypothesis is true. Use a form in your language that shows that Paul does not believe that the dead are not raised but that he uses this claim as the basis for a hypothetical argument. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])

### Farming analogy

In [15:36–38](../15/36.md), Paul uses a farming analogy. Just as a seed is sown (buried) in the ground and then transforms into a plant that looks very different than the seed, so also the human body is buried in the ground and then is transformed into a new body that is different than the one we have now. Paul returns to the language of “sowing” in [15:42–44](../15/42.md) but applies it directly to bodies. If possible, preserve the farming language throughout these sections, and use words and phrases that match farming techniques in your culture.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Son subordinated to Father?

In [15:28](../15/28.md), Paul says that “the Son himself” will “be subjected” to the Father, “the one who subjected all things to him.” This does not mean that the Son is inferior to the Father or is no longer God. Rather, it means that the Son obeys the Father, and the Father acts through the Son. Avoid using words or phrases in your language that imply that the Son is inferior to the Father in nature, power, or glory. Instead, use words or phrases that imply that the Son obeys and acts for the Father when relating to what God has created. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])

### “Body” in the singular

In [15:35–54](../15/35.md), Paul speaks about a “spiritual body” and a “natural body.” While he varies the descriptors he uses and sometimes uses adjectives alone without the word “body,” he always refers to each of these bodies in the singular. He does this because his language uses the singular form to speak about a category. Thus, when Paul speaks about a “spiritual body,” he is referring to the category to which spiritual bodies belong. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to a category, or if your readers would find the singular form confusing, you can use a plural form or another form that your language uses to refer to a category. The UST models several different options throughout the chapter.

### Common sayings

In [15:32–33](../15/32.md), Paul quotes two sayings that the Corinthians would have recognized. While the saying in [15:32](../15/32.md) can also be found in [Isaiah 22:13](../isa/22/13.md), Paul does not seem to have Isaiah in mind. Rather, he assumes the Corinthians would know both of the sentences he quotes as common sayings. Use a form in your language that introduces common sayings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -2429,7 +2429,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 1 nyy7 figs-infostructure ὥσπερ διέταξα ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Γαλατίας, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιήσατε 1 for the saints If your language would normally state the command (**you must do**) before the comparison (**even as**), you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “also you must do even as I directed the churches of Galatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 16 1 kh6h translate-names τῆς Γαλατίας 1 as I directed Here, **Galatia** is the name of a region in what is now Turkey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **Galatia** refers to by clarifying that it is a region or an area. Alternate translation: “of Galatia province” or “of the area named Galatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 16 2 w1jv figs-idiom κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 1 storing up Here, the **first of the week** refers to the first day of the week in the Jewish calendar, which is the day we call Sunday. It is also the day on which Christians would hold special gatherings since Jesus rose from the dead on this day of the week. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Every first of the week** with a normal way to refer to Sunday, the first day of the week, which is when Christians gather to worship God. Alternate translation: “Every Sunday” or “On the worship day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 16 2 bx0o figs-imperative ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τιθέτω 1 storing up Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “each of you must put something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 16 2 bx0o figs-imperative3p ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τιθέτω 1 storing up Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “each of you must put something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 16 2 ivmd figs-idiom ἕκαστος ὑμῶν παρ’ ἑαυτῷ τιθέτω 1 storing up Here, to **put something aside** refers to putting some money in a specific location in one’s house to use later for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put something aside** with a phrase that refers to putting money in a specific location. Alternate translation: “let each of you place some money in a special place” or “let each of you separate something out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 2 h8n9 translate-unknown θησαυρίζων 1 storing up Here, **storing up** refers to saving something, which in this case is money. Use a word or phrase that refers to saving money. Alternate translation: “reserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 2 ztyz figs-idiom ὅ τι ἐὰν εὐοδῶται 1 storing up Here, **whatever he might have prospered** refers to how much money a person earned. Here, the phrase could specifically refer to: (1) how much more a person made than what they needed or expected. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put something aside** from the extra money that they received. Alternate translation: “from whatever you earned more than you expected” (2) the amount a person made in a specific period of time. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put something aside** in proportion to how much they made during a week. Alternate translation: “according to how much you made that week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2471,7 +2471,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 10 p6vb figs-idiom βλέπετε ἵνα 1 see that he is with you unafraid Here, **see that** refers to carefully doing something or making sure that something happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **see that** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “ensure that” or “be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 10 kiou figs-explicit ἀφόβως γένηται πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 see that he is with you unafraid Here Paul implies that the Corinthians could make Timothy “afraid.” Throughout the letter, it has been clear that some of the Corinthians disagree with and even oppose Paul. Paul wants to make sure that the Corinthians do not treat Timothy badly because of his relationship with Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind why Paul wants to make sure that Timothy is **unafraid**more explicitly. Alternate translation: “you do not intimidate him” or “he is not afraid because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 10 bvi0 figs-abstractnouns τὸ…ἔργον Κυρίου ἐργάζεται 1 see that he is with you unafraid If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **work**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “work.” Alternate translation: “he is working for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 16 11 f4mw figs-imperative μή τις…αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ 1 Let no one despise him Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “no one should despise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 16 11 f4mw figs-imperative3p μή τις…αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ 1 Let no one despise him Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “no one should despise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 16 11 hkl7 translate-unknown μή τις…ἐξουθενήσῃ 1 Let no one despise him Here, **despise** refers to how people treat others who have low status, including looking down on them and ignoring them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **despise** with a word or phrase that refers to how people treat others of lower status badly. Alternate translation: “let no one scorn him” or “let no one treat him with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 11 y9zy figs-explicit προπέμψατε…αὐτὸν 1 Let no one despise him Here, just as in [16:6](../16/06.md), to **help** people on their **way** refers to assisting them with the things that they need to travel, including food and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **help him on his way** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “give him what he needs to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 11 qtcx figs-abstractnouns ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 Let no one despise him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “peaceably.” Alternate translation: “peaceably” or “in a peaceful way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -2498,7 +2498,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 13 b2pm figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 stand firm in the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea in another way. Here, **faith** could refer primarily to: (1) the act of believing. Alternate translation: “as you believe” or “in how you believe” (2) what they believe. Alternate translation: “in what you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 16 13 a3fs figs-idiom ἀνδρίζεσθε 1 act like men Here, **act like men** is a way to urge someone to be brave and courageous. The opposite of acting **like men** is acting like cowards. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “be stouthearted” or “act with courage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 13 xwvg figs-explicit κραταιοῦσθε 1 act like men Here, **be strong** does not refer to physical strength but rather to mental strength or determination. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **be strong** with a word or phrase that urges mental strength or determination. Alternate translation: “keep persevering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 16 14 rij5 figs-imperative πάντα ὑμῶν…γινέσθω 1 Let all that you do be done in love Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All your things must happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 16 14 rij5 figs-imperative3p πάντα ὑμῶν…γινέσθω 1 Let all that you do be done in love Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All your things must happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 16 14 kpnl figs-idiom πάντα ὑμῶν 1 Let all that you do be done in love Here, **all your {things}** refers to everything that a person thinks and does. If your reader would misunderstand **all your {things}**, you could use an expression that refers to all the **{things}** that a person thinks and does. Alternate translation: “all that you do” or “all things that you think and do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 14 pbvz figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 Let all that you do be done in love If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love” or an adjective such as “loving.” Alternate translation: “in a loving way” or “so that you are loving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 16 15 fy4e grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **Now** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a comparable word or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -2537,7 +2537,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 21 f483 figs-123person Παύλου 1 I, Paul, write this with my own hand Here, **Paul** speaks of himself in the third person. He does this to sign his name to the letter, which shows that the letter is from **Paul** himself and carries his authority. If your language has a specific form for signing letters or documents, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “I am Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 16 22 il5a grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τις οὐ φιλεῖ τὸν Κύριον 1 may he be accursed Here Paul speaks as **If** some people do **not love the Lord**, but he knows that this is true for some people. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “Whoever does not love the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 16 22 yacw figs-gendernotations ἤτω 1 may he be accursed Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using this word to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 16 22 nf3w figs-imperative ἤτω 1 may he be accursed Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “should” or “may.” Alternate translation: “he should be accursed” or “may he be accursed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 16 22 nf3w figs-imperative3p ἤτω 1 may he be accursed Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “should” or “may.” Alternate translation: “he should be accursed” or “may he be accursed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 16 22 c1kx figs-activepassive ἤτω ἀνάθεμα 1 may he be accursed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to emphasize the person who is **accursed** rather than the one doing the “cursing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “let God curse him” or “let him be under a curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 16 22 x8r3 translate-transliterate μαράνα θά 1 may he be accursed This is an Aramaic word. Paul spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. He assumes that they know that it means “Lord, come!” In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. If your readers would not know what **Maranatha** means, you could also explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Maranatha, which means, ‘Come Lord!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) 1CO 16 23 r9je translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Corinthians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from the Lord Jesus within you” or “I pray that you will have grace from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) From ab9962a28916bfe421ddade318b1958c1243ba18 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:47:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 150/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e674b51671..f294934f4b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1332,16 +1332,16 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…οὐκ…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Something that **is common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **what is common to humanity** with a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Something that **{is} common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{what is} common to humanity** with a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on who or what does the “tempting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” or “something” does it. Alternate translation: “someone to tempt you” or “anybody to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks as if a **temptation** could be **beyond** what the Corinthians **are able** to handle. By speaking as if the **temptation** is too far in distance, Paul emphasizes that a **temptation** that is **beyond** would be one that the Corinthians could not resist, just as they could not reach a place that is **beyond** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “above what you are able” or “so that you are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul omits what the Corinthians **are able** to do. If your language would state what they **are able** to do, you could include a word or phrase that would be used for “resisting” a temptation. Alternate translation: “you are able to withstand” or “you are able to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks of a **temptation** as if it were a trap that had a **way of escape**. By speaking in this way, Paul tells the Corinthians that God always provides a way to deal with a **temptation**, just as if a trap always had a **way of escape**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **way of escape** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the way out” or “the way to withstand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **so that you will be able to endure it** could: (1) state the result of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, with the result that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, which is being able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **{so that} you will be able to endure it** could: (1) state the result of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, with the result that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, which is being able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **beloved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “loving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ 1 flee away from idolatry Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you can express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible {people}**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible {people}**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible {people}**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **what I say** with a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that is characterized by **blessing**. This phrase identifies a specific **cup**, here, the **cup** used in the Lord’s Supper. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can identify the **cup** as the one used in the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “The cup in the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 tavb figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 The cup of blessing Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From dafab3655e885caa5eb8af8f77e92c2688f6def3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:52:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 151/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f294934f4b..bf34dc92c4 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 17 gfur figs-infostructure ὅτι εἷς ἄρτος, ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν; οἱ γὰρ πάντες ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου μετέχομεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul presents his argument by stating a premise, a conclusion, and then another premise. If your language would naturally state both premises before the conclusion, you could rearrange these clauses. Alternate translation: “Because there is one bread, and we all partake from the one bread, we who are many are one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 17 g954 translate-unknown εἷς ἄρτος…τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου 1 loaf of bread Here Paul speaks of **one bread** because he has in mind one “loaf” of **bread** from which **we** would eat pieces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one bread** with a word or phrase that refers to one loaf of **bread**. Alternate translation: “there is one loaf … the one loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 vvt7 figs-metaphor ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 18 f97w figs-idiom τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here, **according to the flesh** identifies **Israel** as a reference to the people who are physically descended from Abraham and part of the nation of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **according to the flesh** with a word or phrase that refers to physical descent or genealogy. Alternate translation: “ethnic Israel” or “Israel by physical descent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 18 f97w figs-idiom τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here, **according to {the} flesh** identifies **Israel** as a reference to the people who are physically descended from Abraham and part of the nation of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **according to {the} flesh** with a word or phrase that refers to physical descent or genealogy. Alternate translation: “ethnic Israel” or “Israel by physical descent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, they are.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “those who are eating the sacrifices are certainly partakers of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul refers to how the priests would offer some of a sacrifice to God, while the person who gave the sacrifice and others with that person would eat the rest. In this way, the person who gave the sacrifice shared the food with God and with others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **who are eating the sacrifices** by clarifying what Paul has in mind in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “those who eat the rest of the sacrifices after the priest has offered the best parts to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or coming into union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -1363,15 +1363,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 j8dj translate-unknown εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you can use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sacrificed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sacrificing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion οὖν…ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** are real or not. Alternate translation: “is real … is real” +1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **{food} sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **{food} sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** are real or not. Alternate translation: “is real … is real” 1CO 10 20 skct figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὅτι 1 Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply some from the previous verse ([10:19](../10/19.md)). Alternate translation: “Rather, I am saying that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 20 hvi0 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη…θύουσιν 1 Here Paul states the object before the verb. If your language would always put the object after the verb, you could rearrange this clause. Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles sacrifice what they sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **But** introduces a development in the argument. It does not introduce a strong contrast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or joining in union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with nonbelievers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 vgx5 figs-hyperbole οὐ δύνασθε…πίνειν…οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης…μετέχειν 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul states that they **are not able** to do both of these things even though he knows that they can physically do both of these things. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that it is shocking and unthinkable to do both of these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **You are not able**with a strong command or a statement of how bad doing both these things would be. Alternate translation: “You should never drink … You should never partake of the table” or “It is very wrong to drink … It is very wrong to partake of the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside **the cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in **the cup**. Alternate translation: “the drink … the drink” or “the wine in the cup … the wine in the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe “cups” and “tables” that are associated with **the Lord** or with **demons**. The **cup** and the **table** would be used in ceremonies or worship connected to either **the Lord** or the **demons**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can state it in another way. Alternate translation: “the cup used to worship the Lord … the cup used to worship demons … of the table used to worship the Lord … of the table used to worship demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **table** by more explicitly referring to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside **{the} cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in **{the} cup**. Alternate translation: “the drink … the drink” or “the wine in the cup … the wine in the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe “cups” and “tables” that are associated with **{the} Lord** or with **demons**. The **cup** and the **table** would be used in ceremonies or worship connected to either **{the} Lord** or the **demons**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can state it in another way. Alternate translation: “the cup used to worship the Lord … the cup used to worship demons … of the table used to worship the Lord … of the table used to worship demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **{the} table**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **table** by more explicitly referring to what would be on **{the} table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 22 nxv9 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [10:21](../10/21.md). If they do indeed participate in meals connected to the Lord and also meals connected to demons, they will **provoke the Lord to jealousy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word or phrase that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “If we do both of these things, do we not provoke the Lord to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **jealousy**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “do we provoke the Lord to be jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 2566d7307fb235056573df569b7739d92a5c66fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 15:56:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 152/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index bf34dc92c4..2b464bba3e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1376,17 +1376,17 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **jealousy**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “do we provoke the Lord to be jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not stronger than him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 23 z31s figs-doublet πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ. 1 Everything is lawful Here, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul repeats **All things {are} lawful for me** to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating **All things {are} lawful for me**, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can state **All things {are} lawful for me** once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““All things are lawful for me,’ but not all things are beneficial, and not all things build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1CO 10 23 tu2m writing-quotations πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. By using quotation marks, the ULT indicates that these claims are quotations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this by clarifying that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things are lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things are lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1CO 10 23 z31s figs-doublet πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ. 1 Everything is lawful Here, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul repeats **All {things are} lawful for me** to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating **All {things are} lawful for me**, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can state **All {things are} lawful for me** once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““All things are lawful for me,’ but not all things are beneficial, and not all things build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1CO 10 23 tu2m writing-quotations πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. By using quotation marks, the ULT indicates that these claims are quotations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **All {things are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this by clarifying that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things are lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things are lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” -1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “are beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All things are lawful**. Alternate translation: “are beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “are beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All {things are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “are beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative3p μηδεὶς…ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **his**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or for **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself, but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or for **the other {person}**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself, but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 24 pn70 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but let each person seek the good of the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the other person** with a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-explicit ἐν μακέλλῳ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote to explain the context and say why Paul is speaking about **the market**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other {person}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the other {person}** with a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-explicit ἐν μακέλλῳ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **{the} market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote to explain the context and say why Paul is speaking about **the market**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sold** rather than focusing on the person doing the “selling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **asking** to provide an object for **asking**, or you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) the **asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that the **asking** is **for the sake of conscience**, but they should not be worried about **conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From f098d4eec14bb19030bb1aa0f082ee2dd2f1be2d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 16:00:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 153/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2b464bba3e..28e6caf2c5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 krcv figs-idiom τὸ παρατιθέμενον ὑμῖν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here, **that is set before you** refers physically to a waiter or servant “setting” food on the table in front of the person eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this way of speaking about the food that one is served with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “that is on the table” or “that they offer to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **set** rather than focusing on the person doing the “setting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that one of the “unbelievers” does it. Alternate translation: “that the unbeliever sets before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **asking questions** to provide an object for **asking questions** or to explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 27 pqsl writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here,**the conscience** identifies **the conscience** of each of the people who are eating with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **the conscience**with a form that more clearly identifies **the conscience** as belonging to the person who is eating with **unbelievers**. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 28 vmvt grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **someone** might tell **you** that the food is **offered in sacrifice**, or **someone** might not. He specifies the result for if the **someone** does tell **you**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-quotations ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “says to you that the food was offered in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -1413,13 +1413,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 28 f8mv translate-textvariants συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you After **conscience**, some manuscripts include “For ‘the earth {is} the Lord’s, and the fullness of it.’” This seems to be an accidental repetition of [10:26](../10/26.md). If possible, do not include this addition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Alternate translation: “now the conscience I am talking about is not” 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-ellipsis συνείδησιν…λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 and not yours Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “I mean.” Alternate translation: “when I say the conscience, I mean not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours Here, **the other person** is the one who spoke about how the food was “offered in sacrifice” in [10:28](../10/28.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express who **the other person** is by clarifying to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “of the person who informed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? Here, **for** introduces further support for the point that Paul was making in [10:25–27](../10/25.md) about how “conscience” is not significant for eating food at someone’s house. This means that [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) interrupt the argument. For ways to mark this in your translation, see the chapter introduction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add some words that clarify that Paul is returning to an earlier argument in verse 27. Alternate translation: “In most cases, though,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours Here, **the other {person}** is the one who spoke about how the food was “offered in sacrifice” in [10:28](../10/28.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express who **the other {person}** is by clarifying to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “of the person who informed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? Here, **For** introduces further support for the point that Paul was making in [10:25–27](../10/25.md) about how “conscience” is not significant for eating food at someone’s house. This means that [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) interrupt the argument. For ways to mark this in your translation, see the chapter introduction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add some words that clarify that Paul is returning to an earlier argument in verse 27. Alternate translation: “In most cases, though,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 29 dr73 figs-123person ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 For why … conscience? Here Paul begins speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. What he says in [10:33](../10/33.md) confirms that this is why he uses the first person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the first person here by clarifying that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “my freedom, for example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “my freedom is certainly not judged by another’s conscience.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **my freedom** that is **judged** rather than focusing on **another’s conscience**, which does the “judging.” Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you can express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 30 x2v5 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 If I partake Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might **partake with gratitude**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for if the person does **partake with gratitude**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 10 30 x2v5 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 If I partake Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might **partake with gratitude**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for if the person does **partake with gratitude**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 10 30 b7n9 figs-123person ἐγὼ…βλασφημοῦμαι…ἐγὼ 1 If I partake Here Paul continues speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. What he says in [10:33](../10/33.md) confirms that this is why he uses the first person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the first person here by clarifying that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “I, for example, … am I insulted … I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 10 30 n89t figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 with gratitude If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gratitude**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “gratefully” or an adjective such as “grateful.” Alternate translation: “gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From b7e49ca9ec3773b18295bfb0969bd89e9af9f179 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 17:28:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 154/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 87d53ef42b..c6f6636062 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ GAL 2 16 j7g5 figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 no flesh The word **flesh** refers to h GAL 2 16 ctbj figs-extrainfo οὐ…ἄνθρωπος…πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) GAL 2 17 gf9q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) GAL 2 17 gtu7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **justified in Christ** means justified because of being united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 17 vnp6 figs-explicit ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 while we seek to be justified in Christ The phrase **justified in Christ** means made righteous in God’s sight because of being united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” or “for God to justify us because of our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -226,6 +226,8 @@ GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” +GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking or acting in obligation to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying **those things**. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to what those who were teaching that it was necessary to keep the laws of Moses were doing . Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the law of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 18 moqm figs-metaphor κατέλυσα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of as if ****. He means that . If your readers would not understand what it means to be **** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 The phrase **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From c6d1e132fc1fdf2ca534ce9baef7590120b2a8e0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 17:28:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 155/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c6f6636062..c7948a71c6 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” -GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking or acting in obligation to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying **those things**. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to what those who were teaching that it was necessary to keep the laws of Moses were doing . Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the law of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking or acting in obligation to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying **those things**. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to what those who were teaching that it was necessary to keep the laws of Moses were doing . Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the law of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 moqm figs-metaphor κατέλυσα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of as if ****. He means that . If your readers would not understand what it means to be **** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 The phrase **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 041000194c9293972b2b01ba30a3bf777ea0cbfe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 17:32:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 156/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c7948a71c6..c688388a00 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” -GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking or acting in obligation to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying **those things**. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to what those who were teaching that it was necessary to keep the laws of Moses were doing . Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the law of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking or acting as if it were necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to again going back to acting like and teaching that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 moqm figs-metaphor κατέλυσα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of as if ****. He means that . If your readers would not understand what it means to be **** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 The phrase **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 3c748cf1b064e22bd803ee42501ddf7cfc97f863 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 18:33:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 157/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 28e6caf2c5..d3d4190992 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1447,15 +1447,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 3 en95 figs-explicit γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 1 a man is the head of a woman Here, **man** and **woman** could refer to: (1) a **man** and **woman** who are married to each other. Alternate translation: “the husband is … of his wife” (2) any people who are male and female. Alternate translation: “the male person is … of a female person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 3 scbp figs-genericnoun κεφαλὴ…γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 2 a man is the head of a woman Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “each man is the head of his woman” or “each man is the head of each woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 11 4 evt9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων 1 having something on his head Here, **having something on his head** happens at the same time as **praying or prophesying**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the relationship between these events with a word or phrase that indicates that the events happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “while he has something on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1CO 11 4 uuv2 figs-explicit κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων 1 having something on his head Here, **something on his head** refers to a piece of clothing that would be worn on the top and back of the head. The phrase does not refer to hair or to some piece of clothing that obscures the face. Paul does not clarify, however, what kind of clothing this might be. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to clothing. Alternate translation: “having a covering on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 11 4 uuv2 figs-explicit κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων 1 having something on his head Here, **something on {his} head** refers to a piece of clothing that would be worn on the top and back of the head. The phrase does not refer to hair or to some piece of clothing that obscures the face. Paul does not clarify, however, what kind of clothing this might be. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to clothing. Alternate translation: “having a covering on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 4 g11x translate-unknown καταισχύνει 1 having something on his head Here, **dishonors** is a word that refers to shaming someone else or causing them to lose honor. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this idea. Alternate translation: “shames” or “takes honor away from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 4 lit3 figs-metaphor τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 dishonors his head Here, **his head** could refer to: (1) how [11:3](../11/03.md) states that “Christ is the head of every man.” The phrase **his head** thus refers to “Christ” as the **head** of the man. Alternate translation: “Christ, his head” (2) the man’s physical **head**, which would mean that the man **dishonors** “himself.” Alternate translation: “his own head” or “himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 11 5 b7ku figs-explicit ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 woman who prays … dishonors her head Here, **with the head uncovered** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. This piece of clothing would be similar to the one discussed in the last verse. Alternate translation: “without a cloth on the head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “with her hair unbound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 11 5 k5yl figs-possession τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 with her head uncovered Here the Corinthians would have understood **the head** to refer to the **head** of the **woman**. If your readers would understand this, you could include a possessive word that clarifies whose **head** is in view. Alternate translation: “with her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 11 5 b7ku figs-explicit ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 woman who prays … dishonors her head Here, **with {her} head uncovered** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. This piece of clothing would be similar to the one discussed in the last verse. Alternate translation: “without a cloth on the head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “with her hair unbound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 5 zcfw translate-unknown καταισχύνει 1 with her head uncovered Here, **dishonors** is a word that refers to shaming someone else or causing them to lose honor. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this idea. Alternate translation: “shames” or “takes honor away from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 5 b9bd figs-metaphor τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς 1 as if her head were shaved Here, **her head** could refer to: (1) how [11:3](../11/03.md) states that “the man {is} the head of a woman.” The phrase **her head** thus refers to “the man” as the **head** of the woman. This man would be the woman’s husband. Alternate translation: “her husband, her head” (2) again how [11:3](../11/03.md) states that “the man is the head of a woman.” In this case, “the man” would refer to men in general. Alternate translation: “every man, her head” (3) the woman’s physical **head**, which would mean that the woman **dishonors** “herself.” Alternate translation: “her own head” or “herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 5 sw8t writing-pronouns ἐστιν 1 as if her head were shaved Here, **it** refers back to having **the head uncovered**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **it** refers to more clearly. Alternate translation: “having the head uncovered is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 11 5 pco3 figs-idiom ἓν…ἐστιν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if her head were shaved Here, **one and the same thing** is a way to say that two things are similar or identical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it is the same thing as having been shaved” or “this is just like having been shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 11 5 pco3 figs-idiom ἓν…ἐστιν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if her head were shaved Here, **one and the same {thing}** is a way to say that two things are similar or identical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it is the same thing as having been shaved” or “this is just like having been shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 5 fd7y figs-ellipsis τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if her head were shaved Here, **having been shaved** refers to the **head**. If you need to clarify what is being **shaved**, you could include **head**. Alternate translation: “as her head having been shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 11 5 ltq4 figs-explicit τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if her head were shaved In Paul’s culture, a woman with a **shaved** head would experience shame and dishonor, and Paul assumes this for the sake of his argument. If that is not true in your culture, you might need to clarify that a **shaved** head was shameful for a woman. Alternate translation: “as having been shamefully shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 5 e1pz figs-activepassive τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if her head were shaved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “as someone shaving her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 20f8390abce893fae5c921bdf9304ec84134477f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 19:43:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 158/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c688388a00..8d0701f7e1 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ GAL 2 12 yeeb grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** int GAL 2 12 hqcc figs-go ἐλθεῖν…ἦλθον 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 12 b23d grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 2 12 a6gv ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν 1 kept away from Alternate translation: “stayed away from” -GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 12 z1kg figs-explicit φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly as modeled by the UST. See [6:12](../06/12.md) where Paul says that those trying to compel the Galatian believers were doing so because the did not want to be persecuted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 12 fy79 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those who were demanding circumcision See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 13 urwh figs-explicit οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 13 nkrh grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From 712510a28d47208543cf1466acb3960825e77661 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 21:54:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 159/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 8d0701f7e1..92c79ac394 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -222,9 +222,8 @@ GAL 2 17 m0tl figs-activepassive δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ 1 GAL 2 17 s2r8 figs-exclusive εὑρέθημεν 1 When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 17 sge2 εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 we too, were found to be sinners The phrase **were also found to be sinner** could mean: (1) they admit they are sinners (2) they are no longer following the law (3) others view them as sinners for not following the law or eating with non-Jews. -GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being a sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking or acting as if it were necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to again going back to acting like and teaching that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 moqm figs-metaphor κατέλυσα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of as if ****. He means that . If your readers would not understand what it means to be **** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From f0504fb399bbcd0747fe374908e173e7d0d06c3a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 27 Oct 2022 21:59:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 160/269] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 8 ++------ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 92c79ac394..7d84f3eda6 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -224,12 +224,8 @@ GAL 2 17 mg0h figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** fo GAL 2 17 ph83 figs-activepassive εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 17 c1op figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλοί…ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being a sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 17 qw76 figs-rquestion ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος 1 The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -GAL 2 17 yy9s figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” -GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking or acting as if it were necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to again going back to acting like and teaching that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 2 18 moqm figs-metaphor κατέλυσα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of as if ****. He means that . If your readers would not understand what it means to be **** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 2 18 r52x παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 The phrase **I prove myself to be a transgressor** could mean: (1) Paul sinned by trying to obey the law again (2) Paul sinned by leaving the law for a time when he believed in the Messiah (3) the law proves Paul is a sinner when he tries to follow it. -GAL 2 18 vnv0 figs-explicit ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 Here, the phrase **rebuild those {things} which I destroyed** refers to FILL OUT If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “FILL and remember to include whole OrigLang snippet in AT” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 18 p6he figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ 1 **I again rebuild those things which I destroyed** is a metaphor for someone who returns to trying to obey the law after they trusted in the Messiah. He compares trying to follow the law with someone trying to build a building. He compares someone who trusts in the Messiah with someone who destroys the building they are trying to build. He compares someone who returns to trying to follow the law after trusting the Messiah with someone who wants to rebuild the building they destroyed. Alternate translation: “If I believe in Christ to be justified before God instead of following the law, and then I change my mind and start following the law again for justification.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 17 yy9s μὴ γένοιτο 1 Absolutely not! The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” +GAL 2 18 mwuo figs-metaphor ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω 1 Paul speaks of no longer thinking it is necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to going back again to acting like, and teaching, that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 18 o7g8 figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 19 wdaa grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Desilva 47 Here, the word **For** indicates that what follows is FILL IN. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) GAL 2 19 xe23 διὰ νόμου 1 The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law” From 35101bd2ad81d445851eb4a9a820b75f0ec53c88 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 11:30:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 161/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 18 +++++++----------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index e5621e6dd8..734be241cb 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1192,17 +1192,13 @@ MAT 17 6 wd76 καὶ ἀκούσαντες, οἱ μαθηταὶ 1 And having MAT 17 6 a87e figs-idiom ἔπεσαν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτῶν 1 fell on their face Here, **fell on their face** is an idiom that means that the 3 disciples fell down with their faces to the ground. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fell down with their faces to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 17 7 iw4l figs-quotations ἁψάμενος αὐτῶν εἶπεν, ἐγέρθητε καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσθε\n 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “and having touched them, told them to get up and to not be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])\n MAT 17 8 i9gt grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδένα εἶδον εἰ μὴ αὐτὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον 1 If it would in appear your language that Matthew was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only saw Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) -MAT 17 9 jz51 καὶ καταβαινόντων αὐτῶν 1 As they were coming down Alternate translation: “And as Jesus and the disciples were coming down” -MAT 17 9 y9rq figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 17 10 nwt5 figs-explicit τί οὖν οἱ γραμματεῖς λέγουσιν ὅτι Ἠλείαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν πρῶτον? 1 The disciples are referring to the belief that **Elijah** will come back to life and return to the people of Israel before the Messiah comes. Alternate translation: “Why then do the scribes say that it is necessary for Elijah to come first?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 17 11 xbs2 ἀποκαταστήσει πάντα 1 will restore all things Alternate translation: “will put things in order” or “will get the people ready to receive the Messiah” -MAT 17 12 whp9 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν 1 But I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MAT 17 12 a4h7 ἐποίησαν…αὐτῶν 1 they did … them Here, **they** and **them** could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. (2) all the Jewish people. -MAT 17 12 i74i figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 17 14 t687 0 Connecting Statement: This begins an account of Jesus healing a boy who had an evil spirit. These events happen immediately after Jesus and his disciples descend from the mountain. -MAT 17 15 ufb4 figs-explicit ἐλέησόν μου τὸν υἱόν 1 have mercy on my son It is implied that the man wants Jesus to heal his son. You can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have mercy on my son and heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 17 15 hs55 σεληνιάζεται 1 he is epileptic The phrase **he is epileptic** means that he sometimes had seizures. He would become unconscious and move uncontrollably. Alternate translation: “he has seizures” -MAT 17 17 lyu5 ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμμένη, ἕως πότε 1 O unbelieving and perverse generation, how long Alternate translation: “O you generation that does not believe in God and does not know what is right or wrong. How long” +MAT 17 9 y9rq figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first person form as demonstrated in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 17 12 a4h7 writing-pronouns ἐποίησαν…αὐτῶν 1 they did … them The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to the religious leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]] +MAT 17 12 i74i figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated **Son of Man** in [17:9](../17/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 17 13 cskj writing-background τότε συνῆκαν οἱ μαθηταὶ ὅτι περὶ Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 Matthew provides this background information to show how the disciples reacted to what Jesus has just said. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 17 15 ufb4 figs-explicit ἐλέησόν μου τὸν υἱόν 1 have mercy on my son See how you translated **have mercy** in [15:22](../15/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 17 15 hs55 translate-unknown σεληνιάζεται 1 he is epileptic Here, **epileptic** is a condition where someones body moves without their ability to control it. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 17 17 lyu5 figs-nominaladj ἄπιστος 1 O unbelieving and perverse generation, how long Jesus is using the adjective **unbelieving** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “unbelieving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 17 17 su3r figs-rquestion ἕως πότε μεθ’ ὑμῶν ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 how long will I be with you? How long will I bear with you? These questions show Jesus is unhappy with the people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am tired of being with you! I am tired of your unbelief and corruption!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 17 18 i8kd figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύθη ὁ παῖς 1 the boy was healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the boy became well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 17 18 h2gc figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 7820d142305c97c6719b3e95fa8eaaf8bddaa9dc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 12:08:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 162/269] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 734be241cb..229ec7d79b 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1199,9 +1199,9 @@ MAT 17 13 cskj writing-background τότε συνῆκαν οἱ μαθηταὶ MAT 17 15 ufb4 figs-explicit ἐλέησόν μου τὸν υἱόν 1 have mercy on my son See how you translated **have mercy** in [15:22](../15/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 17 15 hs55 translate-unknown σεληνιάζεται 1 he is epileptic Here, **epileptic** is a condition where someones body moves without their ability to control it. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 17 17 lyu5 figs-nominaladj ἄπιστος 1 O unbelieving and perverse generation, how long Jesus is using the adjective **unbelieving** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “unbelieving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 17 17 su3r figs-rquestion ἕως πότε μεθ’ ὑμῶν ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 how long will I be with you? How long will I bear with you? These questions show Jesus is unhappy with the people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am tired of being with you! I am tired of your unbelief and corruption!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 17 18 i8kd figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύθη ὁ παῖς 1 the boy was healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the boy became well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 17 18 h2gc figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 17 17 su3r figs-rquestion ἕως πότε μεθ’ ὑμῶν ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 how long will I be with you? How long will I bear with you? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 17 18 i8kd figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύθη ὁ παῖς 1 the boy was healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Jesus” did it. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed the boy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 17 18 h2gc figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour Here, **from that hour** is an idiom that means the boy was healed instantly. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “instantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 17 19 pz9f figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Here, **we** refers to the speakers but not the hearers and so is exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) MAT 17 19 r9j7 διὰ τί ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκβαλεῖν αὐτό? 1 For what reason were we not able to cast it out? Alternate translation: “Why could we not make the demon come out of the boy?” MAT 17 20 u5ll ἀμὴν, γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 For I truly say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “For I tell you the truth” From 983d0fea3a4c1cd43db9f6f741e0c5fe8be2271b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 08:52:17 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 163/269] Updated "If your readers might misunderstand" wording. --- en_tn_02-EXO.tsv | 298 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 149 insertions(+), 149 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv index 72e4317785..e3c0022db6 100644 --- a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv @@ -4,11 +4,11 @@ EXO 1 intro cj55 0 # Exodus 01 General Notes

## Structure and Formatti EXO 1 1 h51f writing-background 0 Verses 1–7 are background information for the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 1 1 fxbx figs-go הַ⁠בָּאִ֖ים…בָּֽאוּ 1 The words translated as **came in** could also be translated as “went in.” Use whichever form is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 1 1 e65z translate-names יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל…יַעֲקֹ֔ב 1 **Jacob** and **Israel** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 1 1 g89k figs-metonymy וּ⁠בֵית֖⁠וֹ 1 household Here, **house** refers to all of the people who live together, usually a large family with servants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 1 g89k figs-metonymy וּ⁠בֵית֖⁠וֹ 1 household Here, **house** refers to all of the people who live together, usually a large family with servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 5 uk67 figs-metonymy וַֽ⁠יְהִ֗י כָּל־נֶ֛פֶשׁ יֹצְאֵ֥י יֶֽרֶךְ־יַעֲקֹ֖ב שִׁבְעִ֣ים נָ֑פֶשׁ 1 household Here, **lives** refers to people (specifically, men); **going out of the loins of Jacob** is a reference to these people as being in his seed or semen and produced through his sexual acts–therefore meaning they are his descendants. See also Hebrews 7:9-10. Alternate translation: “And all the male descendants of Jacob numbered 70.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 6 sh42 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יָּ֤מָת 1 They did not die immediately. Jacob and his sons spent the rest of their lives in Egypt and died there. If necessary, use a transition word that conveys that some time passed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 1 6 g5qg translate-kinship וְ⁠כָל־אֶחָ֔י⁠ו 1 all his brothers **All his brothers** includes ten older brothers and one younger brother. If your language has different words for those, you can say, “his ten older brothers and his younger brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -EXO 1 7 c368 figs-metonymy וּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 This is the first of many times in this book that **sons of Israel** refers to the Israelite nation or people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the people of Israel” or “And the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 7 c368 figs-metonymy וּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 This is the first of many times in this book that **sons of Israel** refers to the Israelite nation or people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the people of Israel” or “And the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 7 c7ep figs-doublet פָּר֧וּ וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁרְצ֛וּ וַ⁠יִּרְבּ֥וּ וַ⁠יַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ 1 All of these verbs mean similar things; they are used together to emphasize that the Israelites became very numerous. If your language doesn’t have as many words that mean the same thing, you can use fewer words and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “had many children and became strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 1 7 uo65 פָּר֧וּ…וַ⁠יִּרְבּ֥וּ…וַ⁠תִּמָּלֵ֥א הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ 1 Compare your translation of **fruitful … and multiplied … and the land was filled** here to Genesis 1:28, 9:1, 9:7, and especially Genesis 35:11 where God renamed Jacob to be called Israel. EXO 1 7 nk2l figs-metaphor פָּר֧וּ וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁרְצ֛וּ 1 were fruitful The birth of children to the Israelites is spoken of as if they were plants that were producing fruit and causing new plants to grow around them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “had many children” or “gave birth to many children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ EXO 1 7 e110 figs-idiom בִּ⁠מְאֹ֣ד מְאֹ֑ד 1 Here the same word EXO 1 7 piq4 writing-pronouns אֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 with them Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 1 8 eu8y writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם 1 This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 1 8 d20y writing-participants מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ 1 The story begins with the new king. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 1 8 t6jd figs-metonymy וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ עַל־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 arose over Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the place and the people of Egypt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And a new king began to rule over the Egyptians and the country of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 1 8 dnkw figs-metonymy לֹֽא־יָדַ֖ע אֶת־יוֹסֵֽף 1 Here, **Joseph** refers to both the person Joseph and to all of the good things that he did for Egypt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 8 t6jd figs-metonymy וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ עַל־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 arose over Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the place and the people of Egypt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And a new king began to rule over the Egyptians and the country of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 8 dnkw figs-metonymy לֹֽא־יָדַ֖ע אֶת־יוֹסֵֽף 1 Here, **Joseph** refers to both the person Joseph and to all of the good things that he did for Egypt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 9 aku3 figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֗ה 1 **Behold** draws special attention to what is about to be said. Use a way of drawing people’s attention that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 1 9 x65i figs-possession עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 his people The people whom the king rules over and who are also part of his group (probably shared ethnicity, tribe, or clan) rather than the Israelite group are spoken of as if they belonged to the king. This is an instance of the possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 1 9 t7s1 עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 There is some ambiguity as to whom exactly Pharaoh was addressing. It could have been: (1) the people who lived in Egypt, the Egyptians or (2) some group of “his people” like his advisors, generals, nobles, or friends and family. Even if option 1 is meant, it is quite possible that he actually spoke to some smaller group of representatives, as in option 2. @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ EXO 1 11 pkz4 עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 store cities These were p EXO 1 11 dy34 figs-possession עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 The possessive is objective; storage of goods is what occurs in the cities. Alternate translation: “cities for storing things”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 1 12 c1fy grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ יְעַנּ֣וּ אֹת֔⁠וֹ כֵּ֥ן יִרְבֶּ֖ה וְ⁠כֵ֣ן יִפְרֹ֑ץ 1 This sentence expresses a result that is the opposite of what the king expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 1 12 pdfk figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יָּקֻ֕צוּ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **dread** in another way. Alternate translation: “And they were very afraid of the face of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 1 12 qgzz figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in their country. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the growing Israelite population” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 12 qgzz figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in their country. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the growing Israelite population” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 13 j1q6 figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֧דוּ מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ 1 made…work rigorously Here, **rigor** is a noun used to modify the verb **enslaved**. **Rigor** could refer either to how hard the work was or how unkindly the Egyptians treated the Israelites. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work very hard” or “And harshly, the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 1 14 mx6v figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ אֶת־חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם 1 made their lives bitter The difficult lives of the Israelites are spoken of as if their daily lives were bitter food that was difficult to eat. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And they made their lives very difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 1 14 jre2 figs-abstractnouns בַּ⁠עֲבֹדָ֣ה קָשָׁ֗ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind **slavery** in another way. Alternative translation: “by making them work hard as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ EXO 1 15 h8f8 translate-names שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה 1 Shiphrah EXO 1 15 h59t writing-participants שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה 1 The midwives are introduced here as new participants in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 1 16 t8f5 וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר 1 In the UST, the phrase and **the king said**, is combined with “spoke” from [verse 15](../01/15.md) (ULT) because the verb for “say” is used twice before he speaks. Having two speech verbs may be strange in some languages. If it would be unnatural to say that the king spoke or said words twice, you may leave one off. EXO 1 16 zfcv figs-youdual בְּ⁠יַלֶּדְ⁠כֶן֙…וּ⁠רְאִיתֶ֖ן…וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן 1 The king is speaking to the two midwives, so the form of **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 1 16 h3mb figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם 1 on the birthstool Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it was associated with birth. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the birthing process” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 16 h3mb figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם 1 on the birthstool Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it was associated with birth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the birthing process” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 16 nms7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical אִם־בֵּ֥ן הוּא֙ וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן אֹת֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אִם־בַּ֥ת הִ֖יא וָ⁠חָֽיָה 1 These two statements are hypothetical conditions (starting at **if**) with instructions for what the midwives should do in each situation (starting at **then**). Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations connected to instructions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 1 17 gy7k grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠תִּירֶ֤אןָ 1 **But** introduces a contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 1 18 y9g5 לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֔ת 1 midwives Women whose work is to help other woman give birth to a baby are called **midwives**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md). @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ EXO 1 22 stag figs-youdual תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ…תְּחַיּֽ EXO 2 intro rwf3 0 # Exodus 02 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

- v. 1-10: Moses’ birth and early life
- v. 11-15: Moses’ attempted intervention and flight
- v. 16-22: Moses settles in Midian
- v. 23-25: God sees the Israelites’ plight

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Covenant

At the end of the chapter, God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.

## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Identification of participants

* Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.

### Moses’ heritage

In the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian.

### Ironic situations

* While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.
* Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but the people rejected him at this point (see Acts 7). EXO 2 1 wvj9 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ 1 Now A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 2 1 riy7 writing-participants אִ֖ישׁ…בַּת 1 These are new participants. They remain unnamed until [Exodus 6:20](../06/20.md) where they are identified as Amram and Jochebed. For now it is best to leave them unnamed in your language, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 2 1 mp7m figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּקַּ֖ח אֶת־בַּת־לֵוִֽי 1 Here, **took a daughter** is an idiom for marrying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 2 1 mp7m figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּקַּ֖ח אֶת־בַּת־לֵוִֽי 1 Here, **took a daughter** is an idiom for marrying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 2 2 s49k ט֣וֹב 1 Alternative translations: “pleasing” or “fine” EXO 2 2 q4c0 grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠תֵּ֤רֶא…וַֽ⁠תִּצְפְּנֵ֖⁠הוּ 1 Hiding the boy was a result of seeing that he was good. Alternative translation: “Since she saw … she hid him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 2 2 j2es translate-numbers שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה 1 3 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) @@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ EXO 2 18 juqu writing-participants רְעוּאֵ֖ל 1 The priest of Midian wa EXO 2 18 lukb figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מַדּ֛וּעַ מִהַרְתֶּ֥ן בֹּ֖א הַ⁠יּֽוֹם 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and he asked how they were able to return so quickly that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 2 18 hq6y figs-go בֹּ֖א 1 Alternative translation: “in returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 19 w57e אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י 1 Jethro’s daughters assume Moses was Egyptian. When you translate it, you should be clear that this refers to Moses. -EXO 2 19 hvb4 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד 1 Here, **hand** figuratively refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 2 19 a7v2 figs-idiom דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙ 1 This expresses surprise or emphasizes the magnitude of Moses’ act of kindness to the women. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 2 19 hvb4 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד 1 Here, **hand** figuratively refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 2 19 a7v2 figs-idiom דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙ 1 This expresses surprise or emphasizes the magnitude of Moses’ act of kindness to the women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 2 20 x9yb figs-rquestion וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ 1 Why did you leave the man? These questions are a mild rebuke to the daughters for not inviting Moses into their home according to the normal hospitality of that culture. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have left this man at the well!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 2 20 mb8w writing-pronouns ל֖⁠וֹ 1 Here, **him** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 2 20 hal8 figs-synecdoche לָֽחֶם 1 Here, **bread** is used to refer to food in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ EXO 2 23 fjkt writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִי֩ בַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הֽ EXO 2 23 ym88 writing-background 0 Verses 23-25 give a summary of what happened in Egypt and with the Israelites and God while Moses was in exile. These verses give background information to set the scene. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 2 23 csg2 וַ⁠יֵּאָנְח֧וּ 1 groaned They **groaned** because of their sorrow and misery. Alternate translation: “sighed deeply” EXO 2 23 x84a figs-personification וַ⁠תַּ֧עַל שַׁוְעָתָ֛⁠ם אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 their pleas went up to God The **plea** of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were a person and were able to travel up to where God is. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and God heard their pleading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -EXO 2 24 sja4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּזְכֹּ֤ר אֱלֹהִים֙ 1 God called to mind his covenant This a common biblical way of saying that God thought about what He had promised. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “and God recalled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 2 24 sja4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּזְכֹּ֤ר אֱלֹהִים֙ 1 God called to mind his covenant This a common biblical way of saying that God thought about what He had promised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “and God recalled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 intro n6ze 0 # Exodus 03 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

This chapter is one conversation in which Yahweh begins to commission and send Moses to rescue the Israelites.

This chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### God’s holiness

God is so holy that people can not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Yahweh

The name Yahweh is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. Yahweh is probably related to the phrase “I am” which he tells Moses in verse 14. Some translations use all capitals to set this apart: “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]])

## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Participants

“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same, while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is. EXO 3 1 gqvh writing-newevent וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה הָיָ֥ה רֹעֶ֛ה 1 This phrase brings the story focus back to Midian and Moses. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 3 1 oqcr writing-background 0 Verse 1 provides immediate background context, setting the scene for Moses’ interaction with Yahweh. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ EXO 3 1 p27s figs-possession הַ֥ר הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 This is an as EXO 3 2 p0nt וַ֠⁠יֵּרָא מַלְאַ֨ךְ יְהֹוָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו בְּ⁠לַבַּת־אֵ֖שׁ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠סְּנֶ֑ה 1 This is a summary of what happened. The next few verses tell the story of how this happened and how Moses discovered what was happening. EXO 3 2 x5ci יְהֹוָ֥ה 1 Yahweh This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this. EXO 3 2 d3tf grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠הִנֵּ֤ה הַ⁠סְּנֶה֙ בֹּעֵ֣ר בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סְּנֶ֖ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ אֻכָּֽל 1 behold The word **behold** here shows that Moses saw something that was very different from what he expected. He expected the bush to be burnt up completely by the fire. Consider using an interjection in your language that expresses that what follows is a surprise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 3 2 jmz0 figs-metonymy אֻכָּֽל 1 Here, **being consumed** means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “destroyed by the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 2 jmz0 figs-metonymy אֻכָּֽל 1 Here, **being consumed** means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “destroyed by the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 3 fpww figs-quotemarks אָסֻֽרָה־נָּ֣א וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֔ה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה מַדּ֖וּעַ לֹא־יִבְעַ֥ר הַ⁠סְּנֶֽה 1 This is a direct quote. It’s not specified who Moses spoke to; he may have been alone or with a group of shepherds or his family. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 3 jbue figs-abstractnouns אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for something strange that someone sees, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **sight** in another way. Alternate translation: “unusual thing that I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 3 4 ue8v יְהוָ֖ה…אֱלֹהִ֜ים 1 These terms both refer to the same being, since God’s name is Yahweh. @@ -195,11 +195,11 @@ EXO 3 8 nahb grammar-collectivenouns לְ⁠הַצִּיל֣⁠וֹ…וּֽ⁠ EXO 3 8 bi4e figs-metaphor מִ⁠יַּ֣ד 1 Someone’s **hand** is a common Biblical metaphor for power and control. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 3 8 djbz figs-possession מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 This is a possessive where the Egyptians are the subject of **the hand**, which means power. The Egyptians used their power and control to oppress the Israelites. Use a phrase in your language that expresses the idea of a group of people having power. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 3 8 mqyp figs-parallelism אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ טוֹבָה֙ וּ⁠רְחָבָ֔ה אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 There are multiple levels of parallelism here. First, the statements, **to a good and wide land** and **to a land flowing with milk and honey** are in parallel with each other. Within each of those, **good** and **wide** are in parallel with each other, and **milk** and **honey**are in parallel with each other. Each of these levels is meant to reinforce and expand upon one another. These are not examples of synonymous parallelism, and each part of the statement should be translated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 3 8 xs87 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 8 xs87 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 8 pxy8 figs-metaphor אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 a land flowing with milk and honey God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. If this metaphor makes sense in your language, you may translate it. If your language has metaphors that mean a land is good for producing healthy livestock and good crops, you may consider using those. If neither is the case, you may translate the meaning. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 3 8 dtz9 זָבַ֥ת 1 flowing with Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of” -EXO 3 8 q94i figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 8 l1as figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 8 q94i figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 8 l1as figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 9 a2kf figs-parallelism 0 This verse parallels [verse 7](../03/07.md). Yahweh is restating that the Israelite’s plight has gotten his attention. This creates emphasis and connection to what Yahweh will do with what Moses will do as Yahweh’s appointed leader. If this repetition would confuse your readers consider a paragraph break at the start of this verse to separate the two parallel statements or use some other strategy of emphasis and connection that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 3 9 tp2v figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֛ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “certainly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 3 9 uup9 figs-personification צַעֲקַ֥ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בָּ֣אָה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 the shouts of the people of Israel have come to me Here, **the cry** is spoken of as if it were a person who is capable of moving on his own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have heard the cries of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -231,22 +231,22 @@ EXO 3 16 efhh figs-idiom פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 The word t EXO 3 16 p258 figs-idiom פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 Here, **attended** is repeated in Hebrew. The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having **attended to** how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 16 fv77 figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 I have indeed observed you The word **you** refers to the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 16 q4en figs-activepassive הֶ⁠עָשׂ֥וּי 1 The focus of this passive is the mistreatment being **done to** the Israelites, not on who is doing it. In fact, **in Egypt** further dissociates the actors from this sentence. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 3 16 johw figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם 1 The phrase **in Egypt** is a metonym for the Egyptian oppressors. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “by the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 16 johw figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם 1 The phrase **in Egypt** is a metonym for the Egyptian oppressors. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “by the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 17 eloj figs-quotemarks 0 If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers. In English, it looks like ’ ” ’ (without spaces). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 17 c54k figs-quotesinquotes אַעֲלֶ֣ה אֶתְ⁠כֶם֮ מֵ⁠עֳנִ֣י מִצְרַיִם֒ אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ וְ⁠הַ֣⁠חִתִּ֔י וְ⁠הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִ֑י אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer three levels. Alternatively, it can be translated as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 3 17 r8mg figs-idiom אַעֲלֶ֣ה 1 Regardless of the geographic realities, to **bring up** does not primarily have a literal meaning. Rather, it means to bring the Israelites into a better situation. God promised to bring them up from their low status as slaves to a place where they would be the masters of a good land. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 3 17 r8mg figs-idiom אַעֲלֶ֣ה 1 Regardless of the geographic realities, to **bring up** does not primarily have a literal meaning. Rather, it means to bring the Israelites into a better situation. God promised to bring them up from their low status as slaves to a place where they would be the masters of a good land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 17 x1o0 figs-abstractnouns מֵ⁠עֳנִ֣י 1 See how you translated **affliction** in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “from being afflicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 3 17 wyvt figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 17 wyvt figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 17 pwn5 figs-metaphor אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 a land flowing with milk and honey God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). Alternate translation: “a land that is excellent for raising livestock and growing crops” or “a land where milk and honey flow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 3 17 za9l זָבַ֥ת 1 flowing with Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of” -EXO 3 17 rtr5 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 17 msf8 figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 18 cy2z figs-idiom וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖וּ לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 **Listen** often means “hear and do/obey.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternative translation: “And they will pay attention to your voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 3 17 rtr5 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 17 msf8 figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 18 cy2z figs-idiom וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖וּ לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 **Listen** often means “hear and do/obey.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternative translation: “And they will pay attention to your voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 18 j24k writing-pronouns לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ…אַתָּה֩ 1 They will listen to you Here, **your** and **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 3 18 w742 figs-synecdoche לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 This phrase means the elders will listen to the message Moses brings from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to your message” or “to my message which you tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 3 18 r74o figs-possession וְ⁠זִקְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. Alternative translation: “elders in charge of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 3 18 eep7 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun that refers to all the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 3 18 ot9r figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptian nation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 18 ot9r figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptian nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 18 idp7 figs-youdual וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם 1 General Information: If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 18 i47o figs-exclusive עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ…נֵֽלֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָ֖ה 1 These instances of **us** are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 3 18 d85b translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ EXO 4 4 g6bk וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 take it by the EXO 4 4 bzmp grammar-connect-time-sequential שְׁלַח֙ יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 This direct quotation is interrupted by Moses obeying Yahweh. This is probably a tightly ordered sequence of events where Yahweh paused and then continued speaking immediately after Moses obeyed. The quote resumes in [verse 5](../04/05.md), and there is more discussion there about how to translate the quotation resumption. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 4 4 m86n וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מַטֶּ֖ה 1 became a staff Alternate translation: “and it turned into a rod” or “and it changed into a staff” EXO 4 5 l4tn figs-quotemarks לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This continues the direct quotation from the first part of [verse 4](../04/04.md). It may be more natural to reorganize verses four and five to keep the quote together. If you rearrange like this, Moses picking up the snake/staff should come after the full quotation. However, it is better to do something similar to the UST, which restates that Yahweh is speaking and provides some implied directives from Yahweh to make a complete sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 5 m4fk figs-ellipsis לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This quote is not a complete sentence; the UST provides a clarification. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 4 5 m4fk figs-ellipsis לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This quote is not a complete sentence; the UST provides a clarification. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 4 5 zbfr writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ…אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 Here, **them** and **their** refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is a better option. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 5 oqi5 writing-pronouns אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 5 jr8m אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 the God of their ancestors, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of their ancestors. They all worshiped the same God. @@ -299,15 +299,15 @@ EXO 4 10 opes אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים 1 This expression means “a m EXO 4 10 pk0l figs-merism גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 These phrases simply mean “in the past.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 4 10 wsl4 figs-123person עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ 1 Moses refers to himself as God’s servant to lower his status before God (and perhaps by doing so to make his argument of inability stronger). If this is confusing in your language, you can make who he means plain. Alternate translation: “me, your servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 4 10 bv64 figs-doublet כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 I am slow of speech and slow of tongue These phrases mean basically the same thing. Moses uses them to emphasize that he is not a good speaker. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “not good at public speaking”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 4 10 zm3y figs-metonymy לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 slow of tongue Here, **tongue** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 10 zm3y figs-metonymy לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 slow of tongue Here, **tongue** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 11 ks2m figs-rquestion מִ֣י שָׂ֣ם פֶּה֮ לָֽ⁠אָדָם֒ 1 Who is it who made man’s mouth? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the Creator who makes it possible for people to speak. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Is it not I, Yahweh, who created the human mouth and the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 11 e1y6 figs-rquestion מִֽי־יָשׂ֣וּם אִלֵּ֔ם א֣וֹ חֵרֵ֔שׁ א֥וֹ פִקֵּ֖חַ א֣וֹ עִוֵּ֑ר 1 Who makes a man mute or deaf or seeing or blind? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the one who decides if people can speak and hear, and if they can see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make people able to speak or hear or to see or to be blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 11 uq7j figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לֹ֥א אָנֹכִ֖י יְהוָֽה 1 Is it not I, Yahweh? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he alone makes these decisions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who does this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 4 12 kkr1 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will be with your mouth Here, **mouth** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 12 kkr1 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will be with your mouth Here, **mouth** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 13 brer בִּ֣י 1 This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. See what you did in [verse 10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Please” EXO 4 13 s8nl שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּ⁠יַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח 1 In translating this phrase, it is important to make clear that Moses is asking Yahweh to send someone else. Here he is not accepting Yahweh’s commission. EXO 4 13 y4a7 figs-synecdoche בְּ⁠יַד 1 This phrase means “by a person.” The figure is of a person taking Yahweh’s message in his hand to the Israelites and Pharaoh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 4 14 uy2v figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֨ף יְהוָ֜ה 1 This means that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 4 14 uy2v figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֨ף יְהוָ֜ה 1 This means that Yahweh is angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 4 14 ifax writing-pronouns וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 Here, **he** refers to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 14 okko figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לֹ֨א אַהֲרֹ֤ן אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הַ⁠לֵּוִ֔י 1 Yahweh uses this rhetorical question to suggest an alternative to Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternative translation: “I know you have a brother, Aaron the Levite.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 14 e0js translate-kinship אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ EXO 4 14 ettp figs-go יֹצֵ֣א 1 Yahweh says Aaron is coming from Egypt to EXO 4 14 tfsa grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠שָׂמַ֥ח 1 Aaron will be glad because he sees Moses. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result, as in the UST or alternative translation: “and because he sees you, he will have joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 4 14 ew4h figs-metonymy בְּ⁠לִבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 he will be glad in his heart Here, **heart** refers to inner thoughts and emotions. If the heart is not a body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s thoughts and emotions, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 15 u97f figs-metaphor הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 put the words to say into his mouth Words here are spoken of as if they were something that can be physically placed in a person’s mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the message that he is to repeat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 4 15 q9cf figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִ֗י אֶֽהְיֶ֤ה עִם־פִּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וְ⁠עִם־פִּ֔י⁠הוּ 1 I will be with your mouth The word **mouth** here represents Moses’ and Aaron’s choice of words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And I will be with you as you speak and with him as he speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 15 q9cf figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִ֗י אֶֽהְיֶ֤ה עִם־פִּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וְ⁠עִם־פִּ֔י⁠הוּ 1 I will be with your mouth The word **mouth** here represents Moses’ and Aaron’s choice of words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And I will be with you as you speak and with him as he speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 15 v57x figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם…תַּעֲשֽׂוּ⁠ן 1 with his mouth These refer to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one or, if not, use a plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 4 16 mnsp figs-simile לְ⁠פֶ֔ה 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a mouth because he will be the one to actually vocalize to the Israelites and Pharaoh what Moses tells him to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the one to say what you tell him to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 4 16 gn5v figs-simile תִּֽהְיֶה־לּ֥⁠וֹ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהִֽים 1 you will be to him like me, God The word **like** here means Moses would represent the same authority to Aaron as God did to Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you will speak to Aaron with the same authority with which I speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -327,8 +327,8 @@ EXO 4 18 cbop figs-go וַ⁠יֵּ֨לֶךְ 1 Because the setting has shifted EXO 4 18 b6mf translate-kinship חֹֽתְנ֗⁠וֹ 1 father-in-law This refers to the father of Moses’ wife. If your language uses a different term for the husband’s or wife’s father use the one for wife’s father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) EXO 4 18 wlit writing-pronouns וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 Here, **he** refers to Moses. Alternate translation: “and Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 18 g1h1 writing-pronouns ל⁠וֹ֙ 1 Here, **him** refers to Jethro. Alternate translation: “to Jethro” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 18 urt0 figs-metonymy אַחַ֣⁠י 1 Here the term **brothers** refers more broadly to all of Moses’ people group, those he is related to. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 4 18 gq2g figs-idiom וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֖ה הַ⁠עוֹדָ֣⁠ם חַיִּ֑ים 1 Later in the Bible we are told that Moses was in Midian for 40 years. Moses’ request may have been literal or an idiom that meant he wanted to know how they were doing. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 4 18 urt0 figs-metonymy אַחַ֣⁠י 1 Here the term **brothers** refers more broadly to all of Moses’ people group, those he is related to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 18 gq2g figs-idiom וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֖ה הַ⁠עוֹדָ֣⁠ם חַיִּ֑ים 1 Later in the Bible we are told that Moses was in Midian for 40 years. Moses’ request may have been literal or an idiom that meant he wanted to know how they were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 4 18 yay3 translate-blessing לֵ֥ךְ לְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 This is a phrase of assent and blessing. It may be necessary for some languages to explicitly add, “Yes,” to the beginning of Jethro’s response. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) EXO 4 19 wwr8 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֤ה אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֙ 1 The timing and situation for Yahweh speaking to Moses here is not specified. Some conjecture that it was part of the narrative of the encounter with Yahweh from the previous verses but placed after his request to Jethro for an unknown reason. Another speculation is that Moses delayed returning to Egypt (either by his own choice, Yahweh’s instructions, or someone else delaying him) and Yahweh came and told him again (the UST explicitly offers this optional translation). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 4 19 clfj הַֽ⁠מְבַקְשִׁ֖ים אֶת־נַפְשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ 1 This means they were seeking to end his life, that is, to kill him. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ EXO 4 22 teyy figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This EXO 4 22 kud7 figs-quotemarks בְּנִ֥⁠י בְכֹרִ֖⁠י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ 1 This is the beginning of a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. (If you chose to translate, “Thus says Yahweh,” as an indirect quote, this will be a second- level quotation.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 22 gr2d figs-metaphor בְּנִ֥⁠י 1 Yahweh expresses his affection for the Israelites by calling them his **son**. Some languages may need to change the metaphor here into a simile. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 4 22 pt4n grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Israel is my son The word **Israel** here represents all the people of Israel as a group. It is important to keep the singular reference to Israel as son rather than change it to something like ‘the Israelites are my children,’ because God is making a particular contrast here between his son and Pharaoh’s son. Some languages may not be able to use “Israel” as a collective noun and may need to choose a translation like “the nation of Israel” or “the Israelite nation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 4 22 nbn7 figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “The Israelites are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 22 nbn7 figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “The Israelites are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 23 syar figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי 1 This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (If you chose to translate “Thus says Yahweh” as an indirect quote, this will be a third-level quotation.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 23 yyuo figs-quotations וָ⁠אֹמַ֣ר אֵלֶ֗י⁠ךָ שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֖ן 1 The fourth-level quotation here may be a good one to translate as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and I told you to let my son go that he may serve me. But you have refused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 4 23 k7mh figs-metaphor בְּנִ⁠י֙ 1 you have refused to let him go Yahweh continues to metaphorically speak of Israel as **my son.** See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternative translation: “the Israelite nation, which is like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ EXO 4 27 tfn2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק 1 This was a traditio EXO 4 28 ad9x שְׁלָח֑⁠וֹ…צִוָּֽ⁠הוּ 1 These are a bit awkward to translate in English, so the UST adds more information. Other languages may not have the same difficulty. EXO 4 28 b429 writing-pronouns שְׁלָח֑⁠וֹ…צִוָּֽ⁠הוּ 1 he had sent him to say Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Yahweh, and **him** refers to Moses. Alternative translation: “Yahweh sent Moses … Yahweh commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 29 y8o3 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ 1 This begins a new event which you may need to mark in your translation with a transitional word like the UST’s “When.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 4 30 bm2x figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 in the sight of the people Here, **before the eyes** means he did the signs so they could see them. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 30 bm2x figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 in the sight of the people Here, **before the eyes** means he did the signs so they could see them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 30 x1v3 הָ⁠עָֽם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md). EXO 4 31 glp2 הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md). EXO 4 31 q1er פָקַ֨ד…בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 had observed the Israelites Alternate translation: “saw the Israelites” or “was concerned about the Israelites” @@ -394,12 +394,12 @@ EXO 5 1 u2vt וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ 1 festival for me This is a celebration EXO 5 2 v4c1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר 1 Why should I…let Israel go? The result here is exactly as God has said; therefore, a contrastive transition word is reasonable but not required, given the immediate human context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 5 2 lqwt מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 This is not a rhetorical question, though Pharaoh may have spoken with contempt. Pharaoh would have considered himself a god. The Egyptians had several gods, and most people groups were assumed to have their own gods. Therefore, Pharaoh had truly not heard of Yahweh (who has just revealed his name to Moses). EXO 5 2 wpff grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here the nation is spoken of as an individual. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 5 2 c653 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 listen to his voice Here, **his voice** represent the words God spoke. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 2 c653 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 listen to his voice Here, **his voice** represent the words God spoke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 2 ma6b וְ⁠גַ֥ם 1 This functions to strengthen Pharaoh’s statement about his decision. Alternative translation: “and most definitely” EXO 5 3 dt39 figs-123person וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ 1 It may not make sense in all languages for multiple people to speak. Since Aaron was appointed as Moses’ spokesman, consider the alternative translation: “Aaron replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 5 3 y9ip אֱלֹהֵ֥י הָ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים 1 God of the Hebrews This term, **The God of the Hebrews**, is also used for Yahweh, the Israelites’ God. EXO 5 3 kclj figs-exclusive עָלֵ֑י⁠נוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָה֙…יִפְגָּעֵ֔⁠נוּ 1 Here, **us** (or “we” in UST) refers to the Hebrew people (the Israelites). It excludes Pharaoh and his people. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -EXO 5 3 gfs5 figs-metonymy בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 or with the sword Here, **sword** represents war or an attack by enemies. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “cause our enemies to attack us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 3 gfs5 figs-metonymy בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 or with the sword Here, **sword** represents war or an attack by enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “cause our enemies to attack us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 4 kl1i figs-rquestion לָ֚⁠מָּה מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן תַּפְרִ֥יעוּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם מִ⁠מַּֽעֲשָׂ֑י⁠ו 1 why are you taking the people from their work? Pharaoh uses this rhetorical question to express his anger toward Moses and Aaron for taking the Israelites away from their work. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Stop distracting the people from doing their work!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 5 4 fiw9 figs-youdual לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 This **your** could refer to Moses and Aaron, or it could mean “all you Israelite people.” The second meaning is more likely. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 5 xm4z grammar-connect-words-phrases וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It is unusual for the same speaker to be reintroduced like this. Some translations omit the repetition, but there is another option. This statement may be more connected to the next couple of verses, so it might be appropriate to make a minor break before this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -411,18 +411,18 @@ EXO 5 6 zd4m הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים 1 taskmasters **Taskmasters** were E EXO 5 6 gsdx שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו 1 **Officers** were probably Israelite slaves who were in charge of the other Israelites but who answered to the Egyptian taskmasters. EXO 5 6 dxih לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 Here, **saying** is a way of introducing a direct quotation in Hebrew; most translations can omit it without harm. EXO 5 7 k6io figs-youdual לֹ֣א תֹאסִפ֞וּ⁠ן 1 This command was given to multiple people; if your language distinguishes between singular and plural forms when giving commands, make sure this is a plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 5 7 p9nx figs-idiom כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֑ם 1 you must no longer give This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “as you used to do” or “as was done previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 5 7 p9nx figs-idiom כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֑ם 1 you must no longer give This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “as you used to do” or “as was done previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 5 8 izkf figs-youdual תָּשִׂ֣ימוּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 8 ro25 translate-unknown הַ⁠לְּבֵנִ֜ים 1 **Bricks** are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building. See how you translated in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 5 8 dlzx figs-idiom תְּמ֤וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁם֙ 1 This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” See how you translated this in [5:7](../05/07md) Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 5 9 xca1 figs-idiom וְ⁠אַל־יִשְׁע֖וּ בְּ⁠דִבְרֵי־שָֽׁקֶר 1 Here words are spoken of as if they could be looked upon. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “and not listen to words that are lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 5 9 xca1 figs-idiom וְ⁠אַל־יִשְׁע֖וּ בְּ⁠דִבְרֵי־שָֽׁקֶר 1 Here words are spoken of as if they could be looked upon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “and not listen to words that are lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 5 10 ozzn writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּ֨צְא֜וּ 1 This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 5 10 x4bi נֹגְשֵׂ֤י 1 taskmasters **Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [5:6](../05/6.md). EXO 5 10 zvxx כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This is the same quotation introduction as is used when Yahweh gives a direct command. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 5 10 c12s figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֥וּ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֖ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It might be helpful in some languages to translate **thus says Pharaoh** as an indirect quote so that his conveyed command is not a quote within a quote. Alternate translation: “and told the people that Pharaoh says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 5 10 mkom figs-quotesinquotes אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי 1 This is the beginning of a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the start of a quotation within a quotation. However, you could also translate this as an indirect quote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 5 10 ad73 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 The structure of this phrase and the one that opens [the next verse](../05/11.md) create a strong contrast between what **I** (Pharaoh) and **you** (you all, the Israelites) will do. Translate this in a way that emphasizes, if possible, the contrast between **I** and **you.** Alternative translation: “It is not I who will give you straw.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 5 10 si2e figs-metonymy אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 Pharaoh uses **I** to refer to his ownership and commands. Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants to take straw that belonged to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “My servants will no longer give you my straw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 10 si2e figs-metonymy אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 Pharaoh uses **I** to refer to his ownership and commands. Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants to take straw that belonged to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “My servants will no longer give you my straw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 10 gb4d figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 I will no longer give you **You**is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 11 ewg6 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אַתֶּ֗ם לְכ֨וּ קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ תֶּ֔בֶן מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר תִּמְצָ֑אוּ 1 The structure of this phrase serves as the opposing side of the contrast Pharaoh sets up in the last phrase. By explicitly using a pronoun with a command, he is emphasizing who will go get straw. If possible, translate this in a way that emphasizes the contrast between **I** and **you.** See the previous verse. Alternative translation: “Rather, it is you yourselves who must go get straw from wherever you might find it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 5 11 xe4i figs-youdual אַתֶּ֗ם 1 you can find…your workload Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -463,15 +463,15 @@ EXO 5 20 s9d2 writing-pronouns וַֽ⁠יִּפְגְּעוּ֙…לִ⁠קְר EXO 5 21 kv0v יֵ֧רֶא יְהוָ֛ה עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 The Israelite officers used this form to curse Moses and Aaron. EXO 5 21 vfit figs-youdual עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 **You** refers to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 21 j3zp figs-metaphor הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗⁠נוּ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו 1 you have made us offensive The Egyptians responded to the Israelites the same way they would respond to a foul odor. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you have caused Pharaoh and his servants to hate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 5 21 d592 figs-metonymy חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 have put a sword in their hand to kill us Here, **a sword into their hand** is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 21 d592 figs-metonymy חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 have put a sword in their hand to kill us Here, **a sword into their hand** is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 22 g4d5 figs-rquestion לָ֥⁠מָּה זֶּ֖ה שְׁלַחְתָּֽ⁠נִי 1 Lord, why have you caused trouble for this people? This question shows how disappointed Moses was that the Egyptians were treating the Israelites even more harshly now. He is expressing that he thinks God has caused the opposite of what he promised to happen. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I thought you sent me to rescue them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 5 23 v2k2 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁמֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 to speak to him in your name Here, **in your name** indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 5 23 fzir figs-idiom וְ⁠הַצֵּ֥ל לֹא־הִצַּ֖לְתָּ 1 In Hebrew, **rescued** is repeated for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 5 23 v2k2 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁמֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 to speak to him in your name Here, **in your name** indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 23 fzir figs-idiom וְ⁠הַצֵּ֥ל לֹא־הִצַּ֖לְתָּ 1 In Hebrew, **rescued** is repeated for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 6 intro we5k 0 # Exodus 06 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

- v. 1-13, 28-30: Yahweh repeats his commissioning of Moses after the bad events recorded in chapter 5
- v. 14-27: Genealogy of Moses and Aaron

## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Repetition of events:

Most of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, Yahweh reminds Moses of his promises and power.

### Referring to God

A name for God (**Yahweh**) and a title for God (**El Shaddai**) are mentioned in this chapter ([6:2](../06/02.md)\\-[6:3](../06/03.md)). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.

### Other possible translation difficulties:

With little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.

## Study Concepts in this Chapter

### Promised Land

According to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### God and his people

In verse 7, note the mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him. EXO 6 1 ip5i figs-quotemarks עַתָּ֣ה תִרְאֶ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 1 lu95 grammar-connect-time-sequential עַתָּ֣ה 1 This refers to future events starting very soon. Alternative translation: “Starting soon” or “Very soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -EXO 6 1 ece6 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 my strong hand Here, **hand** is a metonym for power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 6 1 utnn figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 It is not clear in the text whose **hand** is referred to here. The options include: (1) Both refer to God’s hand (forcing Pharaoh’s actions) (2) Both refer to Pharaoh’s hand (forcing the Israelites out) (3) They don’t refer to the same person’s hand; the first refers to God’s and the second to Pharaoh’s. The UST has followed (1), which is the most common interpretation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: (1) “by my strong hand … and by my strong hand” (2) “by his strong hand … and by his strong hand” (3) “by my strong hand … and by his strong hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 1 ece6 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 my strong hand Here, **hand** is a metonym for power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 1 utnn figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 It is not clear in the text whose **hand** is referred to here. The options include: (1) Both refer to God’s hand (forcing Pharaoh’s actions) (2) Both refer to Pharaoh’s hand (forcing the Israelites out) (3) They don’t refer to the same person’s hand; the first refers to God’s and the second to Pharaoh’s. The UST has followed (1), which is the most common interpretation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: (1) “by my strong hand … and by my strong hand” (2) “by his strong hand … and by his strong hand” (3) “by my strong hand … and by his strong hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 1 vdno figs-parallelism כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. God says the same thing twice, in similar ways, for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let my people leave the land” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase intensifies the first by portraying Pharaoh as not merely letting the Israelites go, but as forcing them to leave the land. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let them go, in fact, I will force him to force them to leave his land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 6 1 sdon מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “from Egypt” EXO 6 2 wse5 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְדַבֵּ֥ר אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֑ה וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר אֵלָ֖י⁠ו 1 There is a transition here. Before this verse, Yahweh was answering Moses’ question more directly. At the beginning of this verse, Yahweh is reintroduced as “God” because he begins to make a clarifying statement about himself and his relationship with the Israelites and their ancestors as well as his plans for the Israelites. Much of this section repeats what Yahweh has already told Moses. You may want to consider a section break before this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -497,14 +497,14 @@ EXO 6 9 aalj grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠לֹ֤א שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ EXO 6 9 eph2 מִ⁠קֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ 1 Here, the people’s **spirit** is spoken of as something that could be measured. By calling it “short,” the author is saying they did not have very much motivation or hope. Alternate translation: “because they had no hope” EXO 6 10 tpw4 לֵּ⁠אמֹֽר 1 This is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if it is unnatural. EXO 6 11 fxf2 figs-quotations וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This statement tells Moses what to discuss with Pharaoh. Some languages may need to covey this information as a direct quotation. Be careful to change the third-person pronouns to second-person pronouns if you do this. Alternate translation: “and say, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 6 12 h7o0 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by the words **before the face of Yahweh**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 12 h7o0 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by the words **before the face of Yahweh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 12 iiui הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.” EXO 6 12 k7hl figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 If the Israelites have not listened to me, why will Pharaoh listen to me, since I am not good at speaking? Moses asked this question in hopes that God would change his mind about using Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Since the Israelites did not listen to me, neither will Pharaoh!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 6 12 lj51 grammar-connect-logic-result הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Moses is presenting a reasoned argument: since this, then probably that. Use a natural way of expressing such arguments in your language. Alternate translation: “Since the sons of Israel have not listened to me, why would you think Pharaoh would listen to me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 6 12 k3br figs-metaphor וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם 1 This is a metaphor that means that Moses was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude; your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And I do not speak well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 6 13 janr וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ⁠ם֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה 1 This phrase is somewhat difficult to translate. Here, **command** could also be translated as “charge” or “commission.” Another difficulty is knowing to whom the command is directed: is it to Moses and Aaron or are they to give the command to Pharaoh and the Israelites; thus **to** could be translated as “for” or “regarding.” Alternate translations: “and he charged them regarding the sons of Israel and regarding Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a command for the sons of Israel and for Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a commission to the sons of Israel and to Pharaoh” EXO 6 14 hh3z writing-background 0 Verses 14-27 are background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -EXO 6 14 h195 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 the heads of their fathers’ houses Here, **heads** refers to the original leaders of the clan. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 14 h195 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 the heads of their fathers’ houses Here, **heads** refers to the original leaders of the clan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 14 wv89 translate-names רְאוּבֵ֜ן…יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל…חֲנ֤וֹךְ וּ⁠פַלּוּא֙ חֶצְר֣וֹן וְ⁠כַרְמִ֔י…רְאוּבֵֽן 1 Hanok, Pallu, Hezron, and Karmi These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 15 c1ni translate-names שִׁמְע֗וֹן יְמוּאֵ֨ל וְ⁠יָמִ֤ין וְ⁠אֹ֨הַד֙ וְ⁠יָכִ֣ין וְ⁠צֹ֔חַר וְ⁠שָׁא֖וּל…שִׁמְעֽוֹן 1 Jemuel, Jamin, Ohad, Jakin, Zohar, and Shaul These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 16 k64h translate-names לֵוִי֙…גֵּרְשׁ֕וֹן וּ⁠קְהָ֖ת וּ⁠מְרָרִ֑י…לֵוִ֔י 1 Gershon…Merari These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -524,11 +524,11 @@ EXO 6 23 kww9 translate-names אֱלִישֶׁ֧בַע 1 Nadab…Ithamar This is EXO 6 24 rkz9 translate-names קֹ֔רַח אַסִּ֥יר וְ⁠אֶלְקָנָ֖ה וַ⁠אֲבִיאָסָ֑ף 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 24 i6o7 translate-names הַ⁠קָּרְחִֽי 1 This was the name of the clan of people descended from Korah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 25 zvg2 translate-names וְ⁠אֶלְעָזָ֨ר…אַהֲרֹ֜ן…פּֽוּטִיאֵל֙…פִּֽינְחָ֑ס 1 Phinehas These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 6 25 fck8 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֛י 1 These were the heads of the fathers’ houses Here, **heads** represents family leaders. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “These were the leaders of the families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 25 fck8 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֛י 1 These were the heads of the fathers’ houses Here, **heads** represents family leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “These were the leaders of the families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 26 ft6y translate-unknown עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 by their groups of fighting men The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. Alternate translation: “by their groups” or “by their divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 6 27 o7xp grammar-connect-logic-goal לְ⁠הוֹצִ֥יא 1 This expresses their goal when they spoke to Pharaoh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 6 28 xssl writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠י֨וֹם 1 This marks a transition from the record of the genealogy back to the narrative. Consider placing a section break at the start of this verse. Alternate translation: “One day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 6 30 zyqs figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before **the face of Yahweh**. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 30 zyqs figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before **the face of Yahweh**. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 30 nf3w figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה 1 I am not good…why will Pharaoh listen to me? Moses asks this question hoping to change God’s mind about sending him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Behold, I am not a good speaker. Pharaoh will certainly not listen to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 6 30 y4g2 הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.” EXO 6 30 vzhq figs-metaphor אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם 1 This is a metaphor that means that Moses thought he was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude, and your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). Alternate translation: “I always fail to speak well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -543,24 +543,24 @@ EXO 7 2 p9p7 מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “from Egypt EXO 7 3 adsq figs-metaphor אַקְשֶׁ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **hard**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs. **hard** here. Alternate translation: “will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 3 vtt1 figs-doublet אֶת־אֹתֹתַ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י 1 many signs…many wonders The words **signs** and **wonders** mean basically the same thing. God uses them to emphasize the greatness of what he will do in Egypt. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine them.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 7 4 ar0l figs-youdual אֲלֵ⁠כֶם֙ 1 Here, **you** means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 7 4 e2kv figs-metonymy יָדִ֖⁠י 1 put my hand on The words **my hand** represent God’s great power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 7 4 b6h8 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **on Egypt** refers to the land and everything in it, including people, animals, and plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 4 e2kv figs-metonymy יָדִ֖⁠י 1 put my hand on The words **my hand** represent God’s great power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 4 b6h8 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **on Egypt** refers to the land and everything in it, including people, animals, and plants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 4 nilu אֶת־צִבְאֹתַ֜⁠י אֶת־עַמִּ֤⁠י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 These phrases refer to the Israelites in three different ways; they do not refer to three different groups of people. Here, **armies** is the same word translated “hosts” in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “the armies of my Israelite people” EXO 7 5 cg3n grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠יָדְע֤וּ מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ כִּֽי־אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is the result of God rescuing the Israelites. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 7 5 npd6 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠נְטֹתִ֥⁠י אֶת־יָדִ֖⁠י עַל 1 reach out with my hand on This phrase represents God’s great power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “when I show my powerful acts against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 5 npd6 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠נְטֹתִ֥⁠י אֶת־יָדִ֖⁠י עַל 1 reach out with my hand on This phrase represents God’s great power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “when I show my powerful acts against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 5 dguc grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠הוֹצֵאתִ֥י אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠תּוֹכָֽ⁠ם 1 The goal of God’s powerful acts was to rescue the Israelites. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “so that I bring the sons of Israel out from their midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 7 6 iii5 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ…עָשֽׂוּ 1 This repetition emphasizes the statement. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 7 7 liir writing-background 0 This verse contains background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 7 7 g7i5 translate-numbers שְׁמֹנִ֣ים…שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים 1 Aaron eighty-three years old Alternate translation: “eighty … eighty-three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 7 7 zoou figs-idiom בֶּן־שְׁמֹנִ֣ים שָׁנָ֔ה…בֶּן־שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים שָׁנָ֑ה 1 The phrase **a son of**, followed by a number and then **years**, is an idiom that refers to their age. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 7 7 zoou figs-idiom בֶּן־שְׁמֹנִ֣ים שָׁנָ֔ה…בֶּן־שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים שָׁנָ֑ה 1 The phrase **a son of**, followed by a number and then **years**, is an idiom that refers to their age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 7 8 pwph writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This verse marks the beginning of new sections, both major and minor. The major story of the plagues and Exodus itself unfolds from here until after Pharaoh’s army is defeated at the Red Sea. The next minor event is the miracle of the rods becoming snakes. Either by using particular forms that your language uses to mark transitions or by making a section break and heading, this transition should be marked for readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 7 8 p2kf לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST. EXO 7 9 jt9z figs-quotations כִּי֩ יְדַבֵּ֨ר אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם פַּרְעֹה֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין 1 When Pharaoh says to you, ‘Do a miracle,’ then you will say to Aaron, ‘Take your staff and throw it down before Pharaoh, so that it may become a snake.’ The two quotations in this verse could be stated as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “When Pharaoh tells you to do a miracle, then you will tell Aaron to take his staff and throw it down before Pharaoh so that it may become a snake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 7 9 r0tp figs-quotemarks קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. The second level may either end after **Pharaoh** or at the end of the verse. If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 9 p3xh לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST. EXO 7 9 ms5o figs-youdual אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 These pronouns are plural, referring to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 7 9 ogk9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה 1 Although **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses and Aaron are to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so that Pharaoh can see them. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 7 10 ehm9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 9 ogk9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה 1 Although **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses and Aaron are to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so that Pharaoh can see them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 10 ehm9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 10 kv93 עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **his servants** does not refer common servants but probably refers to important advisors that would be in the king’s court. EXO 7 11 mqde לַֽ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים וְ⁠לַֽ⁠מְכַשְּׁפִ֑ים…חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 Here, **magicians** probably describes both **wise men and sorcerers** rather than being a third group. See translationWords articles for each term. EXO 7 12 m4uw אִ֣ישׁ 1 swallowed up Alternate translation: “magician” @@ -588,21 +588,21 @@ EXO 7 19 ysi7 figs-merism עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם ׀ עַל־יְאֹ EXO 7 19 wxp2 בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ 1 throughout all Alternate translation: “in every part of” EXO 7 19 msxp figs-possession וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵצִ֖ים וּ⁠בָ⁠אֲבָנִֽים 1 This possessive show composition. Alternate translation: “and in containers made from wood and in containers made from stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 7 20 zy18 figs-explicit בַּ⁠יְאֹ֔ר 1 in the river If it would be helpful to your readers, the name of the river may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “in the Nile River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 7 20 mj8v figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו 1 This means in their sight. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh and his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 20 mj8v figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו 1 This means in their sight. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh and his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 22 n7kr translate-unknown חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 See how you translated this term in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 7 22 qdc7 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Pharaoh’s heart was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 22 sbic כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST and how you translated this in [7:13](../07/13.md), where the same sentence appears. -EXO 7 23 atdk figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֥ת לִבּ֖⁠וֹ גַּם־לָ⁠זֹֽאת 1 This is an idiom meaning Pharaoh did not think about the meaning of the miracle he had just seen. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he did not consider what even this meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 7 23 atdk figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֥ת לִבּ֖⁠וֹ גַּם־לָ⁠זֹֽאת 1 This is an idiom meaning Pharaoh did not think about the meaning of the miracle he had just seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he did not consider what even this meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 7 24 m6zn figs-hyperbole כָל־מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 All the Egyptians The word **all** here is a generalization that means “many.” At the least, the upper class would have sent their slaves to dig for them. However, it does indicate that all the Egyptians who wished to drink water had to dig or had to have dug for them. Alternate translation: “many of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 7 25 bn5h writing-newevent וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 7 25 gjyb figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 This means seven days later. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 7 25 gjyb figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 This means seven days later. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 7 25 dg56 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 8 intro ww1y 0 # Exodus 08 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

- v. 1-15: Second plague: frogs
- v. 16-19: Third plague (first that magicians cannot imitate): gnats
- v. 20-32: Fourth plague: flies

## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain; translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each
- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter
- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians, but it is not specified how or why that is

### Lifting up the hand and staff:

In the next few chapters, God will instruct Moses or Aaron or both to raise his hand or staff or both hand and staff. The narrative will then record who will raise his hand or staff or both. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand, and the narrative may say that Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit, and they can both be mentioned, or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently. EXO 8 1 tf7b figs-quotations בֹּ֖א 1 This begins a direct quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 1 v6ll כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 8 1 lndc figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה 1 Here, **Thus** begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 8 1 kure figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 8 2 s7y1 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ 1 What Pharaoh is to **let go** is not specified, but “my people” or “the Israelites” are the understood object. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to let the Israelites go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 8 2 s7y1 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ 1 What Pharaoh is to **let go** is not specified, but “my people” or “the Israelites” are the understood object. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to let the Israelites go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 8 2 aei8 הִנֵּ֣ה 1 Here, **behold** is an interjection meant to focus the attention of the listener on what comes next, in this case a dire warning. Alternate translation: “look out” EXO 8 3 vgby figs-merism בְּ⁠בֵיתֶ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲדַ֥ר מִשְׁכָּבְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠עַל־מִטָּתֶ֑⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠בֵ֤ית עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠תַנּוּרֶ֖י⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠מִשְׁאֲרוֹתֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the frogs’ location is not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 8 4 okok figs-quotemarks 0 Up to three levels of quotes end at the end of this verse. Depending on how many levels you chose to mark as direct quotations, you should indicate them ending here with closing second-level (and third-level) quotation mark(s) or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations and quotations within a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ EXO 8 25 gj2w figs-youdual לֵֽ⁠אלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 Here, **your** is EXO 8 26 e9wk תּוֹעֲבַ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם…תּוֹעֲבַ֥ת מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 We do not know what about their sacrificing was an **abomination** to the Egyptians. The same term is used in Genesis 43:32 and 46:34 to describe the Egyptians’ feelings about eating with Hebrews and about the Hebrew profession of shepherding, respectively. Translators should attempt to convey the strong negative feelings that would be provoked in the Egyptians without speculating as to the cause. EXO 8 26 idkt figs-exclusive נִזְבַּ֖ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ…נִזְבַּ֞ח…יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and the Egyptians are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 8 26 i7dy figs-rquestion וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ 1 will they not stone us? Moses asks this question to show Pharaoh that the Egyptians would not allow the Israelites to worship Yahweh by making a sacrifice repugnant to them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “they will certainly stone us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 8 26 gy7d figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 right before their eyes The express **before their eyes** is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 8 26 gy7d figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 right before their eyes The express **before their eyes** is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 8 27 ju3u figs-exclusive נֵלֵ֖ךְ…וְ⁠זָבַ֨חְנוּ֙…אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ…אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and his people are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 8 28 qxes figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙…אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶם֙…תַרְחִ֖יקוּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 8 28 mla2 אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” @@ -708,16 +708,16 @@ EXO 9 1 w0lg כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula EXO 9 1 x4bd עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” EXO 9 2 l7ld figs-parallelism כִּ֛י אִם־מָאֵ֥ן אַתָּ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ וְ⁠עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מַחֲזִ֥יק בָּֽ⁠ם 1 if you refuse to let them go, if you still keep them back These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “If you continue refusing to let them go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 9 3 fltr הִנֵּ֨ה 1 The word **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “look out” -EXO 9 3 ume2 figs-metonymy יַד־יְהוָ֜ה הוֹיָ֗ה בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 then Yahweh’s hand will be on your cattle Here, **hand** represents Yahweh’s power to afflict their animals with disease. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Then the power of Yahweh will afflict your livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 3 ume2 figs-metonymy יַד־יְהוָ֜ה הוֹיָ֗ה בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 then Yahweh’s hand will be on your cattle Here, **hand** represents Yahweh’s power to afflict their animals with disease. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Then the power of Yahweh will afflict your livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 3 cjt9 figs-123person יַד־יְהוָ֜ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person **the hand of Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “My hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 9 3 tn3z figs-youdual בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 on your cattle While the word **your** here is not plural, the next verse shows that it refers to all the people of Egypt who owned cattle. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, you may want to use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 9 3 v8ur figs-merism בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֤ים בַּֽ⁠חֲמֹרִים֙ בַּ⁠גְּמַלִּ֔ים בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 This long list is meant to reinforce the universal effects of the coming plague. It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that it is not limiting but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 9 3 m1fk grammar-collectivenouns בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר…וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 These (**cattle** and **flock**) are collective singular nouns which refer to groups of animals. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on your bulls and cows and on your sheep and goats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 9 3 f5sr figs-metaphor כָּבֵ֥ד 1 Here the plague is spoken of as if it weighed a lot. This means it would be very bad. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “severe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 4 x12r figs-123person יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. You should do the same as you did in the [previous verse](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 9 4 lp3t figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Israel’s cattle Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 4 lp3t figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Israel’s cattle Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 4 u60c grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here, **Israel** is used as a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 9 4 fs25 figs-metonymy מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Egypt’s cattle Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the livestock of the Egyptian people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 4 fs25 figs-metonymy מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Egypt’s cattle Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the livestock of the Egyptian people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 4 k5rx דָּבָֽר 1 Alternate translation: “animal” EXO 9 4 xk5d מִ⁠כָּל־לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Alternate translation: “which belongs to any of the sons of Israel” EXO 9 5 vqz2 וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם יְהוָ֖ה מוֹעֵ֣ד 1 fixed a time Alternate translation: “And Yahweh made an appointed time” @@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ EXO 9 5 w8gk לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר 1 This marks the beginning of a direct quotatio EXO 9 5 pxb1 figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 Yahweh is speaking here. Therefore, you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 9 6 gt3n figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ יְהוָ֜ה 1 It is implied that Moses went and spoke to Pharaoh as directed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses did as Yahweh had commanded. And Yahweh did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 9 6 cx5i figs-hyperbole כֹּ֖ל מִקְנֵ֣ה 1 All the cattle of Egypt died This is exaggerated to emphasize the seriousness of the event. There were still some animals alive that were afflicted by later plagues. However, it may be best to translate this with the word “all.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -EXO 9 6 gy7t figs-metonymy מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 cattle of Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptian peoples’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 6 gy7t figs-metonymy מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 cattle of Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptian peoples’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 6 i0bl figs-litotes וּ⁠מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹא־מֵ֥ת אֶחָֽד 1 Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “But every single one of the Israelites’ livestock lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 9 7 md84 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֗ה 1 behold Again, **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “and listen” EXO 9 7 rtny figs-litotes לֹא־מֵ֛ת מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עַד־אֶחָ֑ד 1 Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “every single one of the Israelites’ livestock was alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ EXO 9 8 ydar קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ מְלֹ֣א חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ EXO 9 8 u5wn פִּ֖יחַ כִּבְשָׁ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” EXO 9 8 gk7f grammar-collectivenouns פִּ֖יחַ 1 Here, **ash** is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 9 8 gu1v הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יְמָ⁠ה 1 Alternate translation: “toward the sky” -EXO 9 8 p795 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה 1 The phrase **before the eyes of Pharaoh** means in his sight. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh” or “so Pharaoh sees it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 8 p795 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה 1 The phrase **before the eyes of Pharaoh** means in his sight. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh” or “so Pharaoh sees it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 9 d2v3 translate-unknown לִ⁠שְׁחִ֥ין פֹּרֵ֛חַ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֖ת 1 fine To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 9 9 jlh0 figs-gendernotations הָ⁠אָדָ֜ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 9 10 wdcn grammar-collectivenouns פִּ֣יחַ 1 Here, **ash** is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -762,14 +762,14 @@ EXO 9 15 f056 figs-hypo כִּ֤י עַתָּה֙ שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶ EXO 9 15 a3l8 figs-metonymy שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ 1 reached out with my hand and attacked you Here, **my hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I could have used my power to attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 15 hgfx figs-metaphor וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר 1 Here, **a plague** is spoken about as if it were something that could be used to hit someone. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and caused you and your people to suffer from a plague” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 16 kwks grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠אוּלָ֗ם בַּ⁠עֲב֥וּר זֹאת֙ הֶעֱמַדְתִּ֔י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְאֹתְ⁠ךָ֣ אֶת־כֹּחִ֑⁠י וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ׃ 1 The statements from **to show** to the end of the verse are Yahweh’s stated goals, and thus, his reasons for not yet destroying Egypt and Pharaoh. You will need to translate, **However, for this reason I appointed you: in order** in a way that connects with the [previous verse](../09/15.md) in an action-goal manner. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 9 16 nec7 figs-metonymy וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 so that my name may be proclaimed throughout all the earth Here, **my name** represents Yahweh’s reputation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 16 nec7 figs-metonymy וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 so that my name may be proclaimed throughout all the earth Here, **my name** represents Yahweh’s reputation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 17 h3ed figs-metaphor עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 lifting yourself up against my people Pharaoh’s opposition to letting the Israelites go to worship Yahweh is spoken of as if he were raising himself up as a barrier to them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You are still blocking my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 17 sdav figs-rpronouns מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, Pharaoh is both the subject and object of the sentence. Translate this in a way that conveys that (1) Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud and (2) this is metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom (as discussed in the previous note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 9 17 r1wv מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, **you** is Pharaoh. EXO 9 17 zfhb בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 Here, **my people** are the Israelites. EXO 9 18 fnd2 הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Listen! Alternate translation: “Pay attention to the important thing I am about to tell you” EXO 9 18 pmy0 כָּ⁠עֵ֣ת…אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹא־הָיָ֤ה כָמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “at this time. There has never been anything like this” -EXO 9 19 fduj figs-metonymy שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר לְ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֑ה 1 The form of address here is singular; Moses is speaking directly to Pharaoh. However, the next two verses make it clear that Pharaoh’s servants heard and understood this warning to be for them as well. In this sense Pharaoh represents the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 19 fduj figs-metonymy שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר לְ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֑ה 1 The form of address here is singular; Moses is speaking directly to Pharaoh. However, the next two verses make it clear that Pharaoh’s servants heard and understood this warning to be for them as well. In this sense Pharaoh represents the Egyptians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 19 eo52 וְ⁠יָרַ֧ד עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ם הַ⁠בָּרָ֖ד 1 Alternate translation: “and the balls of ice will drop on” EXO 9 19 x4ja figs-gendernotations כָּל־הָ⁠אָדָ֨ם 1 Here, **man** means humans and includes men, women, and children. Alternate translation: “everyone” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 9 19 itlv וְ⁠הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֜ה 1 Here, **and beast** includes domestic and wild animals. @@ -847,7 +847,7 @@ EXO 10 16 ty9f figs-youdual אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 EXO 10 17 tsve שָׂ֣א 1 Alternate translation: “take away” EXO 10 17 ttog אַ֣ךְ הַ⁠פַּ֔עַם…רַ֖ק 1 Pharaoh could either be desperate and using **just this once … only** to attempt to make his request as small as possible to increase the chances of it being granted, or he could be still too proud to admit guilt beyond this single incident (which is probably his bold statement about Yahweh being with the Israelites in [10:10](../10/10.md)). The former seems more likely given that he terms this plague “this death.” If your culture has a way of making a request seem as small as possible, you may want to use it to translate Pharaoh’s request. EXO 10 17 kd6d figs-youdual אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 this time Here, **your** is plural. This could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 10 17 doeg figs-metonymy הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people, because there would be no crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 17 doeg figs-metonymy הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people, because there would be no crops. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 17 nn2b figs-explicit הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 take this death away from me The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people because there would be no crops. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this destruction that will lead to our deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 10 18 p9hz וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א 1 Moses and Aaron were summoned to the king in [10:16](../10/16.md), so some translations will need to say that they both left. EXO 10 19 xhsv רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד 1 Alternate translation: “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west” @@ -860,12 +860,12 @@ EXO 10 21 utyz יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter EXO 10 21 m38s figs-metaphor מִצְרָ֑יִם וְ⁠יָמֵ֖שׁ חֹֽשֶׁךְ 1 darkness that may be felt This is a somewhat puzzling construction which describes the darkness. Most English translations take it as a passive, which restated actively means, “people will feel the darkness,” meaning metaphorically what is expressed in different ways in the UST and the alternate translation here. Another option is to view the Hebrew verb form as causative and translate as such: “and the darkness will cause people to feel,” meaning people will have to feel where they are going because they will not be able to see. A final option would be a personification of darkness such that the darkness gropes around, filling in every place in the land. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Egypt, an extremely oppressive darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 10 22 z4ge יָד֖⁠וֹ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 10 22 vbzj translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “for 3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 10 23 jmd8 figs-metonymy לֹֽא־רָא֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶת־אָחִ֗י⁠ו 1 This phrase means that people could not see the people who lived closest to them, whether or not that person was literally their **brother**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one could see the people who lived with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 23 jmd8 figs-metonymy לֹֽא־רָא֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶת־אָחִ֗י⁠ו 1 This phrase means that people could not see the people who lived closest to them, whether or not that person was literally their **brother**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one could see the people who lived with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 23 o572 figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ…אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **man** refers to any human in general. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 10 23 qstu translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “for 3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 10 24 vp7b figs-youdual לְכוּ֙ עִבְד֣וּ…צֹאנְ⁠כֶ֥ם וּ⁠בְקַרְ⁠כֶ֖ם…טַפְּ⁠כֶ֖ם…עִמָּ⁠כֶֽם 1 Every instance of **you** and **your**, as well as the imperative verb forms in this verse, are plural. They refer to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 10 25 rsr4 figs-metonymy גַּם־אַתָּ֛ה תִּתֵּ֥ן בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 The construction here is difficult. Based on context, Moses is probably not saying that Pharaoh needs to provide his own animals to the Israelites. He is asking Pharaoh to let the Israelites take their own animals with them. **Give in our hands** means to take with them, by whatever means, which may include holding a rope in the hand to lead the animals or any other means of herding the animals. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 10 25 cj78 figs-metonymy זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 Here, **sacrifices and burnt offerings** refers to the animals of their flocks and herds that they must take. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “animals for sacrifices and burnt offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 25 cj78 figs-metonymy זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 Here, **sacrifices and burnt offerings** refers to the animals of their flocks and herds that they must take. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “animals for sacrifices and burnt offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 25 bjy0 וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ לַ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **do** means “do the sacrifices and burnt offerings.” Alternate translation: “and we will make those sacrifices and burnt offerings to Yahweh our God” EXO 10 25 ixo7 figs-exclusive בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ…וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ…אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we** and **us** refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 10 26 k0pi figs-exclusive מִקְנֵ֜⁠נוּ…עִמָּ֗⁠נוּ…נִקַּ֔ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ…נֵדַ֗ע…נַּעֲבֹד֙…בֹּאֵ֖⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we, our,** and **us** each refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we, our, and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -898,14 +898,14 @@ EXO 11 5 hv8k בְּכוֹר֮…מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר…בְּכ֣וֹר… EXO 11 5 k42h figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שִּׁפְחָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 who sits on his throne This is a merism. First, two extremes are mentioned: the highest of society (**Pharaoh, who sits on his throne**) and the lowest (**the slave girl who is behind the mill**). Then the animals (**beasts**) are added making it a three-item list of parts of society and even the economy to show the totality of the coming judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 11 5 hr1x אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם 1 who is behind the handmill grinding it Alternate translation: “who is grinding at the handmill” or “who is behind the handmill grinding grain” EXO 11 6 hui7 figs-merism אֲשֶׁ֤ר כָּמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ לֹ֣א נִהְיָ֔תָה וְ⁠כָמֹ֖⁠הוּ לֹ֥א תֹסִֽף 1 This phrase uses the extremes of past and future to emphasize the concept of “never.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “such as has never been and never will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 11 7 b60a figs-idiom לֹ֤א יֶֽחֱרַץ…לְשֹׁנ֔⁠וֹ 1 This means to make an unfriendly noise. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will not growl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 11 7 b60a figs-idiom לֹ֤א יֶֽחֱרַץ…לְשֹׁנ֔⁠וֹ 1 This means to make an unfriendly noise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will not growl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 11 7 t61i figs-youdual תֵּֽדְע֔וּ⁠ן 1 Here, **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 11 7 fl78 אֲשֶׁר֙ יַפְלֶ֣ה יְהוָ֔ה בֵּ֥ין מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠בֵ֥ין יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 9:4](../09/04.md). EXO 11 8 hoft translate-symaction וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣⁠י 1 This does not mean to bow for worshiping. **They will bow to** Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 11 8 l678 figs-explicit וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣⁠י 1 **They will bow to** Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If this action would not mean the same thing in your culture, you may need to make the reason they are bowing explicit. Alternate translation: “and they will bow down to me to beg” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 11 8 njx8 figs-metaphor וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֣ם אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠רַגְלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 Here, the people are figuratively pictured as below Moses, which means they are his followers. The reference to **feet** also can mean they go the same place he goes, again, meaning “follower.” If your language uses a similar image to mean follower, you can translate the image; if not, you may use another image from your culture or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “and all the people who are following you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 11 8 ria5 figs-explicit וְ⁠אַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן אֵצֵ֑א 1 After that I will go out This means that Moses and the Israelites will leave Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “After that I will leave here” or “After that I will go out from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 11 8 milu figs-idiom בָּ⁠חֳרִי־אָֽף 1 This is an idiom meaning that Moses is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “enraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 11 8 milu figs-idiom בָּ⁠חֳרִי־אָֽף 1 This is an idiom meaning that Moses is angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “enraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 11 10 h5g7 writing-endofstory וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן עָשׂ֛וּ אֶת־כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּפְתִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וְ⁠לֹֽא־שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This verse is summarizing and wrapping up the story of the plagues. If your language has a way of summarizing information at the end of a story, try to translate this verse (and possibly verse 9 - see the introductory notes to this chapter) in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) EXO 11 10 um4u figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 12 intro fd2f 0 # Exodus 12 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

The events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])
1. Instruction v. 1-28
* v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions
* v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover
* v. 12-13: description of the plague
* v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover
* v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites
2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus
3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover
4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Unleavened bread

The concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]])

### Ethnic segregation

The Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Potential Translation Issues:

### Passover

### Pronoun usage

In the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in [verses 3](../12/03.md)–4 and [verses 7](../12/07.md)–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.

### You plural

In this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -929,7 +929,7 @@ EXO 12 11 r789 figs-explicit פֶּ֥סַח ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 It EXO 12 12 sa5n figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־אֱלֹהֵ֥י מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֥ה שְׁפָטִ֖ים 1 I will bring punishment on all the gods of Egypt If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you can express the same idea in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 12 13 tywz figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠מַשְׁחִ֔ית 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 12 13 bnoe figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִֽהְיֶ֨ה בָ⁠כֶ֥ם נֶ֨גֶף֙ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I will not put the plague on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 12 13 ox3l figs-metonymy בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Yahweh is going to strike the people and animals who live in **the land of Egypt**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on everything living in the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 12 13 ox3l figs-metonymy בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Yahweh is going to strike the people and animals who live in **the land of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on everything living in the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 12 14 fa9q וְ⁠הָיָה֩ הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה 1 Verses 14-[20](../12/20.md) are instructions for the Israelites’ future celebration of the Passover. If your language makes a distinction between near and far future events or between near and general commands, you may need to make clear that these verses primarily have a later application. EXO 12 14 usns translate-hebrewmonths הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה 1 Here, **this day** means the tenth day of the first month of every year. On this day every year, they must celebrate the Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 12 15 xsb9 אַ֚ךְ 1 Alternate translation: “Surely” or “Indeed” @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ EXO 12 48 j7ob grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וְ⁠כִֽי־יָג֨ EXO 12 48 va2p figs-youcrowd אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜ 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 12 48 h7k9 figs-activepassive הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר 1 all his male relatives must be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone must circumcise all males in his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 48 n3fz grammar-connect-logic-goal הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר וְ⁠אָז֙ יִקְרַ֣ב לַ⁠עֲשֹׂת֔⁠וֹ 1 The sojourner will be circumcised in order to **draw near to keep** the Passover. Some languages may need to place the purpose clause first. Alternate translation: “in order draw near to keep it all his males must be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 12 48 hi4z figs-metonymy כְּ⁠אֶזְרַ֣ח הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 the people who were born in the land Here, **land** refers to Canaan—which is the land that the Israelites will soon live in. The expression **a native of the land** means a person who is a native Israelite. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “those who are Israelites by birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 12 48 hi4z figs-metonymy כְּ⁠אֶזְרַ֣ח הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 the people who were born in the land Here, **land** refers to Canaan—which is the land that the Israelites will soon live in. The expression **a native of the land** means a person who is a native Israelite. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “those who are Israelites by birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 12 48 f9ti figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠כָל־עָרֵ֖ל לֹֽא־יֹ֥אכַל בּֽ⁠וֹ 1 no uncircumcised person may eat If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “And only a circumcised person may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 12 51 e3z3 וַ⁠יְהִ֕י בְּ⁠עֶ֖צֶם הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 It came about This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. EXO 12 51 tyj3 translate-unknown צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 by their armed groups The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ EXO 13 8 qum9 figs-quotesinquotes בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠ה֖וּא לֵ EXO 13 9 p21h figs-parallelism וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 This will be a reminder for you on your hand, and a reminder on your forehead This phrase compares the Festival of Unleavened bread to two different types of physical reminders that help people not forget something important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 13 9 s7zg figs-metaphor לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 a reminder for you on your hand Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie around their hands to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like something you tie around your hand as a reminder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 9 mru4 figs-metaphor וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 a reminder on your forehead Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie on their foreheads to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and like something you tie around your head as a reminder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 13 9 b6ny figs-metonymy לְמַ֗עַן תִּהְיֶ֛ה תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠פִ֑י⁠ךָ 1 so the law of Yahweh may be in your mouth Here, **in your mouth** refers to the words that they speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “so you may always be speaking of the law of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 13 9 b6ny figs-metonymy לְמַ֗עַן תִּהְיֶ֛ה תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠פִ֑י⁠ךָ 1 so the law of Yahweh may be in your mouth Here, **in your mouth** refers to the words that they speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “so you may always be speaking of the law of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 9 w5rm figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 strong hand Here, **hand** refers to power. See how you translated “strong hand” in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 10 rxel figs-merism מִ⁠יָּמִ֖ים יָמִֽימָ⁠ה 1 Alternate translation: “for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 13 11 e886 figs-metonymy וְ⁠לַֽ⁠אֲבֹתֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1052,11 +1052,11 @@ EXO 14 3 tz6j figs-personification סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מ EXO 14 4 dv62 figs-metaphor וְ⁠חִזַּקְתִּ֣י אֶת־לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֮ 1 I will harden Pharaoh’s heart This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong.** If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 14 4 tw2m וְ⁠רָדַ֣ף אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶם֒ 1 he will pursue them Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh will pursue the Israelites” EXO 14 4 d5x1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 I will get honor If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 14 4 a7m2 figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh and to all his army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 14 4 a7m2 figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh and to all his army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 14 4 dms1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂוּ־כֵֽן 1 So the Israelites camped as they were instructed If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what **they did** explicitly. Alternate translation: “So the Israelites turned and camped as Yahweh had instructed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 14 5 t4cn figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֻּגַּד֙ לְ⁠מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 When the king of Egypt was told If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then someone told the king of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 5 it5s בָרַ֖ח 1 had fled Alternate translation: “had run away” -EXO 14 5 k67b figs-metonymy וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the minds of Pharaoh and his servants turned against the people Here, **heart** refers to their attitudes toward the Israelites. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 14 5 k67b figs-metonymy וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the minds of Pharaoh and his servants turned against the people Here, **heart** refers to their attitudes toward the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 5 go8u figs-activepassive וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants turned their hearts to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 5 wljw אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “against the Israelites” EXO 14 5 v236 figs-rquestion מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 What have we done? We have released Israel from serving us. They asked this question to show they thought they had done a foolish thing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We should not have let the Israelites go free from working for us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1085,10 +1085,10 @@ EXO 14 16 t3e4 וּ⁠בְקָעֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 divide it in two Alternate tran EXO 14 17 z5ub וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Be aware Here, **behold me** is an expression meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Yahweh is drawing attention to his next actions. Alternate translation: “Look at what I will do” EXO 14 17 qd3l figs-metaphor מְחַזֵּק֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 I will harden the Egyptians’ hearts This means that God will make them stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts** were “strong.” If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause the Egyptians to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 14 17 asz9 וְ⁠יָבֹ֖אוּ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 so they will go after them Alternate translation: “so that the Egyptians will go into the sea after the Israelites” -EXO 14 17 hjyh figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 14 17 hjyh figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 14 17 asfq figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 so they will go after them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 18 ytnm figs-activepassive בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י 1 so they will go after them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when I cause people to glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 14 18 cji1 figs-ellipsis בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י בְּ⁠פַרְעֹ֔ה בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “when I get glory because of what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” or “when I show my glory by what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 14 18 cji1 figs-ellipsis בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י בְּ⁠פַרְעֹ֔ה בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “when I get glory because of what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” or “when I show my glory by what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 14 19 hsih figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ מַחֲנֵ֣ה…מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 so they will go after them Here, **face** means “front.” Alternate translation: “in front of the camp of … from in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 19 m1do עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ 1 so they will go after them See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md). EXO 14 19 ysv9 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 so they will go after them This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ EXO 14 26 p5ds figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מ EXO 14 26 pw8g נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 14 26 d46y writing-pronouns עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” Here, **his** refers to Pharaoh, king of Egypt. Alternate translation: “on Pharaoh’s chariots and on Pharaoh’s horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 14 27 wn3q וַ⁠יֵּט֩ מֹשֶׁ֨ה אֶת־יָד֜⁠וֹ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֗ם 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. -EXO 14 27 cosa figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנ֥וֹת בֹּ֨קֶר֙ 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea Here, **before the face of** means “before the occurrence of.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “before it was morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 14 27 cosa figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנ֥וֹת בֹּ֨קֶר֙ 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea Here, **before the face of** means “before the occurrence of.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “before it was morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 27 h64r figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְנַעֵ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מִצְרַ֖יִם בְּ⁠ת֥וֹךְ הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 Yahweh drove the Egyptians Here, Yahweh is pictured as acting toward the Egyptians as if they were dirt or dust on his clothing that he shakes to be rid of them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh threw the Egyptians back into the middle of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 14 28 o9qo figs-litotes לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֥ר בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם עַד־אֶחָֽד 1 Yahweh drove the Egyptians This negative statement is meant to strongly convey the idea that all the Egyptians were gone. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Every one of them was gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 14 30 zvbe grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 out of the hand of the Egyptians This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -1129,7 +1129,7 @@ EXO 15 4 p8w6 figs-metaphor מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠ח EXO 15 5 yefe figs-parallelism תְּהֹמֹ֖ת יְכַסְיֻ֑⁠מוּ יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן׃ 1 they went down into the depths like a stone These lines are synonymous parallels where the second clarifies what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “The deeps covered them because they had descended into the depths like a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 15 5 nqe4 figs-simile יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן 1 they went down into the depths like a stone This comparison is that just ***like a stone*** does not float but sinks to the bottom of the sea, the enemy soldiers sank to the bottom of the sea. Alternate translation: “they went down into the deep water like a stone sinking to the bottom of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 6 jx52 figs-parallelism יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב׃ 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “Yahweh, you show how majestic in power your right hand is by shattering the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 15 6 x1fz figs-metonymy יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The **right hand** refers to Yahweh’s power or the things Yahweh does powerfully. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power is glorious; Yahweh, your power has shattered the enemy” or “Yahweh, what you do is gloriously powerful; Yahweh, by your power you have shattered the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 6 x1fz figs-metonymy יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The **right hand** refers to Yahweh’s power or the things Yahweh does powerfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power is glorious; Yahweh, your power has shattered the enemy” or “Yahweh, what you do is gloriously powerful; Yahweh, by your power you have shattered the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 6 rmd4 figs-metaphor תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 has shattered the enemy Moses speaks of the enemy as if it were fragile and could be **shattered** like glass or pottery. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “completely destroys the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 7 i2x4 figs-parallelism תַּהֲרֹ֣ס קָמֶ֑י⁠ךָ תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ 1 those who rose up against you These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first portion (**you overthrow those who rise up against you**) and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “you overthrow those who rise up against you by sending out your heat to devour them like stubble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 15 7 kmv4 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠רֹ֥ב גְּאוֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 those who rose up against you If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance** and **majesty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You are abundantly majestic and” or “Because you are abundantly majestic,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@ EXO 15 8 tguh figs-parallelism נֶ֣עֶרְמוּ מַ֔יִם נִצְּב֥ EXO 15 8 uevt figs-metaphor בְּ⁠לֶב־יָֽם 1 By the blast of your nostrils The center or deepest part of the sea is spoken of as if the sea had a **heart**. Alternate translation: “in the center of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 9 d8nk figs-activepassive תִּמְלָאֵ֣⁠מוֹ נַפְשִׁ֔⁠י 1 my desire will be satisfied on them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will satisfy my desire on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 15 9 lu0e תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י 1 my hand will destroy them The meaning of this phrase is unclear. The word translated **dispossess** could also mean “possess” or “inherit.” What seems clear is that the Egyptians plan to use their power to prevent the Israelites from possessing good things. Whether this is a reference back to **plunder** earlier in the verse or to recapturing them as slaves or to taking over the Israelites’ place in the land of Goshen or to keeping them from reaching the promised land (of Yahweh’s possession, see [verse 17](../15/17.md) regarding where Yahweh will bring his people) or something else is not so clear. It could also refer to taking away their life and breath. **Dispossess** was chosen rather than another term because the verb is in a causative form here. Alternate translation: “my hand will possess them” or “my hand will inherit them” or “my hand will kill them” -EXO 15 9 sm77 figs-metonymy תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י 1 my hand will destroy them Here **hand** is used figuratively of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will dispossess them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 9 sm77 figs-metonymy תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י 1 my hand will destroy them Here **hand** is used figuratively of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will dispossess them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 10 yrj5 figs-metaphor נָשַׁ֥פְתָּ בְ⁠רוּחֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 But you blew with your wind Moses spoke about God making the **wind** blow as if God **blew** the wind through his nose or mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “But you made the wind blow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 10 f7d3 figs-simile צָֽלֲלוּ֙ כַּֽ⁠עוֹפֶ֔רֶת בְּ⁠מַ֖יִם אַדִּירִֽים 1 sank like lead in the mighty waters **Lead** is a heavy metal that is commonly used to make things sink in water. It is used here to show how quickly God’s enemies were destroyed. Alternate translation: “sank as fast as a heavy piece of metal in the deep turbulent waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 11 wq2s figs-rquestion מִֽי־כָמֹ֤⁠כָה בָּֽ⁠אֵלִם֙ יְהוָ֔ה 1 Who is like you, Yahweh, among the gods? Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, no one is like you among the gods!” or “Yahweh, none of the gods is like you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1162,7 +1162,7 @@ EXO 15 15 qyix figs-personification אֵילֵ֣י מוֹאָ֔ב יֹֽאחֲז EXO 15 15 ya48 figs-metaphor נָמֹ֕גוּ 1 will melt away Moses uses the phrase, **melted away,** to speak of people becoming weak because of their fear. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “became weak from fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 16 nk67 figs-doublet תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד 1 Terror and dread will fall on them **Terror and dread** form a doublet meaning “extremely fearful.” If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They will become extremely fearful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 15 16 kbt5 figs-metaphor תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד 1 Terror and dread will fall on them **Terror and dread** are pictured as physical objects that could **fall on** people. The image might be of them crushing people or being a heavy weight that people struggle under (however, the image is not specified). It means that the people will feel the emotions of terror and dread very strongly. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They will be overwhelmed with feelings of terror and dread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 15 16 t2yp figs-metonymy בִּ⁠גְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 Because of your arm’s power Yahweh’s **arm** represents his great strength. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 16 t2yp figs-metonymy בִּ⁠גְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 Because of your arm’s power Yahweh’s **arm** represents his great strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 16 umm7 figs-simile יִדְּמ֣וּ כָּ⁠אָ֑בֶן 1 they will become as still as a stone This could mean: (1) “they will be silent like stone” or (2) “they will be motionless as stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 17 n5i5 figs-explicit תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙ 1 You will bring them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express where God would bring them explicitly. Alternate translation: “You will take your people to Canaan and plant them there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 15 17 u26j figs-go תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ 1 You will bring them Since Moses was not already in Canaan, some languages would use “take” rather than **bring.** Alternate translation: “You will take them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -1180,7 +1180,7 @@ EXO 15 22 c7pe translate-names מִדְבַּר־שׁ֑וּר 1 wilderness of Sh EXO 15 23 a9pv translate-names מָרָ֔תָ⁠ה 1 Marah We do not know the exact location of **Marah**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 15 24 n64m וַ⁠יִּלֹּ֧נוּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם עַל־מֹשֶׁ֥ה 1 complained to Moses and said Murmur is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers. Alternate translation: “And the people complained against Moses” or “And the people grumbled at Moses” EXO 15 26 l2hx figs-123person לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh is speaking about his own voice. Alternate translation: “to my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 15 26 oh8c figs-metonymy לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 26 oh8c figs-metonymy לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 26 sq5x figs-idiom וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּשָׁ֤ר בְּ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֙ תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה 1 do what is right in his eyes The **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or judgment. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and do what Yahweh considers to be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 15 26 bgcf figs-idiom וְ⁠הַֽאֲזַנְתָּ֙ לְ⁠מִצְוֺתָ֔י⁠ו 1 do what is right in his eyes The **ear** represents listening, and listening represents obeying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you carefully obey his commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 15 26 m4cn figs-idiom כָּֽל־הַ⁠מַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will put on you none of the diseases God speaks of causing people to have diseases as putting diseases on them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1193,7 +1193,7 @@ EXO 16 1 u2aq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר י EXO 16 2 h938 figs-hyperbole וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֧ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל 1 The whole community of Israelites complained Here, **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “And many of the community of the sons of Israel murmured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 16 2 nx6f וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ 1 complained Alternate translation: “And … spoke angrily” EXO 16 3 nwy6 figs-hypo מִֽי־יִתֵּ֨ן מוּתֵ֤⁠נוּ 1 If only we had died This is a way of saying that they wished that they had died. It is a hypothetical past statement. Translate it in a way that makes it clear that this did not actually happen. Alternate translation: “We wish that we had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -EXO 16 3 g1n1 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יַד־יְהוָה֙ 1 by Yahweh’s hand The phrase **the hand of Yahweh** represents Yahweh’s action. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by Yahweh’s action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 16 3 g1n1 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יַד־יְהוָה֙ 1 by Yahweh’s hand The phrase **the hand of Yahweh** represents Yahweh’s action. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by Yahweh’s action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 16 4 kls5 figs-metaphor מַמְטִ֥יר לָ⁠כֶ֛ם לֶ֖חֶם מִן־הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יִם 1 I will rain down bread from heaven for you God speaks of food coming **down from heaven** as if it were rain. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “make bread come down from heaven like rain” or “make bread fall to you from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 16 4 yew5 בְּ⁠תוֹרָתִ֖⁠י 1 my law Alternate translation: “in my instruction” EXO 16 5 p1f6 וְ⁠הָיָה֙ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י וְ⁠הֵכִ֖ינוּ 1 It will come about on the sixth day, that they Alternate translation: “It will happen on the sixth day that they will prepare” or “On the sixth day they will prepare” @@ -1242,7 +1242,7 @@ EXO 16 36 a9uh translate-fraction וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥י EXO 17 intro f12q 0 7# Exodus 17 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

- v. 1-7: the Israelites complain and Yahweh gives them water
- v. 8-16: Israel defeats Amalek in battle

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Moses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question shows their ignorance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Wilderness of Sin

Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with the act of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Naming

As in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an altar named “Yahweh is my Banner,” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever. EXO 17 1 jzz5 writing-newevent וַ֠⁠יִּסְעוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֨ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל 1 wilderness of Sin A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 17 1 h1li translate-names סִ֛ין 1 wilderness of Sin The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 16:1](../16/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 17 1 e7jv figs-metonymy עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 wilderness of Sin Here, **mouth** refers figuratively to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 1 e7jv figs-metonymy עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 wilderness of Sin Here, **mouth** refers figuratively to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 17 1 j1fm translate-names בִּ⁠רְפִידִ֔ים 1 Rephidim **Rephidim** means “the resting place,” a place to rest on long journeys through the wilderness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 2 hr9b figs-rquestion מַה־תְּרִיבוּ⁠ן֙ עִמָּדִ֔⁠י מַה־תְּנַסּ֖וּ⁠ן אֶת־יְהוָֽה 1 Why do you quarrel with me? Why do you test Yahweh? Moses uses these questions to scold the people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you speaking against me? And why are you trying to test whether Yahweh is able to give you what you need?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 17 3 cz24 figs-rquestion לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ הֶעֱלִיתָ֣⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֔יִם לְ⁠הָמִ֥ית אֹתִ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנַ֥⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מִקְנַ֖⁠י בַּ⁠צָּמָֽא 1 To kill us and our children and our cattle with thirst? The people use this question to accuse Moses of wanting to kill them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why did you bring us up out of Egypt? Did you bring us here to cause us and our children and animals to die because we have no water to drink?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1260,12 +1260,12 @@ EXO 17 10 ca3g figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יַּ֣עַשׂ יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ כ EXO 17 10 wy51 translate-names וְ⁠ח֔וּר 1 Hur **Hur** was the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 10 itcx writing-participants וְ⁠ח֔וּר 1 Hur **Hur** is a new participant in the story, which you may need to point out in your translation. However, he is a very minor character. He only appears in this passage and once much later in the book, so you may not need to highlight him at all. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 17 11 x5ex figs-synecdoche וְ⁠גָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…וְ⁠גָבַ֥ר עֲמָלֵֽק 1 Israel was winning…Amalek would begin to win The words **Israel** and **Amalek** represent the fighters from those groups. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite fighters were winning … the Amalekite fighters would begin to win” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 17 12 hxt8 figs-idiom וִ⁠ידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים 1 hands became heavy The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his **hands became heavy**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 17 12 hxt8 figs-idiom וִ⁠ידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים 1 hands became heavy The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his **hands became heavy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 17 12 js2p מִ⁠זֶּ֤ה אֶחָד֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה אֶחָ֔ד 1 hands became heavy Alternate translation: “one on one side, and one on the other” -EXO 17 13 plp3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב 1 with the sword The **sword** represents battle. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in combat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 13 plp3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב 1 with the sword The **sword** represents battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in combat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 17 14 c5rl figs-metaphor מָחֹ֤ה אֶמְחֶה֙ אֶת־זֵ֣כֶר עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 I will completely blot out the memory of Amalek God speaks of destroying Amalek as if he were removing people’s memory of Amalek. When a group of people is completely destroyed, there is nothing to remind people about them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will completely destroy Amalek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 17 14 jm77 figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 Amalek The Amalekites are referred to by naming their ancestor. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 17 14 n42j figs-hyperbole מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם 1 Amalek This phrase makes an intentionally broad image and represents all people everywhere. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from all people everywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 17 14 jm77 figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 Amalek The Amalekites are referred to by naming their ancestor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 14 n42j figs-hyperbole מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם 1 Amalek This phrase makes an intentionally broad image and represents all people everywhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from all people everywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 17 15 fneg נִסִּֽ⁠י 1 Amalek A **banner** is something lifted up high, perhaps like a flag, that people can see from a distance and follow. Alternate translation: “is my military standard” or “is my guidon” EXO 17 16 lr14 כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ 1 Amalek The Hebrew here is very difficult, and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: (1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? (2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? (3) What is the meaning of the Hebrew preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah” EXO 17 16 sw1q מִלְחָמָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה בַּֽ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 Amalek This phrase has no verbs in Hebrew. You may need to translate the noun **war** as a verb. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will make war with Amalek” or “Yahweh will war against Amalek” @@ -1276,13 +1276,13 @@ EXO 18 2 chy6 figs-explicit אַחַ֖ר שִׁלּוּחֶֽי⁠הָ 1 after h EXO 18 3 khs1 וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֣י בָנֶ֑י⁠הָ 1 and her two sons This is the ending of the sentence that begins with the words **Jethro … took Zipporah** in [verse 2](../18/02.md). This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah and her two sons to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah and her two sons. EXO 18 3 k4mb translate-names גֵּֽרְשֹׁ֔ם 1 Gershom **Gershom** is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “foreigner.” See [2:22](../02/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 18 4 xi35 translate-names אֱלִיעֶ֑זֶר 1 Eliezer **Eliezer** is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “God is the one who helps me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 18 4 z2km figs-metonymy מֵ⁠חֶ֥רֶב פַּרְעֹֽה 1 Pharaoh’s sword The phrase **from the sword of Pharaoh** represents being killed by Pharaoh or Pharaoh’s army. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from being killed by Pharaoh” or “from being killed by Pharaoh’s army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 4 z2km figs-metonymy מֵ⁠חֶ֥רֶב פַּרְעֹֽה 1 Pharaoh’s sword The phrase **from the sword of Pharaoh** represents being killed by Pharaoh or Pharaoh’s army. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from being killed by Pharaoh” or “from being killed by Pharaoh’s army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 5 zzab וּ⁠בָנָ֥י⁠ו 1 where he was camped Alternate translation: “with his sons” EXO 18 7 s5p2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּשְׁתַּ֨חוּ֙ וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק־ל֔⁠וֹ 1 bowed down, and kissed him These were symbolic acts that were the normal way that people showed great respect and devotion in that culture. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 18 8 rkq2 figs-metonymy עַ֖ל אוֹדֹ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 for Israel’s sake The word **Israel** represents the Israelite people. Alternate translation: “in order to help the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 8 a1ra figs-metaphor כָּל־הַ⁠תְּלָאָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר מְצָאָ֣תַ⁠ם 1 all the hardships that had come to them Moses writes of **hardships** happening to them as if hardships had discovered where they were. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “all the hardships that had happened to them” or “how they had many hard experiences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 18 9 wp1p figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 18 10 nrv7 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠מִ⁠יַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה…מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 9 wp1p figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 10 nrv7 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠מִ⁠יַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה…מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 11 kmk7 כִּ֣י בַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Here, **because of the matter** probably refers back to Yahweh’s rescue of Israel. Alternate translation: “because of what he did” EXO 18 11 ljj6 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites (**them**). This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bringing judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 12 voi9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of God. In this case it likely means that this was a worship event. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1291,7 +1291,7 @@ EXO 18 13 ano2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִ EXO 18 13 wzea מִן־הַ⁠בֹּ֖קֶר עַד־הָ⁠עָֽרֶב 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Alternate translation: “all day” EXO 18 14 bax5 figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר אַתָּ֤ה עֹשֶׂה֙ לָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 What is this that you are doing with the people? Jethro uses this question to show Moses that what he was doing was not good. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing all of this for the people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 18 14 b5wj figs-rquestion מַדּ֗וּעַ אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֛ם נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ מִן־בֹּ֥קֶר עַד־עָֽרֶב 1 Why is it that you sit alone…from morning until evening? Jethro used this question to show Moses that he was doing too much. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you doing all this for the people? Why are you doing this by yourself, and why are all the people standing around you from morning until evening, asking you to make decisions for them?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 18 14 cfd1 figs-metonymy אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The word **sit** here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 14 cfd1 figs-metonymy אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The word **sit** here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 14 tiqs figs-explicit נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The people came to be near Moses so that they could get a chance for him to hear their petitions. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “petition you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 18 jtd2 נָבֹ֣ל תִּבֹּ֔ל 1 You will surely wear yourselves out Alternate translation: “You will surely make yourself very tired” EXO 18 18 h91b figs-metaphor כָבֵ֤ד מִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ 1 This burden is too heavy for you Jethro speaks of the hard work that Moses is doing as if it were a physical burden that Moses was carrying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is too hard for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ EXO 19 8 ljf5 figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־דּ EXO 19 8 rwx6 figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 9 ih2h figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 10 ie7y וְ⁠קִדַּשְׁתָּ֥⁠ם 1 you must set them apart to me This may mean instruct the people, or it may mean Moses will have a role as well. Alternate translation: “and tell them to dedicate themselves to me” or “and help them to purify themselves for me” -EXO 19 11 tdg9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י 1 Be ready Here, **before the eyes** means “so they can see.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 19 11 tdg9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י 1 Be ready Here, **before the eyes** means “so they can see.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 12 d48p וְ⁠הִגְבַּלְתָּ֤ 1 set boundaries The **boundary** was either a mark or some kind of barrier. EXO 19 12 hhv5 figs-quotesinquotes לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֛ם 1 set boundaries A second-level direct quotation begins with **watch**. It is not clear where this command that Moses is to give the Israelites ends. Most English translations end it in [verse 13](../19/13.md) before the last sentence. For that reason, it may be most helpful to translate the instruction as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them to watch themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 19 12 xct0 הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֛ם עֲל֥וֹת בָּ⁠הָ֖ר וּ⁠נְגֹ֣עַ בְּ⁠קָצֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 set boundaries Here, the negative command is implied from the **watch yourselves** command. Alternate translation: “Watch yourselves against climbing on the mountain or touching on its edge” @@ -1359,10 +1359,10 @@ EXO 20 3 r9h3 לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים א EXO 20 4 s7n3 figs-merism וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 nor the likeness This list means all created things wherever they are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created, whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 20 4 rkn1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה 1 nor the likeness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **likeness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 20 5 ka3i writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 You must not bow down to them or worship them Here, **them** refers to carved figures or idols. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 20 5 hx93 figs-ellipsis בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**, therefore **third and fourth** refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” or “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 20 5 hx93 figs-ellipsis בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**, therefore **third and fourth** refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” or “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 20 5 s2ia translate-ordinal עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 20 6 u9nc figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠עֹ֥שֶׂה חֶ֖סֶד לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י 1 I show covenant faithfulness to thousands of those who love me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faithfulness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 20 6 oyh7 figs-ellipsis לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply necessary words from the context. Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 20 6 oyh7 figs-ellipsis לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply necessary words from the context. Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 20 6 yw38 figs-metonymy לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י 1 to thousands of those who love me Here, **thousands** may mean: (1) “forever,” that is, “to all descendants forever” (2) a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “for every generation” or “forever to innumerable people who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 20 7 o96b תִשָּׂ֛א…יִשָּׂ֥א 1 take the name of Yahweh your God To **lift up**, take, or use the name of Yahweh (with emptiness, i.e. improperly) covers many sorts of speaking or invoking his name or making a claim to him or attempting to manipulate him or misrepresenting him. A broad word should be used in translation of this term. EXO 20 7 t3k2 לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֛א אֶת־שֵֽׁם־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 take the name of Yahweh your God Alternate translation: “You must not use the name of Yahweh your God” @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ EXO 20 7 gcz2 לַ⁠שָּׁ֑וְא…לַ⁠שָּֽׁוְא 1 in vain Alter EXO 20 7 sl6g figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א יְנַקֶּה֙ 1 I will not hold guiltless If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. . Alternate translation: “I will certainly consider guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 20 8 kwn7 לְ⁠קַדְּשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 set it apart Alternate translation: “to make it holy to me” or “to consecrate it to me” EXO 20 9 sad1 מְלַאכְתֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 do all your work Alternate translation: “your occupation” or “your livelihood” -EXO 20 10 t1ky figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁעָרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 within your gates Cities often had walls around them to keep out enemies, and gates for people to go in and out. Anyone who was inside the gates was part of the community. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “within your community” or “inside your city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 20 10 t1ky figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁעָרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 within your gates Cities often had walls around them to keep out enemies, and gates for people to go in and out. Anyone who was inside the gates was part of the community. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “within your community” or “inside your city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 20 11 vw1f translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֑י 1 on the seventh day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 20 14 wyv9 לֹ֖א תִּנְאָֽף 1 You must not commit adultery Alternate translation: “You must not have sex with anyone other than your spouse” EXO 20 16 zix8 לֹֽא־תַעֲנֶ֥ה בְ⁠רֵעֲ⁠ךָ֖ עֵ֥ד שָֽׁקֶר 1 must not give false testimony Alternate translation: “You must not speak a false report against your neighbor” @@ -1383,7 +1383,7 @@ EXO 20 20 hocw figs-metaphor תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־ EXO 20 21 lts1 וּ⁠מֹשֶׁה֙ נִגַּ֣שׁ 1 Moses approached Alternate translation: “and Moses moved closer,” EXO 20 23 qm44 אֱלֹ֤הֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י זָהָ֔ב 1 gods of silver or gods of gold Alternate translation: “gods made out of silver or gold” or “idols made out of silver or gold” EXO 20 24 pf1i מִזְבַּ֣ח אֲדָמָה֮ 1 earthen altar The phrase **an altar of earth** means an altar made of materials from the ground, such as stone, soil, or clay. -EXO 20 24 ge89 figs-metonymy אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 cause my name to be honored Here, **name** is a metonym for God’s being. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I cause myself to be remembered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 20 24 ge89 figs-metonymy אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 cause my name to be honored Here, **name** is a metonym for God’s being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I cause myself to be remembered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 20 24 zmc4 figs-activepassive אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 cause my name to be honored If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I choose for you to remember me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 20 26 qm1b figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַעֲלֶ֥ה בְ⁠מַעֲלֹ֖ת עַֽל־מִזְבְּחִ֑⁠י 1 You must not go up to my altar on steps If you need to connect this statement more explicitly to the previous statements regarding building the alter, you could add a phrase about building steps. Alternate translation: “Do not build steps up to the altar and go up to it on those steps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 20 26 e28y figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־תִגָּלֶ֥ה עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 You must not go up to my altar on steps If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you do not expose your nakedness over it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1513,8 +1513,8 @@ EXO 22 21 eoa5 figs-explicit כִּֽי־גֵרִ֥ים הֱיִיתֶ֖ם בּ EXO 22 22 djh3 figs-doublenegatives כָּל־אַלְמָנָ֥ה וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם לֹ֥א תְעַנּֽוּ⁠ן׃ 1 You must not mistreat any widow or fatherless child If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must treat all widows and fatherless children fairly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 22 22 v3i8 אַלְמָנָ֥ה 1 widow Alternate translation: “woman whose husband has died” EXO 22 22 l2ih וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם 1 fatherless child Alternate translation: “or child with no parents” -EXO 22 24 zszz figs-idiom וְ⁠חָרָ֣ה אַפִּ֔⁠י 1 fatherless child This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh will be angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 22 24 sx9h figs-metonymy בֶּ⁠חָ֑רֶב 1 I will kill you with the sword To be killed **with the sword** is a metonym that means a person will die violently, perhaps while fighting in a war. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 22 24 zszz figs-idiom וְ⁠חָרָ֣ה אַפִּ֔⁠י 1 fatherless child This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh will be angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 22 24 sx9h figs-metonymy בֶּ⁠חָ֑רֶב 1 I will kill you with the sword To be killed **with the sword** is a metonym that means a person will die violently, perhaps while fighting in a war. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 22 25 v5je כְּ⁠נֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 a moneylender Alternate translation: “like one who lends money” EXO 22 25 g3ry לֹֽא־תְשִׂימ֥וּ⁠ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו נֶֽשֶׁךְ 1 charge him interest Alternate translation: “you must not charge him extra money for borrowing” or “you must not charge him extra money for the loan” EXO 22 27 wi2m כְסוּתוֹ֙ לְ⁠בַדָּ֔⁠הּ 1 only covering Alternate translation: “is his only coat” or “is his only garment to keep him warm” @@ -1529,11 +1529,11 @@ EXO 23 intro hk5t 0 # Exodus 23 General Notes

## Structure

This EXO 23 1 we1y 0 General Information: Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel. EXO 23 1 eeoc figs-abstractnouns לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 dishonest witness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **report** and **emptiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 23 1 l4xr שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “a false testimony” -EXO 23 1 fu5k figs-idiom אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע 1 dishonest witness Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 23 1 y1a3 figs-metonymy עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס 1 dishonest witness Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 1 fu5k figs-idiom אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע 1 dishonest witness Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 23 1 y1a3 figs-metonymy עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס 1 dishonest witness Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 2 nqz9 וְ⁠לֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה 1 nor may you bear witness Alternate translation: “and you also must not speak” EXO 23 2 z6ej figs-metaphor לֹֽא־תִהְיֶ֥ה אַחֲרֵֽי־רַבִּ֖ים לְ⁠רָעֹ֑ת 1 siding with the crowd This is a metaphor that describes one’s agreeing with a group of people as if he actually walked behind that group. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You must not do the evil that the crowd wants” or “You must not agree with the majority for evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 23 2 nuag figs-ellipsis לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 siding with the crowd The phrase “from justice” is omitted twice but should be understood in both cases. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 23 2 nuag figs-ellipsis לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 siding with the crowd The phrase “from justice” is omitted twice but should be understood in both cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 23 2 tnv2 לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 pervert justice Here, **to turn aside** means to do illegal or immoral actions that result in an unjust ruling. Alternate translation: “to pervert justice … that perverts justice” EXO 23 6 z2al לֹ֥א תַטֶּ֛ה מִשְׁפַּ֥ט אֶבְיֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ 1 Do not thrust aside justice for your poor in his lawsuit Alternate translation: “Do not decide to treat a poor man unjustly in legal matters” EXO 23 6 vh76 בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ 1 lawsuit Here, **in his lawsuit** refers to any matter that a court decides. @@ -1554,8 +1554,8 @@ EXO 23 12 u07q translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִ EXO 23 12 gpu1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּפֵ֥שׁ בֶּן־אֲמָתְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠הַ⁠גֵּֽר 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and the son of your female slave and the sojourner may refresh themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 23 13 ldn8 תִּשָּׁמֵ֑רוּ 1 Pay attention to Alternate translation: “Do” or “Obey” EXO 23 13 va2j figs-parallelism וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods These two instructions mean almost the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Be sure never to speak the names of other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 23 13 x5tf figs-metonymy וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods These parallel phrases probably mean praying to other gods. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods, never let me hear you do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 13 apnw figs-metonymy לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods To be **on your mouth** means to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 13 x5tf figs-metonymy וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods These parallel phrases probably mean praying to other gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods, never let me hear you do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 13 apnw figs-metonymy לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods To be **on your mouth** means to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 13 s86p figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also see previous note. Alternate translation: “nor speak them so someone could hear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 23 14 ezgh translate-numbers שָׁלֹ֣שׁ 1 mention the names of other gods Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 23 15 bu7n translate-hebrewmonths הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 Aviv **Aviv** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) @@ -1564,14 +1564,14 @@ EXO 23 15 tx1v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖ EXO 23 16 ybsb וְ⁠חַ֤ג הַ⁠קָּצִיר֙ 1 Festival of Ingathering Elsewhere this is called the “Festival of Weeks.” See [Exodus 34:22](../34/22.md) and Deuteronomy 16:9 and following. EXO 23 16 pnx4 וְ⁠חַ֤ג הָֽ⁠אָסִף֙ 1 Festival of Ingathering This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. Alternate translation: “And the Festival of the Ingathering” EXO 23 16 wgxm figs-metaphor בְּ⁠צֵ֣את הַ⁠שָּׁנָ֔ה 1 Festival of Ingathering The phrase **in the exiting of the year** means at the end of the year. The year is pictured as something that is leaving. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as the year goes out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 23 17 t5xj figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙…אֶל־פְּנֵ֖י הָ⁠אָדֹ֥ן׀ יְהוָֽה׃ 1 All your males must appear before the Lord Yahweh Here, to **appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **To the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 17 t5xj figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙…אֶל־פְּנֵ֖י הָ⁠אָדֹ֥ן׀ יְהוָֽה׃ 1 All your males must appear before the Lord Yahweh Here, to **appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **To the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 20 bssx figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 This means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 21 mpfy figs-metonymy הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו 1 Be attentive to him This means to respect him; **from his face** refers to his person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show respect to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 21 mpfy figs-metonymy הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו 1 Be attentive to him This means to respect him; **from his face** refers to his person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show respect to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 21 pm7x figs-activepassive הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו 1 Be attentive to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 23 21 p5y3 grammar-connect-logic-result אַל־תַּמֵּ֣ר בּ֑⁠וֹ כִּ֣י לֹ֤א יִשָּׂא֙ לְ⁠פִשְׁעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם כִּ֥י שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ׃ 1 Do not provoke him, for he will not pardon There are two reasons given for the instruction **do not cause bitterness in him**. They are connected in such a way that you could say: “Because my name is within him, he will not forgive your transgressions; therefore, do not cause bitterness in him.” The relation of the **name** and **forgiveness** is not explicit. Alternate translation: “If you provoke him, he will not pardon your sins, for my name is within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 23 21 p4jv figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 My name is on him Here, **name** refers to God’s authority. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he has my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 21 gt76 figs-metonymy וּ⁠שְׁמַ֥ע בְּ⁠קֹל֖⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 22 z1gn figs-metonymy אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 21 p4jv figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 My name is on him Here, **name** refers to God’s authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he has my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 21 gt76 figs-metonymy וּ⁠שְׁמַ֥ע בְּ⁠קֹל֖⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 22 z1gn figs-metonymy אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 22 y9bm figs-parallelism וְ⁠אָֽיַבְתִּי֙ אֶת־אֹ֣יְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠צַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־צֹרְרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 an enemy to your enemies and an adversary to your adversaries These two phrases mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 23 23 x2nh figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒ 1 This phrase, **before your face**, means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 24 a1d5 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א תַעֲשֶׂ֖ה כְּ⁠מַֽעֲשֵׂי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 You must not…do as they do The Israelites must not live as the people who worship other gods. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you must not live as the people live who worship those gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1579,9 +1579,9 @@ EXO 23 25 t3ir figs-merism וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ אֶֽת־לַחְמְ⁠ךָ֖ EXO 23 25 ydl4 figs-123person וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ…וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִ֥י 1 he will bless…I will remove Yahweh switched between the first and third pronoun to refer to himself. Here, both **he** and **I** refer to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 23 26 q4gz figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א תִהְיֶ֛ה מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה וַ⁠עֲקָרָ֖ה 1 No woman will be barren or will miscarry her young in your land If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Every woman will be able to become pregnant and give birth to healthy babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 23 26 i1r9 מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה 1 miscarry to have a pregnancy end early and unexpectedly, resulting in the death of the baby -EXO 23 26 geqg figs-idiom אֶת־מִסְפַּ֥ר יָמֶ֖י⁠ךָ אֲמַלֵּֽא 1 miscarry This is an idiom that means to live a long time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you a long life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 23 26 geqg figs-idiom אֶת־מִסְפַּ֥ר יָמֶ֖י⁠ךָ אֲמַלֵּֽא 1 miscarry This is an idiom that means to live a long time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you a long life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 23 27 yps8 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 27 q901 figs-idiom וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֧י אֶת־כָּל־אֹיְבֶ֛י⁠ךָ אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ עֹֽרֶף 1 miscarry This is an idiom meaning that the enemies will turn and run away (showing the Israelites the backs of their necks). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will make all of your enemies flee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 23 27 q901 figs-idiom וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֧י אֶת־כָּל־אֹיְבֶ֛י⁠ךָ אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ עֹֽרֶף 1 miscarry This is an idiom meaning that the enemies will turn and run away (showing the Israelites the backs of their necks). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will make all of your enemies flee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 23 28 t0r1 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ…מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “before you … from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 28 cg7i translate-unknown הַ⁠צִּרְעָ֖ה 1 hornets The **hornet** is a flying insect that can sting people and cause pain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 23 28 oocw grammar-collectivenouns הַ⁠צִּרְעָ֖ה…וְ⁠גֵרְשָׁ֗ה 1 hornets Here, **hornet** is used in the singular but refers to a large group of the flying, stinging insects. **It** agrees in number with **hornet**. It may be necessary to translate as a plural. Alternate translation: “hornets … and they will drive out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ EXO 24 2 p06o writing-pronouns וְ⁠הֵ֖ם 1 seventy of Israel’s elders He EXO 24 2 dqnp figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 24 3 sbc3 writing-newevent 0 with one voice Verses 3-8 tell of a different scene than the rest of the chapter, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. It seems that there were some preparations needed before Moses and the elders could go up to meet Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 24 3 nuqr 0 with one voice See [Exodus 19:8](../19/08.md) for how you translated a very similar event. -EXO 24 3 cg32 figs-idiom ק֤וֹל אֶחָד֙ 1 with one voice Here, **with one voice** is an idiom that means the people were in complete agreement. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “together” or “in agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 24 3 cg32 figs-idiom ק֤וֹל אֶחָד֙ 1 with one voice Here, **with one voice** is an idiom that means the people were in complete agreement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “together” or “in agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 24 4 h7gg תַּ֣חַת הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 foot of the mountain Alternate translation: “at the base of the mountain” EXO 24 4 uipf translate-numbers וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤ים עֶשְׂרֵה֙…לִ⁠שְׁנֵ֥ים עָשָׂ֖ר 1 foot of the mountain Alternate translation: “and 12 … according to the 12” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 24 7 c9tm translate-unknown סֵ֣פֶר הַ⁠בְּרִ֔ית 1 foot of the mountain Here, **book** does not mean something in our modern format. It was likely a piece of papyrus (an early form of paper made from reeds) or animal skin that rolled up. Alternate translation: “the Covenant he had written down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ EXO 24 10 ic4s figs-personification וְ⁠תַ֣חַת רַגְלָ֗י⁠ו 1 EXO 24 10 q8sn לִבְנַ֣ת 1 pavement a hard surface for walking or riding EXO 24 10 pm87 translate-unknown הַ⁠סַּפִּ֔יר 1 sapphire stone A **sapphire** is a gemstone that is blue in color. If there is a blue gemstone that your people are familiar with, you may use it here, as the exact gemstone is not certain. You may also describe it. Alternate translation: “a blue gemstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 24 10 zd6u figs-simile וּ⁠כְ⁠עֶ֥צֶם הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יִם לָ⁠טֹֽהַר 1 as clear as the sky itself The point of this comparison is the blueness of the tile. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and it was blue like the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 24 11 jds6 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders Here, **his hand** refers to his judgement. This means that God did not harm the leaders. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 24 11 jds6 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders Here, **his hand** refers to his judgement. This means that God did not harm the leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 24 11 b398 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders What would be expected is that they would die if they saw God. The Israelite elders ability to see God and live is unexpected. Be sure your translation conveys that. Alternate translation: “However, he did not send out his hand to the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 24 12 dx4f figs-explicit לְ⁠הוֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 tablets of stone and the law and commandments This means so that Moses and the other Israelite leaders could teach the laws and commandments to the Israelite people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 13 flw7 writing-participants וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ 1 with his assistant Joshua **Joshua** is introduced here again. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -1622,8 +1622,8 @@ EXO 24 14 mhvj grammar-connect-time-sequential וְ⁠אֶל־הַ⁠זְּקֵ EXO 24 14 qiy4 לָ֣⁠נוּ 1 wait for us Alternate translation: “Joshua and me” EXO 24 14 uc7r translate-names וְ⁠חוּר֙ 1 Hur **Hur** is a man’s name. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:10](../17/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 24 14 jyh8 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה 1 Hur **Behold** is used to draw attention to important information that Moses is about to tell them. It is frequently omitted. If your language uses a statement to draw attention to important information, you should consider using it here. Alternate translation: “Remember” -EXO 24 14 dqhj figs-idiom מִי־בַ֥עַל דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 Hur This is an idiom that means that someone has a legal dispute or complaint. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever has a legal claim” or “Anyone with a law case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 24 16 j2s5 figs-metonymy כְּבוֹד־יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s glory This was the brilliant light of Yahweh’s presence. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the brilliant light showing Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 24 14 dqhj figs-idiom מִי־בַ֥עַל דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 Hur This is an idiom that means that someone has a legal dispute or complaint. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever has a legal claim” or “Anyone with a law case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 24 16 j2s5 figs-metonymy כְּבוֹד־יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s glory This was the brilliant light of Yahweh’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the brilliant light showing Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 24 16 sb1o translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 Yahweh’s glory Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 24 16 uwdd translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 Yahweh’s glory If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 24 17 e4n6 figs-simile כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת 1 like a devouring fire This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly, like a fire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -1690,7 +1690,7 @@ EXO 26 4 ghz8 תְּכֵ֗לֶת 1 one set Alternate translation: “blue yarn EXO 26 4 wdum translate-ordinal הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ת…הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 26 4 d0sl בַּ⁠חֹבָ֑רֶת 1 one set Alternate translation: “in one set of five curtains” EXO 26 4 gjt1 בַּ⁠מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set Alternate translation: “in the other set of five curtains” -EXO 26 5 nkr7 figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 one set This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 26 5 nkr7 figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 one set This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 26 6 sns4 וְ⁠עָשִׂ֕יתָ חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים קַרְסֵ֣י זָהָ֑ב וְ⁠חִבַּרְתָּ֨ אֶת־הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֜ת אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 clasps The clasps fit into the loops (verses 4 and 5) to hold the curtains together. EXO 26 6 k12s figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 clasps This is the same idiom as in the previous verse, meaning together. Alternate translation: “to each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 26 6 b242 אֶחָֽד 1 clasps Alternate translation: “as though it were one piece” @@ -1744,7 +1744,7 @@ EXO 27 9 v748 translate-unknown שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר 1 fine twined li EXO 27 9 ce9a translate-bdistance מֵאָ֤ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּה֙ 1 one hundred cubits You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 10 qq8f וְ⁠עַמֻּדָ֣י⁠ו עֶשְׂרִ֔ים וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֥ם עֶשְׂרִ֖ים נְחֹ֑שֶׁת 1 one hundred cubits Here, **bronze** may refer to both the **pillars** and the **bases**, or just to the **bases.** The pillars inside the tent were of wood overlaid with gold; these may be wood overlaid with bronze. EXO 27 11 gjg5 0 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long See how you translated many similar words in [Exodus 27:9-10](../27/09.md). -EXO 27 11 ynao figs-ellipsis מֵ֣אָה 1 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 27 11 ynao figs-ellipsis מֵ֣אָה 1 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 27 11 xev2 translate-bdistance מֵ֣אָה 1 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 12 p4u4 translate-bdistance חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה 1 there must be a curtain You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 13 w2sg translate-bdistance חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אַמָּֽה 1 The courtyard must also be fifty cubits long You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) @@ -1758,7 +1758,7 @@ EXO 27 16 kn9u 0 blue, purple, and scarlet material and fine twined linen See EXO 27 16 g5wi translate-bdistance עֶשְׂרִ֣ים אַמָּ֗ה 1 an embroiderer You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 17 wtng figs-activepassive מְחֻשָּׁקִ֣ים 1 an embroiderer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Among other options not so relevant here, Wiktionary suggests that a **fillet** could be a “thin strip of any material, in various technical uses,” “thin featureless molding used as separation between broader decorative moldings,” or a rounded corner. Alternate translation: “you shall fillet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 27 18 wt7n translate-bdistance מֵאָ֨ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים…חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 one hundred cubits If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters … 23 meters … 2.3 meters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 27 18 mu6b figs-ellipsis חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים 1 one hundred cubits Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 27 18 mu6b figs-ellipsis חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים 1 one hundred cubits Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 27 19 bs7c translate-unknown יְתֵדֹתָ֛י⁠ו…יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 tent pegs The **tent pegs** are strong, sharp pieces of metal driven into the ground and used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground or to secure ropes in order to create tension to stabilize something standing upright. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 27 21 p7ru figs-synecdoche הָ⁠עֵדֻ֗ת 1 ark of testimony The **testimony** refers to the chest that contains the sacred slabs of stone on which Yahweh had written his commandments. If it would be more clear to your readers you may include a reference to the chest. Alternate translation: “is the Box of the Testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 27 21 nlwz יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨⁠וֹ 1 ark of testimony Here, **it** refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and **arrange** means to set it up for burning, and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it” @@ -1845,7 +1845,7 @@ EXO 28 39 i62z translate-unknown רֹקֵֽם 1 the work of an embroiderer An em EXO 28 40 pfs2 translate-unknown אַבְנֵטִ֑ים 1 sashes The **sashes** are decorative pieces of cloth that people wear around the waist or across the chest. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 40 v2tj translate-unknown וּ⁠מִגְבָּעוֹת֙ 1 headbands A headband is a decorative, narrow strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. This seems to be similar to, but perhaps smaller than the turban worn by the high priest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 41 xa75 translate-kinship אַהֲרֹ֣ן אָחִ֔י⁠ךָ 1 You must clothe Aaron your brother Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -EXO 28 41 agey figs-idiom וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֧ אֶת־יָדָ֛⁠ם 1 You must clothe Aaron your brother This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 28 41 agey figs-idiom וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֧ אֶת־יָדָ֛⁠ם 1 You must clothe Aaron your brother This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 28 42 vz62 translate-unknown מִכְנְסֵי 1 undergarments These are articles of clothing worn under the outer clothes, next to the skin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 42 m1bi figs-euphemism בְּשַׂ֣ר עֶרְוָ֑ה 1 undergarments This refers to the male genitalia. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “their private parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 29 intro xmd9 0 # Exodus 29 General Notes

Large translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.

## Structure

As you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole; the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.
The Consecration of the Priests
- v. 1-3 Preparing items
- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons
- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar
- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams
* v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned
* v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating
* v. 29-30 Priestly succession
* v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram
- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days
- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings
- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Consecrating priests

This chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Forms of you

For this chapter, it seems that the singular “you: that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters now actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.

### “I will live among the Israelites”

As God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark. @@ -1916,7 +1916,7 @@ EXO 29 36 r5tx 0 General Information: This verse and the next explain the purp EXO 29 36 s81n grammar-connect-logic-goal וּ⁠פַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַ⁠יּוֹם֙ עַל־הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְ⁠חִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּ⁠כַפֶּרְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 General Information: The phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector. In languages that need to put purpose first, you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 29 37 pq5d figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Then the altar will be completely set apart to me Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 29 37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 will be set apart to Yahweh Alternate translation: “will also become set apart” -EXO 29 38 e4r9 figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 General Information: The phrase **sons of a year** is an idiom meaning one year old. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 29 38 e4r9 figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 General Information: The phrase **sons of a year** is an idiom meaning one year old. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 39 qxst figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם 1 General Information: The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 40 x6i4 translate-fraction וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן…רֶ֣בַע…רְבִעִ֥ית 1 a tenth…the fourth part A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. A **fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 29 40 nd8q figs-explicit וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת 1 a tenth…the fourth part Many commentators suggest that this means one tenth of an “ephah” even though “ephah” is not written. If your translation style retains the original measurement words, you may need to insert the word you are using for “ephah” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1945,10 +1945,10 @@ EXO 30 10 k6xk קַרְנֹתָ֔י⁠ו 1 horns These were projections that lo EXO 30 10 san2 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 30 10 jxn0 figs-possession קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים 1 throughout your generations Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 30 10 uxb4 figs-quotemarks לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 throughout your generations After **Yahweh**, the direct quote that began in [Exo 25:2](../25/02.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 30 12 dprx figs-idiom תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ 1 When you take In this context, **lift up the head** means to take a census. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “take a census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 30 12 dprx figs-idiom תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ 1 When you take In this context, **lift up the head** means to take a census. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “take a census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 12 s73c figs-you תִשָּׂ֞א 1 When you take This could mean: (1) **you** refers to Moses and the leaders of Israel in future generations when they take a census or (2) **you** refers to just Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 12 k5p1 אִ֣ישׁ 1 a census of the Israelites The leaders only counted the Israelite men. -EXO 30 13 y1kn figs-idiom כָּל־הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 half a shekel of silver This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 30 13 y1kn figs-idiom כָּל־הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 half a shekel of silver This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 13 i4wk translate-bweight הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 half a shekel of silver The **shekel** and the **gerah** are units of weight. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 30 13 a2py translate-bmoney הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 half a shekel of silver The **shekel** was used as both a weight and a unit of money. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) EXO 30 13 w3hx translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית…מַחֲצִ֣ית 1 half a shekel of silver A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) @@ -2001,7 +2001,7 @@ EXO 30 38 xn6v לְ⁠הָרִ֣יחַ בָּ֑⁠הּ 1 perfume This could mea EXO 30 38 sa1m figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 must be cut off from his people See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 30 38 o6v0 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 must be cut off from his people See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 31 intro wfk7 0 # Exodus 31 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

- v. 1-11: Selection of the skilled craftsmen
- v. 12-17: Sabbath instruction
- v. 18: the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Sabbath

As described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]) -EXO 31 2 m8ju figs-idiom קָרָ֣אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֑ם 1 I have called by name Yahweh speaks of choosing specific people as calling them by name. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 31 2 m8ju figs-idiom קָרָ֣אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֑ם 1 I have called by name Yahweh speaks of choosing specific people as calling them by name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 31 2 hf5r translate-names בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל…אוּרִ֥י…ח֖וּר 1 Bezalel…Uri…Hur These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 31 3 f7sk figs-metaphor וָ⁠אֲמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 I have filled Bezalel with my Spirit Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have given my spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 31 3 hley figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠חָכְמָ֛ה 1 I have filled Bezalel with my Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **skill** in another way. Alternate translation: “so he can work skillfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -2009,10 +2009,10 @@ EXO 31 3 my4f figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בִ⁠תְבוּנָ֥ה 1 I have fille EXO 31 3 emp5 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת 1 I have filled Bezalel with my Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he knows his work well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 31 3 r6i5 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְלָאכָֽה 1 for all kinds of craftsmanship If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **craftsmanship** in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 31 6 jh61 translate-names אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב…אֲחִֽיסָמָךְ֙ 1 Oholiab…Ahisamak These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 31 6 wcq7 figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠לֵ֥ב כָּל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב נָתַ֣תִּי חָכְמָ֑ה 1 I have put skill into the hearts of all who are wise God speaks of making people able to make things as if he were putting the ability into their hearts. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have given skill to all who are wise” or “I have made all who are wise able to make things well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 31 6 wcq7 figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠לֵ֥ב כָּל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב נָתַ֣תִּי חָכְמָ֑ה 1 I have put skill into the hearts of all who are wise God speaks of making people able to make things as if he were putting the ability into their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have given skill to all who are wise” or “I have made all who are wise able to make things well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 31 11 iusb writing-pronouns יַעֲשֽׂוּ 1 I have put skill into the hearts of all who are wise **They** refers to Bezalel and Oholiab as well as the unnamed other “skilled of heart” (talented craftsmen) referred to in [verse 2](../31/02.md) and [verse 6](../30/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 31 13 bveg figs-quotemarks לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר 1 You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days A second-level direct quotation starts after **saying**. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. There are multiple possible endings for this quotation, which will be addressed in later verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 31 13 i1lw figs-metaphor אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ 1 You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 31 13 i1lw figs-metaphor אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ 1 You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 31 13 gw13 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your people’s generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 31 14 dsya figs-quotemarks לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 throughout your people’s generations One possible ending place for the second-level quotation that began in the previous verse is after **to you**. The rest of Yahweh’s instructions to Moses in this section do not use the second person to address Israel directly, so you may close the second-level quotation here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 31 14 plq5 figs-activepassive מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֔ת 1 must surely be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2021,7 +2021,7 @@ EXO 31 15 v4dv translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 but the seventh day Alternat EXO 31 15 fvga translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 but the seventh day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 31 15 lrat שַׁבַּ֧ת שַׁבָּת֛וֹן 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “a Sabbath of complete rest” EXO 31 15 fxuo figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 must surely be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 31 16 t9hw figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 must keep the Sabbath Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 31 16 t9hw figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 must keep the Sabbath Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 31 16 n7q2 לְ⁠דֹרֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 They must observe it throughout their people’s generations See how you translated “throughout their people’s generations” in [Exodus 12:42](../12/42.md). Alternate translation: “; they and all the generations of their descendants must observe it.” EXO 31 16 yef8 בְּרִ֥ית עוֹלָֽם 1 lasting covenant Alternate translation: “A covenant that will always exist” or “A lasting covenant” EXO 31 17 oc30 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּנָּפַֽשׁ 1 lasting covenant If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and he refreshed himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2030,7 +2030,7 @@ EXO 32 intro vv2w 0 # Exodus 32 General Notes

## Structure and formatt EXO 32 1 oan6 writing-newevent 0 the people saw This chapter begins with a major scene shift, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 32 1 cfk8 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the people saw Here, the word **saw** is used to indicate understanding or realization of a situation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And the people realized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 1 lnau figs-rpronouns וַ⁠יִּקָּהֵ֨ל הָ⁠עָ֜ם 1 the people saw This means the people both decided to gather and were the ones gathering. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -EXO 32 1 k2i1 figs-idiom ק֣וּם 1 Come, make us an idol **Arise** strengthens the force of the command following it. The people were demanding that Aaron make an idol for them. It did not necessarily mean that he should literally stand up. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 1 k2i1 figs-idiom ק֣וּם 1 Come, make us an idol **Arise** strengthens the force of the command following it. The people were demanding that Aaron make an idol for them. It did not necessarily mean that he should literally stand up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 1 mrb5 figs-metonymy יֵֽלְכוּ֙ לְ⁠פָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 go before us Here, **before our faces** means ahead of. The Israelites want idols to lead them. Alternate translation: “shall lead us” or “shall be our leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 1 wulk כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה 1 go before us People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. EXO 32 2 p86s writing-pronouns וְ⁠הָבִ֖יאוּ 1 bring them to me Here, **them** refers to the golden rings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2053,10 +2053,10 @@ EXO 32 8 f62v figs-123person אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙…הֶֽעֱל֖וּ⁠ך EXO 32 9 ffe2 figs-metaphor עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֖רֶף 1 a stiff-necked people Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had hard necks. The image comes from an animal that does not want to go the way his master is trying to direct him (not going in the way God commanded). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is a rebellious people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 9 my87 grammar-collectivenouns הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…הֽוּא 1 a stiff-necked people The word **people** is a collective noun, so the pronouns referring to the people are singular. You may use plural pronouns if that is the normal usage in your language. Alternate translation: “these … they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 32 10 fmk3 grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠עַתָּה֙ 1 Now then **So now** is used here to mark that Yahweh’s next statements are a result of what he has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 32 10 sd9w figs-idiom וְ⁠יִֽחַר־אַפִּ֥⁠י בָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 My anger will burn hot against them This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And let me be angry with them”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 10 sd9w figs-idiom וְ⁠יִֽחַר־אַפִּ֥⁠י בָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 My anger will burn hot against them This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And let me be angry with them”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 10 vc2u writing-pronouns אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 from you Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 32 11 h62e figs-rquestion לָ⁠מָ֤ה יְהוָה֙ יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הוֹצֵ֨אתָ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 why does your anger burn against your people…a mighty hand? Moses used this question to try to persuade Yahweh not to be so angry with his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, do not let your nose burn against your people whom you have brought out from the land of Egypt with great power and with a strong hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 32 11 nuwf figs-idiom יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 My anger will burn hot against them This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry with his people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “are you angry with your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 11 nuwf figs-idiom יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 My anger will burn hot against them This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry with his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “are you angry with your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 11 t2cv figs-doublet בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 great power…mighty hand These two phrases share similar meanings and are combined for emphasis. If doubling in this way would not convey emphasis in your language, you will need to find a way to translate it that does give emphasis. Alternate translation: “using your very strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 32 11 ph43 figs-metonymy וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 a mighty hand Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “and with powerful works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 12 r8ij figs-rquestion לָ⁠מָּה֩ יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’ Moses used this question to try to persuade God not to destroy his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: If you destroy your people, the Egyptians might say, ‘He brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -2064,7 +2064,7 @@ EXO 32 12 yvez figs-quotesinquotes יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ EXO 32 12 kzh7 figs-metonymy מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 face of the earth Here, **face** means “surface.” Alternate translation: “from the surface of the land” or “from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 12 fns1 שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 Turn from your burning anger Alternate translation: “Stop your burning anger” or “Stop being so angry” EXO 32 12 iz5q figs-idiom שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠הִנָּחֵ֥ם עַל־הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה לְ⁠עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 Turn from your burning anger Here, Yahweh’s anger (burning nose) and plan to punish the people are spoken of as things that he could turn away from and repent of (repentance also means to turn from). This imagery may not translate into your language, and you may need to use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Calm down, and please do not stay determined to do evil to your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 12 p1df figs-idiom מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 your burning anger This is an idiom that means anger. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from your terrible anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 12 p1df figs-idiom מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 your burning anger This is an idiom that means anger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from your terrible anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 13 t9sa זְכֹ֡ר 1 Call to mind Abraham Alternate translation: “Think about” EXO 32 13 p8jq נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתָּ 1 you swore Alternate translation: “you made an oath” EXO 32 13 q1g1 וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ הַ⁠זֹּ֜את אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָמַ֗רְתִּי אֶתֵּן֙ לְ⁠זַרְעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 They will inherit it forever That is, the land of Canaan. @@ -2074,12 +2074,12 @@ EXO 32 17 cua3 writing-participants יְהוֹשֻׁ֛עַ 1 he said to Moses Jo EXO 32 18 r0gm writing-poetry אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְ⁠אֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 he said to Moses These lines are widely considered to be poetic. It is not clear why a poetic form is used here. In some languages it may not be appropriate to convey this response in poetic form, in which case another form may be used. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]) EXO 32 18 m4k0 figs-parallelism אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְ⁠אֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 he said to Moses The poetic form here is parallelism in the repetition of **sound of singing**. If it would be unclear to say that Moses heard **the sound of singing** in the third line after saying he didn’t hear the sound of singing twice before, something more like the more contrastive UST may be followed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 32 18 fdg8 figs-explicit ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 he said to Moses If it is unclear to say that Moses hears **the sound of singing** after twice saying he didn’t hear that, you may want to make the type of singing explicit. Consider referring to your translation of the last word of [verse 6](../32/06.md) (to play in the ULT). Alternate translation: “the sound of playful singing I hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 32 19 hr2j figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 the tablets This is an idiom for being angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and Moses was very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 19 hr2j figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 the tablets This is an idiom for being angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and Moses was very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 19 d8zo תַּ֥חַת 1 the tablets Alternate translation: “at the bottom of” EXO 32 21 du5l figs-quotesinquotes וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃ 1 Then Moses said to Aaron, “What did this people…a great sin on them?” Moses’ question is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 21 np73 figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה 1 you have brought such a great sin on them Moses spoke of causing people to **sin** as if sin were an object and Aaron put it **on them**. Alternate translation: “that you have caused them to sin greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 32 22 z2ch figs-idiom אַל־יִ֥חַר אַ֖ף 1 Do not let your anger burn hot This is an idiom for anger. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not be angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 22 vdy2 figs-idiom כִּ֥י בְ⁠רָ֖ע הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil This is probably an idiom that could mean (1) that the people are prone to evil or (2) that the people were in trouble (that is, they felt troubled because of not having contact with God). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “that they are set on evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 22 z2ch figs-idiom אַל־יִ֥חַר אַ֖ף 1 Do not let your anger burn hot This is an idiom for anger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not be angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 22 vdy2 figs-idiom כִּ֥י בְ⁠רָ֖ע הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil This is probably an idiom that could mean (1) that the people are prone to evil or (2) that the people were in trouble (that is, they felt troubled because of not having contact with God). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “that they are set on evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 22 h6dm figs-123person הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil Here, **it** is used because **people** is grammatically singular in Hebrew. Alternate translation: “they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 32 23 w91d figs-quotesinquotes עֲשֵׂה־לָ֣⁠נוּ אֱלֹהִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵלְכ֖וּ לְ⁠פָנֵ֑י⁠נוּ כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱלָ֨⁠נוּ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם לֹ֥א יָדַ֖עְנוּ מֶה־הָ֥יָה לֽ⁠וֹ׃ 1 they are set on doing evil This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 23 zn68 זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ 1 this Moses People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. See how you translated this in [verse 1](../32/01.md). @@ -2089,7 +2089,7 @@ EXO 32 24 wvin grammar-connect-logic-result וָ⁠אַשְׁלִכֵ֣⁠הוּ EXO 32 25 ck1f פָרֻ֖עַ 1 were running wild Alternate translation: “were behaving wildly” or “were not controlling themselves” EXO 32 25 csg0 grammar-collectivenouns כִּ֥י פָרֻ֖עַ ה֑וּא כִּֽי־פְרָעֹ֣⁠ה אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 were running wild Here, the pronoun **it** agrees with the grammatical number of **people** (singular). If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that they were let loose, for Aaron had let them loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 32 26 jis7 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 Then Moses stood at the entrance…“Whoever is on Yahweh’s side, come to me.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and said that whoever was for Yahweh should come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 32 26 ryb5 figs-idiom מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 Whoever is on Yahweh’s side Moses speaks of being loyal to Yahweh as being **for Yahweh**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever serves Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 26 ryb5 figs-idiom מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 Whoever is on Yahweh’s side Moses speaks of being loyal to Yahweh as being **for Yahweh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever serves Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 27 xsl3 עִבְר֨וּ וָ⁠שׁ֜וּבוּ מִ⁠שַּׁ֤עַר לָ⁠שַׁ֨עַר֙ בַּֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֔ה 1 go back and forth from entrance to entrance Alternate translation: “Go from one side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp” EXO 32 28 at4i translate-numbers כִּ⁠שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת אַלְפֵ֖י 1 three thousand of the people Alternate translation: “about three thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 32 29 to5d figs-idiom מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם 1 You have been placed into Yahweh’s service This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). However, this usage is different from that text, as here it is not specified what authority they are given or what they are consecrated for other than **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Consecrate yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2141,9 +2141,9 @@ EXO 33 11 rcsu writing-participants וּ⁠מְשָׁ֨רְת֜⁠וֹ יְהו EXO 33 12 ohra writing-newevent 0 See A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 33 12 hlsl figs-quotations הַ֚עַל אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…דַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 See You may want to make these two second-level quotations indirect to reduce the levels of quotation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 33 12 unz8 רְ֠אֵה 1 See This is an interjection to get someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “Look!” or “Listen!” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” -EXO 33 12 w7fs figs-idiom יְדַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם 1 I know you by name To **know** someone **by name** is to know them well. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I know you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 33 12 w7fs figs-idiom יְדַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם 1 I know you by name To **know** someone **by name** is to know them well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I know you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 33 12 uhjs figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 you have also found favor in my eyes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and my eyes find you favorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 33 12 a7jr figs-idiom וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 you have also found favor in my eyes Here, **found favor in my eyes** is an idiom that means “I am pleased with you” so it means that God is pleased with Moses. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you please me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 33 12 a7jr figs-idiom וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 you have also found favor in my eyes Here, **found favor in my eyes** is an idiom that means “I am pleased with you” so it means that God is pleased with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you please me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 33 12 y281 figs-metaphor וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 you have also found favor in my eyes Here, **in my eyes** is a metaphor representing God’s evaluation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you have also found favor in my evaluation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 33 12 es6z figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 you have also found favor in my eyes Here, **favor** is an abstract noun that you could express in another way if necessary in your language. Alternate translation: “and you have also been found approved in my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 33 13 e6vv מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֗י⁠ךָ…אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 Now if I have found favor in your eyes Here, **found favor in your eyes** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **in your eyes** is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). @@ -2175,7 +2175,7 @@ EXO 33 21 loep writing-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 I wil EXO 33 21 s4iy הִנֵּ֥ה 1 See Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you.” EXO 33 22 qhe6 figs-metaphor בַּ⁠עֲבֹ֣ר כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י 1 See Yahweh speaks of his **glory** as if it were an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “while I pass over gloriously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 33 22 o5as figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י 1 See If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 33 22 ivf5 figs-personification וְ⁠שַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛⁠י עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 See Here Yahweh speaks as if he, like a person, had hands that could cover things. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use a simile to retain the image, as this figure is important to retain and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you as with a hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +EXO 33 22 ivf5 figs-personification וְ⁠שַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛⁠י עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 See Here Yahweh speaks as if he, like a person, had hands that could cover things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile to retain the image, as this figure is important to retain and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you as with a hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 33 23 fmu8 figs-personification וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִי֙ אֶת־כַּפִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠רָאִ֖יתָ אֶת־אֲחֹרָ֑⁠י וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ 1 you will see my back The strong personification image of Yahweh continues throughout this verse and should be retained, if possible. You may have to use similes if this would be misunderstood in your culture. Alternate translation: “Then it will be as if I stop covering you with a hand, and you will see a small part of my glory, like a person’s back, but not my full glory, like a person’s face.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 33 23 jq7t grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י 1 you will see my back Here, **but my face** is moved to the front of the clause to emphasize contrast with **my back**. If your language has a certain way of contrasting elements, be sure to make a strong contrast between Yahweh’s face and back. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 33 23 gw1n figs-activepassive וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ 1 but my face will not be seen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but you will not see my face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2189,7 +2189,7 @@ EXO 34 5 sp7f writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּתְיַצֵּ֥ב עִמּ֖⁠וֹ EXO 34 5 r9ey figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א בְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָֽה 1 he pronounced the name “Yahweh.” This could mean: (1) “he spoke the name ‘Yahweh’” (2) “he proclaimed who Yahweh is.” For the second meaning, **name** would represent who God is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 6 fz1q figs-123person יְהוָ֣ה׀ יְהוָ֔ה אֵ֥ל רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious God is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am God, and I am merciful and gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 34 6 t0kd figs-doublet רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious This is emphasizing that Yahweh cares for people and acts kindly toward them. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 34 6 f7iq figs-idiom אֶ֥רֶךְ אַפַּ֖יִם 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious The phrase **long of nostril** is an idiom that means Yahweh does not get angry easily or quickly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “slow to anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 34 6 f7iq figs-idiom אֶ֥רֶךְ אַפַּ֖יִם 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious The phrase **long of nostril** is an idiom that means Yahweh does not get angry easily or quickly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “slow to anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 34 6 j7we figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠רַב־חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 abounding in covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **covenant faithfulness** and **trustworthiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. (For **covenant faithfulness**, see [Exodus 20:6](../20/06.md)). Alternate translation: “always being faithful to my covenant and always being trustworthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 34 6 d1qj figs-doublet חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 abounding in covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness This is emphasizing that Yahweh always does what he promises toward the people he loves. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 34 7 lt2j figs-abstractnouns נֹצֵ֥ר חֶ֨סֶד֙ לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 keeping covenant faithfulness for thousands of generations See how you translated **covenant faithfulness**in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “faithfully loving thousands of generations” or “faithful to his covenant with thousands of generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -2198,7 +2198,7 @@ EXO 34 7 dxkb figs-metonymy לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 But he will The word **t EXO 34 7 hllt figs-litany עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַטָּאָ֑ה 1 But he will This list is meant to convey the idea of every kind of wrong. If a list like this would be misunderstood in your language you may need to use other terms or forms to make this point. Alternate translation: “every kind of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) EXO 34 7 e2qc figs-abstractnouns עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַטָּאָ֑ה…עֲוֺ֣ן 1 But he will If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **iniquity, transgression, and sin**, you can express the same ideas in another way., as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 34 7 x397 figs-123person וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 he will by no means clear the guilty Yahweh is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “But I will certainly not acquit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 34 7 ts1b figs-ellipsis וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 will by no means clear the guilty Whom Yahweh will not acquit is not stated. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translations: “But he will certainly not clear the guilty” or “But he will certainly not say that the guilty are innocent” or “But he will certainly not free guilty people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 34 7 ts1b figs-ellipsis וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 will by no means clear the guilty Whom Yahweh will not acquit is not stated. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translations: “But he will certainly not clear the guilty” or “But he will certainly not say that the guilty are innocent” or “But he will certainly not free guilty people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 34 7 lyrg figs-metonymy עֲוֺ֣ן 1 will by no means clear the guilty Here, **iniquity** refers to the consequences or the punishment for iniquity. Alternate translation: “the punishment for the iniquity of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 7 px85 figs-metaphor פֹּקֵ֣ד׀ עֲוֺ֣ן אָב֗וֹת עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים 1 He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children The **iniquity of the fathers** is spoken of as if it were something capable of **visiting** people. This means that Yahweh makes the consequences of people’s sins affect their descendants. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “punishing the sons and the sons of the sons for the iniquity of the fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 7 c3tb figs-metonymy עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים 1 their children The references to **sons** and **sons of the sons** represents descendants. Alternate translation: “on their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2289,7 +2289,7 @@ EXO 35 4 jdb8 0 General Information: In verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites EXO 35 4 ugn4 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 General Information: Verses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first **saying**) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 35 5 h5c8 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md). EXO 35 5 n2c8 קְח֨וּ מֵֽ⁠אִתְּ⁠כֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Alternate translation: “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have” -EXO 35 5 qq0a figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 35 5 qq0a figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 35 5 pqa2 figs-idiom כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 General Information: This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “from everyone who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 35 5 gx87 0 General Information: After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list. EXO 35 6 r12v 0 General Information: This verse is identical to [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). @@ -2305,7 +2305,7 @@ EXO 35 9 f1dd 0 General Information: Except for an initial **and**, this verse EXO 35 9 hcs9 translate-unknown וְ⁠אַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם 1 General Information: An **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 35 9 kk7z וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for” EXO 35 10 dc4b figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב 1 Every skilled man Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 35 10 lkp4 figs-ellipsis צִוָּ֖ה 1 Every skilled man Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 35 10 lkp4 figs-ellipsis צִוָּ֖ה 1 Every skilled man Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 35 10 ugjb 0 Every skilled man After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list. EXO 35 11 s0ip מִכְסֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 clasps See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md). EXO 35 11 j5t7 קְרָסָי⁠ו֙ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). @@ -2327,7 +2327,7 @@ EXO 35 20 w6rg figs-metonymy מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י מֹשֶֽׁה 1 all t EXO 35 21 p2ls figs-parallelism וַ⁠יָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ הֵ֠בִיאוּ 1 all the tribes of Israel These two phrases parallel each other and mean the same thing. It would be good to keep this poetic repetition in your translation unless it would be misunderstood. If repetition here would not highlight the joyful giving spirit of the Israelites in your language, you may need to combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “Everyone who was motivated, body and soul, came and gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 35 21 r34y figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ הֵ֠בִיאוּ 1 all the tribes of Israel Here, **heart** and **spirit** both refer to a person’s will, their desire to do something. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using different body and spirit words or concepts which you can use. If your language would not express a person’s will in this way, you could translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “And every man whose will lifted him came, and all who felt impelled brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 35 21 ckmu figs-metaphor אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 all the tribes of Israel Here, **heart lifted** is a metaphor for being willing or excited. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using a different body part or a different action. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who was excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 35 21 u7kq figs-gendernotations כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ 1 all the tribes of Israel Here, **man, whose,** and **him** all refer to men and women in a general way. This is made explicit in the next verse. If your readers might misunderstand this, you may use terms that include men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +EXO 35 21 u7kq figs-gendernotations כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ 1 all the tribes of Israel Here, **man, whose,** and **him** all refer to men and women in a general way. This is made explicit in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you may use terms that include men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 35 21 kew0 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠לְ⁠בִגְדֵ֖י הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 all the tribes of Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). Alternate translation: “and for the holy clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 35 22 mwx8 figs-synecdoche כֹּ֣ל׀ נְדִ֣יב לֵ֗ב 1 all who had a willing heart Here, **heart** refers to a person’s will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to bring these gifts to Yahweh. This is a shortening and combining of the figure used in the [previous verse](../35/21.md): **heart** and **impelled** are brought together. See how you translated these ideas in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “anyone whose will impelled him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 35 22 yzsw ל׀ נְדִ֣יב 1 all who had a willing heart Alternate translation: “who were impelled of” @@ -2336,10 +2336,10 @@ EXO 35 22 frci figs-gendernotations וְ⁠כָל־אִ֕ישׁ 1 brooches, earr EXO 35 23 s3ky 0 Everyone who had…brought them See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:4-5](../25/04.md). EXO 35 23 dweo figs-activepassive וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נִמְצָ֣א אִתּ֗⁠וֹ 1 Everyone who had…brought them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “And every man who owned” or “And every man having” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 23 hg0d figs-gendernotations וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here **man** includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 35 23 t3ti figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 Everyone who had…brought them The phrase **every man** is used here without the restriction, “who was willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “And very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 35 23 t3ti figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 Everyone who had…brought them The phrase **every man** is used here without the restriction, “who was willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “And very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 35 24 qpep figs-activepassive וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נִמְצָ֨א אִתּ֜⁠וֹ 1 Everyone who had…brought them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “and everyone who owned” or “and everyone having” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 24 zk6i כָּל־מֵרִ֗ים 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here, **all** is limited by **presenters**, meaning only everyone who brought contributions. Avoid implying that every single Israelite did this (though very many did). Alternate translation: “All who decided to offer” -EXO 35 24 loob figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כֹ֡ל 1 Everyone who had…brought them The phrase **all** is used here without the restriction, “who were willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “and very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 35 24 loob figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כֹ֡ל 1 Everyone who had…brought them The phrase **all** is used here without the restriction, “who were willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “and very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 35 24 bab9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠כָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the Dwelling as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 25 ae9d figs-metonymy חַכְמַת־לֵ֖ב 1 blue, purple, or scarlet wool Here, **heart** is referring to something innately possessed by a person, that is, a trait of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftswoman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “who possessed the skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 25 ebm5 אֶֽת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 blue, purple, or scarlet wool This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). @@ -2359,7 +2359,7 @@ EXO 35 31 qx5o figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת 1 He has filled Bez EXO 35 31 cf63 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְלָאכָֽה 1 He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for **craftsmanship**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 35 32 r7e3 0 to make artistic designs…bronze This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:4](../31/04.md), except for the first **and**. EXO 35 33 fj6f 0 also to cut and set stones…craftsmanship This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:5](../31/05.md) except for the final **of invention**. -EXO 35 34 xd67 figs-idiom וּ⁠לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 He has put it in his heart to teach Here, **put in his heart** is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he gave to them the ability and desire to teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 35 34 xd67 figs-idiom וּ⁠לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 He has put it in his heart to teach Here, **put in his heart** is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he gave to them the ability and desire to teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 35 34 ab2z translate-names וְ⁠אָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב…אֲחִיסָמָ֖ךְ 1 Oholiab son of Ahisamak, from the tribe of Dan These are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 35 35 ehu7 0 filled them with skill This verse summarizes and pulls together many previously mentioned things. See [28:3](../28/03.md) (**skill of heart**), [25:4](../25/04.md) (for materials), [26:36](../26/36.md) (**embroiderer**), [28:32](../28/32.md) (**weaver**), [26:31](../26/31.md) (**skillful workman**), [31:3](../31/03.md) (**craftsman**), [28:6](../28/06.md) (**designer of designs**). EXO 35 35 rcv9 figs-metaphor מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜⁠ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Here, **skill** to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He has made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ EXO 38 8 mdx9 figs-explicit בְּ⁠מַרְאֹת֙ 1 He made the basin out of EXO 38 9 clk6 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md). EXO 38 10 nz6q 0 General Information This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md). EXO 38 11 mp6n 0 General Information This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:11](../27/11.md). -EXO 38 11 xl4c figs-ellipsis מֵאָ֣ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 38 11 xl4c figs-ellipsis מֵאָ֣ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 38 12 g5iz 0 General Information This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:12](../27/12.md). EXO 38 13 iju3 0 General Information This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:13](../27/13.md). EXO 38 14 n1xj 0 General Information This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:14](../27/14.md). @@ -2477,11 +2477,11 @@ EXO 38 18 trz5 וְ⁠קוֹמָ֤ה בְ⁠רֹ֨חַב֙ חָמֵ֣שׁ אַ EXO 38 19 fjw4 0 General Information See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md). EXO 38 20 ye5c 0 General Information This verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md). EXO 38 21 k2ex figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֥ר פֻּקַּ֖ד 1 as it was taken If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the Levites recorded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 38 21 qivw figs-idiom עַל־פִּ֣י מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Ithamar This is an idiom referring to Moses telling them to make these records. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “following Moses’ instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 38 21 qivw figs-idiom עַל־פִּ֣י מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Ithamar This is an idiom referring to Moses telling them to make these records. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “following Moses’ instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 38 21 op5h figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַד֙ אִֽיתָמָ֔ר בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֖ן הַ⁠כֹּהֵֽן 1 Ithamar Here, **by the hand of** could mean: (1) Ithamar was in charge of the group that recorded these records (2) Ithamar was the scribe who actually wrote these records. Alternate translation: “under the direction of Ithamar son of Aaron the priest” or “written down by Ithamar son of Aaron the priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 38 21 ex1t translate-names אִֽיתָמָ֔ר 1 Ithamar **Ithamar** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 38 22 d86g translate-names וּ⁠בְצַלְאֵ֛ל בֶּן־אוּרִ֥י בֶן־ח֖וּר 1 Bezalel son of Uri son of Hur **Bezalel**, **Uri,** and **Hur** are the names of men. See how you translated these in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 38 22 i4ha figs-ellipsis מֹשֶֽׁה 1 Yahweh had commanded Moses This sentence leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “Moses to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 38 22 i4ha figs-ellipsis מֹשֶֽׁה 1 Yahweh had commanded Moses This sentence leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “Moses to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 38 23 f93b translate-names אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב בֶּן־אֲחִיסָמָ֛ךְ 1 Oholiab son of Ahisamak **Oholiab** and **Ahisamak**are names of men. See how you translated these in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 38 23 wvw4 חָרָ֣שׁ וְ⁠חֹשֵׁ֑ב וְ⁠רֹקֵ֗ם בַּ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וּ⁠בָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן וּ⁠בְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י וּ⁠בַ⁠שֵּֽׁשׁ 1 an engraver, as a skillful workman, and as an embroiderer This is very similar to part of [Exodus 35:35](../35/35.md). EXO 38 24 tl4k figs-activepassive כָּל־הַ⁠זָּהָ֗ב הֶֽ⁠עָשׂוּי֙ 1 All the gold that was used for the project If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “All the gold that the craftsmen used” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2490,10 +2490,10 @@ EXO 38 25 ni5b translate-bweight מְאַ֣ת כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אֶלֶף EXO 38 26 rp46 0 one hundred talents See how you translated many of the same things in [Exodus 30:13-14](../30/13.md). EXO 38 26 t2gi translate-bweight בֶּ֚קַע לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֔לֶת מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 one beka A beka is 1/2 a shekel. A shekel is 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See [verse 24](../38/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “five and a half grams” or “5 1/2 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 26 fyy5 translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל 1 half a shekel A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) -EXO 38 26 nvf8 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠כֹ֨ל הָ⁠עֹבֵ֜ר עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֗ים מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָ⁠מַ֔עְלָ⁠ה לְ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת אֶ֨לֶף֙ וּ⁠שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֔ים וַ⁠חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים 1 half a shekel Here the account leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The idea that this silver was “received” **from** these “men” is left out. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “received from every passer over to the counted ones from a son of 20 years and older—received from 603,550 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -EXO 38 26 ll8b figs-idiom מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ 1 This figure was reached on the basis of every person who was counted in the census This is an idiom meaning 20 years old. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from those 20 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 38 26 nvf8 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠כֹ֨ל הָ⁠עֹבֵ֜ר עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֗ים מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָ⁠מַ֔עְלָ⁠ה לְ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת אֶ֨לֶף֙ וּ⁠שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֔ים וַ⁠חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים 1 half a shekel Here the account leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The idea that this silver was “received” **from** these “men” is left out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “received from every passer over to the counted ones from a son of 20 years and older—received from 603,550 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 38 26 ll8b figs-idiom מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ 1 This figure was reached on the basis of every person who was counted in the census This is an idiom meaning 20 years old. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from those 20 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 38 27 p7r5 translate-bweight מְאַת֙ כִּכַּ֣ר 1 One hundred talents of silver were cast A talent is about 34 kilograms. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -EXO 38 28 nxf5 figs-ellipsis הָ⁠אֶ֜לֶף וּ⁠שְׁבַ֤ע הַ⁠מֵּאוֹת֙ וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֔ים 1 Bezalel Here the words **shekels of silver** have been omitted because they are understood from [verse 25](../38/25.md). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the 1,775 shekels of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 38 28 nxf5 figs-ellipsis הָ⁠אֶ֜לֶף וּ⁠שְׁבַ֤ע הַ⁠מֵּאוֹת֙ וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֔ים 1 Bezalel Here the words **shekels of silver** have been omitted because they are understood from [verse 25](../38/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the 1,775 shekels of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 38 28 rcda 0 Bezalel See how you translated some of these in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md). EXO 38 29 p3mr translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל 1 seventy talents and 2,400 shekels A talent is about 34 kilograms, and a shekel is about 11 grams. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 30 rck7 מִכְבַּ֥ר 1 grate A **grate** is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md). @@ -2574,4 +2574,4 @@ EXO 40 35 ysd8 וְ⁠לֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ א EXO 40 36 ak35 figs-activepassive וּ⁠בְ⁠הֵעָל֤וֹת הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ 1 was taken up from over If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whenever Yahweh’s cloud moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 40 37 s8y2 figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִם־לֹ֥א יֵעָלֶ֖ה הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִסְע֔וּ עַד־י֖וֹם הֵעָלֹתֽ⁠וֹ 1 that it was lifted up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but if Yahweh did not take up the cloud, then they would not set out until the day he took it up.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 40 38 i8hu figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י כָל־בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 that it was lifted up Here, **before the eyes of** refers to being able to see. All the Israelites could see the cloud and fire. Alternate translation: “and all the house of Israel could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 40 38 bhi5 figs-metaphor בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 that it was lifted up Here, **house** represents a people group, the Israelites, who were descended from Jacob, who was also named Israel. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use a metaphor from your language or translate the meaning. This is a common biblical metaphor, so you may want to check other places this occurs. The **house of Israel** is equivalent to “sons of Israel” or “Israelites.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 40 38 bhi5 figs-metaphor בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 that it was lifted up Here, **house** represents a people group, the Israelites, who were descended from Jacob, who was also named Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a metaphor from your language or translate the meaning. This is a common biblical metaphor, so you may want to check other places this occurs. The **house of Israel** is equivalent to “sons of Israel” or “Israelites.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From b7e1f1aa3b671bb6b8732b6208425b13164135f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 09:57:29 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 164/269] Nathan's edits to Matthew 1-16 --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 170 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 85 insertions(+), 85 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 229ec7d79b..56a6f8ccbf 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Matthew

1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus teaches about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus teaches about the gospel of the kingdom of God. Opposition to Jesus begins. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus tells parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus teaches about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus teaches about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)

### What is the book of Matthew about?

The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the Gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Matthew?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”

Matthew spoke of the "kingdom of heaven" in the same way that other Gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.

### What were the teaching methods of Jesus?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in ways similar those of other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In that passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. All the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Matthew?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:
* “Bless those who curse you; do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)

Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators may include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Matthew

1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus teaches about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus teaches about the gospel of the kingdom of God. Opposition to Jesus begins. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus tells parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus teaches about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus teaches about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)

### What is the book of Matthew about?

The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the Gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Matthew?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”

Matthew spoke of the “kingdom of heaven” in the same way that other Gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.

### What were the teaching methods of Jesus?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in ways similar those of other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In that passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. All the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Matthew?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:
* “Bless those who curse you; do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)

Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators may include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

### Indentation

Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Genealogies were important to the Jewish people because family lineage is how they decided how someone functioned in society. For instance, if someone was a descendant of Aaron, they were able to become priests. Similarly, if someone was a descendant of King David, they were able to become a king. This genealogy shows that Jesus was clearly a descendant of King David, and therefore, was able to become king.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Use of the passive voice

Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 1 1 vpg1 figs-metaphor Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 of Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham Here, **son** means “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ, descendant of King David, who was a descendent of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 1 3 g8y6 translate-names 0 of Perez … Zerah … of Hezron … of Ram Unless stated otherwise, all of the names in this genealogy are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ MAT 2 18 p9ri figs-euphemism ὅτι οὐκ εἰσίν 1 because they are no m MAT 2 20 hz2m figs-euphemism οἱ ζητοῦντες τὴν ψυχὴν τοῦ παιδίου 1 those who seek the life of the child Here, **seeking the life of the child** is a way of saying they wanted to kill the child. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “those who were looking for the child in order to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 2 22 h4cq translate-names Ἀρχέλαος 1 Archelaus **Archelaus** is the name of Herod’s son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 2 23 dx5i figs-activepassive πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν 1 what had been spoken through the prophets See how you translated this in [2:15](../02/15.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### John the Baptist

In this chapter, John the Baptist appear preaching in the wilderness. He is portrayed by Matthew as resembling the Prophet Elijah in the way that he dresses and by what he eats. We know from other Gospels that John is Jesus' cousin. John the Baptist comes before Jesus to make people ready for his coming.

### "Kingdom of Heaven"

“The kingdom of Heaven” is synonymous with "Kingdom of God" from the other three Gospels. It is a major concept in the Gospel of Matthew. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of people becoming one of the people over whom God rules. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating this idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom”. UST models this approach consistently. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)

### “Bear fruit worthy of repentance”

Fruit is a common metaphor for doing good things that God desires you to do. Similar to if a fruit plant is healthy, it will bear a lot of good fruit, and if a fruit plant is unhealthy, it will bear a lot of bad fruit.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Matthew uses metonymy frequently in this chapter to express groups of people or things. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language to express these figures of speech. +MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### John the Baptist

In this chapter, John the Baptist appear preaching in the wilderness. He is portrayed by Matthew as resembling the Prophet Elijah in the way that he dresses and by what he eats. We know from other Gospels that John is Jesus’ cousin. John the Baptist comes before Jesus to make people ready for his coming.

### “Kingdom of Heaven”

“The kingdom of Heaven” is synonymous with “Kingdom of God” from the other three Gospels. It is a major concept in the Gospel of Matthew. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of people becoming one of the people over whom God rules. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating this idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom”. UST models this approach consistently. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)

### “Bear fruit worthy of repentance”

Fruit is a common metaphor for doing good things that God desires you to do. Similar to if a fruit plant is healthy, it will bear a lot of good fruit, and if a fruit plant is unhealthy, it will bear a lot of bad fruit.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Matthew uses metonymy frequently in this chapter to express groups of people or things. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language to express these figures of speech. MAT 3 1 xp3z writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of the ministry of John the Baptist. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time while Jesus was still in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 3 1 ifa0 writing-participants Ἰωάννης ὁ Βαπτιστὴς 1 This introduces John as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression “the Baptizer” identifies him as someone who baptized people in water after they were sorry for their sins. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “a man named John, who baptized people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) MAT 3 2 hvx8 figs-metonymy ἤγγικεν…ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens is near The phrase **the kingdom of the heavens** refers to God ruling as king. **heavens** refers to the place where God rules from. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our God in heaven will soon show himself to be king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ MAT 3 16 jh1v figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρ MAT 3 16 e3na figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν ἐρχόμενον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 coming down like a dove The phrase like a dove could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “he Spirit come down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descend upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of God came down from heaven as a dove comes down” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile) MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-personification φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 a voice from the heavens saying Mark speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. The voice is God’s voice. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) MAT 3 17 myz8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my Son This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 5 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Devil

The devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God's people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter +MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 5 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Devil

The devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God’s people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter MAT 4 1 k51m writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 4 1 aq3s figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη…ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Jesus was led up by the Spirit If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 4 1 wy4b figs-activepassive πειρασθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 to be tempted by the devil If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so the devil could tempt Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ MAT 6 11 dft8 figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον…τὸν ἐπιούσιον MAT 6 12 yi9s figs-metaphor τὰ ὀφειλήματα…τοῖς ὀφειλέταις ἡμῶν 1 debts A **debt** is what one person owes another person. A **debtor** is a person who owes a debt to another person. This is a metaphor for those who have sinned against another person. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “sins…those who sin against us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 6 13 l8u6 figs-abstractnouns μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν 1 do not bring us into temptation If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **temptation**, you can express it as a verb. Alternate translation: “do not let anything tempt us” or “do not let anything cause us to desire to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 6 13 r6v6 figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 Here, **evil one** could also mean evil. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evil, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “protect us from doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 6 13 zfsy translate-textvariants 1 Most important manuscripts do not include "For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen." See the discussion of textual issues in the chapter introduction to decide whether to include this sentence in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +MAT 6 13 zfsy translate-textvariants 1 Most important manuscripts do not include “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen.” See the discussion of textual issues in the chapter introduction to decide whether to include this sentence in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) MAT 6 14 xvfv figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) See the note in the introduction. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 6 14 z79a figs-abstractnouns τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν 1 their trespasses If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **trespasses**, you can express it as a verb. Alternate translation: “when they trespass against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 6 14 v7ne guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -310,11 +310,11 @@ MAT 6 15 lk8a figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 See the note MAT 6 16 xv6b figs-explicit ἀφανίζουσιν…τὰ πρόσωπα αὐτῶν 1 they disfigure their faces The hypocrites would not wash **their faces**. They did this purposely to draw attention to themselves so that people would see them and give them honor for fasting. If someone was fasting, it would be obvious from their appearance. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they…make it obvious to others that they are fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 6 16 ix6h figs-irony ἀπέχουσιν τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν 1 Truly I say to you See how you translated **they have their reward in full** in [6:2](../06/02.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MAT 6 17 c20j figs-yousingular σὺ…σου…σου 1 Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should or should not do. All occurrences of **you** and **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -MAT 6 17 k283 figs-explicit ἄλειψαί σου τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ τὸ πρόσωπόν σου νίψαι 1 anoint your head Here, to **anoint** the **head** and to **wash** the **face** is to take normal care of one’s self. This gives the appearance that you are living life as normal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “make yourself appear as though you weren't fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 6 17 k283 figs-explicit ἄλειψαί σου τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ τὸ πρόσωπόν σου νίψαι 1 anoint your head Here, to **anoint** the **head** and to **wash** the **face** is to take normal care of one’s self. This gives the appearance that you are living life as normal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “make yourself appear as though you weren’t fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 6 18 m56a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρί σου 1 to your Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 6 18 tby8 ὁ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυφαίῳ 1 who sees in secret See how you translated this in [6:6](../06/06.md). Alternate translation: “who sees what you do in private” MAT 6 19 tqc9 translate-unknown σὴς 1 moth A **moth** is a small, flying insect that destroys cloth by eating it. If it would not be known in your language, you can use a general term for moth. Alternate translation: “flying insects eat your belongings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 6 19 z9wd βρῶσις 1 where moth and rust destroy Here, **rust** could also be referring to a bug which eats away at things like food. It is not clear in the original language. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “bugs which eat way at food” or "things which eat away at your belongings” +MAT 6 19 z9wd βρῶσις 1 where moth and rust destroy Here, **rust** could also be referring to a bug which eats away at things like food. It is not clear in the original language. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “bugs which eat way at food” or “things which eat away at your belongings” MAT 6 19 enl6 translate-unknown βρῶσις 1 rust Here, **rust** is a term referring to something that deteriorates metal. If this would not be known in your language, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something which destroys metal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 6 20 v5tn figs-metaphor θησαυρίζετε…ὑμῖν θησαυροὺς ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 store up for yourselves treasures in heaven This is a metaphor that means do good things on earth so God will reward you in **heaven**. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation “do good things and obey God, so that he will reward you in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 6 21 y55l figs-metaphor ὅπου γάρ ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρός σου 1 Here, **treasure** is figurative for the things people value the most in life. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “For what you value most in life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ MAT 6 30 m23l figs-activepassive εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 MAT 6 30 ym2c figs-ellipsis οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον 1 will he not much more The verb “clothe” is implied from the previous sentence. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 6 30 cd8w figs-rquestion οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς, ὀλιγόπιστοι? 1 will he not much more, you of little faith? Jesus uses this question to teach the people that God will provide what they need. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “he will certainly clothe you even better, you of little faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 6 32 unz1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 6 33 ep2c figs-metonymy ζητεῖτε…πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ τὴν δικαιοσύνην αὐτοῦ 1 seek first his kingdom and his righteousness Here, **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Most importantly, be one of God's people, and do what he desires of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 6 33 ep2c figs-metonymy ζητεῖτε…πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ τὴν δικαιοσύνην αὐτοῦ 1 seek first his kingdom and his righteousness Here, **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Most importantly, be one of God’s people, and do what he desires of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 6 33 ak39 figs-activepassive ταῦτα πάντα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 all these things will be added to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will provide all these things for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 6 34 xdg7 figs-personification ἡ…αὔριον μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς 1 tomorrow will be anxious for itself Jesus speaks of **tomorrow** as if it were a person who could worry. Jesus means that a person will have enough to worry about when the next day comes. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Matthew 5-7

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

### “By their fruits you will know them”

Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### You singular and you plural

In this chapter, as in the past two chapters, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -357,12 +357,12 @@ MAT 7 2 tbi8 figs-explicit κρίνετε…μετρεῖτε 1 Here, Jesus lea MAT 7 2 wmxo figs-metaphor καὶ ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 To **measure** someone is to hold them up to a high standard. Here, Jesus is saying that they are holding others up by too high of a standard. If your readers would not understand what **measure** means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “with the standard of behavior that you expect of other people, God will expect of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 2 c006 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **measure**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you measure other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 7 2 wgh2 figs-activepassive μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be measured out to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will measure you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 7 3 em5r figs-rquestion τί δὲ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς? 1 Why do you look at the speck … but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the people for paying attention to other people’s sins and ignoring their own. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You look at the speck in your brother's eye, but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 7 3 em5r figs-rquestion τί δὲ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς? 1 Why do you look at the speck … but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the people for paying attention to other people’s sins and ignoring their own. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You look at the speck in your brother’s eye, but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 3 hzb4 figs-yousingular βλέπεις…σου…τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ…οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should or should not do. All instances of **you** and **your** are all singular. See the note in the introduction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -MAT 7 3 ctb3 figs-metaphor τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 the speck that is in the eye of your brother A **speck of wood** is a small piece of wood that might fall into someone's eye. This is a metaphor that refers to the less offensive sins of a fellow believer. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “the lesser sin that is in your fellow believer's eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 7 3 ctb3 figs-metaphor τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 the speck that is in the eye of your brother A **speck of wood** is a small piece of wood that might fall into someone’s eye. This is a metaphor that refers to the less offensive sins of a fellow believer. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “the lesser sin that is in your fellow believer’s eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 3 d2qc translate-kinship τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 of your brother Here, and in the next two verses, **brother** refers to other people who were also followers of Jesus. These people are not their biological siblings. If your reader would not understand this, you can use plain language. Alternate translation: “your fellow follower of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 7 3 q1z4 figs-metaphor τὴν…ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν 1 the log that is in your own eye A **log** is a large piece of wood, usually the remnant of the truck of a tree. This is a metaphor that refers to the most offensive sins of a fellow believer. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “the most offensive sin that is in your own eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 3 xdcg figs-hyperbole τὴν…ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 the log that is in your own eye A **log** cannot fit into a person's eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize that a person should pay attention to their own more offensive sins before he deals with another person’s less offensive sins. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this exaggeration. Alternate translation: “you do not see your own very offensive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MAT 7 3 xdcg figs-hyperbole τὴν…ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 the log that is in your own eye A **log** cannot fit into a person’s eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize that a person should pay attention to their own more offensive sins before he deals with another person’s less offensive sins. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this exaggeration. Alternate translation: “you do not see your own very offensive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 7 4 k58h figs-rquestion ἢ πῶς ἐρεῖς τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, ἄφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου, καὶ ἰδοὺ, ἡ δοκὸς ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ? 1 Or how will you say to your brother, ‘Let me take out the speck from your eye,’ while behold, the log is in your own eye? Jesus asks this question to challenge the people to pay attention to their own sins before they pay attention to another person’s sins. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not say to your brother, ‘Let me take out the speck from your eye,’ while there is log in your own eye.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 6 wohg figs-metaphor μὴ δῶτε τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσίν, μηδὲ βάλητε τοὺς μαργαρίτας ὑμῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν χοίρων 1 Here, to **give what is holy** and to **throw your pearls** means to share about God with people. The message about God is seen as very valuable and holy. Also, **dogs** and **pigs** are figurative for people who would reject this message. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not share the holy message about God with people who would hurt you, nor should you try to share the valuable message about God with people who do not care to listen to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 6 xy2e translate-unknown τοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 pearls These pearls are beautiful and valuable mineral balls that people use as jewelry. They are formed inside the shell of a small animal that lives in the ocean. If your readers would not be familiar with pearls, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translation: “decorations made from valuable materials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -371,22 +371,22 @@ MAT 7 7 tv49 figs-activepassive δοθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be given MAT 7 7 rt8g figs-explicit κρούετε 1 Knock To **knock** on a door is a polite way to request that the person inside the house or room open the door. If knocking on a door is impolite or not done in your culture, use the word that describes how people politely ask for people to let you into their house. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “knock on the door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 7 9 mq14 figs-rquestion ἢ τίς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, ὃν αἰτήσει ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἄρτον, μὴ λίθον ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ? 1 Or what man is there from among you, of whom his son will ask for bread—he will not give him a stone, will he? Jesus uses a question to teach the people how God gives gifts. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is not one person among you, of whom his son will ask for bread, and he will give him a stone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 9 n5s1 figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 for bread Here, **bread** refers to food in general. Alternate translation: “for some food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 7 10 y9q5 figs-ellipsis ἢ καὶ ἰχθὺν αἰτήσει, μὴ ὄφιν ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ? 1zz Or he will also ask for a fish—he will not give him a snake, will he? It is understood that Jesus is still referring to a man and his son. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Or will a man's son ask for a fish, and the man will give him a snake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 7 10 y9q5 figs-ellipsis ἢ καὶ ἰχθὺν αἰτήσει, μὴ ὄφιν ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ? 1zz Or he will also ask for a fish—he will not give him a snake, will he? It is understood that Jesus is still referring to a man and his son. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Or will a man’s son ask for a fish, and the man will give him a snake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 7 10 t19o figs-rquestion ἢ καὶ ἰχθὺν αἰτήσει, μὴ ὄφιν ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ? 1 Or he will also ask for a fish—he will not give him a snake, will he? Jesus asks another question to teach the people about how God gives gifts. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And there is not one person among you, if his son asks for a fish, will give him a snake.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 11 pk31 figs-rquestion πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ Πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς δώσει ἀγαθὰ τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν? 1 how much more will your Father who is in the heavens give good things to those who ask him? Jesus uses a question to teach the people about how God gives gifts. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “then your Father in heaven will most certainly give good things to those who ask him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 11 z8zr guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 7 11 t3p4 figs-metonymy ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 See how you translated this in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 7 12 b1x2 figs-metonymy οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται 1 for this is the law and the prophets Here, **the law and the prophets** refer to what Moses and the prophets wrote. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for this is what Moses and the prophets wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 7 12 y4f6 figs-explicit οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I stationed someone next to me who would blow a ram’s horn if we needed a danger signal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, **for this is the law and the prophets** means that the law and the prophets teach this same message. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the law and prophets teach this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 7 13 dgr2 figs-metaphor εἰσέλθατε διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης; ὅτι πλατεῖα ἡ πύλη καὶ εὐρύχωρος ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν, καὶ πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ εἰσερχόμενοι δι’ αὐτῆς 1 Enter through the narrow gate … there are many who are entering through it In this verse, **road** is figurative for the span of a person's life. The word **gate** is figurative for the time when a person dies and enters into eternity. If your readers would not understand what they means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation, as in the in UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 13 zv24 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 to destruction If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to God's judgement” or “to God destroying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 7 13 dgr2 figs-metaphor εἰσέλθατε διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης; ὅτι πλατεῖα ἡ πύλη καὶ εὐρύχωρος ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν, καὶ πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ εἰσερχόμενοι δι’ αὐτῆς 1 Enter through the narrow gate … there are many who are entering through it In this verse, **road** is figurative for the span of a person’s life. The word **gate** is figurative for the time when a person dies and enters into eternity. If your readers would not understand what they means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation, as in the in UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 7 13 zv24 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 to destruction If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to God’s judgement” or “to God destroying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 7 14 wlr9 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ζωήν 1 to life If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the place where people live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 7 14 gdji figs-metaphor ὀλίγοι εἰσὶν οἱ εὑρίσκοντες αὐτήν 1 Here, to **find it** means to enter into eternal life with God and not be destroyed by him. In the same way you might find a hidden path, so Jesus is saying that eternal life can be found. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “there are few that God brings into eternal life with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 15 lj5v figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἔρχονται πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων, ἔσωθεν δέ εἰσιν λύκοι ἅρπαγες 1 who come to you in sheep’s clothing, but inwardly they are ravenous wolves Here, a **sheep** is figurative for someone who is a part of the people of God. Just as in real life, predators try to attack sheep, so people who try to hurt God's people are called **wolves**. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “who come to God's people to harm them, as a wolf comes to harm sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 16 pul5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς 1 By their fruits you will know them Here, **their fruits** is referring to a person's actions before God. Just as a good tree produces good fruit and a bad tree produces bad fruit, so a person who loves God will obey him and a person who does not love God will not obey him. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as you know a tree by the fruit that grows on it, you will know false prophets by the fact that they do not speak the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 7 15 lj5v figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἔρχονται πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων, ἔσωθεν δέ εἰσιν λύκοι ἅρπαγες 1 who come to you in sheep’s clothing, but inwardly they are ravenous wolves Here, a **sheep** is figurative for someone who is a part of the people of God. Just as in real life, predators try to attack sheep, so people who try to hurt God’s people are called **wolves**. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “who come to God’s people to harm them, as a wolf comes to harm sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 7 16 pul5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς 1 By their fruits you will know them Here, **their fruits** is referring to a person’s actions before God. Just as a good tree produces good fruit and a bad tree produces bad fruit, so a person who loves God will obey him and a person who does not love God will not obey him. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as you know a tree by the fruit that grows on it, you will know false prophets by the fact that they do not speak the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 16 nve4 figs-rquestion μήτι συλλέγουσιν ἀπὸ ἀκανθῶν σταφυλὰς, ἢ ἀπὸ τριβόλων σῦκα? 1 they do not gather grapes from a thornbush or figs from thistles, do they? Jesus uses a question to teach the people about false prophets. The people would have known that the answer is no. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “People do not gather grapes from a thornbush or figs from thistles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 7 17 f5l3 figs-metaphor οὕτως πᾶν δένδρον ἀγαθὸν καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖ; τὸ δὲ σαπρὸν δένδρον καρποὺς πονηροὺς ποιεῖ 1 the rotten tree produces bad fruit Jesus continues to use the metaphor of **fruit** to refer to bad prophets who produce evil works. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation “Just as when a good tree bears good fruit and a bad tree bears bad fruit, so those who preach God's words do good and those who do not preach God's words do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 19 xwrm figs-metaphor πᾶν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 Every tree not producing good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire Here, Jesus continues talking about **trees**. He is saying that those who do not preach God's words will be judged by him. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation “And just as every bad tree which does not bear good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire, so everyone who disobeys God will be judged by him forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 7 17 f5l3 figs-metaphor οὕτως πᾶν δένδρον ἀγαθὸν καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖ; τὸ δὲ σαπρὸν δένδρον καρποὺς πονηροὺς ποιεῖ 1 the rotten tree produces bad fruit Jesus continues to use the metaphor of **fruit** to refer to bad prophets who produce evil works. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation “Just as when a good tree bears good fruit and a bad tree bears bad fruit, so those who preach God’s words do good and those who do not preach God’s words do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 7 19 xwrm figs-metaphor πᾶν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 Every tree not producing good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire Here, Jesus continues talking about **trees**. He is saying that those who do not preach God’s words will be judged by him. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation “And just as every bad tree which does not bear good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire, so everyone who disobeys God will be judged by him forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 19 g7fs figs-activepassive ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 is cut down and thrown into the fire If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people cut down and throw them into a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 20 x87m figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς 1 you will recognize them from their fruits See how you translated this in [7:16](../07/16.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 21 dkh7 figs-exclamations Κύριε, Κύριε 1 Here, **Lord, Lord** is an exclamation that shows that these people think that Jesus is their master. This is what a servant would say to their master. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “My Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ MAT 7 21 l1te figs-metonymy τοῦ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 See ho MAT 7 22 mp6e figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day Jesus said **that day** knowing his hearers would understand he was referring to the day of judgment. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when God will judge all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 7 22 m9py figs-rquestion οὐ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι ἐπροφητεύσαμεν, καὶ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι δαιμόνια ἐξεβάλομεν, καὶ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι δυνάμεις πολλὰς ἐποιήσαμεν? 1 did we not prophesy in your name, and in your name cast out demons, and in your name do many mighty deeds? The people use a question to emphasize that they did many good things for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “we prophesied in your name, and in your name cast out demons, and in your name did many mighty deeds.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 22 hg17 figs-metonymy τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι…τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι…τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι 2 in your name Here, to do something **in your name** means to do it by his power and authority. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by your authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 7 23 d4y5 figs-idiom οὐδέποτε ἔγνων ὑμᾶς 1 I never knew you **I never knew you** means that the person was never one of God's people. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You have never been my follower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 7 23 d4y5 figs-idiom οὐδέποτε ἔγνων ὑμᾶς 1 I never knew you **I never knew you** means that the person was never one of God’s people. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You have never been my follower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 7 24 qjh9 figs-simile ὁμοιωθήσεται ἀνδρὶ φρονίμῳ, ὅστις ᾠκοδόμησεν αὐτοῦ τὴν οἰκίαν ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν 1 will be compared to a wise man who built his house upon the rock Jesus compares those who obey what he says to a person who builds his **house** on a rock where nothing can harm it. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he will be like man who builds a a house on solid ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 7 24 qw6l figs-activepassive ὁμοιωθήσεται ἀνδρὶ φρονίμῳ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is like a wise man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 24 dy1f figs-explicit πέτραν 1 rock Here, **rock** means the bedrock below the topsoil and clay, not a large stone or boulder above the ground. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “solid ground” or “sturdy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ MAT 7 28 jrh7 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: This verse describe how MAT 7 28 fo8g figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” or “we may act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **teaching**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by the way that he taught them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 8 General Notes

## Figures of Speech

### Metonymy

Metonymy is used often in this chapter to refer to people. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Idiom

Idioms are often used in this chapter. These may not be understood by your audience, as they were sayings that only people in that culture would have understood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 8 1 qb1d writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 8 2 vas8 writing-participants ἰδοὺ, λεπρὸς προσελθὼν 1 behold This introduces the **leper** as a new character in the story. A leper is a person with a skin disease. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a common way in your language for introducing a new person to a story. Alternate translation: “There was a man who was a leper approaching him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +MAT 8 2 vas8 writing-participants ἰδοὺ, λεπρὸς προσελθὼν 1 behold This introduces the **leper** as a new character in the story. A leper is a person with a skin disease. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a common way in your language for introducing a new person to a story. Alternate translation: “There was a man who was a leper approaching him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) MAT 8 2 yc3f grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν θέλῃς δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι 1 if you would be willing The leper is using a hypothetical situation to show that he believes Jesus will heal him. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “If you would desire to heal me, you are able to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) MAT 8 2 yjn2 figs-explicit δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι 1 you are able to make me clean Here, to be **clean** means to be healed from the skin disease, which did not allow them to be in the community with the rest of the people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are able to heal me and allow me to be a part of the community again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 8 3 lj1x figs-activepassive ἐκαθαρίσθη αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα 1 he was cleansed of his leprosy If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus cleansed him of his leprosy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -415,11 +415,11 @@ MAT 8 4 zi3a figs-explicit σεαυτὸν, δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 s MAT 8 4 tq9l figs-explicit προσένεγκον τὸ δῶρον ὃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 offer the gift that Moses commanded, for a testimony to them The law of **Moses** required that someone healed of leprosy give a thanksgiving offering to the priest. When the priest accepted the gift, people would know that the man had been healed. Lepers were not allowed to come into contact with anyone so that no one else would be infected. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “offer the gift that Moses commanded in the Law, for a testimony to the priest that you are healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 8 4 rj8u figs-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 to them Here, **to them** either refers to (1) the priests, or (2) the community in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the priests” or “to the community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]]) MAT 8 6 cr8h translate-unknown παραλυτικός 1 paralyzed A paralytic is someone who is not able to completely use their body. Sometimes they just can’t use their legs, but sometimes they can’t use anything. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. “not able to use his arms and legs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 8 8 p7p4 figs-idiom μου ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην 1 under my roof Here, **under my roof** is figurative for being in a person's house. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “in my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 8 8 p7p4 figs-idiom μου ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην 1 under my roof Here, **under my roof** is figurative for being in a person’s house. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “in my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 8 8 hig7 figs-metonymy εἰπὲ λόγῳ 1 speak a word Here, **speak** is a polite way of saying that all Jesus has to do is speak a word, and he will heal the servant. Use a form in your language that communicates this. Alternate translation: “Only say a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) MAT 8 8 rk1z figs-activepassive ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου 1 will be healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will make my servant well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 8 9 ds2m figs-activepassive ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπός εἰμι ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν, τασσόμενος ἔχων ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας 1 I … am a man under authority, having soldiers placed under me If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am a man who is under the authority of someone else, and I myself authority over a group of soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 8 9 da25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν…ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν 1 under authority … under me To be **under** someone means to be less important and to obey the commands of someone of a higher status. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who obeys other people's commands…who obey me (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 8 9 da25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν…ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν 1 under authority … under me To be **under** someone means to be less important and to obey the commands of someone of a higher status. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who obeys other people’s commands…who obey me (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 8 9 qz61 figs-idiom καὶ ἄλλῳ…καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου 1 The centurion is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and to another I say…and to my servant I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 8 10 c7y6 figs-explicit παρ’ οὐδενὶ τοσαύτην πίστιν ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ εὗρον 1 I have found such great faith from no one in Israel Jesus’ hearers would have thought that the Jews in **Israel**, who claim to be children of God, would have greater **faith** than anyone. Jesus is saying that the centurion’s faith was greater. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have found such faith from no one in Israel, who should have more faith (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 8 10 fjgc figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here, the name **Israel** is not referring to the country, but to the people who live in Israel. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ MAT 8 28 hz5n figs-activepassive δύο δαιμονιζόμενοι 1 two men MAT 8 29 gr2p figs-rquestion τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 What to us and to you, Son of God? The unclean spirit asks this question out of fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Leave me alone, Jesus, Son of the Most High God! There is no reason for you to interfere with me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 8 29 jcq6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus, which describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 8 29 u4jr figs-rquestion ἦλθες ὧδε πρὸ καιροῦ βασανίσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Have you come here to torment us before the set time? Again, the demons use a question out of fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have surely come here to punish us before the time when God will judge us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 8 29 uw6c figs-explicit ἦλθες ὧδε πρὸ καιροῦ βασανίσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **the set time** is referring to the time when God will judge all of the evil spirits and people. Matthew's readers would have understood this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come here early, before the time when God is planning to judge us?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 8 29 uw6c figs-explicit ἦλθες ὧδε πρὸ καιροῦ βασανίσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **the set time** is referring to the time when God will judge all of the evil spirits and people. Matthew’s readers would have understood this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come here early, before the time when God is planning to judge us?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 8 30 v91c writing-background δὲ 1 Now **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew tells background information about a herd of pigs that had been there before Jesus arrived. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 8 31 tf32 figs-explicit εἰ ἐκβάλλεις ἡμᾶς 1 If you cast us out It is implied that the demons knew that Jesus was going to **cast** them **out**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because you are going to cast us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 8 31 cgf7 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us Here, **us** is exclusive, referring only to the demons. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ MAT 8 34 j6sp figs-metonymy πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word * MAT 8 34 xb5x figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **whole** is an exaggeration to emphasize how very many people came out to see Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this. Alternate translation: “many of the people in the city (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 9 General Notes

## Structure

## Formatting

## Special concepts in this chapter

## Figures of Speech

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter MAT 9 1 lje9 figs-explicit διεπέρασεν 1 into his own city Here, Matthew does not specify that Jesus **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he crossed over the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 9 2 i6xp writing-newevent ἰδοὺ 1 behold Here, **behold** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “When they arrived in Jesus' town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 9 2 i6xp writing-newevent ἰδοὺ 1 behold Here, **behold** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “When they arrived in Jesus’ town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 9 2 szd4 translate-unknown παραλυτικὸν 1 they were bringing See how you translated **paralytic** in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 9 2 iys2 figs-activepassive ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 Your sins are forgiven If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 9 4 u643 figs-explicit ἰδὼν…τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν 1 having known their thoughts This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ MAT 9 15 r8if figs-rquestion μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ ν MAT 9 15 xnp8 writing-proverbs μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος πενθεῖν, ἐφ’ ὅσον μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν ὁ νυμφίος? 1 The sons of the bridal chamber are not able to mourn while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? Jesus uses this proverb to show that his disciples do not **mourn** because he **is still** there **with them**. In this proverb, Jesus is the **bridegroom**, and his disciples are the **sons of the bridal chamber**. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “Just as the sons of the bridal chamber are not able to mourn while the bridegroom is still with them, so my disciples are not able to fast while I am still with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 9 15 iz9s figs-personification ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι ὅταν 1 But the days will come when Here, **the day** is said to be **coming** like a person might come. This is figurative, meaning that the event will happen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “But it will happen that when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 9 15 p6hz figs-activepassive ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος 1 the bridegroom may be taken away from them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will leave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 9 16 j9fx writing-proverbs οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐπιβάλλει ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ; αἴρει γὰρ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱματίου, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται 1 This verse is a proverb, which has a similar meaning to the previous verse. Jesus is talking about how the disciples should not use old ways of worship when he is present with them. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Just as you shouldn't use a new patch on an old piece of cloth, so you should not use old methods of worship like fasting when I am present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 9 16 j9fx writing-proverbs οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐπιβάλλει ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ; αἴρει γὰρ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱματίου, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται 1 This verse is a proverb, which has a similar meaning to the previous verse. Jesus is talking about how the disciples should not use old ways of worship when he is present with them. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Just as you shouldn’t use a new patch on an old piece of cloth, so you should not use old methods of worship like fasting when I am present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 9 16 yf98 figs-explicit οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐπιβάλλει ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ 1 But no one puts a patch of new cloth on an old garment When a piece of clothing gets a hole in it, another piece of cloth, a patch, is sewn onto the clothing to cover the hole. If this patch has not yet been washed, it will shrink and tear the piece of clothing, making the hole worse than it was to begin with. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, no one sews a new patch of cloth that has not yet shrunken from being washed on an old patch that has shrunk already” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 9 17 s13y writing-proverbs οὐδὲ βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς εἰ δὲ μή γε, ῥήγνυνται οἱ ἀσκοί, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἐκχεῖται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπόλλυνται. ἀλλὰ βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς, καὶ ἀμφότεροι συντηροῦνται 1 Neither do they put new wine into old wineskins This verse is a proverb with a similar message as the previous verse. Jesus is saying that just as someone would not put new wine which will expand in an old wine skin which cannot expand, so the disciples should not fast while Jesus is with them. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 9 17 plli grammar-connect-words-phrases οὐδὲ 1 Here, **neither** indicates that what follows is similar in meaning to the phrase that came before it. Use an expression in your language that functions like this. Alternate translation: “Similarly, no one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) Here, **neither** is a word which shows that the meaning of this verse is similar to the meaning of the previous verse. Use an word in your language that expresses this. Alternate translation: “Similarly, no one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ MAT 9 18 a4s2 writing-participants ἄρχων εἷς 1 This introduces the ** MAT 9 18 n1i6 translate-symaction προσεκύνει αὐτῷ 1 bowed down to him This is a way someone would show respect to someone in higher authority. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 9 20 gv15 figs-euphemism αἱμορροοῦσα 1 suffering from a discharge of blood The woman did not have an open wound. Rather, her monthly flow of blood would not stop. Your language may have a polite way to refer to this condition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 9 20 m9zq figs-extrainfo ἥψατο τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 of his garment Matthew does not explain why she **touched the edge of his garment**. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -MAT 9 21 eb6t writing-background ἔλεγεν γὰρ ἐν ἑαυτῇ, ἐὰν μόνον ἅψωμαι τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι. 1 for she was saying to herself, “If only I might touch his garments, I will be made well.” This verse tells us why she touched Jesus' garment. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “She did this because she was thinking to herself, ‘If I just touch his garments, then he will heal me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 9 21 eb6t writing-background ἔλεγεν γὰρ ἐν ἑαυτῇ, ἐὰν μόνον ἅψωμαι τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι. 1 for she was saying to herself, “If only I might touch his garments, I will be made well.” This verse tells us why she touched Jesus’ garment. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “She did this because she was thinking to herself, ‘If I just touch his garments, then he will heal me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 9 21 ukb8 figs-activepassive σωθήσομαι 1 If only I might touch his garments If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will make me well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 9 22 x398 translate-kinship θύγατερ 1 Daughter Jesus was using this term to refer to the woman as a believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is understood by your readers. Alternate translation: “Beloved woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 9 22 q6ca figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 your faith has saved you Here, **faith** is spoken of as having **saved** a person. This is figurative, meaning that because she believed that Jesus was able to heal her, he did heal her. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “because you believed I have healed you, I have healed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ MAT 9 25 mm3q figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη τὸ κοράσιον 1 was rais MAT 9 26 rxs4 figs-personification καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ φήμη αὕτη εἰς ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἐκείνην 1 And this report went out into all that region Here, **this report** is said to have **gone out** as a person might go out from a place. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “People reported what Jesus had done to the whole region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 9 26 pfq3 figs-synecdoche εἰς ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἐκείνην 1 Jesus refers to the **region** to mean the people who live in that region. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to many of the people in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 9 27 d8bu figs-explicit ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς 1 Have mercy on us Here, **have mercy** means that they want Jesus to heal them from their blindness. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Heal us from our blindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 9 27 dh5d translate-kinship Υἱὲ Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David's literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MAT 9 27 dh5d translate-kinship Υἱὲ Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David’s literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 9 28 e81f figs-ellipsis ναί, Κύριε 1 Yes, Lord The two blind men are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, we believe you can heal us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 9 29 w92e figs-activepassive κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν 1 Let it happen to you according to your faith If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will heal you it based on how much you have believed in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 9 30 uk2a figs-idiom ἠνεῴχθησαν αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί 1 their eyes were opened Here, **their eyes were opened** is an idiom that means they were able to see. Their eyes were already physically open. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were made able to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -529,12 +529,12 @@ MAT 9 30 t6p8 figs-idiom ὁρᾶτε μηδεὶς γινωσκέτω 1 See tha MAT 9 32 sh32 translate-unknown ἄνθρωπον κωφὸν 1 mute A person who is **mute** is someone who is not able to talk. Use an expression from your language that describes someone who is unable to see. Alternate translation: “a person who was unable to see anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 9 32 n6fs figs-activepassive ἄνθρωπον κωφὸν δαιμονιζόμενον 1 a mute, demon-possessed man If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a man whom a demon was controlling and making him mute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 9 33 y4l5 figs-activepassive οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως 1 Such as this has never been seen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one has ever seen anything such as this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 9 34 z2r7 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων 1 he casts out the demons Here, **the ruler of the demons** would have been understood by Jesus' audience as being Satan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “By Satan, who rules the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 9 34 z2r7 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων 1 he casts out the demons Here, **the ruler of the demons** would have been understood by Jesus’ audience as being Satan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “By Satan, who rules the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 9 35 x9ck figs-hyperbole τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 all the cities The word **all** is an exaggeration to emphasize how many **cities** Jesus went to. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “many of the cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 9 35 uz5e figs-abstractnouns κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλείας 1 the gospel of the kingdom Here the abstract noun **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. See how you translated this in [4:23](../04/23.md). Alternate translation: “preaching the good news that God will make them one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 9 35 e7at figs-hendiadys πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ πᾶσαν μαλακίαν 1 every disease and every sickness This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “many different kinds of illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) MAT 9 36 t47i figs-simile ὡσεὶ πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα 1 like sheep not having a shepherd Jesus compares the people sheep to who do not have a shepherd to lead them and take care of them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “they did not have someone to lead them and take care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 9 37 al89 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])" To call attention to a development in the story, Matthew uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])" +MAT 9 37 al89 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])” To call attention to a development in the story, Matthew uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])” MAT 9 37 mur4 writing-proverbs ὁ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ δὲ ἐργάται ὀλίγοι 1 The harvest is plentiful, but the laborers are few Jesus uses a proverb to respond to what he is seeing. Jesus means there are a lot of people who are ready to believe God but only few people to teach them God’s truth. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 9 37 kxap translate-unknown ἐργάται 1 Here, **laborers** is a word that refers to people who work in a field to bring in food. Use a term in your language for this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 9 38 vz8y figs-possession δεήθητε…τοῦ Κυρίου τοῦ θερισμοῦ 1 beg the Lord of the harvest Here, **of** means that the harvest belongs to the Lord, and that he has control over it. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “beg the Lord, who is in charge of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -560,14 +560,14 @@ MAT 10 9 b4m7 translate-unknown μὴ κτήσησθε χρυσὸν, μηδὲ MAT 10 9 a4xx figs-metonymy χρυσὸν, μηδὲ ἄργυρον, μηδὲ χαλκὸν 1 gold, or silver, or copper **gold**, silver** and **copper** are metals out of which coins were made. This list is a metonym for money. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “valuable metals” or “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 10 kia9 translate-unknown πήραν 1 a bag A **bag** is something that is worn that a person can carry their belongings in. If your language does not have a word for this, you can use something in your culture that you put things in to carry them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 10 10 i2ex translate-unknown δύο χιτῶνας 1 two tunics Use the same word you used for **tunic** in [5:40](../05/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 10 10 m97h writing-proverbs ἄξιος γὰρ ὁ ἐργάτης τῆς τροφῆς αὐτοῦ 1 of his food The proverb **for the laborer {is} worthy of his food** is giving the reason why Jesus' disciples should not bring anything with them. Jesus is saying that God will provide his disciples, the **laborer**, with what they need. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “For God will provide the laborer with what he needs to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 10 11 a41d figs-explicit κἀκεῖ μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθητε 1 and stay there until you might leave In this sentence, **there** means the **worthy** person's house. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and stay at that person's house until you leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 10 10 m97h writing-proverbs ἄξιος γὰρ ὁ ἐργάτης τῆς τροφῆς αὐτοῦ 1 of his food The proverb **for the laborer {is} worthy of his food** is giving the reason why Jesus’ disciples should not bring anything with them. Jesus is saying that God will provide his disciples, the **laborer**, with what they need. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “For God will provide the laborer with what he needs to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 10 11 a41d figs-explicit κἀκεῖ μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθητε 1 and stay there until you might leave In this sentence, **there** means the **worthy** person’s house. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and stay at that person’s house until you leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 10 12 n6cm figs-metonymy εἰσερχόμενοι δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, ἀσπάσασθε αὐτήν 1 But entering into the house, greet it 1The word **it** refers to the **house**. Here, **house** represents the people who live in the house. So, Matthew is saying to great the people in the house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “As you enter the house, greet the people who live in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 13 kc9m figs-metonymy μὲν ᾖ ἡ οἰκία ἀξία…μὴ ᾖ ἀξία 1 the house might be worthy … it might not be worthy Here, **the house** represents those who live in the house. A **worthy** person is a person who is willing to welcome the disciples into their house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the people who live in that house receive you well…the people who live in that house do not receive you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 14 wpjk translate-symaction ἐκτινάξατε τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν 1 The phrase **shake off the dust from your feet** was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 10 15 sg3c figs-metonymy γῇ Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρων 1 for the land of Sodom and Gomorrah Here, **the land of Sodom and Gomorrah** refers to the people who lived in **Sodom and Gomorrah**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 15 p8t4 figs-explicit γῇ Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρων 1 Jesus would have expected his hearers to know that Sodom and Gomorrah were cities filled with many wicked people, and that God would judge these people harshly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 10 15 zmm2 figs-explicit τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 for that city Here, **that city** is referring to the city which does not accept Jesus' disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the city that does not receive you and listen to your words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 10 15 zmm2 figs-explicit τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 for that city Here, **that city** is referring to the city which does not accept Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the city that does not receive you and listen to your words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 10 16 b262 figs-simile ὡς πρόβατα ἐν μέσῳ λύκων 1 as sheep in the midst of wolves Sheep are defenseless animals that **wolves** often attack. Jesus is stating that people who are as dangerous as **wolves** may harm the disciples, who are defenseless like **sheep**. Jesus is not using the same sheep metaphor as he used in [10:6](../10/06.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “as defenseless sheep among people who are like dangerous wolves” or “to dangerous places where people might attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 10 16 s21a figs-simile γίνεσθε…φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις καὶ ἀκέραιοι ὡς αἱ περιστεραί 1 be wise as the serpents and harmless as the doves Jesus is telling the disciples they must be cautious like a **snake** and **harmless** like *doves** around the dangerous the people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “act with wisdom and caution, as well as with innocence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 10 17 fct4 translate-unknown συνέδρια 1 councils The **councils** were groups of leaders who helped solve issues among people in their community. They acted like a court. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you could use term in your language for something like this, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “members of their community who were in authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ MAT 10 24 syb2 figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ δοῦλος ὑπὲρ τὸν κύρ MAT 10 25 e6z3 figs-ellipsis ὁ δοῦλος ὡς ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ 1 the slave like his master Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “it is enough for a slave to be like his master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 10 25 pu5y figs-metaphor εἰ τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐπεκάλεσαν 1 the master of the house Jesus refers to himself as **the master of the house**. This is figurative, meaning that he is the most important person among the group of him and disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “If they call me, who is like the master of the house, Beelzebul” or “If they call me, who is more important, Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 10 25 y5md translate-transliterate Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul The name **Beelzebul** could be translated: (1) as “Beelzebul” or (2) with its original, intended meaning of “Satan”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) -MAT 10 25 r5ll figs-metaphor τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 the members of his household Here, **the members of his household** is referring to Jesus' disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Jesus' disciples, who are like the members of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 10 25 r5ll figs-metaphor τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 the members of his household Here, **the members of his household** is referring to Jesus’ disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Jesus’ disciples, who are like the members of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 10 26 x4o8 figs-parallelism οὐδὲν…ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται 1 there is nothing concealed that will not be revealed, and hidden, that will not be made known Here, **there is nothing concealed that will not be revealed** means the same thing as **hidden, that will not be made known**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “there is nothing hidden that will not be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 10 26 cnzb writing-proverbs οὐδὲν γάρ ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται 1 Here, Jesus uses a proverb to teach his disciples. Jesus is explaining that all of the evil which people have done in secret, God will reveal when he judges people. you can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 10 26 xqs4 figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν…ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται 1 there is nothing concealed that will not be revealed, and hidden, that will not be made known If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything which is hidden will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ MAT 10 39 jwf2 figs-metaphor ὁ εὑρὼν…εὑρήσει 1 The one who fo MAT 10 39 pbf3 figs-explicit ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 will lose it Here, Jesus is saying that if a person tries to save his physical life from people who want to kill him for belonging to Jesus, God will punish him after he dies. But if a person suffers during his life on earth because he belongs to Jesus, God will not punish him after he dies. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 10 40 c77e figs-explicit ὁ δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς ἐμὲ δέχεται 1 The one receiving Jesus says that people **receive me** when they receive the disciples because Jesus is always with his disciples, and so it is like they receive him. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “The one who receives you, my disciples, it will be like he also receives me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 10 40 y9ck figs-metaphor ὁ ἐμὲ δεχόμενος δέχεται τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 the one receiving me receives the one who sent me Here, **the one receiving me receives the one who sent me** means that when someone **receives** Jesus, it is like **receiving** God the Father, who sent Jesus. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “the one who receives me, it is like he receives my Father who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 10 41 f9pv writing-proverbs ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου, μισθὸν προφήτου λήμψεται; καὶ ὁ δεχόμενος δίκαιον εἰς ὄνομα δικαίου, μισθὸν δικαίου λήμψεται 1 in the name of a prophet Jesus tells this proverb to show how important it is for people to receive his disciples. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who welcome one of God's prophets, God will reward him as a he rewards the prophets. And people who welcome someone who obeys God, God will reward him like that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 10 41 f9pv writing-proverbs ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου, μισθὸν προφήτου λήμψεται; καὶ ὁ δεχόμενος δίκαιον εἰς ὄνομα δικαίου, μισθὸν δικαίου λήμψεται 1 in the name of a prophet Jesus tells this proverb to show how important it is for people to receive his disciples. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who welcome one of God’s prophets, God will reward him as a he rewards the prophets. And people who welcome someone who obeys God, God will reward him like that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 10 41 yj1q figs-explicit ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου, μισθὸν προφήτου λήμψεται; καὶ ὁ δεχόμενος δίκαιον εἰς ὄνομα δικαίου, μισθὸν δικαίου λήμψεται 1 a reward of a prophet This **reward** is referring to living with God forever. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “To the one who receives the prophet, God will give him the reward of living with him forever, as he gives to the prophets. And to the one who receives the person who obeys God, God will give to him the reward of living with him forever, which he gives to those who obey him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 10 42 v6jg figs-genericnoun ὃς ἐὰν ποτίσῃ 1 whoever might give … to drink Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “If a person gives…to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 10 42 z8tk ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 to one of these little ones The phrase **these little ones** refers to Jesus’ disciples. If your readers would not understand what **little ones** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “one of my disciples, who are like my children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -647,15 +647,15 @@ MAT 11 1 z2y7 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 General Information: ** MAT 11 1 dr3u figs-doublet τοῦ διδάσκειν καὶ κηρύσσειν 1 It came about that when Here, the phrases **to teach** and **to preach** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus was teaching the people there. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to proclaim many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) MAT 11 2 f3j7 figs-extrainfo ὁ…Ἰωάννης, ἀκούσας ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ 1 John, having heard in the prison about Matthew had not yet told his audience why **John** was **in prison**. Since Matthew explains the story of how John ended up in prison in [14:4-5](../14/4-5.md), you do not need to tell your reader why here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) MAT 11 3 w2im figs-explicit ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 said to him Here, **the one coming** is referring to the prophet whom God promised to send. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one whom God promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 11 3 q89t figs-ellipsis ἢ ἕτερον προσδοκῶμεν 1 Are you the one coming John's disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “or should we expect someone else to come after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 11 3 hrk5 figs-exclusive ἕτερον προσδοκῶμεν 1 are we expecting another? Here, the word **we** is referring to either (1) John's disciples, or (2) the Jewish people in general. It is not including Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MAT 11 3 q89t figs-ellipsis ἢ ἕτερον προσδοκῶμεν 1 Are you the one coming John’s disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “or should we expect someone else to come after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 11 3 hrk5 figs-exclusive ἕτερον προσδοκῶμεν 1 are we expecting another? Here, the word **we** is referring to either (1) John’s disciples, or (2) the Jewish people in general. It is not including Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) MAT 11 5 dyxy figs-litany τυφλοὶ ἀναβλέπουσιν, καὶ χωλοὶ περιπατοῦσιν, λεπροὶ καθαρίζονται, καὶ κωφοὶ ἀκούουσιν, καὶ νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται, καὶ πτωχοὶ εὐαγγελίζονται 1 Here, Jesus lists all of the things which he has done to the people during his ministry. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that they have done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) MAT 11 5 tjuc figs-nominaladj τυφλοὶ…χωλοὶ…λεπροὶ…κωφοὶ…νεκροὶ…πτωχοὶ 1 Jesus is using the adjectives **blind**, **lame**, **lepers**, **deaf**, **dead**, and **poor** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 11 5 sd6c figs-activepassive λεπροὶ καθαρίζονται 1 lepers are cleansed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I am making lepers clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 5 v274 figs-idiom νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται 1 the dead are raised Here, the word **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am causing people to become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 11 5 k796 figs-activepassive νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται 1 the dead are raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that he did it. Alternate translation: “I am raising dead people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 5 g3k4 figs-activepassive πτωχοὶ εὐαγγελίζονται 1 the poor are being told the gospel If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that he did it. Alternate translation: “I am telling the poor good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 11 7 d4lo figs-explicit τούτων δὲ πορευομένων 1 Here, the word **these** refers to John's disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As John's disciples left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 11 7 d4lo figs-explicit τούτων δὲ πορευομένων 1 Here, the word **these** refers to John’s disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As John’s disciples left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 11 7 ysq6 figs-rquestion τί ἐξήλθατε εἰς τὴν ἔρημον θεάσασθαι? κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον? 1 What did you go out in the wilderness to see—a reed being shaken by the wind? Jesus uses a question to cause the people to think about what kind of person John the Baptist is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely you did not go out to the wilderness to see a reed being shaken by the wind!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 11 7 ydn2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **reed being shaken by the wind** is referring to a person who is easily affected by the people around them as a reed is affected by the wind. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use a simile, as in the UST. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “a man who is easily affected by other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 11 7 w269 figs-activepassive κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον 1 being shaken by the wind If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a reed which the wind is blowing around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -670,11 +670,11 @@ MAT 11 11 z5yq figs-idiom ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν 1 among th MAT 11 11 r9ws figs-activepassive ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν 1 If you would like to retain the idiom but your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “among those whom women have borne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 11 c093 figs-litotes οὐκ ἐγήγερται ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν μείζων Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ 1 Jesus uses a negative figure of speech to express how great John the Baptist is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Among those who have been born of human origin, John the Baptist is the greatest that has arisen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) MAT 11 11 cag4 figs-metonymy ὁ…μικρότερος ἐν τῇ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν μείζων αὐτοῦ ἐστιν 1 the least important in the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md) Alternate translation: “but those who are the least important among the people whom God rules over are greater than he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 11 12 mb4v figs-idiom ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ 1 But from the days of John the Baptist The word **days** is an idiom referring to a specific time period. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from the time of John the Baptist's preaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 11 12 inr2 ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν βιάζεται, καὶ βιασταὶ ἁρπάζουσιν αὐτήν 1 the kingdom of heaven suffers violence, and violent men take it by force This verse is difficult to understand, and many scholars disagree on its meaning. The different options are (1) that it refers to people attacking God's kingdom and the people who are his. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of the heavens is attacked violently, and many violent people try to conquer it” or (2) It also be understood instead as referring to the God's kingdom triumphing in the world. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of the heavens triumphs forcefully, and powerful men have control over it”. +MAT 11 12 mb4v figs-idiom ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ 1 But from the days of John the Baptist The word **days** is an idiom referring to a specific time period. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from the time of John the Baptist’s preaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 11 12 inr2 ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν βιάζεται, καὶ βιασταὶ ἁρπάζουσιν αὐτήν 1 the kingdom of heaven suffers violence, and violent men take it by force This verse is difficult to understand, and many scholars disagree on its meaning. The different options are (1) that it refers to people attacking God’s kingdom and the people who are his. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of the heavens is attacked violently, and many violent people try to conquer it” or (2) It also be understood instead as referring to the God’s kingdom triumphing in the world. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of the heavens triumphs forcefully, and powerful men have control over it”. MAT 11 13 g1i6 figs-metonymy πάντες…οἱ προφῆται καὶ ὁ νόμος ἕως Ἰωάννου ἐπροφήτευσαν 1 all the prophets and the law have prophesied until John Here, **the prophets and the law** refer to the things that the prophets and Moses wrote in scripture. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “these are the things that the prophets and Moses have prophesied through the scriptures until the time of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 14 yg2f figs-you εἰ θέλετε 1 if you are willing Here, **you** is plural and refers to the crowd, and is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 11 14 rdsw grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical καὶ εἰ θέλετε δέξασθαι, αὐτός ἐστιν Ἠλείας, ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσθαι 1 Awaiting Perry's comment +MAT 11 14 rdsw grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical καὶ εἰ θέλετε δέξασθαι, αὐτός ἐστιν Ἠλείας, ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσθαι 1 Awaiting Perry’s comment MAT 11 15 z97x figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears to hear, let him hear The phrase **has ears** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 15 w4cc figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears to hear, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 11 16 mp8g figs-rquestion τίνι δὲ ὁμοιώσω τὴν γενεὰν ταύτην? 1 But to what will I compare this generation? Jesus uses a question to introduce a comparison between the people he was speaking to and children who are in the marketplace. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But I will tell you what this generation is like.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ MAT 11 19 dsak guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώ MAT 11 19 gs6z grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἦλθεν…ἐσθίων καὶ πίνων 1 came eating and drinking The phrase **The Son of Man came eating and drinking** is comparing what Jesus did with what John the Baptist did. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But the Son of Man came eating and drinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MAT 11 19 x4ec figs-quotations λέγουσιν, ἰδοὺ, ἄνθρωπος, φάγος καὶ οἰνοπότης, τελωνῶν φίλος καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν! 1 they say, ‘Behold a man, a glutton and a drunkard, a friend of tax collectors and sinners!’ If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they say that he is a man who is a glutton and a drunkard, and a friend of tax collectors and those who disobey God’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 11 19 pv4n translate-unknown φάγος…οἰνοπότης 1 a drunkard The word **glutton** refers to a person who eats too much food. The word **drunkard** refers to a person who drinks too much wine and gets drunk because of it. Use words in your language that refer to these things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 11 19 vwk4 writing-proverbs καὶ ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς 1 But wisdom has been justified by her children The proverb **wisdom has been justified by her children** is figurative, where **wisdom** is referring to Jesus and John the Baptist teaching about God's wisdom, which causes people to be saved. The word **children** is referring to those who are influenced by their ministry. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “But God's wisdom is proven right by its work in the peoples lives who John and I minister to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 11 19 vwk4 writing-proverbs καὶ ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς 1 But wisdom has been justified by her children The proverb **wisdom has been justified by her children** is figurative, where **wisdom** is referring to Jesus and John the Baptist teaching about God’s wisdom, which causes people to be saved. The word **children** is referring to those who are influenced by their ministry. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “But God’s wisdom is proven right by its work in the peoples lives who John and I minister to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 11 19 o3zh figs-activepassive ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς 1 wisdom has been justified by her children If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God proves his wisdom by his children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 20 w4g8 figs-metonymy ὀνειδίζειν τὰς πόλεις 1 to rebuke the cities Here, **the cities** refers to the people who live in the cities. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to scold the people of the cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 20 t51a figs-activepassive ἐν αἷς ἐγένοντο αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις αὐτοῦ 1 in which most of his miracles were done If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in which he did most of his miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -701,16 +701,16 @@ MAT 11 21 lh46 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ κα MAT 11 21 tm59 figs-activepassive εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 if the miracles had been done in Tyre and Sidon which were done in you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if I had done the mighty deeds among the people of Tyre and Sidon that I have done among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 21 k3in figs-you αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 which were done in you Here the **you** is plural and refers to Chorazin and Bethsaida. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 11 22 mr18 figs-metonymy Χοραζείν…Βηθσαϊδάν…Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι 1 it will be more tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at the day of judgment than for you See how you translated **Tyre** and **Sidon** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 11 22 ibpo figs-explicit ἢ ὑμῖν 1 than for you The reason why it will be **more tolerable** is because Chorazin and Bethsaida did see Jesus' miracles, and they still did not repent. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “than for you, because you did not repent and believe in me, even though you saw me do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 11 22 ibpo figs-explicit ἢ ὑμῖν 1 than for you The reason why it will be **more tolerable** is because Chorazin and Bethsaida did see Jesus’ miracles, and they still did not repent. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “than for you, because you did not repent and believe in me, even though you saw me do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 11 23 vpz6 figs-you καὶ σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? ἕως ᾍδου καταβήσῃ; ὅτι εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν σοί, ἔμεινεν ἂν μέχρι τῆς σήμερον 1 And you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? You will be brought down to Hades. For if the miracles that were done in you had been done in Sodom, it would have remained until today The pronoun **you** is singular and refers to Capernaum throughout this verse and the next. If it is more natural to refer to the people of the city, you could translate with a plural **you**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 11 23 h8e4 figs-apostrophe καὶ σύ, Καφαρναούμ μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ 1 Jesus is addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “I am very upset with the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) Jesus is addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Capernaum, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about Capernaum. Alternate translation: “Certainly Capernaum will not be lifted up to heaven, will it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) MAT 11 23 fj7d figs-metonymy Καφαρναούμ…Σοδόμοις 1 Capernaum … Sodom Here the words **Capernaum** and **Sodom** are referring to the people who live in those cities. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people of Capernaum…people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 23 aa7t figs-activepassive μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “God will not raise you up to heaven, will he?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 23 nddz figs-rquestion μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? Jesus uses a rhetorical question to rebuke the people of Capernaum for their pride, because the think they deserve to be taken straight to heaven. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “God will certainly not bring you up to heaven like you think he will!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 11 23 vk57 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν σοί, ἔμεινεν ἂν μέχρι τῆς σήμερον 1 For if the miracles that were done in you had been done in Sodom, it would have remained until today Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to rebuke the people who live in the city of Capernaum. This could have happened in the past, but it did not happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can mark the second event with the word "then". Alternate translation: “If I had done all of these powerful deeds in the presence of the people of Sodom, then they would have turned from their sinful ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +MAT 11 23 vk57 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν σοί, ἔμεινεν ἂν μέχρι τῆς σήμερον 1 For if the miracles that were done in you had been done in Sodom, it would have remained until today Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to rebuke the people who live in the city of Capernaum. This could have happened in the past, but it did not happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can mark the second event with the word “then”. Alternate translation: “If I had done all of these powerful deeds in the presence of the people of Sodom, then they would have turned from their sinful ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) MAT 11 23 z279 figs-activepassive εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν σοί 1 if the miracles that were done in you had been done in Sodom If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if I had done the miracles among the people of Sodom that I have done among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 24 e3pa figs-metonymy γῇ Σοδόμων 1 it will be more tolerable for the land of Sodom in the day of judgment than for you See how you translated Sodom in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 11 24 yk3z figs-explicit ἢ σοί 1 than for you Jesus is saying that it will be **more tolerable** for the people of Sodom because they did not have the chance to see Jesus' miracles, while the people of Capernaum did, and still did not repent. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 11 24 yk3z figs-explicit ἢ σοί 1 than for you Jesus is saying that it will be **more tolerable** for the people of Sodom because they did not have the chance to see Jesus’ miracles, while the people of Capernaum did, and still did not repent. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 11 25 h5x4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 11 25 u9cy figs-merism Κύριε τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Lord of heaven and earth The phrase **heaven and earth** is figurative for everything which God has created in the entire universe. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “ruler over the entire universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) MAT 11 25 qw5c figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ σοφῶν καὶ συνετῶν 1 from the wise and discerning Jesus is using the adjectives **wise** and **intelligent** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from people who are smart and knowledgeable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -739,14 +739,14 @@ MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 the grainfields A gra MAT 12 1 y5vr figs-explicit στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. Alternate translation: “picking the tops of grain and eating the seeds”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 2 swl7 figs-explicit ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath According to the law of Moses, people are not allowed to work on the Sabbath in order to focus on worshipping God. The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 3 d712 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε ἐπείνασεν καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and those who were with him— This begins a question that continues into the next verse. See the note in the next verse for how to address this rhetorical question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 4 u3ye figs-rquestion πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, ὃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν, οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 Jesus asks this question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly you have read what David did when he and those with him were hungry, how he went into the God's house and ate the bread of the presence, which they was not allowed to do. Only the priests were allowed to do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 4 u3ye figs-rquestion πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, ὃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν, οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 Jesus asks this question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly you have read what David did when he and those with him were hungry, how he went into the God’s house and ate the bread of the presence, which they was not allowed to do. Only the priests were allowed to do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 4 blm5 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) MAT 12 4 ue7l figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the loaves of the presence This refers to the 12 loaves of bread that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the 12 loaves of the bread of the presence which were in the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 4 lkx9 figs-ellipsis εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 except only for the priests Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but it was only lawful for the priests to eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 5 f79q figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι τοῖς Σάββασιν οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν, καὶ ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν? 1 have you not read in the law that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent? Jesus uses a question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely you have read in the law of Moses that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 5 dqe9 figs-explicit τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 1 profane the Sabbath The priests are said to **profane the Sabbath** because they had to fulfill their priestly duties on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “defile the Sabbath by working their priestly duties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 6 k4mn figs-123person τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν 1 greater than the temple Jesus was referring to himself as the one who is **greater than the temple** If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I am someone who is more important than the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 7 ypj7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Pharisees about why they were wrong for accusing Jesus' disciples of working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “Suppose you had understood what the phrase ‘I desire you to have mercy and not to sacrifice’ meant, then you certainly would not have condemned my innocent disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +MAT 12 7 ypj7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Pharisees about why they were wrong for accusing Jesus’ disciples of working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “Suppose you had understood what the phrase ‘I desire you to have mercy and not to sacrifice’ meant, then you certainly would not have condemned my innocent disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This verse is saying that God would prefer the Israelites to have **mercy** than for them to have to offer a **sacrifice** for their sins. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “I would rather you be merciful to others than for you to continually offer sacrifices for your wrongful deeds. MAT 12 7 s23l figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 the innocent Jesus is using the adjective **innocent** as a noun in order to describe his disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 12 8 l7g3 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. If your readers would not understand this, you can use the first person here to clarify, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -773,19 +773,19 @@ MAT 12 21 w3rq figs-synecdoche τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name MAT 12 22 nba2 writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 12 22 e1g4 figs-activepassive προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος 1 Then someone was brought to him, blind and mute, demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people brought one who was demon possessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 22 k2vt figs-nominaladj τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 someone was brought to him, blind and mute Jesus is using the adjectives **blind** and **mute** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who was blind and mute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 12 23 ink7 translate-unknown ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David **Son of David** is a an important title for the Messiah, who was supposed to come and rule on David's throne. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Messiah, the Son of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 12 23 ink7 translate-unknown ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David **Son of David** is a an important title for the Messiah, who was supposed to come and rule on David’s throne. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Messiah, the Son of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 12 23 h8kf figs-metonymy υἱὸς 1 Son Here, the word **Son** is figurative for a descendant of someone. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “offspring (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 24 p1mi figs-doublenegatives οὗτος οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “He throws out demons only by the Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MAT 12 25 ckth figs-explicit εἰδὼς δὲ τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he know their thoughts. So he said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 25 i1sd writing-proverbs πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται  1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Jesus uses a proverb to respond to the Pharisees saying that he casts out demons by Beelzebul. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “If the people of a nation are fighting against each other, they will certainly cause its destruction. Similarly, if people of a city or even a house are fighting against each other, they will will not be united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 12 25 i1sd writing-proverbs πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Jesus uses a proverb to respond to the Pharisees saying that he casts out demons by Beelzebul. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “If the people of a nation are fighting against each other, they will certainly cause its destruction. Similarly, if people of a city or even a house are fighting against each other, they will will not be united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 12 25 ll42 figs-parallelism πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται…πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand The phrases **Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate** and **every city or house divided against itself will not stand** mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing to show that if any group of people fights against each other, it will eventually loose its unity. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Any group of people fighting against each other will eventually fall apart and no longer be united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy βασιλεία…πόλις ἢ οἰκία 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, the words **kingdom**, **city**, refer to the people who live in them. The word **house** refers to a family, who would all live in the same house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: "people who live in a nation … people who live in a city or house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy βασιλεία…πόλις ἢ οἰκία 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, the words **kingdom**, **city**, refer to the people who live in them. The word **house** refers to a family, who would all live in the same house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people who live in a nation … people who live in a city or house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 25 rvzh figs-activepassive πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People living in a country who fight against each other destroy their own country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 26 i42r figs-metonymy Σατανᾶν 1 if Satan casts out Satan The second word **Satan** is figurative, referring to the demons that serve Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the demons who serve Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 26 ah7t figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ 1 How then will his kingdom stand? Jesus uses this question to show the Pharisees that accusing Jesus of casting out demons by Satan is foolish. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “His kingdom will surely not stand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 27 gee9 figs-rquestion οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 by whom do your sons cast them out? Jesus uses another question to challenge the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly your sons also cast out demons by the same person as me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 27 x9je figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons The phrase **your sons** refers to their the disciples of the Pharisees. If your readers would not understand what **sons** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “your disciples” or “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges The phrase **For this reason they will be your judges** could mean (1) that they will judge the Pharisees's accusations against Jesus to be wrong. Alternate translation: “Because of this your disciples will show that you are wrong". Or (2) they will stand with God at the end of time to judge the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “Because of this yours sons will be your judges” +MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges The phrase **For this reason they will be your judges** could mean (1) that they will judge the Pharisees’s accusations against Jesus to be wrong. Alternate translation: “Because of this your disciples will show that you are wrong”. Or (2) they will stand with God at the end of time to judge the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “Because of this yours sons will be your judges” MAT 12 28 zb4d grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 But if I Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I throw out demons by the Spirit of God, the kingdom of God has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) MAT 12 28 r5dg figs-metonymy ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 then the kingdom of God has come upon you See how you translated **kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “then God is make people a part of his people over whom he will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables ἢ 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. Make sure it is clear to your readers that this is a story. Alternate translate: “Then Jesus told them a story, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν MAT 12 29 b2et figs-genericnoun τις 1 The word **anyone** is a generic noun, and is not referring to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 12 29 tsrk figs-metaphor πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι 1 To **enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings** is figurative. The **strong man** is referring to Satan. So to enter into his house and steal his belongings means to throw out his demons from people who they controlled. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Someone cannot take from Satan the demons the belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 29 zluo figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν 1 When someone **ties up** the strong man, who is Satan, it means either to defeat him or restrain him. This means that he is no longer able to rule over his demons. If your readers would not understand what it means to **bind** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “unless he first restrains him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 30 ivp9 figs-idiom ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one not being with me The phrase **with me** is an idiom which means to support someone or be on their side. In this instance, the religious leaders were not supporting Jesus' ministry because they thought we was controlled by Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one not supporting my work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 30 ivp9 figs-idiom ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one not being with me The phrase **with me** is an idiom which means to support someone or be on their side. In this instance, the religious leaders were not supporting Jesus’ ministry because they thought we was controlled by Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one not supporting my work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 12 30 ek1h figs-metaphor ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει 1 the one not gathering with me scatters Jesus is using a metaphor that refers to a person either **gathering** the flock of sheep to a shepherd or making them scatter away from the shepherd. Jesus means that a person is either helping to make people become disciples of Jesus or he is making people reject Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 31 hy38 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 every sin and blasphemy will be forgiven men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will commit every sin that a person commits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 31 t280 grammar-connect-exceptions πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις; ἡ δὲ τοῦ Πνεύματος, βλασφημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται 1 If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid confusing your reader. Alternate translation: “God will forgive many sins and blasphemies, but he will not forgive the blasphemy of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) @@ -810,7 +810,7 @@ MAT 12 34 r1uv figs-metaphor γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 You offspring MAT 12 34 e7x3 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ λαλεῖν, πονηροὶ ὄντες? 1 being evil, how are you able to say good things? Jesus uses a question to rebuke how evil the Pharisees behave. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you are certainly not able to say good things to people because you are so evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 34 i7c6 figs-synecdoche ἐκ…τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ 1 out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaks Here, **mouth** is a synecdoche that represents a person as a whole. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “A person speaks from all that is in their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 12 34 e9bg figs-metonymy ἐκ…τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ 1 out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaks Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts or intentions a person has. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what a person says with his mouth reveals what he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 35 r3uw writing-proverbs ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει ἀγαθά; καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει πονηρά 1 The good man from his good treasure brings forth good things, and the evil man from his evil treasure brings forth evil things Jesus uses this proverb to speak about where people's behavior comes from. Jesus speaks of the heart as **treasure**. He is saying that good people say good things out of their good desires. Similarly, evil people do evil things out of their evil desires. Translate this proverb in a way that would be meaningful in your language, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “People who have good desires do things, but people who have evil desires do bad things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 12 35 r3uw writing-proverbs ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει ἀγαθά; καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει πονηρά 1 The good man from his good treasure brings forth good things, and the evil man from his evil treasure brings forth evil things Jesus uses this proverb to speak about where people’s behavior comes from. Jesus speaks of the heart as **treasure**. He is saying that good people say good things out of their good desires. Similarly, evil people do evil things out of their evil desires. Translate this proverb in a way that would be meaningful in your language, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “People who have good desires do things, but people who have evil desires do bad things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 12 36 t2pj figs-genericnoun οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men will give an account concerning it Jesus is speaking about **men** in general, and not about any specific men. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 12 36 ay18 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” or “we may act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the day when God will judge the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 12 37 qw5e figs-activepassive δικαιωθήσῃ…καταδικασθήσῃ 1 you will be justified … you will be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will justify you … God will condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ MAT 12 44 cd4f figs-activepassive εὑρίσκει σχολάζοντα σεσ MAT 12 44 s6jf figs-metaphor σχολάζοντα σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 empty and swept out and put in order Here, the phrase **empty, having been swept out and put in order** is figurative language referring to a house that has been cleaned and moved out of so no one lives there. Similar to this, the spirit found this person to not have any spirit living in it. Jesus is saying that the person did not have the Holy Spirit living within them so the demon came back. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the spirit finds that the person did not have the Holy Spirit living in them, but that there was no spirit living in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 47 qd32 figs-quotations εἶπεν δέ τις αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἔξω ἑστήκασιν ζητοῦντές σοι λαλῆσαι. 1 Someone said to him, “Behold, your mother and your brothers stand outside, seeking to speak to you.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “now someone said to him that his mother and brothers were standing outside seeking to speak to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 12 48 e535 figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Who is my mother and who are my brothers? Jesus asks this question to teach the crowd about which people are a part of his spiritual family. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who the people are that are my mother and brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 49 rxe8 translate-kinship ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 my mother and my brothers The phrase **my mother and my brothers** is not here referring to Jesus' actual brothers and mother, but he is referring to his disciples as his brothers and mother. Jesus says this because he considers them a part of his spiritual family. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these are like like a mother and brothers to me” or “these are like family to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MAT 12 49 rxe8 translate-kinship ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 my mother and my brothers The phrase **my mother and my brothers** is not here referring to Jesus’ actual brothers and mother, but he is referring to his disciples as his brothers and mother. Jesus says this because he considers them a part of his spiritual family. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these are like like a mother and brothers to me” or “these are like family to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 12 50 e25c ὅστις…ἂν ποιήσῃ 1 whoever may do The word **For** here tells the reader that Jesus is explaining the previous thing he said. He is explaining that he considers as family those who obey God. Alternate translation: “For I consider the one that obeys my Father in the heavens to be my mother or my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) MAT 12 50 mq9r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 of my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 12 50 s0yb figs-metonymy ἐν οὐρανοῖς 1 See how you translated the phrase **in the heavens** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) See how you translated the phrase **in the heavens** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -861,7 +861,7 @@ MAT 13 4 qr2d figs-explicit καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν, MAT 13 4 v7r8 figs-ellipsis ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν 1 beside the road Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “some seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 5 ql87 figs-ellipsis καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up In this verse and in the following verses, the word **others** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it scorched the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 6 pz44 figs-idiom ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος 1 the sun rose is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The phrase **the sun had risen** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 13 6 pz44 figs-idiom ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος 1 the sun rose is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The phrase**the sun had risen** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 7 k69q figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 See the note on **others** in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 7 vt8z figs-explicit ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά 1 choked them The phrase **the thorns grew up and choked them** might be confusing to come readers. What this means is that the weeds grew much faster than the crops which the sower planted did, and so they did not allow the crops to grow. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can state this explicitly with an example from your culture. Alternate translation: “the thorns grew much faster and overwhelmed the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 8 iwv2 figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 produced fruit See the note in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -892,22 +892,22 @@ MAT 13 19 v2d7 figs-genericnoun παντὸς ἀκούοντος 1 the word of MAT 13 19 suhi figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus refers to bread, one common food, to mean food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) The phrase **the word** is referring to the entire message about **the kingdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 19 het1 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Here the word **kingdom** is referring to how God is making people his people to rule over them. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message about how God is making people his people to rule over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 19 uo3l figs-ellipsis τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus is speaking about Satan as if he were a bird who **snatches away** seeds. God's message is spoken of as if it **has been sown** in a person's heart. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the evil one comes and takes away their understanding of God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus is speaking about Satan as if he were a bird who **snatches away** seeds. God’s message is spoken of as if it **has been sown** in a person’s heart. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the evil one comes and takes away their understanding of God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 19 sb7u figs-explicit ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one Here, **the evil one** refers to Satan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan, who is the evil one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 19 r9u6 figs-activepassive τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 what has been sown in his heart If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the seed which God sowed in his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 19 xi8f figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his heart Here, the word **heart** is referring to the mind of the person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 19 wfd3 figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς 1 This is what was sown beside the road Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happens when seed is thrown alongside the road. The seed is referring to God's message. The road is referring to the persons **heart**. If your readers would not understand what this means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “when this happens, it is like what happened to seed being sown along the path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 19 wfd3 figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς 1 This is what was sown beside the road Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happens when seed is thrown alongside the road. The seed is referring to God’s message. The road is referring to the persons **heart**. If your readers would not understand what this means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “when this happens, it is like what happened to seed being sown along the path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 19 xgz5 παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν 1 beside the road See how you translated this in [13:4](../13/04.md). MAT 13 20 l5iv figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 Now that sown on the rocky ground The phrase **the one having been sown** is talking about the the seed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed which was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 20 rnct figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 Jesus is comparing **the one hearing the word and immediately receiving it with joy** with the seed which is sown on rocky ground. In the same way that the seed sown on rocky soil does not have deep roots, so the person who immediately receives it has not fully believed in God's message. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this is like the person who hears the word and quickly receives it with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 20 rnct figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 Jesus is comparing **the one hearing the word and immediately receiving it with joy** with the seed which is sown on rocky ground. In the same way that the seed sown on rocky soil does not have deep roots, so the person who immediately receives it has not fully believed in God’s message. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this is like the person who hears the word and quickly receives it with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 20 w4f9 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 Now that sown on rocky ground, this is See how you translated **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 20 cl6g figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **the word** represents God’s message. Alternate translation: “the message” or “God’s teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 20 z76f figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 receiving it with joy Jesus is speaking, speaking about believing as if they were **recieving** God's message. If your readers would not understand what **receiving** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this seed is like the person who quickly receives God's message with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 20 z76f figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 receiving it with joy Jesus is speaking, speaking about believing as if they were **recieving** God’s message. If your readers would not understand what **receiving** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this seed is like the person who quickly receives God’s message with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 21 zg9q figs-idiom οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιρός ἐστιν 1 But he has no root in himself, but is temporary The expression **but he has no root in himself, but is temporary** means that the plant does not have deep enough roots to stay alive. Alternate translation: “but he does not have deep roots to stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 21 ixil grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to what precedes it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MAT 13 21 lxuy figs-abstractnouns γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “people afflicted and persecuted them because of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 13 21 xv50 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 See how you translated **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble The expression **to stumble** means that he no longer believes God's message. Alternate translation: “immediately he stops believing God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])   +MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble The expression **to stumble** means that he no longer believes God’s message. Alternate translation: “immediately he stops believing God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 22 d4h5 figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown Here, Jesus is talking about the story of seed which was **sown** among the thorns, If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed having been sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 22 rcj8 ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρείς 1 Now that which has been sown among the thorn plants See how you translated **thorns** in [13:7](../13/07.md) MAT 13 22 a3u1 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον…τὸν λόγον 2 the word See how you translated **the word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -919,7 +919,7 @@ MAT 13 23 ptb8 figs-metaphor ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ καὶ ποιε MAT 13 23 wm3p figs-ellipsis ποιεῖ, ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some yield 100 times, and some 60, and some 30 This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 100 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 30 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 23 i4t0 translate-numbers ἑκατὸν…ἑξήκοντα…τριάκοντα 1 You can state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “a hundred … sixty … thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 13 24 l5yx figs-parables ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, 1 Connecting Statement: To help the people understand his message, Jesus tells a story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told a story to help them understand:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 24 xkov figs-metaphor ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here the phrase **set before** means that Jesus told the people another story. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here the term **set before them** means that Jesus told the disciples another parable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  +MAT 13 24 xkov figs-metaphor ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here the phrase **set before** means that Jesus told the people another story. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here the term **set before them** means that Jesus told the disciples another parable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 24 iiv7 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ σπείραντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with the entire story through [13:30](../13/30.md). See the note in the chapter introduction for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 13 24 f8j5 figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **The kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ MAT 13 47 rjm4 figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶ MAT 13 47 vrp4 figs-activepassive ὁμοία…σαγήνῃ βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 like a net having been cast into the sea If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is like a net which fisherman threw into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 48 aqhl figs-activepassive ἐπληρώθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fish filled the net” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 48 cnp7 figs-nominaladj τὰ καλὰ…τὰ…σαπρὰ 1 the good things Jesus is using the adjectives **good** and **worthless** as a noun here in order to describe a group of as either good for eating or not good for eating. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good fish … worthless fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 13 49 zawv figs-explicit ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Jesus does not say where the angels **go out** from. Jesus and his audience would have known that the angels went out from God's presence. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The angels will go out from God's presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 49 zawv figs-explicit ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Jesus does not say where the angels **go out** from. Jesus and his audience would have known that the angels went out from God’s presence.If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The angels will go out from God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 49 ah2k figs-nominaladj τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μέσου τῶν δικαίων 1 the wicked from among the righteous Jesus is using the adjectives **wicked** and **righteous** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are wicked … people who are righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 13 50 j8nf καὶ βαλοῦσιν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός. ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 the furnace of fire See how you translated this verse in [13:42](../13/42.md). MAT 13 51 p5ej figs-quotations συνήκατε ταῦτα πάντα? λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ναί. 1 Have you understood all these things?” They say to him, “Yes.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express these as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “Jesus asked them if they had understood all this, and they said that they did understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ MAT 13 54 it1f ἐκπλήσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 they were astonished MAT 13 54 b3d2 figs-explicit πόθεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία αὕτη καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις? 1 From where to this one is this wisdom and these miracles? The people asked this question because they did not believe that Jesus had the power to do miracles and heal people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How can it be that this man has such great wisdom and does these miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 55 rk5e figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός? οὐχ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Μαριὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ, Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωσὴφ, καὶ Σίμων, καὶ Ἰούδας? 1 Is not this the son of the carpenter? Is not his mother called Mary, and his brothers, James, and Joseph, and Simon, and Judas? The crowd uses these questions to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He is just the son of a carpenter. We know his mother Mary, and his brothers James, Joseph, Simon, and Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 55 rpj9 translate-unknown ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 the son of the carpenter The word **carpenter** here is referring to someone who works with wood. If your readers would not understand the word **carpenter**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the son of the man who builds with wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 13 55 qspg figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 Jesus is using the phrase **the carpenter** to mean Jospeh, Jesus' father. Alternate translation: “the son of Joseph, the carpenter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 55 qspg figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 Jesus is using the phrase **the carpenter** to mean Jospeh, Jesus’ father. Alternate translation: “the son of Joseph, the carpenter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 56 m9pn figs-rquestion αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ οὐχὶ πᾶσαι πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἰσιν? 1 are not all his sisters with us? The crowd uses this question to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “all his sisters are with us, too.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 56 bnv1 figs-rquestion πόθεν οὖν τούτῳ ταῦτα πάντα? 1 From where therefore to this one are all these things? The crowd uses this question to show their doubt concerning where Jesus got his abilities from. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We do not know where he got these abilities!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 56 pqf1 ταῦτα πάντα 1 all these things Here, **all these things** refers to Jesus’ wisdom and ability to do miracles mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “are his wisdom and ability to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1020,13 +1020,13 @@ MAT 14 2 pd1b figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς παισὶν α MAT 14 2 nx7x figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 has been raised from the dead If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 2 vve7 figs-personification διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 because of this, miraculous powers are at work in him Jesus speaks of **the miraculous powers** as if it were a living thing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is why God has given him great power to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 14 3 zgp9 writing-background γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: From here until [14:12](../14/12.md), Jesus gives the reader background information explaining why Herod said that John was raised from the dead. He is explaining how John died. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “For John died in this way:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MAT 14 3 zsvz grammar-connect-logic-result ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of Herodias, Herod's brother's wife, John was arrested, bound, and thrown into prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MAT 14 3 zsvz grammar-connect-logic-result ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of Herodias, Herod’s brother’s wife, John was arrested, bound, and thrown into prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 14 3 d3gp grammar-connect-time-sequential ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” The events described by **arrested**, **bound** and **put in prison** happened in that order. Make sure this is understandable to your audience. Alternate translation: “For Herod first arrested him. Then he bound him and then threw him and prison” MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison Jesus is using the term **Herod** to mean the soldiers who work for him. If it would be helpful to your reader, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John, bind him, and throw him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother, and the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 14 4 n1t6 figs-quotations ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης, οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For John was saying that it was not lawful for him to have her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 14 6 fvs5 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ μέσῳ 1 in the midst If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express who she was dancing **in the midst** of explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the midst of the guests attending the birthday celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 6 vdik translate-unknown γενεσίοις δὲ γενομένοις τοῦ Ἡρῴδου 1 In some cultures, people celebrate the day that someone was born. If your readers would not understand the word **birthday**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “And they were celebrating Herod's birthday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 14 6 vdik translate-unknown γενεσίοις δὲ γενομένοις τοῦ Ἡρῴδου 1 In some cultures, people celebrate the day that someone was born. If your readers would not understand the word **birthday**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “And they were celebrating Herod’s birthday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 14 8 rhk5 figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς 1 But having being urged beforehand by her mother If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now her mother urged her beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 8 ruy4 translate-unknown πίνακι 1 a platter If your readers would not understand the word **platter**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “a large plate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 14 9 s8zp figs-activepassive καὶ ἐλυπήθη ὁ βασιλεὺς 1 And the king, having been grieved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The king grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ MAT 14 22 yp8l writing-background ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθητὰς MAT 14 24 vzd1 writing-background τὸ δὲ πλοῖον ἤδη μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης ἦν βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων, ἦν γὰρ ἐναντίος ὁ ἄνεμος 1 was being tossed about by the waves Matthew provides more information to help the reader understand the follow verses. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The boat was already in the middle of the sea, and was being tossed around by waves because of a strong opposing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 14 25 pmw8 translate-unknown τετάρτῃ δὲ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Now in the fourth watch of the night If your readers would not understand the phrase **fourth watch**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “some time just before the sun rose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 14 26 h7df figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι φάντασμά 1 a ghost If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he is a ghost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 14 30 sk3j βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he "he became afraid" because he became aware of the wind and the large waves that it caused. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” +MAT 14 30 sk3j βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he “he became afraid” because he became aware of the wind and the large waves that it caused. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” MAT 14 31 ia1d figs-explicit εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Here, **doubt** is referring to Peter doubting that Jesus could help him from sinking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “why did you doubt that I could keep you from sinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 14 31 cr9i figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly should not have doubted!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 14 33 u8pu guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Υἱὸς 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1066,14 +1066,14 @@ MAT 15 2 gfn6 figs-explicit οὐ…νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας 1 t MAT 15 3 ia1e figs-rquestion διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Why do you also violate the commandment of God because of your traditions? Jesus is using the question form to challenge the Pharisees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are violating the commandment of God because of your traditions!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 15 4 srz6 figs-quotesinquotes τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα…ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα, θανάτῳ τελευτάτω 1 General Information: If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Moses said to honor your father and mother. He also said that the person who speaks evil against his father or mother deserves to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 15 5 ql75 figs-explicit δῶρον 1 But you say It might be necessary in your language to say who the gift is for. This gift is given to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is a gift for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 5 l8t0 figs-quotesinquotes ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, δῶρον ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But you say that whoever says to his father or mother 'Whatever from might have been helpful is a gift'” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MAT 15 5 l8t0 figs-quotesinquotes ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, δῶρον ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But you say that whoever says to his father or mother ‘Whatever from might have been helpful is a gift’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 15 6 q3kt figs-explicit πατέρα 1 he will certainly not honor his father Here, the word **father** implies the idea of both the father and the mother. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “father and mother” or “parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 6 znt9 figs-explicit ἠκυρώσατε τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you have made void the word of God Here, the phrase **the word of God** is referring to God's commandments in the Old Testament. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you have made void the God's commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 15 6 znt9 figs-explicit ἠκυρώσατε τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you have made void the word of God Here, the phrase **the word of God** is referring to God’s commandments in the Old Testament. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you have made void the God’s commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 7 t4fq figs-exclamations ὑποκριταί 1 General Information: Jesus calls them **hypocrites** in an exclamatory way to emphasize his anger with them. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “You are hypocrites!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) MAT 15 7 n4ti writing-quotations λέγων 1 saying Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ 1 This people honors me with their lips Isaiah, who Jesus is quoting, is using the term **lips** to mean when someone is speaking. Alternate translation: “This people honors me when they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 bz91 writing-pronouns με…ἐμοῦ 1 me … me Here, the words **me** are referring to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “me, God … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** to mean a person’s inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 q7vm figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far away from me Here, the phrase **far from me** is an idiom meaning that they do not love him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they are not love me in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 15 8 hr29 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, **but** contrasts what is before it to what comes after it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MAT 15 9 vvb9 figs-possession ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people instead of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ MAT 15 20 bme7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον…ἄνθρωπον 1 to e MAT 15 21 e5gv writing-newevent 0 General Information: Here, Matthew is introducing a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 15 21 t81u figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that the disciples went with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples withdrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 22 x1wm writing-participants ἰδοὺ, γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελθοῦσα 1 behold, a Canaanite woman having come out Matthew is using the phrase **behold, a Canaanite woman having come out** to introduce the **Canaanite woman** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Behold, there was a woman from the people called the Canaanites who was coming from the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -MAT 15 22 xs64 translate-kinship Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David's literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MAT 15 22 xs64 translate-kinship Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David’s literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 15 22 j6rt figs-activepassive ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμονίζεται 1 My daughter is severely demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “a demon” did it. Alternate translation: “A demon is controlling my daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 23 hd2i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον 1 did not answer her a word Matthew is using the phrase **he did not answer her a word** to mean that he did not respond to her cries for help. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 24 t9ga figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀπεστάλην 1 I was not sent If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not send me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1118,14 +1118,14 @@ MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά 1 Seven, and a few small fish The discipl MAT 15 36 a9s4 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 was giving them Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples were giving them to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men Alternate translation: “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Yeast\n\nJesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nJesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Background information\n\nMatthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). +MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). MAT 16 1 t7p5 πειράζοντες 1 testing him Here, **testing** is used in a negative sense. Alternate translation: “challenging him” or “wanting to trap him” MAT 16 4 jl3e figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 16 4 fhx6 figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God. See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 4 d9eq figs-activepassive σημεῖον…οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 2 a sign will not be given to it Jesus would not give them **a sign** because, though he had already performed many miracles, they refused to believe him. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will not give it a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 16 4 dep2 εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ 1 except the sign of Jonah See how you translated this in [12:39](../12/39.md). Alternate translation: “except the same sign God gave to Jonah the prophet” MAT 16 5 ii6j writing-newevent 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **and** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 16 5 si9k figs-ellipsis τὸ πέραν 1 the other side Matthew is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 16 5 si9k figs-ellipsis τὸ πέραν 1 the other side Matthew is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 16 6 hfz2 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων 1 the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees Here, **yeast** is a metaphor that refers to evil ideas and wrong teaching. Translate it as **yeast** here and do not explain its meaning in your translation. This meaning will be made clear in [16:12](../16/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 8 mg8s ὀλιγόπιστοι 1 You of little faith 2See how you translated this in [6:30](../06/30.md). MAT 16 8 zz4i figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ὀλιγόπιστοι, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? 1 why do you reason among yourselves that it is because you do not have bread? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you think it was because you forgot to bring bread that I talked about the yeast of the Pharisees and Sadducees.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1141,61 +1141,61 @@ MAT 16 13 e1jh figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the MAT 16 16 n5wi guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the Son of the living God ddddddd**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 16 16 r1h7 figs-explicit τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 of the living God Here, Peter uses the phrase **living God** to speaking about God as if he is alive. This is to contrast God as the only true God with the other gods who are not real. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the only true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 16 17 yh0s grammar-connect-logic-result μακάριος εἶ, Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ, ὅτι σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since flesh and blood did not reveal this to you, but my Father who is in heaven, you are blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -MAT 16 17 le6a translate-names Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ 1 Simon Bar Jonah The word **Bar** here is another way of saying "son of". If it would be helpful in your language, could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “son of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 16 17 le6a translate-names Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ 1 Simon Bar Jonah The word **Bar** here is another way of saying “son of”. If it would be helpful in your language, could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “son of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 16 17 g8s5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MAT 16 17 dfw5 figs-synecdoche σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 flesh and blood did not reveal this Jesus is using **flesh and blood** to represent a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 16 17 wix3 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 did not reveal this The pronoun **this** refers to Peter's pronouncement in the previous phrase about Jesus being the Christ, the Son of the living God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “did not reveal to you that I am the Christ, the Son of the living God” or “did not give you the knowledge to say this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 16 17 wix3 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν 1 did not reveal this The pronoun **this** refers to Peter’s pronouncement in the previous phrase about Jesus being the Christ, the Son of the living God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “did not reveal to you that I am the Christ, the Son of the living God” or “did not give you the knowledge to say this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 16 17 v5lw figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 but my Father who is in the heavens Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but my Father in the heavens revealed it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 16 17 gi3l guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 16 18 z897 translate-names ὅτι σὺ εἶ Πέτρος, καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 And I also say to you Here, Jesus uses the imagery of **Peter** as a **rock**. The name **Peter** means **rock**. It might be helpful to state this explicitly in your language to make this imagery and wordplay clear to your readers. See how this is demonstrated in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 16 18 x43d figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 upon this rock I will build my church Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. The phrase **this rock** could represent: (1) Peter himself. Alternate translation: “upon this rock, which is you” or (2) the truth that Peter had just said in [16:16](../16/16.md). Alternate translation: “upon what you have said, which is like a foundation of rock” If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 18 vu9u figs-metonymy πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 the gates of Hades will not prevail against it Jesus is using the term **Hades** to mean death. He is using the term **gate** to mean the power which death has over people. Once a gate is shut, people can no longer leave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the imprisoning power of death will not overpower it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 16 19 ysk8 figs-you δώσω σοι 1 I will give to you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 16 19 pp5d figs-metaphor τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν καὶ 1 the keys of the kingdom of the heavens Here, Jesus is using the term **keys** to refer to someone having authority in God's kingdom. There is some debate about how much authority Peter is given here. (1) Some interpret the second half of the verse describing the authority that Peter is given. Alternate translation: “the keys of the kingdom, so that” (2) Some say that Peter is given authority to decide who can and can not live with God forever. Alternate translation: “authority to decide who can come to live with me forever, and”. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 16 19 pp5d figs-metaphor τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν καὶ 1 the keys of the kingdom of the heavens Here, Jesus is using the term **keys** to refer to someone having authority in God’s kingdom. There is some debate about how much authority Peter is given here. (1) Some interpret the second half of the verse describing the authority that Peter is given. Alternate translation: “the keys of the kingdom, so that” (2) Some say that Peter is given authority to decide who can and can not live with God forever. Alternate translation: “authority to decide who can come to live with me forever, and”. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 19 k09j translate-unknown τὰς κλεῖδας 1 Here, **keys** are things used to open a door or gate so that people are able to enter or exit a place. They can also be used to make it so that a door cannot be opened and the people inside cannot get out. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 16 19 kc3k figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). +MAT 16 19 kc3k figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). MAT 16 19 ef9c figs-metaphor ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται δεδεμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς; καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται λελυμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Here, **bound** is a metaphor meaning to forbid something, and **loosed** is a metaphor meaning to allow something. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whatever you forbid to happen on the earth, it will be forbidden in heaven. And whatever you allow on the earth, it will be allowed in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 19 dy4p figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς…ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 2 whatever you may have bound on the earth will be bound in the heavens, and whatever you may have loosed on the earth will be loosed in the heavens Jesus is using the phrase **in the heavens** to mean God himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by God who is in the heavens … by God who is in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 16 21 yile grammar-connect-time-sequential εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπελθεῖν, καὶ πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καὶ ἀρχιερέων, καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 Here, Jesus predicts that **to go to Jerusalem**, **to suffer much from the elders and chief priests and scribes**, **to be killed**, **to be raised on the third day** will happen one after another. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem. Then, to suffer much from the elders and the chief priests and the scribes. Then to be killed and afterwards to be raised on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) MAT 16 21 es1l figs-idiom ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day Here, **to be raised** is an idiom that means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God will bring back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 21 r5hj figs-activepassive γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι 1 scribes, and to be killed, and to be raised on the third day If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will raise me on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 16 21 jjx5 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MAT 16 22 guz8 figs-idiom ἵλεώς σοι 1 Merciful to you **Merciful to you** is an idiom that means "May God be merciful to you". If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “May God be merciful to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 22 guz8 figs-idiom ἵλεώς σοι 1 Merciful to you **Merciful to you** is an idiom that means “May God be merciful to you”. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “May God be merciful to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 23 f28i figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ! σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ 1 Get behind me, Satan! You are a stumbling block to me Here, Jesus calls Peter **Satan**. This is because he is behaving as Satan behaved by trying to get Jesus not to obey God. He also calls him a **stumbling block**, which is a rock which someone might trip over. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are acting like Satan! Get out of my sight! You are like a stumbling block to me, trying to get me to disobey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 24 t0zn figs-genericnoun εἴ τις θέλει 1 The word **anyone** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MAT 16 24 ck1a figs-idiom ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν 1 to come after me Here, **to come after me** is an idiom that means to be Jesus' disciple. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 16 24 ck1a figs-idiom ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν 1 to come after me Here, **to come after me** is an idiom that means to be Jesus’ disciple. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 24 pg9h figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 let him deny himself The **cross** here represents suffering and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he must be willing to suffer and die for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 25 tp9k figs-genericnoun ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ 1 By using the word **whoever**, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 16 25 tp9k figs-genericnoun ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ 1 By using the word **whoever**, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 16 25 y9kc figs-euphemism ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 will lose it Here, **lose** it is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will forfeit his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 16 25 xz98 figs-metaphor εὑρήσει αὐτήν 1 will find it Here, **find it** means to obtain life with God forever. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will live with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 16 26 eqe8 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ὠφεληθήσεται ἄνθρωπος, ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ζημιωθῇ? 1 For what will it profit a man if he would have gained the whole world but would have forfeited his life? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 16 26 g0xo figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Jesus is using the phrase a man here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 16 26 q7x1 figs-hyperbole ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ 1 if he would have gained the whole world The phrase the whole world is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches and fame. Alternate translation: “if he gains everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MAT 16 26 eck5 figs-rquestion ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 Or what will a man give in exchange for his life? Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n +MAT 16 26 eck5 figs-rquestion ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 Or what will a man give in exchange for his life? Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 16 27 iyu1 figs-123person μέλλει…ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…αὐτοῦ…ἀποδώσει 1 the Son of Man is about … his … he will repay Here Jesus refers to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of man, am about … my … I will repay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 16 27 vk5y guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 of his Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and the Son of Man, Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 16 28 k2d1 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 to you Here, **you** is plural and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 may certainly not have tasted death The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n +MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 may certainly not have tasted death The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 28 p1d4 figs-abstractnouns θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun death by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 16 28 b2pb figs-metonymy ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 until they may see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom Jesus is using the term **coming in his kingdom** to mean when Jesus will come to rule over his people forever. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “until they see the Son of Man coming to rule over his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 16 28 etk2 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 16 28 etk2 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus’ body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]]) MAT 17 1 u6dw grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ μεθ’ ἡμέρας ἓξ 1 General Information: The phrase translated **And six days later** indicates that this event happened after the previous event that the story described. Alternate translation: “And six days after these things happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) MAT 17 2 kq4l figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη 1 he was transfigured If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he transfigured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 17 2 uxg3 figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 before them Here, **before them** is an idiom that means in front of them. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 17 2 i1mp figs-simile ἔλαμψεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος, τὰ δὲ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς 1 his face shone like the sun, and his garments became brilliant as the light The phrases **his face shone like the sun** and **his garments became brilliant as the light** are similes describing Jesus' appearance when it changed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “his face shone very brightly, and his garments were very bright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 17 2 i1mp figs-simile ἔλαμψεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος, τὰ δὲ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς 1 his face shone like the sun, and his garments became brilliant as the light The phrases **his face shone like the sun** and **his garments became brilliant as the light** are similes describing Jesus’ appearance when it changed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “his face shone very brightly, and his garments were very bright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 17 4 r41c figs-exclusive Κύριε, καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι 1 answering, Peter said Here, the pronoun us could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case us would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) MAT 17 4 d231 translate-unknown σκηνάς 1 it is good for us to be here Here, **shelters** are temporary places where people live. These are not full houses. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 17 5 an8j ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτούς 1 overshadowed them Here, **overshadowed** could mean: (1) That the light from the cloud made them invisible to people not on the mountain. Alternate translation: “shined brightly around them” (2) The cloud descended so that they themselves were inside the cloud. Alternate translation: “enveloped them” +MAT 17 5 an8j ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτούς 1 overshadowed them Here, **overshadowed** could mean: (1) That the light from the cloud made them invisible to people not on the mountain. Alternate translation: “shined brightly around them” (2) The cloud descended so that they themselves were inside the cloud. Alternate translation: “enveloped them” MAT 17 5 kc8t figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης 1 there was a voice from the cloud Matthew is using the term **voice** to mean God himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the cloud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 17 6 wd76 καὶ ἀκούσαντες, οἱ μαθηταὶ 1 And having heard that, the disciples Alternate translation: “And when the disciples heard God speak, they” MAT 17 6 a87e figs-idiom ἔπεσαν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτῶν 1 fell on their face Here, **fell on their face** is an idiom that means that the 3 disciples fell down with their faces to the ground. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fell down with their faces to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 17 7 iw4l figs-quotations ἁψάμενος αὐτῶν εἶπεν, ἐγέρθητε καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσθε\n 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “and having touched them, told them to get up and to not be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])\n +MAT 17 7 iw4l figs-quotations ἁψάμενος αὐτῶν εἶπεν, ἐγέρθητε καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσθε 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “and having touched them, told them to get up and to not be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 17 8 i9gt grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδένα εἶδον εἰ μὴ αὐτὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον 1 If it would in appear your language that Matthew was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only saw Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 17 9 y9rq figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first person form as demonstrated in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 17 12 a4h7 writing-pronouns ἐποίησαν…αὐτῶν 1 they did … them The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to the religious leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]] -MAT 17 12 i74i figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated **Son of Man** in [17:9](../17/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 17 13 cskj writing-background τότε συνῆκαν οἱ μαθηταὶ ὅτι περὶ Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 Matthew provides this background information to show how the disciples reacted to what Jesus has just said. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 17 12 i74i figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated **Son of Man** in [17:9](../17/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 17 13 cskj writing-background τότε συνῆκαν οἱ μαθηταὶ ὅτι περὶ Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 Matthew provides this background information to show how the disciples reacted to what Jesus has just said. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 17 15 ufb4 figs-explicit ἐλέησόν μου τὸν υἱόν 1 have mercy on my son See how you translated **have mercy** in [15:22](../15/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 17 15 hs55 translate-unknown σεληνιάζεται 1 he is epileptic Here, **epileptic** is a condition where someones body moves without their ability to control it. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 17 17 lyu5 figs-nominaladj ἄπιστος 1 O unbelieving and perverse generation, how long Jesus is using the adjective **unbelieving** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “unbelieving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) From a43caa7fa7b73c805e113846ccbc4a5a0c353f01 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 14:44:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 165/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d3d4190992..fb6aa63fe3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1463,12 +1463,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 6 ahln figs-imperative3p καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “her hair also needs to be cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 11 6 i9ou figs-activepassive καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair**, which is **cut off**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “let a person cut her hair off also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 6 s4r5 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 2 If it is disgraceful for a woman Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -1CO 11 6 lqlu figs-doublet τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here, **to have her hair cut off** refers to how **hair** is trimmed or cut much shorter. The phrase **to be shaved** refers to how **hair** can be cut so short that it is no longer visible. If your language has separate words for these two actions, you could use them here. If your language has only one word for cutting **hair** short, you could use just one word here. Alternate translation: “to have her hair cut short” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1CO 11 6 lqlu figs-doublet τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here, **to have {her} hair cut off** refers to how **hair** is trimmed or cut much shorter. The phrase **to be shaved** refers to how **hair** can be cut so short that it is no longer visible. If your language has separate words for these two actions, you could use them here. If your language has only one word for cutting **hair** short, you could use just one word here. Alternate translation: “to have her hair cut short” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 11 6 pflq figs-activepassive τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair** that is **cut off** or **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting” or “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “to have someone cut her hair off or to shave her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 6 od1s figs-imperative3p κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “she needs to cover her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 11 7 endt grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 should not have his head covered Here, **For** introduces further reasons why what Paul has argued about “covering heads” is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **For** untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces further reasons. Alternate translation: “Here are more reasons why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 7 cycr οὐκ ὀφείλει 1 should not have his head covered This could indicate that the **man**: (1) should not **cover his head**. Alternate translation: “must not” (2) is not required to **cover his head**, but he can do what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “is under no obligation” -1CO 11 7 aa4r figs-explicit κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν 1 should not have his head covered Here, **to cover his head** refers to using a piece of clothing that would be worn on the top and back of the head. The phrase does not refer to hair or to some piece of clothing that obscures the face. Paul does not clarify, however, what kind of clothing this might be. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to clothing. Alternate translation: “have a covering on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 11 7 aa4r figs-explicit κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν 1 should not have his head covered Here, **to cover {his} head** refers to using a piece of clothing that would be worn on the top and back of the head. The phrase does not refer to hair or to some piece of clothing that obscures the face. Paul does not clarify, however, what kind of clothing this might be. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to clothing. Alternate translation: “have a covering on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 7 hvot grammar-connect-logic-result ὑπάρχων 1 should not have his head covered Here, **being** introduces a clause that gives a reason or basis for what he has already said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 11 7 rc0x figs-abstractnouns εἰκὼν καὶ δόξα Θεοῦ 1 should not have his head covered If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **image** and **glory**, you can express the idea by using verbs such as “reflect” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “one who reflects and glorifies God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 11 7 mdob figs-explicit ἡ γυνὴ…δόξα ἀνδρός ἐστιν 1 should not have his head covered Here, **woman** and **man** could refer to: (1) a **woman** and **man** who are married to each other. Alternate translation: “the wife is the glory of the husband” (2) any people who are male and female. Alternate translation: “the female person is the glory of the male person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 3490119352662e69e38a5efc7c984c4ce389f8f3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 15:38:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 166/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index fb6aa63fe3..17878beb81 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1488,7 +1488,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 10 o1mz figs-possession τῆς κεφαλῆς 1 have a symbol of authority on her head Here, **the** with **head** implies that **the head** belongs to the **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this implication with a word that directly states possession. Alternate translation: “her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 11 10 vwq4 figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους 1 have a symbol of authority on her head Here, **because of the angels** clearly means that Paul considers **the angels** to be a reason for why **the woman ought to have authority on the head**, whichever meaning of that clause you decide on. However, what Paul means by the phrase **because of the angels** is not clear. Therefore, you also should leave your translation open so that your readers could draw any of the following conclusions. The phrase **because of the angels** could refer to: (1) how the angels oversee the order of the world and especially worship. The **woman** having **authority on the head** would satisfy what the angels require for worship practices. Alternate translation: “because of what the angels require” (2) how the angels can be sexually attracted to earthly women, so **the woman ought to have authority on the head** to keep the angels from acting or being tempted to act sexually with women. Alternate translation: “because otherwise the angels would be tempted” (3) how the angels are present in the worship of the community, and **the woman** must **have authority on the head** as a sign of respect to them. Alternate translation: “because angels are present when you worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 11 pir4 grammar-connect-logic-contrast πλὴν 1 Nevertheless, in the Lord Here, **Nevertheless** introduces a contrast or qualification of what Paul has been saying, especially with reference to [11:8–9](../11/08.md). Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a contrast or qualification of previous arguments. Alternate translation: “Even so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1CO 11 11 h9t4 figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in the Lord Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the situation in which men and women are **not independent** from each other. Alternate translation: “in their union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 11 11 h9t4 figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in the Lord Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in {the} Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the situation in which men and women are **not independent** from each other. Alternate translation: “in their union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 11 hqy4 figs-litotes οὔτε…χωρὶς…οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς 1 the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman Here Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **independent from**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you can instead use one positive word. Alternate translation: “is dependent on … and man is dependent on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 11 11 velr figs-genericnoun γυνὴ…ἀνδρὸς…ἀνὴρ…γυναικὸς 1 the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “every woman … men … every man … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 11 12 aiid figs-genericnoun ἡ γυνὴ…τοῦ ἀνδρός…ὁ ἀνὴρ…τῆς γυναικός 1 all things come from God Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “every woman … men … every man … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) From c8c9938dfc8b4e84e60298f4cdcb01a280852c53 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 15:40:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 167/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 17878beb81..5e2f61dc98 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1532,7 +1532,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 19 s9sy figs-irony δεῖ…καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι, ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν 1 For there must also be factions among you This sentence could be: (1) a simple statement about how God uses **factions** to reveal **those who are approved**. Alternate translation: “God wishes to make evident among you those who are approved, and factions among you are a necessary part of this” (2) an ironic statement that identifies **factions** as the **necessary** result of people who want to show themselves off as **those who are approved**. Use a standard form in your language to indicate irony, especially with the phrase **those who are approved**, which would be spoken from the Corinthians’ perspective. Alternate translation: “some people consider it necessary indeed for there to be factions among you, so that they, who consider themselves to be ‘those who are approved,’ may display themselves publicly among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) 1CO 11 19 kcr7 translate-unknown αἱρέσεις 1 factions Here, **factions** has similar meaning to “divisions” in [11:18](../11/18.md). The word **factions** focuses more on the content of the differing beliefs and practices than “divisions” does; “divisions” emphasizes the differences themselves. If your language can clearly express these distinctions, you could use words that express these two ideas. If your language does not clearly express these distinctions, you can translate **factions** with the same word you used for “divisions.” Alternate translation: “divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 19 j7db figs-activepassive δόκιμοι 1 who are approved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **approved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “approving.” If you must state who did the action, you must choose a subject that fits with whether you understand this sentence as ironic or not. The subject could be: (1) God, if the sentence is not ironic. Alternate translation: “whom God approves” (2) the people themselves, if the sentence is ironic. Alternate translation: “who approve of themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 11 19 gdxa figs-explicit καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται 1 who are approved Here Paul does not state how or why **those who are approved** will **become evident**. Depending on whether the sentence is ironic or not, **may become evident** could imply that: (1) the **factions** are God’s way of testing and revealing who is **approved**, since those who continue to genuinely believe are **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is not ironic. Alternate translation: “God may reveal also those who are approved” (2) the **factions** are the means by which some people show off what they think about themselves as **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is ironic. Alternate translation: “also those who are approved may show themselves off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 11 19 gdxa figs-explicit καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται 1 who are approved Here Paul does not state how or why **the ones approved** will **become evident**. Depending on whether the sentence is ironic or not, **may become evident** could imply that: (1) the **factions** are God’s way of testing and revealing who is **approved**, since those who continue to genuinely believe are **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is not ironic. Alternate translation: “God may reveal also those who are approved” (2) the **factions** are the means by which some people show off what they think about themselves as **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is ironic. Alternate translation: “also those who are approved may show themselves off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 20 x9h5 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 come together Here, **So then** introduces an inference or result from the “divisions” and “factions” mentioned in [11:18–19](../11/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **So then** to more clearly state what it draws an inference from. Alternate translation: “So then, since you have factions,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 11 20 xe65 figs-doublet συνερχομένων…ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 come together Here Paul uses both **come together** and **in one place** to emphasize the physical unity of the Corinthians when they meet. He does this in order to contrast this physical unity with the disunity that their eating practices show. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you can use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “when you are all together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 11 20 dse7 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat Here Paul does not explicitly state that the Corinthians **come together** in order to **eat the Lord’s Supper**. However, he and the Corinthians would have understood this when he speaks about “coming together.” Paul’s point is that they think they are eating **the Lord’s Supper**, but what they are doing does not actually count as **the Lord’s Supper**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the idea behind **it is not to eat the Lord’s Supper** is that the Corinthians thought that they were eating **the Lord’s Supper**, but Paul thinks that they are not. Alternate translation: “it is not the Lord’s Supper that you are eating” or “you think that you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From d14592f708bb0295c316c175cf01c64a91942e0f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 15:46:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 168/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 5e2f61dc98..2ac42c365a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1535,8 +1535,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 19 gdxa figs-explicit καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται 1 who are approved Here Paul does not state how or why **the ones approved** will **become evident**. Depending on whether the sentence is ironic or not, **may become evident** could imply that: (1) the **factions** are God’s way of testing and revealing who is **approved**, since those who continue to genuinely believe are **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is not ironic. Alternate translation: “God may reveal also those who are approved” (2) the **factions** are the means by which some people show off what they think about themselves as **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is ironic. Alternate translation: “also those who are approved may show themselves off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 20 x9h5 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 come together Here, **So then** introduces an inference or result from the “divisions” and “factions” mentioned in [11:18–19](../11/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **So then** to more clearly state what it draws an inference from. Alternate translation: “So then, since you have factions,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 11 20 xe65 figs-doublet συνερχομένων…ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 come together Here Paul uses both **come together** and **in one place** to emphasize the physical unity of the Corinthians when they meet. He does this in order to contrast this physical unity with the disunity that their eating practices show. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you can use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “when you are all together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1CO 11 20 dse7 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat Here Paul does not explicitly state that the Corinthians **come together** in order to **eat the Lord’s Supper**. However, he and the Corinthians would have understood this when he speaks about “coming together.” Paul’s point is that they think they are eating **the Lord’s Supper**, but what they are doing does not actually count as **the Lord’s Supper**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the idea behind **it is not to eat the Lord’s Supper** is that the Corinthians thought that they were eating **the Lord’s Supper**, but Paul thinks that they are not. Alternate translation: “it is not the Lord’s Supper that you are eating” or “you think that you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 11 21 gvln translate-unknown τὸ ἴδιον δεῖπνον προλαμβάνει 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat This could refer to: (1) how some of the Corinthians were receiving food “before” others were. This could mean that the people who received food first ate more than their fair share, using up all the food before others were served. Or it could mean that each of the Corinthians ate food that was prepared ahead of time specifically for each of them and in proportion to their social status. Alternate translation: “eats his own supper before others receive enough food” or “receives the food that was prepared for him ahead of time” (2) how some of the Corinthians were “devouring” their own food without sharing with others. Alternate translation: “devours his own supper” or “eats his own supper without sharing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 11 20 dse7 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat Here Paul does not explicitly state that the Corinthians **come together** in order **to eat {the} Lord’s Supper**. However, he and the Corinthians would have understood this when he speaks about “coming together.” Paul’s point is that they think they are eating **{the} Lord’s Supper**, but what they are doing does not actually count as **{the} Lord’s Supper**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the idea behind **it is not to eat {the} Lord’s Supper** is that the Corinthians thought that they were eating **{the} Lord’s Supper**, but Paul thinks that they are not. Alternate translation: “it is not the Lord’s Supper that you are eating” or “you think that you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 11 21 gvln translate-unknown τὸ ἴδιον δεῖπνον προλαμβάνει 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat This could refer to: (1) how some of the Corinthians were receiving food before others were. This could mean that the people who received food first ate more than their fair share, using up all the food before others were served. Or it could mean that each of the Corinthians ate food that was prepared ahead of time specifically for each of them and in proportion to their social status. Alternate translation: “eats his own supper before others receive enough food” or “receives the food that was prepared for him ahead of time” (2) how some of the Corinthians were “devouring” their own food without sharing with others. Alternate translation: “devours his own supper” or “eats his own supper without sharing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 21 ljb3 figs-gendernotations ἴδιον 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat Although **his** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **his** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 11 21 g0su figs-idiom ὃς μὲν πεινᾷ, ὃς δὲ μεθύει 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat Here Paul repeats **one is** to introduce two of the results that come from **each one** taking **his own supper first**. He does not mean that only **one** person is **hungry** or **drunk**, and he does not mean that these are the only two options. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that naturally indicates possible, alternate results. Alternate translation: “some are indeed hungry, but others are drunk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 21 fbmb figs-explicit ὃς μὲν πεινᾷ, ὃς δὲ μεθύει 1 it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat Here Paul contrasts being **hungry** with being **drunk**. These two words are not natural opposites, but Paul uses them to imply their opposites in his contrast. He does this to avoid having a complicated contrast with four words instead of two. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the contrast between being **hungry** and **drunk** by using all four words. Alternate translation: “one is indeed hungry and thirsty, but one is stuffed and drunk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1546,7 +1546,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 22 zl1h grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ…καταφρονεῖτε 1 to eat and to drink in The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he reminded them that they do have **houses in which to eat and to drink**. With **Or**, then, Paul introduces the incorrect alternative: they could **despise the church of God and humiliate those who have nothing**. He introduces this incorrect alternate to show that the implication of his first question is true: they should be “eating” and “drinking” at home. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather, do you despise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 22 am33 figs-rquestion ἢ τῆς ἐκκλησίας τοῦ Θεοῦ καταφρονεῖτε, καὶ καταισχύνετε τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “we do not want to do these things.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong statement. Alternate translation: “However, you are the ones who despise the church of God and humiliate those who have nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 11 22 fshq grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ καταισχύνετε 1 Here, **and** introduces the specific way in which some of the Corinthians **despise the church of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the function of **and** here with a word that more clearly indicates a specific example or a means. Alternate translation: “by humiliating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 11 22 d2cm figs-hyperbole τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας 1 despise Here, **those who have nothing** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that these people do not **have** very much. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize the contrast between those who **have houses** and those who **have nothing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have very little” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1CO 11 22 d2cm figs-hyperbole τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας 1 despise Here, **the ones having nothing** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that these people do not **have** very much. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize the contrast between those who **have houses** and those **having nothing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have very little” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 11 22 nz88 figs-rquestion τί εἴπω ὑμῖν? 1 What should I say to you? Should I praise you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “we know that you are going to rebuke us.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong statement about what Paul is going to say. Alternate translation: “You know what I am going to say to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 11 22 uv6z figs-rquestion ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? 1 What should I say to you? Should I praise you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I will definitely not praise you for this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 11 22 qc27 figs-doublet ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? οὐκ ἐπαινῶ! 1 What should I say to you? Should I praise you? Here Paul indicates that he will **not praise** the Corinthians by using both a rhetorical question and a negative statement. He uses both sentences in order to strongly emphasize how displeased he is. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers would not understand why Paul repeats the same idea, you could combine these two sentences into one strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “I will never praise you for this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 23 iy93 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο 1 For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord Here Paul refers to the story about how Jesus was arrested. One of Jesus’ closest disciples, Judas Iscariot, made a deal with the religious leaders to “betray” Jesus to them (see [Matthew 26:14–16](../mat/26/14.md); [Mark 14:10–11](../mrk/14/10.md); [Luke 22:3–6](../luk/22/03.md)). After Jesus eats with his disciples and spends time praying, Judas leads the religious leaders to Jesus, and they arrest him (see [Matthew 26:47–50](../mat/26/47.md); [Mark 14:43–46](../mrk/14/43.md); [Luke 22:47–48](../luk/22/47.md); [John 18:2–12](../jhn/18/02.md)). Paul is not primarily interested in this part of the story, but he mentions it to explain when Jesus **took bread**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **on the night in which he was betrayed** refers to with a footnote to explain the context or include some short, extra information. Alternate translation: “on the night in which he was handed over to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 23 c197 figs-activepassive παρεδίδετο 1 on the night when he was betrayed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus**, who was **betrayed**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “betraying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “Judas Iscariot” did it. Alternate translation: “Judas betrayed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 23 gkv2 figs-extrainfo ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς…ἔλαβεν ἄρτον 1 on the night when he was betrayed Beginning here and continuing in [11:24–25](../11/24.md), Paul tells the story of what is often called “The Last Supper.” This is Jesus’ last meal with his closest disciples before his death, and Paul narrates some things that he said and did during this last meal. Since Paul himself states the details, you should not need to state anything more explicitly than he does. The story of “The Last Supper” can also be found in [Matthew 26:20–29](../mat/26/20.md); [Mark 14:17–25](../mrk/14/17.md); [Luke 22:14–23](../luk/22/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -1CO 11 24 e19d translate-unknown ἔκλασεν 1 he broke it Here, “breaking bread” refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he broke it** with a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat bread. Alternate translation: “he split it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 11 24 e19d translate-unknown ἔκλασεν 1 he broke it Here, “breaking bread” refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he broke {it}** with a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat bread. Alternate translation: “he split it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 24 wmfb figs-quotations εἶπεν, τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα, τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν; τοῦτο ποιεῖτε εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν. 1 he broke it If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “said that this was his body, which is for you, and that you should do this in remembrance of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 11 24 f6hn figs-metaphor τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα 1 This is my body Here Paul refers to how Jesus identified the “bread” as his **body**. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The “bread” could somehow become Jesus’ **body**, or Jesus’ **body** could be present in some way when people eat the “bread,” or the “bread” could represent or memorialize Jesus’ **body**. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This functions as my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 24 fqyb figs-explicit τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 This is my body Here, **for you** refers to how Jesus offered his **body** by dying **for you**, that is, those who believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **for you** implies more explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is sacrificed for you” or “which I will sacrifice for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From b06379a111d2c5eadaa50d02b121b753d217d3df Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 15:50:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 169/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2ac42c365a..6f86bdfb18 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1568,7 +1568,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 25 sw0n figs-metaphor τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον ἡ καινὴ διαθήκη ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ αἵματι 1 the cup Here Paul refers to how Jesus identified the **cup** as **the new covenant in my blood**. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The wine in the **cup** could somehow become Jesus’ **blood**, or Jesus’ **blood** could be present in some way when people drink from the **cup**, or the wine in the **cup** could represent or memorialize Jesus’ **blood**. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This cup represents the new covenant in my blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 25 j2qc figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ αἵματι 1 the cup Here, **in my blood** is a spatial metaphor that could refer to: (1) how the **new covenant** has been inaugurated or initiated by Jesus’ **blood**. Alternate translation: “initiated by my blood” (2) how the **cup** can be identified with **the new covenant**. Alternate translation: “because of my blood” or “because it contains my blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 25 z54e writing-pronouns τοῦτο ποιεῖτε 1 Do this as often as you drink it Here, **this** could refer to: (1) doing what Jesus has done, including everything he did with **the cup**. Alternate translation: “Perform this ceremony” or “Do these things” (2) just drinking from the **cup**. Alternate translation: “Drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 11 25 dy4s writing-pronouns ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε 1 Do this as often as you drink it Here, **it** refers to **the cup** and thus also the drink inside **the cup**. This does not mean that believers are supposed to **Do this** every time they drink from any cup. Rather, whenever they **drink** from **the cup** in the context of the **remembrance** of Jesus, they should **Do this**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **as often as you drink it** toidentity more clearly what **it** means. Alternate translation: “as often as you drink from the cup in this ceremony” or “as often as you drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 11 25 dy4s writing-pronouns ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε 1 Do this as often as you drink it Here, **{it}** refers to **the cup** and thus also the drink inside **the cup**. This does not mean that believers are supposed to **Do this** every time they drink from any cup. Rather, whenever they **drink** from **the cup** in the context of the **remembrance** of Jesus, they should **Do this**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **as often as you drink it** toidentity more clearly what **it** means. Alternate translation: “as often as you drink from the cup in this ceremony” or “as often as you drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 11 25 lfb6 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν 1 the cup If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **remembrance**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “remember.” Alternate translation: “to remember me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 11 25 oic7 figs-metonymy ἐμὴν 1 the cup When Jesus here refers to **me**, he is referring more specifically to what he has done and will do for his followers, particularly how he is about to offer himself for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **me** and think that Jesus is just speaking about personal memory by clarifying that **me** refers to particular actions done by **me**. Alternate translation: “of what I am doing for you” or “of how I am going to die for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 26 zveq figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 until he comes Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “what is in this cup” or “this wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 27 z6en figs-explicit ἀναξίως 1 eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord Here, **in an unworthy manner** identifies behavior that is **unworthy** or “improper” for those who are participating in the Lord’s Supper. Paul has identified examples of this kind of behavior in [11:18–22](../11/18.md). This phrase does not refer to people who are **unworthy**. Rather it refers to behavior that is **unworthy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in an unworthy manner** with a phrase that identifies inappropriate or improper behavior in a specific context. Alternate translation: “while acting inappropriately” or “without respecting the Lord and fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 27 d51p figs-idiom ἔνοχος…τοῦ σώματος καὶ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord Here, **guilty of** could introduce: (1) what the person is **guilty of** doing. Here, that could be “profaning” or “dishonoring” the **body and the blood of the Lord**, or it could be participating in killing **the Lord**, which his **body** and **blood** signifies. Alternate translation: “guilty of dishonoring the body and the blood of the Lord” or “guilty of spilling the Lord’s blood and piercing his body” (2) whom the person has wronged. Here, that would be **the Lord** himself, particularly as he offered his **body** and **blood**. Alternate translation: “guilty of sinning against the Lord in his body and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 28 mwzr figs-imperative3p δοκιμαζέτω δὲ ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν, καὶ οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω. 1 examine In this verse, Paul uses three third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “But a man must examine himself, and in this way he should eat from the bread, and he should drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) -1CO 11 28 nhx7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν…ἐσθιέτω…πινέτω 1 examine Here, **man**, **himself**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these wordsby using word that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “a person … himself or herself … let him or her eat … let him or her drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 11 28 nhx7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν…ἐσθιέτω…πινέτω 1 examine Here, **a man**, **himself**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these wordsby using word that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “a person … himself or herself … let him or her eat … let him or her drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 11 28 ih78 figs-infostructure οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω 1 examine Here, **in this way** introduces both **let him eat** and **let him drink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine **let him drink** and the earlier command, or you could repeat **in this way**. Alternate translation: “in this way let him eat from the bread and drink from the cup” or “in this way let him eat from the bread, and in this way let him drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 11 28 hzac figs-idiom ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω 1 examine Here, to **eat from** something means to **eat** some of that thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **eat from** with a word or phrase that refers to eating part of something. Alternate translation: “let him eat eat his portion of the bread” or “let him eat some of the loaf of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 29 gqd2 figs-metaphor μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα 1 without discerning the body Here, **body** could refer to: (1) the “church,” which is **the body** of Christ (for a similar use of **body**, see [12:27](../12/27.md)). The point would be that people are behaving during the Lord’s Supper in a way that does not respect fellow believers, who are **the body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “without discerning that fellow believers are the body” (2) the presence of **the body** of Christ in the Lord’s Supper itself. The point would be that believers are participating in the Lord’s Supper in a way that does not respect how Christ’s **body** is present in the bread and wine. Alternate translation: “without discerning the presence of the Lord’s body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From ac1e195e6fe4465f692aad8c790309c3dde14f83 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 15:54:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 170/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 6f86bdfb18..01bbe381f9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1592,15 +1592,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 31 jg7v grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ δὲ ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν 1 examine Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He has already stated in the last verse that the Corinthians are being **judged**, which means that **we** are indeed **judged**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “But were we to actually examine ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 11 31 j6ml figs-explicit ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν 1 examine Here Paul is speaking about **examining ourselves** in the context of the Lord’s Supper, as the similarity of this statement to [11:28](../11/28.md) shows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Paul is still speaking about **examining** in the context of the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “we were examining ourselves at the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 31 egl8 figs-activepassive οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα 1 we will not be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **judged** rather than focusing on the person doing the “judging.” Alternate translation: “God would not judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 11 32 ruq5 figs-activepassive κρινόμενοι…ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person **being judged** instead of focusing on **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord judging us” or “when the Lord judges us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 11 32 ruq5 figs-activepassive κρινόμενοι…ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person **being judged** instead of focusing on **{the} Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord judging us” or “when the Lord judges us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 32 s2ax grammar-connect-time-simultaneous κρινόμενοι…ὑπὸ Κυρίου, παιδευόμεθα 1 we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned Here, **being judged** and **we are disciplined** happen at the same time. The phrase **we are disciplined** gives the function or purpose of **being judged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how these two phrases relate by stating their relationship explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined” or “being judged by the Lord is how we are disciplined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1CO 11 32 c8qi figs-activepassive παιδευόμεθα, ἵνα μὴ…κατακριθῶμεν 1 we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **we** instead of focusing on the person doing the actions. However, if you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” or **the Lord** does them. Alternate translation: “he disciplines us so that he does not condemn us” or “he disciplines us so that God does not condemn us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 11 32 c8qi figs-activepassive παιδευόμεθα, ἵνα μὴ…κατακριθῶμεν 1 we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **we** instead of focusing on the person doing the actions. However, if you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” or **{the} Lord** does them. Alternate translation: “he disciplines us so that he does not condemn us” or “he disciplines us so that God does not condemn us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 32 gr2a figs-synecdoche τῷ κόσμῳ 1 we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned Here Paul uses **world** to refer primarily to the humans that are part of the **world**, those who do not believe in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word by translating **world** with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not believe in Christ, or you could use a phrase like “people of the world.” Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1CO 11 33 igek figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 come together to eat Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 11 33 maa7 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous συνερχόμενοι εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν 1 come together to eat Here, **coming together to eat** is the situation in which the the Corinthians are to **wait for one another**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the relationship between these statements by clarifying that **coming together to eat** is the context in which they should **wait for one another**. Alternate translation: “whenever you come together to eat” or “at the time you come together to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 1CO 11 33 bvhq figs-explicit συνερχόμενοι εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν 1 come together to eat Here Paul implies that they are eating the Lord’s Supper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implication explicitly. Alternate translation: “coming together to participate in the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 33 nky5 figs-explicit ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε 1 wait for one another Here you should follow the interpretation of “each one takes his own supper first” that you chose in [11:21](../11/21.md). To **wait for one another** could be a command to: (1) avoid receiving food before others. This could prohibit people from receiving food that was specially prepared for them ahead of time in proportion to their social status. Or, it could prohibit the people who were served first from eating more than their fair share and using up all the food before others were served. Alternate translation: “eat the same food as everyone else” or “wait to eat until everyone has been served” (2) show hospitality to other believers by not devouring one’s own food and instead sharing with others. Alternate translation: “show hospitality to one another” or “share with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 11 34 zowl grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ 1 let him eat at home Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might be **hungry**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for **if anyone is hungry**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 11 34 zowl grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ 1 let him eat at home Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might be **hungry**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for **If anyone is hungry**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 11 34 aw3r figs-explicit εἴ τις πεινᾷ 1 let him eat at home Here, being **hungry** indicates one of the reasons why the Corinthians are acting improperly during the Lord’s Supper. They could be **hungry** enough that they are not waiting for everyone to receive food, or they could be **hungry** for specific kinds of food that were prepared specially for them and not for others. Make sure your translation matches how you translated [11:21](../11/21.md) and [33](../11/33.md). Alternate translation: “If anyone is so hungry that they cannot wait” or “If anyone desires specially prepared food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 34 v2uh figs-imperative3p ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “he must eat at home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 11 34 jjqd figs-gendernotations ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 12dc5f91706e06cbd7324d42fa146f3e2e740f2d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 16:01:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 171/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 01bbe381f9..382447bc5e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1616,11 +1616,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 1 i3k7 figs-litotes οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 I do not want you to be uninformed Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has a meaning opposite to that of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to have knowledge” or “I want you to be very knowledgeable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 12 2 hbt8 figs-metaphor πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι 1 you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by them Here, **led astray** and **led** refer to how one person can “lead” another person to a specific place. Paul uses this figure of speech here because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they used to worship idols as if somebody were “leading” them **astray** or away from the correct path. This figure of speech emphasizes that the Corinthians were going the wrong way and that someone or something was directing them to go that way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you wrongly followed mute idols, in whatever ways you followed them” or “you were urged to worship mute idols, in whatever ways you were urged to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 12 2 xnw1 figs-activepassive πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to avoid identifying who did the “leading astray,” because he wishes to keep it general. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “other pagans” or “something” did it. Alternate translation: “others led you astray to mute idols, in whatever ways they led you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 12 2 c6pj translate-unknown τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα 1 Here, **mute** means that the **idols** cannot speak to those who worship them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mute** with a word or phrase to describe the **idols** as unable to speak. Alternate translation: “idols who do not communicate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 12 2 c6pj translate-unknown τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα 1 Here, **mute** means that the **idols** cannot speak to those who worship them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mute** with a word or phrase to describe the **idols** as unable to speak. Alternate translation: “idols who cannot communicate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 12 2 cinz figs-extrainfo ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε 1 Here Paul intentionally uses vague language that does not define the **ways you were led**. In your translation, use a word or phrase that similarly does not tightly define what the **ways** are. Alternate translation: “however you were led” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 12 3 qd7u grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say Here, **Therefore** could draw a conclusion from: (1) [12:1–2](../12/01.md). The Corinthians “know” about how pagan worship worked (verse 2), but Paul wants to tell them more about how Christian worship works (verse 1). **Therefore**, he will make this **known** to them. Alternate translation: “Because you know less about Christian worship” (2) just [12:2](../12/02.md). The Corinthians were accustomed to how “inspired speech” or **speaking** by the power of a god worked when they “were pagans.” Now, Paul wants to tell them about how it works by the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “Now, however” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 12 3 cae5 translate-names Πνεύματι Θεοῦ…Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say Here, **Spirit of God** and **Holy Spirit** are two different names for the same person: the Holy Spirit. If your language uses only one name for the Holy Spirit, and if your readers would think that two different persons are identified in this verse, you could use the same name in both places in this verse. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit” or “the Spirit of God … the Spirit of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -1CO 12 3 zg4j figs-explicit ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν…ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say Here, **speaking by the Spirit of God** refers to words that the **Spirit of God** has enabled someone to say. This could be more formal, such as in prophecy or preaching, or it could be less formal, referring to everyday speech. Paul does not specify exactly what he has in mind since the Corinthians would have understood what he implied. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **speaking by the Spirit of God** meansin a way that more clearly refers to the **Spirit** empowering someone to “speak.” Alternate translation: “speaking as the Spirit of God leads them … as the Holy Spirit leads them” or “speaking in the power of the Spirit of God … in the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 12 3 zg4j figs-explicit ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν…ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say Here, **speaking by {the} Spirit of God** refers to words that the **Spirit of God** has enabled someone to say. This could be more formal, such as in prophecy or preaching, or it could be less formal, referring to everyday speech. Paul does not specify exactly what he has in mind since the Corinthians would have understood what he implied. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **speaking by {the} Spirit of God** means in a way that more clearly refers to the **Spirit** empowering someone to “speak.” Alternate translation: “speaking as the Spirit of God leads them … as the Holy Spirit leads them” or “speaking in the power of the Spirit of God … in the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 12 3 irbm figs-quotations λέγει, ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς…εἰπεῖν, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς 1 no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say If your language does not use this form to refer to what someone says, you can translate the statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “says that Jesus is accursed … to say that Jesus is Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 12 3 jak6 translate-unknown ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus is accursed This phrase identifies any words that someone might use to “curse” **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Jesus {is} accursed** with a form that indicates any kind of “curse” against someone. Alternate translation: “Cursed be Jesus” or “I curse Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 12 3 tzk9 grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδεὶς δύναται εἰπεῖν, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς, εἰ μὴ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 Jesus is accursed If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “and only by the Holy Spirit is one able to say, ‘Jesus is Lord’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) @@ -1632,7 +1632,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 6 ybaf figs-abstractnouns διαιρέσεις ἐνεργημάτων 1 who is working all things in everyone If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **varieties**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “various” or “different.” Alternate translation: “various workings” or “different workings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 6 mmdx translate-unknown ἐνεργημάτων 1 who is working all things in everyone Here, **workings** refers to “activities” or “actions,” that is, doing things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **workings** with a word or phrase that refers generally to “doing things.” Alternate translation: “of activities” or “of ways to do things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 12 6 r3vr figs-ellipsis ὁ αὐτὸς Θεός 1 who is working all things in everyone Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul implies that it is **the same God** who empowers the **varieties of workings**. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires these words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “it is the same God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 12 6 eth3 figs-explicit τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 who is working all things in everyone Here, **all things in everyone** could refer: (1) specifically to **all** gifts, ministries, and workings that God **works** in **everyone** who believes. Alternate translation: “each of these things in each person” (2) generally to how God **works all {things}** in “everything and everyone.” Alternate translation: “everything in everyone” or “all things in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 12 6 eth3 figs-explicit τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 who is working all things in everyone Here, **all things in everyone** could refer: (1) specifically to **all** gifts, ministries, and workings that God is **working** in **everyone** who believes. Alternate translation: “each of these things in each person” (2) generally to how God is **working all {things}** in “everything and everyone.” Alternate translation: “everything in everyone” or “all things in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 12 7 x7mv figs-activepassive ἑκάστῳ…δίδοται 1 to each one is given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to focus on the gifts rather than focusing on the one who gives them. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see [12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “to each one God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 12 7 zyqc figs-abstractnouns ἡ φανέρωσις τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 to each one is given If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **display**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “display” or “manifest.” Alternate translation: “how they display the Spirit” or “how they manifest the power of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 7 j2rf figs-possession ἡ φανέρωσις τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 to each one is given Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate how **the Spirit** is revealed by **the outward display**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **the outward display** is a revelation of **the Spirit**with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the ability to outwardly display the Spirit” or “a way to outwardly display the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From de00b41d3d5d44e551ac84aa37d688c3419d188d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 17:22:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 172/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 382447bc5e..73d6ba099d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 9 rh96 figs-ellipsis ἑτέρῳ πίστις…ἄλλῳ…χαρίσματα 1 to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly at the beginning of [12:8](../12/08.md) (“is given”). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to another is given faith … to another are given gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 12 9 s2lf figs-explicit πίστις 1 to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit Here, **faith** refers to a special belief in God. It does not refer to the **faith** that all believers have. This special **faith** could be the belief in God that is required to do miracles, or it could be the ability to help others believe more, or it could be something else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express more explicitly that **faith** by itself is a special kind of **faith**. Alternate translation: “special faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 12 9 foa8 figs-abstractnouns πίστις 1 to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “the ability to believe” or “how they believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 12 9 szhv τῷ ἑνὶ Πνεύματι 1 to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit Here, **that one Spirit** means basically the same thing as **the same Spirit**. Paul uses a different phrase because changing a repeated phrase was sometimes considered good style in his culture. If it would not be good style to state **the same Spirit** with different words in your language, and if your readers would be confused about why Paul changes his words, you could use **the same Spirit** here instead of **that one Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the same Spirit” +1CO 12 9 szhv τῷ ἑνὶ Πνεύματι 1 to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit Here, **the one Spirit** means basically the same thing as **the same Spirit**. Paul uses a different phrase because changing a repeated phrase was sometimes considered good style in his culture. If it would not be good style to state **the same Spirit** with different words in your language, and if your readers would be confused about why Paul changes his words, you could use **the same Spirit** here instead of **that one Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the same Spirit” 1CO 12 10 x572 writing-pronouns ἄλλῳ…ἄλλῳ…ἄλλῳ…ἑτέρῳ…ἄλλῳ 1 to another prophecy Throughout this verse, Paul specifically refers to **another**. When he does this, he is not speaking about just one person. Rather, he is using this form to give an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is giving examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to other people … to other people … to other people … to other people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 12 10 v7xy figs-ellipsis ἄλλῳ δὲ ἐνεργήματα δυνάμεων, ἄλλῳ προφητεία, ἄλλῳ διακρίσεις πνευμάτων, ἑτέρῳ γένη γλωσσῶν, ἄλλῳ δὲ ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν. 1 to another various kinds of tongues Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly at the beginning of [12:8](../12/08.md) (“is given”). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “and to another are given workings of power; to another is given prophecy; to another are given discernments of spirits; to another are given kinds of tongues; and to another is given the interpretation of tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 12 10 j8qk figs-abstractnouns ἐνεργήματα δυνάμεων 1 to another the interpretation of tongues If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **workings** or **power**, you can express the ideas by using a verb and adverbs. Alternate translation: “how they powerfully work” or “what they powerfully do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1656,7 +1656,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 10 tnym figs-abstractnouns προφητεία 1 to another the interpretation of tongues If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **prophecy**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “prophesy.” Alternate translation: “how they prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 10 dl8g figs-abstractnouns διακρίσεις πνευμάτων 1 to another the interpretation of tongues If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **discernments**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “discern.” Alternate translation: “how they discern spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 10 cl59 translate-unknown διακρίσεις 1 to another the interpretation of tongues Here, **discernments** could refer to: (1) the ability to make decisions about **spirits**. Alternate translation: “judging” (2) the ability to evaluate or identify **spirits**. Alternate translation: “evaluation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 12 10 mab7 translate-unknown πνευμάτων 1 to another the interpretation of tongues Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) speech or deeds empowered by **spirits** or the **Spirit**. In this case, those with this “gift” can “discern” whether speech and deeds come from God’s Spirit or not. Alternate translation: “concerning spiritual things” (2) spiritual beings themselves. In this case, those with this “gift” can “discern” whether **spirits** represent God or not. Alternate translation: “between spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 12 10 mab7 translate-unknown πνευμάτων 1 to another the interpretation of tongues Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) speech or deeds empowered by **spirits** or the “Spirit.” In this case, those with this “gift” can “discern” whether speech and deeds come from God’s Spirit or not. Alternate translation: “concerning spiritual things” (2) spiritual beings themselves. In this case, those with this “gift” can “discern” whether **spirits** represent God or not. Alternate translation: “between spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 12 10 vfox ἑτέρῳ 1 to another the interpretation of tongues Here Paul uses a different word for **another** than he does in the previous two verses or in the rest of this verse, except for the one case noted in the last verse. It is possible that Paul uses this different word to indicate that he is beginning a new section in the list. If you are breaking the list up into sections, you could begin a new section here. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “To another person” 1CO 12 10 skl8 figs-metonymy γλωσσῶν -1 various kinds of tongues Here, **tongues** refers to something that one does with one’s “tongue,” which is speaking a language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that **tongues** is a way of speaking about “languages” by using a comparable term or expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of languages … of languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 12 10 ork3 translate-unknown γένη γλωσσῶν 1 to another the interpretation of tongues Here, **kinds of tongues** identifies words spoken in languages that the believers could not normally understand. The **tongues** could refer to any or all of the following languages: (1) an otherwise unknown language that one person speaks to God. Alternate translation: “ecstatic speech” or “various private languages” (2) the language or languages spoken by angels. Alternate translation: “various angelic languages” (3) foreign languages that the specific believers in the church do not speak. Alternate translation: “various foreign languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From 5a879a3650e6a8001fb69fbc60f1bf592f05cb6d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 17:44:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 173/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 73d6ba099d..46634b4030 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 26 da97 figs-activepassive δοξάζεται μέλος 1 one member is honored If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to avoid stating who is doing the “honoring.” If you must state who does it, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “they honor a member” or “a member receives honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 12 26 vlcf figs-personification συνχαίρει πάντα τὰ μέλη 1 one member is honored Here Paul speaks as if **all the members** of a body could **rejoice** like people do. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as **members** of the body of Christ, and so **the members** of a human body are an example for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “all the members are like people who rejoice together” or “all the members together receive the honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 12 27 z2ct grammar-connect-words-phrases δέ 1 Now you are Here, **Now** introduces the application of what Paul has been saying about **the body** in [12:12–26](../12/12.md). You could use a word or phrase that would naturally introduce an application or explanation of what Paul has said in these verses. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “What I mean is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 12 27 i8i6 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς…ἐστε σῶμα Χριστοῦ, καὶ μέλη ἐκ μέρους 1 Now you are Here Paul speaks as if believers were **members**, or body parts, that together make up **the body of Christ**. By speaking in this way, he applies everything he has said in [12:12–26](../12/12.md) about “bodies” to the church, and he emphasizes the unity of the church. Paul used **body** language throughout this whole paragraph, and it is an important metaphor for 1 Corinthians and for Christian teaching. Because of this, you should preserve this metaphor or, if you must express the idea differently, use an analogy. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are the body of Christ and individually members of it” or “you function as the body of Christ, and individually you function as members of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 12 27 i8i6 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς…ἐστε σῶμα Χριστοῦ, καὶ μέλη ἐκ μέρους 1 Now you are Here Paul speaks as if believers were **members**, or body parts, that together make up **{the} body of Christ**. By speaking in this way, he applies everything he has said in [12:12–26](../12/12.md) about “bodies” to the church, and he emphasizes the unity of the church. Paul used **body** language throughout this whole paragraph, and it is an important metaphor for 1 Corinthians and for Christian teaching. Because of this, you should preserve this metaphor or, if you must express the idea differently, use an analogy. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are the body of Christ and individually members of it” or “you function as the body of Christ, and individually you function as members of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 12 27 gul0 translate-unknown μέλη ἐκ μέρους 1 Now you are Here, **individually** refers to how specific people are **members** of the **body of Christ**. In other words, discrete people can each be considered a “member”. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **individually** with a word or phrase that identifies people on their own, apart from the communities in which they participate. Alternate translation: “each one of you is a member of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 12 28 n04s writing-pronouns οὓς 1 first apostles Here, **some** refers to the specific people who have the gifts listed in the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **some** by clarifying that it refers to the people who have the gifts or titles he gives in the list. Alternate translation: “people to specifically function” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 12 28 ft5q translate-ordinal πρῶτον…δεύτερον…τρίτον 1 first apostles If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “one, … two, … three,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) From 3418117b61f51e59c84fdf516aee8f2122f5cce3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 17:54:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 174/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 46634b4030..645a85497d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1780,9 +1780,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 4 lhwa figs-doublet οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται 1 Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant Here, **boast** refers to how people try to draw attention to how great they are, often with words. On the other hand, **arrogant** refers to how highly people think about themselves. If your language has words that fit with these distinctions, you could use them here. If your language does not have words that fit with these distinctions, you can use one general word for “arrogance” or “pride.” Alternate translation: “is not proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 13 5 cp6x figs-personification οὐκ ἀσχημονεῖ, οὐ ζητεῖ τὰ ἑαυτῆς, οὐ παροξύνεται, οὐ λογίζεται τὸ κακόν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, just like in [13:4](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if “love” were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in that verse. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you are not rude; you are not seeking your own; you are not easily angered; you do not keep a count of wrongs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 13 5 l8l6 translate-unknown οὐκ ἀσχημονεῖ 1 It is not easily angered Here, **rude** refers to behavior that is shameful or disgraceful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **rude** with a word that refers to shameful or disgraceful behavior. Alternate translation: “It does not do disgraceful things” or “it is not inappropriate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 13 5 rj3v figs-idiom οὐ ζητεῖ τὰ ἑαυτῆς 1 It is not easily angered Here, **its own** refers to what is good for oneself. In other words, seeking **its own** would mean that “love” is trying to do what is best for itself, not for others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **it does not seek its own** with a comparable idiom or express the idea with a word such as “selfish.” Alternate translation: “it is not selfish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 13 5 rj3v figs-idiom οὐ ζητεῖ τὰ ἑαυτῆς 1 It is not easily angered Here, **{its} own** refers to what is good for oneself. In other words, seeking **{its} own** would mean that “love” is trying to do what is best for itself, not for others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **it does not seek {its} own** with a comparable idiom or express the idea with a word such as “selfish.” Alternate translation: “it is not selfish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 13 5 xt3v figs-activepassive οὐ παροξύνεται 1 It is not easily angered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the person who is **angered** rather than focusing on the one provoking them. If you must state who did the action, you can use a vague or generic subject. Alternate translation: “others do not anger them easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 13 5 eem0 figs-metaphor οὐ λογίζεται τὸ κακόν 1 It is not easily angered Here Paul speaks as if someone could keep **count**, as if they were writing them down and adding them up, of each and every bad thing that others have done. He speaks in this way to describe how people remember **wrongs** and do not forgive them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **keep a count of wrongs** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not hold onto wrongs” or “it is not resentful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 13 5 eem0 figs-metaphor οὐ λογίζεται τὸ κακόν 1 It is not easily angered Here Paul speaks as if someone could **keep a count**, as if they were writing them down and adding them up, of each and every bad thing that others have done. He speaks in this way to describe how people remember **wrongs** and do not forgive them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **keep a count of wrongs** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not hold onto wrongs” or “it is not resentful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 13 6 wl5y figs-personification οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ; 1 Connecting Statement: Here, just like in [13:4–5](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if “love” were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in those verses. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you do not rejoice in unrighteousness, but you rejoice in the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 13 6 tpz6 figs-doublenegatives οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ; 1 It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth Here Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **unrighteousness**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you can instead use one positive word. If you do so, you will have to make the second half a connection instead of a contrast. Alternate translation: “It rejoices in righteousness and in the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 13 6 koaf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unrighteousness**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “unrighteous” or an adverb such as “unrighteously.” Alternate translation: “unrighteous acts” or “in what people do unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1806,7 +1806,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 11 tn5r figs-123person ὅτε ἤμην νήπιος, ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος; ὅτε γέγονα ἀνήρ, κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul uses the first person **I** to describe himself as an example, but he implies that most people experience what he describes here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **I** with a form that provides a general example. Alternate translation: “When people were children, they spoke like children, they thought like children, they reasoned like children. When they became adults, they put away childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 13 11 dx63 figs-parallelism ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul repeats **like a child** and the same structure in three consecutive clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “I did everything like a child” “I spoke, thought, and reasoned like a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 13 11 msy8 γέγονα ἀνήρ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “I became an adult” -1CO 13 11 sp79 figs-metaphor κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if he took **childish {things}** and **put** them **away** in a box or a closet. He means that he stopped doing **childish {things}**, such as “speaking,” “thinking,” or “reasoning” **like a child**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I got rid of childish things” or “I stopped doing childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 13 11 sp79 figs-metaphor κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if he took **the {things} of the child** and **put** them **away** in a box or a closet. He means that he stopped doing **the {things} of the child**, such as “speaking,” “thinking,” or “reasoning” **like a child**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I got rid of childish things” or “I stopped doing childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 13 12 w2eu figs-explicit βλέπομεν 1 now we see Here Paul does not state what it is that **we see**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **we see** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implicationexplicitly. Alternate translation: “we see God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 12 mtw1 figs-metaphor δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι 1 now we see Here Paul speaks as if **we** were looking at **a mirror** and could see a reflection **unclearly**. With this metaphor, Paul could be expressing the idea: (1) that **now** we can **see** God only indirectly, like a reflection **in a mirror** is an indirect image. Alternate translation: “an indirect reflection of God, as if we were looking in a mirror” (2) that **now** we can only **see** some things about God, like a **mirror** only imperfectly reflects an image. Alternate translation: “imperfectly, as if we were looking at a vague reflection in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 13 12 bn3h translate-unknown δι’ ἐσόπτρου 1 For now we see indirectly in a mirror In Paul’s culture, **a mirror** was often made of polished metal. Often, these mirrors were relatively high quality and could reflect images well. Use a word in your language that describes something that reflects an image. Alternate translation: “in a looking glass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1822,7 +1822,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 13 yzuz figs-infostructure μένει πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη, τὰ τρία ταῦτα 1 faith, hope, and love Here Paul introduces **these three** and then goes on to name them at the end of the sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange pieces of the sentence. Alternate translation: “faith, hope, and love remain, these three” or “three things, faith, hope, and love, remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 13 13 nt1y figs-abstractnouns πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη 1 faith, hope, and love If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith**, **hope**, and **love**, you can express ideas by using verbs. If you do so, you may need to specify objects for those verbs. Paul implies that **faith** is in God, **hope** is in what God has promised, and **love** is for God and others. Alternate translation: “trusting in God, hopefully waiting for God to act for us, and loving people and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 13 13 iw8o figs-ellipsis πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη 1 faith, hope, and love Here Paul simply lists the three things without using connecting words. Since English speakers expect a connecting word before the last item in a list, the ULT has included **and** here. If your readers would also expect one or several connecting words in a list, you could include them. Alternate translation: “faith and hope and love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 13 13 l4wx figs-explicit μείζων…τούτων 1 faith, hope, and love Here Paul does not explicitly say why **love** is **the greatest**. He could imply that: (1) loving God and others is the most important thing to do. Alternate translation: “the most significant of these” (2) **love** is the only one of the **three** that continues after Jesus comes back, and so it is the only one that lasts. Alternate translation: “the most enduring of these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 13 13 l4wx figs-explicit μείζων…τούτων 1 faith, hope, and love Here Paul does not explicitly say why **love** is **{the} greatest**. He could imply that: (1) loving God and others is the most important thing to do. Alternate translation: “the most significant of these” (2) **love** is the only one of the **three** that continues after Jesus comes back, and so it is the only one that lasts. Alternate translation: “the most enduring of these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 13 pw69 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀγάπη 1 faith, hope, and love If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Paul implies that the **love** is for God and others. Alternate translation: “is loving people and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 intro abch 0 # 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)
* Prophecy is superior to tongues in the church (14:1–25)
* Order in the church (14:26–40)

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 21. Verse 21 quotes from ([Isaiah 28:11–12](../isa/28/11.md)).

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Prophecy

When Paul speaks about “prophecy” or “prophesying,” he is referring to when someone proclaims a message from God. This message could encourage, rebuke, warn, predict, or do many other things. Whatever the “prophecy” is about, it means that a human is speaking a message from God that others can understand. In your translation, use a word or a phrase that refers to God speaking through people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Tongues

In this chapter, Paul refers many times to “tongues.” A “tongue” could be: (1) an otherwise unknown language that one person speaks to God. (2) the language or languages spoken by angels. (3) foreign languages that believers in the church do not speak. It could refer to any or all of these languages. Since Paul’s words are not very specific, you may also want to use relatively generic terms that refer to “unknown languages” or “special languages.” What Paul emphasizes is that many or most other believers do not understand the language unless someone interprets it, so make sure that your translation uses a word or phrase that refers to language that not many people understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tongue]])

### Interpreting tongues

Paul says that some believers have the “gift” of being able to “interpret” the tongues. These could be the same people who speak the “tongues,” or they could be other people. When someone “interprets” the tongues, he or she either explains what the sounds mean or translates them into a language that the other believers know. Use a word or phrase that refers to explaining or translating unknown languages and sounds. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/interpret]])

### The ungifted

In [14:16](../14/16.md), [23–24](../14/23.md), Paul refers to the “ungifted.” This word could describe people who: (1) do not have the “gift” of tongues or interpreting tongues. (2) do not belong to the group of believers. The first option is more likely correct because of the emphasis in this chapter on understanding what others are saying during a gathering of believers.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

In [14:6–9](../14/06.md), [16](../14/16.md), [23](../14/23.md), [26](../14/26.md), [36](../14/36.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that include these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Building up

In [14:3–5](../14/03.md), [12](../14/12.md), [17](../14/17.md), [26](../14/26.md), Paul speaks about “building up.” He identifies people and groups of people with buildings, and he refers to making these people or groups stronger and more mature as if it were “building up” the buildings. If you readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor for making people or groups stronger and more mature, or you could express the idea plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Hypothetical examples

Many times in this chapter, Paul speaks about specific situations that may or may not be real. He uses these hypothetical situations to give examples that support how he wants the Corinthians to think and what he wants them to do. In [14:6](../14/06.md), [11](../14/11.md), [14](../14/14.md), Paul uses himself in hypothetical examples. In [14:16–17](../14/16.md), [23–25](../14/23.md), Paul uses the Corinthians in hypothetical examples. See the notes on each verse for ways to introduce each hypothetical situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

### “Childlike” metaphor

In [14:20](../14/20.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he wants them to be “childlike” about evil, but not “children” in their thoughts, where they should be “mature” or adult in their thinking. In this metaphor, Paul emphasizes how children know little and are not capable of doing very much. He wants the Corinthians to know and do little evil, but he wants them to know much about the truth and do many good things. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking about how children know and do very little, you could make this explicit or express the metaphor plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Holy Spirit or human spirit?

In [14:2](../14/02.md), [14–16](../14/14.md), Paul uses a word that could refer to the “Holy Spirit” or to a person’s “spirit.” Similarly, in [14:32](../14/32.md), Paul uses a word that could refer to specific ways in which the “Holy Spirit” empowers prophets or to the prophet’s own “spirits.” The notes will refer to this issue in each of these verses. In [14:2](../14/02.md), [32](../14/32.md), it is recommended that you translate the word in a way that relates it to the Holy Spirit. In [14–16](../14/14.md), however, Paul contrasts this word with the “mind,” so it is recommended that you translate the word here in a way that relates to a person’s “spirit,” which identifies the inner or nonphysical part of a person that is not their mind. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Musical instruments

In [14:7–8](../14/07.md), Paul refers to three musical instruments. The “flute” refers to a hollow tube or pipe that a musician blows into to create notes. The “harp” refers to a frame with strings attached that a musician plucks to create notes. The “trumpet” refers metal tube with large opening at one end that a musician blows into to create notes. The “trumpet” was often used to send signals during battles. Paul’s point in this verse does not depend upon the exact instruments used. He uses instruments that were common in his culture to make the point that the instruments must make different, recognizable sounds for anyone to understand the music. You could refer to common instruments in your culture that are similar to the ones to which Paul refers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/flute]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/harp]], and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/trumpet]])

### [14:22](../14/22.md) and the examples in [14:23–25](../14/23.md)

In [14:22](../14/22.md), Paul says that “tongues” are a “sign” for unbelievers, but “prophecy” is a “sign” for believers. However, in the examples that he gives in [14:23–25](../14/23.md), he only speaks about unbelievers, and it is the “prophecy” that leads to the unbeliever repenting and believing. The “tongues” only lead to the unbeliever thinking that believers are “insane.” Most likely, Paul uses two different nuances of “sign” in these verses. A “sign” simply points to something, so “tongues” point to how someone does not belong to the group (an unbeliever), while “prophecy” points to how someone does belong to the group (a believer). When Paul gives the examples of unbelievers hearing both “tongues” and “prophecy,” the “tongues” are a “sign” because they make the unbeliever feel like an outsider. On the other hand, the “prophecy” is a “sign” because it makes the unbeliever into an insider, a believer. See the notes on these verses for translation options, especially for “sign.”

### Function of [14:33b](../14/33.md)

The clause “As in all the churches of the saints” in [14:33](../14/33.md) could modify what goes before it (“God is not of confusion, but of peace”) or what goes after it (“let the women be silent in the churches”). Many translations decide that it modifies what goes after it. This is because, in the other places where Paul refers to all the churches (see [7:17](../07/17.md); [11:16](../11/16.md)), is talking about how the churches behave, not about who God is. God is the same no matter what church he is connected to. On the other hand, some translations decide that the phrase modifies what goes before it. This is because Paul states “in the church” again in [14:34](../14/34.md), which would make “As in all the churches of the saints” redundant if it was connected with that verse. Also, the other places where Paul uses similar phrases (see verses already mentioned) put the reference to the other churches at the end of the sentence, not at the beginning. Consider how translations that your readers might be familiar with treat this verse. If there is no strong reason to pick one option or the other, you could follow the ULT and UST.

### The details of [14:34–35](../14/34.md)

In [14:34–35](../14/34.md), Paul speaks “the women.” The word that he uses could refer to women in general or more specifically to married women. Translations and commentators are divided over whether these two verses require women in general to be silent in church or whether they require wives to be silent in church. Further, being “silent” could refer to keeping quiet at all times, or it could refer to keeping quiet in certain situations or not saying certain things. There are three major options. First, Paul could be speaking about “wives,” and he could be requiring them to keep quiet while their husbands are speaking or prophesying. In other words, they cannot in public question or examine what their husbands say. Second, Paul could be speaking about “women” in general, and he could be requiring them to avoid certain kinds of talking. This could be speaking while others are speaking, or it could be asking too many questions, or it could be speaking during specific times when male church leaders are speaking. Third, Paul could be speaking about “women” in general, and he could be requiring them to keep quiet during the entire public gathering of believers. See the notes on these verses for the specific translation issues. Part of the problem in these verses is that Paul is not very specific about what he is commanding. If possible, make your translation general enough to allow for several of these interpretations. 1CO 14 1 vl57 figs-metaphor διώκετε 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Corinthians to run after and try to capture **love**. He speaks in this way because he wants them to act in **love** as persistently as someone who “pursues” someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Consistently act in” or “Seek after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From a647f9661e8eea1bf182b664756bc117942cda4e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 14:00:26 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 175/269] Fix format of 1 Corinthians --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 645a85497d..e26ba12610 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 1 31 pfa7 figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Jeremiah has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 1 31 fym9 figs-imperative3p ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could: (1) translate this one as a conditional sentence, adding “if.” Alternate translation: “If people want to boast, they should boast in the Lord” (2) translate this one using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who boasts should boast in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 1 31 mo0q figs-idiom ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 When Paul says that someone can **boast in {the} Lord**, he does not mean that they are inside **{the} Lord**. Rather, he means that they are boasting about **{the} Lord** and what he has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **boast in the Lord** with a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is boasting about someone else. Alternate translation: “Let … boast with reference to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)\n * Paul’s attitude among the Corinthians (2:1–5)\n * The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:6–16)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Wisdom and foolishness\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])\n\n### Power and weakness\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])\n\n### The Spirit\n\nPaul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in [2:12](../02/12.md) refers to a “spirit” that is not God’s Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in [2:11](../02/11.md) refers to the nonphysical part of a person. It does not refer to God’s Spirit or to something that God’s Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” ([2:13](../02/13.md); [2:15](../02/15.md)) and the adverb form “spiritually” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Both of these forms also refer to God’s Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by God’s Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of God’s Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” ([2:14](../02/14.md)), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by God’s Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n### The Mystery\n\nPaul speaks of a “mystery” in [2:1](../02/01.md); [2:7](../02/07.md). This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to God’s plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The deep things of God\n\nIn [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The rulers of this age\n\nIn [2:6](../02/06.md); [2:8](../02/08.md), Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christ’s first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus ([2:8](../02/08.md)). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]])\n\n### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”\n\nJust as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.\n\n### First-person singular and plural\n\nPaul uses the first-person singular in [2:1–5](../02/01.md) because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first-person plural in [2:6–16](../02/06.md) because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In [2:6–16](../02/06.md), the first-person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first-person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
* Paul’s attitude among the Corinthians (2:1–5)
* The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:6–16)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Wisdom and foolishness

Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])

### Power and weakness

Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])

### The Spirit

Paul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in [2:12](../02/12.md) refers to a “spirit” that is not God’s Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in [2:11](../02/11.md) refers to the nonphysical part of a person. It does not refer to God’s Spirit or to something that God’s Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” ([2:13](../02/13.md); [2:15](../02/15.md)) and the adverb form “spiritually” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Both of these forms also refer to God’s Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by God’s Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of God’s Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” ([2:14](../02/14.md)), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by God’s Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### The Mystery

Paul speaks of a “mystery” in [2:1](../02/01.md); [2:7](../02/07.md). This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to God’s plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The deep things of God

In [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The rulers of this age

In [2:6](../02/06.md); [2:8](../02/08.md), Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christ’s first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus ([2:8](../02/08.md)). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]])

### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”

Just as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.

### First-person singular and plural

Paul uses the first-person singular in [2:1–5](../02/01.md) because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first-person plural in [2:6–16](../02/06.md) because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In [2:6–16](../02/06.md), the first-person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first-person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 2 1 pxmq grammar-connect-words-phrases κἀγὼ 1 Here, **And I** introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul preaches the gospel in weak and foolish ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “In the same way, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 2 1 qvj7 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 2 1 koh8 figs-explicitinfo ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς…ἦλθον οὐ 1 Here Paul twice says that he has **come** to them. This is a structure that makes sense in Paul’s language. However, If it would be helpful in your language, you could: (1) translate the first **come** with a different word, such as “visit.” Alternate translation: “having visited you, did not come” (2) combine these two phrases. Alternate translation: “did not come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 7 ctb4 writing-pronouns ἣν 1 Here, **that** refers to **the wisdom**, not **a mystery**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat **wisdom** here. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 2 7 k2ct figs-idiom πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων 1 before the ages Paul uses the phrase translated **before the ages** to say that God **predestined** before he made anything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “before the beginning of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 2 7 q2z9 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς δόξαν ἡμῶν 1 for our glory Here, the phrase translated **for our glory** introduces the purpose for which **God predestined** the **wisdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for our glory** with a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that we might have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1CO 2 8 bw5i writing-pronouns ἣν 1 Just as in [2:7](../02/07.md), **which** refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 2 8 bw5i writing-pronouns ἣν 1 Just as in [2:7](../02/07.md), **which** refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 2 8 imbk figs-possession τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using language about the time in which **the rulers** have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 2 8 ur15 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **for** introduces Paul’s proof that **the rulers** did not understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this wordusing a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 2 8 ji1o grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν; 1 Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the **rulers** were the ones who **crucified** Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand God’s wisdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by reversing the two clauses and making **they understood {it}** negative and **they would not have crucified the Lord of glory** positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord of glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 1 r5w5 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις 1 fleshly people Here Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the needed words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but I spoke to you as to fleshly; I spoke to you as to infants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 3 1 ja6t figs-metaphor νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 as to little children in Christ Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **infants**. He wants the Corinthians to think about how **infants** are immature, lack knowledge, and are unable to understand most things. By calling the Corinthians **infants in Christ**, he means that in their relationship with Jesus, they are immature, have little knowledge, and are unable to understand very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul calls the Corinthians **infants** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to beginners in Christ” or “to those who could understand very little about their faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 3 1 m588 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains in what area of their lives they were like **infants**. They acted like **infants** in their relationship with Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **in Christ**by referring to their “faith” in **Christ** or their “relationship” with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in their faith in Christ” or “in their relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 3 2 vg2v figs-metaphor γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα 1 I fed you milk, not solid food Paul is using **milk**, the food of “infants" (see [3:1](../03/01.md)), which is easy to digest, to represent things that are easy to understand. Paul is using **solid food**, which is harder to digest, to represent things that are harder to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I had to let you crawl, not walk” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 3 2 vg2v figs-metaphor γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα 1 I fed you milk, not solid food Paul is using **milk**, the food of “infants” (see [3:1](../03/01.md)), which is easy to digest, to represent things that are easy to understand. Paul is using **solid food**, which is harder to digest, to represent things that are harder to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I had to let you crawl, not walk” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 3 2 fujt figs-ellipsis οὐ βρῶμα 1 Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add a phrase such as “to eat.” Alternate translation: “not solid food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 3 2 d2x5 figs-ellipsis οὔπω…ἐδύνασθε…οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε 1 Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 3 2 i3r5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, **Indeed** functions to contrast the time when Paul visited the Corinthians with the time when Paul is writing this letter. He speaks of these two different times to say that the Corinthians could not to eat the **solid food** at either time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Indeed** with a word or phrase that contrasts two times or a word that introduces additional information. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 9 jy8g figs-imperative3p γαμησάτωσαν 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “let” or “should,” as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “let them marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 7 9 ty79 figs-metaphor πυροῦσθαι 1 to burn with desire Here, **to burn** is a way to refer to sexual desire. Paul uses **burn** because he represents the desire as hard to fight and as something that consumes a person like fire consumes a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or by including a reference to sexual desire. Alternate translation: “to burn with desire” or “to lust after someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 7 10 gxni figs-nominaladj τοῖς…γεγαμηκόσιν 1 Paul is using the adjective **married** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **married** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “to those who are married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 7 10 zwgk grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐκ ἐγὼ, ἀλλὰ ὁ Κύριος 1 Here Paul clarifies that he is not the authority behind this command. It is **the Lord** who is the authority here. Paul specifically has in mind what **the Lord** said about marriage and divorce while he was on earth (see [Mark 10:5–12](../mrk/10/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **not I, but the Lord** either by identifying that it is not Paul “alone” who gives the command, or by clarifying that Paul is referring to what **the Lord** said. Alternate translation: “not I alone, but the Lord also” or “and here I refer to what the Lord said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1CO 7 10 zwgk grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐκ ἐγὼ, ἀλλὰ ὁ Κύριος 1 Here Paul clarifies that he is not the authority behind this command. It is **the Lord** who is the authority here. Paul specifically has in mind what **the Lord** said about marriage and divorce while he was on earth (see [Mark 10:5–12](../mrk/10/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **not I, but the Lord** either by identifying that it is not Paul “alone” who gives the command, or by clarifying that Paul is referring to what **the Lord** said. Alternate translation: “not I alone, but the Lord also” or “and here I refer to what the Lord said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 7 10 ywsy figs-genericnoun γυναῖκα ἀπὸ ἀνδρὸς 1 Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wife** and **husband** with a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “each wife … from her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 7 10 hc5p figs-idiom ἀπὸ…μὴ χωρισθῆναι 1 should not separate from Here, **to be separated from** is technical language for ending a marriage before death. The phrase does not distinguish between “separation” and “divorce.” If possible, use a similar general phrase in your language. Alternate translation: “is not to divorce or separate from” or “is not to leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 7 10 h049 figs-activepassive μὴ χωρισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **wife**, who is **separated**, rather than the person doing the “separating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **wife** does it herself. Alternate translation: “is not to separate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1093,7 +1093,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 12 i5f6 καὶ τύπτοντες 1 your knowledge Alternate translation: “by wounding” or “because you wound” 1CO 8 12 o0w5 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 your knowledge Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non=gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 8 12 ti84 figs-metaphor τύπτοντες αὐτῶν τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν 1 your knowledge Here Paul speaks as if **consciences** were body parts that could be wounded. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that the Corinthians who have knowledge are hurting the **weak consciences** of other believers as surely as if they had wounded their arms or bodies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wounding their weak consciences** by clarifying that Paul means that the Corinthians who have knowledge are hurting **weak consciences** or making the **weak consciences** feel guilty. Alternate translation: “hurting their weak consciences” or “making their weak consciences feel guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 8 12 x857 figs-metaphor τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν 1 your knowledge Here, **weak** identifies **consciences** that easily lead people to feel guilty. These **weak consciences** condemn some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “sensitive consciences” or “consciences, which often condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 8 12 x857 figs-metaphor τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν 1 your knowledge Here, **weak** identifies **consciences** that easily lead people to feel guilty. These **weak consciences** condemn some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “sensitive consciences” or “consciences, which often condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 8 13 i8tb figs-personification βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Therefore Here, **food** is spoken of as though it were a person who could cause someone **to stumble**. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that the **food** is the key issue that leads to “stumbling.” If this might be confusing for your readers, you could clarify that the person who eats the food causes someone **to stumble**. Alternate translation: “how I eat causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 8 13 seua figs-123person εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου, οὐ μὴ φάγω κρέα εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Therefore Here Paul uses the first-person singular in order to use himself as an example for the Corinthians to follow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that this is why Paul uses the first person by clarifying that Paul is offering himself as an example. Alternate translation: “if food causes my brother to stumble, I, for one, will certainly not ever eat meat” or “take me as an example: if food causes my brother to stumble, I will certainly not ever eat meat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 8 13 vf92 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 if food causes to stumble Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -1568,7 +1568,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 25 sw0n figs-metaphor τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον ἡ καινὴ διαθήκη ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ αἵματι 1 the cup Here Paul refers to how Jesus identified the **cup** as **the new covenant in my blood**. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The wine in the **cup** could somehow become Jesus’ **blood**, or Jesus’ **blood** could be present in some way when people drink from the **cup**, or the wine in the **cup** could represent or memorialize Jesus’ **blood**. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This cup represents the new covenant in my blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 25 j2qc figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ αἵματι 1 the cup Here, **in my blood** is a spatial metaphor that could refer to: (1) how the **new covenant** has been inaugurated or initiated by Jesus’ **blood**. Alternate translation: “initiated by my blood” (2) how the **cup** can be identified with **the new covenant**. Alternate translation: “because of my blood” or “because it contains my blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 25 z54e writing-pronouns τοῦτο ποιεῖτε 1 Do this as often as you drink it Here, **this** could refer to: (1) doing what Jesus has done, including everything he did with **the cup**. Alternate translation: “Perform this ceremony” or “Do these things” (2) just drinking from the **cup**. Alternate translation: “Drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 11 25 dy4s writing-pronouns ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε 1 Do this as often as you drink it Here, **{it}** refers to **the cup** and thus also the drink inside **the cup**. This does not mean that believers are supposed to **Do this** every time they drink from any cup. Rather, whenever they **drink** from **the cup** in the context of the **remembrance** of Jesus, they should **Do this**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **as often as you drink it** toidentity more clearly what **it** means. Alternate translation: “as often as you drink from the cup in this ceremony” or “as often as you drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 11 25 dy4s writing-pronouns ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε 1 Do this as often as you drink it Here, **{it}** refers to **the cup** and thus also the drink inside **the cup**. This does not mean that believers are supposed to **Do this** every time they drink from any cup. Rather, whenever they **drink** from **the cup** in the context of the **remembrance** of Jesus, they should **Do this**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **as often as you drink it** to identity more clearly what **it** means. Alternate translation: “as often as you drink from the cup in this ceremony” or “as often as you drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 11 25 lfb6 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν 1 the cup If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **remembrance**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “remember.” Alternate translation: “to remember me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 11 25 oic7 figs-metonymy ἐμὴν 1 the cup When Jesus here refers to **me**, he is referring more specifically to what he has done and will do for his followers, particularly how he is about to offer himself for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **me** and think that Jesus is just speaking about personal memory by clarifying that **me** refers to particular actions done by **me**. Alternate translation: “of what I am doing for you” or “of how I am going to die for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 26 zveq figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 until he comes Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “what is in this cup” or “this wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From f672546ca9151912cb543f12ce09e75fe25a5342 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 15:43:42 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 176/269] Fixed invalid duplicate ID's in Acts --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 2e9e8ffd4d..000d8412f4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3033,7 +3033,7 @@ ACT 21 39 a139 figs-imperative ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me This is an ACT 21 40 qp2q writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had allowed The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 40 rk1y translate-symaction κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “In the Hebrew language”

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. -ACT 22 1 xe46 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 22 1 lrs0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 22 1 xe46 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is using the word **fathers** to refer either to Jewish leaders who may be present or to Jewish men who are older than he is. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” or “My fellow Israelites young and old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 1 pe8t figs-imperative ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 hear to my defense to you now This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen as I explain myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 22 2 a472 figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον παρέσχον ἡσυχίαν 1 they granted more quietness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they became even more quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -3128,7 +3128,7 @@ ACT 22 29 a509 figs-explicit ἐφοβήθη 1 was afraid The implication is tha ACT 22 30 a510 figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 the certain Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 22 30 kx58 figs-explicit ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 he released him This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### “Called a curse”

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 23 1 jru4 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 23 1 lrs1 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 23 1 xe46 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 23 1 nn2q figs-hyperbole πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ 1 in all good conscience Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in [5:1](../05/01.md) and [9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -3151,7 +3151,7 @@ ACT 23 6 dchr figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 of the dead Paul is using the adje ACT 23 6 ys5k figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι 1 I am being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 8 gl1s writing-background γὰρ 1 For Luke uses the word **For** to introduce background information about the **Sadducees** and **Pharisees** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 23 8 a517 figs-ellipsis μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα 1 there is no resurrection, nor angels or spirits Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there is no resurrection and that there are no angels and no spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 23 8 a519 figs-explicit τὰ ἀμφότερα 1 both By **both**, Luke means implicitly that Pharisees believe in (1) the resurrection and (2) angels and spirits. You could indicate this explicitly if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “both that there is a resurrection and that there are angels and spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 23 8 lrs2 figs-explicit τὰ ἀμφότερα 1 both By **both**, Luke means implicitly that Pharisees believe in (1) the resurrection and (2) angels and spirits. You could indicate this explicitly if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “both that there is a resurrection and that there are angels and spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 23 9 a519 translate-symaction ἀναστάντες 1 arising By **arising** (that is, standing up), these Pharisees were indicating that they had something important to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 23 9 ayr8 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel These Pharisees are speaking as if what they are saying is a hypothetical possibility, but they believe that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) ACT 23 9 a520 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel These Pharisees assume that the Sadducees will understand that they mean this spirit or angel **spoke** to Paul when he had the vision in the Jerusalem temple that he described in [22:17–21](../22/17.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel, when he had his vision in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3172,7 +3172,7 @@ ACT 23 16 a531 figs-metonymy ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν 1 hearing ACT 23 16 w6fe translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) ACT 23 17 a528 figs-imperative ἄπαγε 1 take This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 23 18 abd0 writing-pronouns ὁ…παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν 1 taking him, he brought him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 23 18 a530 φησίν 1 says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +ACT 23 18 lrs3 φησίν 1 says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” ACT 23 19 a530 translate-symaction ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 taking hold of his hand The chiliarch **taking hold** of the **hand** of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a **private** location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 23 20 uv6r figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 The Jews Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 23 21 a532 figs-activepassive σὺ…μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς 1 may you not be persuaded by them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3235,7 +3235,7 @@ ACT 24 16 a553 writing-pronouns ἐν τούτῳ 1 in this The pronoun **this** ACT 24 16 va3b figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 before God and men Paul is using this phrase to refer to the opinion or judgment of God and men by association with the way that they would assess anything that came to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of God and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 24 16 a554 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 24 17 p92m writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 24 17 ryk6 figs-go παρεγενόμην 1 I came In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +ACT 24 17 lrs4 figs-go παρεγενόμην 1 I came In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 24 17 ryk6 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου 1 to my nation Paul is actually referring to the place where the people of the Jewish **nation** live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where my Jewish people live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 24 17 a555 figs-explicit ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων…καὶ προσφοράς 1 bringing alms and offerings By **alms**, Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By **offerings**, he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 24 18 a556 writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 in which The pronoun **which** refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From e83101322d0f4e6240d3701709bcc212aebdf330 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 15:47:03 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 177/269] Fixed duplicate ID's in Acts --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 000d8412f4..768e6ba799 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3129,7 +3129,7 @@ ACT 22 30 a510 figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 the certain Luke is usin ACT 22 30 kx58 figs-explicit ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 he released him This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### “Called a curse”

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 23 1 lrs1 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 23 1 xe46 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 23 1 lrs5 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 23 1 nn2q figs-hyperbole πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ 1 in all good conscience Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in [5:1](../05/01.md) and [9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 23 2 a565 translate-symaction τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα 1 to strike his mouth Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his **mouth** that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) From 758b927ac1c9a2724189a5a544fb9bf8f12bf205 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 20:34:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 178/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 768e6ba799..cc980564b1 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2899,14 +2899,14 @@ ACT 20 37 sze4 translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were ACT 20 38 npay figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 38 m0wr figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he spoke, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. +ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nActs 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.\n\nThe last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “They are all determined to keep the law”\n\nThe Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.\n\n### Nazarite vow\n\nThe vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).\n\n### Gentiles in the temple\n\nThe Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν 1 we…we came As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 1 a428 figs-activepassive ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 having been parted from them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 1 e5y6 translate-names Κῶ 1 Cos The word **Cos** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 1 p6ss translate-names Ῥόδον 1 Rhodes The word **Rhodes** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea south of Cos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 1 x7kg translate-names Πάταρα 1 Patara The word **Patara** is the name of a city on the southwest coast of Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 2 nz9k figs-personification πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην 1 a ship crossing over to Phoenicia Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **crossing over** the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 having left it behind on the port side The expression **on the port side** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 having left it behind on the port side The expression **leaving it behind on the left** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 3 a429 figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 came down to Tyre Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Typre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 there the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was unloading its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) From 46eddf3282af8249ab0da6755c2185c06ce8a102 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 20:42:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 179/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index cc980564b1..355acfac9a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2907,9 +2907,9 @@ ACT 21 1 p6ss translate-names Ῥόδον 1 Rhodes The word **Rhodes** is the na ACT 21 1 x7kg translate-names Πάταρα 1 Patara The word **Patara** is the name of a city on the southwest coast of Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 2 nz9k figs-personification πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην 1 a ship crossing over to Phoenicia Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **crossing over** the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 having left it behind on the port side The expression **leaving it behind on the left** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 21 3 a429 figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 came down to Tyre Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Typre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 21 3 a429 figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 came down to Tyre Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 there the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was unloading its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those disciples were saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **completed**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 8a2cc2c8e4edf0fac1325f07d384e2fc5c5dc983 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 20:54:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 180/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 355acfac9a..834d713a27 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2910,9 +2910,9 @@ ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον ACT 21 3 a429 figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 came down to Tyre Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 there the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those disciples were saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **completed**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something that **happened**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **everyone** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having knelt humbly down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 30e389d91598e1b18c68b7ca05bd25a8bd723629 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:00:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 181/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 834d713a27..759d2b8be2 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2912,9 +2912,9 @@ ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀπο ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something that **happened**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **everyone** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having knelt humbly down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **completed**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **they all** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 6897c4ada217b549898a66d56ced3d2cce75ef22 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:01:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 182/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 759d2b8be2..b8e6a71d87 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2914,7 +2914,7 @@ ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **completed**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **they all** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 828f92a627cb7151a440c406d3781d43ef94c86d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:02:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 183/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b8e6a71d87..7d751cd552 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2916,7 +2916,7 @@ ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσα ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **they all** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 7 ff1s figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 8 ay52 figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the Seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 11a4a1dd1773ddae3098948ec0b08634cc3ecd0e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:06:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 184/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 7d751cd552..10b53e743f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2919,8 +2919,8 @@ ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** re ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 7 ff1s figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 21 8 ay52 figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the Seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 21 8 vi48 grammar-honorifics τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 the Evangelist Luke is using the title **Evangelist** to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, who was known for proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics]]) +ACT 21 8 ay52 figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 8 vi48 grammar-honorifics τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 the Evangelist Luke is using the title **evangelist** to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase preceded by a comma in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, a man known for proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics]]) ACT 21 9 cv8b writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the **daughters** of Philip that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 21 9 rcf4 writing-pronouns τούτῳ…ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες 1 to this one were four daughters The pronoun **this** refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 10 n3i8 writing-participants κατῆλθέν τις…προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 a certain prophet, Agabus by name Luke is using the phrase **a certain prophet** to introduce **Agabus** as a returning participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing returning participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a prophet named Agabus who came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) From 57a2b89ea90a3a19c21ad7961c157b02b7f1fee2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:19:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 186/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 10b53e743f..ddc65ffe6c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2929,7 +2929,7 @@ ACT 21 10 a435 figs-idiom κατῆλθέν τις ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδα ACT 21 11 a436 translate-symaction ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου, δήσας ἑαυτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας 1 having taken the belt of Paul, having bound his own feet and hands Agabus bound his own feet and hands with Paul’s belt as a symbolic action to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having taken the belt of Paul and bound his own feet and hands to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 11 nq2y figs-quotesinquotes τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 The Holy Spirit says these things: ‘Thus will the Jews in Jerusalem bind the man of whom is this belt, and they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that in this way the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt and that they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 21 11 i8u7 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the custody” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the custody of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Gentiles**, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 12 a437 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἐντόπιοι 1 the locals Luke is using the adjective **locals** as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 21 12 a438 figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 were urging him Luke means implicitly that this **urging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 71be1f150d0a2faae27a8498b956730863c99f4d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:23:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 187/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ddc65ffe6c..c917f8f0d8 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2932,7 +2932,7 @@ ACT 21 11 i8u7 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Agabus is usi ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the custody of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Gentiles**, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 12 a437 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἐντόπιοι 1 the locals Luke is using the adjective **locals** as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 21 12 a438 figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 were urging him Luke means implicitly that this **urging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 12 a438 figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 were urging him Luke means implicitly that this **begging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 12 a439 figs-idiom τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 not to go up to Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, you are breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally **breaking** his **heart**. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 32ed5562ba08079accd13b067ede0354a5f87ca8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:24:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 188/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c917f8f0d8..96e101a62a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2934,7 +2934,7 @@ ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles Agabus is using th ACT 21 12 a437 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἐντόπιοι 1 the locals Luke is using the adjective **locals** as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 21 12 a438 figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 were urging him Luke means implicitly that this **begging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 12 a439 figs-idiom τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 not to go up to Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, you are breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally **breaking** his **heart**. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart In this context, the **heart** represents the emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for them to bind me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 3eb3a0bc00162b793cdb4281629fe5854b7c0615 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:31:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 189/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 96e101a62a..e1631fad71 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2937,7 +2937,7 @@ ACT 21 12 a439 figs-idiom τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερ ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally **breaking** his **heart**. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart In this context, the **heart** represents the emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for them to bind me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not only for them to bind me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 13 q35x figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 for the name of the Lord Jesus This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to the Lord Jesus” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 14 hwc5 figs-activepassive μὴ πειθομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 he was not being persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were not persuading him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 14 zl98 figs-explicit μὴ πειθομένου 1 he was not being persuaded Luke assumes that his readers will understand what he and the others were not persuading Paul about. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was not being persuaded not to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 2cafc25ef13a20ce0ad343cc5676cb1d369570ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:49:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 190/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index e1631fad71..ef104fdc4b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2943,7 +2943,7 @@ ACT 21 14 hwc5 figs-activepassive μὴ πειθομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 he ACT 21 14 zl98 figs-explicit μὴ πειθομένου 1 he was not being persuaded Luke assumes that his readers will understand what he and the others were not persuading Paul about. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was not being persuaded not to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 14 as1i figs-imperative3p τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω 1 Let the will of the Lord happen If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May the will of the Lord happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 21 15 a440 figs-idiom ἀνεβαίνομεν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 we went up to Jerusalem Luke says that he and his traveling companions **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring in your language to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 21 16 k9kr writing-participants τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 a certain Cypriot, an early disciple Luke is using the phrase **a certain Cypriot** to introduce **Mnason** as a new participant in the story. The phrase **an early disciple** introduces him as one of the first people to believe in Jesus. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 21 16 k9kr writing-participants τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 a certain Cypriot, an early disciple Luke is using the phrase **a certain early disciple** to introduce **Mnason** as a new participant in the story. The phrase **early disciple** introduces him as one of the first people to believe in Jesus. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a Cypriot who was one of the first believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 21 16 zd9i translate-names Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ 1 Mnason…Cypriot The word **Mnason** is the name of a man. The word **Cypriot** is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 16 a441 figs-activepassive παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν 1 with whom we would be hosted If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 17 d3gj figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοί 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 7812229571fdd9b02547d691653452d29f554049 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:54:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 191/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ef104fdc4b..4c6483aa99 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2948,7 +2948,7 @@ ACT 21 16 zd9i translate-names Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ 1 Mnason…Cypriot ACT 21 16 a441 figs-activepassive παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν 1 with whom we would be hosted If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 17 d3gj figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοί 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 20 a1hk writing-pronouns οἱ… ἐδόξαζον…εἶπόν…αὐτῷ 1 they were glorifying…they said to him The pronoun **they** refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 21 20 a442 figs-metaphor θεωρεῖς 1 you see Paul does not physically **see** these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 21 20 a442 figs-metaphor θεωρεῖς 1 you see Paul does not physically **see** these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 20 xki4 figs-metaphor ἀδελφέ 1 brother James and the elders using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Since this expression occurs in direct discourse, you may want to preserve it in your translation to show how these believers addressed one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 20 c5pu writing-pronouns ὑπάρχουσιν 1 they are In this instance the pronoun **they** refers to the believing Jews whom James and the elders are describing. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these believing Jews are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 20 a443 figs-hyperbole πάντες ζηλωταὶ τοῦ νόμου ὑπάρχουσιν 1 they are all zealous for the law James and the elders say **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they are very zealous for the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) From 5ee483d1b91e81abf9cf73ee474752cc523bf5e7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:58:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 192/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4c6483aa99..65b5137fbf 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2956,7 +2956,7 @@ ACT 21 21 pyg8 figs-explicit κατηχήθησαν…περὶ σοῦ 1 they h ACT 21 21 e5s4 figs-activepassive κατηχήθησαν 1 they have been told If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 21 sdl3 figs-metonymy ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with **Moses**, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 21 a444 figs-abstractnouns ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **apostasy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 21 u56t figs-explicit μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 22 a445 figs-ellipsis τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 22 a446 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From b2819272891d0cc8645e14cc6475652f3f932141 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 21:58:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 193/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 65b5137fbf..1c808db741 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2957,7 +2957,7 @@ ACT 21 21 e5s4 figs-activepassive κατηχήθησαν 1 they have been told I ACT 21 21 sdl3 figs-metonymy ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with **Moses**, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 21 a444 figs-abstractnouns ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **apostasy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 21 21 u56t figs-explicit μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 21 u56t figs-explicit μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 22 a445 figs-ellipsis τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 22 a446 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 23 b28b figs-exclusive λέγομεν 1 we say As the General Notes to this chapter indicate, by **we**, James and the elders mean themselves but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 10018b5391666cd6756e7bb072feaea55ecf9ea1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 22:27:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 194/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1c808db741..43423d8b29 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2959,11 +2959,11 @@ ACT 21 21 a444 figs-abstractnouns ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέω ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 21 u56t figs-explicit μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 22 a445 figs-ellipsis τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 21 22 a446 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 22 a446 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 23 b28b figs-exclusive λέγομεν 1 we say As the General Notes to this chapter indicate, by **we**, James and the elders mean themselves but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 23 b22r translate-unknown εὐχὴν ἔχοντες 1 having a vow See how you translated the term **vow** in [18:18](../18/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 21 23 a447 translate-textvariants ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν 1 from themselves Some ancient manuscripts read **from themselves.** That would be indicating that these men made the vow on their own initiative. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “upon themselves.” That would be indicating that the men still needed to fulfill the commitment implicit in the vow to make an offering in the temple at the end of the time during which the conditions of the vow were in effect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 21 24 km4w figs-explicit ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 be purified with them James and the elders assume that Paul will know that in order to make an offering at the end of the time of their vows, these men will need to made ceremonially clean so that they can go into the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “be purified with them so that you can all go to the temple area together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 24 km4w figs-explicit ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 be purified with them James and the elders assume that Paul will know that in order to make an offering at the end of the time of their vows, these men will need to be made ceremonially clean so that they can go into the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “be purified with them so that you can all go to the temple area together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 24 a448 figs-activepassive ἁγνίσθητι 1 be purified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “participate in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 24 c3ap figs-explicit δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 pay the expenses for them James and the elders assume that Paul will know that the **expenses** at the end of a vow included buying a male and female lamb, a ram, grain, and wine for offerings. They also assume that Paul will know that the Jews considered paying such expenses for those who could not afford them to be an act of great piety. Alternate translation: “piously help them buy the animals and foods they will need for offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 24 abq6 translate-symaction ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν 1 so that they will shear their heads The men would cut the hair off **their heads** to show that he had fulfilled the vows that they had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. See how you translated it in [18:18](../18/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -2971,9 +2971,9 @@ ACT 21 24 a449 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν ACT 21 24 a450 figs-idiom ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέν ἐστιν 1 there is nothing in the things they have been told about you The expression **there is nothing in** these things means that they are not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things they have been told about you are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 24 nu9v figs-activepassive κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ 1 they have been told about you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 24 a451 figs-rpronouns καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον 1 also keeping the law yourself James and the elders are using the word **yourself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 21 25 a452 figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 we sent that they should guard James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 21 25 a452 figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 we sent that they should guard James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-nominaladj τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-metonymy τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-metonymy τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 the strangled God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 cr14 figs-explicit τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 the men Luke implicitly means the four **men** who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 a453 figs-explicit ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified so that they could enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 6f21d12a9143ba0a7ec6ee9bdec94ac2d430f5ce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2022 19:00:59 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 195/269] Fix format of Acts --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 43423d8b29..6dd821bd2a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1993,7 +1993,7 @@ ACT 13 35 hvt8 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You will not allow y ACT 13 35 bhos figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 36 rpb4 figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 fell asleep Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **fell asleep**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) ACT 13 36 nwy9 figs-activepassive προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶδεν 1 was laid with his fathers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers and he saw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 36 f5s2 figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 36 f5s2 figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 36 la5s figs-idiom εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 saw decay Paul is using the word **saw** to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 36 okfp figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 Here, the term **decay** refers to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 37 bmw3 writing-pronouns ὃν…ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 But he whom The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2899,7 +2899,7 @@ ACT 20 37 sze4 translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were ACT 20 38 npay figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 38 m0wr figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he spoke, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nActs 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.\n\nThe last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “They are all determined to keep the law”\n\nThe Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.\n\n### Nazarite vow\n\nThe vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).\n\n### Gentiles in the temple\n\nThe Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. +ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν 1 we…we came As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 1 a428 figs-activepassive ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 having been parted from them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 1 e5y6 translate-names Κῶ 1 Cos The word **Cos** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From da7980ab82fbbf4e0c7f0dcdca598fc86762ffc4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Sun, 30 Oct 2022 23:09:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 196/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6dd821bd2a..df735a1cc7 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2898,8 +2898,8 @@ ACT 20 37 pb4r figs-idiom ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλ ACT 20 37 sze4 translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in this culture. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “they were kissing him on the cheek to express their brotherly love for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 20 38 npay figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 38 m0wr figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he spoke, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. +ACT 20 38 m0wr figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he had spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nActs 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.\n\nThe last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “They are all determined to keep the law”\n\nThe Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.\n\n### Nazarite vow\n\nThe vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).\n\n### Gentiles in the temple\n\nThe Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν 1 we…we came As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 1 a428 figs-activepassive ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 having been parted from them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 1 e5y6 translate-names Κῶ 1 Cos The word **Cos** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 912387bda2169e3d7d48a7a22464b710cd2b63d8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Sun, 30 Oct 2022 23:11:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 198/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index df735a1cc7..3e57dba6ca 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2906,7 +2906,7 @@ ACT 21 1 e5y6 translate-names Κῶ 1 Cos The word **Cos** is the name of an isl ACT 21 1 p6ss translate-names Ῥόδον 1 Rhodes The word **Rhodes** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea south of Cos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 1 x7kg translate-names Πάταρα 1 Patara The word **Patara** is the name of a city on the southwest coast of Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 2 nz9k figs-personification πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην 1 a ship crossing over to Phoenicia Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **crossing over** the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 having left it behind on the port side The expression **leaving it behind on the left** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 having left it behind on the port side The expression **leaving it behind on the port side** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 3 a429 figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 came down to Tyre Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 there the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) From 0968ef74c4242c46be666f0c58140287f8a6f144 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Sun, 30 Oct 2022 23:24:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 199/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 3e57dba6ca..30451dce36 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2910,7 +2910,7 @@ ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον ACT 21 3 a429 figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 came down to Tyre Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 there the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **completed**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **they all** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) From d9911449c4a7b470f8c364548496a4b878bcafb1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Sun, 30 Oct 2022 23:31:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 200/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 30451dce36..32a1318cdc 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2912,7 +2912,7 @@ ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀπο ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **completed**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **finished**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **they all** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 2fea765a1137c2c3ca98748760f1c1ba812f03fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:00:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 201/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 32a1318cdc..5b9f483267 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2913,7 +2913,7 @@ ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζ ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **finished**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **they all** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **everyone** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 87f083aba250be8e2e92f0b63d72c13c82073aca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:16:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 202/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 5b9f483267..291a3c3093 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2919,7 +2919,7 @@ ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** re ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 7 ff1s figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 21 8 ay52 figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 8 ay52 figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the Seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 8 vi48 grammar-honorifics τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 the Evangelist Luke is using the title **evangelist** to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase preceded by a comma in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, a man known for proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics]]) ACT 21 9 cv8b writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the **daughters** of Philip that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 21 9 rcf4 writing-pronouns τούτῳ…ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες 1 to this one were four daughters The pronoun **this** refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2932,7 +2932,7 @@ ACT 21 11 i8u7 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Agabus is usi ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the custody of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Gentiles**, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 12 a437 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἐντόπιοι 1 the locals Luke is using the adjective **locals** as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 21 12 a438 figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 were urging him Luke means implicitly that this **begging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 12 a438 figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 were urging him Luke means implicitly that this **urging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 12 a439 figs-idiom τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 not to go up to Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally **breaking** his **heart**. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 895ec233b740513669475c8948355b52f0bfd88b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:37:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 203/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 291a3c3093..b859f1fb69 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2971,7 +2971,7 @@ ACT 21 24 a449 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν ACT 21 24 a450 figs-idiom ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέν ἐστιν 1 there is nothing in the things they have been told about you The expression **there is nothing in** these things means that they are not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things they have been told about you are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 24 nu9v figs-activepassive κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ 1 they have been told about you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 24 a451 figs-rpronouns καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον 1 also keeping the law yourself James and the elders are using the word **yourself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 21 25 a452 figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 we sent that they should guard James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 21 25 a452 figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 we sent that they should guard James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-nominaladj τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-metonymy τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 the strangled God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 9eeded3206e90ffdf8d470400057d86d311e6853 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:47:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 204/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b859f1fb69..d4333d019e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2976,7 +2976,7 @@ ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-nominaladj τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-metonymy τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 the strangled God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 cr14 figs-explicit τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 the men Luke implicitly means the four **men** who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 21 26 a453 figs-explicit ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified so that they could enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 26 a453 figs-explicit ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 s8z9 figs-activepassive ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having participated in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 26 xu9r figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερόν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 26 a454 figs-possession διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 declaring the fulfillment of the days of purification Luke is using the possessive form **the days of purification** to mean the days during which the men’s vows were in effect, at the end of which there needed to be a **purification** ceremony. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From bb3df11d3273648e0e828baa1f1c1d2edfad7390 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:51:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 205/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d4333d019e..78708a8f1e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ ACT 21 26 gc23 figs-activepassive ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ACT 21 27 j9zm figs-explicit αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι 1 the seven days Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he means the **seven days** that were customarily required for the offerings and purification ceremony at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the seven days that it took to purify these men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 a456 figs-explicit οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews from Asia Luke implicitly means some **Jews from Asia** who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival, as described in [20:16](../20/16.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 k4l1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 21 27 a457 figs-hyperbole συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 were agitating the whole crowd Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making the people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 21 27 a457 figs-hyperbole συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 were agitating the whole crowd Luke says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making the people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 27 a458 figs-explicit τὸν ὄχλον 1 the whole crowd By the **crowd**, Luke implicitly means the crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem from all over the Roman Empire for the Pentecost festival. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 mks6 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid their hands on him The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest or detain someone, by association with the way that arresting officers or concerned citizens might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they held onto him” or “they detained him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 28 a459 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From e3a75197b4e20b6ff8dd62182b840f0642f87c1c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:53:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 206/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 78708a8f1e..e3e35d672e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ ACT 21 26 gc23 figs-activepassive ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ACT 21 27 j9zm figs-explicit αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι 1 the seven days Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he means the **seven days** that were customarily required for the offerings and purification ceremony at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the seven days that it took to purify these men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 a456 figs-explicit οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews from Asia Luke implicitly means some **Jews from Asia** who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival, as described in [20:16](../20/16.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 k4l1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 21 27 a457 figs-hyperbole συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 were agitating the whole crowd Luke says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making the people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 21 27 a457 figs-hyperbole συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 were agitating the whole crowd Luke says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making many people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 27 a458 figs-explicit τὸν ὄχλον 1 the whole crowd By the **crowd**, Luke implicitly means the crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem from all over the Roman Empire for the Pentecost festival. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 mks6 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid their hands on him The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest or detain someone, by association with the way that arresting officers or concerned citizens might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they held onto him” or “they detained him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 28 a459 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From ee41a8965c4a2364104012d79dc36d897d4dbeb3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:56:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 207/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index e3e35d672e..721b1472f9 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2994,7 +2994,7 @@ ACT 21 28 a460 figs-hyperbole πάντας πανταχῇ 1 all everywhere The ACT 21 28 sfg3 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου 1 the people and the law and this place The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that they are referring to the special status of the people of Israel as God’s chosen people, the law of Moses, and the temple in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and the law of Moses and this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 28 jc9q figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem **temple** and that they are accusing Paul of bringing **Greeks** into those areas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “into areas of the temple courtyard where they are not allowed to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 28 a461 figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερὸν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 1 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid {their} hands on him, shouting, “Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) +ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 1 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid {their} hands on him, shouting, “Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 21 29 h1uu translate-names Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Here, the word **city** means to the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) From d715d3db99d7a901984136ccc509e6e868a888ff Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 01:58:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 208/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 721b1472f9..06a783934b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2996,9 +2996,9 @@ ACT 21 28 jc9q figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple The Je ACT 21 28 a461 figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερὸν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 1 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid {their} hands on him, shouting, “Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 21 29 h1uu translate-names Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Here, the word **city** means to the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 21 30 a462 figs-activepassive ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 21 30 a462 figs-activepassive ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 30 a463 figs-metonymy ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 outside of the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 30 mmaa figs-activepassive ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 30 xd6r figs-explicit ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut The implication is that the gatekeepers **shut** the **doors** to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 993356508143e9eaae4e6056f226540d0a05edeb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:05:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 209/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 06a783934b..5983e12188 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2998,7 +2998,7 @@ ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 1 In this verse, Luke is giving the reaso ACT 21 29 h1uu translate-names Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 21 30 a462 figs-activepassive ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 21 30 a462 figs-activepassive ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 30 a463 figs-metonymy ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 outside of the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 30 mmaa figs-activepassive ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 30 xd6r figs-explicit ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut The implication is that the gatekeepers **shut** the **doors** to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3006,7 +3006,7 @@ ACT 21 31 a464 writing-pronouns ζητούντων τε αὐτὸν ἀποκτ ACT 21 31 d6vt figs-personification ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 a report came up to the commander of the guard Luke is speaking of this **report** as if they were a living thing that **came up to the commander** on its own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 21 31 hu5r figs-idiom ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 a report came up to the commander of the guard Luke uses the phrase **came up ** because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard up in the temple fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 31 p85a translate-unknown τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 to the chiliarch of the cohort A **chiliarch** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 1,000 soldiers. A **cohort** was a large military guard unit. Alternate translation: “to the commander of the military guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 21 31 u65r figs-metonymy ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was agitated Here, the word **Jerusalem** means to the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 31 u65r figs-metonymy ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was agitated Here, the word **Jerusalem** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 31 zgas figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was agitated Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were very agitated” or “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were rioting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 31 a465 figs-activepassive ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was agitated If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “something was greatly agitating the people who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 32 j81t writing-pronouns ὃς ἐξαυτῆς παραλαβὼν στρατιώτας καὶ ἑκατοντάρχας, κατέδραμεν ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 who, immediately taking soldiers and centurions, ran down to them The pronoun **who** refers to the chiliarch (the Roman commander), and the pronoun **them** refer to the people who were rioting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The commander immediately took soldiers and centurions and ran down to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -3021,7 +3021,7 @@ ACT 21 34 qcc6 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸ ACT 21 35 h9n7 figs-activepassive βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν 1 he was carried by the soldiers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers carried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 35 a467 figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν βίαν τοῦ ὄχλου 1 because of the violence of the crowd If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **violence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the crowd was so violent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 21 36 kax6 figs-euphemism αἶρε αὐτόν 1 Take him away The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a mild way of referring to this in your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων…εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος 1 as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων…εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος 1 as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 37 a468 ὁ Παῦλος λέγει 1 Paul says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said” ACT 21 37 a469 figs-quotations ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ? 1 Paul says to the chiliarch, “If it is permitted for me to say something to you?” Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From ff0035bab048b74818a9cdbb00dc64ae7cf416b4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:19:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 211/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 5983e12188..14e4c4207e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων…εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς ACT 21 37 a468 ὁ Παῦλος λέγει 1 Paul says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said” ACT 21 37 a469 figs-quotations ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ? 1 Paul says to the chiliarch, “If it is permitted for me to say something to you?” Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος…? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian…? The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must be the Egyptian … !” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος…? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian…? The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian … !” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 38 p2ym translate-transliterate τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the Sicarii The term **Sicarii** is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) ACT 21 39 a470 translate-names Ταρσεὺς 1 a Tarsian The word **Tarsian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 a not undistinguished city Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a distinguished city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From 8fec1c3d9b6a89d2cce964e1d4eb89c97a5d49b0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:22:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 212/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 14e4c4207e..812a395d55 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3028,7 +3028,7 @@ ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος…? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian…? The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian … !” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 38 p2ym translate-transliterate τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the Sicarii The term **Sicarii** is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) ACT 21 39 a470 translate-names Ταρσεὺς 1 a Tarsian The word **Tarsian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 a not undistinguished city Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a distinguished city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 a not undistinguished city Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 21 39 a139 figs-imperative ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase **I ask of you** shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 21 40 qp2q writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had allowed The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 40 rk1y translate-symaction κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) From d6f42add87c8aee05641619c998aae49ccbb2dd9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:26:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 213/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 812a395d55..63f141b343 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3030,7 +3030,7 @@ ACT 21 38 p2ym translate-transliterate τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the Sicarii ACT 21 39 a470 translate-names Ταρσεὺς 1 a Tarsian The word **Tarsian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 a not undistinguished city Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 21 39 a139 figs-imperative ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase **I ask of you** shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -ACT 21 40 qp2q writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had allowed The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 21 40 qp2q writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had allowed The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 40 rk1y translate-symaction κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “In the Hebrew language”

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. ACT 22 1 lrs0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 6bb5b85ed77db90bd9b16c6b8795bacac92cdf4f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:37:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 214/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e26ba12610..880f5fd025 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1831,24 +1831,24 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 1 x938 translate-unknown ζηλοῦτε 1 Pursue love Here, to **be zealous for** something means that one vigorously seeks after it or strongly desires it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **be zealous for** with a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “set your heart on” or “seek after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 1 ki3l μᾶλλον 1 especially that you may prophesy Here, **especially** could mean: (1) that prophecy is the best **gift** to **be zealous** for. Alternate translation: “above all” (2) that prophecy is better than **spiritual gifts**. Alternate translation: “more than that,” 1CO 14 2 bdhf grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 especially that you may prophesy Here, **For** introduces the reasons why Paul wants the Corinthians to especially desire to prophesy. These reasons are found in [14:2–4](../14/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a comparable way to introduce reasons for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is why you should be zealous for prophecy:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 14 2 ii60 figs-genericnoun ὁ…λαλῶν γλώσσῃ 1 especially that you may prophesy Paul is speaking of people “who speak in tongues” in general; he is not speaking of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 2 ii60 figs-genericnoun ὁ…λαλῶν γλώσσῃ 1 especially that you may prophesy Paul is speaking of people “speaking in tongues” in general; he is not speaking of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 2 ftxf translate-unknown γλώσσῃ 1 especially that you may prophesy Here and throughout this chapter, translate **tongue** and “tongues” as you did in [13:1](../13/01.md), [8](../13/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 2 q21u figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις…δὲ λαλεῖ 1 especially that you may prophesy Although the words **men** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to humans … but he or she speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 2 uvxu figs-abstractnouns μυστήρια 1 especially that you may prophesy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mysteries**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “secret” or “mysterious.” Alternate translation: “mysterious words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 2 oiai πνεύματι 1 especially that you may prophesy Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, which enables or empowers the person to speak in the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “in God’s Spirit” or “by the power of God’s Spirit” (2) the person’s spirit, which refers to the interior life of a person. It is from this interior life that the **tongue** originates. Alternate translation: “in his spirit” -1CO 14 3 iw24 figs-genericnoun ὁ…προφητεύων 1 to build them up Paul is speaking of people “who prophesy” in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 3 iw24 figs-genericnoun ὁ…προφητεύων 1 to build them up Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 3 up3s figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 to build them up Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 14 3 r1nx figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 to build them up Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one who prophesies** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “for growth” or “for edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 3 r1nx figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 to build them up Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one prophesying** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “for growth” or “for edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 3 zv5l figs-doublet παράκλησιν, καὶ παραμυθίαν 1 to build them up Here, **encouragement** refers primarily to “encouraging” others to act or think in a specific way. On the other hand, **consolation** refers primarily to “comforting” others in grief or pain. If your language has words that fit with these distinctions, you could use them here. If your language does not have words that fit with these distinctions, you can use one general word for “exhortation” or **encouragement**. Alternate translation: “exhortation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 14 3 ypx0 figs-abstractnouns παράκλησιν, καὶ παραμυθίαν 1 to build them up If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **encouragement** and **consolation**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “encourage” and “console.” Alternate translation: “encouraging and consoling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 14 4 k612 figs-genericnoun ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ…ὁ…προφητεύων 1 builds up Here, just as in [14:2–3](../14/02.md), Paul is speaking of people “who prophesy” and people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “Anyone who speaks in a tongue … anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 14 4 b2mg figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ…ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ 1 builds up Just as in [14:3](../14/03.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **The one who speaks in a tongue** helps himself or herself become stronger and more mature, while **the one who prophesies** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “helps himself grow … helps the church grow” or “edifies himself … edifies the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 4 k612 figs-genericnoun ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ…ὁ…προφητεύων 1 builds up Here, just as in [14:2–3](../14/02.md), Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” and people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “Anyone who speaks in a tongue … anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 4 b2mg figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ…ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ 1 builds up Just as in [14:3](../14/03.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **The one speaking in a tongue** helps himself or herself become stronger and more mature, while **the one prophesying** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “helps himself grow … helps the church grow” or “edifies himself … edifies the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 5 f1sh figs-ellipsis μᾶλλον δὲ ἵνα 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I desire**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “but I desire even more that” or “but even more, I desire that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 14 5 z5my figs-genericnoun ὁ προφητεύων…ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσαις 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul is speaking of people “who prophesy” and people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies … anyone who speaks in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 14 5 o0b6 figs-explicit μείζων 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, **greater** indicates that **the one who prophecies** does something that is more important and helpful than **the one who speaks in tongues**. It does not mean that God cares about the person **who prophesies** more than the person **who speaks in tongues**. If you readers would misunderstand **greater**, you could state explicitly how or in what way the person is **greater**. Alternate translation: “does something more useful” or “does what is more valuable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 5 u9oq figs-infostructure ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater The ULT puts these clauses in parentheses because they give a qualification of what Paul has said about how **the one who prophesies is greater than the one who speaks in tongues**. In this clause, Paul clarifies that he is only speaking about **tongues** without interpretation. Further, if someone does **interpret** the **tongues**, then that can lead to **building up**, just like prophecy. Use a form in your language that would indicate a qualification or a parenthesis. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That is true except for when he interprets, so that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 5 z5my figs-genericnoun ὁ προφητεύων…ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσαις 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” and people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies … anyone who speaks in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 5 o0b6 figs-explicit μείζων 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, **greater** indicates that **the one prophecying** does something that is more important and helpful than **the one speaking in tongues**. It does not mean that God cares about the person **prophesying** more than the person **speaking in tongues**. If you readers would misunderstand **greater**, you could state explicitly how or in what way the person is **greater**. Alternate translation: “does something more useful” or “does what is more valuable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 5 u9oq figs-infostructure ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater The ULT puts these clauses in parentheses because they give a qualification of what Paul has said about how **the one prophesying is greater than the one speaking in tongues**. In this clause, Paul clarifies that he is only speaking about **tongues** without interpretation. Further, if someone does **interpret** the **tongues**, then that can lead to **building up**, just like prophecy. Use a form in your language that would indicate a qualification or a parenthesis. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That is true except for when he interprets, so that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 5 g9k1 grammar-connect-exceptions ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 he would interpret If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. If you use this alternate translation, you may need to remove the parentheses. Alternate translation: “and does not interpret, because it is only when he interprets that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) -1CO 14 5 ut9b writing-pronouns διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Here, **he** could refer back specifically to **the one who speaks in tongues**, but it does not have to do so. The word **he** could refer to anyone who can **interpret**, not just the person who is speaking **in tongues**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **he** refers to anyonemore clearly. Alternate translation: “he or somebody else would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 14 5 ut9b writing-pronouns διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Here, **he** could refer back specifically to **the one speaking in tongues**, but it does not have to do so. The word **he** could refer to anyone who can **interpret**, not just the person who is speaking **in tongues**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **he** refers to anyone more clearly. Alternate translation: “he or somebody else would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 14 5 pmzu figs-gendernotations διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 5 o7ok figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 he would interpret Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one who speaks in tongues** and also “interprets” helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “growth” or “edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 6 fxhx grammar-connect-words-phrases νῦν δέ, ἀδελφοί 1 how will I benefit you? Here, **But now** introduces what Paul thinks is true. The word **now** does not refer to time here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But now** with a word or phrase that introduces what a person thinks is true. Alternate translation: “As it is, brothers,” or “But what is true, brothers, is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From 3e1b2f692bf01d9d3c07cbd7f6f49005f234b999 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:40:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 215/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 880f5fd025..48c5e89edd 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1850,7 +1850,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 5 g9k1 grammar-connect-exceptions ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 he would interpret If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. If you use this alternate translation, you may need to remove the parentheses. Alternate translation: “and does not interpret, because it is only when he interprets that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 14 5 ut9b writing-pronouns διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Here, **he** could refer back specifically to **the one speaking in tongues**, but it does not have to do so. The word **he** could refer to anyone who can **interpret**, not just the person who is speaking **in tongues**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **he** refers to anyone more clearly. Alternate translation: “he or somebody else would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 14 5 pmzu figs-gendernotations διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 14 5 o7ok figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 he would interpret Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one who speaks in tongues** and also “interprets” helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “growth” or “edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 5 o7ok figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 he would interpret Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one speaking in tongues** and also “interprets” helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “growth” or “edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 6 fxhx grammar-connect-words-phrases νῦν δέ, ἀδελφοί 1 how will I benefit you? Here, **But now** introduces what Paul thinks is true. The word **now** does not refer to time here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But now** with a word or phrase that introduces what a person thinks is true. Alternate translation: “As it is, brothers,” or “But what is true, brothers, is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 14 6 oemv figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 how will I benefit you? Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 6 jndd figs-123person ἔλθω…ὠφελήσω…λαλήσω 1 how will I benefit you? Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody comes … will he or she benefit … he or she speaks” or “people come … will they benefit … they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -1860,7 +1860,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 6 l71k figs-rquestion τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ? 1 how will I benefit you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” In other words, Paul would be of no **benefit** at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I will not benefit you unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 6 v7a9 grammar-connect-exceptions τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω 1 how will I benefit you? If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “will I not benefit you only when I speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 14 6 vqpn figs-abstractnouns ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ 1 how will I benefit you? If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **revelation**, **knowledge**, **prophecy**, or **teaching**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “reveal,” “know,” “prophesy,” and “teach.” Alternate translation: “either to show you things or to make you understand things or to prophesy to you or to instruct you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 14 7 d6mt figs-infostructure ὅμως τὰ ἄψυχα φωνὴν διδόντα, εἴτε αὐλὸς, εἴτε κιθάρα, ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul identifies what he is talking about first (**lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **they** in his sentence. If your readers would be confused by this structure, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “If even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—would not give different sounds” or “Take even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—as an example. If they would not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 7 d6mt figs-infostructure ὅμως τὰ ἄψυχα φωνὴν διδόντα, εἴτε αὐλὸς, εἴτε κιθάρα, ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul identifies what he is talking about first (**lifeless {things} giving sounds—whether flute or harp**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **they** in his sentence. If your readers would be confused by this structure, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “If even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—would not give different sounds” or “Take even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—as an example. If they would not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 7 cv7t translate-unknown τὰ ἄψυχα 1 they do not make different sounds Here**lifeless {things}** are things are inanimate objects, things that have never been alive. Paul is specifically thinking of instruments that humans use to make sounds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **lifeless {things}** with a word or phrase that normally refers to things that have never been alive. Alternate translation: “inanimate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 7 g2fx figs-idiom φωνὴν διδόντα…διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something could **give** a sound. This means that the thing creates or makes the sound. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **giving sounds** or **give different sounds** with a comparable idiom or expression. Alternate translation: “creating sounds … they would not create different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 7 xunn grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **flute** and **harp** really do **give different sounds**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if they actually did not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -1870,7 +1870,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 7 cfaw figs-activepassive πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον 1 how will it be known what is being played on the flute If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “how will anyone know the thing being played on the flute or the thing being played on the harp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 8 qdy0 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **For indeed** introduces another example that further supports what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For indeed** with a word or phrase that introduces another example. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 14 8 ykv3 figs-explicit ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ, τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον 1 who will prepare for battle? In Paul’s culture, soldiers would often use **a trumpet** to issue commands or signals before or during a **battle**. These signals could indicate that an enemy was coming, that the soldiers should attack or retreat, or various other things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Paul jumps from talking about **a trumpet** to talking about a **battle** because the **trumpet** was used in warfare. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet gives an uncertain sound when a solider uses it to signal other soldiers, who will prepare for battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 8 h3hv grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ 1 who will prepare for battle? Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **a trumpet** really does **give** a certain or clear **sound**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet actually were to give an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 14 8 h3hv grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ 1 who will prepare for battle? Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **a trumpet** really does “give” a certain or clear **sound**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet actually were to give an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 14 8 hauz figs-idiom ἄδηλον…φωνὴν δῷ 1 who will prepare for battle? In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something **gives** a **sound**. This means that the thing creates or makes the **sound**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **gives an uncertain sound** with a comparable idiom or expression. See how you translated this idiom in [14:7](../14/07.md). Alternate translation: “creates an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 8 ynnk figs-explicit ἄδηλον…φωνὴν 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **an uncertain sound** refers to notes that are not easily recognized or are difficult to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **an uncertain sound** with a word or phrase that refers to notes that are played poorly or are hard to hear. Alternate translation: “an unclear sound” or “an indistinct sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 8 z6jg figs-rquestion τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον? 1 who will prepare for battle? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one will.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “people would never prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From a62b5e44123a58d332a08f1faafa347b451433d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:45:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 216/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 48c5e89edd..263630773f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1875,18 +1875,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 8 ynnk figs-explicit ἄδηλον…φωνὴν 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **an uncertain sound** refers to notes that are not easily recognized or are difficult to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **an uncertain sound** with a word or phrase that refers to notes that are played poorly or are hard to hear. Alternate translation: “an unclear sound” or “an indistinct sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 8 z6jg figs-rquestion τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον? 1 who will prepare for battle? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one will.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “people would never prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 9 q9lk figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς…ἐὰν 1 who will prepare for battle? Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians would have inferred that Paul meant they would be like instruments that do not make clear sounds. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires more words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “You are like those instruments. Unless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 14 9 f9h6 οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς διὰ τῆς γλώσσης, ἐὰν μὴ εὔσημον λόγον δῶτε 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **tongue** could refer to: (1) the human body part that people use to speak words. In this case, **with {your} tongue** modifies **give intelligible speech**. Alternate translation: “In the same way also you, unless you use your tongue to give intelligible speech” (2) the unknown language that some of the Corinthians were speaking. In this case, **with your tongue** modifies the first **you**. Alternate translation: “You act in the same way when you speak in a tongue. Unless you give intelligible speech” +1CO 14 9 f9h6 οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς διὰ τῆς γλώσσης, ἐὰν μὴ εὔσημον λόγον δῶτε 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **tongue** could refer to: (1) the human body part that people use to speak words. In this case, **with {your} tongue** modifies **give intelligible speech**. Alternate translation: “In the same way also you, unless you use your tongue to give intelligible speech” (2) the unknown language that some of the Corinthians were speaking. In this case, **with {your} tongue** modifies the first **you**. Alternate translation: “You act in the same way when you speak in a tongue. Unless you give intelligible speech” 1CO 14 9 ltq2 figs-idiom εὔσημον λόγον δῶτε 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, to **give intelligible speech** refers to making words that other people understand. If your language does not use **give** for **speech** or words, you can use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “you speak intelligible words” or “you talk in intelligible language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 9 bw66 translate-unknown εὔσημον λόγον 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **intelligible speech** refers to words and sentences that other people can understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **intelligible speech** with a comparable expression that identifies language that can be understood. Alternate translation: “understandable speech” or “words that others can comprehend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 9 rlzw figs-rquestion πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ λαλούμενον? 1 who will prepare for battle? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it will not be understood.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the thing being spoken will never be understood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 9 qmc2 figs-activepassive γνωσθήσεται τὸ λαλούμενον 1 who will prepare for battle? If your language does not use the passive form in these ways, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses passive forms here to avoid stating who is speaking and who is understanding, which makes his question more general. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “you” are speaking and some other person is understanding. Alternate translation: “someone understand what you are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 9 m3cj figs-idiom εἰς ἀέρα λαλοῦντες 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **speaking into the air** is a way to say that the speech or words have no effect. In other words, no people but only **the air** hears the **speech**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **speaking into the air** with a comparable expression that describes words that have no effect or meaning. Alternate translation: “speaking empty words” or “talking to nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 9 m3cj figs-idiom εἰς ἀέρα λαλοῦντες 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **speaking into {the} air** is a way to say that the speech or words have no effect. In other words, no people but only **{the} air** hears the **speech**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **speaking into {the} air** with a comparable expression that describes words that have no effect or meaning. Alternate translation: “speaking empty words” or “talking to nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 10 ddu4 translate-unknown εἰ τύχοι 1 none is without meaning Here, **doubtless** indicates that Paul is assuming that there are **so many kinds of languages**. He is not arguing this and is not interested in proving it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **doubtless** with a comparable word or phrase that refers to something that is assumed to be true. Alternate translation: “assuredly” or “certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 10 cfkk οὐδὲν ἄφωνον 1 none is without meaning Here, **without meaning** could refer to: (1) how all the **languages** “communicate” clearly among those who know those languages. Alternate translation: “and none communicate nothing” (2) how all the languages use “sound” or “voice” to communicate. Alternate translation: “none is without sound” or “all of them use the voice” 1CO 14 10 im7a figs-litotes οὐδὲν ἄφωνον 1 none is without meaning Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “all have meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 14 11 dl95 figs-hypo ἐὰν οὖν μὴ εἰδῶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς, ἔσομαι τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβαρος, καὶ ὁ λαλῶν ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος. 1 none is without meaning Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he is with somebody who speaks a language that he does not know. In this situation, he and the other person are “foreigners” to each other. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose, then, that I do not know the meaning of a specific language. In this situation, I am a foreigner to anyone who speaks that language, and anyone who speaks that language is a foreigner to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1CO 14 11 drm2 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἐὰν οὖν 1 none is without meaning Here, **then** could introduce: (1) an inference from the previous verse. In other words, if every language communicates meaning ([14:10](../14/10.md)), **then** a person who does not understand that meaning is **a foreigner** to the person who speaks that language. Alternate translation: “Therefore, if” (2) a contrast with the previous verse. In other words, although every language communicates meaning ([14:10](../14/10.md)), a person who does not understand the language cannot grasp that meaning. Alternate translation: “But if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 14 11 myal grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν οὖν μὴ εἰδῶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς 1 none is without meaning Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that not knowing **the meaning of the language** leads to being a **foreigner to the one speaking** that language. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “Then, whenever I do not know the meaning of the language” or “Suppose then that I do not know the meaning of the language. Then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 14 11 myal grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν οὖν μὴ εἰδῶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς 1 none is without meaning Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that not knowing **the meaning of the language** leads to being a **foreigner to the one speaking** that language. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **If** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “Then, whenever I do not know the meaning of the language” or “Suppose then that I do not know the meaning of the language. Then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 14 11 ut5z figs-123person μὴ εἰδῶ…ἔσομαι…ἐμοὶ 1 none is without meaning Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody does not know … he or she will be … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 14 11 ueuu figs-abstractnouns τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς 1 none is without meaning If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **meaning**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “communicates” or “means.” Alternate translation: “what the language means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 11 szms translate-unknown βάρβαρος -1 none is without meaning Here, **foreigner** identifies someone with whom one does not share a culture and language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **foreigner** with a comparable term for someone who has a different language and culture. Alternate translation: “an outsider … will be an outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1897,7 +1897,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 12 di2n figs-possession πρὸς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Here Paul uses the possession form to speak about **building up** that affects the **church**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by translating **building up** as a verb with **church** as its object. Alternate translation: “so that you could build up the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 14 12 j1h7 figs-metaphor τὴν οἰκοδομὴν 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md), [5](../14/05.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 13 dsve figs-imperative ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ, προσευχέσθω 1 interpret Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the one speaking in tongues must pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) -1CO 14 13 j87g figs-genericnoun ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ 1 interpret Paul is speaking of people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 13 j87g figs-genericnoun ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ 1 interpret Paul is speaking of people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 13 yjos figs-ellipsis διερμηνεύῃ 1 interpret Here Paul omits what the person is going to **interpret** since he already stated it in the previous clause (**a tongue**). If you need to specify what the person will **interpret**, you could include a reference to the **tongue** here. Alternate translation: “he might interpret it” or “he might interpret what he said in the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 14 13 a378 figs-gendernotations διερμηνεύῃ 1 interpret Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she might interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 14 yi43 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν προσεύχωμαι γλώσσῃ, τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 my mind is unfruitful Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that praying **in a tongue** leads to the **spirit** praying but the **mind** being **unfruitful**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **If** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “Whenever I pray in a tongue, my spirit” or “Suppose that I pray in a tongue. Then, my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) From e882b0079c4722f1c7c8e131f86afe63101353dd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:47:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 217/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 63f141b343..bc7d8a74c8 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3032,7 +3032,7 @@ ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 ACT 21 39 a139 figs-imperative ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase **I ask of you** shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 21 40 qp2q writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had allowed The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 40 rk1y translate-symaction κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “In the Hebrew language”

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. +ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “In the Hebrew language”\n\nMost Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.\n\n### “The Way”\n\nNo one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen. ACT 22 1 lrs0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 22 1 xe46 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is using the word **fathers** to refer either to Jewish leaders who may be present or to Jewish men who are older than he is. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” or “My fellow Israelites young and old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 1 pe8t figs-imperative ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 hear to my defense to you now This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen as I explain myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) From 3a9a329da704dfa42d7a4c0a5fa239e3ec1fc546 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:50:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 218/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 263630773f..dce1906551 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1906,18 +1906,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 14 kjh6 figs-metaphor ὁ…νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν 1 my mind is unfruitful Here Paul speaks as if his **mind** were a plant or tree that could produce “fruit.” He states that his **mind** is **unfruitful** to indicate that it is not doing anything useful, just like a fruit tree that does not produce fruit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “my mind does nothing” or “my mind is not involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 15 vm6p figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν? 1 What should I do? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or solution. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I will tell you what I do.” or “This, then, is what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 15 nkgj figs-123person προσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ 1 What should I do? Here, just as in [14:14](../14/14.md), Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person, or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “People should pray with their spirits, and they should also pray with their minds. People should sing with their spirits, and they should also sing with their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -1CO 14 15 nneh grammar-connect-time-simultaneous προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ…ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. 1 What should I do? Here, doing things **with {my} mind** could happen: (1) at the same time as doing things **with {my} spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he will use both his **spirit** and **mind** at the same time when he “prays” or “sings.” Alternate translation: “and I will use my mind also … and I will use my mind also” (2) at a different time as doing things **with my spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he sometimes use his **spirit** and sometimes use his **mind**. Alternate translation: “but other times I will pray with my mind … but other times I will sing with my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +1CO 14 15 nneh grammar-connect-time-simultaneous προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ…ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. 1 What should I do? Here, doing things **with {my} mind** could happen: (1) at the same time as doing things **with {my} spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he will use both his **spirit** and **mind** at the same time when he “prays” or “sings.” Alternate translation: “and I will use my mind also … and I will use my mind also” (2) at a different time as doing things **with {my} spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he sometimes use his **spirit** and sometimes use his **mind**. Alternate translation: “but other times I will pray with my mind … but other times I will sing with my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 1CO 14 15 r11f τῷ Πνεύματι -1 pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mind Here, just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the **mind** but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with my inner spiritual being … with my inner spiritual being” or “with my heart … with my heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit … as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being … as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being” -1CO 14 16 fyc7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι…πῶς 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that blessing **with the spirit** leads to **the one who fills the place of the ungifted** being unable to **say the “Amen”**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “whenever you bless with the spirit, how” or “Suppose that you bless with the spirit. Then, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 14 16 fyc7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι…πῶς 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that blessing **with {the} spirit** leads to **the one filling the place of the ungifted** being unable to **say the “Amen”**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “whenever you bless with the spirit, how” or “Suppose that you bless with the spirit. Then, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 14 16 niu5 figs-yousingular εὐλογῇς…τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ…λέγεις 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul switches from using himself as an example to using one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, every **you** in this verse is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second-person singular as a second-person plural, or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, bless … your thanksgiving … you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -1CO 14 16 crew figs-explicit εὐλογῇς πνεύματι 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul is speaking about someone who is using **the spirit** only and not the “mind” to speak in “tongues.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “you bless in tongues with the spirit only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 16 crew figs-explicit εὐλογῇς πνεύματι 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul is speaking about someone who is using **{the}spirit** only and not the “mind” to speak in “tongues.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “you bless in tongues with the spirit only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 16 gi1q πνεύματι 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Just as in [4:14–15](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the mind but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with your inner spiritual being” or “with your heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “by the power of the Holy Spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs your inner spiritual being” 1CO 14 16 r4w5 figs-rquestion ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν? 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, the answer to the question is “he cannot.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the one who fills the place of the ungifted will not be able to say the ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 16 untg figs-metaphor ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Here Paul speaks as if there were a **place** for **the ungifted** which they would “fill.” He speaks in this way to characterize the person by the **place** they “fill.” In other words, a person who **fills the place of the ungifted** is characterized as **ungifted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is ungifted” or “the ungifted person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 16 untg figs-metaphor ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Here Paul speaks as if there were a **place** for **the ungifted** which they would “fill.” He speaks in this way to characterize the person by the **place** they “fill.” In other words, a person **filling the place of the ungifted** is characterized as **ungifted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is ungifted” or “the ungifted person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 16 g36b figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀναπληρῶν 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul is speaking of people who “fill” **the place of the ungifted** in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who fills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 16 j3e3 translate-unknown τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 the ungifted Here, **the ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the “tongue” in which the person is speaking. Alternate translation: “of the one who does not understand tongues” or “of the uninitiated” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “of the outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 16 ev63 figs-explicit ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ 1 say “Amen” Here, to **say the “Amen”** refers to responding in agreement to something that someone has said. This is because, in Christian gatherings, the word **Amen** was a common way to affirm or agree with someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **Amen** or why people would say itby using a word that indicates agreement or by referring simply to agreement. Alternate translation: “will … agree with” or “will … say that he agrees with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 16 i6o5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 say “Amen” Here, **your thanksgiving** refers back to what the person said when they were “blessing” **with the spirit**. Paul uses a different word here, but they mean basically the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **thanksgiving** by translating this phrase so that it clearly refers back to **bless with the spirit**. Alternate translation: “at what you said” or “at your blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 16 i6o5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 say “Amen” Here, **your thanksgiving** refers back to what the person said when they were “blessing” **with {the} spirit**. Paul uses a different word here, but they mean basically the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **thanksgiving** by translating this phrase so that it clearly refers back to **bless with {the} spirit**. Alternate translation: “at what you said” or “at your blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 16 jxn4 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 say “Amen” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **thanksgiving**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “thank.” Alternate translation: “at how you thanked God” or “at what you thanked God for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 16 m0x2 figs-gendernotations οὐκ οἶδεν 1 say “Amen” Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she does not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 17 a7wr figs-yousingular σὺ μὲν…εὐχαριστεῖς 1 you certainly give Here Paul continues to use one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, **you** in this verse is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second-person singular as a second-person plural, or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, certainly give thanks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) From 65e3d77c2cfbc27208761231c3159c99d3916097 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 14:56:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 219/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index dce1906551..9704239a37 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1925,23 +1925,23 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 17 w25k figs-metaphor ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 the other person is not built up Just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul here speaks as if a person were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **you** who are “giving thanks” are not helping other people become stronger, unlike the one who builds a house and thus makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the other person is not helped to grow” or “the other person is not edified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 17 m7cj figs-activepassive ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to emphasize the person who **is not built up** rather than emphasizing the person who is not doing the building up. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “you” did it. Alternate translation: “you do not build up the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 18 t27e figs-ellipsis πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**speak in tongues**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “all of you speak in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 14 19 w4pr figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Here, **in the church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meets to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in the church** by clarifying that **the church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 19 w4pr figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Here, **in {the} church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meets to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in {the} church** by clarifying that **{the} church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 19 jht9 translate-numbers πέντε 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Here Paul refers to **five** words to indicate just a few words in contrast to the **myriads** he will mention later on in the verse. There is no special significance to the number **five**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express and think that **five** is a special number with a number that would not be considered special or indicate that Paul has “a few” words in mind. Alternate translation: “four” or “only several” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 14 19 nzby figs-infostructure ἵνα καὶ ἄλλους κατηχήσω, ἢ μυρίους λόγους ἐν γλώσσῃ 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue If your language would naturally state the rest of the comparison before the purpose, you could rearrange these clauses. You may need to start a new sentence when you express the purpose. Alternate translation: “than myriads of words in a tongue. That way, I might also instruct others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 19 cbw8 figs-hyperbole μυρίους λόγους 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Here, much like in [4:15](../04/15.md), **myriads of words** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of **words**. If **myriad** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many words” or “a large number of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1CO 14 20 luu4 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 General Information: Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 14 20 luu4 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 General Information: Although **Brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 20 mh5t figs-metaphor μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε…τῇ κακίᾳ, νηπιάζετε 1 do not be children in your thinking Here, much like in [13:11](../13/11.md), Paul compares people to **children**. He is particularly thinking about how children do not know very much or do very much. Paul does not want the Corinthians to be like children in how children know very little. Rather, he wants the Corinthians to be like children in how children do very little **evil**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech as an analogy or in a nonfigurative way. If possible, preserve the metaphor, because Paul has already used “child” language in [13:11](../13/11.md). Alternate translation: “do not be immature, like children, … do very little evil, like children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 20 i2w1 figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ τῇ κακίᾳ, νηπιάζετε, ταῖς δὲ φρεσὶν, τέλειοι γίνεσθε 1 do not be children in your thinking If your language would naturally express the contrast before the comparison, you could move the clause about being **mature** before the clause about being **childlike**. Alternate translation: “Rather, become mature in the thoughts, and only be childlike in evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 20 y2og τῇ κακίᾳ 1 do not be children in your thinking Alternate translation: “about evil” 1CO 14 21 jx6l figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται 1 In the law it is written, If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to emphasize the words rather than emphasizing whoever wrote the words. If you must state who did the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “In the Law someone wrote” or “They wrote in the Law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 21 mbkb writing-quotations ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται 1 In the law it is written, In Paul’s culture, **it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Isaiah” (see [Isaiah 28:11–12](../isa/28/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It can be read in the Law” or “In the Law, the book of Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -1CO 14 21 up8a figs-explicit ἐν τῷ νόμῳ 1 In the law it is written, Here, **law** refers to all of the scriptures of Israel that we call the Old Testament. It does not refer just to the first five books or to books that have “laws.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **law** with a term that refers more clearly to the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “In the scriptures” or “In the Israelites’ sacred book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 21 up8a figs-explicit ἐν τῷ νόμῳ 1 In the law it is written, Here, **Law** refers to all of the scriptures of Israel that we call the Old Testament. It does not refer just to the first five books or to books that have “laws.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Law** with a term that refers more clearly to the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “In the Scriptures” or “In the Israelites’ sacred book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 21 f5gp figs-quotations γέγραπται, ὅτι ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων, λαλήσω τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ καὶ οὐδ’ οὕτως εἰσακούσονταί μου, λέγει Κύριος 1 In the law it is written, If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that by people of other tongues and by the lips of strangers God will speak to this people, but not even in this way will they hear him. So says the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 14 21 l9xz figs-parallelism ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here Paul quotes two phrases that mean basically the same thing. In Paul’s culture, poetry often included repetition of the same idea in different words. If your readers would not recognize this as poetry, and if they would misunderstand why Paul repeats the same idea, you could combine these two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “By strangers of other tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 14 21 trh3 figs-metonymy ἑτερογλώσσοις 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here, **tongues** refers to words that people speak with their **tongues**. It primarily refers here to foreign languages, not primarily to unknown languages spoken in Christian worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **tongues** with a word or phrase that refers to foreign languages. Alternate translation: “by people of other languages” or “people who speak different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 14 21 q6ku figs-metonymy χείλεσιν ἑτέρων 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here, **lips** refers to words that people speak with their **lips**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **lips** with a word or phrase that refers to what people say. Alternate translation: “the words of strangers” or “the speech of strangers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 14 21 s7uu figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers The Corinthians would have understood **this people** to refer to the people of Israel. If your readers would not make this inference, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 21 sltb figs-infostructure λαλήσω τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ καὶ οὐδ’ οὕτως εἰσακούσονταί μου, λέγει Κύριος 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here Paul includes **says the Lord** to indicate who spoke the words he quotes. If your language would indicate who is speaking before or in the middle of the quote, you could move **says the Lord** to a more natural place. Alternate translation: “I will speak to this people,’ says the Lord, ‘but not even in this way will they hear me.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 21 sltb figs-infostructure λαλήσω τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ καὶ οὐδ’ οὕτως εἰσακούσονταί μου, λέγει Κύριος 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here Paul includes **says {the} Lord** to indicate who spoke the words he quotes. If your language would indicate who is speaking before or in the middle of the quote, you could move **says {the} Lord** to a more natural place. Alternate translation: “I will speak to this people,’ says the Lord, ‘but not even in this way will they hear me.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 22 bp4j εἰς σημεῖόν εἰσιν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **sign** could be: (1) a negative indication of God’s judgment or wrath. This would fit with what the quotation from Isaiah in the last verse suggests. Alternate translation: “are an indication of God’s judgment” (2) a positive indication of what convicts or impresses people. This would fit with what “signs” means in [1:22](../01/22.md), but it does not fit well with the next two verses (see [14:23–24](../14/23.md)). Alternate translation: “are impressive” or “are convicting” 1CO 14 22 vl45 figs-infostructure σημεῖόν…οὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις…οὐ τοῖς ἀπίστοις, ἀλλὰ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 Connecting Statement: If your language would naturally put those whom the signs are **to** before those whom they are **not to**, you could rearrange the clauses so that the **not** clause is second. Alternate translation: “a sign to the unbelievers, not to those who believe … is to those who believe, not to the unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 22 qj5f figs-ellipsis ἡ…προφητεία, οὐ 1 not for unbelievers, but for believers Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians could have inferred: (1) the words “is for a sign,” since Paul used these words in the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “prophecy is for a sign, not” (2) the word “is,” since Paul’s language often implies “is” when there is no verb. See the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) From 9fe0df5fa0c6511fac732a3d6be5abec76b1c649 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 16:38:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 220/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index bc7d8a74c8..afba912ab9 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3043,7 +3043,7 @@ ACT 22 3 g311 figs-activepassive ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ ACT 22 3 b1dq translate-names Γαμαλιήλ 1 of Gamaliel The word **Gamaliel** is the name of the man who was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law at this time. See how you translated his name in [5:34](../05/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 22 3 iz4g figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν 1 according to the strictness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strictness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the most strict interpretation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 22 3 lqk7 figs-metaphor πατρῴου 1 of our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 22 3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 just as all of you are today Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way all of you are today” +ACT 22 3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 just as all of you are today Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way that all of you are today” ACT 22 4 dr8c figs-abstractnouns ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα ἄχρι θανάτου 1 who persecuted this Way unto death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who persecuted this Way to the point of killing those who belonged to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 22 4 a474 writing-pronouns ὃς…ἐδίωξα 1 who persecuted Paul is using the pronoun **who** to refer to himself. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 22 4 jy3z figs-metonymy ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 this Way Here, **this Way** represents the people who belonged to the group called the Way. Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to the group called the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 919878a5d2298d7fd9ca9856a5c8cf10bd516a1a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:17:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 221/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index afba912ab9..cd556dcafd 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3060,7 +3060,7 @@ ACT 22 7 a477 figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting ACT 22 8 a478 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος , ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 And I answered, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And he said to me, ‘I am Jesus the Nazarene, whom you are persecuting’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 8 a479 writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε 1 Who are you, Lord Paul was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 22 9 h95h figs-idiom τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 they did not hear the voice In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand,” since Luke says in [9:7](../01/01.md) that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 22 10 a480 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι 1 But I said, ‘What should I do, Lord?’ And the Lord said to me, ‘Arising, go into Damascus, and there it will be told to you about all that has been appointed to you to do.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 22 10 a480 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι 1 But I said, ‘What should I do, Lord?’ And the Lord said to me, ‘Arising, go into Damascus, and there it will be told to you about all that has been appointed to you to do.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 10 a91a figs-activepassive σοι λαληθήσεται 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 10 a481 figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν τέτακταί 1 all that has been appointed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 11 n1kb figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου 1 because of the glory of that light If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because that light was so bright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From e1fd2e6980d3ddb695a637b617e549dc57a33699 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:20:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 222/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index cd556dcafd..4f40ea1d04 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3072,7 +3072,7 @@ ACT 22 13 a483 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπέν μοι, Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφ ACT 22 13 un4g figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 Saul, brother Ananias was using the word **brother** as a title for **Saul**. The two men were not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias was already addressing Saul as someone who shared the same faith. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word “brother” is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 13 a484 figs-imperative ἀνάβλεψον 1 look up In one sense, this was not a command that Paul was capable of obeying, since he could not see. Instead, it was a command that directly caused him to be healed, if he would **look up** as if he could see. Alternate translation: “if you look up, you will be able to see” or see next note for another possibility. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative) ACT 22 13 x3kc figs-idiom ἀνάβλεψον 1 look up The expression **look up** can also mean “see again,” that is, to have one’s sight restored. If this is the meaning, then Ananias was telling Paul what Jesus was going to do for him. Alternate translation: “Jesus is restoring your sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 22 13 se47 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in the same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of sixty minutes, it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 22 13 se47 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in the same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 22 13 x4s0 figs-explicit κἀγὼ…ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν 1 And…I looked up to him Paul means implicitly that when he **looked up** at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 14 a485 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 And he said, ‘The God of our fathers appointed you to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 14 a486 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων 1 fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From b13e4b7e56d9d554f92381a5729f9ff8104841d0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:20:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 223/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4f40ea1d04..6087052faf 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3072,7 +3072,7 @@ ACT 22 13 a483 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπέν μοι, Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφ ACT 22 13 un4g figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 Saul, brother Ananias was using the word **brother** as a title for **Saul**. The two men were not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias was already addressing Saul as someone who shared the same faith. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word “brother” is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 13 a484 figs-imperative ἀνάβλεψον 1 look up In one sense, this was not a command that Paul was capable of obeying, since he could not see. Instead, it was a command that directly caused him to be healed, if he would **look up** as if he could see. Alternate translation: “if you look up, you will be able to see” or see next note for another possibility. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative) ACT 22 13 x3kc figs-idiom ἀνάβλεψον 1 look up The expression **look up** can also mean “see again,” that is, to have one’s sight restored. If this is the meaning, then Ananias was telling Paul what Jesus was going to do for him. Alternate translation: “Jesus is restoring your sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 22 13 se47 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in the same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 22 13 se47 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in the same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right at that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 22 13 x4s0 figs-explicit κἀγὼ…ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν 1 And…I looked up to him Paul means implicitly that when he **looked up** at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 14 a485 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 And he said, ‘The God of our fathers appointed you to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 14 a486 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων 1 fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 080b0f52f6419c9c6d2ac3785dddaa25d2673bb2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:34:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 224/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6087052faf..1299a5f043 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3077,7 +3077,7 @@ ACT 22 13 x4s0 figs-explicit κἀγὼ…ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν ACT 22 14 a485 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 And he said, ‘The God of our fathers appointed you to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 14 a486 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων 1 fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 14 a487 figs-nominaladj τὸν Δίκαιον 1 the Righteous One Ananias is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun to mean a particular person who is righteous. ULT adds the word **one** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the One who is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 22 14 a488 figs-metonymy τὸν Δίκαιον 1 the Righteous One Ananais is referring to the Messiah by association with the way the Messiah was **Righteous**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 22 14 a488 figs-metonymy τὸν Δίκαιον 1 the Righteous One Ananias is referring to the Messiah by association with the way the Messiah was **Righteous**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 14 dg8q figs-explicitinfo φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 the voice from his own mouth It might seem that the expression **the voice from his own mouth** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “his own voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 22 15 a489 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι ἔσῃ μάρτυς αὐτῷ πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους, ὧν ἑώρακας καὶ ἤκουσας 1 for you will be a witness for him to all men of what you have seen and heard If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation, continuing from the previous verse: “because I would be a witness for him to all men of what I had seen and heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 15 i5q8 figs-gendernotations πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους 1 to all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Ananias was using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -3086,7 +3086,7 @@ ACT 22 16 bhg9 καὶ νῦν 1 And now Here, **now** does not mean “at this ACT 22 16 mmx9 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις? 1 why are you delaying? ACT 22 16 a491 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Arising Here the term **arising** means that Ananias wanted Paul to take action, not that he wanted him to stand up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Come on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 22 16 lt2i figs-activepassive βάπτισαι 1 be baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 22 16 zr5p figs-metaphor καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 and wash away your sins Ananias is speaking as if Paul could literally **wash away** his **sins**. He is using a word picture to convey his meaning. He means that just as washing one’s body removes dirt, if Paul repents and asks Jesus for forgiveness, Jesus release him from the guilt and power sin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to show that you are asking Jesus to free you from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 22 16 zr5p figs-metaphor καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 and wash away your sins Ananias is speaking as if Paul could literally **wash away** his **sins**. He is using a word picture to convey his meaning. He means that just as washing one’s body removes dirt, if Paul repents and asks Jesus for forgiveness, Jesus releases him from the guilt and power sin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to show that you are asking Jesus to free you from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 16 g5dq figs-metonymy ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 calling on his name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “calling on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 16 a492 figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 his name By **his name**, Ananias implicitly means the name of Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 17 its2 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 And it happened to me that Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) From c892b6f0ac548b6792f98c83916b153d0565a0f9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 13:35:20 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 225/269] Removed extra spaces after bullets in Jonah, Philippians, 1 Thessalonians --- en_tn_32-JON.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 2 +- 3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_32-JON.tsv b/en_tn_32-JON.tsv index 6c2d8d610a..9a804cb7e9 100644 --- a/en_tn_32-JON.tsv +++ b/en_tn_32-JON.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -JON front intro hk4p 0 # Introduction to Jonah

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Jonah

1. Jonah tries to run away from Yahweh. (1:1-2:10)
* Jonah disobeys Yahweh’s first call to go to Nineveh. (1:1–3)
* Jonah and the Gentile sailors. (1:4–16)
* Yahweh provides a large fish to swallow Jonah, and he prays and is rescued. (1:17–2:10)
2. Jonah in Nineveh (3:1-4:11)
* Yahweh again calls Jonah to go to Nineveh, and Jonah proclaims Yahweh’s message. (3:1–4)
* Nineveh repents. (3:5-9)
* Yahweh decides not to destroy Nineveh. (3:10)
* Jonah is very angry with Yahweh. (4:1–3)
* Yahweh teaches Jonah about grace and mercy. (4:4–11)

### What is the Book of Jonah about?

Jonah, son of Amittai, was a prophet from Gath Hepher (2 Kings 14:25). This book tells about what happened to Jonah. It tells how Yahweh shows mercy and grace to Gentiles. It also tells how the Ninevites repented and called out to Yahweh for mercy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

Yahweh sent Jonah to warn the people of Nineveh that he was ready to punish them. Yahweh said that if they would repent he would not harm them. However, Jonah was an Israelite and he did not want the Ninevites to repent. So Jonah tried to sail away in the opposite direction instead of doing what Yahweh told him to do. But Yahweh stopped him by sending a storm and a large fish to swallow him.

Jonah repented and warned the Ninevites. As a result, Yahweh taught him that he is concerned about all people, not just the Israelites.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

This book is traditionally titled “The Book of Jonah” or just “Jonah.” Translators may decide to use a clearer title such as “The Book about Jonah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Jonah?

Jonah was probably involved in the writing of this book. However, scholars do not know who actually wrote it.

Jonah lived in the northern kingdom of Israel. He prophesied sometime between 800 and 750 B.C., during the reign of King Jeroboam II.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the nation of Assyria?

During the time of Jonah, Assyria was the most powerful kingdom in the ancient Near East. Nineveh was the capital city of Assyria.

Assyria was cruel to its enemies. Eventually, Yahweh punished the Assyrians for the wicked things they did.

### Did Assyria convert to Judaism?

Some scholars think that the Assyrians started worshiping Yahweh alone. However, most scholars think they continued to worship other false gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) +JON front intro hk4p 0 # Introduction to Jonah

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Jonah

1. Jonah tries to run away from Yahweh. (1:1-2:10)
* Jonah disobeys Yahweh’s first call to go to Nineveh. (1:1–3)
* Jonah and the Gentile sailors. (1:4–16)
* Yahweh provides a large fish to swallow Jonah, and he prays and is rescued. (1:17–2:10)
2. Jonah in Nineveh (3:1-4:11)
* Yahweh again calls Jonah to go to Nineveh, and Jonah proclaims Yahweh’s message. (3:1–4)
* Nineveh repents. (3:5-9)
* Yahweh decides not to destroy Nineveh. (3:10)
* Jonah is very angry with Yahweh. (4:1–3)
* Yahweh teaches Jonah about grace and mercy. (4:4–11)

### What is the Book of Jonah about?

Jonah, son of Amittai, was a prophet from Gath Hepher (2 Kings 14:25). This book tells about what happened to Jonah. It tells how Yahweh shows mercy and grace to Gentiles. It also tells how the Ninevites repented and called out to Yahweh for mercy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

Yahweh sent Jonah to warn the people of Nineveh that he was ready to punish them. Yahweh said that if they would repent he would not harm them. However, Jonah was an Israelite and he did not want the Ninevites to repent. So Jonah tried to sail away in the opposite direction instead of doing what Yahweh told him to do. But Yahweh stopped him by sending a storm and a large fish to swallow him.

Jonah repented and warned the Ninevites. As a result, Yahweh taught him that he is concerned about all people, not just the Israelites.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

This book is traditionally titled “The Book of Jonah” or just “Jonah.” Translators may decide to use a clearer title such as “The Book about Jonah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Jonah?

Jonah was probably involved in the writing of this book. However, scholars do not know who actually wrote it.

Jonah lived in the northern kingdom of Israel. He prophesied sometime between 800 and 750 B.C., during the reign of King Jeroboam II.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the nation of Assyria?

During the time of Jonah, Assyria was the most powerful kingdom in the ancient Near East. Nineveh was the capital city of Assyria.

Assyria was cruel to its enemies. Eventually, Yahweh punished the Assyrians for the wicked things they did.

### Did Assyria convert to Judaism?

Some scholars think that the Assyrians started worshiping Yahweh alone. However, most scholars think they continued to worship other false gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) JON 1 intro xvp2 0 # Jonah 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The narrative of this chapter starts abruptly. This could cause difficulty for the translator. The translator should not attempt to smooth this introduction unless absolutely necessary.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracle

In verse [Jonah 17](./17.md), there is the mention of “a great fish.” It may be difficult to imagine a sea creature big enough to swallow a man whole; he then survives for three days and nights inside. Translators should not try to explain miraculous events in an attempt to make it easier to understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Situational irony

There is an ironic situation in this chapter. This means that people do or say things that are the opposite of what one would expect them to do. Jonah is a prophet of God and should endeavor to do God’s will. Instead, he runs away from God. Although the Gentile sailors are not Israelites, they act out of faith and fear of Yahweh when sending Jonah to an almost certain death by throwing him overboard. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/willofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Sea

People in the ancient Near East also saw the sea as chaotic and did not trust it. Some of the gods they worshiped were gods of the sea. Jonah’s people, the Hebrews, feared the sea greatly. However, Jonah’s fear of Yahweh was not enough to keep him from sailing on a ship to get away from Yahweh. His actions are contrasted to the actions of the Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

Even though no one knows for sure where Tarshish was, the writer assumes that the reader knows that Jonah had to face away from Nineveh to go there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JON 1 1 jdr1 writing-newevent וַֽ⁠יְהִי֙ דְּבַר־יְהוָ֔ה 1 Now the word of Yahweh came This phrase introduces the first half of the story of Jonah. The same phrase introduces the second half of the story (3:1). This is a common way of beginning a historical story about a prophet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JON 1 1 ll6c figs-idiom וַֽ⁠יְהִי֙ דְּבַר־יְהוָ֔ה 1 Now the word of Yahweh came This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh spoke or communicated his message in some way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh spoke his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index fe8869a763..66e683e3b2 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1–11)
2. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12–26)
3. Instructions
* To be steadfast (1:27–30)
* To be united (2:1–2)
* To be humble (2:3–11)
* To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12–13)
* To be innocent, and shining as light (2:14–18)
4. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19–30)
5. Warning about false teachers (3:1–4:1)
6. Personal instruction (4:2–5)
7. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4–6)
8. Final remarks
* Values (4:8–9)
* Contentment (4:10–20)
* Final Greetings (4:21–23)

### Who wrote the book of Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice, even if they were suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus, the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill, so Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome him and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returned.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul tells the believers that it is much more important that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The words “you” and “your” always refer to the believers in Philippi, except for one time in 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?

The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired, and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ.

### What does Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” or “in the Lord,” etc.?

These kinds of expressions occur in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Philippians?

Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and some modern versions include it, but many other versions do not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1–11)
2. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12–26)
3. Instructions
* To be steadfast (1:27–30)
* To be united (2:1–2)
* To be humble (2:3–11)
* To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12–13)
* To be innocent, and shining as light (2:14–18)
4. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19–30)
5. Warning about false teachers (3:1–4:1)
6. Personal instruction (4:2–5)
7. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4–6)
8. Final remarks
* Values (4:8–9)
* Contentment (4:10–20)
* Final Greetings (4:21–23)

### Who wrote the book of Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice, even if they were suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus, the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill, so Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome him and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returned.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul tells the believers that it is much more important that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The words “you” and “your” always refer to the believers in Philippi, except for one time in 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?

The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired, and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ.

### What does Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” or “in the Lord,” etc.?

These kinds of expressions occur in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Philippians?

Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and some modern versions include it, but many other versions do not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Paul follows the normal practice of the time by beginning the letter with a statement of the names of the senders and the recipients. In that culture, the sender would then offer a good wish for the recipients. Paul does this in the form of a Christian blessing.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The day of Christ

This refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md)) PHP 1 1 xk9z translate-names Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Timothy **Paul** and **Timothy** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHP 1 1 bzfs ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul and Timothy Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index 327fa1bbcd..dd3e08c617 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 Thessalonians

In this letter, the apostle Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, encourages and makes appeals to the Thessalonian church (See: rc://en/tw/bible/names/thessalonica.md). Paul is the spokesman for all of them, using “we” to refer to the group, but in certain places Paul speaks for himself using “I” (See [2:18](../02/18.md); [3:5](../03/05.md); [5:27](../05/27.md)). The background story for the apostles’ activity in Thessalonica can be found in Acts 17:1–10.

1. Apostolic memories of the Thessalonian church (1:1–10)
* Greeting (1:1)
* Thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2–4)
* Examples of Thessalonian suffering (1:6–10)
2. Apostolic authority (2:1–16)
* Persecution of the church (2:1–13)
* Opposition to the church (2:14–16)
3. Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica (3:1–13)
* Reason for the visit (3:1–5)
* Report about the visit (3:6–13)
4. Apostolic teachings (4:1–18)
* Holiness (4:1–8)
* Christian love (4:9–12)
* Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)
5. Final teachings (5:1–28)
* Timing of the Second Coming of Christ (5:1–10)
* Final appeals and teachings (5:11–28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians, writing with the agreement of Silvanus and Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, Paul traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible.

Silvanus is also mentioned in 2 Corinthians 1:19; 2 Thessalonians 1:1; 1 Peter 5:12. “Silas,” the name used in the book of Acts, is a contracted form of Silvanus; Silas and Silvanus are considered to be the same person. Timothy was leader of the church at Ephesus (See 1 Timothy 1:1–4). Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth with these two men. The mention of all three men in 1:1 indicates they were in Thessalonica together at some point.

### What is the book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the church in the city of Thessalonica, after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. Ancient Thessalonica was located on the southeast coast of ancient Macedonia, and is now called Thessaloniki, located in northeast Greece. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background). In this letter Paul said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave (See Acts 17:1–10).

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Trinity

In this letter, the doctrine of the Holy Trinity finds solid support. The terms: God, Father, Son, Lord, Jesus, and Holy Spirit appear numerous times. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/god]])

### The gospel

In this letter, Paul frequently refers to the apostles’ ministry of the gospel and uses different phrases to communicate the concept of God’s good news about Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Prayer

Paul reassures the Thessalonians that his group of apostles frequently prays for them (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). He also gives instructions about prayer (See [5:2](../05/02.md)), and asks the Thessalonians to pray for them (See [5:25](../05/25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/pray]])

### Faith and Faithfulness

Through the letter the Thessalonians are commended for their faithfulness to God. They are reminded to trust God and remain faithful to gospel living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Apostolic authority

Much of this letter is a defense of the apostles authority, based on their teaching and living. The term “apostles” is used in [2:6](../02/06.md)) to reinforce that Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are sent by God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Second Coming of Christ

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### The fate of reposed Christians

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians, for some of them worried that those Christians who died would miss the great “day of the Lord” when Jesus returns.

### Idolatry

The Greek and Roman cultural background in Thessalonica meant that many members of the church were former pagans who practiced some sort of idolatry (See [1:9](../01/09.md)(See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/image]]).

### Suffering

Much of this letter addresses both the sufferings of the apostles and the Thessalonian church for faithfulness to the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/afflict]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/persecute]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/suffer]])

### Sanctification

The concept of holiness is prevalent in this letter. Chapter four discusses how a Christian should practice a holy life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sanctify]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in Christ Jesus” and “in the Lord Jesus Christ” and “in God the Father” and “in the Holy Spirit”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a union between God and Christians that includes all three persons of the Trinity. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about these kinds of expressions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “his coming” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus Christ”?

Paul used “coming” in a specific way in relation to Jesus Christ to refer to the time when he will come again to earth, this time displaying his glory and power and gathering his people to himself. Depending on the nuances of your language, you may need to translate this with a special concept or word.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “the word of God” or “the word of the Lord”?

Throughout this letter, Paul uses these well-known phrases or abbreviations to refer to the gospel message.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “brothers”?

Throughout this letter, “brothers” is a metaphor that refers to all believers, including females. (See [1:4](../01/04.md); 2:1, 9, 14, 17; 3:7; 4:1, 6, 10, 13; 5:1, 4, 12, 14, 26, 27)

### “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words “we”, “us,” and “our” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. In addition, “we”, “us,” and “our” are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of First Thessalonians

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts in its text the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants)
* “Grace and peace to you” (See [1:1](../01/01.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “but we became little children in the midst of you, as if a mother might comfort her own children” (See [2:7](../02/07.md)). Some other manuscripts read, “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and a servant of God” (See [3:2](../03/02.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 Thessalonians

In this letter, the apostle Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, encourages and makes appeals to the Thessalonian church (See: rc://en/tw/bible/names/thessalonica.md). Paul is the spokesman for all of them, using “we” to refer to the group, but in certain places Paul speaks for himself using “I” (See [2:18](../02/18.md); [3:5](../03/05.md); [5:27](../05/27.md)). The background story for the apostles’ activity in Thessalonica can be found in Acts 17:1–10.

1. Apostolic memories of the Thessalonian church (1:1–10)
* Greeting (1:1)
* Thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2–4)
* Examples of Thessalonian suffering (1:6–10)
2. Apostolic authority (2:1–16)
* Persecution of the church (2:1–13)
* Opposition to the church (2:14–16)
3. Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica (3:1–13)
* Reason for the visit (3:1–5)
* Report about the visit (3:6–13)
4. Apostolic teachings (4:1–18)
* Holiness (4:1–8)
* Christian love (4:9–12)
* Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)
5. Final teachings (5:1–28)
* Timing of the Second Coming of Christ (5:1–10)
* Final appeals and teachings (5:11–28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians, writing with the agreement of Silvanus and Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, Paul traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible.

Silvanus is also mentioned in 2 Corinthians 1:19; 2 Thessalonians 1:1; 1 Peter 5:12. “Silas,” the name used in the book of Acts, is a contracted form of Silvanus; Silas and Silvanus are considered to be the same person. Timothy was leader of the church at Ephesus (See 1 Timothy 1:1–4). Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth with these two men. The mention of all three men in 1:1 indicates they were in Thessalonica together at some point.

### What is the book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the church in the city of Thessalonica, after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. Ancient Thessalonica was located on the southeast coast of ancient Macedonia, and is now called Thessaloniki, located in northeast Greece. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background). In this letter Paul said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave (See Acts 17:1–10).

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Trinity

In this letter, the doctrine of the Holy Trinity finds solid support. The terms: God, Father, Son, Lord, Jesus, and Holy Spirit appear numerous times. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/god]])

### The gospel

In this letter, Paul frequently refers to the apostles’ ministry of the gospel and uses different phrases to communicate the concept of God’s good news about Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Prayer

Paul reassures the Thessalonians that his group of apostles frequently prays for them (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). He also gives instructions about prayer (See [5:2](../05/02.md)), and asks the Thessalonians to pray for them (See [5:25](../05/25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/pray]])

### Faith and Faithfulness

Through the letter the Thessalonians are commended for their faithfulness to God. They are reminded to trust God and remain faithful to gospel living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Apostolic authority

Much of this letter is a defense of the apostles authority, based on their teaching and living. The term “apostles” is used in [2:6](../02/06.md)) to reinforce that Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are sent by God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Second Coming of Christ

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### The fate of reposed Christians

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians, for some of them worried that those Christians who died would miss the great “day of the Lord” when Jesus returns.

### Idolatry

The Greek and Roman cultural background in Thessalonica meant that many members of the church were former pagans who practiced some sort of idolatry (See [1:9](../01/09.md)(See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/image]]).

### Suffering

Much of this letter addresses both the sufferings of the apostles and the Thessalonian church for faithfulness to the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/afflict]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/persecute]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/suffer]])

### Sanctification

The concept of holiness is prevalent in this letter. Chapter four discusses how a Christian should practice a holy life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sanctify]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in Christ Jesus” and “in the Lord Jesus Christ” and “in God the Father” and “in the Holy Spirit”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a union between God and Christians that includes all three persons of the Trinity. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about these kinds of expressions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “his coming” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus Christ”?

Paul used “coming” in a specific way in relation to Jesus Christ to refer to the time when he will come again to earth, this time displaying his glory and power and gathering his people to himself. Depending on the nuances of your language, you may need to translate this with a special concept or word.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “the word of God” or “the word of the Lord”?

Throughout this letter, Paul uses these well-known phrases or abbreviations to refer to the gospel message.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “brothers”?

Throughout this letter, “brothers” is a metaphor that refers to all believers, including females. (See [1:4](../01/04.md); 2:1, 9, 14, 17; 3:7; 4:1, 6, 10, 13; 5:1, 4, 12, 14, 26, 27)

### “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words “we”, “us,” and “our” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. In addition, “we”, “us,” and “our” are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of First Thessalonians

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts in its text the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants)
* “Grace and peace to you” (See [1:1](../01/01.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “but we became little children in the midst of you, as if a mother might comfort her own children” (See [2:7](../02/07.md)). Some other manuscripts read, “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and a servant of God” (See [3:2](../03/02.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 1

1. Greeting (1:1)
2. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian church (1:2–10)
* Memory of the Thessalonians (1:2–5)
* apostolic prayers (1:2)
* work of the Thessalonians (1:2–3)
* God’s election of the Thessalonians (1:4–5)
* Thessalonians’ example (1:6–10)
* reception of the apostles’ teaching (1:6)
* examples to Macedonia and Achaia (1:7–10)
* example of suffering (1:7)
* preaching of the gospel (1:8)
* turned away from idolatry to God (1:9)
* waiting for the Second Coming of Christ (1:10)

## Structure and Formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.
Verses 2–4 give a general thanksgiving and encouragement to the Thessalonian church.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Trinity

God the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. They are described in their identity, activity, and the union that the Christian has in them.

### Hardship

Like the apostles before them, the Thessalonian church endured persecution for the sake of the gospel. The way that they responded with faith to the gospel message even in affliction and then preached that gospel to others made them examples to the churches throughout the regions of Macedonia and Achaia.

### Faithfulness

Paul mentions the faithfulness of the Thessalonian church throughout this chapter. See, for example, “work of faith” in 1:3, “example to all those who believe” in 1:7, and “faith toward God” in 1:8. 1TH 1 1 ms5e figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church Here Paul omits some words that a sentence would need in order to be complete in many languages. Alternate translation: “We are Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, writing to the church” (See rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) 1TH 1 1 zivb figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church **Paul** is understood to be the author of this letter. **Silvanus and Timothy** are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If that might not be understood in your language, you could include this information in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From c43b1fddb1c53debfcbe59afa5a5c9dc3f45a0d4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:39:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 226/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 9704239a37..8c89e4969a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1971,8 +1971,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 26 f8ai figs-explicit τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here Paul could be asking this question about: (1) what his argument means for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “What then do I mean” (2) what the Corinthians should be doing. Alternate translation: “What then should you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 26 b79h figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 26 ke1q figs-go συνέρχησθε 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, **come together** refers to a group gathering in a specific place. Your language may say “go” or “gather” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whatever is most natural. Alternate translation: “you go together” or “you assemble together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -1CO 14 26 qgao writing-pronouns ἕκαστος 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, **each one** refers to specific or individual believers in the Corinthian church. Paul does not mean that every person **has** each of these things, and he also does not mean that **each** person has only one of these things. Rather, he means that individual people within the Corinthian church may have any of these things **when you come together**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **each one** with a word or phrase that more clearly indicates that Paul is speaking in general. Alternate translation: “every one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 14 26 m04v figs-parallelism ψαλμὸν ἔχει, διδαχὴν ἔχει, ἀποκάλυψιν ἔχει, γλῶσσαν ἔχει, ἑρμηνίαν ἔχει 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here Paul repeats **has** in order to emphasize any believer might “have” any of these things **when you come together**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul repeats **has** with another form that indicates that any person might have any of these things. Alternate translation: “has a psalm or a teaching or a revelation or a tongue or an interpretation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1CO 14 26 qgao writing-pronouns ἕκαστος 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, **each one** refers to specific or individual believers in the Corinthian church. Paul does not mean that every person **has** each of these things, and he also does not mean that **each** person has only one of these things. Rather, he means that individual people within the Corinthian church may have any of these things **When you come together**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **each one** with a word or phrase that more clearly indicates that Paul is speaking in general. Alternate translation: “every one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 14 26 m04v figs-parallelism ψαλμὸν ἔχει, διδαχὴν ἔχει, ἀποκάλυψιν ἔχει, γλῶσσαν ἔχει, ἑρμηνίαν ἔχει 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here Paul repeats **has** in order to emphasize any believer might “have” any of these things **When you come together**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul repeats **has** with another form that indicates that any person might have any of these things. Alternate translation: “has a psalm or a teaching or a revelation or a tongue or an interpretation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 14 26 qsx0 figs-abstractnouns ψαλμὸν ἔχει, διδαχὴν ἔχει, ἀποκάλυψιν ἔχει, γλῶσσαν ἔχει, ἑρμηνίαν ἔχει 1 What is tp be then, brothers? If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **revelation** or **interpretation**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “reveal” and “interpret.” If you do, you may need to translate all the items in the list with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “sings a psalm, instructs, explains something that was secret, speaks in a tongue, or interprets a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 26 dy8d figs-explicit ἑρμηνίαν 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, just as in [12:10](../12/10.md), **interpretation** refers specifically to interpreting **a tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the **interpretation** is about is an **interpretation** of a **tongue**. Alternate translation: “an interpretation of a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 26 xzz2 figs-imperative3p πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω 1 interpretation Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All things must happen for building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) From 954b5fb22469cb6b476aac76413ed6df15936e2a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:42:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 227/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 8c89e4969a..2f7c214b8e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1991,7 +1991,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 28 u0ia figs-gendernotations σιγάτω…ἑαυτῷ…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** and **himself** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 28 c2wj figs-imperative3p σιγάτω…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be silent … he needs to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 28 nzye figs-explicit σιγάτω…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Here, **let him be silent** and **let him speak** refer specifically to speaking in “tongues.” They do not refer in general to any speaking **in church**. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “let him not speak the tongue … let him speak the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 28 pqky figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:19](../14/19.md), **in the church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meets to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in the church** by clarifying that **the church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 28 pqky figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:19](../14/19.md), **in {the} church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meets to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in {the} church** by clarifying that **{the} church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 28 fl59 figs-idiom ἑαυτῷ…καὶ τῷ Θεῷ 1 must interpret Here, **to himself and to God** could refer to: (1) how the person should keep the “tongue” between **himself** and **God**. In other words, the only people who experience the “tongue” are the person speaking it and God. This would mean that the person speaking the “tongue” says words in their head or very quietly. Alternate translation: “in his mind to God” or “quietly to God” (2) how the person should speak the “tongue” after the meeting is over and “he” is by **himself**. In this way, only the person who speaks the “tongue” and **God** hear it. Alternate translation: “to God when he is by himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 29 x2fd grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here, **But** introduces similar instructions about a new topic (prophecy). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a related topic. Alternate translation: “In the same way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 14 29 a9iz figs-explicit προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak Paul does not explicitly state in what situation **two or three prophets** should **speak**. He does not mean that only **two or three** prophets can ever speak. He could be speaking about: (1) each time the believers gathered to worship God. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak every time you gather together” (2) the periods between when **the others evaluate**. In this case, **two or three prophets** can speak before the evaluation happens. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak consecutively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From fda7bb2c734381a70005ba9a91b68aa99fbb9996 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:16:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 228/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2f7c214b8e..76c8db676a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2009,12 +2009,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 31 xr69 figs-idiom καθ’ ἕνα 1 prophesy one by one Here, **one by one** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one by one** with a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “in turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 31 nrq1 figs-activepassive πάντες παρακαλῶνται 1 all may be encouraged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to emphasize the person who is **encouraged** instead of the person doing the encouraging. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the ones who **prophesy** do it. Alternate translation: “the prophets may encourage all” or “the prophecies may encourage all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 32 rcat figs-activepassive πνεύματα προφητῶν, προφήταις ὑποτάσσεται 1 all may be encouraged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the **spirits** rather than focusing on the **prophets** If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that **prophets** do it. Alternate translation: “prophets subject the spirits of prophets” or “prophets govern the spirits of prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 32 o950 translate-unknown πνεύματα προφητῶν…ὑποτάσσεται 1 all may be encouraged Here, **the spirits of the prophets** could refer to: (1) the “spiritual” gift that the **prophets** have by the power of the Holy Spirit. This is supported by [14:12](../14/12.md), where the word that is here translated **spirits** is there translated “spiritual gifts.” Alternate translation: “the spiritual gifts of prophets are subject to” or “what the Holy Spirit enables prophets to do is subject to” (2) the **spirits** that are part of the **prophets**, that is, their inner life or nonphysical parts. Alternate translation: “how the prophets act is subject to” or “the minds of prophets are subject to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 14 32 cli1 προφήταις 1 all may be encouraged Here, **prophets** could refer to (1) the same **prophets** who have **the spirits**. In this case, **prophets** control their own **spirits**. Alternate translation: “these prophets” (2) other **prophets**. In this case, some **prophets** (those who are not speaking) control the **spirits** of different **prophets** (those who are speaking). Alternate translation: “the other prophets” +1CO 14 32 o950 translate-unknown πνεύματα προφητῶν…ὑποτάσσεται 1 all may be encouraged Here, **{the} spirits of the prophets** could refer to: (1) the “spiritual” gift that the **prophets** have by the power of the Holy Spirit. This is supported by [14:12](../14/12.md), where the word that is here translated **spirits** is there translated “spiritual gifts.” Alternate translation: “the spiritual gifts of prophets are subject to” or “what the Holy Spirit enables prophets to do is subject to” (2) the **spirits** that are part of the **prophets**, that is, their inner life or nonphysical parts. Alternate translation: “how the prophets act is subject to” or “the minds of prophets are subject to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 32 cli1 προφήταις 1 all may be encouraged Here, **prophets** could refer to (1) the same **prophets** who have **{the} spirits**. In this case, **prophets** control their own **spirits**. Alternate translation: “these prophets” (2) other **prophets**. In this case, some **prophets** (those who are not speaking) control the **spirits** of different **prophets** (those who are speaking). Alternate translation: “the other prophets” 1CO 14 33 iki9 grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 God is not a God of confusion Here, **For** introduces the reason why “the spirits of the prophets are subject to prophets” ([14:32](../14/32.md)). Since the prophetic gift comes from God, it should fit with who God is. Since God is **not of confusion, but of peace**, so the prophetic gift must be **of peace** as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a statement. Alternate translation: “you could know this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 14 33 my65 figs-infostructure οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης 1 God is not a God of confusion If your language would not naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “God is of peace, not of confusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 33 ze95 figs-possession οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης 1 God is not a God of confusion Here Paul uses the possessive form to state that **God** is characterized by **peace**, not by **confusion**. If your language does not use the possessive form to characterize someone, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “God is not a confused God but a peaceful God” or “God is not related to confusion but to peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 14 33 cu4y figs-abstractnouns ἀκαταστασίας…εἰρήνης 1 God is not a God of confusion If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confusion** and **peace**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “confused” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “confused … peaceful” or “a confused God … a peaceful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 14 33 cu4y figs-abstractnouns ἀκαταστασίας…ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης 1 God is not a God of confusion If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confusion** and **peace**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “confused” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “confused, but peaceful” or “a confused God, but a peaceful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 33 k0ma figs-infostructure εἰρήνης. ὡς ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῶν ἁγίων, 1 God is not a God of confusion The phrase **As in all the churches of the saints** could modify: (1) the two verses that follow. Supporting this option is how the first half of this verse sounds like a conclusion and how it does not make much sense to say that **God** is a specific way **in all the churches**. See the ULT for this option. (2) the first sentence in this verse. Supporting this option is how “in the churches” is repeated near the beginning of the next verse and how Paul uses a phrase similar to this one at the end of sentences (see [4:17](../04/17.md); [7:17](../07/17.md)). Alternate translation: “of peace, as in all the churches of the saints.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 33 m76o figs-metaphor ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις 1 God is not a God of confusion Here, **in all the churches** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **churches** as if they were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gatherings of believers who meet to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in all the churches** by clarifying that **the churches** refers to gatherings of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in all the gatherings of believers” or “in all the worship services” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 34 gjv2 figs-explicit αἱ γυναῖκες 1 let be silent Here, **women** could refer to: (1) married **women** (and possibly **women** with close male relatives). In support of this view is the reference to “{their} own husbands” in [14:35](../14/35.md). Alternate translation: “wives” (2) **women** in general. Alternate translation: “women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 8dd3afbc28286a351cc9cbdf12cb2dfb203c84ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:19:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 229/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 76c8db676a..9869b97895 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2041,9 +2041,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 37 h265 figs-gendernotations δοκεῖ…ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Although **himself** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **himself** and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “thinks himself or herself … let him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 37 ab6u figs-imperative3p ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to acknowledge” or “he should acknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 1CO 14 37 b81a figs-pastforfuture γράφω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses the present tense to refer to this letter, 1 Corinthians. If your language would not use the present tense to refer to a letter that one is currently writing, you could use the tense that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -1CO 14 37 z0hu figs-possession Κυρίου…ἐντολή 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses the possessive form to the describe the **command** as: (1) a **command** that he gives with the authority of **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord authorizes” or “a command that has the Lord’s authority” (2) a **command** that **the Lord** gave or currently gives. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 14 37 z0hu figs-possession Κυρίου…ἐντολή 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses the possessive form to the describe the **command** as: (1) a **command** that he gives with the authority of **{the} Lord**. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord authorizes” or “a command that has the Lord’s authority” (2) a **command** that **{the} Lord** gave or currently gives. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 14 37 rc1r figs-abstractnouns Κυρίου…ἐντολή 1 he should acknowledge If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “what the Lord commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 14 38 ilzx grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…τις ἀγνοεῖ 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul speaks as **If** some of the Corinthians might be **ignorant**, but he expects that some of them truly might be. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “whoever is ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 38 ilzx grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…τις ἀγνοεῖ 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul speaks as **if** some of the Corinthians might be **ignorant**, but he expects that some of them truly might be. He uses **if** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **if** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “whoever is ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 38 m1lx ἀγνοεῖ, ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here, **ignorant** could refer to: (1) the opposite of “acknowledge” in the last verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)), that is, not accepting the authority of something or someone. Alternate translation: “does not acknowledge this, let him not be acknowledged” (2) not knowing that something is true. Alternate translation: “does not know this, let him continue not to know” 1CO 14 38 b8fk figs-explicit ἀγνοεῖ 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul does not state what the person **is ignorant** about. However, the previous verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)) implies that the person **is ignorant** about how what Paul has written is a command of the Lord. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “is ignorant that I am writing a command from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 38 fde9 figs-imperative3p ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must be ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) From bf09730b5ca59b4d51e193ffb6bec8030a30c2a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:24:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 230/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 9869b97895..a2b544b064 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2066,11 +2066,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 2 xh29 figs-activepassive δι’ οὗ καὶ σῴζεσθε 1 you are being saved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) God does it by means of the “gospel.” Alternate translation: “through which God is also saving you” (2) the gospel does it. Alternate translation: “which also is saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 2 s83s σῴζεσθε 1 you are being saved Here Paul uses the present tense to speak about the Corinthians’ salvation. Paul could use this tense because: (1) he wants the Corinthians to realize that they are only finally **saved** when Jesus comes back, and right now they are in the process of **being saved**. Alternate translation: “you are currently being saved” or “you will be saved” (2) he is using the present tense to speak about something that is generally true. He does not have a specific time in mind for when the Corinthians are **saved**. Alternate translation: “you are saved” 1CO 15 2 nx1q grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 you are being saved Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that holding **firmly to the word** leads to **being saved**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -1CO 15 2 d8or figs-metaphor τίνι λόγῳ…κατέχετε 1 you are being saved Here Paul speaks as if **the word** were a physical object that the Corinthians could **hold firmly to**. He speaks in this way to refer to trust or belief that is as strong as someone’s grip on an object that they do not wish to lose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you never let go of the word” or “you persistently believe the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 2 d8or figs-metaphor τίνι λόγῳ…κατέχετε 1 you are being saved Here Paul speaks as if **what word** were a physical object that the Corinthians could **hold firmly to**. He speaks in this way to refer to trust or belief that is as strong as someone’s grip on an object that they do not wish to lose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you never let go of the word” or “you persistently believe the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 2 le2k figs-metonymy τίνι λόγῳ 1 the word I preached to you Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 15 2 opvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ 1 the word I preached to you Here, **unless** introduces the opposite of holding **firmly to the word**. Paul means that they **believed in vain** if they do not **hold firmly to the word**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this contrast by stating the contrast more explicitly. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “However, if you do not hold firmly to the word, you believed in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1CO 15 2 opvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ εἰκῇ ἐπιστεύσατε 1 the word I preached to you Here, **unless** introduces the opposite of holding **firmly to the word**. Paul means that they **believed in vain** if they do not **hold firmly to the word**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this contrast by stating the contrast more explicitly. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “However, if you do not hold firmly to the word, you believed in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 15 3 cqxn figs-metaphor παρέδωκα…ὑμῖν ἐν πρώτοις 1 as of first importance Here Paul speaks as if the gospel that he preached to the Corinthians were a physical object that he **delivered** to them. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that he truly taught the Corinthians the gospel, and they now know it as well as if they held it in their hands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I instructed you among the first in” or “I handed over to you among the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 15 3 sp4p figs-explicit ἐν πρώτοις 1 as of first importance Here, **among the first** could mean that: (1) what Paul is about to say is one of the **first** things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the first things I said” (2) what Paul is about to say is one of the most important things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the most important things I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 3 sp4p figs-explicit ἐν πρώτοις 1 as of first importance Here, **among {the} first** could mean that: (1) what Paul is about to say is one of the **first** things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the first things I said” (2) what Paul is about to say is one of the most important things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the most important things I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 3 azw6 figs-extrainfo ὃ καὶ παρέλαβον 1 for our sins Here Paul does not clarify from whom he **received** this information. In [11:23](../11/23.md), which uses very similar words, Paul says that he “received” things “from the Lord.” Here, then, it is likely that he also **received** what he is about to say “from the Lord.” However, he may also mean that he **received** this specific way of expressing the good news from another human being. Since Paul avoids stating from whom he **received** what he is about to say, you should also try to avoid stating it. If you must state whom he **received** it from, you could refer to “the Lord” or generally to people. Alternate translation: “what I also received from the Lord” or “what I also received from others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 15 3 f5yp ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 for our sins Alternate translation: “in order to deal with our sins” 1CO 15 3 inj2 writing-quotations κατὰ τὰς Γραφάς 1 according to the scriptures In Paul’s culture, **according to** was a normal way to introduce a reference to an important text. In this case, Paul does not state exactly which part of **the Scriptures** he has in mind but rather refers to **the Scriptures** as a whole. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “as the Scriptures say” or “as can be read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) From 56968580b92c498268e327a385b4cf0a4c6aa63c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:39:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 231/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1299a5f043..145dccbc62 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3091,8 +3091,8 @@ ACT 22 16 g5dq figs-metonymy ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα α ACT 22 16 a492 figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 his name By **his name**, Ananias implicitly means the name of Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 17 its2 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 And it happened to me that Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 22 18 a493 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι, σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει ἐξ Ἰερουσαλήμ, διότι οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 And I saw him saying to me, ‘Hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem, because they will not accept your testimony about me’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I saw him telling me to hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem because they would not accept my testimony about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -ACT 22 18 jy2c writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 him The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 22 18 a494 figs-doublet σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει 1 Hurry and go away in haste The expressions **hurry** and **in haste** mean similar things. Jesus was using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Go away as fast as you can” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 22 18 jy2c writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 him The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 22 18 a494 figs-doublet σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει 1 Hurry and go away in haste The expressions **Hurry** and **in haste** mean similar things. Jesus was using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Go away as fast as you can” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 22 19 a495 figs-quotesinquotes κἀγὼ εἶπον, Κύριε, αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται ὅτι ἐγὼ ἤμην φυλακίζων καὶ δέρων κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς, τοὺς πιστεύοντας ἐπὶ σέ 1 And I said, ‘Lord, they themselves know that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues those who believed in you If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I told the Lord that they themselves knew that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues those who believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 19 q5cl writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 they themselves know The pronouns **they themselves** refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews here in Jerusalem who do not believe in you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 22 19 im4n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 they themselves know Paul is adding the word **themselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “they know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -3101,10 +3101,10 @@ ACT 22 20 udrd figs-activepassive ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφ ACT 22 20 y7t1 figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled Paul is referring to Stephen’s death by association with the way his **blood** was **spilled** when his enemies killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 21 a497 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν πρός με, πορεύου, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἰς ἔθνη μακρὰν ἐξαποστελῶ σε 1 But he said to me, ‘Go, because I will send you far away to the Gentiles’” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he told me to go because he would send me far away to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 22 22 a498 figs-metonymy τούτου τοῦ λόγου 1 this word This could mean: (1) that the crowd became upset when they heard the specific **word** “Gentiles.” Alternate translation: “they heard the word ‘Gentiles’ (2) that the term **word** means what Paul said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul say this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 22 22 a499 figs-metaphor ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες 1 they lifted up their voice, saying Luke is speaking as if crowd in Jerusalem literally **lifted up** its **voice**. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 22 22 a500 τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 their voice If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of lifting up a voice but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices” -ACT 22 22 ta8z figs-metonymy αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 Remove such a one from the earth The crowd is referring to Pauls death by association with the way they would **remove** him **from the earth** if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 22 22 a501 figs-explicit οὐ…καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν 1 it was not right for him to live The crowd means implicitly that it was **not right** for Paul to **live** even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 22 22 a499 figs-metaphor ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες 1 they lifted up their voice, saying Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Jerusalem literally **lifted up** its **voice**. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 22 22 a500 τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 their voice If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of "lifting up a voice" but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices” +ACT 22 22 ta8z figs-metonymy αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 Remove such a one from the earth The crowd is referring to Paul's death by association with the way they would **remove** him **from the earth** if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 22 22 a501 figs-explicit οὐ…καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν 1 it was not right for him to live The crowd meant implicitly that it was **not right** for Paul to **live** even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 23 b6a7 translate-symaction ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια 1 casting off their outer garments When the people in the crowd removed their outer garments, this was at least a symbolic action indicating that they felt they should stone Paul to death. They took off their long robes as they would have done in order to throw stones at Paul more easily. But some of the people may actually have intended to try to stone Paul even though he was in the custody of the Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “casting off their outer garments as if they were going to throw stones at Paul to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 22 23 a502 translate-symaction κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα 1 throwing dust into the air This could mean: (1) that the people in the crowd were **throwing dust into the air** to symbolize how they wanted to throw stones at Paul, who was on the steps above them. Alternate translation: “throwing dust into the air as if they were throwing stones at Paul” (2) that the people in the crowd were doing this to demonstrate how angry they were. Alternate translation: “angrily throwing dust into the air” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 22 24 h6gp figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 ordered him to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 6e1bec4a921ea43404c17b6cb2e4ae473d08ad74 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:46:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 232/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 145dccbc62..919081b9c5 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3110,7 +3110,7 @@ ACT 22 23 a502 translate-symaction κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰ ACT 22 24 h6gp figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 ordered him to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 24 sth6 τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [21:34](../21/34.md). ACT 22 24 og3n figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by scourges If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-metonymy εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by scourges The commanded did not want **scourges** to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping, **scourges**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-metonymy εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by scourges The commander did not want **scourges** to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments, **scourges**, that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 24 a503 translate-unknown μάστιξιν 1 by scourges The term **scourges** describes leathern thongs that had pieces of metal sewn up in them. Your language may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “by whips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 22 25 ar63 writing-pronouns προέτειναν 1 they stretched…out The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers who were going to whip Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 22 25 a504 figs-quotations εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν ἑστῶτα ἑκατόνταρχον ὁ Παῦλος, εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Paul said to the centurion standing by, “If it is lawful for you to scourge a man Roman and uncondemned?” Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the centurion who was standing by whether it was lawful for him and his soliders to scourge a man who was a Roman and had not been condemned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) From 50a05fbb51ae1e970ec4a3f357f43490ab65d8bf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:52:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 233/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index a2b544b064..a250a28bd4 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2121,8 +2121,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 12 ja71 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν…νεκρῶν 1 raised Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people … of the dead people” or “from the corpses … of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 15 12 ub2p figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν? 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “that cannot be true.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is shocked that they are saying this or that it is contradictory to say this. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I am amazed that some among you say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” or “it does not make sense for some among you to say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 12 izkz figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the dead will not resurrect” or “the dead will not be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 15 13 eqxa εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised Here, **there is no resurrection of the dead** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:12](../15/12.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “if that were true” -1CO 15 13 zwcu grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that there really is a **resurrection of the dead**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that “there is no resurrection of the dead” (see [15:12](../15/12.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if there actually were no resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 15 13 eqxa εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised Here, **there is no resurrection of {the} dead** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:12](../15/12.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “if that were true” +1CO 15 13 zwcu grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that there really is a **resurrection of {the} dead**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that “there is no resurrection of the dead” (see [15:12](../15/12.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if there actually were no resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 13 eq2c figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the dead will not resurrect” or “the dead will not be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 13 vbhj figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the dead people” or “of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 15 13 mi12 figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται 1 not even Christ has been raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on Jesus, who was **raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has not raised even Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 9b5f5acecd34cd7a720e0b683fc5c3714403a662 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:54:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 234/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 919081b9c5..111f8d781b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3111,7 +3111,7 @@ ACT 22 24 h6gp figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι α ACT 22 24 sth6 τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [21:34](../21/34.md). ACT 22 24 og3n figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by scourges If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-metonymy εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by scourges The commander did not want **scourges** to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments, **scourges**, that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 22 24 a503 translate-unknown μάστιξιν 1 by scourges The term **scourges** describes leathern thongs that had pieces of metal sewn up in them. Your language may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “by whips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 22 24 a503 translate-unknown μάστιξιν 1 by scourges The term **scourges** describes leathern thongs that had small pieces of metal attached to them to inflict more damage. Your language may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “by whips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 22 25 ar63 writing-pronouns προέτειναν 1 they stretched…out The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers who were going to whip Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 22 25 a504 figs-quotations εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν ἑστῶτα ἑκατόνταρχον ὁ Παῦλος, εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Paul said to the centurion standing by, “If it is lawful for you to scourge a man Roman and uncondemned?” Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the centurion who was standing by whether it was lawful for him and his soliders to scourge a man who was a Roman and had not been condemned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 If it is lawful for you to whip a man Roman and uncondemned? Paul is using the question form to challenge the right of the centurion and his soldiers to whip him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman citizen and who is uncondemned!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 48e410f06944fd68e678f356a4c178b2aa359c2e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:55:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 235/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index a250a28bd4..660a103277 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2138,12 +2138,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 15 r0xf figs-exclusive εὑρισκόμεθα…ἐμαρτυρήσαμεν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, just as “our” did in [15:14](../15/14.md), **we** refers to Paul and the other apostles mentioned in earlier verses (see [15:11](../15/11.md)). It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 15 15 ctn5 figs-possession ψευδομάρτυρες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 we are found to be false witnesses about God Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that he and other apostles would be **false witnesses** who say false things about **God**. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can express the idea by using a word such as “about” or by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “false witnesses concerning God” or “falsely testifying about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 15 15 aq5s figs-idiom κατὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 we are found to be Here, **concerning God** could indicate: (1) that **God** is a person about whom **we testified**. Alternate translation: “about God” (2) that **we testified** against **God** by saying he did something that he did not do. Alternate translation: “against God” (3) that **God** is the authority by which **we testified**. Alternate translation: “by God” or “by God’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 15 15 w2rj grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἴπερ ἄρα νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if then the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 15 15 w2rj grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἴπερ ἄρα νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **{the} dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if then the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 15 szk1 figs-activepassive νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on who **are** or **are not raised** rather than focusing on the person doing the “raising.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 15 ju4x figs-nominaladj νεκροὶ 1 we are found to be Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 15 16 fbuz grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 we are found to be Here, **For** introduces again (see [15:13](../15/13.md)) Paul’s proof that Christ was not raised if it is true that **the dead are not raised**. He reintroduces this proof because he stated at the end of the last verse that God did not raise Christ if the dead are not raised (see [15:15](../15/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces a proof. Alternate translation: “That is true because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 15 16 a0fl νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be Here, **the dead are not raised** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:15](../15/15.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “that were true” -1CO 15 16 mjq9 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 15 16 fbuz grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 we are found to be Here, **For** introduces again (see [15:13](../15/13.md)) Paul’s proof that Christ was not raised if it is true that **{the} dead are not raised**. He reintroduces this proof because he stated at the end of the last verse that God did not raise Christ if the dead are not raised (see [15:15](../15/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces a proof. Alternate translation: “That is true because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 15 16 a0fl νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be Here, **{the} dead are not raised** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:15](../15/15.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “that were true” +1CO 15 16 mjq9 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **{the} dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 16 rf43 figs-nominaladj νεκροὶ 1 we are found to be Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 15 16 ieza figs-activepassive νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 we are found to be If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on who **are** or **are not raised** rather than focusing on the person doing the “raising.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 16 nrsp figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται 1 we are found to be If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **Christ**, who has or has not **been raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has not raised even Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2155,8 +2155,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 17 hcnt figs-metaphor ἔτι ἐστὲ ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here Paul speaks as if **your sins** were something that a person could be **in**. By speaking in this way, he indicates that the **sins** characterize the person’s life or even control the person’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in your sins** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “your sins still rule over you” or “you are still guilty of your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 17 kkc4 figs-abstractnouns ἔτι ἐστὲ ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sins**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “sin.” Alternate translation: “you are still people who sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 18 tnfe grammar-connect-words-phrases ἄρα καὶ 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here, **then also** introduces another inference from the conditional statement “if Christ has not been raised” in [15:17](../15/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **then also** connects to the beginning of the previous verse by restating the premise from that verse. Alternate translation: “Again, if Christ has not been raised, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 15 18 ej91 figs-euphemism οἱ κοιμηθέντες 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Paul is referring to people who have died as **those who have fallen asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **those who have fallen asleep** with a different polite way of referring to those who have died, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who have passed away” or “those who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1CO 15 18 jb0k figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies **those who have fallen asleep** as those who have believed **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “who believed in Christ” or “who are believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 18 ej91 figs-euphemism οἱ κοιμηθέντες 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Paul is referring to people who have died as **the ones having fallen asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones having fallen asleep** with a different polite way of referring to those who have died, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who have passed away” or “those who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +1CO 15 18 jb0k figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies **the ones having fallen asleep** as those who have believed **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “who believed in Christ” or “who are believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 18 stvz translate-unknown ἀπώλοντο 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here, **have perished** could indicate that **those who have fallen asleep in Christ**: (1) will not live again, or will cease to exist. Alternate translation: “have been destroyed” or “are gone” (2) are not saved. Alternate translation: “have not been saved” or “are lost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 19 fv8e grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ, ἐν Χριστῷ ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον 1 of all people Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that it is not **only in this life** that we **have hope in Christ**, since we also **have hope** for a new life. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If only in this life did we actually have hope in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 19 tmk8 figs-infostructure εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ…ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον 1 of all people Here, **only** could modify: (1) **in this life**. Alternate translation: “If it is only in this life that we have hope” (2) **we have hope**. Alternate translation: “If in this life we only have hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) From 03795f4ae7903f3ba88a27480eed1f9ebc5fd1e5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 18:57:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 236/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 111f8d781b..cb8061ee2e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3119,7 +3119,7 @@ ACT 22 25 a505 figs-explicit ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκα ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? The centurion is using the question form to warn the commander that he should not have Paul whipped. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 22 26 a506 figs-synecdoche τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? The centurion is speaking of the commander, one person who was involved in having Paul whipped, to mean everyone who was involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 26 a507 figs-explicit Ῥωμαῖός 1 a Roman As in the previous verse, here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 22 27 pe31 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…ὁ 1 to him…he The pronouns **them** **him** and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul…he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 22 27 pe31 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…ὁ 1 to him…he The pronouns **them**, **him**, and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 22 28 dr2w figs-explicit ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The commander is saying implicitly that does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large sum of money If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **citizenship**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying a large sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 22 28 a508 figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ…καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I indeed was born Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) From fd96594ec35d8df8f733ec269bd1a47d51eb0742 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:00:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 237/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 660a103277..cbb17e8763 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2157,7 +2157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 18 tnfe grammar-connect-words-phrases ἄρα καὶ 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here, **then also** introduces another inference from the conditional statement “if Christ has not been raised” in [15:17](../15/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **then also** connects to the beginning of the previous verse by restating the premise from that verse. Alternate translation: “Again, if Christ has not been raised, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 15 18 ej91 figs-euphemism οἱ κοιμηθέντες 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Paul is referring to people who have died as **the ones having fallen asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones having fallen asleep** with a different polite way of referring to those who have died, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who have passed away” or “those who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 15 18 jb0k figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies **the ones having fallen asleep** as those who have believed **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “who believed in Christ” or “who are believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 15 18 stvz translate-unknown ἀπώλοντο 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here, **have perished** could indicate that **those who have fallen asleep in Christ**: (1) will not live again, or will cease to exist. Alternate translation: “have been destroyed” or “are gone” (2) are not saved. Alternate translation: “have not been saved” or “are lost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 15 18 stvz translate-unknown ἀπώλοντο 1 your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins Here, **have perished** could indicate that **the ones having fallen asleep in Christ**: (1) will not live again, or will cease to exist. Alternate translation: “have been destroyed” or “are gone” (2) are not saved. Alternate translation: “have not been saved” or “are lost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 19 fv8e grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ, ἐν Χριστῷ ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον 1 of all people Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that it is not **only in this life** that we **have hope in Christ**, since we also **have hope** for a new life. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If only in this life did we actually have hope in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 19 tmk8 figs-infostructure εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ…ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον 1 of all people Here, **only** could modify: (1) **in this life**. Alternate translation: “If it is only in this life that we have hope” (2) **we have hope**. Alternate translation: “If in this life we only have hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 15 19 iwky figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ 1 of all people If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “while we are currently living do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -2168,11 +2168,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 20 a385 figs-activepassive Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **Christ**, who was **raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 20 n6cl figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Christ has been raised from the dead, the firstfruit of those who have fallen asleep Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 15 20 zw31 figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴ τῶν κεκοιμημένων 1 the firstfruits Here, **firstfruits** refers to what farmers first gathered from their fields. Often, these **firstfruits** were offered to God to thank him for providing food. What Paul emphasizes here is that **firstfruits** implies that there will be more “fruits”, that is, crops or produce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul uses **firstfruits** to emphasize that Jesus’ resurrection implies more resurrections with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “and he is like the firstfruits, since his resurrection means that more of those who have fallen asleep will be raised” or “the guarantee that those who have fallen asleep will be raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 15 20 dcym figs-euphemism τῶν κεκοιμημένων 1 the firstfruits Here Paul is referring to people who have died as **those who have fallen asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **those who have fallen asleep** with a different polite way of referring to those who have died, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who have passed away” or “those who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1CO 15 21 bzud grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπειδὴ 1 death came by a man Here, **since** introduces a logical statement about how things work. Paul assumes that everyone agrees that **death {is} by a man**. His point is that, **since** things work that way, **by a man also the resurrection of the dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **since** with a word or phrase that introduces this kind of logical connection. Alternate translation: “since we know that” or “because it is true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 15 20 dcym figs-euphemism τῶν κεκοιμημένων 1 the firstfruits Here Paul is referring to people who have died as **the ones having fallen asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones having fallen asleep** with a different polite way of referring to those who have died, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who have passed away” or “those who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +1CO 15 21 bzud grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπειδὴ 1 death came by a man Here, **since** introduces a logical statement about how things work. Paul assumes that everyone agrees that **death {is} by a man**. His point is that, **since** things work that way, **by a man also resurrection of {the} dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **since** with a word or phrase that introduces this kind of logical connection. Alternate translation: “since we know that” or “because it is true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 15 21 uca8 figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος 1 death came by a man If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “everyone dies by a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 15 21 mjjw figs-extrainfo δι’ ἀνθρώπου…καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου 1 death came by a man Here, the first **man** that Paul refers to would be “Adam,” the first man. When Adam sinned, **death** became a part of human life (see especially [Genesis 3:17–19](../gen/3/17.md)). The second **man** that Paul refers to is Christ, whose resurrection guarantees and begins **the resurrection of the dead**. However, since Paul explains this in the next verse ([15:22](../15/22.md)), if possible do not include this information here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **a man** to make it clear that a specific **man** is in view in both cases. Alternate translation: “is by a specific man, by a specific man also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -1CO 15 21 gsgb figs-ellipsis δι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος, καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου ἀνάστασις 1 death came by a man In both clauses, Paul omits the verb **is** because the Corinthians would infer it. If your readers would not infer this verb, you could include it in the first clause (as the ULT does) or in both clauses. Alternate translation: “death is by a man, by a man also is the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 15 21 mjjw figs-extrainfo δι’ ἀνθρώπου…καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου 1 death came by a man Here, the first **man** that Paul refers to would be “Adam,” the first man. When Adam sinned, **death** became a part of human life (see especially [Genesis 3:17–19](../gen/3/17.md)). The second **man** that Paul refers to is Christ, whose resurrection guarantees and begins the **resurrection of {the} dead**. However, since Paul explains this in the next verse ([15:22](../15/22.md)), if possible do not include this information here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **a man** to make it clear that a specific **man** is in view in both cases. Alternate translation: “is by a specific man, by a specific man also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +1CO 15 21 gsgb figs-ellipsis δι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος, καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου ἀνάστασις 1 death came by a man In both clauses, Paul omits the verb **{is}** because the Corinthians would infer it. If your readers would not infer this verb, you could include it in the first clause (as the ULT does) or in both clauses. Alternate translation: “death is by a man, by a man also is the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 15 21 gf8p figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν 1 by a man also came the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the dead will resurrect” or “the dead will be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 21 wnsi figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 by a man also came the resurrection of the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the dead people” or “of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 15 22 srba figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ…ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ 1 the firstfruits Here Paul uses the spatial metaphors **in Adam** and **in Christ** to describe the union of people with **Adam** and **Christ**. Paul does not specify how this union occurs, but what is clear is that those who are united to **Adam** will **die**, while those who are united to **Christ** will **be made alive**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are related to Adam … those who are related to Christ” or “in union with Adam … in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From e4a35b74a5d10cf81519355aff285e22b81dac85 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:02:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 238/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index cb8061ee2e..90903d3671 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3120,7 +3120,7 @@ ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you ACT 22 26 a506 figs-synecdoche τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? The centurion is speaking of the commander, one person who was involved in having Paul whipped, to mean everyone who was involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 26 a507 figs-explicit Ῥωμαῖός 1 a Roman As in the previous verse, here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 27 pe31 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…ὁ 1 to him…he The pronouns **them**, **him**, and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 22 28 dr2w figs-explicit ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The commander is saying implicitly that does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 22 28 dr2w figs-explicit ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The commander is saying implicitly that he does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large sum of money If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **citizenship**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying a large sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 22 28 a508 figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ…καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I indeed was born Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 22 28 rly1 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ…καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I indeed was born If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed have been a citizen since birth” or “I indeed inherited citizenship from my father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 401ead2f7c38987af6cc6a0bd52c60540d1f5d8b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:04:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 239/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index cbb17e8763..5c3748dfc7 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2182,10 +2182,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 22 qusf figs-explicit πάντες 2 the firstfruits Here, **all** contrasts with the **all** who are **in Adam** earlier in the sentence. Paul is not trying to argue about how many people **will be made alive again**. Rather he is contrasting how **all** who are **in Adam** end up dying, while **all** who are **in Christ** end up being **made alive**. If your readers would think that Paul is making a claim about how many people are **made alive**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies **all** as those who are **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “all who believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 23 ngp8 figs-idiom ἕκαστος δὲ ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ τάγματι…Χριστός 1 the firstfruits Here, **in {his} own order** identifies that things happen in a specific sequence or in turn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in {his} own order** with a word or phrase that does introduce a sequence. Alternate translation: “But these things happen in sequence: first, Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 23 zwxy figs-ellipsis ἕκαστος…ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ τάγματι 1 the firstfruits Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that, first, **each** is made alive **in {his} own order**. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include these words. Alternate translation: “each will be made alive in his own order” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 15 23 f3lg figs-gendernotations ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ 1 the firstfruits Although **his** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **his** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in his or her own” or “in their own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 15 23 f3lg figs-gendernotations ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ 1 the firstfruits Although **{his}** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{his}** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in his or her own” or “in their own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 15 23 p4g9 figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴ Χριστός 1 the firstfruits Here, just as in [15:20](../15/20.md), **firstfruits** refers to what farmers first gathered from their fields. Often, these **firstfruits** were offered to God to thank him for providing food. What Paul emphasizes here is that **firstfruits** implies that there will be more “fruits”, that is, crops or produce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul uses **firstfruits** to emphasize that Jesus’ resurrection implies that there will be more resurrections with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Christ, who is like the firstfruits” or “the guarantee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 23 bzh4 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the firstfruits Here, **his coming** refers specifically to Jesus “coming back” to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **at his coming** with a phrase that more clearly refers to Jesus’ “second coming.” Alternate translation: “when he comes again” or “at his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 15 23 xr5q figs-possession οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the firstfruits Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **those** who belong to or believe in **Christ**. If your language does not use that form for this meaning, you can express the idea with a phrase such as “belong to” or “believe in.” Alternate translation: “those who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 15 23 xr5q figs-possession οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the firstfruits Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ones** who belong to or believe in **Christ**. If your language does not use that form for this meaning, you can express the idea with a phrase such as “belong to” or “believe in.” Alternate translation: “those who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 15 24 any2 grammar-connect-time-sequential εἶτα 1 General Information: Here, **Then** introduces events that occur after the “coming” in the last verse ([15:23](../15/23.md)). Paul does not clarify how soon after the “coming” these events will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Then** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies events happening in sequence. Alternate translation: “Next will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 15 24 fp4n figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 General Information: Here, **the end** identifies that something has reached its goal and thus ended. Paul does not state explicitly what **end** he has in mind, but the Corinthians would have inferred that he meant **the end** of the world as it currently exists. This does not mean that there will be no more world, but it means that things will be very different after **the end**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **end** Paul is speaking aboutexplicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of this world” or “the end of the way things are now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 24 towh figs-infostructure ὅταν παραδιδῷ τὴν Βασιλείαν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί; ὅταν καταργήσῃ πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν 1 General Information: Here, **when he has abolished** will occur before **when he hands over**. In Paul’s language, the sequence is clear even though the events are not in order. If your language would put the events in order, you could rearrange these two clauses to make the sequence clearer. Alternate translation: “when he has abolished all rule and all authority and power, when he hands over the kingdom to the God and Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) From 7b5966e3849522555b8c5ed9831a13f94a511a50 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:14:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 240/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 90903d3671..35bbb5d505 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3127,13 +3127,13 @@ ACT 22 28 rly1 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ…καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I in ACT 22 29 a509 figs-explicit ἐφοβήθη 1 was afraid The implication is that the commander **was afraid** that the higher Roman authorities would punish him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 30 a510 figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 the certain Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 22 30 kx58 figs-explicit ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 he released him This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### “Called a curse”

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 23 1 lrs1 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection of the dead\n\nThe Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])\n\n### “Called a curse”\n\nSome Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Whitewash\n\nThis is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 23 1 lrs1 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 23 1 lrs5 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 23 1 nn2q figs-hyperbole πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ 1 in all good conscience Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in [5:1](../05/01.md) and [9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 23 2 a565 translate-symaction τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα 1 to strike his mouth Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his **mouth** that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed wall Paul is referring to the way a **wall** can be painted white to make it look clean. Paul was suggesting that in the same way, Ananias appeared to look morally innocent, but he was really full of evil intent. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you who pretend to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed wall Paul is referring to the way a **wall** can be painted white to make it look clean. Paul was suggesting that, in the same way, Ananias appeared to look morally innocent, but he was really full of evil intent. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you who pretend to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion καὶ σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 And do you sit judging me by the law and, acting contrary to the law, command me to be struck? Paul is using the question form to challenge Ananias for what he has done. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not sit judging me by the law while acting contrary to the law by commanding me to be struck!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 23 3 m6nb figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 command me to be struck If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “command someone to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men standing by Paul are using the question form to rebuke him for saying what he said. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not insult the high priest of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 0fcdc5272f9cd88152bd77f7cc15a63221fb5b5c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:39:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 241/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 35bbb5d505..b1fec75f10 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3158,7 +3158,7 @@ ACT 23 9 a520 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτ ACT 23 9 a521 figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος … 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel … These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 23 10 f568 figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 Paul be torn apart by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they tear Paul apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 10 tqhu figs-hyperbole μὴ διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 lest Paul be torn apart by them Luke is making an overstatement here to emphasize the danger that Paul was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “lest they cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 23 11 i9w5 figs-idiom τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 on the following night This expression indicates the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 23 11 i9w5 figs-idiom τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 on the following night This expression indicates the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 23 11 a522 writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 23 11 r4q4 figs-explicit εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι 1 to testify in Rome Jesus assumes that Paul will know that he means Paul will **testify** about him in Rome. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 23 12 a523 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 69f0a2a03d98ed7c86145be343638151e93c7377 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:53:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 242/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 5c3748dfc7..d74ba2c6e9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2212,26 +2212,26 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 27 isfu writing-quotations ὅταν…εἴπῃ ὅτι 1 he has put everything under his feet In Paul’s culture, **when it says** is a normal way to refer back to a text that has already been mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring back to what he just said. Alternate translation: “when the quote reads,” or “when we see in the quote the words,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 27 gspq figs-quotations εἴπῃ ὅτι πάντα ὑποτέτακται 1 he has put everything under his feet If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Make sure that it is clear that Paul is repeating **he has put everything** from the previous quote so that he can comment on it. Alternate translation: “it says that he has put everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 15 27 bvxd figs-idiom δῆλον ὅτι 1 he has put everything under his feet Here, **{it is} clear** indicates that someone is pointing out something that is or should be obvious. In other words, the author does not need to argue for what is **clear** and can instead just point it out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{it is} clear** with a comparable word or phrase that introduces something obvious. Alternate translation: “you could tell that” or “it is obvious that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 15 27 lzex figs-explicit τοῦ ὑποτάξαντος αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 he has put everything under his feet Here the Corinthians would have known that **the one who put everything** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “the one who put everything in subjection to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 27 lzex figs-explicit τοῦ ὑποτάξαντος αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 he has put everything under his feet Here the Corinthians would have known that **the one having put everything** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “the one who put everything in subjection to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 27 p2m3 translate-unknown ἐκτὸς 1 he has put everything under his feet Here, **excepted** identifies something as an “exception” to a general rule or statement. Here Paul means that **the one who put everything** is not included in **everything**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{is} excepted** with a word or phrase that identifies an exception. Alternate translation: “is not included” or “is not subjected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 28 xm8u figs-activepassive ὑποταγῇ…τὰ πάντα 1 all things are subjected to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **all {things}** that are **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has subjected all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 28 im2j guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς 1 the Son Paul here refers to God **the Son** as opposed to God “the Father,” whom he referred to in [15:24](../15/24.md). Use a translation that clearly refers to God **the Son**. Alternate translation: “God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1CO 15 28 a1cd figs-activepassive καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς, ὑποταγήσεται 1 the Son himself will be subjected If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **the Son** who is **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) the **Son** does it to himself. Alternate translation: “the Son will also subject himself” (2) “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will subject the Son himself also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 28 m6e3 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς 1 the Son himself will be subjected Here, **himself** focuses attention on **the Son** and emphasizes that **the Son** is the one doing this. If **himself** would not draw attention to **the Son** in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “even the Son” or “the Son indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1CO 15 28 ksj4 figs-explicit τῷ ὑποτάξαντι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 the Son himself Here, just as in [15:27](../15/27.md), the Corinthians would have known that **the one who subjected all {things}** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “to the one who subjected all things to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 28 ksj4 figs-explicit τῷ ὑποτάξαντι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 the Son himself Here, just as in [15:27](../15/27.md), the Corinthians would have known that **the one having subjected all {things}** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “to the one who subjected all things to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 28 aye7 ὁ Θεὸς 1 the Son himself Here, **God** could refer to: (1) **God** the Father specifically. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (2) all three persons that are **God**. Alternate translation: “the Trinity” or “the trinitarian God” 1CO 15 28 v3lb figs-idiom πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 the Son himself Here, **all in all** is a phrase that emphasizes that **God** rules and controls everything that exists. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **all in all** with a comparable phrase that refers to how **God** rules and controls **all** things. Alternate translation: “supreme” or “the one who rules all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 29 j7o9 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐπεὶ 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Here, **Otherwise** introduces the opposite of what Paul has argued in [15:12–28](../15/12.md). If what he has argued about Jesus’ resurrection and its importance is not true, then what he says in this verse must be true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Otherwise** with a word or phrase that introduces an opposite or contrast. Alternate translation: “If all that is not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 15 29 a4d4 figs-rquestion τί ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν? 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “They will accomplish nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “those who are baptized for the dead do nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 29 izah figs-activepassive ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are getting **baptized** rather than focusing on the person doing the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “will those do whom others baptize” or “will those do who receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 15 29 jpb7 figs-explicit ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Here Paul speaks of “doing” something in the future. He could be referring to: (1) the intended result of being **baptized**, which happens after the baptism. Alternate translation: “will those accomplish who are baptized” (2) what the people **who are baptized** think that they are doing. Alternate translation: “do those who are baptized think that they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 15 29 m7v6 figs-explicit ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν…βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? It is unclear what being **baptized for the dead** actually means and what kind of practice it refers to. What is clear is that the practice only makes sense if one believes that **the dead** are **raised**. If possible, express these phrases in general terms. Two of the most common ways to understand being **baptized for the dead** are that it could refer to: (1) the practice of living believers receiving baptism in place of people who died without being baptized. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized in place of the dead … are they baptized in their place” (2) people receiving baptism because they believe that the **dead** will “rise.” They could be expecting their own resurrection or the resurrection of people they knew who are **dead**. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized with the dead in mind … are they baptized with them in mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 29 jpb7 figs-explicit ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Here Paul speaks of “doing” something in the future. He could be referring to: (1) the intended result of being **baptized**, which happens after the baptism. Alternate translation: “will those accomplish who are baptized” (2) what the people **being baptized** think that they are doing. Alternate translation: “do those who are baptized for the dead think that they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 29 m7v6 figs-explicit ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν…βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? It is unclear what **being baptized for the dead** actually means and what kind of practice it refers to. What is clear is that the practice only makes sense if one believes that **the dead** are **raised**. If possible, express these phrases in general terms. Two of the most common ways to understand **being baptized for the dead** are that it could refer to: (1) the practice of living believers receiving baptism in place of people who died without being baptized. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized in place of the dead … are they baptized in their place” (2) people receiving baptism because they believe that the **dead** will “rise.” They could be expecting their own resurrection or the resurrection of people they knew who are **dead**. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized with the dead in mind … are they baptized with them in mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 29 js1o figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν…νεκροὶ 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people … the dead people” or “the corpses … the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 15 29 t3yc grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ὅλως νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 are not raised Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **the dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 15 29 t3yc grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ὅλως νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 are not raised Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **{the} dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **{the} dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 29 jdc9 figs-activepassive νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 the dead are not raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are or **are not raised** rather than focusing on the person doing the raising. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 29 s7kx figs-rquestion τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 why then are they baptized for them? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no reason why.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “they are baptized for them for nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 29 mdnr figs-activepassive βαπτίζονται 1 why then are they baptized for them? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are getting **baptized** rather than focusing on the person doing the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “do others baptize them” or “do they receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 15 29 wibf writing-pronouns βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 why then are they baptized for them? Here, **they** refers to the people **who are baptized for the dead**, while **them** refers to **the dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly what people these pronouns the refer to. Alternate translation: “are these people baptized for the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 15 29 wibf writing-pronouns βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 why then are they baptized for them? Here, **they** refers to the people **being baptized for the dead**, while **them** refers to **{the} dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly what people these pronouns the refer to. Alternate translation: “are these people baptized for the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 30 mh1y grammar-connect-words-phrases τί καὶ 1 Why then, are we in danger every hour? Here, **Why also** introduces another response to the condition “If the dead are not raised at all” in [15:29](../15/29.md). Use a word or phrase that clearly connects this question back to that condition. Alternate translation: “Again, if that is true, why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 15 30 h4ra figs-rquestion τί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν? 1 Why then, are we in danger every hour? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no reason why.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “We also are in danger every hour for nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 30 ogf1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Why then, are we in danger every hour? Here, **we** refers to Paul and other apostles who preach the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From eee48f866860598a0dc90853bdef3d3dd599e4fc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:56:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 243/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d74ba2c6e9..b340a778ea 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2243,7 +2243,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 31 v5iv τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν 1 I swear by my boasting in you Alternate translation: “my boasting about you” 1CO 15 31 znl3 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 my boasting in you, brothers, which I have in Christ Jesus our Lord Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 15 31 p3ym figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν 1 my boasting in you Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus our Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies Paul’s **boasting** as something that only matters or is valid in his union with Christ. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus our Lord” or “because I am united to Christ Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 15 32 q6mb figs-rquestion εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ, τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος? 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no profit.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “There is no profit to me, according to men, if I fought wild beasts at Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 15 32 q6mb figs-rquestion εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ, τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος? 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no profit.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “There is no profit to me, according to men, if I fought wild beasts at Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 32 vgax figs-idiom τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **the profit to me** refers to something that is good for Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the profit to me** with a comparable word or phrase that refers to something that is good or beneficial for someone. Alternate translation: “What good is it to me” or “How does it benefit me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 32 ghif figs-infostructure εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** could modify: (1) **I fought**. In this case, Paul would be fighting with merely human goals and strategies. Alternate translation: “if I fought according to men against wild beasts” (2) **wild beasts**. In this case, Paul would be identifying the phrase **wild beasts** as a figurative reference to his enemies. Alternate translation: “if I fought wild beasts, speaking,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 15 32 vslh figs-idiom κατὰ ἄνθρωπον 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** identifies thinking or acting in only human ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **according to men**by using a word or phrase that refers to what people who do not believe say and argue. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans think” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2251,7 +2251,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 32 wvra grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 32 lm3v figs-metaphor ἐθηριομάχησα 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus Here, the **wild beasts** could be: (1) a figurative reference to enemies, who acted like **wild beasts**. In support of this is the fact that, except for this verse, the Bible does not talk about Paul fighting **wild beasts**. Alternate translation: “I fought savage enemies” or “I strove with opponents as fierce as wild beasts” (2) a literal reference to fighting **wild** animals. Alternate translation: “I fought against wild animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 32 maht translate-unknown ἐν Ἐφέσῳ 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus **Ephesus** was a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Paul spent time there soon after leaving Corinth (see [Acts 18:19–21](../act/18/19.md)). After some more travels, he visited **Ephesus** and stayed there for more than two years ( [Acts 19:1–20:1](../act/19/01.md)). Neither story mentions **wild beasts**, and Paul does not clarify which visit he is speaking about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Ephesus** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies it as a city that Paul visited. Alternate translation: “in Ephesus city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 15 32 nu0s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **the dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 15 32 nu0s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **{the} dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **{the} dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 32 c36a writing-quotations οὐκ ἐγείρονται, φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν, αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνῄσκομεν 1 Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die The Corinthians would have recognized **“Let use eat and drink, for tomorrow we die”** as a common saying. The same words appear in [Isaiah 22:13](../isa/22/13.md), but the saying may have been used more generally by many people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces this saying with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “are not raised, as the saying goes, ‘Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 32 y2nr figs-quotations οὐκ ἐγείρονται, φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν, αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνῄσκομεν 1 Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the saying as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Make sure that your readers know that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “are not raised, let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die, as people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 15 32 w7t7 figs-idiom φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν 1 Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die Here, **Let us eat and drink** refers to lavish or wild eating and drinking. It does not refer to regular meals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that this phrase refers to partying or wild behavior with a word or phrase that more clearly expresses that idea. Alternate translation: “Let us party” or “Let us feast and get drunk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 35bf5af6d44b478a576bcf0e878054182ab3d278 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:00:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 244/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b340a778ea..393f856f07 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2259,7 +2259,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 33 q7uc writing-quotations μὴ πλανᾶσθε— φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί 1 Bad company corrupts good morals The Corinthians would have recognized **“Bad company corrupts good morals”** as a common saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces this saying with a phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “Do not be deceived. As the saying goes, ‘Bad company corrupts good morals’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 33 qlhh figs-quotations μὴ πλανᾶσθε— φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί 1 Bad company corrupts good morals If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the saying as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Make sure that your readers know that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “Do not be deceived. People say that bad company corrupts good morals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 15 33 ehet figs-activepassive μὴ πλανᾶσθε 1 Bad company corrupts good morals If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **deceived** rather than focusing on the people doing the “deceiving.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Do not let others deceive you” or “You should not allow people to deceive you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 15 33 b5zl writing-proverbs φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί 1 Bad company corrupts good morals In Paul’s culture, this statement was a proverb that many people would have been familiar with. The proverb means that bad friends turn a good person into a bad person. you could translate the proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Bad friends ruin good people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +1CO 15 33 b5zl writing-proverbs φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί 1 Bad company corrupts good morals In Paul’s culture, this statement was a proverb that many people would have been familiar with. The proverb means that bad friends turn a good person into a bad person. You could translate the proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Bad friends ruin good people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) 1CO 15 33 vy9x translate-unknown ὁμιλίαι κακαί 1 Bad company corrupts good morals Here, **Bad company** refers to a persons’ friends who normally do what is wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Bad company** with a comparable phrase that refers to friends who do what is wrong. Alternate translation: “Wicked companions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 33 f3c5 translate-unknown ἤθη χρηστὰ 1 Bad company corrupts good morals Here, **good morals** refers to the character of a person who habitually does what is **good** or right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **good morals** with a comparable word or phrase that identifies someone with proper or right character. Alternate translation: “those who do what is right” or “upright character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 34 gr3v figs-metaphor ἐκνήψατε 1 Sober up Here, **Be sober** refers to someone becoming **sober** after they were drunk. Paul speaks in this way to characterize how the Corinthians are acting and thinking as if they were drunk. He wants them to no longer act as if they are in a stupor or asleep and instead be alert and in their right mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Be sober** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Be in your right mind” or “Be alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2280,8 +2280,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 36 uiv9 grammar-connect-exceptions οὐ ζῳοποιεῖται, ἐὰν μὴ ἀποθάνῃ 1 What you sow will not start to grow unless it dies If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this sentence to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only is caused to live once it dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 15 37 pw6v figs-ellipsis ὃ σπείρεις 1 What you sow is not the body that will be Here Paul refers to **what you sow** without including a main verb. He does this in order to identify the topic that he is about to comment on. If your language would not introduce a topic in this way, you could include a main verb or use a form that normally introduces a topic in your language. Alternate translation: “while we are speaking about what you sow” or “when you sow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 15 37 h6zi figs-yousingular ὃ σπείρεις, οὐ…σπείρεις 1 What you sow Here Paul continues to address the person who asked the question in [15:35](../15/35.md). That person is a hypothetical “someone,” but Paul still addresses the answer to **you** in the singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -1CO 15 37 ny1b οὐ τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον σπείρεις, ἀλλὰ γυμνὸν κόκκον, εἰ τύχοι σίτου, ἤ τινος τῶν λοιπῶν 1 What you sow Here Paul continues to use an analogy from farming. In this verse, he focuses on how the living plant that grows from a seed looks nothing like that seed. The key verbal connection between humans and plants is the word **body**, so if possible use the same word to refer to the human **body** and the **body** of the plant **that will be**. Alternate translation: “you sow only a bare seed, perhaps wheat or something else, not the body of the plant that will grow” -1CO 15 37 fb2z translate-unknown τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον 1 What you sow Here, **the body that will be** identifies the plant that will later grow from the seed. Paul’s point is that one does not **sow** something that looks like the fully grown plant. Rather, one sows **a bare seed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the body that will be** with a word or phrase that refers to a fully grown plant. If possible, use the same word for **body** that you have used for the human body, since Paul is using **body** to connect what he says about plants with what he is saying about the resurrection. Alternate translation: “the body of a fully grown plant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 15 37 ny1b οὐ τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον σπείρεις, ἀλλὰ γυμνὸν κόκκον, εἰ τύχοι σίτου, ἤ τινος τῶν λοιπῶν 1 What you sow Here Paul continues to use an analogy from farming. In this verse, he focuses on how the living plant that grows from a seed looks nothing like that seed. The key verbal connection between humans and plants is the word **body**, so if possible use the same word to refer to the human **body** and the **body** of the plant **{that} will be**. Alternate translation: “you sow only a bare seed, perhaps wheat or something else, not the body of the plant that will grow” +1CO 15 37 fb2z translate-unknown τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον 1 What you sow Here, **the body {that} will be** identifies the plant that will later grow from the seed. Paul’s point is that one does not **sow** something that looks like the fully grown plant. Rather, one sows **a bare seed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the body {that} will be** with a word or phrase that refers to a fully grown plant. If possible, use the same word for **body** that you have used for the human body, since Paul is using **body** to connect what he says about plants with what he is saying about the resurrection. Alternate translation: “the body of a fully grown plant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 37 lhmz translate-unknown γυμνὸν κόκκον 1 What you sow Here, **a bare seed** refers to a seed all by itself, with no leaves or stem like the plant will later have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **a bare seed** with a word or phrase that identifies that Paul is speaking about a **seed** all by itself. Alternate translation: “only a seed” or “a seed alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 37 cky8 translate-unknown εἰ τύχοι σίτου, ἤ τινος τῶν λοιπῶν 1 What you sow Here Paul uses **wheat** as an example of a plant that was common in culture and that starts out as a seed. When he says **or something else**, he makes it clear that any kind of plant that begins as a seed works for his analogy. So, you could refer to any common plant in your culture that starts out as a seed. Alternate translation: “perhaps a corn seed or some other kind of seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 38 dmx1 ὁ…Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν, καὶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν σπερμάτων, ἴδιον σῶμα 1 God will give it a body as he chooses Here Paul concludes his analogy about farming. In the last verse he proved that seeds grow into bodies that look nothing like the seeds. Here, he shows that God is one who decides what **body** a seed grows into and that God gives different kinds of “bodies” to different kinds of seeds. Again, the main verbal connection between human resurrection and seeds growing is the word **body**, so if possible use a word for **body** that can apply to both seeds and humans. Alternate translation: “God decides what kind of plant a seed grows into, and each of the seeds grows into its own kind of plant” From 24fd9c30d5167e06434399638fe46967b992a09c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:02:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 245/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 393f856f07..e2ff999a14 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2300,7 +2300,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 41 y6lr figs-explicit ἄλλη -1 the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another Here, just as in [15:40](../15/40.md), Paul is distinguishing between different kinds of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is one kind of … another kind of … another kind of” or “There is one type of … another type of … another type of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 41 m075 figs-abstractnouns ἄλλη δόξα ἡλίου, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα σελήνης, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα ἀστέρων…ἐν δόξῃ 1 the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “splendorous.” Alternate translation: “The sun is splendorous in one way, and the moon is splendorous in another way, and the stars are splendorous in another way … in how glorious they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 41 ltg6 figs-parallelism ἄλλη δόξα ἡλίου, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα σελήνης, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα ἀστέρων 1 the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another Here Paul repeats **glory of** and the same structure in three consecutive clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture, and it emphasizes the distinctions between the different kinds of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and stars have varying kinds of glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1CO 15 41 uznk grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another Here, **For** introduces a further explanation of the **glory of the stars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or clarification. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 15 41 uznk grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another Here, **For** introduces a further explanation of the **glory of {the} stars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or clarification. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 15 41 d4qn ἀστὴρ…ἀστέρος διαφέρει ἐν δόξῃ 1 the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another Alternate translation: “some stars have different kinds of glory than other stars” or “the stars themselves differ in glory” 1CO 15 42 d3sc grammar-connect-words-phrases οὕτως καὶ 1 is raised Here, **So also** introduces Paul’s explanation of how what he has said in [15:36–41](../15/36.md) about seeds and bodies applies to **the resurrection of the dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **So also** with a word or phrase that introduces the application of an illustration or example. Alternate translation: “It is in these terms that you should think about” or “Let us apply these things to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 15 42 ay76 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀνάστασις τῶν νεκρῶν 1 is raised If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the way in which the dead will resurrect” or “how the dead will be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 94f5ff4e4ec7a95d13d7d679b7b68c94a68ac80c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:06:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 246/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e2ff999a14..5b022bab69 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2316,7 +2316,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 44 u856 figs-metaphor σπείρεται σῶμα ψυχικόν 1 It is sown … it is raised Here, just as in [15:42–43](../15/42.md), Paul speaks as if a dead body were **sown** like a seed. He speaks in this way to connect how a dead body is buried in the ground with how a seed is **sown** in the ground. However, Paul does not continue the metaphor when he talks about how the body **is raised**, since those are his normal words for speaking about resurrection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **is sown** with a comparable phrase that applies to both seeds and human bodies, or you could express the idea using an analogy. Alternate translation: “The body is put in the ground as a natural body, just like a seed” or “It is planted as a natural body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 44 b4dm figs-activepassive σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it as … God raises it as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 44 f93u translate-unknown σῶμα ψυχικόν -1 Here, **natural body** refers to human bodies before they are **raised**. These bodies are those that function in the ways that we can observe right now and that fit with life on earth right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **natural body** with a word or phrase that refers to human bodies as they currently exist on earth before God transforms them. Alternate translation: “a this-worldly body … a this-worldly body” or “a regular body … a regular body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 15 44 n07f translate-unknown σῶμα πνευματικόν…πνευματικόν 1 Here, **spiritual body** refers to human bodies after they are **raised**. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the **body** is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “a body fit for the new creation … a body fit for the new creation” or “a body controlled by God’s Spirit … a body controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the **body** is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “a body made out of spirit … a body made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 15 44 n07f translate-unknown σῶμα πνευματικόν…πνευματικόν 1 Here, **spiritual {body}** refers to human bodies after they are **raised**. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the **body** is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “a body fit for the new creation … a body fit for the new creation” or “a body controlled by God’s Spirit … a body controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the **{body}** is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “a body made out of spirit … a body made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 44 ktad grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 45 zsb9 grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως καὶ 1 Here, **So also** introduces the basis for the claim Paul made about the existence of both “natural” and “spiritual” bodies in the last verse ([15:44](../15/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **So also** with a word or phrase that introduces evidence or support. Alternate translation: “For” or “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 15 45 y5c0 writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture, **it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it can be read in Genesis” or “the author of the book of Genesis says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -2326,7 +2326,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 45 lnfh translate-names Ἀδὰμ -1 **Adam** is the name of a man. It is the name that God gave to the first human he created. Paul uses **Adam** first to refer to this man and then to refer to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 15 45 nuru translate-unknown ψυχὴν ζῶσαν 1 Here, **soul** is a different form of the word that was translated “natural” in [15:44](../15/44.md). Paul uses this similar word to make the point that **Adam** had a “natural body” when God created him. If possible, use words that connect back to how you translated “natural” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a living, this-worldly human” or “a living person with a regular body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 45 jeve figs-metaphor ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ 1 Here, **The last Adam** refers to Jesus. Paul wishes to draw connections between Adam and Jesus, and so he calls **Adam** the **first man Adam**, and he calls Jesus the **last Adam**. Each “Adam” is the first person to have a specific kind of body: the **first** Adam has a “natural body” as a **living soul**, while the **last** Adam has a “spiritual body” as a **life-giving spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express who **The last Adam** is by clarifying that it refers to Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the last Adam,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 15 45 qscs figs-ellipsis Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. Paul could be implying: (1) a word such as “is.” See the ULT. (2) the word **became** from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Adam became a life-giving spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 15 45 qscs figs-ellipsis Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. Paul could be implying: (1) a word such as “{is}.” See the ULT. (2) the word **became** from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Adam became a life-giving spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 15 45 br0z translate-unknown πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Here, **spirit** is a different form of the word that was translated “spiritual” in [15:44](../15/44.md). Paul uses this similar word to make the point that Jesus had a “spiritual body” after his resurrection. If possible, use words that connect back to how you translated “spiritual” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a person who gives life with a body fit for the new creation” or “a person whose body is controlled by God’s Spirit and who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 45 wkqo translate-unknown πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Here, **life-giving** refers to how Jesus, **The last Adam**, “gives” the “life” that he now has to everyone who believes in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **life-giving** with a phrase that identifies Jesus as the one who gives life. Alternate translation: “a spirit who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 46 umt5 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀλλ’ 1 But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual Here, **But** introduces a clarification of the point that Paul made in the previous verse. It does not introduce a strong contrast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or further explanation. Alternate translation: “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From 036288ba59fbd1a740d8439dce94fa2645d1d449 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:12:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 247/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 5b022bab69..326eb3d2e3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2338,13 +2338,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 46 nd64 translate-unknown ψυχικόν 1 natural Here, just as in [15:44](../15/44.md), **natural** refers to human bodies before they are raised. These bodies are those that function in the ways that we can observe right now and that fit with life on earth right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **natural** with a word or phrase that refers to human bodies as they currently exist on earth before God transforms them. Alternate translation: “the this-worldly” or “regular” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 47 yt2q figs-explicit ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος…ὁ δεύτερος ἄνθρωπος 1 The first man is of the earth, made of dust Here, **first man** refers to Adam, the first human whom God created. The **second man** refers to Jesus, the first human to receive the new resurrection body. Paul describes them as **first** and **second** because Adam was the **first** to receive a specific kind of body, and Jesus was the **second** to receive a specific kind of body, a body different than the body that Adam received. This is the same point he made in the last verse about which body comes “first” ([15:46](../15/46.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **first man** and **second man** by clarifying to whom they refer. Alternate translation: “The first man, Adam, … The second man, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 47 pton figs-gendernotations ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος…ὁ δεύτερος ἄνθρωπος 1 The first man is of the earth, made of dust Although **man** is masculine, and both Adam (**The first man**) and Jesus (**The second man**) are male, Paul is focusing on how the **first** and **second man** are representative human beings. He is not focusing on the **first** and **second man** as representative males. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a non gendered word. Alternate translation: “The first person … The second person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 15 47 iclf figs-explicit ἐκ γῆς, χοϊκός 1 The first man is of the earth, made of dust Here Paul refers again to [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). In that verse, we learn about how God made the **first man**, Adam, out of **dust**. Paul uses this reference to **dust** to prove that the **first man** has the kind of life and body that belongs on **the earth**. So, **of the earth** means almost the same thing that “natural” means in [15:46](../15/46.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **of the earth, made of dust** by clarifying that Paul is referring to the story about how God made the **first man** as a human who has a body and life fit for **the earth**. Alternate translation: “God made out of dust, and he is fit for the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 47 iclf figs-explicit ἐκ γῆς, χοϊκός 1 The first man is of the earth, made of dust Here Paul refers again to [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). In that verse, we learn about how God made the **first man**, Adam, out of **dust**. Paul uses this reference to **dust** to prove that the **first man** has the kind of life and body that belongs on **the earth**. So, **of {the} earth** means almost the same thing that “natural” means in [15:46](../15/46.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **of {the} earth, made of dust** by clarifying that Paul is referring to the story about how God made the **first man** as a human who has a body and life fit for **{the} earth**. Alternate translation: “God made out of dust, and he is fit for the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 47 s1pc figs-explicit ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 The first man is of the earth, made of dust Here, **from heaven** could refer to: (1) how Jesus, the **second man**, has a body and life fit for heaven and the new creation. In this case, **from heaven** would mean basically the same thing that “spiritual” means in [15:46](../15/46.md). Alternate translation: “is fit for heaven” (2) how Jesus, the **second man**, came **from heaven** when he became a human. Alternate translation: “came from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 15 48 lnwa figs-ellipsis οἷος ὁ χοϊκός, τοιοῦτοι καὶ οἱ χοϊκοί; καὶ οἷος ὁ ἐπουράνιος, τοιοῦτοι καὶ οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 1 ὁ ἐπουράνιος In this verse, Paul does not use any verbs. He does this because he did not need verbs in his culture to state that the **earthly** and **those of the earth** are the same kind of thing and that the **heavenly** and **those of heaven** are the same kind of thing. If your language does not need verbs or other words to state that two different things or groups belong together as the same kind of thing, you can use those verbs or words here. Alternate translation: “The earthly and those of the earth are of the same type; and the heavenly and those of heaven are of the same type” or “As the earthly exists, in the same way those of the earth exist; and as the heavenly exists, in the way those of heaven exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 15 48 lnwa figs-ellipsis οἷος ὁ χοϊκός, τοιοῦτοι καὶ οἱ χοϊκοί; καὶ οἷος ὁ ἐπουράνιος, τοιοῦτοι καὶ οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 1 ὁ ἐπουράνιος In this verse, Paul does not use any verbs. He does this because he did not need verbs in his culture to state that the **earthly** and **the ones of earth** are the same kind of thing and that the **heavenly** and **the ones of heaven** are the same kind of thing. If your language does not need verbs or other words to state that two different things or groups belong together as the same kind of thing, you can use those verbs or words here. Alternate translation: “The earthly and those of the earth are of the same type; and the heavenly and those of heaven are of the same type” or “As the earthly exists, in the same way those of the earth exist; and as the heavenly exists, in the way those of heaven exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 15 48 r9be figs-nominaladj ὁ χοϊκός…ὁ ἐπουράνιος 1 ὁ ἐπουράνιος Paul is using the adjectives **earthly** and **heavenly** as nouns in order to refer back to the “first man” (who is “of the earth”) and the “second man” (who is “of heaven”) from the previous verse ([15:47](../15/47.md)). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases that refer back to those people. Alternate translation: “the earthly first man … the heavenly second man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 15 48 jnbn figs-explicit οἱ χοϊκοί 1 ὁ ἐπουράνιος Here, **those of the earth** refers to people who are not united to Jesus and who thus belong to **the earth**. Paul uses this language to connect these people with the **earthly** first man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **those of the earth** with a word or phrase that clarifies that **those of the earth** describes people who are represented by Adam, not by Jesus. Alternate translation: “those of the earth who are represented by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 15 48 mkth figs-possession οἱ χοϊκοί…οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 1 ὁ ἐπουράνιος Here, **those of the earth** and **those of heaven** refer to people who are “earthly” and “heavenly.” This means that **earth** is the proper home of **those of the earth**, while **heaven** is the proper home of **those of heaven**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with adjectives such as “earthly” or “heavenly,” or you could refer to the “home” of these people. Alternate translation: “those who are earthly … those who are heavenly” or “those whose home is on earth … those whose home is in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 15 48 s9pn figs-explicit οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 1 those who are of heaven Here, **those of heaven** refers to people who are united to Jesus and who thus belong to **heaven**, as Jesus does. Paul uses this language to connect these people with the **heavenly** second man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **those of heaven** with a word or phrase that clarifies that **those of heaven** describes people who are represented by Jesus, not by Adam. Alternate translation: “those of heaven, who are represented by Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 48 jnbn figs-explicit οἱ χοϊκοί 1 ὁ ἐπουράνιος Here, **the ones of earth** refers to people who are not united to Jesus and who thus belong to the **earth**. Paul uses this language to connect these people with the **earthly** first man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones of earth** with a word or phrase that clarifies that **the ones of earth** describes people who are represented by Adam, not by Jesus. Alternate translation: “those of the earth who are represented by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 48 mkth figs-possession οἱ χοϊκοί…οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 1 ὁ ἐπουράνιος Here, **the ones of earth** and **the ones of heaven** refer to people who are “earthly” and “heavenly.” This means that **earth** is the proper home of **the ones of earth**, while **heaven** is the proper home of **the ones of heaven**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with adjectives such as “earthly” or “heavenly,” or you could refer to the “home” of these people. Alternate translation: “those who are earthly … those who are heavenly” or “those whose home is on earth … those whose home is in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 15 48 s9pn figs-explicit οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 1 those who are of heaven Here, **the ones of heaven** refers to people who are united to Jesus and who thus belong to **heaven**, as Jesus does. Paul uses this language to connect these people with the **heavenly** second man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones of heaven** with a word or phrase that clarifies that **the ones of heaven** describes people who are represented by Jesus, not by Adam. Alternate translation: “those of heaven, who are represented by Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 49 w19v figs-pastforfuture ἐφορέσαμεν 1 have borne the image … will also bear the image Here, the past tense **have borne** does not mean that **we** no longer “bear” this **image**. Rather, it means that we began to “bear” it and continue to do so now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **we have borne** with a tense that naturally refers to a current, ongoing state. Alternate translation: “we bear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 15 49 ax2u figs-idiom ἐφορέσαμεν τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ, φορέσωμεν καὶ τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου 1 have borne the image … will also bear the image Here, to **bear the image** of something or somebody refers to being similar to that thing or person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **bear the image** with a word or phrase that identifies something as similar or like something else. Alternate translation: “we have been modeled on the earthly, let us also be modeled on the heavenly” or “we have the likeness of the earthly, let us also have the likeness of the heavenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 49 fm74 figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ…τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου 1 have borne the image … will also bear the image If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **image**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “participate.” Alternate translation: “how we reflect the earthly … how we reflect the heavenly” or “the way we participate in the earthly … the way we participate in the heavenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -2354,7 +2354,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 49 gme6 translate-textvariants φορέσωμεν καὶ 1 have borne the image … will also bear the image In Paul’s language, **let us also bear** and “we will also bear” look and sound very similar. Both options have some evidence to support them. Consider whether translations your readers might be familiar with choose one of the options. If there is no strong reason to choose one option over the other, you could follow the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1CO 15 50 jub2 writing-pronouns τοῦτο δέ φημι, ἀδελφοί, ὅτι 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **Now this I say** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to discuss. Because of that, **this** refers to what Paul says in the rest of this verse, not to what he has already said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now this I say** with a word or phrase that introduces and refers forward to a new topic. Alternate translation: “Next, I am going to say something important, brothers:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 50 by1o figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Connecting Statement: Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 15 50 mwy3 figs-parallelism σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ 1 flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **flesh and blood** goes with **perishable** and **the kingdom of God** goes with **imperishable**. These two statements could: (1) be basically synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two sentences into one to show why Paul uses two parallel sentences. Alternate translation: “perishable flesh and blood are not able to inherit the imperishable kingdom of God” (2) refer first to people who are alive (**flesh and blood**) and then to people who are dead (**perishable**). In this case, you should preserve some distinction between the two sentences. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood are not able to inherit the kingdom of God, and the perishable are not able to inherit the imperishable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1CO 15 50 mwy3 figs-parallelism σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ 1 flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **flesh and blood** goes with **perishable** and **{the} kingdom of God** goes with **imperishable**. These two statements could: (1) be basically synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two sentences into one to show why Paul uses two parallel sentences. Alternate translation: “perishable flesh and blood are not able to inherit the imperishable kingdom of God” (2) refer first to people who are alive (**flesh and blood**) and then to people who are dead (**perishable**). In this case, you should preserve some distinction between the two sentences. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood are not able to inherit the kingdom of God, and the perishable are not able to inherit the imperishable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 15 50 nz7s figs-hendiadys σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 flesh and blood This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **flesh** and **blood** together describe the human body as it currently exists. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the fleshly” or “the things that exist now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 1CO 15 50 zele figs-metonymy σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 flesh and blood Here, **flesh and blood** represents a body that is made out of **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **flesh and blood** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 15 50 e4gd figs-metaphor κληρονομῆσαι…κληρονομεῖ 1 inherit Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** that is **imperishable** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers will eventually receive and live in **the kingdom of God** that God has promised to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to live in … does … live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From b13189008630e06f515ffb823a3e44d6ad89159f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:13:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 248/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b1fec75f10..158590e5e3 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3166,7 +3166,7 @@ ACT 23 12 g3sj figs-explicit ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς 1 cursed ACT 23 12 a524 figs-quotations λέγοντες μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωσιν τὸν Παῦλον 1 saying neither to eat nor to drink until they had killed Paul It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘We will neither eat or drink until we have killed Paul’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 14 a525 figs-explicitinfo ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 We have cursed ourselves with a curse It might seem that the expression **cursed ourselves with a curse** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “cursed ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 23 14 a526 figs-synecdoche μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι 1 to eat nothing Since the men actually swore that they would **eat** or drink nothing, they are using one part of their oath to represent all of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat and drink nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 23 15 u8xm figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 23 15 u8xm figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 23 15 a527 figs-imperative ἐμφανίσατε 1 make it appear This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 23 16 a531 figs-metonymy ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν 1 hearing the ambush Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the **ambush**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 23 16 w6fe translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) From 7694a508799f8c0a1f890100cd1b9bdc4ec4b408 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:16:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 249/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 326eb3d2e3..27e5ae658a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2357,7 +2357,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 50 mwy3 figs-parallelism σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ 1 flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **flesh and blood** goes with **perishable** and **{the} kingdom of God** goes with **imperishable**. These two statements could: (1) be basically synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two sentences into one to show why Paul uses two parallel sentences. Alternate translation: “perishable flesh and blood are not able to inherit the imperishable kingdom of God” (2) refer first to people who are alive (**flesh and blood**) and then to people who are dead (**perishable**). In this case, you should preserve some distinction between the two sentences. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood are not able to inherit the kingdom of God, and the perishable are not able to inherit the imperishable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 15 50 nz7s figs-hendiadys σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 flesh and blood This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **flesh** and **blood** together describe the human body as it currently exists. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the fleshly” or “the things that exist now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 1CO 15 50 zele figs-metonymy σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 flesh and blood Here, **flesh and blood** represents a body that is made out of **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **flesh and blood** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 15 50 e4gd figs-metaphor κληρονομῆσαι…κληρονομεῖ 1 inherit Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** that is **imperishable** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers will eventually receive and live in **the kingdom of God** that God has promised to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to live in … does … live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 50 e4gd figs-metaphor κληρονομῆσαι…κληρονομεῖ 1 inherit Here Paul speaks of **{the} kingdom of God** that is **imperishable** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers will eventually receive and live in **{the}3 kingdom of God** that God has promised to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to live in … does … live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 50 b9hc translate-unknown ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν 1 the perishable … the imperishable Here, **perishable** and **imperishable** identify whether people or things last or fall apart. These words are the same ones translated as “decay” and “immortality” in [15:42](../15/42.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perishable** and **imperishable** with two words or phrases that refer to how long things last. Alternate translation: “what passes away … what never passes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 50 t68j figs-nominaladj ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν 1 the perishable … the imperishable Paul is using the adjectives **perishable** and **imperishable** as nouns in order to refer to **perishable** bodies and the **imperishable** kingdom. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with appropriate noun phrases. Alternate translation: “a perishable body … the imperishable kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 15 51 g2bp figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 we will all be changed Here, **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “Listen up” or “Hear me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) @@ -2367,7 +2367,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 51 c8oh translate-unknown πάντες…ἀλλαγησόμεθα 2 we will all be changed Here, **changed** refers to how the bodies of believers are transformed from “natural” to “spiritual.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **changed** with a word or phrase that refers to this kind of transformation. Alternate translation: “we will all be renewed” or “we will all be transfigured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 51 k5dw figs-activepassive πάντες…ἀλλαγησόμεθα 2 we will all be changed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the people who are **changed** rather than focusing on the person who does the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will change us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 52 lxt1 translate-unknown ἐν ἀτόμῳ 1 in the twinkling of an eye Here, **instant** refers to the smallest segment of time that Paul and the Corinthians knew about. He means that the “change” ([15:51](../15/51.md)) will happen so quickly that it will only take up the smallest bit of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **in a moment** to refer to the smallest amount of time in your culture or to express the idea in a way that emphasizes speed. Alternate translation: “in one second” or “very quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 15 52 r4ix figs-idiom ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ 1 in the twinkling of an eye Here, **in the twinkling of an eye** refers to the speed at which one moves or blinks one’s eye. Paul’s point is that the “change” ([15:51](../15/51.md)) will take place so quickly that one cannot move one’s eye fast enough to see it, or if one blinks, one might miss it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in the blink of an eye” or “at great speed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 15 52 r4ix figs-idiom ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ 1 in the twinkling of an eye Here, **in {the} twinkling of an eye** refers to the speed at which one moves or blinks one’s eye. Paul’s point is that the “change” ([15:51](../15/51.md)) will take place so quickly that one cannot move one’s eye fast enough to see it, or if one blinks, one might miss it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in the blink of an eye” or “at great speed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 52 h668 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι; σαλπίσει γάρ 1 at the last trumpet Paul refers briefly to the **last trumpet** without explanation because the Corinthians would have known what he was talking about. In Paul’s culture, people knew that a **trumpet** would **sound** to signal the Day of the Lord, in this case, the day when Jesus comes back, the dead rise, and the world is renewed. An angel or archangel would blow this trumpet. If your readers would not make such inferences about **the last trumpet**, you could express some of these ideas explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we hear the trumpet that means that Jesus is coming back. For that trumpet will sound” or “when an angel sounds the end-times trumpet. For the angel will sound that trumpet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 52 l66q figs-activepassive οἱ νεκροὶ ἐγερθήσονται 1 the dead will be raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **the dead** who **will be raised** rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 52 ibhu figs-nominaladj οἱ νεκροὶ 1 the dead will be raised Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to believers who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) From 9336a9bd249ba9cdd06fc45be4b896e81f5924c6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:16:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 250/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 158590e5e3..9194353720 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3169,8 +3169,8 @@ ACT 23 14 a526 figs-synecdoche μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι 1 to eat nothi ACT 23 15 u8xm figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 23 15 a527 figs-imperative ἐμφανίσατε 1 make it appear This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 23 16 a531 figs-metonymy ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν 1 hearing the ambush Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the **ambush**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 23 16 w6fe translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -ACT 23 17 a528 figs-imperative ἄπαγε 1 take This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +ACT 23 16 w6fe translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or "the nephew of Paul" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +ACT 23 17 a528 figs-imperative ἄπαγε 1 take This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 23 18 abd0 writing-pronouns ὁ…παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν 1 taking him, he brought him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 18 lrs3 φησίν 1 says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” ACT 23 19 a530 translate-symaction ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 taking hold of his hand The chiliarch **taking hold** of the **hand** of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a **private** location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) From 6406f465feee4b00427dc7a7a2bb5e5ca09db7e8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:20:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 251/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 27e5ae658a..9bf7c23622 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2397,15 +2397,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 54 ph5j figs-abstractnouns θάνατος εἰς νῖκος 1 this mortal body has put on immortality If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Death** and **victory**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “conquer.” Alternate translation: “How people die … when God conquers” or “The fact that people die … by God, who is victorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 55 pav7 writing-quotations θάνατε 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes from [Hosea 13:14](../hos/13/14.md) without providing a new quote introduction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this way of introducing a new quotation with a form in your language that introduces another quote. Alternate translation: “And again, ‘O death’” or “It is further written, ‘O death’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 55 zw75 figs-quotations ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. You may need to include a word or phrase at the beginning to indicate that Paul is introducing a new quotation. Alternate translation: “It is further written that death is asked about where its victory is and about where its sting is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -1CO 15 55 c9zw figs-apostrophe ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes how Hosea addresses something that he knows cannot hear him, **death**, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about **death**. Alternate translation: “Where is the victory of death? Where is the sting of death?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) -1CO 15 55 rn56 figs-abstractnouns ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” If you do this, you may need to express the direct address to **death** in another way. Alternate translation: “When people die, where is the victory? When people die, where is the sting?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 15 55 c9zw figs-apostrophe ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes how Hosea addresses something that he knows cannot hear him, **Death**, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about **Death**. Alternate translation: “Where is the victory of death? Where is the sting of death?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +1CO 15 55 rn56 figs-abstractnouns ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **Death**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” If you do this, you may need to express the direct address to **Death** in another way. Alternate translation: “When people die, where is the victory? When people die, where is the sting?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 55 l23m figs-parallelism ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes how Hosea repeats **O death, where {is} your**. Parallel structures like this were poetic in Hosea’s culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “O death, where is your conquest?” or “O death, where are are your victory and sting?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1CO 15 55 pdxo figs-rquestion ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Paul does not quote these questions because he is looking for information about **where** death’s **victory** and **sting** are. Rather, the questions involve the Corinthians in what Paul is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nowhere.” In other words, there is no **victory** or **sting** for **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “O death, you have no victory! O death, you have no sting!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 15 55 gg3d figs-you σου…σου 1 your … your Both appearances of **your** refer back to **death** and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +1CO 15 55 pdxo figs-rquestion ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Paul does not quote these questions because he is looking for information about **where** death’s **victory** and **sting** are. Rather, the questions involve the Corinthians in what Paul is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nowhere.” In other words, there is no **victory** or **sting** for **Death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “O death, you have no victory! O death, you have no sting!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 15 55 gg3d figs-you σου…σου 1 your … your Both appearances of **your** refer back to **Death** and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 15 55 r1sl figs-abstractnouns ποῦ σου…τὸ νῖκος 1 your … your If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **victory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “conquer.” Alternate translation: “have you conquered anything” or “where is how you have conquered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 15 55 z5dn figs-metaphor ποῦ σου…τὸ κέντρον 2 your … your Here, **sting** refers to a sharp point, particularly the kind that insects have that can pierce skin, inject poison, and cause pain. The author of this quotation (Hosea) speaks as if **death** has a **sting**, referring to how death causes pain both for the person who dies and for others who have lost someone they love. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **sting** with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “where is the pain that you cause” or “where is your ability to harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 55 z5dn figs-metaphor ποῦ σου…τὸ κέντρον 2 your … your Here, **sting** refers to a sharp point, particularly the kind that insects have that can pierce skin, inject poison, and cause pain. The author of this quotation (Hosea) speaks as if **Death** has a **sting**, referring to how death causes pain both for the person who dies and for others who have lost someone they love. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **sting** with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “where is the pain that you cause” or “where is your ability to harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 56 entt grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 the sting of death is sin Here, **But** introduces a clarification or further elaboration. It does not introduce a contrast with the quotations in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or elaboration, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 15 56 qal8 figs-metaphor τὸ…κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 the sting of death is sin Here, **the sting of death** refers back to the same words in the quote in [15:56](../15/56.md). Express the metaphor the same you did there. “the pain that death causes comes from sin” or “death’s ability to harm {is} sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 56 qal8 figs-metaphor τὸ…κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 the sting of death is sin Here, **the sting of death** refers back to the same words in the quote in [15:56](../15/56.md). Express the metaphor the same you did there. Alternate translation: “the pain that death causes comes from sin” or “death’s ability to harm {is} sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 56 iyd3 figs-abstractnouns τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 the sting of death is sin If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “that leads to dying is how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 56 pf4e figs-abstractnouns ἡ…δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμο 2 the power of sin is the law If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “empower” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “the law makes what make people do wrong powerful” or “it is the law that empowers how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 57 rmnx figs-idiom τῷ…Θεῷ χάρις 1 gives us the victory Here, **thanks {be} to God** is a way to indicate that one is praising God for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a normal way in your language to thank or praise someone for what that person has done. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From ea7e2bb77785fb0c19a4247dd8498deb467e7d67 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:22:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 252/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 9bf7c23622..b4bd829cb8 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2407,7 +2407,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 56 entt grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 the sting of death is sin Here, **But** introduces a clarification or further elaboration. It does not introduce a contrast with the quotations in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or elaboration, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 15 56 qal8 figs-metaphor τὸ…κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 the sting of death is sin Here, **the sting of death** refers back to the same words in the quote in [15:56](../15/56.md). Express the metaphor the same you did there. Alternate translation: “the pain that death causes comes from sin” or “death’s ability to harm {is} sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 56 iyd3 figs-abstractnouns τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 the sting of death is sin If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “that leads to dying is how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 15 56 pf4e figs-abstractnouns ἡ…δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμο 2 the power of sin is the law If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “empower” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “the law makes what make people do wrong powerful” or “it is the law that empowers how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 15 56 pf4e figs-abstractnouns ἡ…δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμος 2 the power of sin is the law If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “empower” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “the law makes what make people do wrong powerful” or “it is the law that empowers how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 57 rmnx figs-idiom τῷ…Θεῷ χάρις 1 gives us the victory Here, **thanks {be} to God** is a way to indicate that one is praising God for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a normal way in your language to thank or praise someone for what that person has done. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 57 ztj6 figs-abstractnouns τῷ διδόντι ἡμῖν τὸ νῖκος 1 gives us the victory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **victory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “defeat” or “conquer.” Alternate translation: “who empowers us to defeat them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 57 kr1m figs-explicit τὸ νῖκος 1 gives us the victory Here Paul does not express whom **the victory** is over. However, the Corinthians would have inferred from the previous verse that Paul meant both “sin” and “death.” If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “the victory over sin and death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2419,8 +2419,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 58 zn8f figs-possession ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **work** that is done for **the Lord**. If your language does not use that form for this meaning, you can express the idea with a phrase such as “that is for.” Alternate translation: “in your work for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 15 58 rd05 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here, **knowing** introduces the reason why the Corinthians should do what Paul is commanding them to do. If your readers would not recognize that **knowing** introduces a reason or basis, you could express that idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “for you know” or “since you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 15 58 i1o4 figs-abstractnouns ὁ κόπος ὑμῶν 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **labor**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “labor.” Alternate translation: “how you labor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 15 58 r782 figs-idiom κενὸς 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, the Corinthians’ **labor** is not **in vain** because it is **in the Lord** and will thus lead to its intended effect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in vain** with a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 15 58 xyoj figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with the Lord. In this case, being **in the Lord** or united to the Lord identifies why the Corinthians can “know” that their **labor is not in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speechby using a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” or “because you are united to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 58 r782 figs-idiom κενὸς 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, the Corinthians’ **labor** is not **in vain** because it is **in {the} Lord** and will thus lead to its intended effect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in vain** with a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 15 58 xyoj figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe the union of believers with the Lord. In this case, being **in {the} Lord** or united to the Lord identifies why the Corinthians can “know” that their **labor is not in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speechby using a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” or “because you are united to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 16 intro abcj 0 # 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)
* The collection (16:1–4)
* Travel plans (16:5–12)
11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)
* Final commands (16:13–18)
* Greetings and closing (16:19–24)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Letter writing and sending

In this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Paul mentions that he writes the final greeting or the last few verses “in my own hand” ([16:21](../16/21.md)). This is because the rest of the letter was written by a scribe, who wrote down what Paul dictated. Paul writes the last greeting as a personal touch and to prove that he was indeed the author.

### The collection

In [16:1–4](../16/01.md), Paul refers to a “collection” that he will take or send to Jerusalem. He speaks at greater length about this “collection” in ([Romans 15:22–32](../rom/15/22.md)) and ([2 Corinthians 8–9](../2co/08/01.md)). His plan was to collect money from churches that were mostly Gentile and give that money to the church in Jerusalem that was mostly Jewish. In this way, the poorer believers in Jerusalem would receive support and Jewish and Gentile believers would be more connected. In these verses, Paul assumes that the Corinthians already know about this plan. He gives them instructions on how to help him carry it out. Make sure that you translate these verses in such a way that it is clear what Paul is talking about: collecting money to give to believers in Jerusalem.

### Travel plans

In this chapter, Paul includes travel plans for himself ([16:5–9](../16/05.md)) and for Timothy and Apollos ([16:10–12](../16/10.md)). Paul and Apollos are in Ephesus, and Timothy has left Ephesus and is traveling to Corinth (in “Achaia”) when Paul writes this letter. When people traveled from Corinth to Ephesus or vice versa, they could go by boat through the Mediterranean Sea, or they could travel on land through what is now Northern Greece (“Macedonia”) and Western Turkey (“Asia”). Paul states that he plans to travel by land; it is not clear how Timothy or others traveled. Use words that are appropriate for these kinds of movements in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])

### Greetings

In this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letter. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In [16:19–21](../16/19.md) Paul includes greetings to and from people whom he and the Corinthians know. Express these greetings in a natural form in your language. 1CO 16 1 zh6u grammar-connect-words-phrases περὶ δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Just as in [7:1](../07/01.md), [25](../07/25.md), **Now concerning** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to address. Likely, the topics that he introduces in this way are what the Corinthians wrote to him about. Translate **Now concerning** here as you did in [7:1](../07/01.md), [25](../07/25.md). Alternate translation: “Next, about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 1 okzo translate-unknown τῆς λογείας 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **the collection** refers to money that is “collected” from people for a specific purpose. Here Paul clarifies that it is “collected” **for the saints**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **collection** with a word or phrase that refers to money that is “collected” for a purpose. Alternate translation: “the offering” or “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From 21b2be87708b46ba686f047ab60faf7bf985c9cd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:25:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 253/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 20 ++++++++++---------- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b4bd829cb8..b7a3b45975 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 10 hp6w grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 2 Here, **For** introduces an explanation for why God’s revelation is made **to us through the Spirit**. It is because the **Spirit searches everything** and knows everything that is **revealed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a comparable word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation. Alternate translation: “He works through the Spirit because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 2 10 zccl translate-unknown ἐραυνᾷ 1 Here, **searches** refers to how someone can explore or seek to know about something else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **searches** with another word for “exploring” or “knowing.” Alternate translation: “comprehends” or “knows about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 2 10 bhyv translate-unknown τὰ βάθη τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The phrase **deep {things} of God** refers to things about God that are hard to understand or things about God that no one can fully comprehend. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a comparable expression or state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “secrets about God” or “things about God that no one knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 2 11 h4p8 figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? 1 For who knows a person’s thoughts except the spirit of the person in him? Here Paul uses a question because he thinks that everyone will agree with him, for this information is common knowledge in his culture. He does not use a question because he is not sure about the answer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a form that presents information that everyone knows and agrees with. Alternate translation: “For it is a well-known fact that no one among men knows the things of a man except the spirit of the man that is within him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 2 11 h4p8 figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? 1 For who knows a person’s thoughts except the spirit of the person in him? Here Paul uses a question because he thinks that everyone will agree with him, for this information is common knowledge in his culture. He does not use a question because he is not sure about the answer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a form that presents information that everyone knows and agrees with. Alternate translation: “For it is a well-known fact that no one among men knows the things of a man except the spirit of the man that is within him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 2 11 gw3u grammar-connect-exceptions τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? οὕτως καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐδεὶς ἔγνωκεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ. 1 no one knows the deep things of God except the Spirit of God In both parts of this verse, Paul makes a negative claim and then offers an exception to that claim. If it would appear in your language that Paul is contradicting himself, you could use a different structure that also singles out one possibility and negates all other possibilities. Alternate translation: “For the spirit of the man that is within him is the only one among men that knows the things of a man, right? So also, the Spirit of God is the only one that knows the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 2 11 li8e figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων…ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Although the words translated **men**, **man**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these masculine words with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “among people … of a person … of the person that is within that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 2 11 lmzi figs-genericnoun ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “of a certain man … of that certain man that is within him” or “of men … of men that is within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 17 t8pm figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ ἄκων 1 But if not willingly Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I do this**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “But if I do this unwillingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 9 17 xa5p figs-activepassive πεπίστευμαι 1 I have been entrusted with a stewardship If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who has **been entrusted**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “entrusting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has entrusted me with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 9 17 kjgf figs-abstractnouns οἰκονομίαν 1 I have been entrusted with a stewardship If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **stewardship**, you can express the idea by using a phrase with a verb such as “oversee” or “do.” Alternate translation: “something to do” or “a task to oversee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 9 18 lg51 figs-rquestion τίς οὖν μού ἐστιν ὁ μισθός? 1 What then is my reward? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the following words are the answer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a construction that introduces what follows as the **reward**. Alternate translation: “This, then, is my reward:” or “Here, then, is my reward:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 9 18 lg51 figs-rquestion τίς οὖν μού ἐστιν ὁ μισθός? 1 What then is my reward? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the following words are the answer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a construction that introduces what follows as the **reward**. Alternate translation: “This, then, is my reward:” or “Here, then, is my reward:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 18 pfw2 figs-abstractnouns μού…ὁ μισθός 1 What then is my reward? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reward**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reward” or “compensate.” Alternate translation: “the way God rewards me” or “the way God compensates me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 18 ia5x grammar-connect-time-simultaneous εὐαγγελιζόμενος ἀδάπανον, θήσω 1 That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge Here, **proclaiming the gospel without charge** describes how Paul wishes to **offer** the gospel. The phrase **proclaiming the gospel without charge** could: (1) provide the means by which Paul **might offer**. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel without charge, I might offer” (2) give the situations in which Paul “offers” the gospel without taking **advantage of** his **right**. Alternate translation: “whenever I proclaim the gospel without charge, I offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 1CO 9 18 o3ju translate-unknown ἀδάπανον 1 That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge Here, **without charge** means that something is free to the person who receives it. Paul is stating that the **gospel** is “free” or “at no cost” for those to whom he preaches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **without cost** with a word or phrase that indicates that something is “free” or “without cost.” Alternate translation: “freely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1904,7 +1904,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 14 tfy0 figs-123person προσεύχωμαι…μου…μου 1 my mind is unfruitful Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person, or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “somebody would pray … his or her … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 14 14 gph1 τὸ πνεῦμά μου προσεύχεται 1 my mind is unfruitful Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the **mind** but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “my inner spiritual being prays” or “my heart prays” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit prays with my spirit” or “the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being in prayer” 1CO 14 14 kjh6 figs-metaphor ὁ…νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν 1 my mind is unfruitful Here Paul speaks as if his **mind** were a plant or tree that could produce “fruit.” He states that his **mind** is **unfruitful** to indicate that it is not doing anything useful, just like a fruit tree that does not produce fruit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “my mind does nothing” or “my mind is not involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 14 15 vm6p figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν? 1 What should I do? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or solution. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I will tell you what I do.” or “This, then, is what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 15 vm6p figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν? 1 What should I do? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or solution. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I will tell you what I do.” or “This, then, is what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 15 nkgj figs-123person προσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ 1 What should I do? Here, just as in [14:14](../14/14.md), Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person, or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “People should pray with their spirits, and they should also pray with their minds. People should sing with their spirits, and they should also sing with their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 14 15 nneh grammar-connect-time-simultaneous προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ…ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. 1 What should I do? Here, doing things **with {my} mind** could happen: (1) at the same time as doing things **with {my} spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he will use both his **spirit** and **mind** at the same time when he “prays” or “sings.” Alternate translation: “and I will use my mind also … and I will use my mind also” (2) at a different time as doing things **with {my} spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he sometimes use his **spirit** and sometimes use his **mind**. Alternate translation: “but other times I will pray with my mind … but other times I will sing with my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 1CO 14 15 r11f τῷ Πνεύματι -1 pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mind Here, just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the **mind** but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with my inner spiritual being … with my inner spiritual being” or “with my heart … with my heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit … as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being … as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being” @@ -1912,7 +1912,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 16 niu5 figs-yousingular εὐλογῇς…τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ…λέγεις 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul switches from using himself as an example to using one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, every **you** in this verse is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second-person singular as a second-person plural, or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, bless … your thanksgiving … you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 1CO 14 16 crew figs-explicit εὐλογῇς πνεύματι 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul is speaking about someone who is using **{the}spirit** only and not the “mind” to speak in “tongues.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “you bless in tongues with the spirit only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 16 gi1q πνεύματι 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Just as in [4:14–15](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the mind but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with your inner spiritual being” or “with your heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “by the power of the Holy Spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs your inner spiritual being” -1CO 14 16 r4w5 figs-rquestion ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν? 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, the answer to the question is “he cannot.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the one who fills the place of the ungifted will not be able to say the ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 16 r4w5 figs-rquestion ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν? 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, the answer to the question is “he cannot.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the one who fills the place of the ungifted will not be able to say the ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 16 untg figs-metaphor ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Here Paul speaks as if there were a **place** for **the ungifted** which they would “fill.” He speaks in this way to characterize the person by the **place** they “fill.” In other words, a person **filling the place of the ungifted** is characterized as **ungifted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is ungifted” or “the ungifted person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 16 g36b figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀναπληρῶν 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul is speaking of people who “fill” **the place of the ungifted** in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who fills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 16 j3e3 translate-unknown τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 the ungifted Here, **the ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the “tongue” in which the person is speaking. Alternate translation: “of the one who does not understand tongues” or “of the uninitiated” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “of the outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1951,7 +1951,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 23 mlmt figs-doublet συνέλθῃ…ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 would they not say that you are insane? Here Paul uses both **come together** and **to the same place** to emphasize that he is speaking about an official gathering of the church for worship. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you can use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “might come together” or “might be in the same place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 14 23 agza translate-unknown ἰδιῶται 1 would they not say that you are insane? Here, just as in [14:16](../14/16.md), **ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the **tongues** that the other people are speaking. Alternate translation: “people who do not understand tongues” or “uninitiated” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 23 n03r figs-go εἰσέλθωσιν 1 would they not say that you are insane? Your language may say “would go in” rather than **would come in** in this situation. Use whatever form is natural. Alternate translation: “would go in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -1CO 14 23 hj3d figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε? 1 would they not say that you are insane? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “yes, they will.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “they will definitely say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 23 hj3d figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε? 1 would they not say that you are insane? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “yes, they will.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “they will definitely say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 23 xiiq translate-unknown μαίνεσθε 1 would they not say that you are insane? People who are **insane** act in ways that are not normal or acceptable. Often these ways are dangerous, strange, or irrational. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **insane** with a word or phrase that identifies people who are acting in irrational and strange ways. Alternate translation: “you are out of your minds” or “you are mad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 23 fa7i figs-123person μαίνεσθε 1 would they not say that you are insane? Here, **you** refers back to **the whole church** and **they** who **speak in tongues**. Paul switches from third person to second person to apply the hypothetical situation to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this switch with second person earlier in the verse or use the third person here. Alternate translation: “the church is insane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 14 24 mm3e figs-hypo ἐὰν…πάντες προφητεύωσιν, εἰσέλθῃ δέ τις ἄπιστος ἢ ἰδιώτης, ἐλέγχεται 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **all would prophesy**, and he implies that the whole church is together for this hypothetical situation, just like for the last one (see [14:23](../14/23.md)). Then, he wants them to imagine what would happen if **some unbeliever** or **ungifted person** is present and hears **all** prophesying. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that they all would prophesy. Suppose that some unbeliever or ungifted person comes in. In that situation, he is convicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -1967,7 +1967,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 25 w31w figs-idiom πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον 1 he would fall on his face and worship God In Paul’s culture, “falling” **on** one’s **face** refers to kneeling down and putting one’s **face** close to the ground. This was a position used to show respect and sometimes worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **having fallen on {his} face** with a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having bowed down” or “kneeling to show respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 25 q5ee figs-gendernotations αὐτοῦ…πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει 1 he would fall on his face and worship God Although **his** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **his** and **he** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her face, he or she will worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 25 tou0 figs-quotations ἀπαγγέλλων, ὅτι ὄντως ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν 1 he would fall on his face and worship God If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “declaring that God is really among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -1CO 14 26 bv9k figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί? 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or a clarification. Alternate translation: “This is what it is, brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 26 bv9k figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί? 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or a clarification. Alternate translation: “This is what it is, brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 26 f8ai figs-explicit τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here Paul could be asking this question about: (1) what his argument means for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “What then do I mean” (2) what the Corinthians should be doing. Alternate translation: “What then should you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 26 b79h figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 26 ke1q figs-go συνέρχησθε 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, **come together** refers to a group gathering in a specific place. Your language may say “go” or “gather” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whatever is most natural. Alternate translation: “you go together” or “you assemble together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -2119,7 +2119,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 12 jbi8 figs-idiom ἐγήγερται 1 raised Here, **raised** refers to someone who died and comes back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he was restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 12 zamn figs-activepassive ἐγήγερται 1 raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on Jesus, who **was raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 12 ja71 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν…νεκρῶν 1 raised Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people … of the dead people” or “from the corpses … of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 15 12 ub2p figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν? 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “that cannot be true.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is shocked that they are saying this or that it is contradictory to say this. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I am amazed that some among you say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” or “it does not make sense for some among you to say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 15 12 ub2p figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν? 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “that cannot be true.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is shocked that they are saying this or that it is contradictory to say this. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I am amazed that some among you say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” or “it does not make sense for some among you to say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 12 izkz figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the dead will not resurrect” or “the dead will not be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 13 eqxa εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised Here, **there is no resurrection of {the} dead** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:12](../15/12.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “if that were true” 1CO 15 13 zwcu grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν 1 if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that there really is a **resurrection of {the} dead**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that “there is no resurrection of the dead” (see [15:12](../15/12.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if there actually were no resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -2222,18 +2222,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 28 aye7 ὁ Θεὸς 1 the Son himself Here, **God** could refer to: (1) **God** the Father specifically. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (2) all three persons that are **God**. Alternate translation: “the Trinity” or “the trinitarian God” 1CO 15 28 v3lb figs-idiom πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 the Son himself Here, **all in all** is a phrase that emphasizes that **God** rules and controls everything that exists. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **all in all** with a comparable phrase that refers to how **God** rules and controls **all** things. Alternate translation: “supreme” or “the one who rules all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 29 j7o9 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐπεὶ 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Here, **Otherwise** introduces the opposite of what Paul has argued in [15:12–28](../15/12.md). If what he has argued about Jesus’ resurrection and its importance is not true, then what he says in this verse must be true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Otherwise** with a word or phrase that introduces an opposite or contrast. Alternate translation: “If all that is not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1CO 15 29 a4d4 figs-rquestion τί ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν? 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “They will accomplish nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “those who are baptized for the dead do nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 15 29 a4d4 figs-rquestion τί ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν? 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “They will accomplish nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “those who are baptized for the dead do nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 29 izah figs-activepassive ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are getting **baptized** rather than focusing on the person doing the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “will those do whom others baptize” or “will those do who receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 29 jpb7 figs-explicit ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Here Paul speaks of “doing” something in the future. He could be referring to: (1) the intended result of being **baptized**, which happens after the baptism. Alternate translation: “will those accomplish who are baptized” (2) what the people **being baptized** think that they are doing. Alternate translation: “do those who are baptized for the dead think that they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 29 m7v6 figs-explicit ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν…βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? It is unclear what **being baptized for the dead** actually means and what kind of practice it refers to. What is clear is that the practice only makes sense if one believes that **the dead** are **raised**. If possible, express these phrases in general terms. Two of the most common ways to understand **being baptized for the dead** are that it could refer to: (1) the practice of living believers receiving baptism in place of people who died without being baptized. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized in place of the dead … are they baptized in their place” (2) people receiving baptism because they believe that the **dead** will “rise.” They could be expecting their own resurrection or the resurrection of people they knew who are **dead**. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized with the dead in mind … are they baptized with them in mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 29 js1o figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν…νεκροὶ 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people … the dead people” or “the corpses … the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 15 29 t3yc grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ὅλως νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 are not raised Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **{the} dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **{the} dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 15 29 jdc9 figs-activepassive νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 the dead are not raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are or **are not raised** rather than focusing on the person doing the raising. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 15 29 s7kx figs-rquestion τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 why then are they baptized for them? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no reason why.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “they are baptized for them for nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 15 29 s7kx figs-rquestion τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 why then are they baptized for them? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no reason why.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “they are baptized for them for nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 29 mdnr figs-activepassive βαπτίζονται 1 why then are they baptized for them? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are getting **baptized** rather than focusing on the person doing the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “do others baptize them” or “do they receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 29 wibf writing-pronouns βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 why then are they baptized for them? Here, **they** refers to the people **being baptized for the dead**, while **them** refers to **{the} dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly what people these pronouns the refer to. Alternate translation: “are these people baptized for the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 30 mh1y grammar-connect-words-phrases τί καὶ 1 Why then, are we in danger every hour? Here, **Why also** introduces another response to the condition “If the dead are not raised at all” in [15:29](../15/29.md). Use a word or phrase that clearly connects this question back to that condition. Alternate translation: “Again, if that is true, why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 15 30 h4ra figs-rquestion τί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν? 1 Why then, are we in danger every hour? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no reason why.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “We also are in danger every hour for nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 15 30 h4ra figs-rquestion τί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν? 1 Why then, are we in danger every hour? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no reason why.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “We also are in danger every hour for nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 30 ogf1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Why then, are we in danger every hour? Here, **we** refers to Paul and other apostles who preach the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 15 30 t593 figs-explicit ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν 1 Here Paul says that **we** are **in danger** because of the work that he and others do to proclaim the gospel. If your readers would not infer that this is why Paul and others are **in danger**, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “are we in danger every hour on account of the gospel” or “are we in danger every hour because we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 30 dmcj figs-abstractnouns ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **danger**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “endanger” or an adverb such as “dangerously.” Alternate translation: “do we live dangerously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From fc3cd8ecbdb9e4f0fccf06cea9d5742317fae915 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:32:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 254/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b7a3b45975..2cdeb6dd58 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2424,25 +2424,25 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 intro abcj 0 # 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)
* The collection (16:1–4)
* Travel plans (16:5–12)
11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)
* Final commands (16:13–18)
* Greetings and closing (16:19–24)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Letter writing and sending

In this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Paul mentions that he writes the final greeting or the last few verses “in my own hand” ([16:21](../16/21.md)). This is because the rest of the letter was written by a scribe, who wrote down what Paul dictated. Paul writes the last greeting as a personal touch and to prove that he was indeed the author.

### The collection

In [16:1–4](../16/01.md), Paul refers to a “collection” that he will take or send to Jerusalem. He speaks at greater length about this “collection” in ([Romans 15:22–32](../rom/15/22.md)) and ([2 Corinthians 8–9](../2co/08/01.md)). His plan was to collect money from churches that were mostly Gentile and give that money to the church in Jerusalem that was mostly Jewish. In this way, the poorer believers in Jerusalem would receive support and Jewish and Gentile believers would be more connected. In these verses, Paul assumes that the Corinthians already know about this plan. He gives them instructions on how to help him carry it out. Make sure that you translate these verses in such a way that it is clear what Paul is talking about: collecting money to give to believers in Jerusalem.

### Travel plans

In this chapter, Paul includes travel plans for himself ([16:5–9](../16/05.md)) and for Timothy and Apollos ([16:10–12](../16/10.md)). Paul and Apollos are in Ephesus, and Timothy has left Ephesus and is traveling to Corinth (in “Achaia”) when Paul writes this letter. When people traveled from Corinth to Ephesus or vice versa, they could go by boat through the Mediterranean Sea, or they could travel on land through what is now Northern Greece (“Macedonia”) and Western Turkey (“Asia”). Paul states that he plans to travel by land; it is not clear how Timothy or others traveled. Use words that are appropriate for these kinds of movements in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])

### Greetings

In this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letter. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In [16:19–21](../16/19.md) Paul includes greetings to and from people whom he and the Corinthians know. Express these greetings in a natural form in your language. 1CO 16 1 zh6u grammar-connect-words-phrases περὶ δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Just as in [7:1](../07/01.md), [25](../07/25.md), **Now concerning** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to address. Likely, the topics that he introduces in this way are what the Corinthians wrote to him about. Translate **Now concerning** here as you did in [7:1](../07/01.md), [25](../07/25.md). Alternate translation: “Next, about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 1 okzo translate-unknown τῆς λογείας 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **the collection** refers to money that is “collected” from people for a specific purpose. Here Paul clarifies that it is “collected” **for the saints**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **collection** with a word or phrase that refers to money that is “collected” for a purpose. Alternate translation: “the offering” or “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 16 1 yer5 figs-explicit εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 for the saints Here Paul does not clarify which **saints** he is speaking about. However, in [16:3](../16/03.md), he states that this **collection** will be taken to “Jerusalem.” Therefore, the **saints** are Jewish people who believe in Jesus. The Corinthians would have known to which **saints** Paul is referring, but If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind who the **saints** areexplicitly here instead of waiting until [16:3](../16/03.md). Alternate translation: “for the Jewish saints” or “for the saints in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 16 1 yer5 figs-explicit εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 for the saints Here Paul does not clarify which **saints** he is speaking about. However, in [16:3](../16/03.md), he states that this **collection** will be taken to “Jerusalem.” Therefore, the **saints** are Jewish people who believe in Jesus. The Corinthians would have known to which **saints** Paul is referring, but If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind who the **saints** are explicitly here instead of waiting until [16:3](../16/03.md). Alternate translation: “for the Jewish saints” or “for the saints in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 1 nyy7 figs-infostructure ὥσπερ διέταξα ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Γαλατίας, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιήσατε 1 for the saints If your language would normally state the command (**you must do**) before the comparison (**even as**), you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “also you must do even as I directed the churches of Galatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 16 1 kh6h translate-names τῆς Γαλατίας 1 as I directed Here, **Galatia** is the name of a region in what is now Turkey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **Galatia** refers to by clarifying that it is a region or an area. Alternate translation: “of Galatia province” or “of the area named Galatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -1CO 16 2 w1jv figs-idiom κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 1 storing up Here, the **first of the week** refers to the first day of the week in the Jewish calendar, which is the day we call Sunday. It is also the day on which Christians would hold special gatherings since Jesus rose from the dead on this day of the week. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Every first of the week** with a normal way to refer to Sunday, the first day of the week, which is when Christians gather to worship God. Alternate translation: “Every Sunday” or “On the worship day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 16 2 w1jv figs-idiom κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 1 storing up Here, the **first of {the} week** refers to the first day of the week in the Jewish calendar, which is the day we call Sunday. It is also the day on which Christians would hold special gatherings since Jesus rose from the dead on this day of the week. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Every first of {the} week** with a normal way to refer to Sunday, the first day of the week, which is when Christians gather to worship God. Alternate translation: “Every Sunday” or “On the worship day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 2 bx0o figs-imperative3p ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τιθέτω 1 storing up Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “each of you must put something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) -1CO 16 2 ivmd figs-idiom ἕκαστος ὑμῶν παρ’ ἑαυτῷ τιθέτω 1 storing up Here, to **put something aside** refers to putting some money in a specific location in one’s house to use later for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put something aside** with a phrase that refers to putting money in a specific location. Alternate translation: “let each of you place some money in a special place” or “let each of you separate something out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 16 2 ivmd figs-idiom ἕκαστος ὑμῶν παρ’ ἑαυτῷ τιθέτω 1 storing up Here, to **put {something} aside** refers to putting some money in a specific location in one’s house to use later for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put {something} aside** with a phrase that refers to putting money in a specific location. Alternate translation: “let each of you place some money in a special place” or “let each of you separate something out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 2 h8n9 translate-unknown θησαυρίζων 1 storing up Here, **storing up** refers to saving something, which in this case is money. Use a word or phrase that refers to saving money. Alternate translation: “reserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 16 2 ztyz figs-idiom ὅ τι ἐὰν εὐοδῶται 1 storing up Here, **whatever he might have prospered** refers to how much money a person earned. Here, the phrase could specifically refer to: (1) how much more a person made than what they needed or expected. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put something aside** from the extra money that they received. Alternate translation: “from whatever you earned more than you expected” (2) the amount a person made in a specific period of time. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put something aside** in proportion to how much they made during a week. Alternate translation: “according to how much you made that week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 16 2 ztyz figs-idiom ὅ τι ἐὰν εὐοδῶται 1 storing up Here, **whatever he might have prospered** refers to how much money a person earned. Here, the phrase could specifically refer to: (1) how much more a person made than what they needed or expected. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put {something} aside** from the extra money that they received. Alternate translation: “from whatever you earned more than you expected” (2) the amount a person made in a specific period of time. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put {something} aside** in proportion to how much they made during a week. Alternate translation: “according to how much you made that week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 2 ehne figs-gendernotations εὐοδῶται 1 storing up Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “you might have prospered” or “he or she might have prospered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 16 2 q16u figs-go ἔλθω 1 storing up Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 16 2 wc3w translate-unknown μὴ…λογεῖαι γίνωνται 1 so that there will be no collections when I come Here, **collections** refers to “collecting” money from people for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **collections** with a word or phrase that refers to “collecting” money for a purpose. Alternate translation: “I will not need to ask for money” or “there will not be requested donations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 3 yj6c translate-unknown οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε 1 whomever you approve Here, those whom the Corinthians **approve** are those whom they consider to be trustworthy and able to accomplish the task of taking the money to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **whomever you might approve** with a word or phrase that refers to choosing people to accomplish a specific task. Alternate translation: “whomever you might choose” or “whomever you might commission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 3 u2ik figs-infostructure οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε…τούτους πέμψω 1 whomever you approve Here Paul identifies whom he is talking about first (**whomever you might approve**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **them** in the next clause. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “I will send whomever you might approve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -1CO 16 3 j612 figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῶν 1 I will send with letters In Paul’s culture, messengers and travelers often carried a letter or letters that were meant to introduce them to the person they were going to visit. These kinds of letters usually stated that the messenger or traveler was trustworthy and should be welcomed. You can find the sorts of things that would be written in these types of letters in [2 Corinthians 8:16–24](../2co/08/16.md). Here, the letters could be from: (1) Paul. Alternate translation: “with letters of introduction from me” (2) the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “with your letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 16 3 j612 figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῶν 1 I will send with letters In Paul’s culture, messengers and travelers often carried a letter or **letters** that were meant to introduce them to the person they were going to visit. These kinds of **letters** usually stated that the messenger or traveler was trustworthy and should be welcomed. You can find the sorts of things that would be written in these types of letters in [2 Corinthians 8:16–24](../2co/08/16.md). Here, the letters could be from: (1) Paul. Alternate translation: “with letters of introduction from me” (2) the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “with your letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 3 yivo figs-explicit τὴν χάριν ὑμῶν 1 I will send with letters Here, **your gift** refers to the money that the Corinthians have “collected.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **your gift** by clarifying that it is the **gift** of the money that they have “put aside.” Alternate translation: “your money” or “your contribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 3 f7wm translate-names Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 I will send with letters Here, **Jerusalem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 16 4 z8x4 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν…ἄξιον ᾖ τοῦ κἀμὲ πορεύεσθαι…πορεύσονται 1 I will send with letters Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that it might be **appropriate for me to go also**, or it might not. He specifies the result for when **it is appropriate**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the if statement by introducing it with a word or phrase such as “suppose” or “were it to be.” Alternate translation: “suppose that it is appropriate for me to go also. Then, they will go” or “were it to be appropriate for me to go also, then they would will go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 16 4 ofl5 figs-explicit ἄξιον ᾖ 1 I will send with letters Here, **appropriate** identifies an action that fits or matches the situation. Paul does not explicitly state who thinks **it is appropriate**. It could be: (1) both Paul and the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “we consider it appropriate for” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I think it is appropriate for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 16 4 d5zq figs-go πορεύεσθαι, σὺν ἐμοὶ πορεύσονται 1 I will send with letters Here, **go** refers to traveling to Jerusalem. Use a word or phrase that refers to traveling to a different location. Alternate translation: “to travel … they will travel with me” or “visit Jerusalem … they will accompany me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +1CO 16 4 d5zq figs-go κἀμὲ πορεύεσθαι, σὺν ἐμοὶ πορεύσονται 1 I will send with letters Here, **go** refers to traveling to Jerusalem. Use a word or phrase that refers to traveling to a different location. Alternate translation: “me to travel also, they will travel with me” or “me also to visit Jerusalem, they will accompany me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 16 5 ei27 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 I will send with letters Here, **But** introduces a new topic: Paul’s own travel plans. It does not introduce a contrast with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 5 hr4z figs-go ἐλεύσομαι…πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 I will send with letters Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 16 5 munt figs-go διέλθω…διέρχομαι 1 I will send with letters Here, **passed through** and **going through** refer to entering and then exiting an area while one is traveling. Use a form in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “I have entered and then left … I am entering and then leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) From aa7e37b0884f4be59771a129f7e972a60cdb322d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:37:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 255/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2cdeb6dd58..8e08720a55 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2450,7 +2450,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 5 zqlh figs-pastforfuture διέρχομαι 1 I will send with letters Here Paul speaks as if he were **going through Macedonia** while he writes this letter. He speaks in this way because it is his current plan to go **through Macedonia** when he leaves Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul speaks in the present tense here with whatever tense is customarily used to speak about travel plans in your language. Alternate translation: “I will go through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 16 6 lsbt translate-unknown τυχὸν 1 you may help me on my way, wherever I go Here, **perhaps** indicates that Paul is uncertain about how long he will stay with the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perhaps** with a word that indicates uncertainty or lack of confidence. Alternate translation: “maybe” or “possibly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 6 w94k figs-explicit ὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε 1 you may help me on my way, wherever I go Here, to **help** people on their **way** refers to assisting them with the things that they need to travel, including food and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **help me on my way** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “you could give me what I need to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 16 6 av1w figs-idiom οὗ ἐὰν πορεύωμαι 1 you may help me on my way, wherever I go Here, **wherever might I go** identifies the place Paul will visit after he visits the Corinthians, but it does not state where that place is. In other words, Paul will travel somewhere else, but he does not say where. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wherever might I go** with a word or phrase that refers to traveling to an unknown or unstated destination. Alternate translation: “to whatever city I want to visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 16 6 av1w figs-idiom οὗ ἐὰν πορεύωμαι 1 you may help me on my way, wherever I go Here, **wherever I might go** identifies the place Paul will visit after he visits the Corinthians, but it does not state where that place is. In other words, Paul will travel somewhere else, but he does not say where. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wherever I might go** with a word or phrase that refers to traveling to an unknown or unstated destination. Alternate translation: “to whatever city I want to visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 6 ei3f figs-go πορεύωμαι 1 you may help me on my way, wherever I go Here, **go** refers to how Paul will leave Corinth and travel to another place. Use a word that describes this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “I might head” or “I might travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 16 7 pwsn figs-synecdoche ἰδεῖν 1 I do not wish to see you now Here, **to see** people refers to spending time with them, not just seeing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to see** with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to visit” or “to spend time with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1CO 16 7 ibo8 figs-pastforfuture ἄρτι 1 I do not wish to see you now Here, **now** refers to the soonest Paul could arrive in Corinth. It contrasts with a visit that could happen later and last longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **now** with a word or phrase that refers to the near future. Alternate translation: “very soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) From fe7b3ee4a14c931b204b77f8aad9f99d26d1ac4d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:37:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 256/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9194353720..12e6d3a980 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3174,11 +3174,11 @@ ACT 23 17 a528 figs-imperative ἄπαγε 1 take This is an imperative, but it ACT 23 18 abd0 writing-pronouns ὁ…παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν 1 taking him, he brought him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 18 lrs3 φησίν 1 says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” ACT 23 19 a530 translate-symaction ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 taking hold of his hand The chiliarch **taking hold** of the **hand** of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a **private** location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 23 20 uv6r figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 The Jews Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 23 20 uv6r figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 The Jews Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, **The Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 23 21 a532 figs-activepassive σὺ…μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς 1 may you not be persuaded by them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 21 a533 figs-metonymy τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 the promise from you By the word **promise**, Paul’s nephew is referring to the commander agreeing to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin the next day and actually bringing him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 23 22 a534 figs-quotations παραγγείλας, μηδενὶ ἐκλαλῆσαι ὅτι ταῦτα ἐνεφάνισας πρὸς ἐμέ 1 commanding him to tell no one that “you have reported these things to me” Here Luke begins an indirect quotation but finishes it as a direct quotation. It may be more natural in your language for the entire quotation to be either indirect or direct. Alternate translation: “commanding him to tell no one that he had reported these things to him” or “commanding him, ‘Tell no one that you have reported these things to me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 200 spearmen Alternate translation: “two hundred soldiers who are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 200 spearmen Alternate translation: “200 soldiers who are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 23 23 kg8s figs-idiom τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός 1 third hour of the night In your translation, you may wish to express this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock this evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 23 24 a535 figs-quotations κτήνη τε παραστῆσαι, ἵνα ἐπιβιβάσαντες τὸν Παῦλον, διασώσωσι πρὸς Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα, 1 and to provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor Here Luke finishes as an indirect quotation the direct quotation that began in the previous verse. It may be more natural in your language to finish the quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “and provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 24 a536 writing-pronouns διασώσωσι 1 they may bring him safely The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, horsemen, and spearmen described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these troops may bring him safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 06fb5f99d1039cb77ffd922797ce9e204ce294d0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:43:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 257/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 8e08720a55..51abbc679a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2508,7 +2508,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 15 na2p translate-names Ἀχαΐας 1 Achaia **Achaia** is the name of a province in the southern part of what we call Greece. The city of Corinth is in this province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 16 15 tki1 translate-unknown εἰς…ἔταξαν ἑαυτούς 1 Achaia Here, **they have devoted themselves** refers to how these people decided to spend most of their time doing something specific. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **devoted themselves** with a word or phrase that refers to how people choose to spend their time doing one thing. Alternate translation: “they have focused on” or “they have dedicated themselves to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 15 x6p6 figs-abstractnouns διακονίαν τοῖς ἁγίοις 1 Achaia If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **service**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “help” or “serve.” Alternate translation: “help the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 16 16 w9ki writing-pronouns τοῖς τοιούτοις 1 Achaia Here, **those such as these** refers back to the “household of Stephanas” from the previous verse ([16:15](../16/15.md)). It also refers to anyone else who, like that “household,” “devote themselves to the service of the saints.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **those such as these** refers to “the household of Stephanas” and others like them with a word or phrase that does clearly refer to these two groups. Alternate translation: “to people who are like that” or “to them and those such as them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 16 16 w9ki writing-pronouns τοῖς τοιούτοις 1 Achaia Here, **the ones such as these** refers back to the “household of Stephanas” from the previous verse ([16:15](../16/15.md)). It also refers to anyone else who, like that “household,” “devote themselves to the service of the saints.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **the ones such as these** refers to “the household of Stephanas” and others like them with a word or phrase that does clearly refer to these two groups. Alternate translation: “to people who are like that” or “to them and those such as them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 16 16 ljg3 figs-abstractnouns συνεργοῦντι 1 Achaia If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **work**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “work.” Alternate translation: “who is working together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 16 16 c6zz figs-doublet συνεργοῦντι καὶ κοπιῶντι 1 Achaia Here, **joining together in the work** and **laboring** mean very similar things. The phrase **joining together in the work** emphasizes that people are working together. The word **laboring** emphasizes that the people are working hard. If your language does not have two words that represent these ideas, or if using two words here would be confusing, you can combine these ideas into one phrase. Alternate translation: “who is joining together in working hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 16 17 h9l8 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus Here, **Now** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a comparable word or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -2519,7 +2519,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 18 f3kg figs-idiom ἀνέπαυσαν…τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **refreshed my spirit and yours** refers to how these three men helped Paul and the Corinthians regain energy, strength, and confidence. In other words, they helped Paul and the Corinthians feel better and stronger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they raised my spirits and yours” or “they helped me and you rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 18 lfxl τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **spirit** is part of the idiom “refresh the spirit.” It refers to the **spirit** of the person, or their inner life, not to the Holy Spirit. If your readers would find **spirit** confusing, you could refer just to the people instead of to their “spirits.” Alternate translation: “me and you” 1CO 16 18 hxt7 figs-ellipsis τὸ ὑμῶν 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here Paul omits what it is that is **yours**. He does this because he stated it in the previous phrase (**spirit**). If your language would not omit **spirit** here, you could include it. Alternate translation: “your spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 16 18 k9d8 writing-pronouns τοὺς τοιούτους 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **those like these** refers back to the three men whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse ([16:17](../16/17.md)). It also refers to anyone else who, like those men, “refreshes the spirit” of others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **those like these** refers to the three men and others like them with a word or phrase that does clearly refer to these two groups. Alternate translation: “people who are like that” or “them and those such as them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 16 18 k9d8 writing-pronouns τοὺς τοιούτους 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **the ones like these** refers back to the three men whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse ([16:17](../16/17.md)). It also refers to anyone else who, like those men, “refreshes the spirit” of others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **the ones like these** refers to the three men and others like them with a word or phrase that does clearly refer to these two groups. Alternate translation: “people who are like that” or “them and those such as them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 16 19 s0ml translate-names τῆς Ἀσίας 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **Asia** refers to a province or region in the western part of what we now call Turkey. The city that Paul is in, Ephesus, was in the province of **Asia**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 16 19 urc0 ἀσπάζονται…ἀσπάζεται…πολλὰ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit As was customary in his culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “ask to be remembered … enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “send regards … enthusiastically send regards to” 1CO 16 19 nzlw figs-idiom πολλὰ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **enthusiastically** indicates that **Aquila and Priscilla** wish to **greet** the Corinthians especially strongly or with extra friendship. Use a word or phrase that identifies an especially strong or friendly greeting. Alternate translation: “warmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From e618e6e49d27503471ef11f75c0ec84d498e1936 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:47:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 258/269] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 51abbc679a..2359e5c391 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -2524,7 +2524,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 19 urc0 ἀσπάζονται…ἀσπάζεται…πολλὰ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit As was customary in his culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “ask to be remembered … enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “send regards … enthusiastically send regards to” 1CO 16 19 nzlw figs-idiom πολλὰ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **enthusiastically** indicates that **Aquila and Priscilla** wish to **greet** the Corinthians especially strongly or with extra friendship. Use a word or phrase that identifies an especially strong or friendly greeting. Alternate translation: “warmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 19 n135 translate-names Ἀκύλας καὶ Πρίσκα 1 For they have refreshed my spirit **Aquila** is the name of a man, and **Priscilla** is the name of a woman. These two people were married to each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -1CO 16 19 wkte figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the greeting from **Aquila and Priscilla** as something that they give because both they and the Corinthians are united to the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in their union with the Lord” or “as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 16 19 wkte figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in {the} Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the greeting from **Aquila and Priscilla** as something that they give because both they and the Corinthians are united to the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in their union with the Lord” or “as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 16 19 tipf figs-ellipsis ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς ἐν Κυρίῳ πολλὰ Ἀκύλας καὶ Πρίσκα, σὺν τῇ κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Paul has not included the verb “greet” with **the church in their home**, because it was unnecessary in his language. If including “greet” is necessary in your language, you could (1) move **with the church in their home** before **greet you**. Alternate translation: “Aquila and Priscilla, with the church in their home, enthusiastically greet you in the Lord” (2) include it with the phrase and **with the church in their home**. Alternate translation: “Aquila and Priscilla enthusiastically greet you in the Lord, and the church in their home also greets you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 16 20 pds6 figs-explicit οἱ ἀδελφοὶ πάντες 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **All the brothers** refers to fellow believers. They could be: (1) everyone in Ephesus (where Paul is) who wishes to say hello to the believers in Corinth. Alternate translation: “All the brothers here” (2) the believers who travel and work with Paul. Alternate translation: “All the brothers who work with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 20 c6sd figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2532,7 +2532,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 20 j4bw ἀσπάσασθε ἀλλήλους 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Since this letter would be read in public to the Corinthian believers, Paul wishes them to **Greet** each other in this situation. If possible, translate **Greet** as you did earlier in the verse. If you must translate it differently, use a word or phrase for “greeting” other people who are meeting together. Alternate translation: “Say hello to one another” or “Receive one another” 1CO 16 20 fbuc translate-unknown ἐν φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 For they have refreshed my spirit Here, **a holy kiss** describes a **kiss** that believers would give to other believers (that is why it is **holy**). In Paul’s culture, this was an appropriate way to greet someone with whom one was very close, such as a family member or a good friend. You could use a greeting that is used by close friends or family members and clarify that here it is used in a **holy** or Christian way. Alternate translation: “with a Christian hug” or “in warm way that is appropriate for fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 21 izu6 ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 I, Paul, write this with my own hand Paul concludes his letter by writing a final greeting to the Corinthians. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “I ask to be remembered in my own hand” or “I send regards in my own hand” -1CO 16 21 msa3 figs-explicit ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 I, Paul, write this with my own hand In Paul’s culture, it was normal for a scribe to write down what the author of the letter was saying. Paul here indicates that he himself is writing these last words. He may mean just this verse, or he may mean the rest of the letter. The phrase **in my own hand** means that it was **his own hand** that took up the pen and wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **in my own hand**by using a comparable expression or include any extra information needed to make it clear. Alternate translation: “This greeting is in my handwriting” or “I write this greeting myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 16 21 msa3 figs-explicit ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 I, Paul, write this with my own hand In Paul’s culture, it was normal for a scribe to write down what the author of the letter was saying. Paul here indicates that he himself is writing these last words. He may mean just this verse, or he may mean the rest of the letter. The phrase **in my own hand** means that it was Paul’s “own hand” that took up the pen and wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **in my own hand**by using a comparable expression or include any extra information needed to make it clear. Alternate translation: “This greeting is in my handwriting” or “I write this greeting myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 21 f483 figs-123person Παύλου 1 I, Paul, write this with my own hand Here, **Paul** speaks of himself in the third person. He does this to sign his name to the letter, which shows that the letter is from **Paul** himself and carries his authority. If your language has a specific form for signing letters or documents, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “I am Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 16 22 il5a grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τις οὐ φιλεῖ τὸν Κύριον 1 may he be accursed Here Paul speaks as **If** some people do **not love the Lord**, but he knows that this is true for some people. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “Whoever does not love the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 16 22 yacw figs-gendernotations ἤτω 1 may he be accursed Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using this word to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2542,7 +2542,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 23 r9je translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Corinthians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from the Lord Jesus within you” or “I pray that you will have grace from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1CO 16 23 ccke figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you can express by using an adjective such as “gracious” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “May the Lord Jesus act graciously toward you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 16 24 jo0u figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀγάπη μου μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express by using a verb such as “love” or an adverb such as “lovinly.” Alternate translation: “May I act lovingly toward you all” or “I love you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 16 24 uvkx figs-ellipsis μετὰ 1 may he be accursed Here Paul could imply the verb **be** (which indicates a wish or blessing) or the verb “is” (which indicates what is true). In either case, Paul’s point is that he intends to show **love** to them. Use a word or phrase that indicates a closing blessing or statement of love in your language. Alternate translation: “to” or “will be with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 16 24 uvkx figs-ellipsis μετὰ 1 may he be accursed Here Paul could imply the verb **{be}** (which indicates a wish or blessing) or the verb “is” (which indicates what is true). In either case, Paul’s point is that he intends to show **love** to them. Use a word or phrase that indicates a closing blessing or statement of love in your language. Alternate translation: “to” or “will be with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 16 24 vtgx figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 may he be accursed Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ, identifies Paul’s **love** as something that he does because both he and the Corinthians are united to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our union with the Lord” or “as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 16 24 ob47 translate-textvariants ἀμήν 1 may he be accursed Many early manuscripts include **Amen** here. However some early manuscripts do not include it, and it is possible that scribes added it because some letters end with **Amen**. Consider whether translations your readers might be familiar with include **Amen** here or not. If there is no strong reason to choose one option over the other, you could follow the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1CO 16 24 g8sf translate-transliterate ἀμήν 1 may he be accursed This is a Hebrew word. Paul spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. He assumes that they know that it means “so be it” or “yes indeed.” In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. If your readers would not know what **Amen** means, you could also explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Amen, which means, ‘So be it!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +1CO 16 24 g8sf translate-transliterate ἀμήν 1 may he be accursed **Amen** is a Hebrew word. Paul spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. He assumes that they know that it means “so be it” or “yes indeed.” In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. If your readers would not know what **Amen** means, you could also explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Amen, which means, ‘So be it!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) From 96328b7523fe56548ba38a022b406bde6664558b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 20:59:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 259/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 12e6d3a980..1728b06b39 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3180,7 +3180,7 @@ ACT 23 21 a533 figs-metonymy τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 th ACT 23 22 a534 figs-quotations παραγγείλας, μηδενὶ ἐκλαλῆσαι ὅτι ταῦτα ἐνεφάνισας πρὸς ἐμέ 1 commanding him to tell no one that “you have reported these things to me” Here Luke begins an indirect quotation but finishes it as a direct quotation. It may be more natural in your language for the entire quotation to be either indirect or direct. Alternate translation: “commanding him to tell no one that he had reported these things to him” or “commanding him, ‘Tell no one that you have reported these things to me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 200 spearmen Alternate translation: “200 soldiers who are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 23 23 kg8s figs-idiom τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός 1 third hour of the night In your translation, you may wish to express this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock this evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 23 24 a535 figs-quotations κτήνη τε παραστῆσαι, ἵνα ἐπιβιβάσαντες τὸν Παῦλον, διασώσωσι πρὸς Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα, 1 and to provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor Here Luke finishes as an indirect quotation the direct quotation that began in the previous verse. It may be more natural in your language to finish the quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “and provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +ACT 23 24 a535 figs-quotations κτήνη τε παραστῆσαι, ἵνα ἐπιβιβάσαντες τὸν Παῦλον, διασώσωσι πρὸς Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα, 1 and to provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor Here Luke finishes as an indirect quotation the direct quotation that began in the previous verse. It may be more natural in your language to continue and finish the quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “and provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 24 a536 writing-pronouns διασώσωσι 1 they may bring him safely The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, horsemen, and spearmen described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these troops may bring him safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 24 av3h translate-names Φήλικα 1 Felix The word **Felix** is the name of the man who was the Roman **governor** of Judea at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 23 25 a537 figs-explicit γράψας ἐπιστολὴν 1 writing a letter Luke means implicitly that the commander gave the instructions described in the previous two verses by “summoning” two centurions and **writing** the letter quoted in verses 26–30. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He also wrote a letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3193,7 +3193,7 @@ ACT 23 27 zr7l figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews The commande ACT 23 27 a538 figs-explicit Ῥωμαῖός 1 a Roman Here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 23 28 a539 figs-extrainfo κατήγαγον 1 I took him down The commander says that he took Paul ** down** to the Sanhedrin because he brought him down the steps from the Roman fortress to the temple courtyard. It may not be necessary to reproduce this detail in your translation. Alternate translation: “I brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 23 29 zt4f figs-activepassive ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν; μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα 1 whom I found being accused about questions of their law but having no accusation worthy of death or chains If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I found that the Jews were accusing him about questions of their law, but they were not accusing him of anything worthy of death or chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-metonymy θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν 1 death or chains The commander is using the word **death** to mean a penalty of death. He is referring to imprisonment by association with the way that the Romans used **chains** to secure prisoners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “execution or imprisonment” or “being put to death or being put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-metonymy θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν 1 death or chains The commander is using the word **death** to mean a penalty of death. He is referring to imprisonment by association with the way that the Romans used **chains** to secure prisoners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “execution or imprisonment” or “of being put to death or being put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 23 30 i2ji figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης…μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι 1 when a plot that was to be against the man was revealed to me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 31 ny4k figs-activepassive κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς 1 according to what had been commanded to them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 Antipatris The word **Antipatris** is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 91bba29c2cc2981d70eb7ccf280fca32256dcbb8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 21:08:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 260/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1728b06b39..3ac5b0081e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3197,7 +3197,7 @@ ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-metonymy θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν 1 death or chains ACT 23 30 i2ji figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης…μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι 1 when a plot that was to be against the man was revealed to me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 31 ny4k figs-activepassive κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς 1 according to what had been commanded to them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 Antipatris The word **Antipatris** is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν…αὐτῷ 1 they returned…him The pronoun **they** refers to the soliders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν…αὐτῷ 1 they returned…him The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsement reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 having asked what province he was from It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 3c60a348cdd7352b7f2181517882823b396b1f09 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 21:10:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 261/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 3ac5b0081e..786f2c0b8a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3198,9 +3198,9 @@ ACT 23 30 i2ji figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης…μοι ἐπιβουλ ACT 23 31 ny4k figs-activepassive κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς 1 according to what had been commanded to them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 Antipatris The word **Antipatris** is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν…αὐτῷ 1 they returned…him The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsement reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 having asked what province he was from It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Respect

Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Governmental leaders

The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 24 1 a540 writing-participants ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός 1 a certain orator, Tertullus Luke is using the phrase **a certain orator** to introduce **Tertullus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 24 1 f3vx translate-unknown ῥήτορος 1 an orator In this context, the term **orator** means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From 6e180ae8a8b87e955ae74e820b26b2ea2c33a25d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 21:13:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 262/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 786f2c0b8a..f3035f530d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3064,7 +3064,7 @@ ACT 22 10 a480 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύρι ACT 22 10 a91a figs-activepassive σοι λαληθήσεται 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 10 a481 figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν τέτακταί 1 all that has been appointed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 11 n1kb figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου 1 because of the glory of that light If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because that light was so bright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 22 11 qyf0 figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι 1 being led by the hand by the ones being with me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with those who were with me leading me by the hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 22 11 qyf0 figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι 1 being led by the hand by the ones being with me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the ones being with me leading me by the hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 11 a482 figs-go ἦλθον 1 I came In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “I went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 22 12 a17q writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς 1 a certain devout man Paul is using the phrase **a certain devout man** to introduce **Ananias** as a new participant in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 22 12 e7uw figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων 1 being attested by all the Jews living there If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom all the Jews there attested” or “of whom all the Jews there spoke well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3200,7 +3200,7 @@ ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 Antipatris The ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν…αὐτῷ 1 they returned…him The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 having asked what province he was from It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Respect

Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Governmental leaders

The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 24 1 a540 writing-participants ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός 1 a certain orator, Tertullus Luke is using the phrase **a certain orator** to introduce **Tertullus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 24 1 f3vx translate-unknown ῥήτορος 1 an orator In this context, the term **orator** means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From adc62a06902575be654c7c7e8b4afd2fa6e2650c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 21:18:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 263/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f3035f530d..027e9d6bfc 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3201,13 +3201,13 @@ ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν…αὐτῷ 1 they return ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 having asked what province he was from It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Respect

Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Governmental leaders

The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nPaul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Respect\n\nBoth the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Governmental leaders\n\nThe words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 24 1 a540 writing-participants ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός 1 a certain orator, Tertullus Luke is using the phrase **a certain orator** to introduce **Tertullus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 24 1 f3vx translate-unknown ῥήτορος 1 an orator In this context, the term **orator** means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου τινός 1 Tertullus The word **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 1 a541 figs-idiom κατέβη 1 came down Luke says that these men **came down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring to traveling downward in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 24 2 a542 figs-activepassive κληθέντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had been summoned If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 24 2 a543 writing-pronouns κατηγορεῖν 1 to accuse him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 24 2 a543 writing-pronouns κατηγορεῖν 1 to accuse him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive τυγχάνοντες 1 we are obtaining By **we**, Tertullus himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 24 2 qw1r writing-pronouns σοῦ…σῆς 1 you…your Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix…your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 24 2 a544 figs-explicit τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 for this people Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by **this people**, he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From ddc5d068b520b6d6f4e245105791bd4fb48f84f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:22:54 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 264/269] Correct missing spaces between words in 1 Corinthians. --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 64 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 32 insertions(+), 32 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2359e5c391..666ce11c26 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 1 20 mzxx figs-possession συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **debater** who is part of **this age**. In fact, Paul may mean that the **wise person** and the **scholar** also belong to **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the debater, who belongs in this age” or “the debater? All these kinds of people belong to this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 1 20 u5j5 translate-unknown συνζητητὴς 1 the debater Here, **debater** refers to a person who spends much of their time arguing about beliefs, values, or actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word with a short phrase or a term that expresses this idea better. Alternate translation: “the disputant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 1 20 a7zl figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου? 1 Has not God turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a statement. Alternate translation: “ God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 1 20 y5wx figs-possession τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that seems wise according to the standard of this **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this formusing a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that this world values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 1 20 y5wx figs-possession τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that seems wise according to the standard of this **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that this world values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 1 21 cihg grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces an explanation of how God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness ([1:20](../01/20.md)). You could use a word that introduces an explanation in your language or a short phrase that identifies that this verse explains the previous verse. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 1 21 eauj grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπειδὴ…οὐκ ἔγνω ὁ κόσμος διὰ τῆς σοφίας τὸν Θεόν, εὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Here, **since** introduces the reason for the second half of the verse, which , begins with **God was pleased**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit or break the two pieces into two sentences and use a transition word that indicates result. Alternate translation: “because … the world did not know God through wisdom, therefore God was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 1 21 tnez figs-possession ἐν τῇ σοφίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that **God** uses when he makes decisions or acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by adding “plans” or “thinking” and translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “in God’s wise plan” or ”in God’s wise thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 5 ovoj figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ 1 If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form by translating **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “you might believe not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 2 5 rkoy figs-possession σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **men** think is **wisdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by translating **men** with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “in human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 2 5 cdw7 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 2 5 b29d figs-possession δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that **God** has and shows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phraseby translating **power** as a verb or adverb with **God** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God working powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 2 5 b29d figs-possession δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that **God** has and shows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phrase by translating **power** as a verb or adverb with **God** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God working powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 2 6 azm7 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Now we do speak Here, **Now** introduces a contrast with what Paul has said in [2:4–5](../02/4.md). In those verses, he said that he did not speak with **wisdom**. In this verse, however, he clarifies that he does **speak** with **wisdom** of a certain kind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **Now**by using a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of this,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 2 6 uena figs-exclusive λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, **we** refers to Paul and others like him who preach the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 2 6 uka3 figs-abstractnouns σοφίαν -1 speak wisdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea by using by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wisely … the wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 7 q2z9 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς δόξαν ἡμῶν 1 for our glory Here, the phrase translated **for our glory** introduces the purpose for which **God predestined** the **wisdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for our glory** with a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that we might have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 2 8 bw5i writing-pronouns ἣν 1 Just as in [2:7](../02/07.md), **which** refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 2 8 imbk figs-possession τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using language about the time in which **the rulers** have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 2 8 ur15 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **for** introduces Paul’s proof that **the rulers** did not understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this wordusing a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 2 8 ur15 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **for** introduces Paul’s proof that **the rulers** did not understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this word using a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 2 8 ji1o grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν; 1 Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the **rulers** were the ones who **crucified** Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand God’s wisdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by reversing the two clauses and making **they understood {it}** negative and **they would not have crucified the Lord of glory** positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord of glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 2 8 zc89 figs-possession τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης 1 the Lord of glory Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Lord** who has **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by translating **glory** with an adjective or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who has glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 2 9 fu1y grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Things that no eye … arisen, the things … who love him Here, **But** introduces a contrast with the hypothetical statement in [2:8](../02/08.md) about how the rulers would not have crucified the Lord if they had understood God’s wisdom. The **But** reminds the reader that this hypothetical statement is not true, and Paul wishes to introduce further statements about how people do not understand God’s wisdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word or phrase that would signal that Paul is no longer speaking hypothetically. Alternate translation: “But instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -264,18 +264,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 13 yg45 figs-activepassive διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις 1 The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **words** that are **taught** rather than focusing on the person doing the “teaching.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “humans” or “people” do it. Alternate translation: “words that human wisdom teaches” or “words that humans teach as wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 13 ywbw figs-activepassive διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **words** that are **taught** rather than the **Spirit**, who does the “teaching.” Alternate translation: “those that the Spirit teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 13 gueq translate-unknown πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, the phrase **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** could mean: (1) that Paul and those with him interpret **spiritual things** and ideas with **spiritual words**. Alternate translation: “interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words” (2) that Paul and those with him explain **spiritual things** to **spiritual** people. Alternate translation: “explaining spiritual things to spiritual people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 2 13 kinz grammar-connect-time-simultaneous συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these {things}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connectionby including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +1CO 2 13 kinz grammar-connect-time-simultaneous συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these {things}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection by including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 1CO 2 13 mnpq translate-unknown συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, **combining** could mean: (1) interpreting or explaining an idea. Alternate translation: “interpreting” (2) putting two things together, either to compare or blend them together. Alternate translation: “comparing” or “compounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 2 14 i8jw grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, **But** introduces a new part of Paul’s argument, and it also introduces a contrast with how Paul and those with him speak by the power of the Spirit in [2:13](../02/13.md). Unlike Paul and those with him, the **natural person** does not have the Spirit and does not use spiritual words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1CO 2 14 hq3u translate-unknown ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος 1 unspiritual person The phrase **{the} natural person** describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phraseby using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 2 14 hq3u translate-unknown ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος 1 unspiritual person The phrase **{the} natural person** describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phrase by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 2 14 cve2 figs-genericnoun ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος, οὐ δέχεται…αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται 1 General Information: Paul uses the words **person**, **him**, and **he** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “any natural person does not receive … to him or her … he or she is not able” or “natural people do not receive … to them … they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 2 14 vvju figs-gendernotations αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται 1 Here, the words translated **him** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **him**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “to that person … that person is not able” or “to him or her … he or she is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 2 14 fye5 figs-activepassive μωρία…αὐτῷ ἐστίν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the structure and make **him** the subject of a verb such as “think” or “consider.” Alternate translation: “for he thinks that they are foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 14 gwe3 figs-activepassive πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται 1 because they are spiritually discerned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **discerned** rather than focusing on the person doing the “discerning.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people can only discern them spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 14 vznr πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται 1 Alternate translation: “they are discerned by the power of the Spirit” or “they are discerned by people who are indwelt by the Spirit” -1CO 2 15 w4q7 translate-unknown ὁ…πνευματικὸς 1 the one who is spiritual Here Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phraseby using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 2 15 w4q7 translate-unknown ὁ…πνευματικὸς 1 the one who is spiritual Here Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phrase by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 2 15 gcv7 figs-genericnoun ὁ…πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει…αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται 1 Paul uses the words **spiritual one** and **he himself** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 2 15 ap89 figs-hyperbole τὰ πάντα 1 Here Paul uses **all {things}** as an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern God’s gifts and the message of the gospel. Paul does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this exaggerationby using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1CO 2 15 ap89 figs-hyperbole τὰ πάντα 1 Here Paul uses **all {things}** as an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern God’s gifts and the message of the gospel. Paul does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this exaggeration by using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 2 15 ji5n figs-activepassive αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who is **discerned** rather than the person doing the “discerning.” Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 15 ypl6 figs-gendernotations αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται 1 Here, the words translated **he himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he himself**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 2 15 zg4b figs-explicit αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται 1 Here Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about the impossibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 4 mmlq figs-explicit ἄνθρωποί 1 When Paul says that the Corinthians are **men**, he means that they are “only” or “merely” **men**. He is not identifying them as humans. Rather, he means that they are acting and speaking from “merely human” perspective rather than from God’s perspective, a perspective they can share if they have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a word or phrase that clarifies that **men** refers to a “merely human” view of the world. Alternate translation: “merely men” or “speaking from a human perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 3 4 te5r figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποί 1 Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 3 5 typo grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 Here, **then** introduces a further stage in Paul’s argument. He has argued in [3:4](../03/04.md) that **Paul** and **Apollos** should not be treated as leaders of groups. In this verse, he goes on to explain how he thinks that **Paul** and **Apollos** should be treated, which is as servants of Christ. Thus, the word translated **then** introduces who **Paul** and **Apollos** really are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **then** untranslated or use a word that introduces the next step in an argument. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 3 5 m463 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν Ἀπολλῶς? τί δέ ἐστιν Παῦλος? διάκονοι 1 Who then is Apollos? And who is Paul? Here Paul uses these questions to do two things. First, the questions imply that **Apollos** and **Paul** are not very important. Therefore, an implied answer to these questions would be that **Apollos** and **Paul** are “not very much.” Second, Paul uses the questions to introduce his own answer to these questions. After using the questions to imply that he and **Apollos** are not much, he then states that they are **servants**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionsas a statement about the status of **Apollos** and **Paul** as **servants**, and you could use a word such as “only” or “merely” to express the idea that they are not very important. Alternate translation: “Apollos and Paul are merely servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 3 5 m463 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν Ἀπολλῶς? τί δέ ἐστιν Παῦλος? διάκονοι 1 Who then is Apollos? And who is Paul? Here Paul uses these questions to do two things. First, the questions imply that **Apollos** and **Paul** are not very important. Therefore, an implied answer to these questions would be that **Apollos** and **Paul** are “not very much.” Second, Paul uses the questions to introduce his own answer to these questions. After using the questions to imply that he and **Apollos** are not much, he then states that they are **servants**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions as a statement about the status of **Apollos** and **Paul** as **servants**, and you could use a word such as “only” or “merely” to express the idea that they are not very important. Alternate translation: “Apollos and Paul are merely servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 3 5 i9d0 translate-names Ἀπολλῶς…Παῦλος 1 **Apollos** and **Paul** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 3 5 lq6n figs-123person ἐστιν Παῦλος? 1 And who is Paul? In this verse, **Paul** speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this use of **Paul** by clarifying that **Paul** is naming himself. Alternate translation: “am I, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 3 5 qmy2 figs-ellipsis διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε 1 Servants through whom you believed Here Paul omits several words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language needs these words, you could include words such as “we are” or “they are.” Alternate translation: “We are servants through whom you believed” or “They are servants through whom you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 13 mv14 figs-explicit ἡ…ἡμέρα δηλώσει 1 for the daylight will reveal it Here Paul uses **day** in the same way the Old Testament uses it: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by **day**. Alternate translation: “the day of Christ’s return will display” or “when Christ returns, he will display it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 3 13 lyny figs-activepassive ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **revealed** rather than the person doing the “revealing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God reveals it in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 3 13 x48s writing-pronouns ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 Here, **it is revealed** refers to **the day**. It does not refer to the **work**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **it** refers to **the day**. Alternate translation: “that day is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 3 13 ozx6 figs-pastforfuture ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 Here Paul speaks as if the day **is revealed** right now. In his language, he can use the present tense to speak about the way in which something happens in general, even if it is not happening in the present moment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this use of the present tenseby using the future tense. Alternate translation: “it will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +1CO 3 13 ozx6 figs-pastforfuture ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 Here Paul speaks as if the day **is revealed** right now. In his language, he can use the present tense to speak about the way in which something happens in general, even if it is not happening in the present moment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this use of the present tense by using the future tense. Alternate translation: “it will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 3 13 rgfy ἐν πυρὶ 1 Alternate translation: “with fire” or “in a fiery way” 1CO 3 13 wo2j figs-rpronouns τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ 1 Here, **itself** focuses attention on **the fire**. If **itself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “that fire” or “the fire indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1CO 3 14 wexj grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται. 1 Here and in [3:15](../03/15.md), Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s **work** might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work that he built will remain will receive a reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -467,16 +467,16 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 6 e79m figs-activepassive μὴ εἷς…φυσιοῦσθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the person “puffs” himself or herself up. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 4 6 hjfu writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 Here, **the one** and **the other** refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **the one** and **the other**by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 4 7 fnu3 figs-yousingular σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών 1 between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -1CO 4 7 gtb5 figs-rquestion τίς…σε διακρίνει? 1 For who makes you superior? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 4 7 r6yw figs-rquestion τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες? 1 What do you have that you did not freely receive? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 4 7 gtb5 figs-rquestion τίς…σε διακρίνει? 1 For who makes you superior? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 4 7 r6yw figs-rquestion τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες? 1 What do you have that you did not freely receive? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 7 eixw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες 1 Paul is speaking as if “receiving {it}” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -1CO 4 7 e8l2 figs-rquestion τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών? 1 why do you boast as if you had not done so? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 4 7 e8l2 figs-rquestion τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών? 1 why do you boast as if you had not done so? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 7 p0hg writing-pronouns ἔλαβες…λαβών 2 Here, both uses of **{it}** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **{it}** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you can use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 4 8 yp8s figs-irony ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε 1 General Information: With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) 1CO 4 8 v77u figs-metaphor κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have had more than enough food to eat and beverages to drink. By this, he means that (they think that) they have so many spiritual blessings that there are no more that they can receive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of **satisfied** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you are stuffed with blessings” or “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 4 8 uc7s figs-metaphor ἐπλουτήσατε 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have become wealthy people. He speaks in this way to again emphasize that (they think that) they have more spiritual blessings than they need. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of **become rich**with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “you have become fat” or “you have an excess of spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 4 8 mpir figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **us** and **we** refer to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1CO 4 9 bb41 grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 God has put us apostles on display Here, **For** introduces evidence that Paul and the other apostles are not “reigning” right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connectionby using a contrast word such as “rather” or use a word or phrase that indicates that this sentence provides evidence that Paul is not “reigning.” Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “you could tell we are not reigning, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 4 9 bb41 grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 God has put us apostles on display Here, **For** introduces evidence that Paul and the other apostles are not “reigning” right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection by using a contrast word such as “rather” or use a word or phrase that indicates that this sentence provides evidence that Paul is not “reigning.” Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “you could tell we are not reigning, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 4 9 v0bg translate-unknown δοκῶ 1 Here, **I think** introduces Paul’s own opinion of what he and other **apostles** are meant to do and experience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **I think**by using a word or phrase that introduces a person’s interpretation or opinion. Alternate translation: “in my opinion,” or “it seems to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 4 9 lz8v figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἐγενήθημεν 1 Here, **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his fellow apostles. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 4 9 vfq3 figs-metaphor ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ἐσχάτους ἀπέδειξεν, ὡς ἐπιθανατίους 1 has put us apostles on display Here Paul uses a metaphor that identifies himself and other apostles as those who receive public humiliation and are put to death. The metaphor itself could: (1) refer to a Roman gladiatorial contest. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** in the arena as part of the **last** event. As those who are **sentenced to death**, they would then die in this last event. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles in the last event of the gladiatorial games, in which we are destined to die” (2) refer to a victory parade. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** at the end of the parade, or **last**. As the **last** prisoners, they are **sentenced to death**, and will be killed soon after the parade ends. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles at the end of the victory parade, in the place where prisoners who are sentenced to death march” (3) be a figure of speech that your readers would misunderstand. If this is the case, you could express the idea in nonfigurative language. Alternate translation: “has chosen us apostles to be humiliated, and we are destined to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 5 8 ymus figs-doublet κακίας καὶ πονηρίας 1 Here, the words **evil** and **wickedness** mean almost the same thing. The word **evil** refers to something that is morally “bad,” while the word **wickedness** refers to something that is characterized by vice. If your language does not have two words that are this similar, you can express the idea with one word. Alternate translation: “of evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 5 8 viwj figs-possession ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας 1 Here Paul uses the possessive from to identify the **unleavened bread** as **sincerity and truth**. If your language does not use this form for that idea, you can express the idea by using a word or phrase that renames or identifies something. Alternate translation: “unleavened bread, that is, sincerity and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 5 8 olbn figs-abstractnouns εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **sincerity** and **truth**, you can express the ideas by using adjectives that describe actions or behaviors. Alternate translation: “of sincere and true behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 5 8 mybu translate-unknown εἰλικρινείας 1 The word **sincerity** identifies actions done with only one intention, done without deceit. The people doing those actions do not say or pretend one thing while doing something else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this wordby using a word or phrase that identifies something that is done honestly and with one goal in mind. Alternate translation: “of integrity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 5 8 mybu translate-unknown εἰλικρινείας 1 The word **sincerity** identifies actions done with only one intention, done without deceit. The people doing those actions do not say or pretend one thing while doing something else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this word by using a word or phrase that identifies something that is done honestly and with one goal in mind. Alternate translation: “of integrity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 5 9 mcrl figs-explicit ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Here Paul refers to a letter that he wrote and sent to the Corinthians before he began this letter. The phrase does not refer to this letter but to a previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **I wrote to you in {my} letter** by including a word that clarifies that **{my} letter** is one that Paul has already sent. Alternate translation: “I already wrote to you in my previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 5 9 le8i translate-unknown συναναμίγνυσθαι 1 Here, **to associate with** often refers to two groups of people meeting together. The idea here is that **sexually immoral people** should not be a part of the Corinthians’ group. If **to associate with** does not have this meaning in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to including people in one’s group. Alternate translation: “to consistently meet with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 5 10 vkid grammar-connect-words-phrases οὐ πάντως 1 Paul uses **by no means** to strongly introduce a clarification about what he wrote to them previously ([5:9](../05/09.md)). When he told them “not to associate with sexually immoral people,” he did not mean **people of this world**. Rather, as the next verse clarifies, he meant fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **by no means** with a word or phrase that introduces a qualification to a previous statement. Alternate translation: “not that you should not associate at all with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -660,15 +660,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 6 2 jqvf figs-pastforfuture κρίνεται 1 Here, **is judged** makes a general statement about what **you**, that is, the **saints**, do. The present tense does not mean that the **saints** are currently passing final judgment and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul uses the present tense to state a general fact about the **saints**. The judgment itself will occur in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the present tense of **is judged** with the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 6 2 stvc figs-idiom ἀνάξιοί…κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων 1 Here, to be **unworthy of** something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unworthy of** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 6 2 dmi6 translate-unknown κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων 1 Here, **cases** could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “of the smallest legal disputes” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “of the lowest courts of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 6 3 us55 figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν, 1 Do you not know that we will judge the angels? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know that we will judge angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 6 3 x6h3 figs-rquestion μήτι γε βιωτικά? 1 How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the reader agrees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “How much more the matters of this life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 6 3 us55 figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν, 1 Do you not know that we will judge the angels? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know that we will judge angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 6 3 x6h3 figs-rquestion μήτι γε βιωτικά? 1 How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the reader agrees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “How much more the matters of this life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 6 3 hxzn figs-ellipsis μήτι γε βιωτικά 1 Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “can we judge” or “are we able to judge” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “How much more can we judge the matters of this life” or “How much more are we able to judge the matters of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 6 3 h3z0 grammar-connect-logic-result μήτι γε 1 Here Paul’s argument assumes that judging **angels** is a greater and more difficult thing than judging **the matters of this life**. The phrase **How much more** implies that people who can do a great and difficult thing like judging **angels** can easily do a less impressive and easier thing like judging **the matters of this life**. If **How much more** does not express that connection in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does express that connection. Alternate translation: “If we can do that, can we not judge” or “Should it not be easy, then, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 6 3 h374 translate-unknown βιωτικά 1 matters of this life Here, **matters of this life** refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as simply matters of ordinary life and insignificant in comparison with something like judging **angels**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **matters of this life** with a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “what happens in our daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 6 4 xn32 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical βιωτικὰ…κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε 1 If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might **have legal disputes**, or they might not **have legal disputes**. He then specifies the result for if they do **have legal disputes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “when.” Alternate translation: “when you have legal disputes about things of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 6 4 v80t translate-unknown κριτήρια…ἔχητε 1 Here, **legal disputes** could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “you have lawsuits” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “you seek a judgment in a court of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 6 4 cu0s translate-unknown βιωτικὰ 1 Here, **things of this life** refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as matters of ordinary life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **about things of this life** with a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “about what happens in your daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 6 4 vw5t figs-rquestion τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “there is no good reason.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement or a command. Alternate translation: “do not appoint as judges those who are of no account in the church!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 6 4 vw5t figs-rquestion τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “there is no good reason.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement or a command. Alternate translation: “do not appoint as judges those who are of no account in the church!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 6 4 e791 translate-unknown τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church? Here, these **ones of no account in the church** could be: (1) people who are not members of the church in Corinth. Alternate translation: “who do not believe” (2) people who are members of the church in Corinth but whom other believers do not respect. Alternate translation: “whom the fellow believers do not respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 6 5 dvq3 writing-pronouns λέγω 1 The phrase **I speak** could refer: (1) to what Paul has already said, probably all of [6:1–4](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “I say those things” (2) to what Paul is saying throughout this whole section ([6:1–8](../06/01.md)). Alternate translation: “I am saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 6 5 xnd7 figs-idiom πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν 1 Here, **to your shame** means that the things that Paul has said should make the Corinthians feel **shame**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to your shame** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to embarrass you” or “to make you feel ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 6 15 f4vd figs-rquestion ἄρας…τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ποιήσω πόρνης μέλη? 1 Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be! Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I should never take away the members of Christ and make them members of a prostitute.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 6 15 h21r figs-123person ποιήσω 1 Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be! Here Paul speaks in the first person because he is using himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is treating himself as an example, or you could use a form that would naturally provide an example in your language. Alternate translation: “should I, for example, make them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 6 15 kmt2 figs-idiom μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it not be! Here, **May it never be!** gives Paul’s own response to his question. The phrase is one of the strongest negatives Paul could use. Use a strong word or phrase that answers a question with a no. Alternate translation: “Never!” or “Absolutely not!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 6 16 seg6 figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν? 1 Do you not know that … her? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “You know for sure that the one who is joined to the prostitute is one body.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 6 16 seg6 figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν? 1 Do you not know that … her? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “You know for sure that the one who is joined to the prostitute is one body.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 6 16 zcgg figs-euphemism ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ 1 Do you not know that … her? Here, **being joined to the prostitute** is a euphemism for having sex with a **prostitute**. Paul uses this euphemism in order to be polite. He also picks this specific euphemism because it can also refer to **being joined** to someone without sexual implications. He uses the phrase in this way in the next verse to speak about union with Christ ([6:17](../06/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **being joined to the prostitute** with a similar polite euphemism in your language. If possible, use a euphemism that can also work to describe the nonsexual union with Christ in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the one who lives with the prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 6 16 z54k figs-activepassive ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ 1 he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **joined** rather than the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person did it to himself. Alternate translation: “the one who joins himself to the prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 6 16 w1am figs-genericnoun τῇ πόρνῃ 1 he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her Jesus is speaking of prostitutes in general, not of one particular **prostitute**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers in general to “prostitutes.” Alternate translation: “to any prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 27 z6en figs-explicit ἀναξίως 1 eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord Here, **in an unworthy manner** identifies behavior that is **unworthy** or “improper” for those who are participating in the Lord’s Supper. Paul has identified examples of this kind of behavior in [11:18–22](../11/18.md). This phrase does not refer to people who are **unworthy**. Rather it refers to behavior that is **unworthy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in an unworthy manner** with a phrase that identifies inappropriate or improper behavior in a specific context. Alternate translation: “while acting inappropriately” or “without respecting the Lord and fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 27 d51p figs-idiom ἔνοχος…τοῦ σώματος καὶ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord Here, **guilty of** could introduce: (1) what the person is **guilty of** doing. Here, that could be “profaning” or “dishonoring” the **body and the blood of the Lord**, or it could be participating in killing **the Lord**, which his **body** and **blood** signifies. Alternate translation: “guilty of dishonoring the body and the blood of the Lord” or “guilty of spilling the Lord’s blood and piercing his body” (2) whom the person has wronged. Here, that would be **the Lord** himself, particularly as he offered his **body** and **blood**. Alternate translation: “guilty of sinning against the Lord in his body and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 28 mwzr figs-imperative3p δοκιμαζέτω δὲ ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν, καὶ οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω. 1 examine In this verse, Paul uses three third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “But a man must examine himself, and in this way he should eat from the bread, and he should drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) -1CO 11 28 nhx7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν…ἐσθιέτω…πινέτω 1 examine Here, **a man**, **himself**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these wordsby using word that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “a person … himself or herself … let him or her eat … let him or her drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 11 28 nhx7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν…ἐσθιέτω…πινέτω 1 examine Here, **a man**, **himself**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these words by using word that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “a person … himself or herself … let him or her eat … let him or her drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 11 28 ih78 figs-infostructure οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω 1 examine Here, **in this way** introduces both **let him eat** and **let him drink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine **let him drink** and the earlier command, or you could repeat **in this way**. Alternate translation: “in this way let him eat from the bread and drink from the cup” or “in this way let him eat from the bread, and in this way let him drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 11 28 hzac figs-idiom ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω 1 examine Here, to **eat from** something means to **eat** some of that thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **eat from** with a word or phrase that refers to eating part of something. Alternate translation: “let him eat eat his portion of the bread” or “let him eat some of the loaf of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 29 gqd2 figs-metaphor μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα 1 without discerning the body Here, **body** could refer to: (1) the “church,” which is **the body** of Christ (for a similar use of **body**, see [12:27](../12/27.md)). The point would be that people are behaving during the Lord’s Supper in a way that does not respect fellow believers, who are **the body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “without discerning that fellow believers are the body” (2) the presence of **the body** of Christ in the Lord’s Supper itself. The point would be that believers are participating in the Lord’s Supper in a way that does not respect how Christ’s **body** is present in the bread and wine. Alternate translation: “without discerning the presence of the Lord’s body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1714,7 +1714,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 21 jwzv figs-ellipsis ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν 1 where would the body be? Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**is not able to say**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “the head is not able to say to the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 12 22 hnt4 translate-unknown ἀσθενέστερα 1 where would the body be? Here, **weaker** refers to physical frailty or lack of strength. It is unclear which body parts he might have considered to be **weaker**. Use a similar general word that identifies frailty or weakness. Alternate translation: “frailer” or “less strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 12 22 w75w translate-unknown ἀναγκαῖά 1 where would the body be? Here, **essential** identifies the **weaker** bodies parts as required for the body to function properly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **essential** with a word or phrase that identifies the body parts as “necessary” or “required.” Alternate translation: “required” or “indispensable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 12 22 q1wr figs-explicit πολλῷ μᾶλλον…ἀσθενέστερα ὑπάρχειν, ἀναγκαῖά ἐστιν 1 where would the body be? Here Paul seems to be stating a general principle that the **weaker** a body part is, the **more** it ends up being **essential** for the body. He implies a comparison with other body parts, which are “stronger” but “less essential.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this general principle or what Paul is comparingmore explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be weaker than other members are actually that much more essential than those other members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 12 22 q1wr figs-explicit πολλῷ μᾶλλον…ἀσθενέστερα ὑπάρχειν, ἀναγκαῖά ἐστιν 1 where would the body be? Here Paul seems to be stating a general principle that the **weaker** a body part is, the **more** it ends up being **essential** for the body. He implies a comparison with other body parts, which are “stronger” but “less essential.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this general principle or what Paul is comparing more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be weaker than other members are actually that much more essential than those other members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 12 23 apc4 figs-explicit καὶ ἃ δοκοῦμεν ἀτιμότερα εἶναι τοῦ σώματος, τούτοις τιμὴν περισσοτέραν περιτίθεμεν; καὶ τὰ ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν, εὐσχημοσύνην περισσοτέραν ἔχει; 1 our unpresentable members Throughout this verse, Paul is most likely thinking about how we carefully wear clothing that covers our **less honorable** and **unpresentable** body parts. He does not specify which body parts these would be, but it is likely that he has genital organs in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Paul has clothing in mind as the way we **bestow** some body parts with **greater honor** or give them **more dignity**. Alternate translation: “and those of the body which we think to be less honorable, we bestow them greater honor by clothing them; and our unpresentable members have more dignity because of the care we take to cover them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 12 23 vilq writing-pronouns ἃ…τοῦ σώματος 1 our unpresentable members Here, **those** refers back to the “members” in [12:22](../12/22.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **those** with “members” instead. Alternate translation: “the members of the body which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 12 23 ring figs-infostructure ἃ δοκοῦμεν ἀτιμότερα εἶναι τοῦ σώματος, τούτοις τιμὴν περισσοτέραν περιτίθεμεν 1 our unpresentable members Here Paul identifies what he is talking about first (**those of the body which we think to be less honorable**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **them** in his sentence. If your readers would be confused by this structure, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “we bestow greater honor on those of the body which we think to be less honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -1725,7 +1725,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 24 qe2n figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν ἔχει 1 our unpresentable members Here Paul does not specify what they do not **need**. He implies that they do not need to be treated with “dignity,” as the “unpresentable parts” are (see [12:23](../12/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **do not have need** by referring back to how you translated what people do with their “unpresentable parts.” Alternate translation: “do not need to be treated with dignity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 12 24 ik7r figs-metaphor συνεκέρασεν τὸ σῶμα 1 our unpresentable members Here Paul speaks as if God took many different things and **combined** them **together** to make **the body**. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that the body is made up of many different parts, but that God has united or **combined** all these parts together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **combined the body together** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has assembled the body” or “has joined all the body parts into one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 12 24 mqcu figs-genericnoun τὸ σῶμα 1 our unpresentable members Here Paul is speaking of “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “the human body” or “each body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 12 24 gg2h figs-explicit τῷ ὑστερουμένῳ, περισσοτέραν δοὺς τιμήν 1 our unpresentable members Here Paul implies that the body parts that “lack” honor receive **more honor** from God. The Corinthians would have understood this clause to mean that God is the one who created the body, so that what Paul has already stated in [12:23–24](../12/23.md) is true. God has made the body in such a way that we give more honor and dignity to the private and less honorable body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implicationmore plainly by including what humans think about the body parts. Alternate translation: “giving more honor to what we think has less honor” or “giving more honor to the body parts that we consider to be less honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 12 24 gg2h figs-explicit τῷ ὑστερουμένῳ, περισσοτέραν δοὺς τιμήν 1 our unpresentable members Here Paul implies that the body parts that “lack” honor receive **more honor** from God. The Corinthians would have understood this clause to mean that God is the one who created the body, so that what Paul has already stated in [12:23–24](../12/23.md) is true. God has made the body in such a way that we give more honor and dignity to the private and less honorable body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implication more plainly by including what humans think about the body parts. Alternate translation: “giving more honor to what we think has less honor” or “giving more honor to the body parts that we consider to be less honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 12 24 sbnd figs-abstractnouns τῷ ὑστερουμένῳ, περισσοτέραν δοὺς τιμήν 1 our unpresentable members If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honor**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “honor” or an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “honoring more what is honored less” or “making honorable what is less honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 25 uvnk figs-litotes μὴ…σχίσμα…ἀλλὰ 1 there may be no division within the body, but Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. If you do, you will need to express the contrast between the two halves of this verse as a connection. Alternate translation: “complete unity … and that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 12 25 zvsl figs-abstractnouns μὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν τῷ σώματι 1 there may be no division within the body, but If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **division**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “divide” or “split.” Alternate translation: “the body may not divide itself” or “the body may not become divided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1802,19 +1802,19 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 9 ntg7 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **For** introduces Paul’s reason for saying that prophecies, tongues, and knowledge will pass away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a comparable word that introduces a reason why someone has made a claim. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 13 9 es9w figs-idiom ἐκ μέρους -1 Connecting Statement: Here, **in part** refers to how something is only a **part** of a larger whole. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in part** with a comparable expression that indicates that something is only part of a larger whole. Alternate translation: “partially … partially” or “imperfectly … imperfectly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 13 10 ezjx figs-metaphor ἔλθῃ τὸ τέλειον 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if **the perfect** could “come,” by which he means that people experience **the perfect**. He uses this metaphor because he uses the verb **comes** also for Jesus’ return (see [4:5](../04/05.md); [11:26](../11/26.md)), and he wishes to identify the coming of **the perfect** with the coming of Jesus. The time when **the perfect comes** will be when Jesus comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly and connect **the perfect** to Jesus’ return in another way. Alternate translation: “we experience the perfect at Jesus’ return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 13 10 rt4m figs-explicit τὸ τέλειον, τὸ ἐκ μέρους 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **that which {is} partial** refers back to the “knowing” and “prophesying” in [13:9](../13/09.md). The phrase **the perfect** contrasts with **partial**, so **the perfect** refers to full knowledge and experience of God and of what God says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **perfect** and **partial** refer tomore explicitly. Alternate translation: “the perfect experience of God … the partial experience of God, including knowledge and prophecy,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 13 10 rt4m figs-explicit τὸ τέλειον, τὸ ἐκ μέρους 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **that which {is} partial** refers back to the “knowing” and “prophesying” in [13:9](../13/09.md). The phrase **the perfect** contrasts with **partial**, so **the perfect** refers to full knowledge and experience of God and of what God says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **perfect** and **partial** refer to more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the perfect experience of God … the partial experience of God, including knowledge and prophecy,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 11 tn5r figs-123person ὅτε ἤμην νήπιος, ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος; ὅτε γέγονα ἀνήρ, κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul uses the first person **I** to describe himself as an example, but he implies that most people experience what he describes here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **I** with a form that provides a general example. Alternate translation: “When people were children, they spoke like children, they thought like children, they reasoned like children. When they became adults, they put away childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 13 11 dx63 figs-parallelism ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul repeats **like a child** and the same structure in three consecutive clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “I did everything like a child” “I spoke, thought, and reasoned like a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 13 11 msy8 γέγονα ἀνήρ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “I became an adult” 1CO 13 11 sp79 figs-metaphor κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if he took **the {things} of the child** and **put** them **away** in a box or a closet. He means that he stopped doing **the {things} of the child**, such as “speaking,” “thinking,” or “reasoning” **like a child**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I got rid of childish things” or “I stopped doing childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 13 12 w2eu figs-explicit βλέπομεν 1 now we see Here Paul does not state what it is that **we see**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **we see** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implicationexplicitly. Alternate translation: “we see God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 13 12 w2eu figs-explicit βλέπομεν 1 now we see Here Paul does not state what it is that **we see**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **we see** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implication explicitly. Alternate translation: “we see God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 12 mtw1 figs-metaphor δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι 1 now we see Here Paul speaks as if **we** were looking at **a mirror** and could see a reflection **unclearly**. With this metaphor, Paul could be expressing the idea: (1) that **now** we can **see** God only indirectly, like a reflection **in a mirror** is an indirect image. Alternate translation: “an indirect reflection of God, as if we were looking in a mirror” (2) that **now** we can only **see** some things about God, like a **mirror** only imperfectly reflects an image. Alternate translation: “imperfectly, as if we were looking at a vague reflection in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 13 12 bn3h translate-unknown δι’ ἐσόπτρου 1 For now we see indirectly in a mirror In Paul’s culture, **a mirror** was often made of polished metal. Often, these mirrors were relatively high quality and could reflect images well. Use a word in your language that describes something that reflects an image. Alternate translation: “in a looking glass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 13 12 xx1g figs-ellipsis τότε δὲ πρόσωπον 1 but then face to face Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**we see**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause, but in the future tense. Alternate translation: “but then, we will see face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 13 12 tjq9 figs-idiom τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον 1 Here, **face to face** identifies an action or situation as something that takes place in person. In other words, a person can actually see the other person’s **face**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **face to face** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “but then, eye to eye” or “but then, in God’s direct presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 13 12 x54w figs-explicit τότε -1 Here, **then** refers to the time when Jesus comes back and what happens after that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **then** refers to explicitly. Alternate translation: “then, when Jesus returns, … then, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 12 mgd5 writing-pronouns ἄρτι γινώσκω ἐκ μέρους; τότε δὲ ἐπιγνώσομαι, καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην 1 Here Paul switches from first-person plural to first-person singular. Since he is using himself as an example for every believer, there is no special meaning behind the switch. Rather, Paul changes from plural to singular because it was good style in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this verse in first-person plural as well, or you could include words that clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “Now I, for example, know in part, but then I will know fully, just as I also have been fully known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 13 12 qp7g figs-explicit γινώσκω…ἐπιγνώσομαι 1 I will know fully Again, Paul does not state what it is that **I know**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **I know** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implicationexplicitly. Alternate translation: “I know God … I will know God fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 13 12 qp7g figs-explicit γινώσκω…ἐπιγνώσομαι 1 I will know fully Again, Paul does not state what it is that **I know**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **I know** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implication explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know God … I will know God fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 12 acp3 figs-idiom ἐκ μέρους 1 I will know fully Here, just as in [13:9](../13/09.md), **in part** refers to how something is only a **part** of a larger whole. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in part** with a comparable expression that indicates that something is only **part** of a larger whole. Alternate translation: “partially” or “imperfectly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 13 12 i28w figs-activepassive καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην 1 just as I have also been fully known If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the person who is **known** rather than focusing on the one doing the “knowing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has also fully known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 13 13 peiw grammar-connect-words-phrases νυνὶ 1 faith, hope, and love Here, **now** could function to: (1) introduce a summary statement about how things are. Alternate translation: “as it is,” (2) give the time during which **these three remain**. Alternate translation: “in the present,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -1845,7 +1845,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 4 b2mg figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ…ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ 1 builds up Just as in [14:3](../14/03.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **The one speaking in a tongue** helps himself or herself become stronger and more mature, while **the one prophesying** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “helps himself grow … helps the church grow” or “edifies himself … edifies the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 5 f1sh figs-ellipsis μᾶλλον δὲ ἵνα 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I desire**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “but I desire even more that” or “but even more, I desire that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 14 5 z5my figs-genericnoun ὁ προφητεύων…ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσαις 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” and people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies … anyone who speaks in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 14 5 o0b6 figs-explicit μείζων 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, **greater** indicates that **the one prophecying** does something that is more important and helpful than **the one speaking in tongues**. It does not mean that God cares about the person **prophesying** more than the person **speaking in tongues**. If you readers would misunderstand **greater**, you could state explicitly how or in what way the person is **greater**. Alternate translation: “does something more useful” or “does what is more valuable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 5 o0b6 figs-explicit μείζων 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, **greater** indicates that **the one prophesying** does something that is more important and helpful than **the one speaking in tongues**. It does not mean that God cares about the person **prophesying** more than the person **speaking in tongues**. If you readers would misunderstand **greater**, you could state explicitly how or in what way the person is **greater**. Alternate translation: “does something more useful” or “does what is more valuable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 5 u9oq figs-infostructure ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater The ULT puts these clauses in parentheses because they give a qualification of what Paul has said about how **the one prophesying is greater than the one speaking in tongues**. In this clause, Paul clarifies that he is only speaking about **tongues** without interpretation. Further, if someone does **interpret** the **tongues**, then that can lead to **building up**, just like prophecy. Use a form in your language that would indicate a qualification or a parenthesis. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That is true except for when he interprets, so that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 14 5 g9k1 grammar-connect-exceptions ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 he would interpret If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. If you use this alternate translation, you may need to remove the parentheses. Alternate translation: “and does not interpret, because it is only when he interprets that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 14 5 ut9b writing-pronouns διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Here, **he** could refer back specifically to **the one speaking in tongues**, but it does not have to do so. The word **he** could refer to anyone who can **interpret**, not just the person who is speaking **in tongues**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **he** refers to anyone more clearly. Alternate translation: “he or somebody else would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1916,7 +1916,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 16 untg figs-metaphor ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Here Paul speaks as if there were a **place** for **the ungifted** which they would “fill.” He speaks in this way to characterize the person by the **place** they “fill.” In other words, a person **filling the place of the ungifted** is characterized as **ungifted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is ungifted” or “the ungifted person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 16 g36b figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀναπληρῶν 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul is speaking of people who “fill” **the place of the ungifted** in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who fills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 16 j3e3 translate-unknown τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 the ungifted Here, **the ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the “tongue” in which the person is speaking. Alternate translation: “of the one who does not understand tongues” or “of the uninitiated” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “of the outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 14 16 ev63 figs-explicit ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ 1 say “Amen” Here, to **say the “Amen”** refers to responding in agreement to something that someone has said. This is because, in Christian gatherings, the word **Amen** was a common way to affirm or agree with someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **Amen** or why people would say itby using a word that indicates agreement or by referring simply to agreement. Alternate translation: “will … agree with” or “will … say that he agrees with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 16 ev63 figs-explicit ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ 1 say “Amen” Here, to **say the “Amen”** refers to responding in agreement to something that someone has said. This is because, in Christian gatherings, the word **Amen** was a common way to affirm or agree with someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **Amen** or why people would say it by using a word that indicates agreement or by referring simply to agreement. Alternate translation: “will … agree with” or “will … say that he agrees with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 16 i6o5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 say “Amen” Here, **your thanksgiving** refers back to what the person said when they were “blessing” **with {the} spirit**. Paul uses a different word here, but they mean basically the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **thanksgiving** by translating this phrase so that it clearly refers back to **bless with {the} spirit**. Alternate translation: “at what you said” or “at your blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 16 jxn4 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 say “Amen” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **thanksgiving**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “thank.” Alternate translation: “at how you thanked God” or “at what you thanked God for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 16 m0x2 figs-gendernotations οὐκ οἶδεν 1 say “Amen” Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she does not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2187,7 +2187,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 23 bzh4 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the firstfruits Here, **his coming** refers specifically to Jesus “coming back” to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **at his coming** with a phrase that more clearly refers to Jesus’ “second coming.” Alternate translation: “when he comes again” or “at his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 23 xr5q figs-possession οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the firstfruits Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ones** who belong to or believe in **Christ**. If your language does not use that form for this meaning, you can express the idea with a phrase such as “belong to” or “believe in.” Alternate translation: “those who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 15 24 any2 grammar-connect-time-sequential εἶτα 1 General Information: Here, **Then** introduces events that occur after the “coming” in the last verse ([15:23](../15/23.md)). Paul does not clarify how soon after the “coming” these events will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Then** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies events happening in sequence. Alternate translation: “Next will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -1CO 15 24 fp4n figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 General Information: Here, **the end** identifies that something has reached its goal and thus ended. Paul does not state explicitly what **end** he has in mind, but the Corinthians would have inferred that he meant **the end** of the world as it currently exists. This does not mean that there will be no more world, but it means that things will be very different after **the end**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **end** Paul is speaking aboutexplicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of this world” or “the end of the way things are now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 24 fp4n figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 General Information: Here, **the end** identifies that something has reached its goal and thus ended. Paul does not state explicitly what **end** he has in mind, but the Corinthians would have inferred that he meant **the end** of the world as it currently exists. This does not mean that there will be no more world, but it means that things will be very different after **the end**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **end** Paul is speaking about explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of this world” or “the end of the way things are now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 24 towh figs-infostructure ὅταν παραδιδῷ τὴν Βασιλείαν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί; ὅταν καταργήσῃ πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν 1 General Information: Here, **when he has abolished** will occur before **when he hands over**. In Paul’s language, the sequence is clear even though the events are not in order. If your language would put the events in order, you could rearrange these two clauses to make the sequence clearer. Alternate translation: “when he has abolished all rule and all authority and power, when he hands over the kingdom to the God and Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 15 24 u298 writing-pronouns παραδιδῷ…καταργήσῃ 1 General Information: Here, **he** refers to “Christ.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express to whom **he** refers with “Christ” in one or both of these places. Alternate translation: “Christ hands over … Christ has abolished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 24 xkl6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί 1 General Information: Here, **God** and **Father** are two names for the same person. The name **Father** makes it clear that Paul is speaking about “God the Father” to distinguish him from “God the Son,” who is the one who **hands over the kingdom**. Use a word or phrase here that clearly names “God the Father.” Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2196,7 +2196,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 24 kit3 figs-explicit πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν 1 he will abolish all rule and all authority and power Here, **rule**, **authority**, and **power** could identify: (1) any position or person that has **rule**, **authority**, and **power**. Alternate translation: “all positions of rule and all positions of authority and power” (2) powerful spiritual beings that have **rule**, **authority**, and **power** or that are called “rules,” “authorities,” and “powers.” Alternate translation: “all the powerful spiritual beings that exercise rule and authority and power” or “all spiritual beings and all angels and archangels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 24 ksjs πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν 1 he will abolish all rule and all authority and power Here Paul includes **all** with the first two items in the list but not with the third item. He does this to connect the last two items together, which means that **all** modifies both **authority** and **power**. If you can group the last two items closely together, you could do so here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul uses **all** with only two of the three items with one **all** to modify the whole list, or you could repeat **all** with each item. Alternate translation: “all rule and authority and power” or “all rule and all authority and all power” 1CO 15 25 phrn grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 until he has put all his enemies under his feet Here, **For** introduces Paul’s explanation of how Christ “abolishes all rule and all authority and power” ([15:24](../15/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Specifically,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 15 25 oeko figs-explicit δεῖ…αὐτὸν βασιλεύειν 1 until he has put all his enemies under his feet Here Paul does not explain why Christ **must** reign. He implies that it is because this is what God the Father has decided. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **must** impliesexplicitly. Alternate translation: “God chose that Christ will reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 25 oeko figs-explicit δεῖ…αὐτὸν βασιλεύειν 1 until he has put all his enemies under his feet Here Paul does not explain why Christ **must** reign. He implies that it is because this is what God the Father has decided. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **must** implies explicitly. Alternate translation: “God chose that Christ will reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 25 t8mk figs-idiom ἄχρι οὗ θῇ πάντας τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 until he has put all his enemies under his feet Here Paul speaks as if Christ will one day stand on or rest **his feet** on **the enemies**. In Paul’s culture, kings or generals might stand on or put their feet on leaders that they conquered. This showed that these leaders were indeed conquered and had to submit to the king or general who conquered them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put all the enemies under his feet** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “until he has subdued all his enemies” or “until he has conquered all his enemies and put them under his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 25 vnxs writing-pronouns θῇ 1 until he has put all his enemies under his feet Every **he** and **his** in this verse refers to Christ except for perhaps this one. Here, **he** could refer to: (1) Christ, who puts his own **enemies under his feet**. Alternate translation: “he himself has put” (2) God (the Father), who puts **enemies under** Christ’s **feet**. Alternate translation: “God has put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 25 dag1 figs-possession τοὺς ἐχθροὺς 1 until he has put all his enemies under his feet Here, **the enemies** refers most specifically to the enemies of Christ, but it may also include the enemies of believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **the enemies** refers to the **enemies** of Christ and his people with an appropriate possessive form here. Alternate translation: “his enemies” or “his and believers’ enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -2420,7 +2420,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 58 rd05 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here, **knowing** introduces the reason why the Corinthians should do what Paul is commanding them to do. If your readers would not recognize that **knowing** introduces a reason or basis, you could express that idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “for you know” or “since you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 15 58 i1o4 figs-abstractnouns ὁ κόπος ὑμῶν 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **labor**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “labor.” Alternate translation: “how you labor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 58 r782 figs-idiom κενὸς 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, the Corinthians’ **labor** is not **in vain** because it is **in {the} Lord** and will thus lead to its intended effect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in vain** with a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 15 58 xyoj figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe the union of believers with the Lord. In this case, being **in {the} Lord** or united to the Lord identifies why the Corinthians can “know” that their **labor is not in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speechby using a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” or “because you are united to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 58 xyoj figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe the union of believers with the Lord. In this case, being **in {the} Lord** or united to the Lord identifies why the Corinthians can “know” that their **labor is not in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech by using a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” or “because you are united to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 16 intro abcj 0 # 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)
* The collection (16:1–4)
* Travel plans (16:5–12)
11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)
* Final commands (16:13–18)
* Greetings and closing (16:19–24)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Letter writing and sending

In this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Paul mentions that he writes the final greeting or the last few verses “in my own hand” ([16:21](../16/21.md)). This is because the rest of the letter was written by a scribe, who wrote down what Paul dictated. Paul writes the last greeting as a personal touch and to prove that he was indeed the author.

### The collection

In [16:1–4](../16/01.md), Paul refers to a “collection” that he will take or send to Jerusalem. He speaks at greater length about this “collection” in ([Romans 15:22–32](../rom/15/22.md)) and ([2 Corinthians 8–9](../2co/08/01.md)). His plan was to collect money from churches that were mostly Gentile and give that money to the church in Jerusalem that was mostly Jewish. In this way, the poorer believers in Jerusalem would receive support and Jewish and Gentile believers would be more connected. In these verses, Paul assumes that the Corinthians already know about this plan. He gives them instructions on how to help him carry it out. Make sure that you translate these verses in such a way that it is clear what Paul is talking about: collecting money to give to believers in Jerusalem.

### Travel plans

In this chapter, Paul includes travel plans for himself ([16:5–9](../16/05.md)) and for Timothy and Apollos ([16:10–12](../16/10.md)). Paul and Apollos are in Ephesus, and Timothy has left Ephesus and is traveling to Corinth (in “Achaia”) when Paul writes this letter. When people traveled from Corinth to Ephesus or vice versa, they could go by boat through the Mediterranean Sea, or they could travel on land through what is now Northern Greece (“Macedonia”) and Western Turkey (“Asia”). Paul states that he plans to travel by land; it is not clear how Timothy or others traveled. Use words that are appropriate for these kinds of movements in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])

### Greetings

In this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letter. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In [16:19–21](../16/19.md) Paul includes greetings to and from people whom he and the Corinthians know. Express these greetings in a natural form in your language. 1CO 16 1 zh6u grammar-connect-words-phrases περὶ δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Just as in [7:1](../07/01.md), [25](../07/25.md), **Now concerning** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to address. Likely, the topics that he introduces in this way are what the Corinthians wrote to him about. Translate **Now concerning** here as you did in [7:1](../07/01.md), [25](../07/25.md). Alternate translation: “Next, about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 1 okzo translate-unknown τῆς λογείας 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **the collection** refers to money that is “collected” from people for a specific purpose. Here Paul clarifies that it is “collected” **for the saints**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **collection** with a word or phrase that refers to money that is “collected” for a purpose. Alternate translation: “the offering” or “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2446,7 +2446,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 5 ei27 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 I will send with letters Here, **But** introduces a new topic: Paul’s own travel plans. It does not introduce a contrast with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 5 hr4z figs-go ἐλεύσομαι…πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 I will send with letters Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 16 5 munt figs-go διέλθω…διέρχομαι 1 I will send with letters Here, **passed through** and **going through** refer to entering and then exiting an area while one is traveling. Use a form in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “I have entered and then left … I am entering and then leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -1CO 16 5 q1nz translate-names Μακεδονίαν -1 I will send with letters **Macedonia** is the name of a province that was in the northern part of the country we call Greece. If Paul wanted to travel on land instead of in a boat, he would need to go through **Macedonia** to get from Ephesus (where he was when he wrote this letter) to Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **Macedonia** refers to a region between Ephesus and Corinthmore explicitly. Alternate translation: “the province named Macedonia … this area on my way to visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1CO 16 5 q1nz translate-names Μακεδονίαν -1 I will send with letters **Macedonia** is the name of a province that was in the northern part of the country we call Greece. If Paul wanted to travel on land instead of in a boat, he would need to go through **Macedonia** to get from Ephesus (where he was when he wrote this letter) to Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **Macedonia** refers to a region between Ephesus and Corinth more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the province named Macedonia … this area on my way to visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 16 5 zqlh figs-pastforfuture διέρχομαι 1 I will send with letters Here Paul speaks as if he were **going through Macedonia** while he writes this letter. He speaks in this way because it is his current plan to go **through Macedonia** when he leaves Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul speaks in the present tense here with whatever tense is customarily used to speak about travel plans in your language. Alternate translation: “I will go through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 16 6 lsbt translate-unknown τυχὸν 1 you may help me on my way, wherever I go Here, **perhaps** indicates that Paul is uncertain about how long he will stay with the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perhaps** with a word that indicates uncertainty or lack of confidence. Alternate translation: “maybe” or “possibly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 16 6 w94k figs-explicit ὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε 1 you may help me on my way, wherever I go Here, to **help** people on their **way** refers to assisting them with the things that they need to travel, including food and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **help me on my way** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “you could give me what I need to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2475,7 +2475,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 11 y9zy figs-explicit προπέμψατε…αὐτὸν 1 Let no one despise him Here, just as in [16:6](../16/06.md), to **help** people on their **way** refers to assisting them with the things that they need to travel, including food and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **help him on his way** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “give him what he needs to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 11 qtcx figs-abstractnouns ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 Let no one despise him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “peaceably.” Alternate translation: “peaceably” or “in a peaceful way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 16 11 ymh9 figs-go ἔλθῃ πρός με 1 Let no one despise him Here, **come** refers to how Timothy will travel from Corinth back to where Paul is. Use a word that naturally describes this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he may return to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -1CO 16 11 gmnd figs-explicit ἐκδέχομαι…αὐτὸν μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Let no one despise him Here Paul is **expecting** Timothy to travel back to where Paul is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that this is what **expecting** meansmore explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am expecting him to return with the brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 16 11 gmnd figs-explicit ἐκδέχομαι…αὐτὸν μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Let no one despise him Here Paul is **expecting** Timothy to travel back to where Paul is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that this is what **expecting** means more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am expecting him to return with the brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 11 fi3p ἐκδέχομαι…αὐτὸν μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Let no one despise him Here, **the brothers** could be: (1) traveling with Timothy, and Paul is expecting their return along with Timothy. Alternate translation: “I am expecting him and the brothers” (2) with Paul, expecting Timothy to return. Alternate translation: “I, with the brothers, am expecting him” 1CO 16 11 rknd figs-extrainfo μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Let no one despise him Paul provides no information about who **the brothers** are or how they relate to Timothy. He may refer to the same group of **brothers** again in the next verse ([16:12](../16/12.md)). If possible, use a generic or general phrase that refers to other believers. Alternate translation: “with the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 16 11 s7fw figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Let no one despise him Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. It is possible that the **brothers** were male, but Paul is not focusing on their gender. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2541,7 +2541,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 22 x8r3 translate-transliterate μαράνα θά 1 may he be accursed This is an Aramaic word. Paul spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. He assumes that they know that it means “Lord, come!” In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. If your readers would not know what **Maranatha** means, you could also explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Maranatha, which means, ‘Come Lord!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) 1CO 16 23 r9je translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Corinthians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from the Lord Jesus within you” or “I pray that you will have grace from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1CO 16 23 ccke figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you can express by using an adjective such as “gracious” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “May the Lord Jesus act graciously toward you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 16 24 jo0u figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀγάπη μου μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express by using a verb such as “love” or an adverb such as “lovinly.” Alternate translation: “May I act lovingly toward you all” or “I love you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 16 24 jo0u figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀγάπη μου μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 may he be accursed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express by using a verb such as “love” or an adverb such as “lovingly.” Alternate translation: “May I act lovingly toward you all” or “I love you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 16 24 uvkx figs-ellipsis μετὰ 1 may he be accursed Here Paul could imply the verb **{be}** (which indicates a wish or blessing) or the verb “is” (which indicates what is true). In either case, Paul’s point is that he intends to show **love** to them. Use a word or phrase that indicates a closing blessing or statement of love in your language. Alternate translation: “to” or “will be with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 16 24 vtgx figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 may he be accursed Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ, identifies Paul’s **love** as something that he does because both he and the Corinthians are united to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our union with the Lord” or “as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 16 24 ob47 translate-textvariants ἀμήν 1 may he be accursed Many early manuscripts include **Amen** here. However some early manuscripts do not include it, and it is possible that scribes added it because some letters end with **Amen**. Consider whether translations your readers might be familiar with include **Amen** here or not. If there is no strong reason to choose one option over the other, you could follow the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) From e6d1991f8e3fca4e4bd6fcefcf9f9f0d4149a3bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 17:30:48 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 265/269] Fix words with missing spaces between. --- en_tn_07-JDG.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_09-1SA.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_18-JOB.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_23-ISA.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_24-JER.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_33-MIC.tsv | 2 +- 6 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_07-JDG.tsv b/en_tn_07-JDG.tsv index f3cd12acc5..be2b881f94 100644 --- a/en_tn_07-JDG.tsv +++ b/en_tn_07-JDG.tsv @@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ JDG 14 1 u7xb figs-euphemism 0 one of the daughters of the Philistines The word JDG 14 2 b9h1 figs-idiom 0 Now get her for me to be my wife This is an idiom. Samson was demanding his parents to speak to the Philistine woman’s parents about marriage. Alternate translation: “Now arrange for her to become my wife” or “Make the arrangements for me to marry her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JDG 14 3 lcb9 figs-rquestion 0 Is there not a woman among the daughters of your relatives, or among all our people? They ask this question to suggest that they could find Samson a wife among their own people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely there are women among your people whom you could marry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JDG 14 3 x278 figs-euphemism 0 the daughters of your relatives The word “daughter” is a polite way to refer to a young, unmarried woman. Alternate translation: “one of the unmarried women among your relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -JDG 14 3 wj22 figs-rquestion 0 Are you going to take a wife from the uncircumcised Philistines? This question is asked to rebuke Samson. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas a statement. you could make explicit the reason his parents do not want him to marry a Philistine. Alternate translation: “You really should not marry a Philistine woman because the Philistine people do not worship Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JDG 14 3 wj22 figs-rquestion 0 Are you going to take a wife from the uncircumcised Philistines? This question is asked to rebuke Samson. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as a statement. you could make explicit the reason his parents do not want him to marry a Philistine. Alternate translation: “You really should not marry a Philistine woman because the Philistine people do not worship Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JDG 14 3 srv6 figs-idiom 0 Get her for me This is an idiom. Samson was demanding his parents to speak to the Philistine woman’s parents about marriage. Alternate translation: “Now arrange for her to be my wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JDG 14 3 r62c figs-explicit 0 she pleases me This means that Samson thinks she is beautiful. “I am pleased by how beautiful she is” or “she is beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JDG 14 4 ubq9 0 this matter This refers to Samson’s request to marry the Philistine woman. diff --git a/en_tn_09-1SA.tsv b/en_tn_09-1SA.tsv index 6db0d97f33..3a57c7f4b3 100644 --- a/en_tn_09-1SA.tsv +++ b/en_tn_09-1SA.tsv @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1SA 9 17 g1vw 0 Yahweh told him Alternate translation: “Yahweh told Samuel” 1SA 9 18 pwf2 0 the seer Alternate translation: “the prophet of Yahweh” 1SA 9 20 fdy4 figs-rquestion 0 Then on whom are all the desires of Israel set? Is it not on you and all your father’s house? These questions are an expression of deep conviction that Saul is the one whom Yahweh wants to be the king that the Israelites are looking for. The questions can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “You should know that it is on you that all the desires of Israel are set. They are set on you and your father’s family.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1SA 9 21 z2ng figs-rquestion 0 Am not I a Benjamite … of Israel? Is not my clan … Benjamin? Why then have you spoken to me in this manner? Saul is expressing surprise because Benjamin was the smallest tribe in Israel, and other Israelites considered the tribe unimportant. Also, Benjamites considered the clan of which Saul was a member as unimportant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionsas statements. Alternate translation: “I am from the tribe of Benjamin, the least important of all tribes. And my clan is the least important clan in our tribe. I do not understand why you are saying that the Israelite people want me and my family to do something important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1SA 9 21 z2ng figs-rquestion 0 Am not I a Benjamite … of Israel? Is not my clan … Benjamin? Why then have you spoken to me in this manner? Saul is expressing surprise because Benjamin was the smallest tribe in Israel, and other Israelites considered the tribe unimportant. Also, Benjamites considered the clan of which Saul was a member as unimportant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions as statements. Alternate translation: “I am from the tribe of Benjamin, the least important of all tribes. And my clan is the least important clan in our tribe. I do not understand why you are saying that the Israelite people want me and my family to do something important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1SA 9 22 wn3v 0 the hall The writer assumes that the reader knows that near the place where they would offer sacrifices there was a large building in which people would eat together. 1SA 9 22 rw25 0 head place This is the seat of honor. 1SA 9 22 tpy7 translate-numbers 0 thirty people “30 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) diff --git a/en_tn_18-JOB.tsv b/en_tn_18-JOB.tsv index 73cedfc30b..e0ab6d5ccb 100644 --- a/en_tn_18-JOB.tsv +++ b/en_tn_18-JOB.tsv @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ JOB 8 1 emj8 figs-rquestion 0 General Information: Verses 2 and 3 each consist JOB 8 1 xwz1 0 Connecting Statement: In this chapter, Bildad begins to speak about Job’s complaints. JOB 8 1 y8y8 translate-names 0 Then Bildad the Shuhite answered “Bildad” is the name of a man who is a member of the tribe of Shuah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JOB 8 2 gg55 figs-metaphor 0 How long will the words of your mouth be a mighty wind? Bildad speaks of Job’s words as if they are as empty and insubstantial as the wind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “The words of your mouth are as insignificant as a mighty wind.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JOB 8 3 x959 figs-rquestion 0 Does God pervert justice? Does the Almighty pervert righteousness? Here “God” and “the Almighty” both refer to Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionsas statements. Alternate translation: “God does not pervert justice; the Almighty does not pervert righteousness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +JOB 8 3 x959 figs-rquestion 0 Does God pervert justice? Does the Almighty pervert righteousness? Here “God” and “the Almighty” both refer to Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions as statements. Alternate translation: “God does not pervert justice; the Almighty does not pervert righteousness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JOB 8 3 p2fp 0 pervert justice?…pervert righteousness? Alternate translation: “approve of and do what is not just?…approve of and do what is not righteous?” JOB 8 4 icy5 figs-metonymy 0 for he gave them into the hand of their sins Here “hand” represents the power or results of sin. Bildad implies that God killed Job’s children because of their sin. Alternate translation: “for God caused the consequences of your children’s sins to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JOB 8 5 lpy9 figs-hypo 0 But suppose you diligently sought God and presented your request to the Almighty Bildad is saying what would have happened if Job had correctly spoken to God, but Bildad does not believe that Job really did this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -2092,7 +2092,7 @@ JOB 38 5 nt85 figs-rquestion 0 Who stretched the measuring line over it? If it JOB 38 5 wjp1 0 measuring line a rope or cord that people use to make something the right size and shape JOB 38 6 i7br figs-rquestion 0 General Information: The word “its” refers to the earth. Yahweh uses more questions to emphasize that Job could never understand how great God is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JOB 38 6 a776 0 Connecting Statement: Yahweh continues to challenge Job. -JOB 38 6 i5wb figs-rquestion 0 On what were its foundations laid? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas a statement. Alternate translation: “On what did I set its foundations?” or “Tell me on what its foundations were laid.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JOB 38 6 i5wb figs-rquestion 0 On what were its foundations laid? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “On what did I set its foundations?” or “Tell me on what its foundations were laid.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JOB 38 6 p5tv figs-rquestion 0 Who laid its cornerstone If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Tell me who laid its cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JOB 38 7 r55l figs-rquestion 0 Job finishes the rhetorical question that begins with the words “Who laid its cornerstone” in verse 6. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JOB 38 7 g3kf figs-rquestion 0 when the morning stars … the sons of God shouted for joy? Job finishes the rhetorical question that begins with the words “Who laid its cornerstone” in verse 6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. “Tell me who laid its cornerstone when the morning stars … the sons of God shouted for joy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -2209,7 +2209,7 @@ JOB 38 35 na4p figs-rquestion 0 Can you send out … you, ‘Here we are’? Th JOB 38 35 z4cb figs-personification 0 Here we are The lightning bolts are spoken of as servants saying they are ready to follow commands. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JOB 38 36 a9d6 figs-rquestion 0 General Information: Yahweh uses three questions to emphasize to Job that he rules the clouds and rain and Job does not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JOB 38 36 sx1r 0 Connecting Statement: Yahweh continues to challenge Job. -JOB 38 36 h7ay figs-rquestion 0 Who has put wisdom in the clouds or has given understanding to the mists? If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionsas statements. Alternate translation: “I am the one who has put wisdom in the clouds and given understanding to the mists.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +JOB 38 36 h7ay figs-rquestion 0 Who has put wisdom in the clouds or has given understanding to the mists? If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions as statements. Alternate translation: “I am the one who has put wisdom in the clouds and given understanding to the mists.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JOB 38 36 sfx3 0 has put wisdom in the clouds Alternate translation: “has given wisdom to the clouds” JOB 38 37 pv86 figs-rquestion 0 A rhetorical question begins here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JOB 38 37 qju4 figs-rquestion 0 Who can pour out the water skins of the sky If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am the one who can pour out the water skins of the sky.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) diff --git a/en_tn_23-ISA.tsv b/en_tn_23-ISA.tsv index 326a0cd739..cb237d4784 100644 --- a/en_tn_23-ISA.tsv +++ b/en_tn_23-ISA.tsv @@ -2455,7 +2455,7 @@ ISA 44 15 pw7t figs-parallelism 0 he makes an idol and bows down to it This par ISA 44 18 pm8e figs-metaphor 0 for their eyes are blind and cannot see Yahweh speaks of those who cannot understand the foolishness of worshiping idols as if they were blind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ISA 44 18 w7kp figs-synecdoche 0 for their eyes are blind Here “their eyes” represents the whole person. Alternate translation: “for they are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ISA 44 18 eri6 figs-synecdoche 0 their hearts cannot perceive Here the people are represented by their “hearts.” Alternate translation: “they cannot understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ISA 44 19 zz51 figs-rquestion 0 Now should I make … something disgusting to worship? Should I bow down to a block of wood? Yahweh says that these people should be asking themselves these rhetorical questions. The questions anticipate negative answers and emphasize how foolish it would be for a person to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionsas statements. Alternate translation: “I should not now make … something disgusting to worship. I should not bow down to a block of wood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ISA 44 19 zz51 figs-rquestion 0 Now should I make … something disgusting to worship? Should I bow down to a block of wood? Yahweh says that these people should be asking themselves these rhetorical questions. The questions anticipate negative answers and emphasize how foolish it would be for a person to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions as statements. Alternate translation: “I should not now make … something disgusting to worship. I should not bow down to a block of wood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ISA 44 20 w2em figs-metaphor 0 It is as if he were eating ashes Yahweh speaks of a person worshiping an idol as if that person were eating the burned ashes of the wood from which he made the idol. Just as eating ashes does not benefit a person, neither does worshiping an idol. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ISA 44 20 lnq9 figs-metonymy 0 his deceived heart misleads him The heart represents the inner person. Alternate translation: “he misleads himself because he is deceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ISA 44 20 e7xc 0 He cannot rescue himself Alternate translation: “The person who worships idols cannot save himself” diff --git a/en_tn_24-JER.tsv b/en_tn_24-JER.tsv index f93f6bb339..ce83b1082b 100644 --- a/en_tn_24-JER.tsv +++ b/en_tn_24-JER.tsv @@ -2065,7 +2065,7 @@ JER 31 18 s9qf figs-simile 0 I have been punished like an untrained calf When p JER 31 18 pay9 0 punished Another possible meaning is “disciplined.” JER 31 19 ip4s figs-idiom 0 I slapped my thigh in grief. If people use a different phrase or action in your language to show that they are very sad, you may want to use it here. Alternate translation: “I rubbed my brow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) JER 31 19 p5xj figs-doublet 0 I was ashamed and humiliated The words “ashamed” and “humiliated” mean basically the same thing and intensify the idea of shame. Alternate translation: “I was completely ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JER 31 20 lm82 figs-rquestion 0 Is not Ephraim my precious child? Is he not my dear, delightful son? Yahweh is speaking tenderly, trying to comfort the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionsas statements. Alternate translation: “Ephraim is my precious child. He is my dear, delightful son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +JER 31 20 lm82 figs-rquestion 0 Is not Ephraim my precious child? Is he not my dear, delightful son? Yahweh is speaking tenderly, trying to comfort the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions as statements. Alternate translation: “Ephraim is my precious child. He is my dear, delightful son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JER 31 20 y1a8 figs-123person 0 this is Yahweh’s declaration Yahweh speaks of himself by name to express the certainty of what he is declaring. See how you translated this in [Jeremiah 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “this is what Yahweh has declared” or “this is what I, Yahweh, have declared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JER 31 21 t8m8 figs-pronouns 0 Place road signs for yourself … Set up guideposts for yourself … Set your mind … you should take … Come back These commands and instances of “yourself” and “your” and “you” are addressed to “virgin Israel” and so are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]]) JER 31 21 kbs3 figs-metaphor 0 Come back, virgin Israel! God is referring to a changed Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_33-MIC.tsv b/en_tn_33-MIC.tsv index 6283a041ba..34791a5213 100644 --- a/en_tn_33-MIC.tsv +++ b/en_tn_33-MIC.tsv @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ MIC 4 8 p2dj figs-metaphor 0 daughter of Zion … daughter of Jerusalem The peo MIC 4 8 tc2d 0 hill Some modern versions understand this Hebrew word to mean “fortress” or “stronghold” here. MIC 4 8 ccs1 figs-abstractnouns 0 to you it will come, your former dominion If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **dominion**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “you will rule over the nations as you did before” or “I will make you rule over the nations as you did before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MIC 4 9 g6px figs-rquestion 0 Now, why do you shout so loudly? Micah is mocking the people, trying to make them think about why God is dealing with them in this way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look at how you are shouting loudly.” or “Think carefully about why you are shouting loudly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MIC 4 9 b1zk figs-rquestion 0 Is there no king among you? Has your counselor died? Is this why pain grips you like that of a woman in labor? Micah continues to mock the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionsas statements. Alternate translation: “You have a king, but he is useless to you. All your wise people are still alive, but they have nothing wise to say to you. This is why you are weeping loudly like a woman who is giving birth to a baby.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MIC 4 9 b1zk figs-rquestion 0 Is there no king among you? Has your counselor died? Is this why pain grips you like that of a woman in labor? Micah continues to mock the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions as statements. Alternate translation: “You have a king, but he is useless to you. All your wise people are still alive, but they have nothing wise to say to you. This is why you are weeping loudly like a woman who is giving birth to a baby.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MIC 4 10 qn9l figs-simile 0 Be in pain … like a woman in labor Micah compares the suffering the people will experience when enemies force them away from their cities to the pain a woman experiences when giving birth to a baby. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MIC 4 10 rci7 figs-activepassive 0 There you will be rescued. There Yahweh will rescue you Yahweh says the same thing in both active and passive forms to emphasize that he will do what he has said he will do. This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “There Yahweh will rescue you. There he will rescue you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MIC 4 10 nv5c figs-metonymy 0 the hand of your enemies Here, the word **hand** could mean: (1) it could be a metonym for the power that the hand exercises, Alternate translation: “the power of your enemies” or (2) it could be a synecdoche for the person. Alternate translation: “your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From dce823e15e00a6a190504616f425f92efa12233f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 22:12:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 266/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 027e9d6bfc..6e5e494c3d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3208,8 +3208,8 @@ ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου τινός 1 Tertullus The word ACT 24 1 a541 figs-idiom κατέβη 1 came down Luke says that these men **came down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring to traveling downward in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 24 2 a542 figs-activepassive κληθέντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had been summoned If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 24 2 a543 writing-pronouns κατηγορεῖν 1 to accuse him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive τυγχάνοντες 1 we are obtaining By **we**, Tertullus himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 24 2 qw1r writing-pronouns σοῦ…σῆς 1 you…your Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix…your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive τυγχάνοντες 1 we are obtaining By **we**, Tertullus means himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 24 2 qw1r writing-pronouns σοῦ…σῆς 1 you…your Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 24 2 a544 figs-explicit τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 for this people Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by **this people**, he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 24 3 a545 figs-hyperbole πάντῃ…πανταχοῦ…πάσης 1 every way…everywhere…all Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 24 3 q3fj writing-politeness κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Your Excellency, Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) From 555e2d879ba511c460b28a222e24b35084e41def Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 22:36:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 267/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6e5e494c3d..8d61806300 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3210,7 +3210,7 @@ ACT 24 2 a542 figs-activepassive κληθέντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had ACT 24 2 a543 writing-pronouns κατηγορεῖν 1 to accuse him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive τυγχάνοντες 1 we are obtaining By **we**, Tertullus means himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 24 2 qw1r writing-pronouns σοῦ…σῆς 1 you…your Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 24 2 a544 figs-explicit τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 for this people Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by **this people**, he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 24 2 a544 figs-explicit τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 for this people Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by **this people** he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 24 3 a545 figs-hyperbole πάντῃ…πανταχοῦ…πάσης 1 every way…everywhere…all Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 24 3 q3fj writing-politeness κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Your Excellency, Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 24 3 r5jl figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 with all thankfulness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **thankfulness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -3220,7 +3220,7 @@ ACT 24 5 i1qs figs-metaphor λοιμὸν 1 a pest Tertullus is speaking as if P ACT 24 5 k1v1 figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 among all the Jews are throughout the world Tertullus says this as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain this overstatement in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 24 5 zg4a translate-names τῶν Ναζωραίων 1 the Nazarenes In this context, the word **Nazarenes** is a name that people used at this time to describe believers in Jesus. Jesus himself was known as a Nazarene because he came from the town of Nazareth. See how you translated the same word in [2:22](../02/22.md), where it has that meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 6 a547 figs-ellipsis ὃν καὶ ἐκρατήσαμεν 1 whom also we arrested— Tertullus is making the case that Paul is a criminal, but he is leaving it up to Felix to decide what Paul’s punishment should be, so he is deliberately breaking off this sentence here. If this might be unclear to your readers, you could indicate his meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “whom we also arrested, and who deserves to be punished, but we will leave it to you to decide his punishment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 24 6 a548 translate-textvariants 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of vers 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT 24 6 a548 translate-textvariants 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of verse 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 24 8 a549 writing-pronouns παρ’ οὗ 1 from whom The pronoun **whom** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “From him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 24 9 rq5f figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who had come to Caesarea to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 24 11 a550 figs-litotes οὐ πλείους εἰσίν μοι ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς 1 it is not more than 12 days for me from when Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it was only 12 days ago that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From c15b2a893359d8b20082ebbb9b961b494483916c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2022 22:57:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 268/269] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8d61806300..c951782307 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -3232,13 +3232,13 @@ ACT 24 15 nv5a writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 these The pronoun **these** refers ACT 24 15 qza8 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and the unrighteous If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that God will make both the righteous and the unrighteous alive again after they have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 24 15 x1yd figs-nominaladj δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 of both the righteous and the unrighteous Paul is using the adjectives **righteous** and **unrighteous** as nouns to mean different groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of both people who have done what is right and people who have not done what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 24 16 a553 writing-pronouns ἐν τούτῳ 1 in this The pronoun **this** refers to what Paul has just said in verses 14 and 15 about what he believes. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Because I believe these things,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 24 16 va3b figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 before God and men Paul is using this phrase to refer to the opinion or judgment of God and men by association with the way that they would assess anything that came to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of God and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 24 16 va3b figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 before God and men Paul is using this phrase to refer to the opinion or judgment of God and men by association with the way that they would assess anything that came to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 24 16 a554 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 24 17 p92m writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 24 17 lrs4 figs-go παρεγενόμην 1 I came In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 24 17 ryk6 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου 1 to my nation Paul is actually referring to the place where the people of the Jewish **nation** live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where my Jewish people live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 24 17 a555 figs-explicit ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων…καὶ προσφοράς 1 bringing alms and offerings By **alms**, Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By **offerings**, he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 24 18 a556 writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 in which The pronoun **which** refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 24 17 a555 figs-explicit ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων…καὶ προσφοράς 1 bringing alms and offerings By **alms** Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By **offerings** he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 24 18 a556 writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 in which The pronoun **which** refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, ending verse 17 with a period. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 24 19 a557 figs-ellipsis τινὲς…ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς ἔδει…παρεῖναι 1 certain Jews from Asia—who ought to be present As Paul defends himself by telling what happened in Jerusalem, he suddenly realizes that his actual accusers are not present. So he breaks off his sentence to bring this fact to the attention of Governor Felix. If this might be unclear to your readers, in your translation you could finish this part of the story and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews from Asia saw me in Jerusalem with a Gentile and they thought that I had brought him into the temple. Now they ought to be present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 24 20 a558 figs-imperative3p αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν 1 let these themselves say If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may these themselves say” or “these themselves should say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 24 20 ag5d writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ οὗτοι 1 these themselves These pronouns refer to the Jewish leaders who have come to Caesarea to accuse Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jewish leaders who have come here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 38c421cc0b244a598dda5b943f48254c8d224b45 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Tue, 1 Nov 2022 09:59:44 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 269/269] Fix format of Acts --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c951782307..bd44b55a9f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2899,7 +2899,7 @@ ACT 20 37 sze4 translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were ACT 20 38 npay figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 38 m0wr figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he had spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nActs 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.\n\nThe last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “They are all determined to keep the law”\n\nThe Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.\n\n### Nazarite vow\n\nThe vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).\n\n### Gentiles in the temple\n\nThe Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. +ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν 1 we…we came As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 1 a428 figs-activepassive ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 having been parted from them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 1 e5y6 translate-names Κῶ 1 Cos The word **Cos** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2914,7 +2914,7 @@ ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **finished**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **everyone** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐμείναμεν 1 we…we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2978,14 +2978,14 @@ ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 the strangled God did not allow t ACT 21 26 cr14 figs-explicit τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 the men Luke implicitly means the four **men** who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 a453 figs-explicit ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 s8z9 figs-activepassive ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having participated in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 21 26 xu9r figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερόν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 26 xu9r figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερόν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 26 a454 figs-possession διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 declaring the fulfillment of the days of purification Luke is using the possessive form **the days of purification** to mean the days during which the men’s vows were in effect, at the end of which there needed to be a **purification** ceremony. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 21 26 a455 figs-abstractnouns διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 announcing the fulfillment of the days of purification If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **purification**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 21 26 pvy3 figs-explicit τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 of the days of purification In this case Luke is referring implicitly to a separate **purification** process from the one the men fulfilled in order to enter the temple area. He means the purification process that came at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of the days of purification at the end of their vows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 gc23 figs-activepassive ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ἡ προσφορά 1 until the offering was offered for each one of them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until each one of them offered an offering for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 27 j9zm figs-explicit αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι 1 the seven days Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he means the **seven days** that were customarily required for the offerings and purification ceremony at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the seven days that it took to purify these men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 a456 figs-explicit οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews from Asia Luke implicitly means some **Jews from Asia** who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival, as described in [20:16](../20/16.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 21 27 k4l1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 27 k4l1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 27 a457 figs-hyperbole συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 were agitating the whole crowd Luke says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making many people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 27 a458 figs-explicit τὸν ὄχλον 1 the whole crowd By the **crowd**, Luke implicitly means the crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem from all over the Roman Empire for the Pentecost festival. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 27 mks6 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid their hands on him The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest or detain someone, by association with the way that arresting officers or concerned citizens might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they held onto him” or “they detained him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2993,13 +2993,13 @@ ACT 21 28 a459 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israeli ACT 21 28 a460 figs-hyperbole πάντας πανταχῇ 1 all everywhere The Jews from Asia are saying **all** and **everywhere** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 28 sfg3 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου 1 the people and the law and this place The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that they are referring to the special status of the people of Israel as God’s chosen people, the law of Moses, and the temple in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and the law of Moses and this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 28 jc9q figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem **temple** and that they are accusing Paul of bringing **Greeks** into those areas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “into areas of the temple courtyard where they are not allowed to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 21 28 a461 figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερὸν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 28 a461 figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερὸν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 1 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid {their} hands on him, shouting, “Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 21 29 h1uu translate-names Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 30 a462 figs-activepassive ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 21 30 a463 figs-metonymy ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 outside of the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 30 a463 figs-metonymy ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 outside of the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 30 mmaa figs-activepassive ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 30 xd6r figs-explicit ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut The implication is that the gatekeepers **shut** the **doors** to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 31 a464 writing-pronouns ζητούντων τε αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι 1 And as they were seeking to kill him The pronoun **they** refers to the mob, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as the mob was seeking to kill Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -3032,7 +3032,7 @@ ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 ACT 21 39 a139 figs-imperative ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase **I ask of you** shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 21 40 qp2q writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had allowed The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 21 40 rk1y translate-symaction κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “In the Hebrew language”\n\nMost Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.\n\n### “The Way”\n\nNo one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen. +ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “In the Hebrew language”

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen. ACT 22 1 lrs0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 22 1 xe46 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is using the word **fathers** to refer either to Jewish leaders who may be present or to Jewish men who are older than he is. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” or “My fellow Israelites young and old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 1 pe8t figs-imperative ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 hear to my defense to you now This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen as I explain myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -3127,7 +3127,7 @@ ACT 22 28 rly1 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ…καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I in ACT 22 29 a509 figs-explicit ἐφοβήθη 1 was afraid The implication is that the commander **was afraid** that the higher Roman authorities would punish him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 22 30 a510 figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 the certain Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 22 30 kx58 figs-explicit ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 he released him This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection of the dead\n\nThe Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])\n\n### “Called a curse”\n\nSome Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Whitewash\n\nThis is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### “Called a curse”

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 23 1 lrs1 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 23 1 lrs5 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 23 1 nn2q figs-hyperbole πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ 1 in all good conscience Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -3201,7 +3201,7 @@ ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν…αὐτῷ 1 they return ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 having asked what province he was from It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nPaul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Respect\n\nBoth the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Governmental leaders\n\nThe words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Respect

Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Governmental leaders

The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 24 1 a540 writing-participants ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός 1 a certain orator, Tertullus Luke is using the phrase **a certain orator** to introduce **Tertullus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 24 1 f3vx translate-unknown ῥήτορος 1 an orator In this context, the term **orator** means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου τινός 1 Tertullus The word **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])